GNU Emacs Manual

GNU Emacs Manual

Seventeenth Edition, Updated for Emacs Version 24.2.

Richard Stallman et al.

This is the Seventeenth edition of the GNU Emacs Manual, updated for Emacs version 24.2. Copyright c 1985-1987, 1993-2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being The GNU Manifesto, Distribution and GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, with the Front-Cover texts being A GNU Manual, and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License. (a) The FSFs Back-Cover Text is: You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.

Published by the Free Software Foundation 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA ISBN 978-0-9831592-4-7

Cover art by Etienne Suvasa; cover design by Matt Lee.

Did Amazon sell you this book?

Either way, thank you for buying this title from GNU Press. GNU Press is the publishing outt of the Free Software Foundation, a nonprot organization in Boston, Massachusetts. While we appreciate your purchase, we hope that in the future you will buy directly from us at http://shop.fsf.org. We list our books on Amazon so more people can nd them, but selling books on Amazon is something we would rather not do, because: Amazon is bad for small publishers. Amazon requires that we sell them our books at a 55% discountand pay for their shipping. The standard bookstore pays for its own shipping and only asks for a 40% discount. Amazon cuts better deals with larger publishers, and nances those deals by forcing steep discounts from smaller publishers. Amazon is pushing digital restrictions management (DRM) on ebooks, which is bad for everyone who reads books. Using this DRM, Amazon can control how people read, and can even delete readers books (as they did with copies of 1984). For more information about the dangers of DRM, please see "The Right to Read" and "The Danger of E-books" by Richard Stallman at http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/right-to-read.html and http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/the-danger-of-ebooks.html, and the website http://www.defectivebydesign.org/amazon-kindle-swindle. Digital versions of GNU books can downloaded from http://www.gnu.org and http://shop.fsf.org. All GNU Press books are distributed without DRM. Thank you again for your purchase. Please support us and other small publishers by not buying paper or electronic books from Amazon in the future.

Short Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 The Organization of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2 Characters, Keys and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3 Entering and Exiting Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 4 Basic Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 5 The Minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 6 Running Commands by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 7 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 8 The Mark and the Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 9 Killing and Moving Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 10 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 11 Controlling the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 12 Searching and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 13 Commands for Fixing Typos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 14 Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 15 File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 16 Using Multiple Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 17 Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 18 Frames and Graphical Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 19 International Character Set Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 20 Major and Minor Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 21 Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 22 Commands for Human Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 23 Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 24 Compiling and Testing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 25 Maintaining Large Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 26 Abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 27 Dired, the Directory Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 28 The Calendar and the Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

ii 29 Sending Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reading Mail with Rmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Emacs Lisp Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Dealing with Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . D X Options and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E Emacs 23 Antinews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The GNU Manifesto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key (Character) Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command and Function Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concept Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 376 397 430 434 468 484 496 505 521 529 531 535 546 555 580 590 604 612

iii

Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 The Organization of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 The Echo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 The Mode Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Characters, Keys and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.1 2.2 2.3 Kinds of User Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Keys and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Entering and Exiting Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.1 3.2 Entering Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Exiting Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Basic Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 Inserting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undoing Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blank Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Position Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeating a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 18 20 21 22 22 22 23 23 25 26

iv

The Minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.1 5.2 5.3 Minibuers for File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing in the Minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Completion Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Completion Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Completion Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 How Completion Alternatives Are Chosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Completion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Minibuer History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Repeating Minibuer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Entering passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

6 7

Running Commands by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Documentation for a Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help by Command or Variable Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apropos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyword Search for Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help for International Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Help Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help on Active Text and Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 40 41 43 43 44 44 45 46

The Mark and the Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 Setting the Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands to Mark Textual Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating on the Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Mark Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Global Mark Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling Transient Mark Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 49 50 51 51 52 52

Killing and Moving Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

9.1 Deletion and Killing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2 Killing by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3 Other Kill Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.4 Options for Killing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Yanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 The Kill Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Yanking Earlier Kills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Appending Kills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Cut and Paste Operations on Graphical Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 Using the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.2 Cut and Paste with Other Window Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.3 Secondary Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Accumulating Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 CUA Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 54 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 61 61 63 64

10

Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 Saving Positions in Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Text in Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Rectangles in Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Window Congurations in Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keeping Numbers in Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keeping File Names in Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 66 67 67 68 68 68

11

Controlling the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 11.12 11.13 11.14 11.15 11.16 11.17 Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recentering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Follow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors for Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Lock mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interactive Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Fringes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Useless Whitespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 71 72 73 74 75 75 75 76 77 79 80 81 83 83 84 85

vi 11.18 11.19 11.20 11.21 11.22 11.23 Optional Mode Line Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Text Is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customization of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 87 88 89 89 90

12

Searching and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

12.1 Incremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 12.1.1 Basics of Incremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 12.1.2 Repeating Incremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 12.1.3 Errors in Incremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 12.1.4 Special Input for Incremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 12.1.5 Isearch Yanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 12.1.6 Scrolling During Incremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 12.1.7 Searching the Minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 12.2 Nonincremental Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 12.3 Word Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 12.4 Regular Expression Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 12.5 Syntax of Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 12.6 Backslash in Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 12.7 Regular Expression Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 12.8 Searching and Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 12.9 Replacement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 12.9.1 Unconditional Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 12.9.2 Regexp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 12.9.3 Replace Commands and Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 12.9.4 Query Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 12.10 Other Search-and-Loop Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

13

Commands for Fixing Typos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transposing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Correcting Spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 111 112 112

14

Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 Basic Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Keyboard Macro Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Keyboard Macro Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing Macros with Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming and Saving Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Keyboard Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stepwise Editing a Keyboard Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 118 118 120 121 122 122

vii

15

File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

15.1 File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Visiting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Commands for Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.1 Single or Numbered Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.2 Automatic Deletion of Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2.3 Copying vs. Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Customizing Saving of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.4 Protection against Simultaneous Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.5 Shadowing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.6 Updating Time Stamps Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Reverting a Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Auto-Saving: Protection Against Disasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.1 Auto-Save Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.2 Controlling Auto-Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.3 Recovering Data from Auto-Saves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6 File Name Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7 File Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8 Comparing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9 Di Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 Miscellaneous File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11 Accessing Compressed Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.12 File Archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13 Remote Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.14 Quoted File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.15 File Name Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.16 Convenience Features for Finding Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.17 Filesets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 125 128 128 130 130 131 132 132 133 134 135 135 136 136 137 137 138 139 140 141 143 144 144 145 146 147 148 148

16

Using Multiple Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

16.1 Creating and Selecting Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 Listing Existing Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 Miscellaneous Buer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 Killing Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 Operating on Several Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 Indirect Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7 Convenience Features and Customization of Buer Handling . . . . . . . 16.7.1 Making Buer Names Unique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7.2 Switching Between Buers using Substrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7.3 Customizing Buer Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 152 152 153 154 156 157 157 158 158

viii

17

Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

17.1 Concepts of Emacs Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Splitting Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Using Other Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Displaying in Another Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 Deleting and Rearranging Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 Displaying a Buer in a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.1 How display-buffer works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7 Convenience Features for Window Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 159 160 161 162 163 163 164

18

Frames and Graphical Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 18.11 18.12 18.13 18.14 18.15 18.16 18.17 18.18 18.19 18.20 Mouse Commands for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Commands for Words and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Following References with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Clicks for Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Line Mouse Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedbar Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag and Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Window Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Mouse in Text Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 167 167 168 169 169 170 171 174 175 175 176 176 176 177 177 178 178 179 179

19

International Character Set Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8 19.9 19.10 19.11 19.12 Introduction to International Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling Multibyte Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recognizing Coding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Files Coding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing Coding Systems for Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Coding System for File Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding Systems for Interprocess Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding Systems for File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 182 183 185 186 188 190 192 192 193 194 195

ix 19.13 19.14 19.15 19.16 19.17 19.18 19.19 19.20 Coding Systems for Terminal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fontsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dening fontsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fontsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undisplayable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unibyte Editing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bidirectional Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 197 198 199 200 200 202 202

20

Major and Minor Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

20.1 20.2 20.3 Major Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Minor Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Choosing File Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

21

Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 Indentation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabs vs. Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience Features for Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 211 212 212

22

Commands for Human Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

22.1 Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2 Sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3 Paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4 Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 Filling Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5.1 Auto Fill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5.2 Explicit Fill Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5.3 The Fill Prex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5.4 Adaptive Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6 Case Conversion Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7 Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.8 Outline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.8.1 Format of Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.8.2 Outline Motion Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.8.3 Outline Visibility Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.8.4 Viewing One Outline in Multiple Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.8.5 Folding Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.9 Org Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.9.1 Org as an organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.9.2 Org as an authoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.10 TEX Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.10.1 TEX Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.10.2 LaTEX Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.10.3 TEX Printing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 215 216 217 218 218 219 220 222 223 223 224 225 226 226 228 228 229 230 230 231 232 233 233

x 22.10.4 TEX Mode Miscellany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.11 SGML and HTML Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.12 Nro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13 Enriched Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.1 Enriched Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.2 Hard and Soft Newlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.3 Editing Format Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.4 Faces in Enriched Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.5 Indentation in Enriched Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.6 Justication in Enriched Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.13.7 Setting Other Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14 Editing Text-based Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.1 What is a Text-based Table? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.2 Creating a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.3 Table Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.4 Commands for Table Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.5 Cell Justication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.6 Table Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.7 Converting Between Plain Text and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.14.8 Table Miscellany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.15 Two-Column Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 236 237 237 238 238 239 239 240 241 241 241 242 243 243 244 244 245 245 246 247

23

Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

23.1 Major Modes for Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2 Top-Level Denitions, or Defuns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.1 Left Margin Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.2 Moving by Defuns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.3 Imenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.4 Which Function Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3 Indentation for Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.1 Basic Program Indentation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.2 Indenting Several Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.3 Customizing Lisp Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.4 Commands for C Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3.5 Customizing C Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4 Commands for Editing with Parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.1 Expressions with Balanced Parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.2 Moving in the Parenthesis Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.3 Matching Parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5 Manipulating Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5.1 Comment Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5.2 Multiple Lines of Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5.3 Options Controlling Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6 Documentation Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6.1 Info Documentation Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6.2 Man Page Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 250 250 251 251 252 252 252 253 254 254 255 256 256 257 258 258 259 260 261 261 262 262

xi 23.6.3 Emacs Lisp Documentation Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.7 Hideshow minor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8 Completion for Symbol Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9 Glasses minor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.10 Semantic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.11 Other Features Useful for Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12 C and Related Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12.1 C Mode Motion Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12.2 Electric C Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12.3 Hungry Delete Feature in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12.4 Other Commands for C Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.13 Asm Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 263 264 264 265 265 266 266 267 267 268 270

24

Compiling and Testing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

24.1 Running Compilations under Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 Compilation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3 Subshells for Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4 Searching with Grep under Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5 Finding Syntax Errors On The Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6 Running Debuggers Under Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.1 Starting GUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.2 Debugger Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.3 Commands of GUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.4 GUD Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5 GDB Graphical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.1 GDB User Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.2 Source Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.3 Breakpoints Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.4 Threads Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.5 Stack Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.6 Other GDB Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.7 Watch Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.5.8 Multithreaded Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.7 Executing Lisp Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8 Libraries of Lisp Code for Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.9 Evaluating Emacs Lisp Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.10 Lisp Interaction Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.11 Running an External Lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 272 274 275 276 276 276 277 278 280 281 281 282 282 283 284 284 285 286 287 287 288 290 290

xii

25

Maintaining Large Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

25.1 Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1 Introduction to Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.1 Understanding the problems it addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.2 Supported Version Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.3 Concepts of Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.4 Merge-based vs lock-based Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.5 Changeset-based vs File-based Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.6 Decentralized vs Centralized Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1.7 Types of Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.2 Version Control and the Mode Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3 Basic Editing under Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3.1 Basic Version Control with Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3.2 Basic Version Control with Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3.3 Advanced Control in C-x v v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.4 Features of the Log Entry Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.5 Registering a File for Version Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.6 Examining And Comparing Old Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.7 VC Change Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.8 Undoing Version Control Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.9 VC Directory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.9.1 The VC Directory Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.9.2 VC Directory Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.10 Version Control Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.10.1 Switching between Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.10.2 Pulling Changes into a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.10.3 Merging Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.10.4 Creating New Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2 Change Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.1 Change Log Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.2 Format of ChangeLog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3 Tags Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.1 Source File Tag Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.2 Creating Tags Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.3 Etags Regexps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.4 Selecting a Tags Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.5 Finding a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.6 Searching and Replacing with Tags Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3.7 Tags Table Inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4 Emacs Development Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 292 292 293 293 294 295 295 295 296 296 297 298 298 299 300 300 302 304 304 305 305 307 307 308 308 309 309 310 310 311 312 314 315 317 317 318 319 320

xiii

26

Abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 Abbrev Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dening Abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Abbrev Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examining and Editing Abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Abbrev Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Dynamic Abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 322 323 324 325 326 327

27

Dired, the Directory Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 27.7 27.8 27.9 27.10 27.11 27.12 27.13 27.14 27.15 27.16 27.17 27.18 Entering Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation in the Dired Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Files with Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flagging Many Files at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting Files in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dired Marks vs. Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating on Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Commands in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforming File Names in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Comparison with Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subdirectories in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Over Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Dired Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dired and find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Dired Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Image Thumbnails in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Dired Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 330 330 331 332 333 335 337 338 339 339 340 340 341 342 343 343 344

28

The Calendar and the Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

28.1 Movement in the Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.1 Motion by Standard Lengths of Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.2 Beginning or End of Week, Month or Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.3 Specied Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2 Scrolling in the Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3 Counting Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4 Miscellaneous Calendar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.5 Writing Calendar Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6 Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.7 Times of Sunrise and Sunset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.8 Phases of the Moon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9 Conversion To and From Other Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.1 Supported Calendar Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.2 Converting To Other Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.3 Converting From Other Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 346 347 347 348 348 349 349 351 352 353 353 354 355 356

xiv 28.9.4 Converting from the Mayan Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10 The Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.1 Displaying the Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.2 The Diary File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.3 Date Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.4 Commands to Add to the Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.5 Special Diary Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.11 Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.12 Importing and Exporting Diary Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.13 Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.14 Summing Time Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 358 359 360 360 361 362 364 364 365 366

29

Sending Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

29.1 The Format of the Mail Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2 Mail Header Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.3 Mail Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4 Mail Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4.1 Mail Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4.2 Mail Header Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4.3 Citing Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4.4 Mail Miscellany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.5 Mail Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.6 Mail Amusements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.7 Mail-Composition Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 368 370 370 370 372 373 373 374 374 375

30

Reading Mail with Rmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

30.1 Basic Concepts of Rmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2 Scrolling Within a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3 Moving Among Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4 Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5 Rmail Files and Inboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6 Multiple Rmail Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7 Copying Messages Out to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.8 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.9 Rmail Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.10 Sending Replies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.11 Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.11.1 Making Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.11.2 Editing in Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.12 Sorting the Rmail File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.13 Display of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.14 Rmail and Coding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.15 Editing Within a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.16 Digest Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.17 Reading Rot13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 376 377 378 379 380 381 383 384 385 386 387 388 390 391 392 392 393 393

xv 30.18 movemail program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 30.19 Retrieving Mail from Remote Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 30.20 Retrieving Mail from Local Mailboxes in Various Formats . . . . . . . . . 396

31

Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

31.1 Gnus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1.1 Gnus Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1.2 When Gnus Starts Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1.3 Using the Gnus Group Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1.4 Using the Gnus Summary Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 Document Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.1 DocView Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.2 DocView Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.3 DocView Slicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.4 DocView Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 Running Shell Commands from Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.1 Single Shell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.2 Interactive Subshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.3 Shell Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.4 Shell Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.5 Shell Command History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.5.1 Shell History Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.5.2 Shell History Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.5.3 Shell History References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.6 Directory Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.7 Shell Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.8 Emacs Terminal Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.9 Term Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.10 Remote Host Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3.11 Serial Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 Using Emacs as a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4.1 Invoking emacsclient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4.2 emacsclient Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5 Printing Hard Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5.1 PostScript Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5.2 Variables for PostScript Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5.3 Printing Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.6 Sorting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.7 Editing Binary Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.8 Saving Emacs Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.9 Recursive Editing Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.10 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.11 Hyperlinking and Navigation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.11.1 Following URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.11.2 Activating URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.11.3 Finding Files and URLs at Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 397 397 398 399 399 400 400 400 401 401 402 403 403 406 407 407 408 408 409 409 410 411 411 412 412 413 414 417 418 419 420 420 422 423 424 425 426 426 426 427

xvi 31.12 Other Amusements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

32

Emacs Lisp Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

32.1 32.2 32.3 The Package Menu Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Package Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Package Files and Directory Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

33

Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
33.1 Easy Customization Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.1 Customization Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.2 Browsing and Searching for Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.3 Changing a Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.4 Saving Customizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.5 Customizing Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.6 Customizing Specic Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.7 Custom Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.8 Creating Custom Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.1 Examining and Setting Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.2 Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.3 Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.4 Local Variables in Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.4.1 Specifying File Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.4.2 Safety of File Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.5 Per-Directory Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3 Customizing Key Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.1 Keymaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.2 Prex Keymaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.3 Local Keymaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.4 Minibuer Keymaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.5 Changing Key Bindings Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.6 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.7 Modier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.8 Rebinding Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.9 Named ASCII Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.10 Rebinding Mouse Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.11 Disabling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4 The Emacs Initialization File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4.1 Init File Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4.2 Init File Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4.3 Terminal-specic Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4.4 How Emacs Finds Your Init File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4.5 Non-ASCII Characters in Init Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 434 435 436 438 439 440 441 442 443 443 445 446 447 447 449 450 452 452 453 453 454 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 465 466 466

xvii

34

Dealing with Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

34.1 Quitting and Aborting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2 Dealing with Emacs Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 If DEL Fails to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 Recursive Editing Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.3 Garbage on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.4 Garbage in the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.5 Running out of Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.6 Recovery After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.7 Emergency Escape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3 Reporting Bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.1 Reading Existing Bug Reports and Known Problems . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.2 When Is There a Bug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.3 Understanding Bug Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.4 Checklist for Bug Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.5 Sending Patches for GNU Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.4 Contributing to Emacs Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.5 How To Get Help with GNU Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 469 470 470 470 471 471 471 472 473 473 474 475 475 481 483 483

Appendix A Appendix B

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE . . . . 484 GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . 496

Appendix C Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 Action Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Argument Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.4.1 General Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.4.2 Miscellaneous Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.4.3 The MS-Windows System Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.5 Specifying the Display Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.6 Font Specication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.7 Window Color Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.8 Options for Window Size and Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.9 Internal and External Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.10 Frame Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.11 Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.12 Other Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 507 509 509 510 513 514 514 515 515 517 518 519 519 519

xviii

Appendix D

X Options and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

521 522 523 524 525 525 526

D.1 X Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.2 Table of X Resources for Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3 GTK resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.1 GTK Resource Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.2 GTK widget names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.3 GTK Widget Names in Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.4 GTK styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix E Appendix F
F.1

Emacs 23 Antinews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep . . . . . . . . . . . 531

531 531 532 532 532 532 534

Basic Emacs usage under Mac OS and GNUstep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.1.1 Grabbing environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.2 Mac / GNUstep Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.2.1 Font and Color Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.2.2 Customization options specic to Mac OS / GNUstep . . . . . . . . . . F.3 Windowing System Events under Mac OS / GNUstep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.4 GNUstep Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

G.1 G.2 G.3 G.4 G.5 G.6 G.7 G.8 G.9 G.10 G.11 How to Start Emacs on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Files and Binary Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Names on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emulation of ls on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOME and Startup Directories on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Usage on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Usage on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subprocesses on Windows 9X/ME and Windows NT/2K/XP . . . . . . . Printing and MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Fonts on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Windows-specic features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 536 538 538 538 539 540 540 541 543 545

The GNU Manifesto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Whats GNU? Gnus Not Unix! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why I Must Write GNU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why GNU Will Be Compatible with Unix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How GNU Will Be Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Many Other Programmers Want to Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How You Can Contribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why All Computer Users Will Benet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Some Easily Rebutted Objections to GNUs Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 547 547 547 547 548 548 549

xix

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Key (Character) Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Command and Function Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Variable Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Concept Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Preface

Preface
This manual documents the use and simple customization of the Emacs editor. Simple Emacs customizations do not require you to be a programmer, but if you are not interested in customizing, you can ignore the customization hints. This is primarily a reference manual, but can also be used as a primer. If you are new to Emacs, we recommend you start with the integrated, learn-by-doing tutorial, before reading the manual. To run the tutorial, start Emacs and type C-h t. The tutorial describes commands, tells you when to try them, and explains the results. The tutorial is available in several languages. On rst reading, just skim chapters 1 and 2, which describe the notational conventions of the manual and the general appearance of the Emacs display screen. Note which questions are answered in these chapters, so you can refer back later. After reading chapter 4, you should practice the commands shown there. The next few chapters describe fundamental techniques and concepts that are used constantly. You need to understand them thoroughly, so experiment with them until you are uent. Chapters 14 through 19 describe intermediate-level features that are useful for many kinds of editing. Chapter 20 and following chapters describe optional but useful features; read those chapters when you need them. Read the Common Problems chapter if Emacs does not seem to be working properly. It explains how to cope with several common problems (see Section 34.2 [Dealing with Emacs Trouble], page 469), as well as when and how to report Emacs bugs (see Section 34.3 [Bugs], page 473). To nd the documentation of a particular command, look in the index. Keys (character commands) and command names have separate indexes. There is also a glossary, with a cross reference for each term. This manual is available as a printed book and also as an Info le. The Info le is for reading from Emacs itself, or with the Info program. Info is the principal format for documentation in the GNU system. The Info le and the printed book contain substantially the same text and are generated from the same source les, which are also distributed with GNU Emacs. GNU Emacs is a member of the Emacs editor family. There are many Emacs editors, all sharing common principles of organization. For information on the underlying philosophy of Emacs and the lessons learned from its development, see Emacs, the Extensible, Customizable Self-Documenting Display Editor, available from ftp://publications.ai.mit.edu/ai-publications/pdf/AIM-519A.pdf. This version of the manual is mainly intended for use with GNU Emacs installed on GNU and Unix systems. GNU Emacs can also be used on MS-DOS, Microsoft Windows, and Macintosh systems. The Info le version of this manual contains some more information about using Emacs on those systems. Those systems use dierent le name syntax; in addition MS-DOS does not support all GNU Emacs features. See Appendix G [Microsoft Windows], page 535, for information about using Emacs on Windows. See Appendix F [Mac OS / GNUstep], page 531, for information about using Emacs on Macintosh (and GNUstep).

Distribution

Distribution
GNU Emacs is free software ; this means that everyone is free to use it and free to redistribute it under certain conditions. GNU Emacs is not in the public domain; it is copyrighted and there are restrictions on its distribution, but these restrictions are designed to permit everything that a good cooperating citizen would want to do. What is not allowed is to try to prevent others from further sharing any version of GNU Emacs that they might get from you. The precise conditions are found in the GNU General Public License that comes with Emacs and also appears in this manual1 . See Appendix A [Copying], page 484. One way to get a copy of GNU Emacs is from someone else who has it. You need not ask for our permission to do so, or tell any one else; just copy it. If you have access to the Internet, you can get the latest distribution version of GNU Emacs by anonymous FTP; see http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs on our website for more information. You may also receive GNU Emacs when you buy a computer. Computer manufacturers are free to distribute copies on the same terms that apply to everyone else. These terms require them to give you the full sources, including whatever changes they may have made, and to permit you to redistribute the GNU Emacs received from them under the usual terms of the General Public License. In other words, the program must be free for you when you get it, not just free for the manufacturer. If you nd GNU Emacs useful, please send a donation to the Free Software Foundation to support our work. Donations to the Free Software Foundation are tax deductible in the US. If you use GNU Emacs at your workplace, please suggest that the company make a donation. For more information on how you can help, see http://www.gnu.org/help/help.html. We also sell hardcopy versions of this manual and An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp, by Robert J. Chassell. You can visit our online store at http://shop.fsf.org/. The income from sales goes to support the foundations purpose: the development of new free software, and improvements to our existing programs including GNU Emacs. To contact the FSF, go to http://www.fsf.org/about/contact/, or write to Free Software Foundation 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Acknowledgments
Contributors to GNU Emacs include Jari Aalto, Per Abrahamsen, Tomas Abrahamsson, Jay K. Adams, Alon Albert, Michael Albinus, Nagy Andras, Benjamin Andresen, Ralf Angeli, Joe Arceneaux, Emil Astr om, Miles Bader, David Bakhash,
1

This manual is itself covered by the GNU Free Documentation License. This license is similar in spirit to the General Public License, but is more suitable for documentation. See Appendix B [GNU Free Documentation License], page 496.

Distribution

Juanma Barranquero, Eli Barzilay, Thomas Baumann, Steven L. Baur, Jay Belanger, Alexander L. Beliko, Thomas Bellman, Scott Bender, Boaz Ben-Zvi, Sergey Berezin, Karl Berry, Anna M. Bigatti, Ray Blaak, Martin Blais, Jim Blandy, Johan Bockg ard, Jan B ocker, Joel Boehland, Lennart Borgman, Per Bothner, Terrence Brannon, Frank Bresz, Peter Breton, Emmanuel Briot, Kevin Broadey, Vincent Broman, Michael Brouwer, David M. Brown, Stefan Bruda, Georges BrunCottan, Joe Buehler, Scott Byer, Wlodek Bzyl, Bill Carpenter, Per Cederqvist, Hans Chalupsky, Chris Chase, Bob Chassell, Andrew Choi, Chong Yidong, Sacha Chua, Stewart Clamen, James Clark, Mike Clarkson, Glynn Clements, Andrew Cohen, Daniel Colascione, Edward OConnor, Christoph Conrad, Ludovic Court` es, Andrew Csillag, Toby Cubitt, Baoqiu Cui, Doug Cutting, Mathias Dahl, Julien Danjou, Satyaki Das, Vivek Dasmohapatra, Dan Davison, Michael DeCorte, Gary Delp, Nachum Dershowitz, Dave Detlefs, Matthieu Devin, Christophe de Dinechin, Eri Ding, Jan Dj arv, Lawrence R. Dodd, Carsten Dominik, Scott Draves, Benjamin Drieu, Viktor Dukhovni, Jacques Duthen, Dmitry Dzhus, John Eaton, Rolf Ebert, Carl Edman, David Edmondson, Paul Eggert, Stephen Eglen, Christian Egli, Torbj orn Einarsson, Tsugutomo Enami, David Engster, Hans Henrik Eriksen, Michael Ernst, Ata Etemadi, Frederick Farnbach, Oscar Figueiredo, Fred Fish, Steve Fisk, Karl Fogel, Gary Foster, Eric S. Fraga, Romain Francoise, Noah Friedman, Andreas Fuchs, Shigeru Fukaya, Hallvard Furuseth, Keith Gabryelski, Peter S. Galbraith, Kevin Gallagher, Kevin Gallo, Juan Le on Lahoz Garc a, Howard Gayle, Daniel German, Stephen Gildea, Julien Gilles, David Gillespie, Bob Glickstein, Deepak Goel, David De La Harpe Golden, Boris Goldowsky, David Goodger, Chris Gray, Kevin Greiner, Michelangelo Grigni, Odd Gripenstam, Kai Grojohann, Michael Gschwind, Bastien Guerry, Henry Guillaume, Doug Gwyn, Bruno Haible, Kenichi Handa, Lars Hansen, Chris Hanson, Jesper Harder, Alexandru Harsanyi, K. Shane Hartman, John Heidemann, Jon K. Hellan, Magnus Henoch, Markus Heritsch, Dirk Herrmann, Karl Heuer, Manabu Higashida, Konrad Hinsen, Anders Holst, Jerey C. Honig, Tassilo Horn, Kurt Hornik, Tom Houlder, Joakim Hove, Denis Howe, Lars Ingebrigtsen, Andrew Innes, Seiichiro Inoue, Philip Jackson, Martyn Jago, Pavel Janik, Paul Jarc, Ulf Jasper, Thorsten Jolitz, Michael K. Johnson, Kyle Jones, Terry Jones, Simon Josefsson, Alexandre Julliard, Arne Jrgensen, Tomoji Kagatani, Brewster Kahle, Tokuya Kameshima, Lute Kamstra, Ivan Kanis, David Kastrup, David Kaufman, Henry Kautz, Taichi Kawabata, Taro Kawagishi, Howard Kaye, Michael Kifer, Richard King, Peter Kleiweg, Karel Kl c, Shuhei Kobayashi, Pavel Kobyakov, Larry K. Kolodney, David M. Koppelman, Koseki Yoshinori, Robert Krawitz, Sebastian Kremer, Ryszard Kubiak, Igor Kuzmin, David K agedal, Daniel LaLiberte, Karl Landstrom, Mario Lang, Aaron Larson, James R. Larus, Vinicius Jose Latorre, Werner Lemberg, Frederic Lepied, Peter Liljenberg, Christian Limpach, Lars Lindberg, Chris Lindblad, Anders Lindgren, Thomas Link, Juri Linkov, Francis Litterio, Sergey Litvinov, Emilio C. Lopes, Martin Lorentzon, Dave Love, Eric Ludlam, K aroly L orentey, Sascha L udecke, Greg McGary, Roland McGrath, Michael McNamara, Alan Mackenzie, Christopher J. Madsen, Neil M. Mager, Ken Manheimer, Bill Mann, Brian Marick, Simon Marshall, Bengt Martensson, Charlie Martin, Yukihiro Matsumoto, David Maus, Thomas May, Will Mengarini, David Megginson, Stefan Merten, Ben A. Mesander, Wayne Mesard,

Distribution

Brad Miller, Lawrence Mitchell, Richard Mlynarik, Gerd Moellmann, Stefan Monnier, Keith Moore, Jan Moringen, Morioka Tomohiko, Glenn Morris, Don Morrison, Diane Murray, Riccardo Murri, Sen Nagata, Erik Naggum, Gergely Nagy, Nobuyoshi Nakada, Thomas Neumann, Mike Newton, Thien-Thi Nguyen, Jurgen Nickelsen, Dan Nicolaescu, Hrvoje Niksic, Je Norden, Andrew Norman, Kentaro Ohkouchi, Christian Ohler, Kenichi Okada, Alexandre Oliva, Bob Olson, Michael Olson, Takaaki Ota, Pieter E. J. Pareit, Ross Patterson, David Pearson, Juan Pechiar, Je Peck, Damon Anton Permezel, Tom Perrine, William M. Perry, Per Persson, Jens Petersen, Daniel Pfeier, Justus Piater, Richard L. Pieri, Fred Pierresteguy, Fran cois Pinard, Daniel Pittman, Christian Plaunt, Alexander Pohoyda, David Ponce, Francesco A. Potorti, Michael D. Prange, Mukesh Prasad, Ken Raeburn, Marko Rahamaa, Ashwin Ram, Eric S. Raymond, Paul Reilly, Edward M. Reingold, David Reitter, Alex Rezinsky, Rob Riepel, Lara Rios, Adrian Robert, Nick Roberts, Roland B. Roberts, John Robinson, Denis B. Roegel, Danny Roozendaal, Sebastian Rose, William Rosenblatt, Markus Rost, Guillermo J. Rozas, Martin Rudalics, Ivar Rummelho, Jason Rumney, Wolfgang Rupprecht, Benjamin Rutt, Kevin Ryde, James B. Salem, Masahiko Sato, Timo Savola, Jorgen Schaefer, Holger Schauer, William Schelter, Ralph Schleicher, Gregor Schmid, Michael Schmidt, Ronald S. Schnell, Philippe Schnoebelen, Jan Schormann, Alex Schroeder, Stefan Schoef, Rainer Schoepf, Raymond Scholz, Eric Schulte, Andreas Schwab, Randal Schwartz, Oliver Seidel, Manuel Serrano, Paul Sexton, Hovav Shacham, Stanislav Shalunov, Marc Shapiro, Richard Sharman, Olin Shivers, Tibor Simko, Espen Skoglund, Rick Sladkey, Lynn Slater, Chris Smith, David Smith, Paul D. Smith, Wilson Snyder, William Sommerfeld, Simon South, Andre Spiegel, Michael Staats, Thomas Steen, Ulf Stegemann, Reiner Steib, Sam Steingold, Ake Stenho, Peter Stephenson, Ken Stevens, Andy Stewart, Jonathan Stigelman, Martin Stjernholm, Kim F. Storm, Steve Strassmann, Christopher Suckling, Olaf Sylvester, Naoto Takahashi, Steven Tamm, Luc Teirlinck, Jean-Philippe Theberge, Jens T. Berger Thielemann, Spencer Thomas, Jim Thompson, Toru Tomabechi, David OToole, Markus Triska, Tom Tromey, Enami Tsugutomo, Eli Tziperman, Daiki Ueno, Masanobu Umeda, Rajesh Vaidheeswarran, Neil W. Van Dyke, Didier Verna, Joakim Verona, Ulrik Vieth, Georey Voelker, Johan Vromans, Inge Wallin, John Paul Wallington, Colin Walters, Barry Warsaw, Christoph Wedler, Ilja Weis, Zhang Weize, Morten Welinder, Joseph Brian Wells, Rodney Whitby, John Wiegley, Sascha Wilde, Ed Wilkinson, Mike Williams, Roland Winkler, Bill Wohler, Steven A. Wood, Dale R. Worley, Francis J. Wright, Felix S. T. Wu, Tom Wurgler, Yamamoto Mitsuharu, Katsumi Yamaoka, Masatake Yamato, Jonathan Yavner, Ryan Yeske, Ilya Zakharevich, Milan Zamazal, Victor Zandy, Eli Zaretskii, Jamie Zawinski, Andrew Zhilin, Shenghuo Zhu, Piotr Zielinski, Ian T. Zimmermann, Reto Zimmermann, Neal Ziring, Teodor Zlatanov, and Detlev Zundel.

Introduction

Introduction
You are reading about GNU Emacs, the GNU incarnation of the advanced, selfdocumenting, customizable, extensible editor Emacs. (The G in GNU is not silent.) We call Emacs advanced because it can do much more than simple insertion and deletion of text. It can control subprocesses, indent programs automatically, show multiple les at once, and more. Emacs editing commands operate in terms of characters, words, lines, sentences, paragraphs, and pages, as well as expressions and comments in various programming languages. Self-documenting means that at any time you can use special commands, known as help commands, to nd out what your options are, or to nd out what any command does, or to nd all the commands that pertain to a given topic. See Chapter 7 [Help], page 38. Customizable means that you can easily alter the behavior of Emacs commands in simple ways. For instance, if you use a programming language in which comments start with <** and end with **>, you can tell the Emacs comment manipulation commands to use those strings (see Section 23.5 [Comments], page 258). To take another example, you can rebind the basic cursor motion commands (up, down, left and right) to any keys on the keyboard that you nd comfortable. See Chapter 33 [Customization], page 434. Extensible means that you can go beyond simple customization and create entirely new commands. New commands are simply programs written in the Lisp language, which are run by Emacss own Lisp interpreter. Existing commands can even be redened in the middle of an editing session, without having to restart Emacs. Most of the editing commands in Emacs are written in Lisp; the few exceptions could have been written in Lisp but use C instead for eciency. Writing an extension is programming, but non-programmers can use it afterwards. See Section Preface in An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp , if you want to learn Emacs Lisp programming.

Chapter 1: The Organization of the Screen

1 The Organization of the Screen

On a graphical display, such as on GNU/Linux using the X Window System, Emacs occupies a graphical window. On a text terminal, Emacs occupies the entire terminal screen. We will use the term frame to mean a graphical window or terminal screen occupied by Emacs. Emacs behaves very similarly on both kinds of frames. It normally starts out with just one frame, but you can create additional frames if you wish (see Chapter 18 [Frames], page 165). Each frame consists of several distinct regions. At the top of the frame is a menu bar, which allows you to access commands via a series of menus. On a graphical display, directly below the menu bar is a tool bar, a row of icons that perform editing commands if you click on them. At the very bottom of the frame is an echo area, where informative messages are displayed and where you enter information when Emacs asks for it. The main area of the frame, below the tool bar (if one exists) and above the echo area, is called the window. Henceforth in this manual, we will use the word window in this sense. Graphical display systems commonly use the word window with a dierent meaning; but, as stated above, we refer to those graphical windows as frames. An Emacs window is where the buerthe text you are editingis displayed. On a graphical display, the window possesses a scroll bar on one side, which can be used to scroll through the buer. The last line of the window is a mode line. This displays various information about what is going on in the buer, such as whether there are unsaved changes, the editing modes that are in use, the current line number, and so forth. When you start Emacs, there is normally only one window in the frame. However, you can subdivide this window horizontally or vertically to create multiple windows, each of which can independently display a buer (see Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159). At any time, one window is the selected window. On a graphical display, the selected window shows a more prominent cursor (usually solid and blinking); other windows show a less prominent cursor (usually a hollow box). On a text terminal, there is only one cursor, which is shown in the selected window. The buer displayed in the selected window is called the current buer, and it is where editing happens. Most Emacs commands implicitly apply to the current buer; the text displayed in unselected windows is mostly visible for reference. If you use multiple frames on a graphical display, selecting a particular frame selects a window in that frame.

1.1 Point
The cursor in the selected window shows the location where most editing commands take eect, which is called point1 . Many Emacs commands move point to dierent
1

The term point comes from the character ., which was the command in TECO (the language in which the original Emacs was written) for accessing the editing position.

Chapter 1: The Organization of the Screen

places in the buer; for example, you can place point by clicking mouse button 1 (normally the left button) at the desired location. By default, the cursor in the selected window is drawn as a solid block and appears to be on a character, but you should think of point as between two characters; it is situated before the character under the cursor. For example, if your text looks like frob with the cursor over the b, then point is between the o and the b. If you insert the character ! at that position, the result is fro!b, with point between the ! and the b. Thus, the cursor remains over the b, as before. If you are editing several les in Emacs, each in its own buer, each buer has its own value of point. A buer that is not currently displayed remembers its value of point if you later display it again. Furthermore, if a buer is displayed in multiple windows, each of those windows has its own value of point. See Section 11.20 [Cursor Display], page 88, for options that control how Emacs displays the cursor.

1.2 The Echo Area

The line at the very bottom of the frame is the echo area. It is used to display small amounts of text for various purposes. The echo area is so-named because one of the things it is used for is echoing, which means displaying the characters of a multi-character command as you type. Single-character commands are not echoed. Multi-character commands (see Section 2.2 [Keys], page 11) are echoed if you pause for more than a second in the middle of a command. Emacs then echoes all the characters of the command so far, to prompt you for the rest. Once echoing has started, the rest of the command echoes immediately as you type it. This behavior is designed to give condent users fast response, while giving hesitant users maximum feedback. The echo area is also used to display an error message when a command cannot do its job. Error messages may be accompanied by beeping or by ashing the screen. Some commands display informative messages in the echo area to tell you what the command has done, or to provide you with some specic information. These informative messages, unlike error messages, are not accompanied with a beep or ash. For example, C-x = (hold down CTRL and type x, then let go of CTRL and type =) displays a message describing the character at point, its position in the buer, and its current column in the window. Commands that take a long time often display messages ending in ... while they are working (sometimes also indicating how much progress has been made, as a percentage), and add done when they are nished. Informative echo area messages are saved in a special buer named *Messages*. (We have not explained buers yet; see Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150, for more information about them.) If you miss a message that appeared briey on the screen, you can switch to the *Messages* buer to see it again. The *Messages* buer is limited to a certain number of lines, specied by the variable message-log-max. (We have not explained variables either; see Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443, for

Chapter 1: The Organization of the Screen

more information about them.) Beyond this limit, one line is deleted from the beginning whenever a new message line is added at the end. See Section 11.23 [Display Custom], page 90, for options that control how Emacs uses the echo area. The echo area is also used to display the minibuer, a special window where you can input arguments to commands, such as the name of a le to be edited. When the minibuer is in use, the text displayed in the echo area begins with a prompt string, and the active cursor appears within the minibuer, which is temporarily considered the selected window. You can always get out of the minibuer by typing C-g. See Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27.

1.3 The Mode Line

At the bottom of each window is a mode line, which describes what is going on in the current buer. When there is only one window, the mode line appears right above the echo area; it is the next-to-last line in the frame. On a graphical display, the mode line is drawn with a 3D box appearance. Emacs also usually draws the mode line of the selected window with a dierent color than that of unselected windows, in order to make it stand out. The text displayed in the mode line has the following format: cs :ch-fr buf pos line (major minor ) On a text terminal, this text is followed by a series of dashes extending to the right edge of the window. These dashes are omitted on a graphical display. The cs string and the colon character after it describe the character set and newline convention used for the current buer. Normally, Emacs automatically handles these settings for you, but it is sometimes useful to have this information. cs describes the character set of the text in the buer (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188). If it is a dash (-), that indicates no special character set handling (with the possible exception of end-of-line conventions, described in the next paragraph). = means no conversion whatsoever, and is usually used for les containing non-textual data. Other characters represent various coding systems for example, 1 represents ISO Latin-1. On a text terminal, cs is preceded by two additional characters that describe the coding systems for keyboard input and terminal output. Furthermore, if you are using an input method, cs is preceded by a string that identies the input method (see Section 19.4 [Input Methods], page 185). The character after cs is usually a colon. If a dierent string is displayed, that indicates a nontrivial end-of-line convention for encoding a le. Usually, lines of text are separated by newline characters in a le, but two other conventions are sometimes used. The MS-DOS convention uses a carriage-return character followed by a linefeed character; when editing such les, the colon changes to either a backslash (\) or (DOS), depending on the operating system. Another convention, employed by older Macintosh systems, uses a carriage-return character instead of a newline; when editing such les, the colon changes to either a forward slash (/)

Chapter 1: The Organization of the Screen

or (Mac). On some systems, Emacs displays (Unix) instead of the colon for les that use newline as the line separator. The next element on the mode line is the string indicated by ch. This shows two dashes (--) if the buer displayed in the window has the same contents as the corresponding le on the disk; i.e., if the buer is unmodied. If the buer is modied, it shows two stars (**). For a read-only buer, it shows %* if the buer is modied, and %% otherwise. The character after ch is normally a dash (-). However, if the defaultdirectory for the current buer is on a remote machine, @ is displayed instead (see Section 15.1 [File Names], page 124). fr gives the selected frame name (see Chapter 18 [Frames], page 165). It appears only on text terminals. The initial frames name is F1. buf is the name of the buer displayed in the window. Usually, this is the same as the name of a le you are editing. See Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150. pos tells you whether there is additional text above the top of the window, or below the bottom. If your buer is small and all of it is visible in the window, pos is All. Otherwise, it is Top if you are looking at the beginning of the buer, Bot if you are looking at the end of the buer, or nn %, where nn is the percentage of the buer above the top of the window. With Size Indication mode, you can display the size of the buer as well. See Section 11.18 [Optional Mode Line], page 85. line is the character L followed by the line number at point. (You can display the current column number too, by turning on Column Number mode. See Section 11.18 [Optional Mode Line], page 85.) major is the name of the major mode used in the buer. A major mode is a principal editing mode for the buer, such as Text mode, Lisp mode, C mode, and so forth. See Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204. Some major modes display additional information after the major mode name. For example, Compilation buers and Shell buers display the status of the subprocess. minor is a list of some of the enabled minor modes, which are optional editing modes that provide additional features on top of the major mode. See Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205. Some features are listed together with the minor modes whenever they are turned on, even though they are not really minor modes. Narrow means that the buer being displayed has editing restricted to only a portion of its text (see Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74). Def means that a keyboard macro is currently being dened (see Chapter 14 [Keyboard Macros], page 116). In addition, if Emacs is inside a recursive editing level, square brackets ([...]) appear around the parentheses that surround the modes. If Emacs is in one recursive editing level within another, double square brackets appear, and so on. Since recursive editing levels aect Emacs globally, such square brackets appear in the mode line of every window. See Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424. You can change the appearance of the mode line as well as the format of its contents. See Section 11.18 [Optional Mode Line], page 85. In addition, the mode line is mouse-sensitive; clicking on dierent parts of the mode line performs various commands. See Section 18.5 [Mode Line Mouse], page 169.

Chapter 1: The Organization of the Screen

10

1.4 The Menu Bar

Each Emacs frame normally has a menu bar at the top which you can use to perform common operations. Theres no need to list them here, as you can more easily see them yourself. On a graphical display, you can use the mouse to choose a command from the menu bar. An arrow on the right edge of a menu item means it leads to a subsidiary menu, or submenu. A ... at the end of a menu item means that the command will prompt you for further input before it actually does anything. Some of the commands in the menu bar have ordinary key bindings as well; if so, a key binding is shown in parentheses after the item itself. To view the full command name and documentation for a menu item, type C-h k, and then select the menu bar with the mouse in the usual way (see Section 7.1 [Key Help], page 40). Instead of using the mouse, you can also invoke the rst menu bar item by pressing F10 (to run the command menu-bar-open). You can then navigate the menus with the arrow keys. To activate a selected menu item, press RET; to cancel menu navigation, press ESC. On a text terminal, you can use the menu bar by typing M- or F10 (these run the command tmm-menubar). This lets you select a menu item with the keyboard. A provisional choice appears in the echo area. You can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the menu to dierent items, and then you can type RET to select the item. Each menu item is also designated by a letter or digit (usually the initial of some word in the items name). This letter or digit is separated from the item name by =>. You can type the items letter or digit to select the item.

Chapter 2: Characters, Keys and Commands

11

2 Characters, Keys and Commands

This chapter explains the character sets used by Emacs for input commands, and the fundamental concepts of keys and commands, whereby Emacs interprets your keyboard and mouse input.

2.1 Kinds of User Input

GNU Emacs is primarily designed for use with the keyboard. While it is possible to use the mouse to issue editing commands through the menu bar and tool bar, that is not as ecient as using the keyboard. Therefore, this manual mainly documents how to edit with the keyboard. Keyboard input into Emacs is based on a heavily-extended version of ASCII. Simple characters, like a, B, 3, =, and the space character (denoted as SPC), are entered by typing the corresponding key. Control characters, such as RET, TAB, DEL, ESC, F1, HOME, and LEFT, are also entered this way, as are certain characters found on non-English keyboards (see Chapter 19 [International], page 180). Emacs also recognizes control characters that are entered using modier keys. Two commonly-used modier keys are CONTROL (usually labeled CTRL), and META (usually labeled ALT)1 . For example, Control-a is entered by holding down the CTRL key while pressing a; we will refer to this as C-a for short. Similarly Meta-a, or M-a for short, is entered by holding down the ALT key and pressing a. Modier keys can also be applied to non-alphanumerical characters, e.g. C-F1 or M-LEFT. You can also type Meta characters using two-character sequences starting with ESC. Thus, you can enter M-a by typing ESC a. You can enter C-M-a by typing ESC C-a. Unlike META, ESC is entered as a separate character. You dont hold down ESC while typing the next character; instead, press ESC and release it, then enter the next character. This feature is useful on certain text terminals where the META key does not function reliably. On graphical displays, the window manager might block some keyboard inputs, including M-TAB, M-SPC, C-M-d and C-M-l. If you have this problem, you can either customize your window manager to not block those keys, or rebind the aected Emacs commands (see Chapter 33 [Customization], page 434). Simple characters and control characters, as well as certain non-keyboard inputs such as mouse clicks, are collectively referred to as input events. For details about how Emacs internally handles input events, see Section Input Events in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

2.2 Keys
Some Emacs commands are invoked by just one input event; for example, C-f moves forward one character in the buer. Other commands take two or more input events to invoke, such as C-x C-f and C-x 4 C-f.
1

We refer to ALT as META for historical reasons.

Chapter 2: Characters, Keys and Commands

12

A key sequence, or key for short, is a sequence of one or more input events that is meaningful as a unit. If a key sequence invokes a command, we call it a complete key ; for example, C-f, C-x C-f and C-x 4 C-f are all complete keys. If a key sequence isnt long enough to invoke a command, we call it a prex key ; from the preceding example, we see that C-x and C-x 4 are prex keys. Every key sequence is either a complete key or a prex key. A prex key combines with the following input event to make a longer key sequence. For example, C-x is a prex key, so typing C-x alone does not invoke a command; instead, Emacs waits for further input (if you pause for longer than a second, it echoes the C-x key to prompt for that input; see Section 1.2 [Echo Area], page 7). C-x combines with the next input event to make a two-event key sequence, which could itself be a prex key (such as C-x 4), or a complete key (such as C-x C-f). There is no limit to the length of key sequences, but in practice they are seldom longer than three or four input events. You cant add input events onto a complete key. For example, because C-f is a complete key, the two-event sequence C-f C-k is two key sequences, not one. By default, the prex keys in Emacs are C-c, C-h, C-x, C-x RET, C-x @, C-x a, C-x n, C-x r, C-x v, C-x 4, C-x 5, C-x 6, ESC, M-g, and M-o. (F1 and F2 are aliases for C-h and C-x 6.) This list is not cast in stone; if you customize Emacs, you can make new prex keys. You could even eliminate some of the standard ones, though this is not recommended for most users; for example, if you remove the prex denition of C-x 4, then C-x 4 C-f becomes an invalid key sequence. See Section 33.3 [Key Bindings], page 452. Typing the help character (C-h or F1) after a prex key displays a list of the commands starting with that prex. The sole exception to this rule is ESC: ESC C-h is equivalent to C-M-h, which does something else entirely. You can, however, use F1 to display a list of commands starting with ESC.

2.3 Keys and Commands

This manual is full of passages that tell you what particular keys do. But Emacs does not assign meanings to keys directly. Instead, Emacs assigns meanings to named commands, and then gives keys their meanings by binding them to commands. Every command has a name chosen by a programmer. The name is usually made of a few English words separated by dashes; for example, next-line or forwardword. Internally, each command is a special type of Lisp function, and the actions associated with the command are performed by running the function. See Section What Is a Function in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . The bindings between keys and commands are recorded in tables called keymaps. See Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452. When we say that C-n moves down vertically one line we are glossing over a subtle distinction that is irrelevant in ordinary use, but vital for Emacs customization. The command next-line does a vertical move downward. C-n has this eect because it is bound to next-line. If you rebind C-n to the command forward-word, C-n will move forward one word instead.

Chapter 2: Characters, Keys and Commands

13

In this manual, we will often speak of keys like C-n as commands, even though strictly speaking the key is bound to a command. Usually we state the name of the command which really does the work in parentheses after mentioning the key that runs it. For example, we will say that The command C-n (next-line) moves point vertically down, meaning that the command next-line moves vertically down, and the key C-n is normally bound to it. Since we are discussing customization, we should tell you about variables. Often the description of a command will say, To change this, set the variable mumblefoo. A variable is a name used to store a value. Most of the variables documented in this manual are meant for customization: some command or other part of Emacs examines the variable and behaves dierently according to the value that you set. You can ignore the information about variables until you are interested in customizing them. Then read the basic information on variables (see Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443) and the information about specic variables will make sense.

Chapter 3: Entering and Exiting Emacs

14

3 Entering and Exiting Emacs

This chapter explains how to enter Emacs, and how to exit it.

3.1 Entering Emacs

The usual way to invoke Emacs is with the shell command emacs. From a terminal window running in the X Window System, you can run Emacs in the background with emacs &; this way, Emacs wont tie up the terminal window, so you can use it to run other shell commands. When Emacs starts up, the initial frame displays a special buer named *GNU Emacs*. This startup screen contains information about Emacs and links to common tasks that are useful for beginning users. For instance, activating the Emacs Tutorial link opens the Emacs tutorial; this does the same thing as the command C-h t (help-with-tutorial). To activate a link, either move point onto it and type RET, or click on it with mouse-1 (the left mouse button). Using a command line argument, you can tell Emacs to visit one or more les as soon as it starts up. For example, emacs foo.txt starts Emacs with a buer displaying the contents of the le foo.txt. This feature exists mainly for compatibility with other editors, which are designed to be launched from the shell for short editing sessions. If you call Emacs this way, the initial frame is split into two windowsone showing the specied le, and the other showing the startup screen. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. Generally, it is unnecessary and wasteful to start Emacs afresh each time you want to edit a le. The recommended way to use Emacs is to start it just once, just after you log in, and do all your editing in the same Emacs session. See Chapter 15 [Files], page 124, for information on visiting more than one le. If you use Emacs this way, the Emacs session accumulates valuable context, such as the kill ring, registers, undo history, and mark ring data, which together make editing more convenient. These features are described later in the manual. To edit a le from another program while Emacs is running, you can use the emacsclient helper program to open a le in the existing Emacs session. See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412. Emacs accepts other command line arguments that tell it to load certain Lisp les, where to put the initial frame, and so forth. See Appendix C [Emacs Invocation], page 505. If the variable inhibit-startup-screen is non-nil, Emacs does not display the startup screen. In that case, if one or more les were specied on the command line, Emacs simply displays those les; otherwise, it displays a buer named *scratch*, which can be used to evaluate Emacs Lisp expressions interactively. See Section 24.10 [Lisp Interaction], page 290. You can set the variable inhibitstartup-screen using the Customize facility (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customiza-

Chapter 3: Entering and Exiting Emacs

15

tion], page 434), or by editing your initialization le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461).1 You can also force Emacs to display a le or directory at startup by setting the variable initial-buffer-choice to a non-nil value. (In that case, even if you specify one or more les on the command line, Emacs opens but does not display them.) The value of initial-buffer-choice should be the name of the desired le or directory.

3.2 Exiting Emacs

C-x C-c C-z Kill Emacs (save-buffers-kill-terminal). On a text terminal, suspend Emacs; on a graphical display, minimize the selected frame (suspend-emacs).

Killing Emacs means terminating the Emacs program. To do this, type C-x C-c (save-buffers-kill-terminal). A two-character key sequence is used to make it harder to type by accident. If there are any modied le-visiting buers when you type C-x C-c, Emacs rst oers to save these buers. If you do not save them all, it asks for conrmation again, since the unsaved changes will be lost. Emacs also asks for conrmation if any subprocesses are still running, since killing Emacs will also kill the subprocesses (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401). C-x C-c behaves specially if you are using Emacs as a server. If you type it from a client frame, it closes the client connection. See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412. Emacs can, optionally, record certain session information when you kill it, such as the les you were visiting at the time. This information is then available the next time you start Emacs. See Section 31.8 [Saving Emacs Sessions], page 423. If the value of the variable confirm-kill-emacs is non-nil, C-x C-c assumes that its value is a predicate function, and calls that function. If the result of the function call is non-nil, the session is killed, otherwise Emacs continues to run. One convenient function to use as the value of confirm-kill-emacs is the function yes-or-no-p. The default value of confirm-kill-emacs is nil. To kill Emacs without being prompted about saving, type M-x kill-emacs. C-z runs the command suspend-frame. On a graphical display, this command minimizes (or iconies ) the selected Emacs frame, hiding it in a way that lets you bring it back later (exactly how this hiding occurs depends on the window system). On a text terminal, the C-z command suspends Emacs, stopping the program temporarily and returning control to the parent process (usually a shell); in most shells, you can resume Emacs after suspending it with the shell command %emacs. Text terminals usually listen for certain special characters whose meaning is to kill or suspend the program you are running. This terminal feature is turned o while you are in Emacs. The meanings of C-z and C-x C-c as keys in Emacs were
1

Setting inhibit-startup-screen in site-start.el doesnt work, because the startup screen is set up before reading site-start.el. See Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461, for information about site-start.el.

Chapter 3: Entering and Exiting Emacs

16

inspired by the use of C-z and C-c on several operating systems as the characters for stopping or killing a program, but that is their only relationship with the operating system. You can customize these keys to run any commands of your choice (see Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452).

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

17

4 Basic Editing Commands

Here we explain the basics of how to enter text, make corrections, and save the text in a le. If this material is new to you, we suggest you rst run the Emacs learn-by-doing tutorial, by typing C-h t (help-with-tutorial).

4.1 Inserting Text

You can insert an ordinary graphic character (e.g., a, B, 3, and =) by typing the associated key. This adds the character to the buer at point. Insertion moves point forward, so that point remains just after the inserted text. See Section 1.1 [Point], page 6. To end a line and start a new one, type RET (newline). (The RET key may be labeled RETURN or ENTER on your keyboard, but we refer to it as RET in this manual.) This command inserts a newline character into the buer. If point is at the end of the line, the eect is to create a new blank line after it; if point is in the middle of a line, the line is split at that position. As we explain later in this manual, you can change the way Emacs handles text insertion by turning on minor modes. For instance, the minor mode called Auto Fill mode splits lines automatically when they get too long (see Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218). The minor mode called Overwrite mode causes inserted characters to replace (overwrite) existing text, instead of shoving it to the right. See Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205. Only graphic characters can be inserted by typing the associated key; other keys act as editing commands and do not insert themselves. For instance, DEL runs the command delete-backward-char by default (some modes bind it to a dierent command); it does not insert a literal DEL character (ASCII character code 127). To insert a non-graphic character, or a character that your keyboard does not support, rst quote it by typing C-q (quoted-insert). There are two ways to use C-q: C-q followed by any non-graphic character (even C-g) inserts that character. For instance, C-q DEL inserts a literal DEL character. C-q followed by a sequence of octal digits inserts the character with the specied octal character code. You can use any number of octal digits; any non-digit terminates the sequence. If the terminating character is RET, that RET serves only to terminate the sequence. Any other non-digit terminates the sequence and then acts as normal inputthus, C-q 1 0 1 B inserts AB. The use of octal sequences is disabled in ordinary non-binary Overwrite mode, to give you a convenient way to insert a digit instead of overwriting with it. To use decimal or hexadecimal instead of octal, set the variable read-quoted-charradix to 10 or 16. If the radix is 16, the letters a to f serve as part of a character code, just like digits. Case is ignored. Instead of C-q, you can use the command C-x 8 RET (ucs-insert). This prompts for the Unicode name or code-point of a character, using the minibuer. If you enter a name, the command provides completion (see Section 5.3 [Completion],

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

18

page 29). If you enter a code-point, it should be a hexadecimal number (which is the convention for Unicode). The command then inserts the corresponding character into the buer. For example, both of the following insert the innity sign (Unicode code-point U+221E): C-x 8 RET infinity RET C-x 8 RET 221e RET A numeric argument to either C-q or C-x 8 RET species how many copies of the character to insert (see Section 4.10 [Arguments], page 25).

4.2 Changing the Location of Point

To do more than insert characters, you have to know how to move point (see Section 1.1 [Point], page 6). The keyboard commands C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p move point to the right, left, down, and up, respectively. You can also move point using the arrow keys present on most keyboards: RIGHT, LEFT, DOWN, and UP; however, many Emacs users nd that it is slower to use the arrow keys than the control keys, because you need to move your hand to the area of the keyboard where those keys are located. You can also click the left mouse button to move point to the position clicked. Emacs also provides a variety of additional keyboard commands that move point in more sophisticated ways. C-f RIGHT Move forward one character (forward-char). This command (right-char) behaves like C-f, with one exception: when editing right-to-left scripts such as Arabic, it instead moves backward if the current paragraph is a right-to-left paragraph. See Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202. Move backward one character (backward-char). This command (left-char) behaves like C-b, except it moves forward if the current paragraph is right-to-left. See Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202. Move down one screen line (next-line). This command attempts to keep the horizontal position unchanged, so if you start in the middle of one line, you move to the middle of the next. Move up one screen line (previous-line). This command preserves position within the line, like C-n. Move to the beginning of the line (move-beginning-of-line). Move to the end of the line (move-end-of-line). Move forward one word (forward-word).

C-b LEFT

C-n DOWN

C-p UP C-a HOME C-e END M-f

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands C-RIGHT M-RIGHT

19

This command (right-word) behaves like M-f, except it moves backward by one word if the current paragraph is right-to-left. See Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202. Move backward one word (backward-word). This command (left-word) behaves like M-f, except it moves forward by one word if the current paragraph is right-to-left. See Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202. Without moving the text on the screen, reposition point on the left margin of the center-most text line of the window; on subsequent consecutive invocations, move point to the left margin of the top-most line, the bottom-most line, and so forth, in cyclic order (move-towindow-line-top-bottom). A numeric argument says which screen line to place point on, counting downward from the top of the window (zero means the top line). A negative argument counts lines up from the bottom (1 means the bottom line). See Section 4.10 [Arguments], page 25, for more information on numeric arguments.

M-b C-LEFT M-LEFT

M-r

M-< M->

Move to the top of the buer (beginning-of-buffer). With numeric argument n, move to n/10 of the way from the top. Move to the end of the buer (end-of-buffer).

C-v PAGEDOWN NEXT Scroll the display one screen forward, and move point onscreen if necessary (scroll-up-command). See Section 11.1 [Scrolling], page 70. M-v PAGEUP PRIOR

Scroll one screen backward, and move point onscreen if necessary (scroll-down-command). See Section 11.1 [Scrolling], page 70.

M-x goto-char Read a number n and move point to buer position n. Position 1 is the beginning of the buer. M-g M-g M-g g Read a number n and move point to the beginning of line number n (goto-line). Line 1 is the beginning of the buer. If point is on or just after a number in the buer, that is the default for n. Just type RET in the minibuer to use it. You can also specify n by giving M-g M-g a numeric prex argument. See Section 16.1 [Select Buer], page 150, for the behavior of M-g M-g when you give it a plain prex argument.

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands C-x C-n

20

Use the current column of point as the semipermanent goal column for C-n and C-p (set-goal-column). When a semipermanent goal column is in eect, those commands always try to move to this column, or as close as possible to it, after moving vertically. The goal column remains in eect until canceled. Cancel the goal column. Henceforth, C-n and C-p try to preserve the horizontal position, as usual.

C-u C-x C-n

When a line of text in the buer is longer than the width of the window, Emacs usually displays it on two or more screen lines. For convenience, C-n and C-p move point by screen lines, as do the equivalent keys DOWN and UP. You can force these commands to move according to logical lines (i.e., according to the text lines in the buer) by setting the variable line-move-visual to nil; if a logical line occupies multiple screen lines, the cursor then skips over the additional screen lines. For details, see Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23. See Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443, for how to set variables such as line-move-visual. Unlike C-n and C-p, most of the Emacs commands that work on lines work on logical lines. For instance, C-a (move-beginning-of-line) and C-e (move-endof-line) respectively move to the beginning and end of the logical line. Whenever we encounter commands that work on screen lines, such as C-n and C-p, we will point these out. When line-move-visual is nil, you can also set the variable track-eol to a non-nil value. Then C-n and C-p, when starting at the end of the logical line, move to the end of the next logical line. Normally, track-eol is nil. C-n normally stops at the end of the buer when you use it on the last line in the buer. However, if you set the variable next-line-add-newlines to a non-nil value, C-n on the last line of a buer creates an additional line at the end and moves down into it.

4.3 Erasing Text

DEL BACKSPACE Delete the character before point, or the region if it is active (deletebackward-char). DELETE C-d C-k M-d M-DEL Delete the character after point, or the region if it is active (deleteforward-char). Delete the character after point (delete-char). Kill to the end of the line (kill-line). Kill forward to the end of the next word (kill-word). Kill back to the beginning of the previous word (backward-killword).

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

21

The DEL (delete-backward-char) command removes the character before point, moving the cursor and the characters after it backwards. If point was at the beginning of a line, this deletes the preceding newline, joining this line to the previous one. If, however, the region is active, DEL instead deletes the text in the region. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47, for a description of the region. On most keyboards, DEL is labeled BACKSPACE, but we refer to it as DEL in this manual. (Do not confuse DEL with the DELETE key; we will discuss DELETE momentarily.) On some text terminals, Emacs may not recognize the DEL key properly. See Section 34.2.1 [DEL Does Not Delete], page 470, if you encounter this problem. The DELETE (delete-forward-char) command deletes in the opposite direction: it deletes the character after point, i.e. the character under the cursor. If point was at the end of a line, this joins the following line onto this one. Like DEL, it deletes the text in the region if the region is active (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). C-d (delete-char) deletes the character after point, similar to DELETE, but regardless of whether the region is active. See Section 9.1.1 [Deletion], page 54, for more detailed information about the above deletion commands. C-k (kill-line) erases (kills) a line at a time. If you type C-k at the beginning or middle of a line, it kills all the text up to the end of the line. If you type C-k at the end of a line, it joins that line with the following line. See Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54, for more information about C-k and related commands.

4.4 Undoing Changes

C-/ C-x u C-_ Undo one entry of the undo recordsusually, one command worth (undo). The same.

Emacs records a list of changes made in the buer text, so you can undo recent changes. This is done using the undo command, which is bound to C-/ (as well as C-x u and C-_). Normally, this command undoes the last change, moving point back to where it was before the change. The undo command applies only to changes in the buer; you cant use it to undo cursor motion. Although each editing command usually makes a separate entry in the undo records, very simple commands may be grouped together. Sometimes, an entry may cover just part of a complex command. If you repeat C-/ (or its aliases), each repetition undoes another, earlier change, back to the limit of the undo information available. If all recorded changes have already been undone, the undo command displays an error message and does nothing.

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands To learn more about the undo command, see Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110.

22

4.5 Files
Text that you insert in an Emacs buer lasts only as long as the Emacs session. To keep any text permanently, you must put it in a le. Suppose there is a le named test.emacs in your home directory. To begin editing this le in Emacs, type C-x C-f test.emacs RET Here the le name is given as an argument to the command C-x C-f (find-file). That command uses the minibuer to read the argument, and you type RET to terminate the argument (see Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27). Emacs obeys this command by visiting the le: it creates a buer, copies the contents of the le into the buer, and then displays the buer for editing. If you alter the text, you can save the new text in the le by typing C-x C-s (savebuffer). This copies the altered buer contents back into the le test.emacs, making them permanent. Until you save, the changed text exists only inside Emacs, and the le test.emacs is unaltered. To create a le, just visit it with C-x C-f as if it already existed. This creates an empty buer, in which you can insert the text you want to put in the le. Emacs actually creates the le the rst time you save this buer with C-x C-s. To learn more about using les in Emacs, see Chapter 15 [Files], page 124.

4.6 Help
If you forget what a key does, you can nd out by typing C-h k (describe-key), followed by the key of interest; for example, C-h k C-n tells you what C-n does. The prex key C-h stands for help. The key F1 serves as an alias for C-h. Apart from C-h k, there are many other help commands providing dierent kinds of help. See Chapter 7 [Help], page 38, for details.

4.7 Blank Lines

Here are special commands and techniques for inserting and deleting blank lines. C-o C-x C-o Insert a blank line after the cursor (open-line). Delete all but one of many consecutive blank lines (delete-blanklines).

We have seen how RET (newline) starts a new line of text. However, it may be easier to see what you are doing if you rst make a blank line and then insert the desired text into it. This is easy to do using the key C-o (open-line), which inserts a newline after point but leaves point in front of the newline. After C-o, type the text for the new line. You can make several blank lines by typing C-o several times, or by giving it a numeric argument specifying how many blank lines to make. See Section 4.10

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

23

[Arguments], page 25, for how. If you have a ll prex, the C-o command inserts the ll prex on the new line, if typed at the beginning of a line. See Section 22.5.3 [Fill Prex], page 220. The easy way to get rid of extra blank lines is with the command C-x C-o (delete-blank-lines). If point lies within a run of several blank lines, C-x C-o deletes all but one of them. If point is on a single blank line, C-x C-o deletes it. If point is on a nonblank line, C-x C-o deletes all following blank lines, if any exists.

4.8 Continuation Lines

Sometimes, a line of text in the buera logical lineis too long to t in the window, and Emacs displays it as two or more screen lines. This is called line wrapping or continuation, and the long logical line is called a continued line. On a graphical display, Emacs indicates line wrapping with small bent arrows in the left and right window fringes. On a text terminal, Emacs indicates line wrapping by displaying a \ character at the right margin. Most commands that act on lines act on logical lines, not screen lines. For instance, C-k kills a logical line. As described earlier, C-n (next-line) and C-p (previous-line) are special exceptions: they move point down and up, respectively, by one screen line (see Section 4.2 [Moving Point], page 18). Emacs can optionally truncate long logical lines instead of continuing them. This means that every logical line occupies a single screen line; if it is longer than the width of the window, the rest of the line is not displayed. On a graphical display, a truncated line is indicated by a small straight arrow in the right fringe; on a text terminal, it is indicated by a $ character in the right margin. See Section 11.21 [Line Truncation], page 89. By default, continued lines are wrapped at the right window edge. Since the wrapping may occur in the middle of a word, continued lines can be dicult to read. The usual solution is to break your lines before they get too long, by inserting newlines. If you prefer, you can make Emacs insert a newline automatically when a line gets too long, by using Auto Fill mode. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. Sometimes, you may need to edit les containing many long logical lines, and it may not be practical to break them all up by adding newlines. In that case, you can use Visual Line mode, which enables word wrapping : instead of wrapping long lines exactly at the right window edge, Emacs wraps them at the word boundaries (i.e., space or tab characters) nearest to the right window edge. Visual Line mode also redenes editing commands such as C-a, C-n, and C-k to operate on screen lines rather than logical lines. See Section 11.22 [Visual Line Mode], page 89.

4.9 Cursor Position Information

Here are commands to get information about the size and position of parts of the buer, and to count words and lines. M-x what-line Display the line number of point.

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

24

M-x line-number-mode M-x column-number-mode Toggle automatic display of the current line number or column number. See Section 11.18 [Optional Mode Line], page 85. M-= Display the number of lines, words, and characters that are present in the region (count-words-region). See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47, for information about the region.

M-x count-words Display the number of lines, words, and characters that are present in the buer. If the region is active (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47), display the numbers for the region instead. C-x = Display the character code of character after point, character position of point, and column of point (what-cursor-position).

M-x hl-line-mode Enable or disable highlighting of the current line. See Section 11.20 [Cursor Display], page 88. M-x size-indication-mode Toggle automatic display of the size of the buer. See Section 11.18 [Optional Mode Line], page 85. M-x what-line displays the current line number in the echo area. This command is usually redundant, because the current line number is shown in the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). However, if you narrow the buer, the mode line shows the line number relative to the accessible portion (see Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74). By contrast, what-line displays both the line number relative to the narrowed region and the line number relative to the whole buer. M-= (count-words-region) displays a message reporting the number of lines, words, and characters in the region. M-x count-words displays a similar message for the entire buer, or for the region if the region is active. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47, for an explanation of the region. The command C-x = (what-cursor-position) shows information about the current cursor position and the buer contents at that position. It displays a line in the echo area that looks like this:
Char: c (99, #o143, #x63) point=28062 of 36168 (78%) column=53

After Char:, this shows the character in the buer at point. The text inside the parenthesis shows the corresponding decimal, octal and hex character codes; for more information about how C-x = displays character information, see Section 19.1 [International Chars], page 180. After point= is the position of point as a character count (the rst character in the buer is position 1, the second character is position 2, and so on). The number after that is the total number of characters in the buer, and the number in parenthesis expresses the position as a percentage of the total. After column= is the horizontal position of point, in columns counting from the left edge of the window.

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

25

If the buer has been narrowed, making some of the text at the beginning and the end temporarily inaccessible, C-x = displays additional text describing the currently accessible range. For example, it might display this:
Char: C (67, #o103, #x43) point=252 of 889 (28%) <231-599> column=0

where the two extra numbers give the smallest and largest character position that point is allowed to assume. The characters between those two positions are the accessible ones. See Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74.

4.10 Numeric Arguments

In the terminology of mathematics and computing, argument means data provided to a function or operation. You can give any Emacs command a numeric argument (also called a prex argument). Some commands interpret the argument as a repetition count. For example, giving C-f an argument of ten causes it to move point forward by ten characters instead of one. With these commands, no argument is equivalent to an argument of one, and negative arguments cause them to move or act in the opposite direction. The easiest way to specify a numeric argument is to type a digit and/or a minus sign while holding down the META key. For example, M-5 C-n moves down ve lines. The keys M-1, M-2, and so on, as well as M--, are bound to commands (digit-argument and negative-argument) that set up an argument for the next command. Meta-- without digits normally means 1. If you enter more than one digit, you need not hold down the META key for the second and subsequent digits. Thus, to move down fty lines, type M-5 0 C-n Note that this does not insert ve copies of 0 and move down one line, as you might expectthe 0 is treated as part of the prex argument. (What if you do want to insert ve copies of 0? Type M-5 C-u 0. Here, C-u terminates the prex argument, so that the next keystroke begins the command that you want to execute. Note that this meaning of C-u applies only to this case. For the usual role of C-u, see below.) Instead of typing M-1, M-2, and so on, another way to specify a numeric argument is to type C-u (universal-argument) followed by some digits, or (for a negative argument) a minus sign followed by digits. A minus sign without digits normally means 1. C-u alone has the special meaning of four times: it multiplies the argument for the next command by four. C-u C-u multiplies it by sixteen. Thus, C-u C-u C-f moves forward sixteen characters. Other useful combinations are C-u C-n, C-u C-u C-n (move down a good fraction of a screen), C-u C-u C-o (make a lot of blank lines), and C-u C-k (kill four lines). You can use a numeric argument before a self-inserting character to insert multiple copies of it. This is straightforward when the character is not a digit; for example, C-u 6 4 a inserts 64 copies of the character a. But this does not work for inserting digits; C-u 6 4 1 species an argument of 641. You can separate the

Chapter 4: Basic Editing Commands

26

argument from the digit to insert with another C-u; for example, C-u 6 4 C-u 1 does insert 64 copies of the character 1. Some commands care whether there is an argument, but ignore its value. For example, the command M-q (fill-paragraph) lls text; with an argument, it justies the text as well. (See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218, for more information on M-q.) For these commands, it is enough to the argument with a single C-u. Some commands use the value of the argument as a repeat count, but do something special when there is no argument. For example, the command C-k (killline) with argument n kills n lines, including their terminating newlines. But C-k with no argument is special: it kills the text up to the next newline, or, if point is right at the end of the line, it kills the newline itself. Thus, two C-k commands with no arguments can kill a nonblank line, just like C-k with an argument of one. (See Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54, for more information on C-k.) A few commands treat a plain C-u dierently from an ordinary argument. A few others may treat an argument of just a minus sign dierently from an argument of 1. These unusual cases are described when they come up; they exist to make an individual command more convenient, and they are documented in that commands documentation string. We use the term prex argument as well as numeric argument, to emphasize that you type these argument before the command, and to distinguish them from minibuer arguments that come after the command.

4.11 Repeating a Command

Many simple commands, such as those invoked with a single key or with M-x command-name RET, can be repeated by invoking them with a numeric argument that serves as a repeat count (see Section 4.10 [Arguments], page 25). However, if the command you want to repeat prompts for input, or uses a numeric argument in another way, that method wont work. The command C-x z (repeat) provides another way to repeat an Emacs command many times. This command repeats the previous Emacs command, whatever that was. Repeating a command uses the same arguments that were used before; it does not read new arguments each time. To repeat the command more than once, type additional zs: each z repeats the command one more time. Repetition ends when you type a character other than z, or press a mouse button. For example, suppose you type C-u 2 0 C-d to delete 20 characters. You can repeat that command (including its argument) three additional times, to delete a total of 80 characters, by typing C-x z z z. The rst C-x z repeats the command once, and each subsequent z repeats it once again.

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

27

5 The Minibuer
The minibuer is where Emacs commands read complicated arguments, such as le names, buer names, Emacs command names, or Lisp expressions. We call it the minibuer because its a special-purpose buer with a small amount of screen space. You can use the usual Emacs editing commands in the minibuer to edit the argument text. When the minibuer is in use, it appears in the echo area, with a cursor. The minibuer starts with a prompt in a distinct color, usually ending with a colon. The prompt states what kind of input is expected, and how it will be used. The simplest way to enter a minibuer argument is to type the text, then RET to submit the argument and exit the minibuer. You can cancel the minibuer, and the command that wants the argument, by typing C-g. Sometimes, a default argument appears in the prompt, inside parentheses before the colon. This default will be used as the argument if you just type RET. For example, commands that read buer names usually show a buer name as the default; you can type RET to operate on that default buer. Since the minibuer appears in the echo area, it can conict with other uses of the echo area. If an error message or an informative message is emitted while the minibuer is active, the message hides the minibuer for a few seconds, or until you type something; then the minibuer comes back. While the minibuer is in use, keystrokes do not echo.

5.1 Minibuers for File Names

Commands such as C-x C-f (find-file) use the minibuer to read a le name argument (see Section 4.5 [Basic Files], page 22). When the minibuer is used to read a le name, it typically starts out with some initial text ending in a slash. This is the default directory. For example, it may start out like this: Find file: /u2/emacs/src/ Here, Find file: is the prompt and /u2/emacs/src/ is the default directory. If you now type buffer.c as input, that species the le /u2/emacs/src/buffer.c. See Section 15.1 [File Names], page 124, for information about the default directory. You can specify the parent directory with ..: /a/b/../foo.el is equivalent to /a/foo.el. Alternatively, you can use M-DEL to kill directory names backwards (see Section 22.1 [Words], page 214). To specify a le in a completely dierent directory, you can kill the entire default with C-a C-k (see Section 5.2 [Minibuer Edit], page 28). Alternatively, you can ignore the default, and enter an absolute le name starting with a slash or a tilde after the default directory. For example, you can specify /etc/termcap as follows: Find file: /u2/emacs/src//etc/termcap Emacs interprets a double slash as ignore everything before the second slash in the pair. In the example above, /u2/emacs/src/ is ignored, so the argument you supplied is /etc/termcap. The ignored part of the le name is dimmed if the

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

28

terminal allows it. (To disable this dimming, turn o File Name Shadow mode with the command M-x file-name-shadow-mode.) Emacs interprets ~/ as your home directory. Thus, ~/foo/bar.txt species a le named bar.txt, inside a directory named foo, which is in turn located in your home directory. In addition, ~user-id / means the home directory of a user whose login name is user-id. Any leading directory name in front of the ~ is ignored: thus, /u2/emacs/~/foo/bar.txt is equivalent to ~/foo/bar.txt. On MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems, where a user doesnt always have a home directory, Emacs uses several alternatives. For MS-Windows, see Section G.5 [Windows HOME], page 538; for MS-DOS, see Section MS-DOS File Names in the digital version of the Emacs Manual . On these systems, the ~user-id / construct is supported only for the current user, i.e., only if user-id is the current users login name. To prevent Emacs from inserting the default directory when reading le names, change the variable insert-default-directory to nil. In that case, the minibuffer starts out empty. Nonetheless, relative le name arguments are still interpreted based on the same default directory. You can also enter remote le names in the minibuer. See Section 15.13 [Remote Files], page 145.

5.2 Editing in the Minibuer

The minibuer is an Emacs buer, albeit a peculiar one, and the usual Emacs commands are available for editing the argument text. (The prompt, however, is read-only, and cannot be changed.) Since RET in the minibuer submits the argument, you cant use it to insert a newline. You can do that with C-q C-j, which inserts a C-j control character, which is formally equivalent to a newline character (see Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17). Alternatively, you can use the C-o (open-line) command (see Section 4.7 [Blank Lines], page 22). Inside a minibuer, the keys TAB, SPC, and ? are often bound to completion commands, which allow you to easily ll in the desired text without typing all of it. See Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29. As with RET, you can use C-q to insert a TAB, SPC, or ? character. For convenience, C-a (move-beginning-of-line) in a minibuer moves point to the beginning of the argument text, not the beginning of the prompt. For example, this allows you to erase the entire argument with C-a C-k. When the minibuer is active, the echo area is treated much like an ordinary Emacs window. For instance, you can switch to another window (with C-x o), edit text there, then return to the minibuer window to nish the argument. You can even kill text in another window, return to the minibuer window, and yank the text into the argument. There are some restrictions on the minibuer window, however: for instance, you cannot split it. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. Normally, the minibuer window occupies a single screen line. However, if you add two or more lines worth of text into the minibuer, it expands automatically

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

29

to accommodate the text. The variable resize-mini-windows controls the resizing of the minibuer. The default value is grow-only, which means the behavior we have just described. If the value is t, the minibuer window will also shrink automatically if you remove some lines of text from the minibuer, down to a minimum of one screen line. If the value is nil, the minibuer window never changes size automatically, but you can use the usual window-resizing commands on it (see Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159). The variable max-mini-window-height controls the maximum height for resizing the minibuer window. A oating-point number species a fraction of the frames height; an integer species the maximum number of lines; nil means do not resize the minibuer window automatically. The default value is 0.25. The C-M-v command in the minibuer scrolls the help text from commands that display help text of any sort in another window. You can also scroll the help text with M-PRIOR and M-NEXT (or, equivalently, M-PAGEUP and M-PAGEDOWN). This is especially useful with long lists of possible completions. See Section 17.3 [Other Window], page 160. Emacs normally disallows most commands that use the minibuer while the minibuer is active. To allow such commands in the minibuer, set the variable enable-recursive-minibuffers to t. When not active, the minibuer is in minibuffer-inactive-mode, and clicking Mouse-1 there shows the *Messages* buer. If you use a dedicated frame for minibuers, Emacs also recognizes certain keys there, for example n to make a new frame.

5.3 Completion
You can often use a feature called completion to help enter arguments. This means that after you type part of the argument, Emacs can ll in the rest, or some of it, based on what was typed so far. When completion is available, certain keys (usually TAB, RET, and SPC) are rebound in the minibuer to special completion commands (see Section 5.3.2 [Completion Commands], page 30). These commands attempt to complete the text in the minibuer, based on a set of completion alternatives provided by the command that requested the argument. You can usually type ? to see a list of completion alternatives. Although completion is usually done in the minibuer, the feature is sometimes available in ordinary buers too. See Section 23.8 [Symbol Completion], page 264. 5.3.1 Completion Example A simple example may help here. M-x uses the minibuer to read the name of a command, so completion works by matching the minibuer text against the names of existing Emacs commands. Suppose you wish to run the command auto-fillmode. You can do that by typing M-x auto-fill-mode RET, but it is easier to use completion.

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

30

If you type M-x a u TAB, the TAB looks for completion alternatives (in this case, command names) that start with au. There are several, including autofill-mode and autoconf-mode, but they all begin with auto, so the au in the minibuer completes to auto. (More commands may be dened in your Emacs session. For example, if a command called authorize-me was dened, Emacs could only complete as far as aut.) If you type TAB again immediately, it cannot determine the next character; it could be -, a, or c. So it does not add any characters; instead, TAB displays a list of all possible completions in another window. Next, type -f. The minibuer now contains auto-f, and the only command name that starts with this is auto-fill-mode. If you now type TAB, completion lls in the rest of the argument auto-fill-mode into the minibuer. Hence, typing just a u TAB - f TAB allows you to enter auto-fill-mode. 5.3.2 Completion Commands Here is a list of the completion commands dened in the minibuer when completion is allowed. TAB Complete the text in the minibuer as much as possible; if unable to complete, display a list of possible completions (minibuffercomplete). Complete up to one word from the minibuer text before point (minibuffer-complete-word). This command is not available for arguments that often include spaces, such as le names. Submit the text in the minibuer as the argument, possibly completing rst (minibuffer-complete-and-exit). See Section 5.3.3 [Completion Exit], page 31. Display a list of completions (minibuffer-completion-help).

SPC

RET

TAB (minibuffer-complete) is the most fundamental completion command. It searches for all possible completions that match the existing minibuer text, and attempts to complete as much as it can. See Section 5.3.4 [Completion Styles], page 32, for how completion alternatives are chosen. SPC (minibuffer-complete-word) completes like TAB, but only up to the next hyphen or space. If you have auto-f in the minibuer and type SPC, it nds that the completion is auto-fill-mode, but it only inserts ill-, giving auto-fill-. Another SPC at this point completes all the way to auto-fill-mode. If TAB or SPC is unable to complete, it displays a list of matching completion alternatives (if there are any) in another window. You can display the same list with ? (minibuffer-completion-help). The following commands can be used with the completion list: Mouse-1 Mouse-2 Clicking mouse button 1 or 2 on a completion alternative chooses it (mouse-choose-completion).

Chapter 5: The Minibuer M-v PAGEUP PRIOR

31

Typing M-v, while in the minibuer, selects the window showing the completion list (switch-to-completions). This paves the way for using the commands below. PAGEUP or PRIOR does the same. You can also select the window in other ways (see Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159). While in the completion list buer, this chooses the completion at point (choose-completion). While in the completion list buer, this moves point to the following completion alternative (next-completion). While in the completion list buer, this moves point to the previous completion alternative (previous-completion).

RET RIGHT LEFT

5.3.3 Completion Exit When a command reads an argument using the minibuer with completion, it also controls what happens when you type RET (minibuffer-complete-and-exit) to submit the argument. There are four types of behavior: Strict completion accepts only exact completion matches. Typing RET exits the minibuer only if the minibuer text is an exact match, or completes to one. Otherwise, Emacs refuses to exit the minibuer; instead it tries to complete, and if no completion can be done it momentarily displays [No match] after the minibuer text. (You can still leave the minibuer by typing C-g to cancel the command.) An example of a command that uses this behavior is M-x, since it is meaningless for it to accept a non-existent command name. Cautious completion is like strict completion, except RET exits only if the text is already an exact match. If the text completes to an exact match, RET performs that completion but does not exit yet; you must type a second RET to exit. Cautious completion is used for reading le names for les that must already exist, for example. Permissive completion allows any input; the completion candidates are just suggestions. Typing RET does not complete, it just submits the argument as you have entered it. Permissive completion with conrmation is like permissive completion, with an exception: if you typed TAB and this completed the text up to some intermediate state (i.e., one that is not yet an exact completion match), typing RET right afterward does not submit the argument. Instead, Emacs asks for conrmation by momentarily displaying [Confirm] after the text; type RET again to conrm and submit the text. This catches a common mistake, in which one types RET before realizing that TAB did not complete as far as desired.

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

32

You can tweak the conrmation behavior by customizing the variable confirmnonexistent-file-or-buffer. The default value, after-completion, gives the behavior we have just described. If you change it to nil, Emacs does not ask for conrmation, falling back on permissive completion. If you change it to any other non-nil value, Emacs asks for conrmation whether or not the preceding command was TAB. This behavior is used by most commands that read le names, like C-x C-f, and commands that read buer names, like C-x b. 5.3.4 How Completion Alternatives Are Chosen Completion commands work by narrowing a large list of possible completion alternatives to a smaller subset that matches what you have typed in the minibuer. In Section 5.3.1 [Completion Example], page 29, we gave a simple example of such matching. The procedure of determining what constitutes a match is quite intricate. Emacs attempts to oer plausible completions under most circumstances. Emacs performs completion using one or more completion stylessets of criteria for matching minibuer text to completion alternatives. During completion, Emacs tries each completion style in turn. If a style yields one or more matches, that is used as the list of completion alternatives. If a style produces no matches, Emacs falls back on the next style. The list variable completion-styles species the completion styles to use. Each list element is the name of a completion style (a Lisp symbol). The default completion styles are (in order): basic A matching completion alternative must have the same beginning as the text in the minibuer before point. Furthermore, if there is any text in the minibuer after point, the rest of the completion alternative must contain that text as a substring.

partial-completion This aggressive completion style divides the minibuer text into words separated by hyphens or spaces, and completes each word separately. (For example, when completing command names, em-l-m completes to emacs-lisp-mode.) Furthermore, a * in the minibuer text is treated as a wildcardit matches any character at the corresponding position in the completion alternative. emacs22 This completion style is similar to basic, except that it ignores the text in the minibuer after point. It is so-named because it corresponds to the completion behavior in Emacs 22.

The following additional completion styles are also dened, and you can add them to completion-styles if you wish (see Chapter 33 [Customization], page 434): substring A matching completion alternative must contain the text in the minibuer before point, and the text in the minibuer after point, as substrings (in that same order).

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

33

Thus, if the text in the minibuer is foobar, with point between foo and bar, that matches a foob barc , where a, b, and c can be any string including the empty string. initials This very aggressive completion style attempts to complete acronyms and initialisms. For example, when completing command names, it matches lch to list-command-history.

There is also a very simple completion style called emacs21. In this style, if the text in the minibuer is foobar, only matches starting with foobar are considered. You can use dierent completion styles in dierent situations, by setting the variable completion-category-overrides. For example, the default setting says to use only basic and substring completion for buer names. 5.3.5 Completion Options Case is signicant when completing case-sensitive arguments, such as command names. For example, when completing command names, AU does not complete to auto-fill-mode. Case dierences are ignored when completing arguments in which case does not matter. When completing le names, case dierences are ignored if the variable readfile-name-completion-ignore-case is non-nil. The default value is nil on systems that have case-sensitive le-names, such as GNU/Linux; it is non-nil on systems that have case-insensitive le-names, such as Microsoft Windows. When completing buer names, case dierences are ignored if the variable read-buffercompletion-ignore-case is non-nil; the default is nil. When completing le names, Emacs usually omits certain alternatives that are considered unlikely to be chosen, as determined by the list variable completionignored-extensions. Each element in the list should be a string; any le name ending in such a string is ignored as a completion alternative. Any element ending in a slash (/) represents a subdirectory name. The standard value of completionignored-extensions has several elements including ".o", ".elc", and "~". For example, if a directory contains foo.c and foo.elc, foo completes to foo.c. However, if all possible completions end in ignored strings, they are not ignored: in the previous example, foo.e completes to foo.elc. Emacs disregards completion-ignored-extensions when showing completion alternatives in the completion list. If completion-auto-help is set to nil, the completion commands never display the completion list buer; you must type ? to display the list. If the value is lazy, Emacs only shows the completion list buer on the second attempt to complete. In other words, if there is nothing to complete, the rst TAB echoes Next char not unique; the second TAB shows the completion list buer. If completion-cycle-threshold is non-nil, completion commands can cycle through completion alternatives. Normally, if there is more than one completion alternative for the text in the minibuer, a completion command completes up to the longest common substring. If you change completion-cycle-threshold to t, the completion command instead completes to the rst of those completion

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

34

alternatives; each subsequent invocation of the completion command replaces that with the next completion alternative, in a cyclic manner. If you give completioncycle-threshold a numeric value n, completion commands switch to this cycling behavior only when there are fewer than n alternatives. Icomplete mode presents a constantly-updated display that tells you what completions are available for the text youve entered so far. The command to enable or disable this minor mode is M-x icomplete-mode.

5.4 Minibuer History

Every argument that you enter with the minibuer is saved in a minibuer history list so you can easily use it again later. You can use the following arguments to quickly fetch an earlier argument into the minibuer: M-p UP M-n DOWN Move to the previous item in the minibuer history, an earlier argument (previous-history-element). Move to the next item in the minibuer history (next-historyelement).

M-r regexp RET Move to an earlier item in the minibuer history that matches regexp (previous-matching-history-element). M-s regexp RET Move to a later item in the minibuer history that matches regexp (next-matching-history-element). While in the minibuer, M-p or UP (previous-history-element) moves through the minibuer history list, one item at a time. Each M-p fetches an earlier item from the history list into the minibuer, replacing its existing contents. Typing M-n or DOWN (next-history-element) moves through the minibuer history list in the opposite direction, fetching later entries into the minibuer. If you type M-n in the minibuer when there are no later entries in the minibuer history (e.g., if you havent previously typed M-p), Emacs tries fetching from a list of default arguments: values that you are likely to enter. You can think of this as moving through the future history list. If you edit the text inserted by the M-p or M-N minibuer history commands, this does not change its entry in the history list. However, the edited argument does go at the end of the history list when you submit it. You can use M-r (previous-matching-history-element) to search through older elements in the history list, and M-s (next-matching-history-element) to search through newer entries. Each of these commands asks for a regular expression as an argument, and fetches the rst matching entry into the minibuer. See Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97, for an explanation of regular expressions. A numeric prex argument n means to fetch the nth matching entry. These commands

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

35

are unusual, in that they use the minibuer to read the regular expression argument, even though they are invoked from the minibuer. An upper-case letter in the regular expression makes the search case-sensitive (see Section 12.8 [Search Case], page 103). You can also search through the history using an incremental search. See Section 12.1.7 [Isearch Minibuer], page 95. Emacs keeps separate history lists for several dierent kinds of arguments. For example, there is a list for le names, used by all the commands that read le names. Other history lists include buer names, command names (used by M-x), and command arguments (used by commands like query-replace). The variable history-length species the maximum length of a minibuer history list; adding a new element deletes the oldest element if the list gets too long. If the value is t, there is no maximum length. The variable history-delete-duplicates species whether to delete duplicates in history. If it is non-nil, adding a new element deletes from the list all other elements that are equal to it. The default is nil.

5.5 Repeating Minibuer Commands

Every command that uses the minibuer once is recorded on a special history list, the command history, together with the values of its arguments, so that you can repeat the entire command. In particular, every use of M-x is recorded there, since M-x uses the minibuer to read the command name. C-x ESC ESC Re-execute a recent minibuer command from the command history (repeat-complex-command). M-x list-command-history Display the entire command history, showing all the commands C-x ESC ESC can repeat, most recent rst. C-x ESC ESC re-executes a recent command that used the minibuer. With no argument, it repeats the last such command. A numeric argument species which command to repeat; 1 means the last one, 2 the previous, and so on. C-x ESC ESC works by turning the previous command into a Lisp expression and then entering a minibuer initialized with the text for that expression. Even if you dont know Lisp, it will probably be obvious which command is displayed for repetition. If you type just RET, that repeats the command unchanged. You can also change the command by editing the Lisp expression before you execute it. The repeated command is added to the front of the command history unless it is identical to the most recent item. Once inside the minibuer for C-x ESC ESC, you can use the usual minibuer history commands (see Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34) to move through the history list. After nding the desired previous command, you can edit its expression as usual and then repeat it by typing RET. Incremental search does not, strictly speaking, use the minibuer. Therefore, although it behaves like a complex command, it normally does not appear in the

Chapter 5: The Minibuer

36

history list for C-x ESC ESC. You can make incremental search commands appear in the history by setting isearch-resume-in-command-history to a non-nil value. See Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91. The list of previous minibuer-using commands is stored as a Lisp list in the variable command-history. Each element is a Lisp expression that describes one command and its arguments. Lisp programs can re-execute a command by calling eval with the command-history element.

5.6 Entering passwords

Sometimes, you may need to enter a password into Emacs. For instance, when you tell Emacs to visit a le on another machine via a network protocol such as FTP, you often need to supply a password to gain access to the machine (see Section 15.13 [Remote Files], page 145). Entering a password is similar to using a minibuer. Emacs displays a prompt in the echo area (such as Password: ); after you type the required password, press RET to submit it. To prevent others from seeing your password, every character you type is displayed as a dot (.) instead of its usual form. Most of the features and commands associated with the minibuer can not be used when entering a password. There is no history or completion, and you cannot change windows or perform any other action with Emacs until you have submitted the password. While you are typing the password, you may press DEL to delete backwards, removing the last character entered. C-U deletes everything you have typed so far. C-g quits the password prompt (see Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468). C-y inserts the current kill into the password (see Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54). You may type either RET or ESC to submit the password. Any other self-inserting character key inserts the associated character into the password, and all other input is ignored.

Chapter 6: Running Commands by Name

37

6 Running Commands by Name

Every Emacs command has a name that you can use to run it. For convenience, many commands also have key bindings. You can run those commands by typing the keys, or run them by name. Most Emacs commands have no key bindings, so the only way to run them is by name. (See Section 33.3 [Key Bindings], page 452, for how to set up key bindings.) By convention, a command name consists of one or more words, separated by hyphens; for example, auto-fill-mode or manual-entry. Command names mostly use complete English words to make them easier to remember. To run a command by name, start with M-x, type the command name, then terminate it with RET. M-x uses the minibuer to read the command name. The string M-x appears at the beginning of the minibuer as a prompt to remind you to enter a command name to be run. RET exits the minibuer and runs the command. See Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27, for more information on the minibuer. You can use completion to enter the command name. For example, to invoke the command forward-char, you can type M-x forward-char RET or M-x forw TAB c RET Note that forward-char is the same command that you invoke with the key C-f. The existence of a key binding does not stop you from running the command by name. To cancel the M-x and not run a command, type C-g instead of entering the command name. This takes you back to command level. To pass a numeric argument to the command you are invoking with M-x, specify the numeric argument before M-x. The argument value appears in the prompt while the command name is being read, and nally M-x passes the argument to that command. When the command you run with M-x has a key binding, Emacs mentions this in the echo area after running the command. For example, if you type M-x forward-word, the message says that you can run the same command by typing M-f. You can turn o these messages by setting the variable suggest-key-bindings to nil. In this manual, when we speak of running a command by name, we often omit the RET that terminates the name. Thus we might say M-x auto-fill-mode rather than M-x auto-fill-mode RET. We mention the RET only for emphasis, such as when the command is followed by arguments. M-x works by running the command execute-extended-command, which is responsible for reading the name of another command and invoking it.

Chapter 7: Help

38

7 Help
Emacs provides a wide variety of help commands, all accessible through the prex key C-h (or, equivalently, the function key F1). These help commands are described in the following sections. You can also type C-h C-h to view a list of help commands (help-for-help). You can scroll the list with SPC and DEL, then type the help command you want. To cancel, type C-g. Many help commands display their information in a special help buer. In this buer, you can type SPC and DEL to scroll and type RET to follow hyperlinks. See Section 7.4 [Help Mode], page 43. If you are looking for a certain feature, but dont know what it is called or where to look, we recommend three methods. First, try an apropos command, then try searching the manual index, then look in the FAQ and the package keywords. C-h a topics RET This searches for commands whose names match the argument topics. The argument can be a keyword, a list of keywords, or a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). See Section 7.3 [Apropos], page 41. C-h i d m emacs RET i topic RET This searches for topic in the indices of the Emacs Info manual, displaying the rst match found. Press , to see subsequent matches. You can use a regular expression as topic. C-h i d m emacs RET s topic RET Similar, but searches the text of the manual rather than the indices. C-h C-f C-h p This displays the Emacs FAQ, using Info. This displays the available Emacs packages based on keywords. See Section 7.5 [Package Keywords], page 43.

C-h or F1 means help in various other contexts as well. For instance, you can type them after a prex key to view a list of the keys that can follow the prex key. (A few prex keys dont support C-h in this way, because they dene other meanings for it, but they all support F1 for help.) Here is a summary of help commands for accessing the built-in documentation. Most of these are described in more detail in the following sections. C-h a topics RET Display a list of commands whose names match topics (aproposcommand). C-h b C-h c key Display all active key bindings; minor mode bindings rst, then those of the major mode, then global bindings (describe-bindings). Show the name of the command that the key sequence key is bound to (describe-key-briefly). Here c stands for character. For more extensive information on key, use C-h k.

Chapter 7: Help

39

C-h d topics RET Display the commands and variables whose documentation matches topics (apropos-documentation). C-h e Display the *Messages* buer (view-echo-area-messages).

C-h f function RET Display documentation on the Lisp function named function (describe-function). Since commands are Lisp functions, this works for commands too. C-h h C-h i C-h k key C-h l C-h m C-h n C-h p Display the HELLO le, which shows examples of various character sets. Run Info, the GNU documentation browser (info). The Emacs manual is available in Info. Display the name and documentation of the command that key runs (describe-key). Display a description of your last 300 keystrokes (view-lossage). Display documentation of the current major mode (describe-mode). Display news of recent Emacs changes (view-emacs-news). Find packages by topic keyword (finder-by-keyword). This lists packages using a package menu buer. See Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430.

C-h P package RET Display documentation about the package named package (describepackage). C-h r C-h s Display the Emacs manual in Info (info-emacs-manual). Display the contents of the current syntax table (describe-syntax). The syntax table says which characters are opening delimiters, which are parts of words, and so on. See Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for details. Enter the Emacs interactive tutorial (help-with-tutorial).

C-h t

C-h v var RET Display the documentation of the Lisp variable var (describevariable). C-h w command RET Show which keys run the command named command (where-is). C-h C coding RET Describe the coding system coding (describe-coding-system). C-h C RET Describe the coding systems currently in use.

Chapter 7: Help

40

C-h F command RET Enter Info and go to the node that documents the Emacs command command (Info-goto-emacs-command-node). C-h I method RET Describe the input method method (describe-input-method). C-h K key Enter Info and go to the node that documents the key sequence key (Info-goto-emacs-key-command-node).

C-h L language-env RET Display information on the character sets, coding systems, and input methods used in language environment language-env (describelanguage-environment). C-h S symbol RET Display the Info documentation on symbol symbol according to the programming language you are editing (info-lookup-symbol). C-h . Display the help message for a special text area, if point is in one (display-local-help). (These include, for example, links in *Help* buers.)

7.1 Documentation for a Key

The help commands to get information about a key sequence are C-h c (describekey-briefly) and C-h k (describe-key). C-h c key displays in the echo area the name of the command that key is bound to. For example, C-h c C-f displays forward-char. C-h k key is similar but gives more information: it displays a help buer containing the commands documentation string, which describes exactly what the command does. C-h K key displays the section of the Emacs manual that describes the command corresponding to key. C-h c, C-h k and C-h K work for any sort of key sequences, including function keys, menus, and mouse events. For instance, after C-h k you can select a menu item from the menu bar, to view the documentation string of the command it runs. C-h w command RET lists the keys that are bound to command. It displays the list in the echo area. If it says the command is not on any key, that means you must use M-x to run it. C-h w runs the command where-is.

7.2 Help by Command or Variable Name

C-h f function RET (describe-function) displays the documentation of Lisp function function, in a window. Since commands are Lisp functions, you can use this method to view the documentation of any command whose name you know. For example, C-h f auto-fill-mode RET

Chapter 7: Help

41

displays the documentation of auto-fill-mode. This is the only way to get the documentation of a command that is not bound to any key (one which you would normally run using M-x). C-h f is also useful for Lisp functions that you use in a Lisp program. For example, if you have just written the expression (make-vector len) and want to check that you are using make-vector properly, type C-h f make-vector RET. Because C-h f allows all function names, not just command names, you may nd that some of your favorite completion abbreviations that work in M-x dont work in C-h f. An abbreviation that is unique among command names may not be unique among all function names. If you type C-h f RET, it describes the function called by the innermost Lisp expression in the buer around point, provided that function name is a valid, dened Lisp function. (That name appears as the default while you enter the argument.) For example, if point is located following the text (make-vector (car x), the innermost list containing point is the one that starts with (make-vector, so C-h f RET will describe the function make-vector. C-h f is also useful just to verify that you spelled a function name correctly. If the minibuer prompt for C-h f shows the function name from the buer as the default, it means that name is dened as a Lisp function. Type C-g to cancel the C-h f command if you dont really want to view the documentation. C-h v (describe-variable) is like C-h f but describes Lisp variables instead of Lisp functions. Its default is the Lisp symbol around or before point, if that is the name of a dened Lisp variable. See Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443. Help buers that describe Emacs variables and functions normally have hyperlinks to the corresponding source code, if you have the source les installed (see Section 31.11 [Hyperlinking], page 426). To nd a commands documentation in a manual, use C-h F (Info-goto-emacscommand-node). This knows about various manuals, not just the Emacs manual, and nds the right one.

7.3 Apropos
The apropos commands answer questions like, What are the commands for working with les? More precisely, you specify an apropos pattern, which means either a word, a list of words, or a regular expression. Each of the following apropos commands reads an apropos pattern in the minibuer, searches for items that match the pattern, and displays the results in a dierent window. C-h a Search for commands (apropos-command). With a prex argument, search for noninteractive functions too.

M-x apropos Search for functions and variables. Both interactive functions (commands) and noninteractive functions can be found by this.

Chapter 7: Help

42

M-x apropos-variable Search for user-customizable variables. With a prex argument, search for non-customizable variables too. M-x apropos-value Search for variables whose values match the specied pattern. With a prex argument, search also for functions with denitions matching the pattern, and Lisp symbols with properties matching the pattern. C-h d Search for functions and variables whose documentation strings match the specied pattern (apropos-documentation).

The simplest kind of apropos pattern is one word. Anything containing that word matches the pattern. Thus, to nd commands that work on les, type C-h a file RET. This displays a list of all command names that contain file, including copy-file, find-file, and so on. Each command name comes with a brief description and a list of keys you can currently invoke it with. In our example, it would say that you can invoke find-file by typing C-x C-f. For more information about a function denition, variable or symbol property listed in an apropos buer, you can click on it with Mouse-1 or Mouse-2, or move there and type RET. When you specify more than one word in the apropos pattern, a name must contain at least two of the words in order to match. Thus, if you are looking for commands to kill a chunk of text before point, you could try C-h a kill back backward behind before RET. The real command name kill-backward will match that; if there were a command kill-text-before, it would also match, since it contains two of the specied words. For even greater exibility, you can specify a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). An apropos pattern is interpreted as a regular expression if it contains any of the regular expression special characters, ^$*+?.\[. Following the conventions for naming Emacs commands, here are some words that youll nd useful in apropos patterns. By using them in C-h a, you will also get a feel for the naming conventions. char, line, word, sentence, paragraph, region, page, sexp, list, defun, rect, buer, frame, window, face, le, dir, register, mode, beginning, end, forward, backward, next, previous, up, down, search, goto, kill, delete, mark, insert, yank, ll, indent, case, change, set, what, list, nd, view, describe, default. If the variable apropos-do-all is non-nil, the apropos commands always behave as if they had been given a prex argument. By default, all apropos commands except apropos-documentation list their results in alphabetical order. If the variable apropos-sort-by-scores is non-nil, these commands instead try to guess the relevance of each result, and display the most relevant ones rst. The apropos-documentation command lists its results in order of relevance by default; to list them in alphabetical order, change the variable apropos-documentation-sort-by-scores to nil.

Chapter 7: Help

43

7.4 Help Mode Commands

Help buers provide the same commands as View mode (see Section 11.6 [View Mode], page 75); for instance, SPC scrolls forward, and DEL scrolls backward. A few special commands are also provided: RET TAB S-TAB Mouse-1 Mouse-2 C-c C-c C-c C-b Follow a cross reference at point (help-follow). Move point forward to the next hyperlink (forward-button). Move point back to the previous hyperlink (backward-button). Follow a hyperlink that you click on. Show all documentation about the symbol at point (help-followsymbol). Go back to the previous help topic (help-go-back).

When a function name, variable name, or face name (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75) appears in the documentation in the help buer, it is normally an underlined hyperlink. To view the associated documentation, move point there and type RET (help-follow), or click on the hyperlink with Mouse-1 or Mouse-2. Doing so replaces the contents of the help buer; to retrace your steps, type C-c C-b (help-go-back). A help buer can also contain hyperlinks to Info manuals, source code denitions, and URLs (web pages). The rst two are opened in Emacs, and the third using a web browser via the browse-url command (see Section 31.11.1 [BrowseURL], page 426). In a help buer, TAB (forward-button) moves point forward to the next hyperlink, while S-TAB (backward-button) point back to the previous hyperlink. These commands act cyclically; for instance, typing TAB at the last hyperlink moves back to the rst hyperlink. To view all documentation about any symbol in the text, move point to there and type C-c C-c (help-follow-symbol). This shows all available documentation about the symbolas a variable, function and/or face.

7.5 Keyword Search for Packages

Most optional features in Emacs are grouped into packages. Emacs contains several hundred built-in packages, and more can be installed over the network (see Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430). To make it easier to nd packages related to a topic, most packages are associated with one or more keywords based on what they do. Type C-h p (finder-bykeyword) to bring up a list of package keywords, together with a description of what the keywords mean. To view a list of packages for a given keyword, type RET on that line; this displays the list of packages in a Package Menu buer (see Section 32.1 [Package Menu], page 430).

Chapter 7: Help

44

C-h P (describe-package) prompts for the name of a package, and displays a help buer describing the attributes of the package and the features that it implements.

7.6 Help for International Language Support

For information on a specic language environment (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183), type C-h L (describe-language-environment). This displays a help buer describing the languages supported by the language environment, and listing the associated character sets, coding systems, and input methods, as well as some sample text for that language environment. The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays the le etc/HELLO, which demonstrates various character sets by showing how to say hello in many languages. The command C-h I (describe-input-method) describes an input method either a specied input method, or by default the input method currently in use. See Section 19.4 [Input Methods], page 185. The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) describes coding systems either a specied coding system, or the ones currently in use. See Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188.

7.7 Other Help Commands

C-h i (info) runs the Info program, which browses structured documentation les. The entire Emacs manual is available within Info, along with many other manuals for the GNU system. Type h after entering Info to run a tutorial on using Info. With a numeric argument n, C-h i selects the Info buer *info*<n >. This is useful if you want to browse multiple Info manuals simultaneously. If you specify just C-u as the prex argument, C-h i prompts for the name of a documentation le, so you can browse a le which doesnt have an entry in the top-level Info menu. The help commands C-h F function RET and C-h K key , described above, enter Info and go straight to the documentation of function or key. When editing a program, if you have an Info version of the manual for the programming language, you can use C-h S (info-lookup-symbol) to nd an entry for a symbol (keyword, function or variable) in the proper manual. The details of how this command works depend on the major mode. If something surprising happens, and you are not sure what you typed, use C-h l (view-lossage). C-h l displays your last 300 input keystrokes. If you see commands that you dont know, you can use C-h c to nd out what they do. To review recent echo area messages, use C-h e (view-echo-area-messages). This displays the buer *Messages*, where those messages are kept. Each Emacs major mode typically redenes a few keys and makes other changes in how editing works. C-h m (describe-mode) displays documentation on the current major mode, which normally describes the commands and features that are changed in this mode.

Chapter 7: Help

45

C-h b (describe-bindings) and C-h s (describe-syntax) show other information about the current environment within Emacs. C-h b displays a list of all the key bindings now in eect: rst the local bindings of the current minor modes, then the local bindings dened by the current major mode, and nally the global bindings (see Section 33.3 [Key Bindings], page 452). C-h s displays the contents of the syntax table, with explanations of each characters syntax (see Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). You can get a list of subcommands for a particular prex key by typing C-h (describe-prefix-bindings) after the prex key. (There are a few prex keys for which this does not workthose that provide their own bindings for C-h. One of these is ESC, because ESC C-h is actually C-M-h, which marks a defun.)

7.8 Help Files

Apart from the built-in documentation and manuals, Emacs contains several other les describing topics like copying conditions, release notes, instructions for debugging and reporting bugs, and so forth. You can use the following commands to view these les. Apart from C-h g, they all have the form C-h C-char . C-h C-c C-h C-d C-h C-e C-h C-f C-h g C-h C-m C-h C-n C-h C-o C-h C-p C-h C-t C-h C-w Display the rules under which you can copy and redistribute Emacs (describe-copying). Display help for debugging Emacs (view-emacs-debugging). Display information about where to get external packages (viewexternal-packages). Display the Emacs frequently-answered-questions list (view-emacsFAQ). Display information about the GNU Project (describe-gnuproject). Display information about ordering printed copies of Emacs manuals (view-order-manuals). Display the news le, which lists the new features in this version of Emacs (view-emacs-news). Display how to order or download the latest version of Emacs and other GNU software (describe-distribution). Display the list of known Emacs problems, sometimes with suggested workarounds (view-emacs-problems). Display the Emacs to-do list (view-emacs-todo). Display the full details on the complete absence of warranty for GNU Emacs (describe-no-warranty).

Chapter 7: Help

46

7.9 Help on Active Text and Tooltips

In Emacs, stretches of active text (text that does something special in response to mouse clicks or RET) often have associated help text. This includes hyperlinks in Emacs buers, as well as parts of the mode line. On graphical displays, as well as some text terminals which support mouse tracking, moving the mouse over the active text displays the help text as a tooltip. See Section 18.17 [Tooltips], page 178. On terminals that dont support mouse-tracking, you can display the help text for active buer text at point by typing C-h . (display-local-help). This shows the help text in the echo area. To display help text automatically whenever it is available at point, set the variable help-at-pt-display-when-idle to t.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

47

8 The Mark and the Region

Many Emacs commands operate on an arbitrary contiguous part of the current buer. To specify the text for such a command to operate on, you set the mark at one end of it, and move point to the other end. The text between point and the mark is called the region. The region always extends between point and the mark, no matter which one comes earlier in the text; each time you move point, the region changes. Setting the mark at a position in the text also activates it. When the mark is active, we say also that the region is active; Emacs indicates its extent by highlighting the text within it, using the region face (see Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439). After certain non-motion commands, including any command that changes the text in the buer, Emacs automatically deactivates the mark; this turns o the highlighting. You can also explicitly deactivate the mark at any time, by typing C-g (see Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468). The above default behavior is known as Transient Mark mode. Disabling Transient Mark mode switches Emacs to an alternative behavior, in which the region is usually not highlighted. See Section 8.7 [Disabled Transient Mark], page 52. Setting the mark in one buer has no eect on the marks in other buers. When you return to a buer with an active mark, the mark is at the same place as before. When multiple windows show the same buer, they can have dierent values of point, and thus dierent regions, but they all share one common mark position. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. Ordinarily, only the selected window highlights its region; however, if the variable highlight-nonselected-windows is non-nil, each window highlights its own region.

8.1 Setting the Mark

Here are some commands for setting the mark: C-SPC C-@ C-x C-x Set the mark at point, and activate it (set-mark-command). The same. Set the mark at point, and activate it; then move point where the mark used to be (exchange-point-and-mark).

Drag-Mouse-1 Set point and the mark around the text you drag across. Mouse-3 Set the mark at point, then move point to where you click (mousesave-then-kill).

Shifted cursor motion keys Set the mark at point if the mark is inactive, then move point. See Section 8.6 [Shift Selection], page 52.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

48

The most common way to set the mark is with C-SPC (set-mark-command)1 . This sets the mark where point is, and activates it. You can then move point away, leaving the mark behind. For example, suppose you wish to convert part of the buer to upper case. To accomplish this, go to one end of the desired text, type C-SPC, and move point until the desired portion of text is highlighted. Now type C-x C-u (upcase-region). This converts the text in the region to upper case, and then deactivates the mark. Whenever the mark is active, you can deactivate it by typing C-g (see Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468). Most commands that operate on the region also automatically deactivate the mark, like C-x C-u in the above example. Instead of setting the mark in order to operate on a region, you can also use it to remember a position in the buer (by typing C-SPC C-SPC), and later jump back there (by typing C-u C-SPC). See Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51, for details. The command C-x C-x (exchange-point-and-mark) exchanges the positions of point and the mark. C-x C-x is useful when you are satised with the position of point but want to move the other end of the region (where the mark is). Using C-x C-x a second time, if necessary, puts the mark at the new position with point back at its original position. Normally, if the mark is inactive, this command rst reactivates the mark wherever it was last set, to ensure that the region is left highlighted. However, if you call it with a prex argument, it leaves the mark inactive and the region unhighlighted; you can use this to jump to the mark in a manner similar to C-u C-SPC. You can also set the mark with the mouse. If you press the left mouse button (down-mouse-1) and drag the mouse across a range of text, this sets the mark where you rst pressed the mouse button and puts point where you release it. Alternatively, clicking the right mouse button (mouse-3) sets the mark at point and then moves point to where you clicked. See Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165, for a more detailed description of these mouse commands. Finally, you can set the mark by holding down the shift key while typing certain cursor motion commands (such as S-RIGHT, S-C-f, S-C-n, etc.) This is called shift-selection. It sets the mark at point before moving point, but only if there is no active mark set via shift-selection. The mark set by mouse commands and by shiftselection behaves slightly dierently from the usual mark: any subsequent unshifted cursor motion command deactivates it automatically. For details, See Section 8.6 [Shift Selection], page 52. Many commands that insert text, such as C-y (yank), set the mark at the other end of the inserted text, without activating it. This lets you easily return to that position (see Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51). You can tell that a command does this when it shows Mark set in the echo area.
1

There is no C-SPC character in ASCII; usually, typing C-SPC on a text terminal gives the character C-@. This key is also bound to set-mark-command, so unless you are unlucky enough to have a text terminal that behaves dierently, you might as well think of C-@ as C-SPC.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

49

Under X, every time the active region changes, Emacs saves the text in the region to the primary selection. This lets you insert that text into other X applications with mouse-2 clicks. See Section 9.3.2 [Primary Selection], page 60.

8.2 Commands to Mark Textual Objects

Here are commands for placing point and the mark around a textual object such as a word, list, paragraph or page: M-@ Set mark after end of next word (mark-word). This does not move point. Set mark after end of following balanced expression (mark-sexp). This does not move point. Move point to the beginning of the current paragraph, and set mark at the end (mark-paragraph). Move point to the beginning of the current defun, and set mark at the end (mark-defun). Move point to the beginning of the current page, and set mark at the end (mark-page). Move point to the beginning of the buer, and set mark at the end (mark-whole-buffer).

C-M-@

M-h

C-M-h

C-x C-p

C-x h

M-@ (mark-word) sets the mark at the end of the next word (see Section 22.1 [Words], page 214, for information about words). Repeated invocations of this command extend the region by advancing the mark one word at a time. As an exception, if the mark is active and located before point, M-@ moves the mark backwards from its current position one word at a time. This command also accepts a numeric argument n, which tells it to advance the mark by n words. A negative argument moves the mark back by n words. Similarly, C-M-@ (mark-sexp) puts the mark at the end of the next balanced expression (see Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256). Repeated invocations extend the region to subsequent expressions, while positive or negative numeric arguments move the mark forward or backward by the specied number of expressions. The other commands in the above list set both point and mark, so as to delimit an object in the buer. M-h (mark-paragraph) marks paragraphs (see Section 22.3 [Paragraphs], page 216), C-M-h (mark-defun) marks top-level denitions (see Section 23.2.2 [Moving by Defuns], page 251), and C-x C-p (mark-page) marks pages (see Section 22.4 [Pages], page 217). Repeated invocations again play the same role, extending the region to consecutive objects; similarly, numeric arguments specify how many objects to move the mark by. C-x h (mark-whole-buffer) sets up the entire buer as the region, by putting point at the beginning and the mark at the end.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

50

8.3 Operating on the Region

Once you have a region, here are some of the ways you can operate on it: Kill it with C-w (see Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54). Copy it to the kill ring with M-w (see Section 9.2 [Yanking], page 57). Convert case with C-x C-l or C-x C-u (see Section 22.6 [Case], page 223). Undo changes within it using C-u C-/ (see Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110). Replace text within it using M-% (see Section 12.9.4 [Query Replace], page 106). Indent it with C-x TAB or C-M-\ (see Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210). Fill it as text with M-x fill-region (see Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218). Check the spelling of words within it with M-$ (see Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112). Evaluate it as Lisp code with M-x eval-region (see Section 24.9 [Lisp Eval], page 288). Save it in a register with C-x r s (see Chapter 10 [Registers], page 66). Save it in a buer or a le (see Section 9.4 [Accumulating Text], page 61). Some commands have a default behavior when the mark is inactive, but operate on the region if the mark is active. For example, M-$ (ispell-word) normally checks the spelling of the word at point, but it checks the text in the region if the mark is active (see Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112). Normally, such commands use their default behavior if the region is empty (i.e., if mark and point are at the same position). If you want them to operate on the empty region, change the variable use-empty-active-region to t. As described in Section 4.3 [Erasing], page 20, the DEL (backward-deletechar) and DELETE (delete-forward-char) commands also act this way. If the mark is active, they delete the text in the region. (As an exception, if you supply a numeric argument n, where n is not one, these commands delete n characters regardless of whether the mark is active). If you change the variable deleteactive-region to nil, then these commands dont act dierently when the mark is active. If you change the value to kill, these commands kill the region instead of deleting it (see Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54). Other commands always operate on the region, and have no default behavior. Such commands usually have the word region in their names, like C-w (killregion) and C-x C-u (upcase-region). If the mark is inactive, they operate on the inactive regionthat is, on the text between point and the position at which the mark was last set (see Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51). To disable this behavior, change the variable mark-even-if-inactive to nil. Then these commands will instead signal an error if the mark is inactive. By default, text insertion occurs normally even if the mark is activefor example, typing a inserts the character a, then deactivates the mark. If you enable Delete Selection mode, a minor mode, then inserting text while the mark is active causes the text in the region to be deleted rst. To toggle Delete Selection mode on or o, type M-x delete-selection-mode.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

51

8.4 The Mark Ring

Each buer remembers previous locations of the mark, in the mark ring. Commands that set the mark also push the old mark onto this ring. One of the uses of the mark ring is to remember spots that you may want to go back to. C-SPC C-SPC Set the mark, pushing it onto the mark ring, without activating it. C-u C-SPC Move point to where the mark was, and restore the mark from the ring of former marks.

The command C-SPC C-SPC is handy when you want to use the mark to remember a position to which you may wish to return. It pushes the current point onto the mark ring, without activating the mark (which would cause Emacs to highlight the region). This is actually two consecutive invocations of C-SPC (set-mark-command); the rst C-SPC sets the mark, and the second C-SPC deactivates it. (When Transient Mark mode is o, C-SPC C-SPC instead activates Transient Mark mode temporarily; see Section 8.7 [Disabled Transient Mark], page 52.) To return to a marked position, use set-mark-command with a prex argument: C-u C-SPC. This moves point to where the mark was, and deactivates the mark if it was active. Each subsequent C-u C-SPC jumps to a prior position stored in the mark ring. The positions you move through in this way are not lost; they go to the end of the ring. If you set set-mark-command-repeat-pop to non-nil, then immediately after you type C-u C-SPC, you can type C-SPC instead of C-u C-SPC to cycle through the mark ring. By default, set-mark-command-repeat-pop is nil. Each buer has its own mark ring. All editing commands use the current buers mark ring. In particular, C-u C-SPC always stays in the same buer. The variable mark-ring-max species the maximum number of entries to keep in the mark ring. This defaults to 16 entries. If that many entries exist and another one is pushed, the earliest one in the list is discarded. Repeating C-u C-SPC cycles through the positions currently in the ring. If you want to move back to the same place over and over, the mark ring may not be convenient enough. If so, you can record the position in a register for later retrieval (see Section 10.1 [Saving Positions in Registers], page 66).

8.5 The Global Mark Ring

In addition to the ordinary mark ring that belongs to each buer, Emacs has a single global mark ring. Each time you set a mark, this is recorded in the global mark ring in addition to the current buers own mark ring, if you have switched buers since the previous mark setting. Hence, the global mark ring records a sequence of buers that you have been in, and, for each buer, a place where you set the mark. The length of the global mark ring is controlled by global-mark-ring-max, and is 16 by default.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

52

The command C-x C-SPC (pop-global-mark) jumps to the buer and position of the latest entry in the global ring. It also rotates the ring, so that successive uses of C-x C-SPC take you to earlier buers and mark positions.

8.6 Shift Selection

If you hold down the shift key while typing a cursor motion command, this sets the mark before moving point, so that the region extends from the original position of point to its new position. This feature is referred to as shift-selection. It is similar to the way text is selected in other editors. The mark set via shift-selection behaves a little dierently from what we have described above. Firstly, in addition to the usual ways of deactivating the mark (such as changing the buer text or typing C-g), the mark is deactivated by any unshifted cursor motion command. Secondly, any subsequent shifted cursor motion command avoids setting the mark anew. Therefore, a series of shifted cursor motion commands will continuously adjust the region. Shift-selection only works if the shifted cursor motion key is not already bound to a separate command (see Chapter 33 [Customization], page 434). For example, if you bind S-C-f to another command, typing S-C-f runs that command instead of performing a shift-selected version of C-f (forward-char). A mark set via mouse commands behaves the same as a mark set via shiftselection (see Section 8.1 [Setting Mark], page 47). For example, if you specify a region by dragging the mouse, you can continue to extend the region using shifted cursor motion commands. In either case, any unshifted cursor motion command deactivates the mark. To turn o shift-selection, set shift-select-mode to nil. Doing so does not disable setting the mark via mouse commands.

8.7 Disabling Transient Mark Mode

The default behavior of the mark and region, in which setting the mark activates it and highlights the region, is called Transient Mark mode. This is a minor mode that is enabled by default. It can be toggled with M-x transient-mark-mode, or with the Active Region Highlighting menu item in the Options menu. Turning it o switches Emacs to an alternative mode of operation: Setting the mark, with commands like C-SPC or C-x C-x, does not highlight the region. Therefore, you cant tell by looking where the mark is located; you have to remember. The usual solution to this problem is to set the mark and then use it soon, before you forget where it is. You can also check where the mark is by using C-x C-x, which exchanges the positions of the point and the mark (see Section 8.1 [Setting Mark], page 47). Many commands that move point long distances, like M-< and C-s, rst set the mark where point was.

Chapter 8: The Mark and the Region

53

Some commands, which ordinarily act on the region when the mark is active, no longer do so. For example, normally M-% (query-replace) performs replacements within the region, if the mark is active. When Transient Mark mode is o, it always operates from point to the end of the buer. Commands that act this way are identied in their own documentation. While Transient Mark mode is o, you can activate it temporarily using C-SPC C-SPC or C-u C-x C-x. C-SPC C-SPC Set the mark at point (like plain C-SPC) and enable Transient Mark mode just once, until the mark is deactivated. (This is not really a separate command; you are using the C-SPC command twice.) C-u C-x C-x Activate the mark and enable Transient Mark mode temporarily, until the mark is next deactivated. (This is the C-x C-x command, exchange-point-and-mark, with a prex argument.) These commands set or activate the mark, and enable Transient Mark mode only until the mark is deactivated. One reason you may want to use them is that some commands operate on the entire buer instead of the region when Transient Mark mode is o. Enabling Transient Mark mode momentarily gives you a way to use these commands on the region. When you specify a region with the mouse (see Section 8.1 [Setting Mark], page 47), or with shift-selection (see Section 8.6 [Shift Selection], page 52), this likewise activates Transient Mark mode temporarily and highlights the region.

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

54

9 Killing and Moving Text

In Emacs, killing means erasing text and copying it into the kill ring. Yanking means bringing text from the kill ring back into the buer. (Some applications use the terms cutting and pasting for similar operations.) The kill ring is so-named because it can be visualized as a set of blocks of text arranged in a ring, which you can access in cyclic order. See Section 9.2.1 [Kill Ring], page 57. Killing and yanking are the most common way to move or copy text within Emacs. It is very versatile, because there are commands for killing many dierent types of syntactic units.

9.1 Deletion and Killing

Most commands which erase text from the buer save it in the kill ring. These are known as kill commands, and their names normally contain the word kill (e.g. kill-line). The kill ring stores several recent kills, not just the last one, so killing is a very safe operation: you dont have to worry much about losing text that you previously killed. The kill ring is shared by all buers, so text that is killed in one buer can be yanked into another buer. When you use C-/ (undo) to undo a kill command (see Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110), that brings the killed text back into the buer, but does not remove it from the kill ring. On graphical displays, killing text also copies it to the system clipboard. See Section 9.3 [Cut and Paste], page 59. Commands that erase text but do not save it in the kill ring are known as delete commands; their names usually contain the word delete. These include C-d (delete-char) and DEL (delete-backward-char), which delete only one character at a time, and those commands that delete only spaces or newlines. Commands that can erase signicant amounts of nontrivial data generally do a kill operation instead. You can also use the mouse to kill and yank. See Section 9.3 [Cut and Paste], page 59. 9.1.1 Deletion Deletion means erasing text and not saving it in the kill ring. For the most part, the Emacs commands that delete text are those that erase just one character or only whitespace. DEL BACKSPACE Delete the previous character, or the text in the region if it is active (delete-backward-char). DELETE C-d Delete the next character, or the text in the region if it is active (delete-forward-char). Delete the next character (delete-char).

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text M-\ M-SPC C-x C-o M-^

55

Delete spaces and tabs around point (delete-horizontal-space). Delete spaces and tabs around point, leaving one space (just-onespace). Delete blank lines around the current line (delete-blank-lines). Join two lines by deleting the intervening newline, along with any indentation following it (delete-indentation).

We have already described the basic deletion commands DEL (deletebackward-char), DELETE (delete-forward-char), and C-d (delete-char). See Section 4.3 [Erasing], page 20. With a numeric argument, they delete the specied number of characters. If the numeric argument is omitted or one, they delete all the text in the region if it is active (see Section 8.3 [Using Region], page 50). The other delete commands are those that delete only whitespace characters: spaces, tabs and newlines. M-\ (delete-horizontal-space) deletes all the spaces and tab characters before and after point. With a prex argument, this only deletes spaces and tab characters before point. M-SPC (just-one-space) does likewise but leaves a single space before point, regardless of the number of spaces that existed previously (even if there were none before). With a numeric argument n, it leaves n spaces before point if n is positive; if n is negative, it deletes newlines in addition to spaces and tabs, leaving a single space before point. C-x C-o (delete-blank-lines) deletes all blank lines after the current line. If the current line is blank, it deletes all blank lines preceding the current line as well (leaving one blank line, the current line). On a solitary blank line, it deletes that line. M-^ (delete-indentation) joins the current line and the previous line, by deleting a newline and all surrounding spaces, usually leaving a single space. See Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210. 9.1.2 Killing by Lines C-k Kill rest of line or one or more lines (kill-line).

C-S-backspace Kill an entire line at once (kill-whole-line) The simplest kill command is C-k (kill-line). If used at the end of a line, it kills the line-ending newline character, merging the next line into the current one (thus, a blank line is entirely removed). Otherwise, C-k kills all the text from point up to the end of the line; if point was originally at the beginning of the line, this leaves the line blank. Spaces and tabs at the end of the line are ignored when deciding which case applies. As long as point is after the last visible character in the line, you can be sure that C-k will kill the newline. To kill an entire non-blank line, go to the beginning and type C-k twice. In this context, line means a logical text line, not a screen line (see Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23).

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

56

When C-k is given a positive argument n, it kills n lines and the newlines that follow them (text on the current line before point is not killed). With a negative argument n, it kills n lines preceding the current line, together with the text on the current line before point. C-k with an argument of zero kills the text before point on the current line. If the variable kill-whole-line is non-nil, C-k at the very beginning of a line kills the entire line including the following newline. This variable is normally nil. C-S-backspace (kill-whole-line) kills a whole line including its newline, regardless of the position of point within the line. Note that many text terminals will prevent you from typing the key sequence C-S-backspace. 9.1.3 Other Kill Commands C-w M-w M-d M-DEL C-x DEL M-k C-M-k M-z char Kill the region (kill-region). Copy the region into the kill ring (kill-ring-save). Kill the next word (kill-word). See Section 22.1 [Words], page 214. Kill one word backwards (backward-kill-word). Kill back to beginning of sentence (backward-kill-sentence). See Section 22.2 [Sentences], page 215. Kill to the end of the sentence (kill-sentence). Kill the following balanced expression (kill-sexp). See Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256. Kill through the next occurrence of char (zap-to-char).

One of the commonly-used kill commands is C-w (kill-region), which kills the text in the region (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). Similarly, M-w (kill-ringsave) copies the text in the region into the kill ring without removing it from the buer. If the mark is inactive when you type C-w or M-w, the command acts on the text between point and where you last set the mark (see Section 8.3 [Using Region], page 50). Emacs also provides commands to kill specic syntactic units: words, with M-DEL and M-d (see Section 22.1 [Words], page 214); balanced expressions, with C-M-k (see Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256); and sentences, with C-x DEL and M-k (see Section 22.2 [Sentences], page 215). The command M-z (zap-to-char) combines killing with searching: it reads a character and kills from point up to (and including) the next occurrence of that character in the buer. A numeric argument acts as a repeat count; a negative argument means to search backward and kill text before point. 9.1.4 Options for Killing Some specialized buers contain read-only text, which cannot be modied and therefore cannot be killed. The kill commands work specially in a read-only buer: they move over text and copy it to the kill ring, without actually deleting it from the

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

57

buer. Normally, they also beep and display an error message when this happens. But if you set the variable kill-read-only-ok to a non-nil value, they just print a message in the echo area to explain why the text has not been erased. If you change the variable kill-do-not-save-duplicates to a non-nil value, identical subsequent kills yield a single kill-ring entry, without duplication.

9.2 Yanking
Yanking means reinserting text previously killed. The usual way to move or copy text is to kill it and then yank it elsewhere. C-y M-y C-M-w Yank the last kill into the buer, at point (yank). Replace the text just yanked with an earlier batch of killed text (yankpop). See Section 9.2.2 [Earlier Kills], page 58. Cause the following command, if it is a kill command, to append to the previous kill (append-next-kill). See Section 9.2.3 [Appending Kills], page 58.

The basic yanking command is C-y (yank). It inserts the most recent kill, leaving the cursor at the end of the inserted text. It also sets the mark at the beginning of the inserted text, without activating the mark; this lets you jump easily to that position, if you wish, with C-u C-SPC (see Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51). With a plain prex argument (C-u C-y), the command instead leaves the cursor in front of the inserted text, and sets the mark at the end. Using any other prex argument species an earlier kill; e.g. C-u 4 C-y reinserts the fourth most recent kill. See Section 9.2.2 [Earlier Kills], page 58. On graphical displays, C-y rst checks if another application has placed any text in the system clipboard more recently than the last Emacs kill. If so, it inserts the text in the clipboard instead. Thus, Emacs eectively treats cut or copy clipboard operations performed in other applications like Emacs kills, except that they are not recorded in the kill ring. See Section 9.3 [Cut and Paste], page 59, for details. 9.2.1 The Kill Ring The kill ring is a list of blocks of text that were previously killed. There is only one kill ring, shared by all buers, so you can kill text in one buer and yank it in another buer. This is the usual way to move text from one buer to another. (There are several other methods: for instance, you could store the text in a register; see Chapter 10 [Registers], page 66. See Section 9.4 [Accumulating Text], page 61, for some other ways to move text around.) The maximum number of entries in the kill ring is controlled by the variable kill-ring-max. The default is 60. If you make a new kill when this limit has been reached, Emacs makes room by deleting the oldest entry in the kill ring. The actual contents of the kill ring are stored in a variable named kill-ring; you can view the entire contents of the kill ring with C-h v kill-ring.

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text 9.2.2 Yanking Earlier Kills

58

As explained in Section 9.2 [Yanking], page 57, you can use a numeric argument to C-y to yank text that is no longer the most recent kill. This is useful if you remember which kill ring entry you want. If you dont, you can use the M-y (yankpop) command to cycle through the possibilities. If the previous command was a yank command, M-y takes the text that was yanked and replaces it with the text from an earlier kill. So, to recover the text of the next-to-the-last kill, rst use C-y to yank the last kill, and then use M-y to replace it with the previous kill. M-y is allowed only after a C-y or another M-y. You can understand M-y in terms of a last yank pointer which points at an entry in the kill ring. Each time you kill, the last yank pointer moves to the newly made entry at the front of the ring. C-y yanks the entry which the last yank pointer points to. M-y moves the last yank pointer to a dierent entry, and the text in the buer changes to match. Enough M-y commands can move the pointer to any entry in the ring, so you can get any entry into the buer. Eventually the pointer reaches the end of the ring; the next M-y loops back around to the rst entry again. M-y moves the last yank pointer around the ring, but it does not change the order of the entries in the ring, which always runs from the most recent kill at the front to the oldest one still remembered. M-y can take a numeric argument, which tells it how many entries to advance the last yank pointer by. A negative argument moves the pointer toward the front of the ring; from the front of the ring, it moves around to the last entry and continues forward from there. Once the text you are looking for is brought into the buer, you can stop doing M-y commands and it will stay there. Its just a copy of the kill ring entry, so editing it in the buer does not change whats in the ring. As long as no new killing is done, the last yank pointer remains at the same place in the kill ring, so repeating C-y will yank another copy of the same previous kill. When you call C-y with a numeric argument, that also sets the last yank pointer to the entry that it yanks. 9.2.3 Appending Kills Normally, each kill command pushes a new entry onto the kill ring. However, two or more kill commands in a row combine their text into a single entry, so that a single C-y yanks all the text as a unit, just as it was before it was killed. Thus, if you want to yank text as a unit, you need not kill all of it with one command; you can keep killing line after line, or word after word, until you have killed it all, and you can still get it all back at once. Commands that kill forward from point add onto the end of the previous killed text. Commands that kill backward from point add text onto the beginning. This way, any sequence of mixed forward and backward kill commands puts all the killed text into one entry without rearrangement. Numeric arguments do not break the sequence of appending kills. For example, suppose the buer contains this text:

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

59

This is a line of sample text. with point shown by . If you type M-d M-DEL M-d M-DEL, killing alternately forward and backward, you end up with a line of sample as one entry in the kill ring, and This is text. in the buer. (Note the double space between is and text, which you can clean up with M-SPC or M-q.) Another way to kill the same text is to move back two words with M-b M-b, then kill all four words forward with C-u M-d. This produces exactly the same results in the buer and in the kill ring. M-f M-f C-u M-DEL kills the same text, all going backward; once again, the result is the same. The text in the kill ring entry always has the same order that it had in the buer before you killed it. If a kill command is separated from the last kill command by other commands (not just numeric arguments), it starts a new entry on the kill ring. But you can force it to append by rst typing the command C-M-w (append-next-kill) right before it. The C-M-w tells the following command, if it is a kill command, to append the text it kills to the last killed text, instead of starting a new entry. With C-M-w, you can kill several separated pieces of text and accumulate them to be yanked back in one place. A kill command following M-w (kill-ring-save) does not append to the text that M-w copied into the kill ring.

9.3 Cut and Paste Operations on Graphical Displays

In most graphical desktop environments, you can transfer data (usually text) between dierent applications using a system facility called the clipboard. On X, two other similar facilities are available: the primary selection and the secondary selection. When Emacs is run on a graphical display, its kill and yank commands integrate with these facilities, so that you can easily transfer text between Emacs and other graphical applications. By default, Emacs uses UTF-8 as the coding system for inter-program text transfers. If you nd that the pasted text is not what you expected, you can specify another coding system by typing C-x RET x or C-x RET X. You can also request a dierent data type by customizing x-select-request-type. See Section 19.11 [Communication Coding], page 194. 9.3.1 Using the Clipboard The clipboard is the facility that most graphical applications use for cutting and pasting. When the clipboard exists, the kill and yank commands in Emacs make use of it. When you kill some text with a command such as C-w (kill-region), or copy it to the kill ring with a command such as M-w (kill-ring-save), that text is also put in the clipboard. When an Emacs kill command puts text in the clipboard, the existing clipboard contents are normally lost. Optionally, you can change save-interprogram-pastebefore-kill to t. Then Emacs will rst save the clipboard to its kill ring, prevent-

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

60

ing you from losing the old clipboard dataat the risk of high memory consumption if that data turns out to be large. Yank commands, such as C-y (yank), also use the clipboard. If another application owns the clipboardi.e., if you cut or copied text there more recently than your last kill command in Emacsthen Emacs yanks from the clipboard instead of the kill ring. Normally, rotating the kill ring with M-y (yank-pop) does not alter the clipboard. However, if you change yank-pop-change-selection to t, then M-y saves the new yank to the clipboard. To prevent kill and yank commands from accessing the clipboard, change the variable x-select-enable-clipboard to nil. Many X desktop environments support a feature called the clipboard manager. If you exit Emacs while it is the current owner of the clipboard data, and there is a clipboard manager running, Emacs transfers the clipboard data to the clipboard manager so that it is not lost. In some circumstances, this may cause a delay when exiting Emacs; if you wish to prevent Emacs from transferring data to the clipboard manager, change the variable x-select-enable-clipboard-manager to nil. Prior to Emacs 24, the kill and yank commands used the primary selection (see Section 9.3.2 [Primary Selection], page 60), not the clipboard. If you prefer this behavior, change x-select-enable-clipboard to nil, x-select-enable-primary to t, and mouse-drag-copy-region to t. In this case, you can use the following commands to act explicitly on the clipboard: clipboard-kill-region kills the region and saves it to the clipboard; clipboard-kill-ring-save copies the region to the kill ring and saves it to the clipboard; and clipboard-yank yanks the contents of the clipboard at point. 9.3.2 Cut and Paste with Other Window Applications Under the X Window System, there exists a primary selection containing the last stretch of text selected in an X application (usually by dragging the mouse). Typically, this text can be inserted into other X applications by mouse-2 clicks. The primary selection is separate from the clipboard. Its contents are more fragile; they are overwritten each time you select text with the mouse, whereas the clipboard is only overwritten by explicit cut or copy commands. Under X, whenever the region is active (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47), the text in the region is saved in the primary selection. This applies regardless of whether the region was made by dragging or clicking the mouse (see Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165), or by keyboard commands (e.g. by typing C-SPC and moving point; see Section 8.1 [Setting Mark], page 47). If you change the variable select-active-regions to only, Emacs saves only temporarily active regions to the primary selection, i.e. those made with the mouse or with shift selection (see Section 8.6 [Shift Selection], page 52). If you change select-active-regions to nil, Emacs avoids saving active regions to the primary selection entirely.

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

61

To insert the primary selection into an Emacs buer, click mouse-2 (mouseyank-primary) where you want to insert it. See Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165. MS-Windows provides no primary selection, but Emacs emulates it within a single Emacs session by storing the selected text internally. Therefore, all the features and commands related to the primary selection work on Windows as they do on X, for cutting and pasting within the same session, but not across Emacs sessions or with other applications. 9.3.3 Secondary Selection In addition to the primary selection, the X Window System provides a second similar facility known as the secondary selection. Nowadays, few X applications make use of the secondary selection, but you can access it using the following Emacs commands: M-Drag-Mouse-1 Set the secondary selection, with one end at the place where you press down the button, and the other end at the place where you release it (mouse-set-secondary). The selected text is highlighted, using the secondary-selection face, as you drag. The window scrolls automatically if you drag the mouse o the top or bottom of the window, just like mouse-set-region (see Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165). This command does not alter the kill ring. M-Mouse-1 M-Mouse-3 Set one endpoint for the secondary selection (mouse-startsecondary). Set the secondary selection, with one end at the position clicked and the other at the position specied with M-Mouse-1 (mousesecondary-save-then-kill). This also puts the selected text in the kill ring. A second M-Mouse-3 at the same place kills the secondary selection just made. Insert the secondary selection where you click, placing point at the end of the yanked text (mouse-yank-secondary).

M-Mouse-2

Double or triple clicking of M-Mouse-1 operates on words and lines, much like Mouse-1. If mouse-yank-at-point is non-nil, M-Mouse-2 yanks at point. Then it does not matter precisely where you click, or even which of the frames windows you click on. See Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165.

9.4 Accumulating Text

Usually we copy or move text by killing it and yanking it, but there are other convenient methods for copying one block of text in many places, or for copying many scattered blocks of text into one place. Here we describe the commands to accumulate scattered pieces of text into a buer or into a le.

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text M-x append-to-buffer Append region to the contents of a specied buer. M-x prepend-to-buffer Prepend region to the contents of a specied buer.

62

M-x copy-to-buffer Copy region into a specied buer, deleting that buers old contents. M-x insert-buffer Insert the contents of a specied buer into current buer at point. M-x append-to-file Append region to the contents of a specied le, at the end. To accumulate text into a buer, use M-x append-to-buffer. This reads a buer name, then inserts a copy of the region into the buer specied. If you specify a nonexistent buer, append-to-buffer creates the buer. The text is inserted wherever point is in that buer. If you have been using the buer for editing, the copied text goes into the middle of the text of the buer, starting from wherever point happens to be at that moment. Point in that buer is left at the end of the copied text, so successive uses of append-to-buffer accumulate the text in the specied buer in the same order as they were copied. Strictly speaking, append-to-buffer does not always append to the text already in the buerit appends only if point in that buer is at the end. However, if append-to-buffer is the only command you use to alter a buer, then point is always at the end. M-x prepend-to-buffer is just like append-to-buffer except that point in the other buer is left before the copied text, so successive prependings add text in reverse order. M-x copy-to-buffer is similar, except that any existing text in the other buer is deleted, so the buer is left containing just the text newly copied into it. The command M-x insert-buffer can be used to retrieve the accumulated text from another buer. This prompts for the name of a buer, and inserts a copy of all the text in that buer into the current buer at point, leaving point at the beginning of the inserted text. It also adds the position of the end of the inserted text to the mark ring, without activating the mark. See Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150, for background information on buers. Instead of accumulating text in a buer, you can append text directly into a le with M-x append-to-file. This prompts for a lename, and adds the text of the region to the end of the specied le. The le is changed immediately on disk. You should use append-to-file only with les that are not being visited in Emacs. Using it on a le that you are editing in Emacs would change the le behind Emacss back, which can lead to losing some of your editing. Another way to move text around is to store it in a register. See Chapter 10 [Registers], page 66.

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

63

9.5 Rectangles
Rectangle commands operate on rectangular areas of the text: all the characters between a certain pair of columns, in a certain range of lines. Emacs has commands to kill rectangles, yank killed rectangles, clear them out, ll them with blanks or text, or delete them. Rectangle commands are useful with text in multicolumn formats, and for changing text into or out of such formats. To specify a rectangle for a command to work on, set the mark at one corner and point at the opposite corner. The rectangle thus specied is called the regionrectangle. If point and the mark are in the same column, the region-rectangle is empty. If they are in the same line, the region-rectangle is one line high. The region-rectangle is controlled in much the same way as the region is controlled. But remember that a given combination of point and mark values can be interpreted either as a region or as a rectangle, depending on the command that uses them. C-x r k C-x r d C-x r y C-x r o Kill the text of the region-rectangle, saving its contents as the last killed rectangle (kill-rectangle). Delete the text of the region-rectangle (delete-rectangle). Yank the last killed rectangle with its upper left corner at point (yankrectangle). Insert blank space to ll the space of the region-rectangle (openrectangle). This pushes the previous contents of the region-rectangle to the right. Insert line numbers along the left edge of the region-rectangle (rectangle-number-lines). This pushes the previous contents of the region-rectangle to the right. Clear the region-rectangle by replacing all of its contents with spaces (clear-rectangle).

C-x r N

C-x r c

M-x delete-whitespace-rectangle Delete whitespace in each of the lines on the specied rectangle, starting from the left edge column of the rectangle. C-x r t string RET Replace rectangle contents with string on each line (stringrectangle). M-x string-insert-rectangle RET string RET Insert string on each line of the rectangle. The rectangle operations fall into two classes: commands to erase or insert rectangles, and commands to make blank rectangles. There are two ways to erase the text in a rectangle: C-x r d (delete-rectangle) to delete the text outright, or C-x r k (kill-rectangle) to remove the text and save it as the last killed rectangle. In both cases, erasing the region-rectangle is like

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

64

erasing the specied text on each line of the rectangle; if there is any following text on the line, it moves backwards to ll the gap. Killing a rectangle is not killing in the usual sense; the rectangle is not stored in the kill ring, but in a special place that only records the most recent rectangle killed. This is because yanking a rectangle is so dierent from yanking linear text that dierent yank commands have to be used. Yank-popping is not dened for rectangles. To yank the last killed rectangle, type C-x r y (yank-rectangle). The rectangles rst line is inserted at point, the rectangles second line is inserted at the same horizontal position one line vertically below, and so on. The number of lines aected is determined by the height of the saved rectangle. For example, you can convert two single-column lists into a double-column list by killing one of the single-column lists as a rectangle, and then yanking it beside the other list. You can also copy rectangles into and out of registers with C-x r r r and C-x r i r . See Section 10.3 [Rectangle Registers], page 67. There are two commands you can use for making blank rectangles: C-x r c (clear-rectangle) blanks out existing text in the region-rectangle, and C-x r o (open-rectangle) inserts a blank rectangle. M-x delete-whitespace-rectangle deletes horizontal whitespace starting from a particular column. This applies to each of the lines in the rectangle, and the column is specied by the left edge of the rectangle. The right edge of the rectangle does not make any dierence to this command. The command C-x r N (rectangle-number-lines) inserts line numbers along the left edge of the region-rectangle. Normally, the numbering begins from 1 (for the rst line of the rectangle). With a prex argument, the command prompts for a number to begin from, and for a format string with which to print the numbers (see Section Formatting Strings in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). The command C-x r t (string-rectangle) replaces the contents of a regionrectangle with a string on each line. The strings width need not be the same as the width of the rectangle. If the strings width is less, the text after the rectangle shifts left; if the string is wider than the rectangle, the text after the rectangle shifts right. The command M-x string-insert-rectangle is similar to string-rectangle, but inserts the string on each line, shifting the original text to the right.

9.6 CUA Bindings

The command M-x cua-mode sets up key bindings that are compatible with the Common User Access (CUA) system used in many other applications. When CUA mode is enabled, the keys C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z invoke commands that cut (kill), copy, paste (yank), and undo respectively. The C-x and C-c keys perform cut and copy only if the region is active. Otherwise, they still act as prex keys, so that standard Emacs commands like C-x C-c still work. Note that this

Chapter 9: Killing and Moving Text

65

means the variable mark-even-if-inactive has no eect for C-x and C-c (see Section 8.3 [Using Region], page 50). To enter an Emacs command like C-x C-f while the mark is active, use one of the following methods: either hold Shift together with the prex key, e.g. S-C-x C-f, or quickly type the prex key twice, e.g. C-x C-x C-f. To disable the overriding of standard Emacs binding by CUA mode, while retaining the other features of CUA mode described below, set the variable cuaenable-cua-keys to nil. In CUA mode, typed text replaces the active region as in Delete-Selection mode (see Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165). CUA mode provides enhanced rectangle support with visible rectangle highlighting. Use C-RET to start a rectangle, extend it using the movement commands, and cut or copy it using C-x or C-c. RET moves the cursor to the next (clockwise) corner of the rectangle, so you can easily expand it in any direction. Normal text you type is inserted to the left or right of each line in the rectangle (on the same side as the cursor). With CUA you can easily copy text and rectangles into and out of registers by providing a one-digit numeric prex to the kill, copy, and yank commands, e.g. C-1 C-c copies the region into register 1, and C-2 C-v yanks the contents of register 2. CUA mode also has a global mark feature which allows easy moving and copying of text between buers. Use C-S-SPC to toggle the global mark on and o. When the global mark is on, all text that you kill or copy is automatically inserted at the global mark, and text you type is inserted at the global mark rather than at the current position. For example, to copy words from various buers into a word list in a given buer, set the global mark in the target buer, then navigate to each of the words you want in the list, mark it (e.g. with S-M-f), copy it to the list with C-c or M-w, and insert a newline after the word in the target list by pressing RET.

Chapter 10: Registers

66

10 Registers
Emacs registers are compartments where you can save text, rectangles, positions, and other things for later use. Once you save text or a rectangle in a register, you can copy it into the buer once, or many times; once you save a position in a register, you can jump back to that position once, or many times. Each register has a name that consists of a single character, which we will denote by r ; r can be a letter (such as a) or a number (such as 1); case matters, so register a is not the same as register A. A register can store a position, a piece of text, a rectangle, a number, a window conguration, or a le name, but only one thing at any given time. Whatever you store in a register remains there until you store something else in that register. To see what register r contains, use M-x view-register: M-x view-register RET r Display a description of what register r contains. Bookmarks record les and positions in them, so you can return to those positions when you look at the le again. Bookmarks are similar in spirit to registers, so they are also documented in this chapter.

10.1 Saving Positions in Registers

C-x r SPC r Record the position of point and the current buer in register r (point-to-register). C-x r j r Jump to the position and buer saved in register r (jump-toregister).

Typing C-x r SPC (point-to-register), followed by a character r , saves both the position of point and the current buer in register r. The register retains this information until you store something else in it. The command C-x r j r switches to the buer recorded in register r, and moves point to the recorded position. The contents of the register are not changed, so you can jump to the saved position any number of times. If you use C-x r j to go to a saved position, but the buer it was saved from has been killed, C-x r j tries to create the buer again by visiting the same le. Of course, this works only for buers that were visiting les.

10.2 Saving Text in Registers

When you want to insert a copy of the same piece of text several times, it may be inconvenient to yank it from the kill ring, since each subsequent kill moves that entry further down the ring. An alternative is to store the text in a register and later retrieve it. C-x r s r Copy region into register r (copy-to-register).

Chapter 10: Registers C-x r i r Insert text from register r (insert-register).

67

M-x append-to-register RET r Append region to text in register r. M-x prepend-to-register RET r Prepend region to text in register r. C-x r s r stores a copy of the text of the region into the register named r. If the mark is inactive, Emacs rst reactivates the mark where it was last set. The mark is deactivated at the end of this command. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47. C-u C-x r s r , the same command with a prex argument, copies the text into register r and deletes the text from the buer as well; you can think of this as moving the region text into the register. M-x append-to-register RET r appends the copy of the text in the region to the text already stored in the register named r. If invoked with a prex argument, it deletes the region after appending it to the register. The command prependto-register is similar, except that it prepends the region text to the text in the register instead of appending it. C-x r i r inserts in the buer the text from register r. Normally it leaves point before the text and sets the mark after, without activating it. With a numeric argument, it instead puts point after the text and the mark before.

10.3 Saving Rectangles in Registers

A register can contain a rectangle instead of linear text. See Section 9.5 [Rectangles], page 63, for basic information on how to specify a rectangle in the buer. C-x r r r C-x r i r Copy the region-rectangle into register r (copy-rectangle-toregister). With numeric argument, delete it as well. Insert the rectangle stored in register r (if it contains a rectangle) (insert-register).

The C-x r i r (insert-register) command, previously documented in Section 10.2 [Text Registers], page 66, inserts a rectangle rather than a text string, if the register contains a rectangle.

10.4 Saving Window Congurations in Registers

You can save the window conguration of the selected frame in a register, or even the conguration of all windows in all frames, and restore the conguration later. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159, for information about window congurations. C-x r w r C-x r f r Save the state of the selected frames windows in register r (windowconfiguration-to-register). Save the state of all frames, including all their windows, in register r (frame-configuration-to-register).

Use C-x r j r to restore a window or frame conguration. This is the same command used to restore a cursor position. When you restore a frame conguration,

Chapter 10: Registers

68

any existing frames not included in the conguration become invisible. If you wish to delete these frames instead, use C-u C-x r j r .

10.5 Keeping Numbers in Registers

There are commands to store a number in a register, to insert the number in the buer in decimal, and to increment it. These commands can be useful in keyboard macros (see Chapter 14 [Keyboard Macros], page 116). C-u number C-x r n r Store number into register r (number-to-register). C-u number C-x r + r Increment the number in register r by number (increment-register). C-x r i r Insert the number from register r into the buer.

C-x r i is the same command used to insert any other sort of register contents into the buer. C-x r + with no numeric argument increments the register value by 1; C-x r n with no numeric argument stores zero in the register.

10.6 Keeping File Names in Registers

If you visit certain le names frequently, you can visit them more conveniently if you put their names in registers. Heres the Lisp code used to put a le name in a register:
(set-register ?r (file . name ))

For example,
(set-register ?z (file . "/gd/gnu/emacs/19.0/src/ChangeLog"))

puts the le name shown in register z. To visit the le whose name is in register r, type C-x r j r . (This is the same command used to jump to a position or restore a frame conguration.)

10.7 Bookmarks
Bookmarks are somewhat like registers in that they record positions you can jump to. Unlike registers, they have long names, and they persist automatically from one Emacs session to the next. The prototypical use of bookmarks is to record where you were reading in various les. C-x r m RET Set the bookmark for the visited le, at point. C-x r m bookmark RET Set the bookmark named bookmark at point (bookmark-set). C-x r b bookmark RET Jump to the bookmark named bookmark (bookmark-jump). C-x r l List all bookmarks (list-bookmarks).

Chapter 10: Registers M-x bookmark-save Save all the current bookmark values in the default bookmark le.

69

The prototypical use for bookmarks is to record one current position in each of several les. So the command C-x r m, which sets a bookmark, uses the visited le name as the default for the bookmark name. If you name each bookmark after the le it points to, then you can conveniently revisit any of those les with C-x r b, and move to the position of the bookmark at the same time. To display a list of all your bookmarks in a separate buer, type C-x r l (listbookmarks). If you switch to that buer, you can use it to edit your bookmark denitions or annotate the bookmarks. Type C-h m in the bookmark buer for more information about its special editing commands. When you kill Emacs, Emacs saves your bookmarks, if you have changed any bookmark values. You can also save the bookmarks at any time with the M-x bookmark-save command. Bookmarks are saved to the le ~/.emacs.d/bookmarks (for compatibility with older versions of Emacs, if you have a le named ~/.emacs.bmk, that is used instead). The bookmark commands load your default bookmark le automatically. This saving and loading is how bookmarks persist from one Emacs session to the next. If you set the variable bookmark-save-flag to 1, each command that sets a bookmark will also save your bookmarks; this way, you dont lose any bookmark values even if Emacs crashes. The value, if a number, says how many bookmark modications should go by between saving. If you set this variable to nil, Emacs only saves bookmarks if you explicitly use M-x bookmark-save. Bookmark position values are saved with surrounding context, so that bookmark-jump can nd the proper position even if the le is modied slightly. The variable bookmark-search-size says how many characters of context to record on each side of the bookmarks position. Here are some additional commands for working with bookmarks: M-x bookmark-load RET filename RET Load a le named lename that contains a list of bookmark values. You can use this command, as well as bookmark-write, to work with other les of bookmark values in addition to your default bookmark le. M-x bookmark-write RET filename RET Save all the current bookmark values in the le lename. M-x bookmark-delete RET bookmark RET Delete the bookmark named bookmark. M-x bookmark-insert-location RET bookmark RET Insert in the buer the name of the le that bookmark bookmark points to. M-x bookmark-insert RET bookmark RET Insert in the buer the contents of the le that bookmark bookmark points to.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

70

11 Controlling the Display

Since only part of a large buer ts in the window, Emacs has to show only a part of it. This chapter describes commands and variables that let you specify which part of the text you want to see, and how the text is displayed.

11.1 Scrolling
If a window is too small to display all the text in its buer, it displays only a portion of it. Scrolling commands change which portion of the buer is displayed. Scrolling forward or up advances the portion of the buer displayed in the window; equivalently, it moves the buer text upwards relative to the window. Scrolling backward or down displays an earlier portion of the buer, and moves the text downwards relative to the window. In Emacs, scrolling up or down refers to the direction that the text moves in the window, not the direction that the window moves relative to the text. This terminology was adopted by Emacs before the modern meaning of scrolling up and scrolling down became widespread. Hence, the strange result that PAGEDOWN scrolls up in the Emacs sense. The portion of a buer displayed in a window always contains point. If you move point past the bottom or top of the window, scrolling occurs automatically to bring it back onscreen (see Section 11.3 [Auto Scrolling], page 72). You can also scroll explicitly with these commands: C-v NEXT PAGEDOWN Scroll forward by nearly a full window (scroll-up-command). M-v PRIOR PAGEUP

Scroll backward (scroll-down-command).

C-v (scroll-up-command) scrolls forward by nearly the whole window height. The eect is to take the two lines at the bottom of the window and put them at the top, followed by lines that were not previously visible. If point was in the text that scrolled o the top, it ends up on the windows new topmost line. The NEXT (or PAGEDOWN) key is equivalent to C-v. M-v (scroll-down-command) scrolls backward in a similar way. The PRIOR (or PAGEUP) key is equivalent to M-v. The number of lines of overlap left by these scroll commands is controlled by the variable next-screen-context-lines, whose default value is 2. You can supply the commands with a numeric prex argument, n, to scroll by n lines; Emacs attempts to leave point unchanged, so that the text and point move up or down together. C-v with a negative argument is like M-v and vice versa. By default, these commands signal an error (by beeping or ashing the screen) if no more scrolling is possible, because the window has reached the beginning or

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

71

end of the buer. If you change the variable scroll-error-top-bottom to t, the command moves point to the farthest possible position. If point is already there, the command signals an error. Some users like scroll commands to keep point at the same screen position, so that scrolling back to the same screen conveniently returns point to its original position. You can enable this behavior via the variable scroll-preserve-screenposition. If the value is t, Emacs adjusts point to keep the cursor at the same screen position whenever a scroll command moves it o-window, rather than moving it to the topmost or bottommost line. With any other non-nil value, Emacs adjusts point this way even if the scroll command leaves point in the window. This variable aects all the scroll commands documented in this section, as well as scrolling with the mouse wheel (see Section 18.1 [Mouse Commands], page 165); in general, it aects any command that has a non-nil scroll-command property. See Section Property Lists in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . The commands M-x scroll-up and M-x scroll-down behave similarly to scroll-up-command and scroll-down-command, except they do not obey scroll-error-top-bottom. Prior to Emacs 24, these were the default commands for scrolling up and down. The commands M-x scroll-up-line and M-x scroll-down-line scroll the current window by one line at a time. If you intend to use any of these commands, you might want to give them key bindings (see Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455).

11.2 Recentering
C-l Scroll the selected window so the current line is the center-most text line; on subsequent consecutive invocations, make the current line the top line, the bottom line, and so on in cyclic order. Possibly redisplay the screen too (recenter-top-bottom).

M-x recenter Scroll the selected window so the current line is the center-most text line. Possibly redisplay the screen too. C-M-l Scroll heuristically to bring useful information onto the screen (reposition-window).

The C-l (recenter-top-bottom) command recenters the selected window, scrolling it so that the current screen line is exactly in the center of the window, or as close to the center as possible. Typing C-l twice in a row (C-l C-l) scrolls the window so that point is on the topmost screen line. Typing a third C-l scrolls the window so that point is on the bottom-most screen line. Each successive C-l cycles through these three positions. You can change the cycling order by customizing the list variable recenterpositions. Each list element should be the symbol top, middle, or bottom, or a number; an integer means to move the line to the specied screen line, while a oating-point number between 0.0 and 1.0 species a percentage of the screen space from the top of the window. The default, (middle top bottom), is the cycling order

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

72

described above. Furthermore, if you change the variable scroll-margin to a nonzero value n, C-l always leaves at least n screen lines between point and the top or bottom of the window (see Section 11.3 [Auto Scrolling], page 72). You can also give C-l a prex argument. A plain prex argument, C-u C-l, simply recenters point. A positive argument n puts point n lines down from the top of the window. An argument of zero puts point on the topmost line. A negative argument -n puts point n lines from the bottom of the window. When given an argument, C-l does not clear the screen or cycle through dierent screen positions. If the variable recenter-redisplay has a non-nil value, each invocation of C-l also clears and redisplays the screen; the special value tty (the default) says to do this on text-terminal frames only. Redisplaying is useful in case the screen becomes garbled for any reason (see Section 34.2.3 [Screen Garbled], page 470). The more primitive command M-x recenter behaves like recenter-topbottom, but does not cycle among screen positions. C-M-l (reposition-window) scrolls the current window heuristically in a way designed to get useful information onto the screen. For example, in a Lisp le, this command tries to get the entire current defun onto the screen if possible.

11.3 Automatic Scrolling

Emacs performs automatic scrolling when point moves out of the visible portion of the text. Normally, this centers point vertically within the window. However, if you set scroll-conservatively to a small number n, then if you move point just a little o the screen (less than n lines), Emacs scrolls the text just far enough to bring point back on screen. By default, scroll-conservatively is 0. If you set scrollconservatively to a large number (larger than 100), Emacs will never center point as result of scrolling, even if point moves far away from the text previously displayed in the window. With such a large value, Emacs will always scroll text just enough for bringing point into view, so point will end up at the top or bottom of the window, depending on the scroll direction. The variable scroll-step determines how many lines to scroll the window when point moves o the screen. If moving by that number of lines fails to bring point back into view, point is centered instead. The default value is zero, which causes point to always be centered after scrolling. When the window does scroll by a distance longer than scroll-step, you can control how aggressively it scrolls by setting the variables scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively. The value of scroll-up-aggressively should be either nil, or a fraction f between 0 and 1. A fraction species where on the screen to put point when scrolling upward, i.e. forward. When point goes o the window end, the new start position is chosen to put point f parts of the window height from the bottom margin. Thus, larger f means more aggressive scrolling: more new text is brought into view. The default value, nil, is equivalent to 0.5.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

73

Likewise, scroll-down-aggressively is used for scrolling down, i.e. backward. The value species how far point should be placed from the top margin of the window; thus, as with scroll-up-aggressively, a larger value is more aggressive. These two variables are ignored if either scroll-step or scrollconservatively are set to a non-zero value. The variable scroll-margin restricts how close point can come to the top or bottom of a window (even if aggressive scrolling species a fraction f that is larger than the window portion between the top and the bottom margins). Its value is a number of screen lines; if point comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs performs automatic scrolling. By default, scroll-margin is 0.

11.4 Horizontal Scrolling

Horizontal scrolling means shifting all the lines sideways within a window, so that some of the text near the left margin is not displayed. When the text in a window is scrolled horizontally, text lines are truncated rather than continued (see Section 11.21 [Line Truncation], page 89). If a window shows truncated lines, Emacs performs automatic horizontal scrolling whenever point moves o the left or right edge of the screen. To disable automatic horizontal scrolling, set the variable autohscroll-mode to nil. Note that when the automatic horizontal scrolling is turned o, if point moves o the edge of the screen, the cursor disappears to indicate that. (On text terminals, the cursor is left at the edge instead.) The variable hscroll-margin controls how close point can get to the windows edges before automatic scrolling occurs. It is measured in columns. For example, if the value is 5, then moving point within 5 columns of an edge causes horizontal scrolling away from that edge. The variable hscroll-step determines how many columns to scroll the window when point gets too close to the edge. Zero, the default value, means to center point horizontally within the window. A positive integer value species the number of columns to scroll by. A oating-point number species the fraction of the windows width to scroll by. You can also perform explicit horizontal scrolling with the following commands: C-x < C-x > Scroll text in current window to the left (scroll-left). Scroll to the right (scroll-right).

C-x < (scroll-left) scrolls text in the selected window to the left by the full width of the window, less two columns. (In other words, the text in the window moves left relative to the window.) With a numeric argument n, it scrolls by n columns. If the text is scrolled to the left, and point moves o the left edge of the window, the cursor will freeze at the left edge of the window, until point moves back to the displayed portion of the text. This is independent of the current setting of autohscroll-mode, which, for text scrolled to the left, only aects the behavior at the right edge of the window.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

74

C-x > (scroll-right) scrolls similarly to the right. The window cannot be scrolled any farther to the right once it is displayed normally, with each line starting at the windows left margin; attempting to do so has no eect. This means that you dont have to calculate the argument precisely for C-x >; any suciently large argument will restore the normal display. If you use those commands to scroll a window horizontally, that sets a lower bound for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will continue to scroll the window, but never farther to the right than the amount you previously set by scroll-left.

11.5 Narrowing
Narrowing means focusing in on some portion of the buer, making the rest temporarily inaccessible. The portion which you can still get to is called the accessible portion. Canceling the narrowing, which makes the entire buer once again accessible, is called widening. The bounds of narrowing in eect in a buer are called the buers restriction. Narrowing can make it easier to concentrate on a single subroutine or paragraph by eliminating clutter. It can also be used to limit the range of operation of a replace command or repeating keyboard macro. C-x n n C-x n w C-x n p C-x n d Narrow down to between point and mark (narrow-to-region). Widen to make the entire buer accessible again (widen). Narrow down to the current page (narrow-to-page). Narrow down to the current defun (narrow-to-defun).

When you have narrowed down to a part of the buer, that part appears to be all there is. You cant see the rest, you cant move into it (motion commands wont go outside the accessible part), you cant change it in any way. However, it is not gone, and if you save the le all the inaccessible text will be saved. The word Narrow appears in the mode line whenever narrowing is in eect. The primary narrowing command is C-x n n (narrow-to-region). It sets the current buers restrictions so that the text in the current region remains accessible, but all text before the region or after the region is inaccessible. Point and mark do not change. Alternatively, use C-x n p (narrow-to-page) to narrow down to the current page. See Section 22.4 [Pages], page 217, for the denition of a page. C-x n d (narrow-to-defun) narrows down to the defun containing point (see Section 23.2 [Defuns], page 250). The way to cancel narrowing is to widen with C-x n w (widen). This makes all text in the buer accessible again. You can get information on what part of the buer you are narrowed down to using the C-x = command. See Section 4.9 [Position Info], page 23. Because narrowing can easily confuse users who do not understand it, narrowto-region is normally a disabled command. Attempting to use this command

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

75

asks for conrmation and gives you the option of enabling it; if you enable the command, conrmation will no longer be required for it. See Section 33.3.11 [Disabling], page 460.

11.6 View Mode

View mode is a minor mode that lets you scan a buer by sequential screenfuls. It provides commands for scrolling through the buer conveniently but not for changing it. Apart from the usual Emacs cursor motion commands, you can type SPC to scroll forward one windowful, DEL to scroll backward, and s to start an incremental search. Typing q (View-quit) disables View mode, and switches back to the buer and position before View mode was enabled. Typing e (View-exit) disables View mode, keeping the current buer and position. M-x view-buffer prompts for an existing Emacs buer, switches to it, and enables View mode. M-x view-file prompts for a le and visits it with View mode enabled.

11.7 Follow Mode

Follow mode is a minor mode that makes two windows, both showing the same buer, scroll as a single tall virtual window. To use Follow mode, go to a frame with just one window, split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x follow-mode. From then on, you can edit the buer in either of the two windows, or scroll either one; the other window follows it. In Follow mode, if you move point outside the portion visible in one window and into the portion visible in the other window, that selects the other windowagain, treating the two as if they were parts of one large window. To turn o Follow mode, type M-x follow-mode a second time.

11.8 Text Faces

Emacs can display text in several dierent styles, called faces. Each face can specify various face attributes, such as the font, height, weight, slant, foreground and background color, and underlining or overlining. Most major modes assign faces to the text automatically, via Font Lock mode. See Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80, for more information about how these faces are assigned. To see what faces are currently dened, and what they look like, type M-x list-faces-display. With a prex argument, this prompts for a regular expression, and displays only faces with names matching that regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). Its possible for a given face to look dierent in dierent frames. For instance, some text terminals do not support all face attributes, particularly font, height, and width, and some support a limited range of colors. You can customize a face to alter its appearance, and save those changes for future Emacs sessions. See Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439. A face

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

76

does not have to specify every single attribute; often it inherits most attributes from another face. Any ultimately unspecied attribute is taken from the face named default. The default face is the default for displaying text, and all of its attributes are specied. Its background color is also used as the frames background color. See Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76. Another special face is the cursor face. On graphical displays, the background color of this face is used to draw the text cursor. None of the other attributes of this face have any eect; the foreground color for text under the cursor is taken from the background color of the underlying text. On text terminals, the appearance of the text cursor is determined by the terminal, not by the cursor face. You can also use X resources to specify attributes of any particular face. See Section D.1 [Resources], page 521. Emacs can display variable-width fonts, but some Emacs commands, particularly indentation commands, do not account for variable character display widths. Therefore, we recommend not using variable-width fonts for most faces, particularly those assigned by Font Lock mode.

11.9 Colors for Faces

Faces can have various foreground and background colors. When you specify a color for a facefor instance, when customizing the face (see Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439)you can use either a color name or an RGB triplet. A color name is a pre-dened name, such as dark orange or medium sea green. To view a list of color names, type M-x list-colors-display. To control the order in which colors are shown, customize list-colors-sort. If you run this command on a graphical display, it shows the full range of color names known to Emacs (these are the standard X11 color names, dened in Xs rgb.txt le). If you run the command on a text terminal, it shows only a small subset of colors that can be safely displayed on such terminals. However, Emacs understands X11 color names even on text terminals; if a face is given a color specied by an X11 color name, it is displayed using the closest-matching terminal color. An RGB triplet is a string of the form #RRGGBB. Each of the R, G, and B components is a hexadecimal number specifying the components relative intensity, one to four digits long (usually two digits are used). The components must have the same number of digits. For hexadecimal values A to F, either upper or lower case are acceptable. The M-x list-colors-display command also shows the equivalent RGB triplet for each named color. For instance, medium sea green is equivalent to #3CB371. You can change the foreground and background colors of a face with M-x set-face-foreground and M-x set-face-background. These commands prompt in the minibuer for a face name and a color, with completion, and then set that face to use the specied color. They aect the face colors on all frames, but their eects do not persist for future Emacs sessions, unlike using the customization buer or

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

77

X resources. You can also use frame parameters to set foreground and background colors for a specic frame; See Section 18.11 [Frame Parameters], page 175.

11.10 Standard Faces

Here are the standard faces for specifying text appearance. You can apply them to specic text when you want the eects they produce. default bold italic bold-italic This face uses a bold italic variant of the default font. underline fixed-pitch This face forces use of a xed-width font. Its reasonable to customize this face to use a dierent xed-width font, if you like, but you should not make it a variable-width font. variable-pitch This face forces use of a variable-width font. shadow This face is used for making the text less noticeable than the surrounding ordinary text. Usually this can be achieved by using shades of gray in contrast with either black or white default foreground color. This face underlines text. This face is used for ordinary text that doesnt specify any face. Its background color is used as the frames background color. This face uses a bold variant of the default font. This face uses an italic variant of the default font.

Heres an incomplete list of faces used to highlight parts of the text temporarily for specic purposes. (Many other modes dene their own faces for this purpose.) highlight isearch This face is used for text highlighting in various contexts, such as when the mouse cursor is moved over a hyperlink. This face is used to highlight the current Isearch match (see Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91).

query-replace This face is used to highlight the current Query Replace match (see Section 12.9 [Replace], page 103). lazy-highlight This face is used to highlight lazy matches for Isearch and Query Replace (matches other than the current one). region This face is used for displaying an active region (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). When Emacs is built with GTK support, its colors are taken from the current GTK theme.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

78

secondary-selection This face is used for displaying a secondary X selection (see Section 9.3.3 [Secondary Selection], page 61). trailing-whitespace The face for highlighting excess spaces and tabs at the end of a line when show-trailing-whitespace is non-nil (see Section 11.16 [Useless Whitespace], page 84). escape-glyph The face for displaying control characters and escape sequences (see Section 11.19 [Text Display], page 87). nobreak-space The face for displaying no-break space characters (see Section 11.19 [Text Display], page 87). The following faces control the appearance of parts of the Emacs frame: mode-line This face is used for the mode line of the currently selected window, and for menu bars when toolkit menus are not used. By default, its drawn with shadows for a raised eect on graphical displays, and drawn as the inverse of the default face on non-windowed terminals.

mode-line-inactive Like mode-line, but used for mode lines of the windows other than the selected one (if mode-line-in-non-selected-windows is non-nil). This face inherits from mode-line, so changes in that face aect mode lines in all windows. mode-line-highlight Like highlight, but used for portions of text on mode lines. mode-line-buffer-id This face is used for buer identication parts in the mode line. header-line Similar to mode-line for a windows header line, which appears at the top of a window just as the mode line appears at the bottom. Most windows do not have a header lineonly some special modes, such Info mode, create one. vertical-border This face is used for the vertical divider between windows on text terminals. minibuffer-prompt This face is used for the prompt strings displayed in the minibuffer. By default, Emacs automatically adds this face to the value of minibuffer-prompt-properties, which is a list of text properties used to display the prompt text. (This variable takes eect when you enter the minibuer.)

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display fringe

79

The face for the fringes to the left and right of windows on graphic displays. (The fringes are the narrow portions of the Emacs frame between the text area and the windows right and left borders.) See Section 11.14 [Fringes], page 83. The :background attribute of this face species the color of the text cursor. See Section 11.20 [Cursor Display], page 88. This face is used for tooltip text. By default, if Emacs is built with GTK support, tooltips are drawn via GTK and this face has no eect. See Section 18.17 [Tooltips], page 178. This face determines the color of the mouse pointer.

cursor tooltip

mouse

The following faces likewise control the appearance of parts of the Emacs frame, but only on text terminals, or when Emacs is built on X with no toolkit support. (For all other cases, the appearance of the respective frame elements is determined by system-wide settings.) scroll-bar This face determines the visual appearance of the scroll bar. See Section 18.12 [Scroll Bars], page 176. tool-bar menu This face determines the color of tool bar icons. See Section 18.15 [Tool Bars], page 177. This face determines the colors and font of Emacss menus. Section 18.14 [Menu Bars], page 176. See

11.11 Text Scale

To increase the height of the default face in the current buer, type C-x C-+ or C-x C-=. To decrease it, type C-x C--. To restore the default (global) face height, type C-x C-0. These keys are all bound to the same command, text-scale-adjust, which looks at the last key typed to determine which action to take. The nal key of these commands may be repeated without the leading C-x. For instance, C-x C-= C-= C-= increases the face height by three steps. Each step scales the text height by a factor of 1.2; to change this factor, customize the variable text-scale-mode-step. As an exception, a numeric argument of 0 to the textscale-adjust command restores the default height, similar to typing C-x C-0. The commands text-scale-increase and text-scale-decrease increase or decrease the height of the default face, just like C-x C-+ and C-x C-- respectively. You may nd it convenient to bind to these commands, rather than text-scaleadjust. The command text-scale-set scales the height of the default face in the current buer to an absolute level specied by its prex argument. The above commands automatically enable the minor mode text-scale-mode if the current font scaling is other than 1, and disable it otherwise.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

80

11.12 Font Lock mode

Font Lock mode is a minor mode, always local to a particular buer, which assigns faces to (or fonties ) the text in the buer. Each buers major mode tells Font Lock mode which text to fontify; for instance, programming language modes fontify syntactically relevant constructs like comments, strings, and function names. Font Lock mode is enabled by default. To toggle it in the current buer, type M-x font-lock-mode. A positive numeric argument unconditionally enables Font Lock mode, and a negative or zero argument disables it. Type M-x global-font-lock-mode to toggle Font Lock mode in all buers. To impose this setting for future Emacs sessions, customize the variable global-fontlock-mode (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434), or add the following line to your init le: (global-font-lock-mode 0) If you have disabled Global Font Lock mode, you can still enable Font Lock for specic major modes by adding the function font-lock-mode to the mode hooks (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). For example, to enable Font Lock mode for editing C les, you can do this: (add-hook c-mode-hook font-lock-mode) Font Lock mode uses several specically named faces to do its job, including font-lock-string-face, font-lock-comment-face, and others. The easiest way to nd them all is to use M-x customize-group RET font-lock-faces RET. You can then use that customization buer to customize the appearance of these faces. See Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439. You can customize the variable font-lock-maximum-decoration to alter the amount of fontication applied by Font Lock mode, for major modes that support this feature. The value should be a number (with 1 representing a minimal amount of fontication; some modes support levels as high as 3); or t, meaning as high as possible (the default). You can also specify dierent numbers for particular major modes; for example, to use level 1 for C/C++ modes, and the default level otherwise, use the value ((c-mode . 1) (c++-mode . 1))) Comment and string fontication (or syntactic fontication) relies on analysis of the syntactic structure of the buer text. For the sake of speed, some modes, including Lisp mode, rely on a special convention: an open-parenthesis or openbrace in the leftmost column always denes the beginning of a defun, and is thus always outside any string or comment. Therefore, you should avoid placing an open-parenthesis or open-brace in the leftmost column, if it is inside a string or comment. See Section 23.2.1 [Left Margin Paren], page 250, for details. The variable font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function, which is always buer-local, species how Font Lock mode can nd a position guaranteed to be outside any comment or string. In modes which use the leftmost column parenthesis convention, the default value of the variable is beginning-of-defunthat tells Font Lock mode to use the convention. If you set this variable to nil, Font Lock no longer relies on the convention. This avoids incorrect results, but the price is

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

81

that, in some cases, fontication for a changed text must rescan buer text from the beginning of the buer. This can considerably slow down redisplay while scrolling, particularly if you are close to the end of a large buer. Font Lock highlighting patterns already exist for most modes, but you may want to fontify additional patterns. You can use the function font-lock-add-keywords, to add your own highlighting patterns for a particular mode. For example, to highlight FIXME: words in C comments, use this: (add-hook c-mode-hook (lambda () (font-lock-add-keywords nil (("\\<\\(FIXME\\):" 1 font-lock-warning-face t))))) To remove keywords from the font-lock highlighting patterns, use the function fontlock-remove-keywords. See Section Search-based Fontication in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . Fontifying large buers can take a long time. To avoid large delays when a le is visited, Emacs initially fonties only the visible portion of a buer. As you scroll through the buer, each portion that becomes visible is fontied as soon as it is displayed; this type of Font Lock is called Just-In-Time (or JIT ) Lock. You can control how JIT Lock behaves, including telling it to perform fontication while idle, by customizing variables in the customization group jit-lock. See Section 33.1.6 [Specic Customization], page 440.

11.13 Interactive Highlighting

Highlight Changes mode is a minor mode that highlights the parts of the buer that were changed most recently, by giving that text a dierent face. To enable or disable Highlight Changes mode, use M-x highlight-changes-mode. Hi Lock mode is a minor mode that highlights text that matches regular expressions you specify. For example, you can use it to highlight all the references to a certain variable in a program source le, highlight certain parts in a voluminous output of some program, or highlight certain names in an article. To enable or disable Hi Lock mode, use the command M-x hi-lock-mode. To enable Hi Lock mode for all buers, use M-x global-hi-lock-mode or place (global-hi-lock-mode 1) in your .emacs le. Hi Lock mode works like Font Lock mode (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80), except that you specify explicitly the regular expressions to highlight. You control them with these commands: C-x w h regexp RET face RET Highlight text that matches regexp using face face (highlightregexp). The highlighting will remain as long as the buer is loaded. For example, to highlight all occurrences of the word whim using the default face (a yellow background) C-x w h whim RET RET. Any face can be used for highlighting, Hi Lock provides several of its own

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

82

and these are pre-loaded into a list of default values. While being prompted for a face use M-n and M-p to cycle through them. You can use this command multiple times, specifying various regular expressions to highlight in dierent ways. C-x w r regexp RET Unhighlight regexp (unhighlight-regexp). If you invoke this from the menu, you select the expression to unhighlight from a list. If you invoke this from the keyboard, you use the minibuer. It will show the most recently added regular expression; use M-p to show the next older expression and M-n to select the next newer expression. (You can also type the expression by hand, with completion.) When the expression you want to unhighlight appears in the minibuer, press RET to exit the minibuer and unhighlight it. C-x w l regexp RET face RET Highlight entire lines containing a match for regexp, using face face (highlight-lines-matching-regexp). C-x w b Insert all the current highlighting regexp/face pairs into the buer at point, with comment delimiters to prevent them from changing your program. (This key binding runs the hi-lock-write-interactivepatterns command.) These patterns are extracted from the comments, if appropriate, if you invoke M-x hi-lock-find-patterns, or if you visit the le while Hi Lock mode is enabled (since that runs hi-lock-find-patterns). C-x w i Extract regexp/face pairs from comments in the current buer (hilock-find-patterns). Thus, you can enter patterns interactively with highlight-regexp, store them into the le with hi-lockwrite-interactive-patterns, edit them (perhaps including dierent faces for dierent parenthesized parts of the match), and nally use this command (hi-lock-find-patterns) to have Hi Lock highlight the edited patterns. The variable hi-lock-file-patterns-policy controls whether Hi Lock mode should automatically extract and highlight patterns found in a le when it is visited. Its value can be nil (never highlight), ask (query the user), or a function. If it is a function, hi-lockfind-patterns calls it with the patterns as argument; if the function returns non-nil, the patterns are used. The default is ask. Note that patterns are always highlighted if you call hi-lock-find-patterns directly, regardless of the value of this variable. Also, hi-lock-find-patterns does nothing if the current major modes symbol is a member of the list hi-lock-exclude-modes.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

83

11.14 Window Fringes

On graphical displays, each Emacs window normally has narrow fringes on the left and right edges. The fringes are used to display symbols that provide information about the text in the window. You can type M-x fringe-mode to disable the fringes, or modify their width. This command aects fringes in all frames; to modify fringes on the selected frame only, use M-x set-fringe-style. The most common use of the fringes is to indicate a continuation line (see Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23). When one line of text is split into multiple screen lines, the left fringe shows a curving arrow for each screen line except the rst, indicating that this is not the real beginning. The right fringe shows a curving arrow for each screen line except the last, indicating that this is not the real end. If the lines direction is right-to-left (see Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202), the meanings of the curving arrows in the fringes are swapped. The fringes indicate line truncation with short horizontal arrows meaning theres more text on this line which is scrolled horizontally out of view. Clicking the mouse on one of the arrows scrolls the display horizontally in the direction of the arrow. The fringes can also indicate other things, such as buer boundaries (see Section 11.15 [Displaying Boundaries], page 83), and where a program you are debugging is executing (see Section 24.6 [Debuggers], page 276). The fringe is also used for drawing the cursor, if the current line is exactly as wide as the window and point is at the end of the line. To disable this, change the variable overflow-newline-into-fringe to nil; this causes Emacs to continue or truncate lines that are exactly as wide as the window.

11.15 Displaying Boundaries

On graphical displays, Emacs can indicate the buer boundaries in the fringes. If you enable this feature, the rst line and the last line are marked with angle images in the fringes. This can be combined with up and down arrow images which say whether it is possible to scroll the window. The buer-local variable indicate-buffer-boundaries controls how the buer boundaries and window scrolling is indicated in the fringes. If the value is left or right, both angle and arrow bitmaps are displayed in the left or right fringe, respectively. If value is an alist, each element (indicator . position ) species the position of one of the indicators. The indicator must be one of top, bottom, up, down, or t which species the default position for the indicators not present in the alist. The position is one of left, right, or nil which species not to show this indicator. For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)).

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

84

11.16 Useless Whitespace

It is easy to leave unnecessary spaces at the end of a line, or empty lines at the end of a le, without realizing it. In most cases, this trailing whitespace has no eect, but there are special circumstances where it matters, and it can be a nuisance. You can make trailing whitespace at the end of a line visible by setting the buer-local variable show-trailing-whitespace to t. Then Emacs displays trailing whitespace, using the face trailing-whitespace. This feature does not apply when point is at the end of the line containing the whitespace. Strictly speaking, that is trailing whitespace nonetheless, but displaying it specially in that case looks ugly while you are typing in new text. In this special case, the location of point is enough to show you that the spaces are present. Type M-x delete-trailing-whitespace to delete all trailing whitespace within the buer. If the region is active, it deletes all trailing whitespace in the region instead. On graphical displays, Emacs can indicate unused lines at the end of the window with a small image in the left fringe (see Section 11.14 [Fringes], page 83). The image appears for screen lines that do not correspond to any buer text, so blank lines at the end of the buer stand out because they lack this image. To enable this feature, set the buer-local variable indicate-empty-lines to a non-nil value. You can enable or disable this feature for all new buers by setting the default value of this variable, e.g. (setq-default indicate-empty-lines t). Whitespace mode is a buer-local minor mode that lets you visualize many kinds of whitespace in the buer, by either drawing the whitespace characters with a special face or displaying them as special glyphs. To toggle this mode, type M-x whitespace-mode. The kinds of whitespace visualized are determined by the list variable whitespace-style. Here is a partial list of possible elements (see the variables documentation for the full list): face Enable all visualizations which use special faces. This element has a special meaning: if it is absent from the list, none of the other visualizations take eect except space-mark, tab-mark, and newlinemark. Highlight trailing whitespace. Highlight tab characters. Highlight space and non-breaking space characters. Highlight lines longer than 80 lines. To change the column limit, customize the variable whitespace-line-column. Highlight newlines. Highlight empty lines. Draw space and non-breaking characters with a special glyph.

trailing tabs spaces lines newline empty space-mark

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display tab-mark Draw tab characters with a special glyph.

85

newline-mark Draw newline characters with a special glyph.

11.17 Selective Display

Emacs has the ability to hide lines indented more than a given number of columns. You can use this to get an overview of a part of a program. To hide lines in the current buer, type C-x $ (set-selective-display) with a numeric argument n. Then lines with at least n columns of indentation disappear from the screen. The only indication of their presence is that three dots (...) appear at the end of each visible line that is followed by one or more hidden ones. The commands C-n and C-p move across the hidden lines as if they were not there. The hidden lines are still present in the buer, and most editing commands see them as usual, so you may nd point in the middle of the hidden text. When this happens, the cursor appears at the end of the previous line, after the three dots. If point is at the end of the visible line, before the newline that ends it, the cursor appears before the three dots. To make all lines visible again, type C-x $ with no argument. If you set the variable selective-display-ellipses to nil, the three dots do not appear at the end of a line that precedes hidden lines. Then there is no visible indication of the hidden lines. This variable becomes local automatically when set. See also Section 22.8 [Outline Mode], page 224 for another way to hide part of the text in a buer.

11.18 Optional Mode Line Features

The buer percentage pos indicates the percentage of the buer above the top of the window. You can additionally display the size of the buer by typing M-x size-indication-mode to turn on Size Indication mode. The size will be displayed immediately following the buer percentage like this: POS of SIZE Here SIZE is the human readable representation of the number of characters in the buer, which means that k for 10^3, M for 10^6, G for 10^9, etc., are used to abbreviate. The current line number of point appears in the mode line when Line Number mode is enabled. Use the command M-x line-number-mode to turn this mode on and o; normally it is on. The line number appears after the buer percentage pos, with the letter L to indicate what it is. Similarly, you can display the current column number by turning on Column number mode with M-x column-number-mode. The column number is indicated by the letter C. However, when both of these modes are enabled, the line and column numbers are displayed in parentheses, the line number rst, rather than with L

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

86

and C. For example: (561,2). See Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205, for more information about minor modes and about how to use these commands. If you have narrowed the buer (see Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74), the displayed line number is relative to the accessible portion of the buer. Thus, it isnt suitable as an argument to goto-line. (Use what-line command to see the line number relative to the whole le.) If the buer is very large (larger than the value of line-number-displaylimit), Emacs wont compute the line number, because that would be too slow; therefore, the line number wont appear on the mode-line. To remove this limit, set line-number-display-limit to nil. Line-number computation can also be slow if the lines in the buer are too long. For this reason, Emacs doesnt display line numbers if the average width, in characters, of lines near point is larger than the value of line-number-displaylimit-width. The default value is 200 characters. Emacs can optionally display the time and system load in all mode lines. To enable this feature, type M-x display-time or customize the option display-timemode. The information added to the mode line looks like this: hh :mm pm l.ll Here hh and mm are the hour and minute, followed always by am or pm. l.ll is the average number, collected for the last few minutes, of processes in the whole system that were either running or ready to run (i.e. were waiting for an available processor). (Some elds may be missing if your operating system cannot support them.) If you prefer time display in 24-hour format, set the variable display-time24hr-format to t. The word Mail appears after the load level if there is mail for you that you have not read yet. On graphical displays, you can use an icon instead of Mail by customizing display-time-use-mail-icon; this may save some space on the mode line. You can customize display-time-mail-face to make the mail indicator prominent. Use display-time-mail-file to specify the mail le to check, or set display-time-mail-directory to specify the directory to check for incoming mail (any nonempty regular le in the directory is considered as newly arrived mail). When running Emacs on a laptop computer, you can display the battery charge on the mode-line, by using the command display-battery-mode or customizing the variable display-battery-mode. The variable battery-mode-line-format determines the way the battery charge is displayed; the exact mode-line message depends on the operating system, and it usually shows the current battery charge as a percentage of the total charge. On graphical displays, the mode line is drawn as a 3D box. If you dont like this eect, you can disable it by customizing the mode-line face and setting its box attribute to nil. See Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439. By default, the mode line of nonselected windows is displayed in a dierent face, called mode-line-inactive. Only the selected window is displayed in the mode-line face. This helps show which window is selected. When the minibuer is selected, since it has no mode line, the window from which you activated the

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

87

minibuer has its mode line displayed using mode-line; as a result, ordinary entry to the minibuer does not change any mode lines. You can disable use of mode-line-inactive by setting variable mode-line-innon-selected-windows to nil; then all mode lines are displayed in the mode-line face. You can customize the mode line display for each of the end-of-line formats by setting each of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, eolmnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided to the strings you prefer.

11.19 How Text Is Displayed

Most characters are printing characters : when they appear in a buer, they are displayed literally on the screen. Printing characters include ASCII numbers, letters, and punctuation characters, as well as many non-ASCII characters. The ASCII character set contains non-printing control characters. Two of these are displayed specially: the newline character (Unicode code point U+000A) is displayed by starting a new line, while the tab character (U+0009) is displayed as a space that extends to the next tab stop column (normally every 8 columns). The number of spaces per tab is controlled by the buer-local variable tab-width, which must have an integer value between 1 and 1000, inclusive. Note that how the tab character in the buer is displayed has nothing to do with the denition of TAB as a command. Other ASCII control characters, whose codes are below U+0020 (octal 40, decimal 32), are displayed as a caret (^) followed by the non-control version of the character, with the escape-glyph face. For instance, the control-A character, U+0001, is displayed as ^A. The raw bytes with codes U+0080 (octal 200) through U+009F (octal 237) are displayed as octal escape sequences, with the escape-glyph face. For instance, character code U+0098 (octal 230) is displayed as \230. If you change the buerlocal variable ctl-arrow to nil, the ASCII control characters are also displayed as octal escape sequences instead of caret escape sequences. Some non-ASCII characters have the same appearance as an ASCII space or hyphen (minus) character. Such characters can cause problems if they are entered into a buer without your realization, e.g. by yanking; for instance, source code compilers typically do not treat non-ASCII spaces as whitespace characters. To deal with this problem, Emacs displays such characters specially: it displays U+00A0 (nobreak space) with the nobreak-space face, and it displays U+00AD (soft hyphen), U+2010 (hyphen), and U+2011 (non-breaking hyphen) with the escape-glyph face. To disable this, change the variable nobreak-char-display to nil. If you give this variable a non-nil and non-t value, Emacs instead displays such characters as a highlighted backslash followed by a space or hyphen. You can customize the way any particular character code is displayed by means of a display table. See Section Display Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

88

On graphical displays, some characters may have no glyphs in any of the fonts available to Emacs. These glyphless characters are normally displayed as boxes containing the hexadecimal character code. Similarly, on text terminals, characters that cannot be displayed using the terminal encoding (see Section 19.13 [Terminal Coding], page 196) are normally displayed as question signs. You can control the display method by customizing the variable glyphless-char-display-control. See Section Glyphless Character Display in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for details.

11.20 Displaying the Cursor

On a text terminal, the cursors appearance is controlled by the terminal, largely out of the control of Emacs. Some terminals oer two dierent cursors: a visible static cursor, and a very visible blinking cursor. By default, Emacs uses the very visible cursor, and switches to it when you start or resume Emacs. If the variable visible-cursor is nil when Emacs starts or resumes, it uses the normal cursor. On a graphical display, many more properties of the text cursor can be altered. To customize its color, change the :background attribute of the face named cursor (see Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439). (The other attributes of this face have no eect; the text shown under the cursor is drawn using the frames background color.) To change its shape, customize the buer-local variable cursortype; possible values are box (the default), hollow (a hollow box), bar (a vertical bar), (bar . n ) (a vertical bar n pixels wide), hbar (a horizontal bar), (hbar . n ) (a horizontal bar n pixels tall), or nil (no cursor at all). To disable cursor blinking, change the variable blink-cursor-mode to nil (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434), or add the line (blink-cursor-mode 0) to your init le. Alternatively, you can change how the cursor looks when it blinks o by customizing the list variable blink-cursor-alist. Each element in the list should have the form (on-type . off-type ); this means that if the cursor is displayed as on-type when it blinks on (where on-type is one of the cursor types described above), then it is displayed as o-type when it blinks o. Some characters, such as tab characters, are extra wide. When the cursor is positioned over such a character, it is normally drawn with the default character width. You can make the cursor stretch to cover wide characters, by changing the variable x-stretch-cursor to a non-nil value. The cursor normally appears in non-selected windows as a non-blinking hollow box. (For a bar cursor, it instead appears as a thinner bar.) To turn o cursors in non-selected windows, change the variable cursor-in-non-selected-windows to nil. To make the cursor even more visible, you can use HL Line mode, a minor mode that highlights the line containing point. Use M-x hl-line-mode to enable or disable it in the current buer. M-x global-hl-line-mode enables or disables the same mode globally.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

89

11.21 Line Truncation

As an alternative to continuation (see Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23), Emacs can display long lines by truncation. This means that all the characters that do not t in the width of the screen or window do not appear at all. On graphical displays, a small straight arrow in the fringe indicates truncation at either end of the line. On text terminals, this is indicated with $ signs in the leftmost and/or rightmost columns. Horizontal scrolling automatically causes line truncation (see Section 11.4 [Horizontal Scrolling], page 73). You can explicitly enable line truncation for a particular buer with the command M-x toggle-truncate-lines. This works by locally changing the variable truncate-lines. If that variable is non-nil, long lines are truncated; if it is nil, they are continued onto multiple screen lines. Setting the variable truncate-lines in any way makes it local to the current buer; until that time, the default value, which is normally nil, is in eect. If a split window becomes too narrow, Emacs may automatically enable line truncation. See Section 17.2 [Split Window], page 159, for the variable truncatepartial-width-windows which controls this.

11.22 Visual Line Mode

Another alternative to ordinary line continuation is to use word wrap. Here, each long logical line is divided into two or more screen lines, like in ordinary line continuation. However, Emacs attempts to wrap the line at word boundaries near the right window edge. This makes the text easier to read, as wrapping does not occur in the middle of words. Word wrap is enabled by Visual Line mode, an optional minor mode. To turn on Visual Line mode in the current buer, type M-x visual-line-mode; repeating this command turns it o. You can also turn on Visual Line mode using the menu bar: in the Options menu, select the Line Wrapping in this Buffer submenu, followed by the Word Wrap (Visual Line Mode) menu item. While Visual Line mode is enabled, the mode-line shows the string wrap in the mode display. The command M-x global-visual-line-mode toggles Visual Line mode in all buers. In Visual Line mode, some editing commands work on screen lines instead of logical lines: C-a (beginning-of-visual-line) moves to the beginning of the screen line, C-e (end-of-visual-line) moves to the end of the screen line, and C-k (killvisual-line) kills text to the end of the screen line. To move by logical lines, use the commands M-x next-logical-line and M-x previous-logical-line. These move point to the next logical line and the previous logical line respectively, regardless of whether Visual Line mode is enabled. If you use these commands frequently, it may be convenient to assign key bindings to them. See Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455. By default, word-wrapped lines do not display fringe indicators. Visual Line mode is often used to edit les that contain many long logical lines, so having a fringe indicator for each wrapped line would be visually distracting. You can change this by customizing the variable visual-line-fringe-indicators.

Chapter 11: Controlling the Display

90

11.23 Customization of Display

This section describes variables that control miscellaneous aspects of the appearance of the Emacs screen. Beginning users can skip it. If the variable visible-bell is non-nil, Emacs attempts to make the whole screen blink when it would normally make an audible bell sound. This variable has no eect if your terminal does not have a way to make the screen blink. The variable echo-keystrokes controls the echoing of multi-character keys; its value is the number of seconds of pause required to cause echoing to start, or zero, meaning dont echo at all. The value takes eect when there is something to echo. See Section 1.2 [Echo Area], page 7. On graphical displays, Emacs displays the mouse pointer as an hourglass if Emacs is busy. To disable this feature, set the variable display-hourglass to nil. The variable hourglass-delay determines the number of seconds of busy time before the hourglass is shown; the default is 1. If the mouse pointer lies inside an Emacs frame, Emacs makes it invisible each time you type a character to insert text, to prevent it from obscuring the text. (To be precise, the hiding occurs when you type a self-inserting character. See Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17.) Moving the mouse pointer makes it visible again. To disable this feature, set the variable make-pointer-invisible to nil. On graphical displays, the variable underline-minimum-offset determines the minimum distance between the baseline and underline, in pixels, for underlined text. By default, the value is 1; increasing it may improve the legibility of underlined text for certain fonts. (However, Emacs will never draw the underline below the current line area.) The variable x-underline-at-descent-line determines how to draw underlined text. The default is nil, which means to draw it at the baseline level of the font; if you change it to nil, Emacs draws the underline at the same height as the fonts descent line. The variable overline-margin species the vertical position of an overline above the text, including the height of the overline itself, in pixels; the default is 2. On some text terminals, bold face and inverse video together result in text that is hard to read. Call the function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors with a non-nil argument to suppress the eect of bold-face in this case.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

91

12 Searching and Replacement

Like other editors, Emacs has commands to search for occurrences of a string. Emacs also has commands to replace occurrences of a string with a dierent string. There are also commands that do the same thing, but search for patterns instead of xed strings. You can also search multiple les under the control of a tags table (see Section 25.3.6 [Tags Search], page 318) or through the Dired A command (see Section 27.7 [Operating on Files], page 335), or ask the grep program to do it (see Section 24.4 [Grep Searching], page 275).

12.1 Incremental Search

The principal search command in Emacs is incremental : it begins searching as soon as you type the rst character of the search string. As you type in the search string, Emacs shows you where the string (as you have typed it so far) would be found. When you have typed enough characters to identify the place you want, you can stop. Depending on what you plan to do next, you may or may not need to terminate the search explicitly with RET. C-s C-r Incremental search forward (isearch-forward). Incremental search backward (isearch-backward).

12.1.1 Basics of Incremental Search C-s C-r Begin incremental search (isearch-forward). Begin reverse incremental search (isearch-backward).

C-s (isearch-forward) starts a forward incremental search. It reads characters from the keyboard, and moves point just past the end of the next occurrence of those characters in the buer. For instance, if you type C-s and then F, that puts the cursor after the rst F that occurs in the buer after the starting point. Then if you then type O, the cursor moves to just after the rst FO; the F in that FO might not be the rst F previously found. After another O, the cursor moves to just after the rst FOO. At each step, Emacs highlights the current matchthe buer text that matches the search stringusing the isearch face (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). The current search string is also displayed in the echo area. If you make a mistake typing the search string, type DEL. Each DEL cancels the last character of the search string. When you are satised with the place you have reached, type RET. This stops searching, leaving the cursor where the search brought it. Also, any command not specially meaningful in searches stops the searching and is then executed. Thus, typing C-a exits the search and then moves to the beginning of the line. RET is necessary only if the next command you want to type is a printing character, DEL, RET, or another character that is special within searches (C-q, C-w, C-r, C-s, C-y, M-y, M-r, M-c, M-e, and some others described below).

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

92

As a special exception, entering RET when the search string is empty launches nonincremental search (see Section 12.2 [Nonincremental Search], page 95). When you exit the incremental search, it adds the original value of point to the mark ring, without activating the mark; you can thus use C-u C-SPC to return to where you were before beginning the search. See Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51. It only does this if the mark was not already active. To search backwards, use C-r (isearch-backward) instead of C-s to start the search. A backward search nds matches that end before the starting point, just as a forward search nds matches that begin after it. 12.1.2 Repeating Incremental Search Suppose you search forward for FOO and nd a match, but not the one you expected to nd: the FOO you were aiming for occurs later in the buer. In this event, type another C-s to move to the next occurrence of the search string. You can repeat this any number of times. If you overshoot, you can cancel some C-s characters with DEL. Similarly, each C-r in a backward incremental search repeats the backward search. If you pause for a little while during incremental search, Emacs highlights all the other possible matches for the search string that are present on the screen. This helps you anticipate where you can get to by typing C-s or C-r to repeat the search. The other matches are highlighted dierently from the current match, using the customizable face lazy-highlight (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). If you dont like this feature, you can disable it by setting isearch-lazy-highlight to nil. After exiting a search, you can search for the same string again by typing just C-s C-s. The rst C-s is the key that invokes incremental search, and the second C-s means search again. Similarly, C-r C-r searches backward for the last search string. In determining the last search string, it doesnt matter whether the string was searched for with C-s or C-r. If you are searching forward but you realize you were looking for something before the starting point, type C-r to switch to a backward search, leaving the search string unchanged. Similarly, C-s in a backward search switches to a forward search. If a search is failing and you ask to repeat it by typing another C-s, it starts again from the beginning of the buer. Repeating a failing reverse search with C-r starts again from the end. This is called wrapping around, and Wrapped appears in the search prompt once this has happened. If you keep on going past the original starting point of the search, it changes to Overwrapped, which means that you are revisiting matches that you have already seen. To reuse earlier search strings, use the search ring. The commands M-p and M-n move through the ring to pick a search string to reuse. These commands leave the selected search ring element in the minibuer, where you can edit it. To edit the current search string in the minibuer without replacing it with items from the search ring, type M-e. Type C-s or C-r to nish editing the string and search for it.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement 12.1.3 Errors in Incremental Search

93

If your string is not found at all, the echo area says Failing I-Search, and the cursor moves past the place where Emacs found as much of your string as it could. Thus, if you search for FOOT, and there is no FOOT, you might see the cursor after the FOO in FOOL. In the echo area, the part of the search string that failed to match is highlighted using the face isearch-fail. At this point, there are several things you can do. If your string was mistyped, you can use DEL to erase some of it and correct it. If you like the place you have found, you can type RET to remain there. Or you can type C-g, which removes from the search string the characters that could not be found (the T in FOOT), leaving those that were found (the FOO in FOOT). A second C-g at that point cancels the search entirely, returning point to where it was when the search started. The quit command, C-g, does special things during searches; just what it does depends on the status of the search. If the search has found what you specied and is waiting for input, C-g cancels the entire search, moving the cursor back to where you started the search. If C-g is typed when there are characters in the search string that have not been foundbecause Emacs is still searching for them, or because it has failed to nd themthen the search string characters which have not been found are discarded from the search string. With them gone, the search is now successful and waiting for more input, so a second C-g will cancel the entire search. 12.1.4 Special Input for Incremental Search Some of the characters you type during incremental search have special eects. If the search string you entered contains only lower-case letters, the search is case-insensitive; as long as an upper-case letter exists in the search string, the search becomes case-sensitive. If you delete the upper-case character from the search string, it ceases to have this eect. See Section 12.8 [Search Case], page 103. To search for a newline character, type C-j. To search for other control characters, such as CONTROL-S, quote it by typing C-q rst (see Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17). To search for non-ASCII characters, you can either use C-q and enter its octal code, or use an input method (see Section 19.4 [Input Methods], page 185). If an input method is enabled in the current buer when you start the search, you can use it in the search string also. While typing the search string, you can toggle the input method with the command C-\ (isearch-toggle-input-method). You can also turn on a non-default input method with C-^ (isearch-toggle-specified-input-method), which prompts for the name of the input method. When an input method is active during incremental search, the search prompt includes the input method mnemonic, like this: I-search [im ]: where im is the mnemonic of the active input method. Any input method you enable during incremental search remains enabled in the current buer afterwards. Typing M-% in incremental search invokes query-replace or query-replaceregexp (depending on search mode) with the current search string used as the string to replace. See Section 12.9.4 [Query Replace], page 106.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

94

Typing M-TAB in incremental search invokes isearch-complete, which attempts to complete the search string using the search ring as a list of completion alternatives. See Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29. In many operating systems, the M-TAB key sequence is captured by the window manager; you then need to rebind isearch-complete to another key sequence if you want to use it (see Section 33.3.5 [Rebinding], page 454). When incremental search is active, you can type C-h C-h to access interactive help options, including a list of special key bindings. These key bindings are part of the keymap isearch-mode-map (see Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452). 12.1.5 Isearch Yanking Within incremental search, C-y (isearch-yank-kill) appends the current kill to the search string. M-y (isearch-yank-pop), if called after C-y, replaces that appended text with an earlier kill, similar to the usual M-y (yank-pop) command (see Section 9.2 [Yanking], page 57). Mouse-2 appends the current X selection (see Section 9.3.2 [Primary Selection], page 60). C-w (isearch-yank-word-or-char) appends the next character or word at point to the search string. This is an easy way to search for another occurrence of the text at point. (The decision of whether to copy a character or a word is heuristic.) Similarly, M-s C-e (isearch-yank-line) appends the rest of the current line to the search string. If point is already at the end of a line, it appends the next line. If the search is currently case-insensitive, both C-w and M-s C-e convert the text they copy to lower case, so that the search remains case-insensitive. C-M-w (isearch-del-char) deletes the last character from the search string, and C-M-y (isearch-yank-char) appends the character after point to the search string. An alternative method to add the character after point is to enter the minibuer with M-e (see Section 12.1.2 [Repeat Isearch], page 92) and type C-f at the end of the search string in the minibuer. 12.1.6 Scrolling During Incremental Search Normally, scrolling commands exit incremental search. If you change the variable isearch-allow-scroll to a non-nil value, that enables the use of the scroll-bar, as well as keyboard scrolling commands like C-v, M-v, and C-l (see Section 11.1 [Scrolling], page 70). This applies only to calling these commands via their bound key sequencestyping M-x will still exit the search. You can give prex arguments to these commands in the usual way. This feature wont let you scroll the current match out of visibility, however. The isearch-allow-scroll feature also aects some other commands, such as C-x 2 (split-window-below) and C-x ^ (enlarge-window), which dont exactly scroll but do aect where the text appears on the screen. It applies to any command whose name has a non-nil isearch-scroll property. So you can control which commands are aected by changing these properties. For example, to make C-h l usable within an incremental search in all future Emacs sessions, use C-h c to nd what command it runs (see Section 7.1 [Key Help],

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

95

page 40), which is view-lossage. Then you can put the following line in your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461): (put view-lossage isearch-scroll t) This feature can be applied to any command that doesnt permanently change point, the buer contents, the match data, the current buer, or the selected window and frame. The command must not itself attempt an incremental search. 12.1.7 Searching the Minibuer If you start an incremental search while the minibuer is active, Emacs searches the contents of the minibuer. Unlike searching an ordinary buer, the search string is not shown in the echo area, because that is used to display the minibuer. If an incremental search fails in the minibuer, it tries searching the minibuer history. See Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34. You can visualize the minibuer and its history as a series of pages, with the earliest history element on the rst page and the current minibuer on the last page. A forward search, C-s, searches forward to later pages; a reverse search, C-r, searches backwards to earlier pages. Like in ordinary buer search, a failing search can wrap around, going from the last page to the rst page or vice versa. When the current match is on a history element, that history element is pulled into the minibuer. If you exit the incremental search normally (e.g. by typing RET), it remains in the minibuer afterwards. Canceling the search, with C-g, restores the contents of the minibuer when you began the search.

12.2 Nonincremental Search

Emacs also has conventional nonincremental search commands, which require you to type the entire search string before searching begins. C-s RET string RET Search for string. C-r RET string RET Search backward for string. To start a nonincremental search, rst type C-s RET. This enters the minibuer to read the search string; terminate the string with RET, and then the search takes place. If the string is not found, the search command signals an error. When you type C-s RET, the C-s invokes incremental search as usual. That command is specially programmed to invoke the command for nonincremental search, search-forward, if the string you specify is empty. (Such an empty argument would otherwise be useless.) C-r RET does likewise, invoking the command searchbackward.

12.3 Word Search

A word search nds a sequence of words without regard to the type of punctuation between them. For instance, if you enter a search string that consists of two words

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

96

separated by a single space, the search matches any sequence of those two words separated by one or more spaces, newlines, or other punctuation characters. This is particularly useful for searching text documents, because you dont have to worry whether the words you are looking for are separated by newlines or spaces. M-s w If incremental search is active, toggle word search mode (isearchtoggle-word); otherwise, begin an incremental forward word search (isearch-forward-word).

M-s w RET words RET Search for words, using a forward nonincremental word search. M-s w C-r RET words RET Search backward for words, using a nonincremental word search. To begin a forward incremental word search, type M-s w. If incremental search is not already active, this runs the command isearch-forward-word. If incremental search is already active (whether a forward or backward search), M-s w switches to a word search while keeping the direction of the search and the current search string unchanged. You can toggle word search back o by typing M-s w again. To begin a nonincremental word search, type M-s w RET for a forward search, or M-s w C-r RET for a backward search. These run the commands word-searchforward and word-search-backward respectively. Incremental and nonincremental word searches dier slightly in the way they nd a match. In a nonincremental word search, the last word in the search string must exactly match a whole word. In an incremental word search, the matching is more lax: the last word in the search string can match part of a word, so that the matching proceeds incrementally as you type. This additional laxity does not apply to the lazy highlight, which always matches whole words.

12.4 Regular Expression Search

A regular expression (or regexp for short) is a pattern that denotes a class of alternative strings to match. Emacs provides both incremental and nonincremental ways to search for a match for a regexp. The syntax of regular expressions is explained in the next section. C-M-s C-M-r Begin incremental regexp search (isearch-forward-regexp). Begin reverse incremental regexp search (isearch-backwardregexp).

Incremental search for a regexp is done by typing C-M-s (isearch-forwardregexp), by invoking C-s with a prex argument (whose value does not matter), or by typing M-r within a forward incremental search. This command reads a search string incrementally just like C-s, but it treats the search string as a regexp rather than looking for an exact match against the text in the buer. Each time you add text to the search string, you make the regexp longer, and the new regexp is searched for. To search backward for a regexp, use C-M-r (isearch-backward-regexp), C-r with a prex argument, or M-r within a backward incremental search.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

97

All of the special key sequences in an ordinary incremental search do similar things in an incremental regexp search. For instance, typing C-s immediately after starting the search retrieves the last incremental search regexp used and searches forward for it. Incremental regexp and non-regexp searches have independent defaults. They also have separate search rings, which you can access with M-p and M-n. If you type SPC in incremental regexp search, it matches any sequence of whitespace characters, including newlines. If you want to match just a space, type C-q SPC. You can control what a bare space matches by setting the variable searchwhitespace-regexp to the desired regexp. In some cases, adding characters to the regexp in an incremental regexp search can make the cursor move back and start again. For example, if you have searched for foo and you add \|bar, the cursor backs up in case the rst bar precedes the rst foo. See Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97. Forward and backward regexp search are not symmetrical, because regexp matching in Emacs always operates forward, starting with the beginning of the regexp. Thus, forward regexp search scans forward, trying a forward match at each possible starting position. Backward regexp search scans backward, trying a forward match at each possible starting position. These search methods are not mirror images. Nonincremental search for a regexp is done with the commands re-searchforward and re-search-backward. You can invoke these with M-x, or by way of incremental regexp search with C-M-s RET and C-M-r RET. If you use the incremental regexp search commands with a prex argument, they perform ordinary string search, like isearch-forward and isearch-backward. See Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91.

12.5 Syntax of Regular Expressions

This manual describes regular expression features that users typically use. See Section Regular Expressions in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for additional features used mainly in Lisp programs. Regular expressions have a syntax in which a few characters are special constructs and the rest are ordinary. An ordinary character matches that same character and nothing else. The special characters are $^.*+?[\. The character ] is special if it ends a character alternative (see later). The character - is special inside a character alternative. Any other character appearing in a regular expression is ordinary, unless a \ precedes it. (When you use regular expressions in a Lisp program, each \ must be doubled, see the example near the end of this section.) For example, f is not a special character, so it is ordinary, and therefore f is a regular expression that matches the string f and no other string. (It does not match the string ff.) Likewise, o is a regular expression that matches only o. (When case distinctions are being ignored, these regexps also match F and O, but we consider this a generalization of the same string, rather than an exception.)

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

98

Any two regular expressions a and b can be concatenated. The result is a regular expression which matches a string if a matches some amount of the beginning of that string and b matches the rest of the string. For example, concatenating the regular expressions f and o gives the regular expression fo, which matches only the string fo. Still trivial. To do something nontrivial, you need to use one of the special characters. Here is a list of them. . (Period) is a special character that matches any single character except a newline. For example, the regular expressions a.b matches any threecharacter string that begins with a and ends with b. is not a construct by itself; it is a postx operator that means to match the preceding regular expression repetitively any number of times, as many times as possible. Thus, o* matches any number of os, including no os. * always applies to the smallest possible preceding expression. Thus, fo* has a repeating o, not a repeating fo. It matches f, fo, foo, and so on. The matcher processes a * construct by matching, immediately, as many repetitions as can be found. Then it continues with the rest of the pattern. If that fails, backtracking occurs, discarding some of the matches of the *-modied construct in case that makes it possible to match the rest of the pattern. For example, in matching ca*ar against the string caaar, the a* rst tries to match all three as; but the rest of the pattern is ar and there is only r left to match, so this try fails. The next alternative is for a* to match only two as. With this choice, the rest of the regexp matches successfully. + is a postx operator, similar to * except that it must match the preceding expression at least once. Thus, ca+r matches the strings car and caaaar but not the string cr, whereas ca*r matches all three strings. is a postx operator, similar to * except that it can match the preceding expression either once or not at all. Thus, ca?r matches car or cr, and nothing else. are non-greedy variants of the operators above. The normal operators *, +, ? match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can still match. With a following ?, they will match as little as possible. Thus, both ab* and ab*? can match the string a and the string abbbb; but if you try to match them both against the text abbb, ab* will match it all (the longest valid match), while ab*? will match just a (the shortest valid match). Non-greedy operators match the shortest possible string starting at a given starting point; in a forward search, though, the earliest possible starting point for match is always the one chosen. Thus, if you search

*?, +?, ??

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

99

for a.*?$ against the text abbab followed by a newline, it matches the whole string. Since it can match starting at the rst a, it does. \{n \} is a postx operator specifying n repetitionsthat is, the preceding regular expression must match exactly n times in a row. For example, x\{4\} matches the string xxxx and nothing else. is a postx operator specifying between n and m repetitionsthat is, the preceding regular expression must match at least n times, but no more than m times. If m is omitted, then there is no upper limit, but the preceding regular expression must match at least n times. \{0,1\} is equivalent to ?. \{0,\} is equivalent to *. \{1,\} is equivalent to +. is a character set, beginning with [ and terminated by ]. In the simplest case, the characters between the two brackets are what this set can match. Thus, [ad] matches either one a or one d, and [ad]* matches any string composed of just as and ds (including the empty string). It follows that c[ad]*r matches cr, car, cdr, caddaar, etc. You can also include character ranges in a character set, by writing the starting and ending characters with a - between them. Thus, [a-z] matches any lower-case ASCII letter. Ranges may be intermixed freely with individual characters, as in [a-z$%.], which matches any lowercase ASCII letter or $, % or period. You can also include certain special character classes in a character set. A [: and balancing :] enclose a character class inside a character alternative. For instance, [[:alnum:]] matches any letter or digit. See Section Char Classes in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for a list of character classes. To include a ] in a character set, you must make it the rst character. For example, []a] matches ] or a. To include a -, write - as the rst or last character of the set, or put it after a range. Thus, []-] matches both ] and -. To include ^ in a set, put it anywhere but at the beginning of the set. (At the beginning, it complements the setsee below.) When you use a range in case-insensitive search, you should write both ends of the range in upper case, or both in lower case, or both should be non-letters. The behavior of a mixed-case range such as A-z is somewhat ill-dened, and it may change in future Emacs versions. [^ ... ] [^ begins a complemented character set, which matches any character except the ones specied. Thus, [^a-z0-9A-Z] matches all characters except ASCII letters and digits.

\{n,m \}

[ ... ]

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

100

^ is not special in a character set unless it is the rst character. The character following the ^ is treated as if it were rst (in other words, - and ] are not special there). A complemented character set can match a newline, unless newline is mentioned as one of the characters not to match. This is in contrast to the handling of regexps in programs such as grep. ^ is a special character that matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line in the text being matched. Otherwise it fails to match anything. Thus, ^foo matches a foo that occurs at the beginning of a line. For historical compatibility reasons, ^ can be used with this meaning only at the beginning of the regular expression, or after \( or \|. $ is similar to ^ but matches only at the end of a line. Thus, x+$ matches a string of one x or more at the end of a line. For historical compatibility reasons, $ can be used with this meaning only at the end of the regular expression, or before \) or \|. \ has two functions: it quotes the special characters (including \), and it introduces additional special constructs. Because \ quotes special characters, \$ is a regular expression that matches only $, and \[ is a regular expression that matches only [, and so on. See the following section for the special constructs that begin with \. Note: for historical compatibility, special characters are treated as ordinary ones if they are in contexts where their special meanings make no sense. For example, *foo treats * as ordinary since there is no preceding expression on which the * can act. It is poor practice to depend on this behavior; it is better to quote the special character anyway, regardless of where it appears. As a \ is not special inside a character alternative, it can never remove the special meaning of - or ]. So you should not quote these characters when they have no special meaning either. This would not clarify anything, since backslashes can legitimately precede these characters where they have special meaning, as in [^\] ("[^\\]" for Lisp string syntax), which matches any single character except a backslash.

12.6 Backslash in Regular Expressions

For the most part, \ followed by any character matches only that character. However, there are several exceptions: two-character sequences starting with \ that have special meanings. The second character in the sequence is always an ordinary character when used on its own. Here is a table of \ constructs. \| species an alternative. Two regular expressions a and b with \| in between form an expression that matches some text if either a matches

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

101

it or b matches it. It works by trying to match a, and if that fails, by trying to match b. Thus, foo\|bar matches either foo or bar but no other string. \| applies to the largest possible surrounding expressions. Only a surrounding \( ... \) grouping can limit the grouping power of \|. Full backtracking capability exists to handle multiple uses of \|. \( ... \) is a grouping construct that serves three purposes: 1. To enclose a set of \| alternatives for other operations. Thus, \(foo\|bar\)x matches either foox or barx. 2. To enclose a complicated expression for the postx operators *, + and ? to operate on. Thus, ba\(na\)* matches bananana, etc., with any (zero or more) number of na strings. 3. To record a matched substring for future reference. This last application is not a consequence of the idea of a parenthetical grouping; it is a separate feature that is assigned as a second meaning to the same \( ... \) construct. In practice there is usually no conict between the two meanings; when there is a conict, you can use a shy group. \(?: ... \) species a shy group that does not record the matched substring; you cant refer back to it with \d . This is useful in mechanically combining regular expressions, so that you can add groups for syntactic purposes without interfering with the numbering of the groups that are meant to be referred to. \d matches the same text that matched the d th occurrence of a \( ... \) construct. This is called a back reference. After the end of a \( ... \) construct, the matcher remembers the beginning and end of the text matched by that construct. Then, later on in the regular expression, you can use \ followed by the digit d to mean match the same text matched the d th time by the \( ... \) construct. The strings matching the rst nine \( ... \) constructs appearing in a regular expression are assigned numbers 1 through 9 in the order that the open-parentheses appear in the regular expression. So you can use \1 through \9 to refer to the text matched by the corresponding \( ... \) constructs. For example, \(.*\)\1 matches any newline-free string that is composed of two identical halves. The \(.*\) matches the rst half, which may be anything, but the \1 that follows must match the same exact text. If a particular \( ... \) construct matches more than once (which can easily happen if it is followed by *), only the last match is recorded.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement \ \ \= \b

102

matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the string or buer (or its accessible portion) being matched against. matches the empty string, but only at the end of the string or buer (or its accessible portion) being matched against. matches the empty string, but only at point. matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a word. Thus, \bfoo\b matches any occurrence of foo as a separate word. \bballs?\b matches ball or balls as a separate word. \b matches at the beginning or end of the buer regardless of what text appears next to it. matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a word. matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a word. \< matches at the beginning of the buer only if a word-constituent character follows. matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. \> matches at the end of the buer only if the contents end with a word-constituent character. matches any word-constituent character. The syntax table determines which characters these are. See Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . matches any character that is not a word-constituent. matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a symbol. A symbol is a sequence of one or more symbol-constituent characters. A symbol-constituent character is a character whose syntax is either w or _. \_< matches at the beginning of the buer only if a symbolconstituent character follows. matches the empty string, but only at the end of a symbol. \_> matches at the end of the buer only if the contents end with a symbolconstituent character. matches any character whose syntax is c. Here c is a character that designates a particular syntax class: thus, w for word constituent, - or for whitespace, . for ordinary punctuation, etc. See Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . matches any character whose syntax is not c. matches any character that belongs to the category c. For example, \cc matches Chinese characters, \cg matches Greek characters, etc. For the description of the known categories, type M-x describe-categories RET. matches any character that does not belong to category c.

\B \<

\>

\w

\W \_<

\_>

\sc

\Sc \cc

\Cc

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

103

The constructs that pertain to words and syntax are controlled by the setting of the syntax table. See Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

12.7 Regular Expression Example

Here is an example of a regexpsimilar to the regexp that Emacs uses, by default, to recognize the end of a sentence, not including the following space (i.e., the variable sentence-end-base): [.?!][]\")}]* This contains two parts in succession: a character set matching period, ?, or !, and a character set matching close-brackets, quotes, or parentheses, repeated zero or more times.

12.8 Searching and Case

Searches in Emacs normally ignore the case of the text they are searching through, if you specify the text in lower case. Thus, if you specify searching for foo, then Foo and foo also match. Regexps, and in particular character sets, behave likewise: [ab] matches a or A or b or B. An upper-case letter anywhere in the incremental search string makes the search case-sensitive. Thus, searching for Foo does not nd foo or FOO. This applies to regular expression search as well as to string search. The eect ceases if you delete the upper-case letter from the search string. Typing M-c within an incremental search toggles the case sensitivity of that search. The eect does not extend beyond the current incremental search to the next one, but it does override the eect of adding or removing an upper-case letter in the current search. If you set the variable case-fold-search to nil, then all letters must match exactly, including case. This is a per-buer variable; altering the variable normally aects only the current buer, unless you change its default value. See Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446. This variable applies to nonincremental searches also, including those performed by the replace commands (see Section 12.9 [Replace], page 103) and the minibuer history matching commands (see Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34). Several related variables control case-sensitivity of searching and matching for specic commands or activities. For instance, tags-case-fold-search controls case sensitivity for find-tag. To nd these variables, do M-x apropos-variable RET case-fold-search RET.

12.9 Replacement Commands

Emacs provides several commands for performing search-and-replace operations. In addition to the simple M-x replace-string command, there is M-% (queryreplace), which presents each occurrence of the pattern and asks you whether to replace it.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

104

The replace commands normally operate on the text from point to the end of the buer. When the region is active, they operate on it instead (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). The basic replace commands replace one search string (or regexp) with one replacement string. It is possible to perform several replacements in parallel, using the command expand-region-abbrevs (see Section 26.3 [Expanding Abbrevs], page 323). 12.9.1 Unconditional Replacement M-x replace-string RET string RET newstring RET Replace every occurrence of string with newstring. To replace every instance of foo after point with bar, use the command M-x replace-string with the two arguments foo and bar. Replacement happens only in the text after point, so if you want to cover the whole buer you must go to the beginning rst. All occurrences up to the end of the buer are replaced; to limit replacement to part of the buer, activate the region around that part. When the region is active, replacement is limited to the region (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). When replace-string exits, it leaves point at the last occurrence replaced. It adds the prior position of point (where the replace-string command was issued) to the mark ring, without activating the mark; use C-u C-SPC to move back there. See Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51. A prex argument restricts replacement to matches that are surrounded by word boundaries. See Section 12.9.3 [Replacement and Case], page 105, for details about casesensitivity in replace commands. 12.9.2 Regexp Replacement The M-x replace-string command replaces exact matches for a single string. The similar command M-x replace-regexp replaces any match for a specied pattern. M-x replace-regexp RET regexp RET newstring RET Replace every match for regexp with newstring. In replace-regexp, the newstring need not be constant: it can refer to all or part of what is matched by the regexp. \& in newstring stands for the entire match being replaced. \d in newstring, where d is a digit, stands for whatever matched the d th parenthesized grouping in regexp. (This is called a back reference.) \# refers to the count of replacements already made in this command, as a decimal number. In the rst replacement, \# stands for 0; in the second, for 1; and so on. For example, M-x replace-regexp RET c[ad]+r RET \&-safe RET replaces (for example) cadr with cadr-safe and cddr with cddr-safe. M-x replace-regexp RET \(c[ad]+r\)-safe RET \1 RET performs the inverse transformation. To include a \ in the text to replace with, you must enter \\.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

105

If you want to enter part of the replacement string by hand each time, use \? in the replacement string. Each replacement will ask you to edit the replacement string in the minibuer, putting point where the \? was. The remainder of this subsection is intended for specialized tasks and requires knowledge of Lisp. Most readers can skip it. You can use Lisp expressions to calculate parts of the replacement string. To do this, write \, followed by the expression in the replacement string. Each replacement calculates the value of the expression and converts it to text without quoting (if its a string, this means using the strings contents), and uses it in the replacement string in place of the expression itself. If the expression is a symbol, one space in the replacement string after the symbol name goes with the symbol name, so the value replaces them both. Inside such an expression, you can use some special sequences. \& and \n refer here, as usual, to the entire match as a string, and to a submatch as a string. n may be multiple digits, and the value of \n is nil if subexpression n did not match. You can also use \#& and \#n to refer to those matches as numbers (this is valid when the match or submatch has the form of a numeral). \# here too stands for the number of already-completed replacements. Repeating our example to exchange x and y, we can thus do it also this way: M-x replace-regexp RET \(x\)\|y RET \,(if \1 "y" "x") RET For computing replacement strings for \,, the format function is often useful (see Section Formatting Strings in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). For example, to add consecutively numbered strings like ABC00042 to columns 73 to 80 (unless they are already occupied), you can use M-x replace-regexp RET ^.\{0,72\}$ RET \,(format "%-72sABC%05d" \& \#) RET 12.9.3 Replace Commands and Case If the rst argument of a replace command is all lower case, the command ignores case while searching for occurrences to replaceprovided case-fold-search is nonnil. If case-fold-search is set to nil, case is always signicant in all searches. In addition, when the newstring argument is all or partly lower case, replacement commands try to preserve the case pattern of each occurrence. Thus, the command M-x replace-string RET foo RET bar RET replaces a lower case foo with a lower case bar, an all-caps FOO with BAR, and a capitalized Foo with Bar. (These three alternativeslower case, all caps, and capitalized, are the only ones that replace-string can distinguish.) If upper-case letters are used in the replacement string, they remain upper case every time that text is inserted. If upper-case letters are used in the rst argument, the second argument is always substituted exactly as given, with no case conversion. Likewise, if either case-replace or case-fold-search is set to nil, replacement is done without case conversion.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement 12.9.4 Query Replace M-% string RET newstring RET Replace some occurrences of string with newstring. C-M-% regexp RET newstring RET Replace some matches for regexp with newstring.

106

If you want to change only some of the occurrences of foo to bar, not all of them, use M-% (query-replace). This command nds occurrences of foo one by one, displays each occurrence and asks you whether to replace it. Aside from querying, query-replace works just like replace-string (see Section 12.9.1 [Unconditional Replace], page 104). In particular, it preserves case provided case-replace is non-nil, as it normally is (see Section 12.9.3 [Replacement and Case], page 105). A numeric argument means to consider only occurrences that are bounded by worddelimiter characters. C-M-% performs regexp search and replace (query-replace-regexp). It works like replace-regexp except that it queries like query-replace. These commands highlight the current match using the face query-replace. They highlight other matches using lazy-highlight just like incremental search (see Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91). By default, query-replaceregexp will show the substituted replacement string for the current match in the minibuer. If you want to keep special sequences \& and \n unexpanded, customize query-replace-show-replacement variable. The characters you can type when you are shown a match for the string or regexp are: SPC DEL to replace the occurrence with newstring. to skip to the next occurrence without replacing this one.

, (Comma) to replace this occurrence and display the result. You are then asked for another input character to say what to do next. Since the replacement has already been made, DEL and SPC are equivalent in this situation; both move to the next occurrence. You can type C-r at this point (see below) to alter the replaced text. You can also type C-x u to undo the replacement; this exits the queryreplace, so if you want to do further replacement you must use C-x ESC ESC RET to restart (see Section 5.5 [Repetition], page 35). RET . (Period) ! ^ to exit without doing any more replacements. to replace this occurrence and then exit without searching for more occurrences. to replace all remaining occurrences without asking again. to go back to the position of the previous occurrence (or what used to be an occurrence), in case you changed it by mistake or want to reexamine it.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement C-r

107

to enter a recursive editing level, in case the occurrence needs to be edited rather than just replaced with newstring. When you are done, exit the recursive editing level with C-M-c to proceed to the next occurrence. See Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424. to delete the occurrence, and then enter a recursive editing level as in C-r. Use the recursive edit to insert text to replace the deleted occurrence of string. When done, exit the recursive editing level with C-M-c to proceed to the next occurrence. to edit the replacement string in the minibuer. When you exit the minibuer by typing RET, the minibuer contents replace the current occurrence of the pattern. They also become the new replacement string for any further occurrences. to redisplay the screen. Then you must type another character to specify what to do with this occurrence. to display a message summarizing these options. Then you must type another character to specify what to do with this occurrence.

C-w

C-l C-h

Some other characters are aliases for the ones listed above: y, n and q are equivalent to SPC, DEL and RET. Aside from this, any other character exits the query-replace, and is then reread as part of a key sequence. Thus, if you type C-k, it exits the query-replace and then kills to end of line. To restart a query-replace once it is exited, use C-x ESC ESC, which repeats the query-replace because it used the minibuer to read its arguments. See Section 5.5 [Repetition], page 35. See Section 27.7 [Operating on Files], page 335, for the Dired Q command which performs query replace on selected les. See also Section 27.9 [Transforming File Names], page 338, for Dired commands to rename, copy, or link les by replacing regexp matches in le names.

12.10 Other Search-and-Loop Commands

Here are some other commands that nd matches for a regular expression. They all ignore case in matching, if the pattern contains no upper-case letters and casefold-search is non-nil. Aside from occur and its variants, all operate on the text from point to the end of the buer, or on the region if it is active. M-x multi-isearch-buffers Prompt for one or more buer names, ending with RET; then, begin a multi-buer incremental search in those buers. (If the search fails in one buer, the next C-s tries searching the next specied buer, and so forth.) With a prex argument, prompt for a regexp and begin a multi-buer incremental search in buers matching that regexp. M-x multi-isearch-buffers-regexp This command is just like multi-isearch-buffers, except it performs an incremental regexp search.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement M-x occur

108

Prompt for a regexp, and display a list showing each line in the buer that contains a match for it. To limit the search to part of the buer, narrow to that part (see Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74). A numeric argument n species that n lines of context are to be displayed before and after each matching line. In the *Occur* buer, you can click on each entry, or move point there and type RET, to visit the corresponding position in the buer that was searched. o and C-o display the match in another window; C-o does not select it. Alternatively, you can use the C-x (nexterror) command to visit the occurrences one by one (see Section 24.2 [Compilation Mode], page 272). Typing e in the *Occur* buer switches to Occur Edit mode, in which edits made to the entries are also applied to the text in the originating buer. Type C-c C-c to return to Occur mode. The command M-x list-matching-lines is a synonym for M-x occur.

M-s o

Run occur using the search string of the last incremental string search. You can also run M-s o when an incremental search is active; this uses the current search string.

M-x multi-occur This command is just like occur, except it is able to search through multiple buers. It asks you to specify the buer names one by one. M-x multi-occur-in-matching-buffers This command is similar to multi-occur, except the buers to search are specied by a regular expression that matches visited le names. With a prex argument, it uses the regular expression to match buer names instead. M-x how-many Prompt for a regexp, and print the number of matches for it in the buer after point. If the region is active, this operates on the region instead. M-x flush-lines Prompt for a regexp, and delete each line that contains a match for it, operating on the text after point. This command deletes the current line if it contains a match starting after point. If the region is active, it operates on the region instead; if a line partially contained in the region contains a match entirely contained in the region, it is deleted. If a match is split across lines, flush-lines deletes all those lines. It deletes the lines before starting to look for the next match; hence, it ignores a match starting on the same line at which another match ended.

Chapter 12: Searching and Replacement

109

M-x keep-lines Prompt for a regexp, and delete each line that does not contain a match for it, operating on the text after point. If point is not at the beginning of a line, this command always keeps the current line. If the region is active, the command operates on the region instead; it never deletes lines that are only partially contained in the region (a newline that ends a line counts as part of that line). If a match is split across lines, this command keeps all those lines.

Chapter 13: Commands for Fixing Typos

110

13 Commands for Fixing Typos

In this chapter we describe commands that are useful when you catch a mistake while editing. The most fundamental of these commands is the undo command C-/ (also bound to C-x u and C-_). This undoes a single command, or a part of a command (as in the case of query-replace), or several consecutive character insertions. Consecutive repetitions of C-/ undo earlier and earlier changes, back to the limit of the undo information available. Aside from the commands described here, you can erase text using deletion commands such as DEL (delete-backward-char). These were described earlier in this manual. See Section 4.3 [Erasing], page 20.

13.1 Undo
The undo command reverses recent changes in the buers text. Each buer records changes individually, and the undo command always applies to the current buer. You can undo all the changes in a buer for as far back as the buers records go. Usually, each editing command makes a separate entry in the undo records, but some commands such as query-replace divide their changes into multiple entries for exibility in undoing. Consecutive character insertion commands are usually grouped together into a single undo record, to make undoing less tedious. C-/ C-x u C-_

Undo one entry in the current buers undo records (undo).

To begin to undo, type C-/ (or its aliases, C-_ or C-x u)1 . This undoes the most recent change in the buer, and moves point back to where it was before that change. Consecutive repetitions of C-/ (or its aliases) undo earlier and earlier changes in the current buer. If all the recorded changes have already been undone, the undo command signals an error. Any command other than an undo command breaks the sequence of undo commands. Starting from that moment, the entire sequence of undo commands that you have just performed are themselves placed into the undo record, as a single set of changes. Therefore, to re-apply changes you have undone, type C-f or any other command that harmlessly breaks the sequence of undoing; then type C-/ to undo the undo command. Alternatively, if you want to resume undoing, without redoing previous undo commands, use M-x undo-only. This is like undo, but will not redo changes you have just undone. If you notice that a buer has been modied accidentally, the easiest way to recover is to type C-/ repeatedly until the stars disappear from the front of the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). Whenever an undo command
1

Aside from C-/, the undo command is also bound to C-x u because that is more straightforward for beginners to remember: u stands for undo. It is also bound to C-_ because typing C-/ on some text terminals actually enters C-_.

Chapter 13: Commands for Fixing Typos

111

makes the stars disappear from the mode line, it means that the buer contents are the same as they were when the le was last read in or saved. If you do not remember whether you changed the buer deliberately, type C-/ once. When you see the last change you made undone, you will see whether it was an intentional change. If it was an accident, leave it undone. If it was deliberate, redo the change as described above. When there is an active region, any use of undo performs selective undo : it undoes the most recent change within the region, instead of the entire buer. However, when Transient Mark mode is o (see Section 8.7 [Disabled Transient Mark], page 52), C-/ always operates on the entire buer, ignoring the region. In this case, you can perform selective undo by supplying a prex argument to the undo command: C-u C-/. To undo further changes in the same region, repeat the undo command (no prex argument is needed). Some specialized buers do not make undo records. Buers whose names start with spaces never do; these buers are used internally by Emacs to hold text that users dont normally look at or edit. When the undo information for a buer becomes too large, Emacs discards the oldest records from time to time (during garbage collection). You can specify how much undo information to keep by setting the variables undo-limit, undo-stronglimit, and undo-outer-limit. Their values are expressed in bytes. The variable undo-limit sets a soft limit: Emacs keeps undo data for enough commands to reach this size, and perhaps exceed it, but does not keep data for any earlier commands beyond that. Its default value is 80000. The variable undostrong-limit sets a stricter limit: any previous command (though not the most recent one) that pushes the size past this amount is forgotten. The default value of undo-strong-limit is 120000. Regardless of the values of those variables, the most recent change is never discarded unless it gets bigger than undo-outer-limit (normally 12,000,000). At that point, Emacs discards the undo data and warns you about it. This is the only situation in which you cannot undo the last command. If this happens, you can increase the value of undo-outer-limit to make it even less likely to happen in the future. But if you didnt expect the command to create such large undo data, then it is probably a bug and you should report it. See Section 34.3 [Reporting Bugs], page 473.

13.2 Transposing Text

C-t M-t C-M-t C-x C-t Transpose two characters (transpose-chars). Transpose two words (transpose-words). Transpose two balanced expressions (transpose-sexps). Transpose two lines (transpose-lines).

The common error of transposing two characters can be xed, when they are adjacent, with the C-t command (transpose-chars). Normally, C-t transposes the two characters on either side of point. When given at the end of a line, rather

Chapter 13: Commands for Fixing Typos

112

than transposing the last character of the line with the newline, which would be useless, C-t transposes the last two characters on the line. So, if you catch your transposition error right away, you can x it with just a C-t. If you dont catch it so fast, you must move the cursor back between the two transposed characters before you type C-t. If you transposed a space with the last character of the word before it, the word motion commands are a good way of getting there. Otherwise, a reverse search (C-r) is often the best way. See Chapter 12 [Search], page 91. M-t transposes the word before point with the word after point (transposewords). It moves point forward over a word, dragging the word preceding or containing point forward as well. The punctuation characters between the words do not move. For example, FOO, BAR transposes into BAR, FOO rather than BAR FOO,. C-M-t (transpose-sexps) is a similar command for transposing two expressions (see Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256), and C-x C-t (transpose-lines) exchanges lines. They work like M-t except as regards what units of text they transpose. A numeric argument to a transpose command serves as a repeat count: it tells the transpose command to move the character (word, expression, line) before or containing point across several other characters (words, expressions, lines). For example, C-u 3 C-t moves the character before point forward across three other characters. It would change f oobar into oobf ar. This is equivalent to repeating C-t three times. C-u - 4 M-t moves the word before point backward across four words. C-u - C-M-t would cancel the eect of plain C-M-t. A numeric argument of zero is assigned a special meaning (because otherwise a command with a repeat count of zero would do nothing): to transpose the character (word, expression, line) ending after point with the one ending after the mark.

13.3 Case Conversion

M-- M-l M-- M-u M-- M-c Convert last word to lower case. Note Meta-- is Meta-minus. Convert last word to all upper case. Convert last word to lower case with capital initial.

A very common error is to type words in the wrong case. Because of this, the word case-conversion commands M-l, M-u and M-c have a special feature when used with a negative argument: they do not move the cursor. As soon as you see you have mistyped the last word, you can simply case-convert it and go on typing. See Section 22.6 [Case], page 223.

13.4 Checking and Correcting Spelling

This section describes the commands to check the spelling of a single word or of a portion of a buer. These commands only work if the spelling checker program Aspell, Ispell or Hunspell is installed. These programs are not part of Emacs, but one of them is usually installed in GNU/Linux and other free operating systems.

Chapter 13: Commands for Fixing Typos M-$

113

Check and correct spelling of the word at point (ispell-word). If the region is active, do it for all words in the region instead.

M-x ispell Check and correct spelling of all words in the buer. If the region is active, do it for all words in the region instead. M-x ispell-buffer Check and correct spelling in the buer. M-x ispell-region Check and correct spelling in the region. M-x ispell-message Check and correct spelling in a draft mail message, excluding cited material. M-x ispell-change-dictionary RET dict RET Restart the Aspell/Ispell/Hunspell process, using dict as the dictionary. M-x ispell-kill-ispell Kill the Aspell/Ispell/Hunspell subprocess. M-TAB ESC TAB Complete the word before point based on the spelling dictionary (ispell-complete-word).

M-x flyspell-mode Enable Flyspell mode, which highlights all misspelled words. M-x flyspell-prog-mode Enable Flyspell mode for comments and strings only. To check the spelling of the word around or before point, and optionally correct it as well, type M-$ (ispell-word). If a region is active, M-$ checks the spelling of all words within the region. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47. (When Transient Mark mode is o, M-$ always acts on the word around or before point, ignoring the region; see Section 8.7 [Disabled Transient Mark], page 52.) Similarly, the command M-x ispell performs spell-checking in the region if one is active, or in the entire buer otherwise. The commands M-x ispell-buffer and M-x ispell-region explicitly perform spell-checking on the entire buer or the region respectively. To check spelling in an email message you are writing, use M-x ispell-message; that command checks the whole buer, except for material that is indented or appears to be cited from other messages. See Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367. When one of these commands encounters what appears to be an incorrect word, it asks you what to do. It usually displays a list of numbered near-misses words that are close to the incorrect word. Then you must type a single-character response. Here are the valid responses: digit Replace the word, just this time, with one of the displayed near-misses. Each near-miss is listed with a digit; type that digit to select it.

Chapter 13: Commands for Fixing Typos SPC r new RET R new RET

114

Skip this wordcontinue to consider it incorrect, but dont change it here. Replace the word, just this time, with new. (The replacement string will be rescanned for more spelling errors.) Replace the word with new, and do a query-replace so you can replace it elsewhere in the buer if you wish. (The replacements will be rescanned for more spelling errors.) Accept the incorrect wordtreat it as correct, but only in this editing session. Accept the incorrect wordtreat it as correct, but only in this editing session and for this buer. Insert this word in your private dictionary le so that Aspell or Ispell or Hunspell will consider it correct from now on, even in future sessions. Like i, but you can also specify dictionary completion information. Insert the lower-case version of this word in your private dictionary le.

a A i m u

l word RET Look in the dictionary for words that match word. These words become the new list of near-misses; you can select one of them as the replacement by typing a digit. You can use * in word as a wildcard. C-g X Quit interactive spell checking, leaving point at the word that was being checked. You can restart checking again afterward with C-u M-$. Quit interactive spell checking and move point back to where it was when you started spell checking. Quit interactive spell checking and kill the spell-checker subprocess. Show the list of options.

x q ?

In Text mode and related modes, M-TAB (ispell-complete-word) performs inbuer completion based on spelling correction. Insert the beginning of a word, and then type M-TAB; this shows a list of completions. (If your window manager intercepts M-TAB, type ESC TAB or C-M-i.) Each completion is listed with a digit or character; type that digit or character to choose it. Once started, the Aspell or Ispell or Hunspell subprocess continues to run, waiting for something to do, so that subsequent spell checking commands complete more quickly. If you want to get rid of the process, use M-x ispell-kill-ispell. This is not usually necessary, since the process uses no processor time except when you do spelling correction. Ispell, Aspell and Hunspell look up spelling in two dictionaries: the standard dictionary and your personal dictionary. The standard dictionary is specied by

Chapter 13: Commands for Fixing Typos

115

the variable ispell-local-dictionary or, if that is nil, by the variable ispelldictionary. If both are nil, the spelling programs default dictionary is used. The command M-x ispell-change-dictionary sets the standard dictionary for the buer and then restarts the subprocess, so that it will use a dierent standard dictionary. Your personal dictionary is specied by the variable ispell-personaldictionary. If that is nil, the spelling program looks for a personal dictionary in a default location. A separate dictionary is used for word completion. The variable ispellcomplete-word-dict species the le name of this dictionary. The completion dictionary must be dierent because it cannot use root and ax information. For some languages, there is a spell checking dictionary but no word completion dictionary. Flyspell mode is a minor mode that performs automatic spell checking as you type. When it nds a word that it does not recognize, it highlights that word. Type M-x flyspell-mode to toggle Flyspell mode in the current buer. To enable Flyspell mode in all text mode buers, add flyspell-mode to text-mode-hook. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. When Flyspell mode highlights a word as misspelled, you can click on it with Mouse-2 to display a menu of possible corrections and actions. You can also correct the word by editing it manually in any way you like. Flyspell Prog mode works just like ordinary Flyspell mode, except that it only checks words in comments and string constants. This feature is useful for editing programs. Type M-x flyspell-prog-mode to enable or disable this mode in the current buer. To enable this mode in all programming mode buers, add flyspell-prog-mode to prog-mode-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445).

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

116

14 Keyboard Macros
In this chapter we describe how to record a sequence of editing commands so you can repeat it conveniently later. A keyboard macro is a command dened by an Emacs user to stand for another sequence of keys. For example, if you discover that you are about to type C-n M-d C-d forty times, you can speed your work by dening a keyboard macro to do C-n M-d C-d, and then executing it 39 more times. You dene a keyboard macro by executing and recording the commands which are its denition. Put dierently, as you dene a keyboard macro, the denition is being executed for the rst time. This way, you can see the eects of your commands, so that you dont have to gure them out in your head. When you close the denition, the keyboard macro is dened and also has been, in eect, executed once. You can then do the whole thing over again by invoking the macro. Keyboard macros dier from ordinary Emacs commands in that they are written in the Emacs command language rather than in Lisp. This makes it easier for the novice to write them, and makes them more convenient as temporary hacks. However, the Emacs command language is not powerful enough as a programming language to be useful for writing anything intelligent or general. For such things, Lisp must be used.

14.1 Basic Use

F3 F4 C-u F3 Start dening a keyboard macro (kmacro-start-macro-or-insertcounter). If a keyboard macro is being dened, end the denition; otherwise, execute the most recent keyboard macro (kmacro-end-or-call-macro). Re-execute last keyboard macro, then append keys to its denition.

C-u C-u F3 Append keys to the last keyboard macro without re-executing it. C-x C-k r Run the last keyboard macro on each line that begins in the region (apply-macro-to-region-lines).

To start dening a keyboard macro, type F3. From then on, your keys continue to be executed, but also become part of the denition of the macro. Def appears in the mode line to remind you of what is going on. When you are nished, type F4 (kmacro-end-or-call-macro) to terminate the denition. For example, F3 M-f foo F4 denes a macro to move forward a word and then insert foo. Note that F3 and F4 do not become part of the macro. After dening the macro, you can call it with F4. For the above example, this has the same eect as typing M-f foo again. (Note the two roles of the F4 command: it ends the macro if you are in the process of dening one, or calls the last macro otherwise.) You can also supply F4 with a numeric prex argument n,

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

117

which means to invoke the macro n times. An argument of zero repeats the macro indenitely, until it gets an error or you type C-g (or, on MS-DOS, C-BREAK). The above example demonstrates a handy trick that you can employ with keyboard macros: if you wish to repeat an operation at regularly spaced places in the text, include a motion command as part of the macro. In this case, repeating the macro inserts the string foo after each successive word. After terminating the denition of a keyboard macro, you can append more keystrokes to its denition by typing C-u F3. This is equivalent to plain F3 followed by retyping the whole denition so far. As a consequence, it re-executes the macro as previously dened. If you change the variable kmacro-execute-before-append to nil, the existing macro will not be re-executed before appending to it (the default is t). You can also add to the end of the denition of the last keyboard macro without re-executing it by typing C-u C-u F3. When a command reads an argument with the minibuer, your minibuer input becomes part of the macro along with the command. So when you replay the macro, the command gets the same argument as when you entered the macro. For example, F3 C-a C-k C-x b foo RET C-y C-x b RET F4 denes a macro that kills the current line, yanks it into the buer foo, then returns to the original buer. Most keyboard commands work as usual in a keyboard macro denition, with some exceptions. Typing C-g (keyboard-quit) quits the keyboard macro denition. Typing C-M-c (exit-recursive-edit) can be unreliable: it works as youd expect if exiting a recursive edit that started within the macro, but if it exits a recursive edit that started before you invoked the keyboard macro, it also necessarily exits the keyboard macro too. Mouse events are also unreliable, even though you can use them in a keyboard macro: when the macro replays the mouse event, it uses the original mouse position of that event, the position that the mouse had while you were dening the macro. The eect of this may be hard to predict. The command C-x C-k r (apply-macro-to-region-lines) repeats the last dened keyboard macro on each line that begins in the region. It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of the line and then executing the macro. In addition to the F3 and F4 commands described above, Emacs also supports an older set of key bindings for dening and executing keyboard macros. To begin a macro denition, type C-x ( (kmacro-start-macro); as with F3, a prex argument appends this denition to the last keyboard macro. To end a macro denition, type C-x ) (kmacro-end-macro). To execute the most recent macro, type C-x e (kmacro-end-and-call-macro). If you enter C-x e while dening a macro, the macro is terminated and executed immediately. Immediately after typing C-x e, you can type E repeatedly to immediately repeat the macro one or more times. You can also give C-x e a repeat argument, just like F4. C-x ) can be given a repeat count as an argument. This means to repeat the macro right after dening it. The macro denition itself counts as the rst repetition, since it is executed as you dene it, so C-u 4 C-x ) executes the macro immediately 3 additional times.

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

118

14.2 The Keyboard Macro Ring

All dened keyboard macros are recorded in the keyboard macro ring. There is only one keyboard macro ring, shared by all buers. C-x C-k C-k Execute the keyboard macro at the head of the ring (kmacro-end-orcall-macro-repeat). C-x C-k C-n Rotate the keyboard macro ring to the next macro (dened earlier) (kmacro-cycle-ring-next). C-x C-k C-p Rotate the keyboard macro ring to the previous macro (dened later) (kmacro-cycle-ring-previous). All commands which operate on the keyboard macro ring use the same C-x C-k prex. Most of these commands can be executed and repeated immediately after each other without repeating the C-x C-k prex. For example, C-x C-k C-p C-p C-k C-k C-k C-n C-n C-k C-p C-k C-d will rotate the keyboard macro ring to the second previous macro, execute the resulting head macro three times, rotate back to the original head macro, execute that once, rotate to the previous macro, execute that, and nally delete it from the macro ring. The command C-x C-k C-k (kmacro-end-or-call-macro-repeat) executes the keyboard macro at the head of the macro ring. You can repeat the macro immediately by typing another C-k, or you can rotate the macro ring immediately by typing C-n or C-p. When a keyboard macro is being dened, C-x C-k C-k behaves like F4 except that, immediately afterward, you can use most key bindings of this section without the C-x C-k prex. For instance, another C-k will re-execute the macro. The commands C-x C-k C-n (kmacro-cycle-ring-next) and C-x C-k C-p (kmacro-cycle-ring-previous) rotate the macro ring, bringing the next or previous keyboard macro to the head of the macro ring. The denition of the new head macro is displayed in the echo area. You can continue to rotate the macro ring immediately by repeating just C-n and C-p until the desired macro is at the head of the ring. To execute the new macro ring head immediately, just type C-k. Note that Emacs treats the head of the macro ring as the last dened keyboard macro. For instance, F4 will execute that macro, and C-x C-k n will give it a name. The maximum number of macros stored in the keyboard macro ring is determined by the customizable variable kmacro-ring-max.

14.3 The Keyboard Macro Counter

Each keyboard macro has an associated counter, which is initialized to 0 when you start dening the macro. This counter allows you to insert a number into the buer that depends on the number of times the macro has been called. The counter is incremented each time its value is inserted into the buer.

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros F3 C-x C-k C-i

119

In a keyboard macro denition, insert the keyboard macro counter value in the buer (kmacro-start-macro-or-insert-counter). Insert the keyboard macro counter value in the buer (kmacroinsert-counter).

C-x C-k C-c Set the keyboard macro counter (kmacro-set-counter). C-x C-k C-a Add the prex arg to the keyboard macro counter (kmacro-addcounter). C-x C-k C-f Specify the format for inserting the keyboard macro counter (kmacroset-format). When you are dening a keyboard macro, the command F3 (kmacro-startmacro-or-insert-counter) inserts the current value of the keyboard macros counter into the buer, and increments the counter by 1. (If you are not dening a macro, F3 begins a macro denition instead. See Section 14.1 [Basic Keyboard Macro], page 116.) You can use a numeric prex argument to specify a dierent increment. If you just specify a C-u prex, that is the same as an increment of zero: it inserts the current counter value without changing it. As an example, let us show how the keyboard macro counter can be used to build a numbered list. Consider the following key sequence: F3 C-a F3 . SPC F4 As part of this keyboard macro denition, the string 0. was inserted into the beginning of the current line. If you now move somewhere else in the buer and type F4 to invoke the macro, the string 1. is inserted at the beginning of that line. Subsequent invocations insert 2. , 3. , and so forth. The command C-x C-k C-i (kmacro-insert-counter) does the same thing as F3, but it can be used outside a keyboard macro denition. When no keyboard macro is being dened or executed, it inserts and increments the counter of the macro at the head of the keyboard macro ring. The command C-x C-k C-c (kmacro-set-counter) sets the current macro counter to the value of the numeric argument. If you use it inside the macro, it operates on each repetition of the macro. If you specify just C-u as the prex, while executing the macro, that resets the counter to the value it had at the beginning of the current repetition of the macro (undoing any increments so far in this repetition). The command C-x C-k C-a (kmacro-add-counter) adds the prex argument to the current macro counter. With just C-u as argument, it resets the counter to the last value inserted by any keyboard macro. (Normally, when you use this, the last insertion will be in the same macro and it will be the same counter.) The command C-x C-k C-f (kmacro-set-format) prompts for the format to use when inserting the macro counter. The default format is %d, which means to insert

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

120

the number in decimal without any padding. You can exit with empty minibuer to reset the format to this default. You can specify any format string that the format function accepts and that makes sense with a single integer extra argument (see Section Formatting Strings in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). Do not put the format string inside double quotes when you insert it in the minibuer. If you use this command while no keyboard macro is being dened or executed, the new format aects all subsequent macro denitions. Existing macros continue to use the format in eect when they were dened. If you set the format while dening a keyboard macro, this aects the macro being dened from that point on, but it does not aect subsequent macros. Execution of the macro will, at each step, use the format in eect at that step during its denition. Changes to the macro format during execution of a macro, like the corresponding changes during its denition, have no eect on subsequent macros. The format set by C-x C-k C-f does not aect insertion of numbers stored in registers. If you use a register as a counter, incrementing it on each repetition of the macro, that accomplishes the same thing as a keyboard macro counter. See Section 10.5 [Number Registers], page 68. For most purposes, it is simpler to use a keyboard macro counter.

14.4 Executing Macros with Variations

In a keyboard macro, you can create an eect similar to that of query-replace, in that the macro asks you each time around whether to make a change. C-x q When this point is reached during macro execution, ask for conrmation (kbd-macro-query).

While dening the macro, type C-x q at the point where you want the query to occur. During macro denition, the C-x q does nothing, but when you run the macro later, C-x q asks you interactively whether to continue. The valid responses when C-x q asks are: SPC (or y) Continue executing the keyboard macro. DEL (or n) Skip the remainder of this repetition of the macro, and start right away with the next repetition. RET (or q) Skip the remainder of this repetition and cancel further repetitions. C-r Enter a recursive editing level, in which you can perform editing which is not part of the macro. When you exit the recursive edit using C-M-c, you are asked again how to continue with the keyboard macro. If you type a SPC at this time, the rest of the macro denition is executed. It is up to you to leave point and the text in a state such that the rest of the macro will do what you want.

C-u C-x q, which is C-x q with a numeric argument, performs a completely dierent function. It enters a recursive edit reading input from the keyboard, both when you type it during the denition of the macro, and when it is executed from

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

121

the macro. During denition, the editing you do inside the recursive edit does not become part of the macro. During macro execution, the recursive edit gives you a chance to do some particularized editing on each repetition. See Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424.

14.5 Naming and Saving Keyboard Macros

C-x C-k n C-x C-k b Give a command name (for the duration of the Emacs session) to the most recently dened keyboard macro (kmacro-name-last-macro). Bind the most recently dened keyboard macro to a key sequence (for the duration of the session) (kmacro-bind-to-key).

M-x insert-kbd-macro Insert in the buer a keyboard macros denition, as Lisp code. If you wish to save a keyboard macro for later use, you can give it a name using C-x C-k n (kmacro-name-last-macro). This reads a name as an argument using the minibuer and denes that name to execute the last keyboard macro, in its current form. (If you later add to the denition of this macro, that does not alter the names denition as a macro.) The macro name is a Lisp symbol, and dening it in this way makes it a valid command name for calling with M-x or for binding a key to with global-set-key (see Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452). If you specify a name that has a prior denition other than a keyboard macro, an error message is shown and nothing is changed. You can also bind the last keyboard macro (in its current form) to a key, using C-x C-k b (kmacro-bind-to-key) followed by the key sequence you want to bind. You can bind to any key sequence in the global keymap, but since most key sequences already have other bindings, you should select the key sequence carefully. If you try to bind to a key sequence with an existing binding (in any keymap), this command asks you for conrmation before replacing the existing binding. To avoid problems caused by overriding existing bindings, the key sequences C-x C-k 0 through C-x C-k 9 and C-x C-k A through C-x C-k Z are reserved for your own keyboard macro bindings. In fact, to bind to one of these key sequences, you only need to type the digit or letter rather than the whole key sequences. For example, C-x C-k b 4 will bind the last keyboard macro to the key sequence C-x C-k 4. Once a macro has a command name, you can save its denition in a le. Then it can be used in another editing session. First, visit the le you want to save the denition in. Then use this command: M-x insert-kbd-macro RET macroname RET This inserts some Lisp code that, when executed later, will dene the same macro with the same denition it has now. (You need not understand Lisp code to do this, because insert-kbd-macro writes the Lisp code for you.) Then save the le. You can load the le later with load-file (see Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries],

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

122

page 287). If the le you save in is your init le ~/.emacs (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461) then the macro will be dened each time you run Emacs. If you give insert-kbd-macro a numeric argument, it makes additional Lisp code to record the keys (if any) that you have bound to macroname, so that the macro will be reassigned the same keys when you load the le.

14.6 Editing a Keyboard Macro

C-x C-k C-e Edit the last dened keyboard macro (kmacro-edit-macro). C-x C-k e name RET Edit a previously dened keyboard macro name (edit-kbd-macro). C-x C-k l Edit the last 300 keystrokes as a keyboard macro (kmacro-editlossage).

You can edit the last keyboard macro by typing C-x C-k C-e or C-x C-k RET (kmacro-edit-macro). This formats the macro denition in a buer and enters a specialized major mode for editing it. Type C-h m once in that buer to display details of how to edit the macro. When you are nished editing, type C-c C-c. You can edit a named keyboard macro or a macro bound to a key by typing C-x C-k e (edit-kbd-macro). Follow that with the keyboard input that you would use to invoke the macroC-x e or M-x name or some other key sequence. You can edit the last 300 keystrokes as a macro by typing C-x C-k l (kmacroedit-lossage).

14.7 Stepwise Editing a Keyboard Macro

You can interactively replay and edit the last keyboard macro, one command at a time, by typing C-x C-k SPC (kmacro-step-edit-macro). Unless you quit the macro using q or C-g, the edited macro replaces the last macro on the macro ring. This macro editing feature shows the last macro in the minibuer together with the rst (or next) command to be executed, and prompts you for an action. You can enter ? to get a summary of your options. These actions are available: SPC and y execute the current command, and advance to the next command in the keyboard macro. n, d, and DEL skip and delete the current command. f skips the current command in this execution of the keyboard macro, but doesnt delete it from the macro. TAB executes the current command, as well as all similar commands immediately following the current command; for example, TAB may be used to insert a sequence of characters (corresponding to a sequence of self-insert-command commands). c continues execution (without further editing) until the end of the keyboard macro. If execution terminates normally, the edited macro replaces the original keyboard macro.

Chapter 14: Keyboard Macros

123

C-k skips and deletes the rest of the keyboard macro, terminates step-editing, and replaces the original keyboard macro with the edited macro. q and C-g cancels the step-editing of the keyboard macro; discarding any changes made to the keyboard macro. i KEY... C-j reads and executes a series of key sequences (not including the nal C-j), and inserts them before the current command in the keyboard macro, without advancing over the current command. I KEY... reads one key sequence, executes it, and inserts it before the current command in the keyboard macro, without advancing over the current command. r KEY... C-j reads and executes a series of key sequences (not including the nal C-j), and replaces the current command in the keyboard macro with them, advancing over the inserted key sequences. R KEY... reads one key sequence, executes it, and replaces the current command in the keyboard macro with that key sequence, advancing over the inserted key sequence. a KEY... C-j executes the current command, then reads and executes a series of key sequences (not including the nal C-j), and inserts them after the current command in the keyboard macro; it then advances over the current command and the inserted key sequences. A KEY... C-j executes the rest of the commands in the keyboard macro, then reads and executes a series of key sequences (not including the nal C-j), and appends them at the end of the keyboard macro; it then terminates the step-editing and replaces the original keyboard macro with the edited macro.

Chapter 15: File Handling

124

15 File Handling
The operating system stores data permanently in named les, so most of the text you edit with Emacs comes from a le and is ultimately stored in a le. To edit a le, you must tell Emacs to read the le and prepare a buer containing a copy of the les text. This is called visiting the le. Editing commands apply directly to text in the buer; that is, to the copy inside Emacs. Your changes appear in the le itself only when you save the buer back into the le. In addition to visiting and saving les, Emacs can delete, copy, rename, and append to les, keep multiple versions of them, and operate on le directories.

15.1 File Names

Many Emacs commands that operate on a le require you to specify the le name, using the minibuer (see Section 5.1 [Minibuer File], page 27). While in the minibuer, you can use the usual completion and history commands (see Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27). Note that le name completion ignores le names whose extensions appear in the variable completion-ignored-extensions (see Section 5.3.5 [Completion Options], page 33). Note also that most commands use permissive completion with conrmation for reading le names: you are allowed to submit a nonexistent le name, but if you type RET immediately after completing up to a nonexistent le name, Emacs prints [Confirm] and you must type a second RET to conrm. See Section 5.3.3 [Completion Exit], page 31, for details. Each buer has a default directory, stored in the buer-local variable defaultdirectory. Whenever Emacs reads a le name using the minibuer, it usually inserts the default directory into the minibuer as the initial contents. You can inhibit this insertion by changing the variable insert-default-directory to nil (see Section 5.1 [Minibuer File], page 27). Regardless, Emacs always assumes that any relative le name is relative to the default directory, e.g. entering a le name without a directory species a le in the default directory. When you visit a le, Emacs sets default-directory in the visiting buer to the directory of its le. When you create a new buer that is not visiting a le, via a command like C-x b, its default directory is usually copied from the buer that was current at the time (see Section 16.1 [Select Buer], page 150). You can use the command M-x pwd to see the value of default-directory in the current buer. The command M-x cd prompts for a directory name, and sets the buers default-directory to that directory (doing this does not change the buers le name, if any). As an example, when you visit the le /u/rms/gnu/gnu.tasks, the default directory is set to /u/rms/gnu/. If you invoke a command that reads a le name, entering just foo in the minibuer, with a directory omitted, species the le /u/rms/gnu/foo; entering ../.login species /u/rms/.login; and entering new/foo species /u/rms/gnu/new/foo. When typing a le name into the minibuer, you can make use of a couple of shortcuts: a double slash is interpreted as ignore everything before the second

Chapter 15: File Handling

125

slash in the pair, and ~/ is interpreted as your home directory. See Section 5.1 [Minibuer File], page 27. The character $ is used to substitute an environment variable into a le name. The name of the environment variable consists of all the alphanumeric characters after the $; alternatively, it can be enclosed in braces after the $. For example, if you have used the shell command export FOO=rms/hacks to set up an environment variable named FOO, then both /u/$FOO/test.c and /u/${FOO}/test.c are abbreviations for /u/rms/hacks/test.c. If the environment variable is not dened, no substitution occurs, so that the character $ stands for itself. Note that environment variables aect Emacs only if they are applied before Emacs is started. To access a le with $ in its name, if the $ causes expansion, type $$. This pair is converted to a single $ at the same time that variable substitution is performed for a single $. Alternatively, quote the whole le name with /: (see Section 15.14 [Quoted File Names], page 146). File names which begin with a literal ~ should also be quoted with /:. You can include non-ASCII characters in le names. See Section 19.12 [File Name Coding], page 195.

15.2 Visiting Files

C-x C-f C-x C-r C-x C-v C-x 4 f C-x 5 f Visit a le (find-file). Visit a le for viewing, without allowing changes to it (find-fileread-only). Visit a dierent le instead of the one visited last (find-alternatefile). Visit a le, in another window (find-file-other-window). Dont alter what is displayed in the selected window. Visit a le, in a new frame (find-file-other-frame). Dont alter what is displayed in the selected frame.

M-x find-file-literally Visit a le with no conversion of the contents. Visiting a le means reading its contents into an Emacs buer so you can edit them. Emacs makes a new buer for each le that you visit. To visit a le, type C-x C-f (find-file) and use the minibuer to enter the name of the desired le. While in the minibuer, you can abort the command by typing C-g. See Section 15.1 [File Names], page 124, for details about entering le names into minibuers. If the specied le exists but the system does not allow you to read it, an error message is displayed in the echo area. Otherwise, you can tell that C-x C-f has completed successfully by the appearance of new text on the screen, and by the buer name shown in the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). Emacs normally constructs the buer name from the le name, omitting the directory name. For example, a le named /usr/rms/emacs.tex is visited in a buer named

Chapter 15: File Handling

126

emacs.tex. If there is already a buer with that name, Emacs constructs a unique name; the normal method is to append <2>, <3>, and so on, but you can select other methods. See Section 16.7.1 [Uniquify], page 157. To create a new le, just visit it using the same command, C-x C-f. Emacs displays (New file) in the echo area, but in other respects behaves as if you had visited an existing empty le. After visiting a le, the changes you make with editing commands are made in the Emacs buer. They do not take eect in the visited le, until you save the buer (see Section 15.3 [Saving], page 128). If a buer contains changes that have not been saved, we say the buer is modied. This implies that some changes will be lost if the buer is not saved. The mode line displays two stars near the left margin to indicate that the buer is modied. If you visit a le that is already in Emacs, C-x C-f switches to the existing buer instead of making another copy. Before doing so, it checks whether the le has changed since you last visited or saved it. If the le has changed, Emacs oers to reread it. If you try to visit a le larger than large-file-warning-threshold (the default is 10000000, which is about 10 megabytes), Emacs asks you for conrmation rst. You can answer y to proceed with visiting the le. Note, however, that Emacs cannot visit les that are larger than the maximum Emacs buer size, which is limited by the amount of memory Emacs can allocate and by the integers that Emacs can represent (see Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150). If you try, Emacs displays an error message saying that the maximum buer size has been exceeded. If the le name you specify contains shell-style wildcard characters, Emacs visits all the les that match it. (On case-insensitive lesystems, Emacs matches the wildcards disregarding the letter case.) Wildcards include ?, *, and [...] sequences. To enter the wild card ? in a le name in the minibuer, you need to type C-q ?. See Section 15.14 [Quoted File Names], page 146, for information on how to visit a le whose name actually contains wildcard characters. You can disable the wildcard feature by customizing find-file-wildcards. If you visit the wrong le unintentionally by typing its name incorrectly, type C-x C-v (find-alternate-file) to visit the le you really wanted. C-x C-v is similar to C-x C-f, but it kills the current buer (after rst oering to save it if it is modied). When C-x C-v reads the le name to visit, it inserts the entire default le name in the buer, with point just after the directory part; this is convenient if you made a slight error in typing the name. If you visit a le that is actually a directory, Emacs invokes Dired, the Emacs directory browser. See Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329. You can disable this behavior by setting the variable find-file-run-dired to nil; in that case, it is an error to try to visit a directory. Files which are actually collections of other les, or le archives, are visited in special modes which invoke a Dired-like environment to allow operations on archive members. See Section 15.12 [File Archives], page 144, for more about these features. If you visit a le that the operating system wont let you modify, or that is marked read-only, Emacs makes the buer read-only too, so that you wont go ahead

Chapter 15: File Handling

127

and make changes that youll have trouble saving afterward. You can make the buer writable with C-x C-q (toggle-read-only). See Section 16.3 [Misc Buer], page 152. If you want to visit a le as read-only in order to protect yourself from entering changes accidentally, visit it with the command C-x C-r (find-file-read-only) instead of C-x C-f. C-x 4 f (find-file-other-window) is like C-x C-f except that the buer containing the specied le is selected in another window. The window that was selected before C-x 4 f continues to show the same buer it was already showing. If this command is used when only one window is being displayed, that window is split in two, with one window showing the same buer as before, and the other one showing the newly requested le. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. C-x 5 f (find-file-other-frame) is similar, but opens a new frame, or selects any existing frame showing the specied le. See Chapter 18 [Frames], page 165. On graphical displays, there are two additional methods for visiting les. Firstly, when Emacs is built with a suitable GUI toolkit, commands invoked with the mouse (by clicking on the menu bar or tool bar) use the toolkits standard File Selection dialog instead of prompting for the le name in the minibuer. On GNU/Linux and Unix platforms, Emacs does this when built with GTK, LessTif, and Motif toolkits; on MS-Windows and Mac, the GUI version does that by default. For information on how to customize this, see Section 18.16 [Dialog Boxes], page 177. Secondly, Emacs supports drag and drop: dropping a le into an ordinary Emacs window visits the le using that window. As an exception, dropping a le into a window displaying a Dired buer moves or copies the le into the displayed directory. For details, see Section 18.13 [Drag and Drop], page 176, and Section 27.18 [Misc Dired Features], page 344. Each time you visit a le, Emacs automatically scans its contents to detect what character encoding and end-of-line convention it uses, and converts these to Emacss internal encoding and end-of-line convention within the buer. When you save the buer, Emacs performs the inverse conversion, writing the le to disk with its original encoding and end-of-line convention. See Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188. If you wish to edit a le as a sequence of ASCII characters with no special encoding or conversion, use the M-x find-file-literally command. This visits a le, like C-x C-f, but does not do format conversion (see Section Format Conversion in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ), character code conversion (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188), or automatic uncompression (see Section 15.11 [Compressed Files], page 144), and does not add a nal newline because of requirefinal-newline (see Section 15.3.3 [Customize Save], page 132). If you have already visited the same le in the usual (non-literal) manner, this command asks you whether to visit it literally instead. Two special hook variables allow extensions to modify the operation of visiting les. Visiting a le that does not exist runs the functions in find-file-not-foundfunctions; this variable holds a list of functions, which are called one by one (with

Chapter 15: File Handling

128

no arguments) until one of them returns non-nil. This is not a normal hook, and the name ends in -functions rather than -hook to indicate that fact. Successful visiting of any le, whether existing or not, calls the functions in find-file-hook, with no arguments. This variable is a normal hook. In the case of a nonexistent le, the find-file-not-found-functions are run rst. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. There are several ways to specify automatically the major mode for editing the le (see Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207), and to specify local variables dened for that le (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447).

15.3 Saving Files

Saving a buer in Emacs means writing its contents back into the le that was visited in the buer. 15.3.1 Commands for Saving Files These are the commands that relate to saving and writing les. C-x C-s C-x s M-~ C-x C-w Save the current buer to its le (save-buffer). Save any or all buers to their les (save-some-buffers). Forget that the current buer has been changed (not-modified). With prex argument (C-u), mark the current buer as changed. Save the current buer with a specied le name (write-file).

M-x set-visited-file-name Change the le name under which the current buer will be saved. When you wish to save the le and make your changes permanent, type C-x C-s (save-buffer). After saving is nished, C-x C-s displays a message like this: Wrote /u/rms/gnu/gnu.tasks If the current buer is not modied (no changes have been made in it since the buer was created or last saved), saving is not really done, because it would have no eect. Instead, C-x C-s displays a message like this in the echo area: (No changes need to be saved) With a prex argument, C-u C-x C-s, Emacs also marks the buer to be backed up when the next save is done. See Section 15.3.2 [Backup], page 130. The command C-x s (save-some-buffers) oers to save any or all modied buers. It asks you what to do with each buer. The possible responses are analogous to those of query-replace: y n ! RET Save this buer and ask about the rest of the buers. Dont save this buer, but ask about the rest of the buers. Save this buer and all the rest with no more questions. Terminate save-some-buffers without any more saving.

Chapter 15: File Handling .

129

Save this buer, then exit save-some-buffers without even asking about other buers. View the buer that you are currently being asked about. When you exit View mode, you get back to save-some-buffers, which asks the question again. Di the buer against its corresponding le, so you can see what changes you would be saving. This calls the command diff-bufferwith-file (see Section 15.8 [Comparing Files], page 140). Display a help message about these options.

C-r

C-h

C-x C-c, the key sequence to exit Emacs, invokes save-some-buffers and therefore asks the same questions. If you have changed a buer but do not wish to save the changes, you should take some action to prevent it. Otherwise, each time you use C-x s or C-x C-c, you are liable to save this buer by mistake. One thing you can do is type M-~ (not-modified), which clears out the indication that the buer is modied. If you do this, none of the save commands will believe that the buer needs to be saved. (~ is often used as a mathematical symbol for not; thus M-~ is not, metaed.) Alternatively, you can cancel all the changes made since the le was visited or saved, by reading the text from the le again. This is called reverting. See Section 15.4 [Reverting], page 135. (You could also undo all the changes by repeating the undo command C-x u until you have undone all the changes; but reverting is easier.) M-x set-visited-file-name alters the name of the le that the current buer is visiting. It reads the new le name using the minibuer. Then it marks the buer as visiting that le name, and changes the buer name correspondingly. set-visited-file-name does not save the buer in the newly visited le; it just alters the records inside Emacs in case you do save later. It also marks the buer as modied so that C-x C-s in that buer will save. If you wish to mark the buer as visiting a dierent le and save it right away, use C-x C-w (write-file). This is equivalent to set-visited-file-name followed by C-x C-s, except that C-x C-w asks for conrmation if the le exists. C-x C-s used on a buer that is not visiting a le has the same eect as C-x C-w; that is, it reads a le name, marks the buer as visiting that le, and saves it there. The default le name in a buer that is not visiting a le is made by combining the buer name with the buers default directory (see Section 15.1 [File Names], page 124). If the new le name implies a major mode, then C-x C-w switches to that major mode, in most cases. The command set-visited-file-name also does this. See Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207. If Emacs is about to save a le and sees that the date of the latest version on disk does not match what Emacs last read or wrote, Emacs noties you of this fact, because it probably indicates a problem caused by simultaneous editing and requires your immediate attention. See Section 15.3.4 [Simultaneous Editing], page 133.

Chapter 15: File Handling 15.3.2 Backup Files

130

On most operating systems, rewriting a le automatically destroys all record of what the le used to contain. Thus, saving a le from Emacs throws away the old contents of the leor it would, except that Emacs carefully copies the old contents to another le, called the backup le, before actually saving. Emacs makes a backup for a le only the rst time the le is saved from a buer. No matter how many times you subsequently save the le, its backup remains unchanged. However, if you kill the buer and then visit the le again, a new backup le will be made. For most les, the variable make-backup-files determines whether to make backup les. On most operating systems, its default value is t, so that Emacs does write backup les. For les managed by a version control system (see Section 25.1 [Version Control], page 292), the variable vc-make-backup-files determines whether to make backup les. By default it is nil, since backup les are redundant when you store all the previous versions in a version control system. See Section General VC Options in Specialized Emacs Features . At your option, Emacs can keep either a single backup for each le, or make a series of numbered backup les for each le that you edit. See Section 15.3.2.1 [Backup Names], page 130. The default value of the backup-enable-predicate variable prevents backup les being written for les in the directories used for temporary les, specied by temporary-file-directory or small-temporary-file-directory. You can explicitly tell Emacs to make another backup le from a buer, even though that buer has been saved before. If you save the buer with C-u C-x C-s, the version thus saved will be made into a backup le if you save the buer again. C-u C-u C-x C-s saves the buer, but rst makes the previous le contents into a new backup le. C-u C-u C-u C-x C-s does both things: it makes a backup from the previous contents, and arranges to make another from the newly saved contents if you save again. 15.3.2.1 Single or Numbered Backups When Emacs makes a backup le, its name is normally constructed by appending ~ to the le name being edited; thus, the backup le for eval.c would be eval.c~. If access control stops Emacs from writing backup les under the usual names, it writes the backup le as ~/.emacs.d/%backup%~. Only one such le can exist, so only the most recently made such backup is available. Emacs can also make numbered backup les. Numbered backup le names contain .~, the number, and another ~ after the original le name. Thus, the backup les of eval.c would be called eval.c.~1~, eval.c.~2~, and so on, all the way through names like eval.c.~259~ and beyond. The variable version-control determines whether to make single backup les or multiple numbered backup les. Its possible values are:

Chapter 15: File Handling nil t never

131

Make numbered backups for les that have numbered backups already. Otherwise, make single backups. This is the default. Make numbered backups. Never make numbered backups; always make single backups.

The usual way to set this variable is globally, through your init le or the customization buer. However, you can set version-control locally in an individual buer to control the making of backups for that buers le (see Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446). You can have Emacs set version-control locally whenever you visit a given le (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). Some modes, such as Rmail mode, set this variable. If you set the environment variable VERSION_CONTROL, to tell various GNU utilities what to do with backup les, Emacs also obeys the environment variable by setting the Lisp variable version-control accordingly at startup. If the environment variables value is t or numbered, then version-control becomes t; if the value is nil or existing, then version-control becomes nil; if it is never or simple, then version-control becomes never. You can customize the variable backup-directory-alist to specify that les matching certain patterns should be backed up in specic directories. This variable applies to both single and numbered backups. A typical use is to add an element ("." . dir ) to make all backups in the directory with absolute name dir ; Emacs modies the backup le names to avoid clashes between les with the same names originating in dierent directories. Alternatively, adding, ("." . ".~") would make backups in the invisible subdirectory .~ of the original les directory. Emacs creates the directory, if necessary, to make the backup. If you dene the variable make-backup-file-name-function to a suitable Lisp function, that overrides the usual way Emacs constructs backup le names. 15.3.2.2 Automatic Deletion of Backups To prevent excessive consumption of disk space, Emacs can delete numbered backup versions automatically. Generally Emacs keeps the rst few backups and the latest few backups, deleting any in between. This happens every time a new backup is made. The two variables kept-old-versions and kept-new-versions control this deletion. Their values are, respectively, the number of oldest (lowest-numbered) backups to keep and the number of newest (highest-numbered) ones to keep, each time a new backup is made. The backups in the middle (excluding those oldest and newest) are the excess middle versionsthose backups are deleted. These variables values are used when it is time to delete excess versions, just after a new backup version is made; the newly made backup is included in the count in kept-newversions. By default, both variables are 2. If delete-old-versions is t, Emacs deletes the excess backup les silently. If it is nil, the default, Emacs asks you whether it should delete the excess backup versions. If it has any other value, then Emacs never automatically deletes backups.

Chapter 15: File Handling Direds . (Period) command can also be used to delete old versions. Section 27.3 [Dired Deletion], page 330. 15.3.2.3 Copying vs. Renaming

132 See

Backup les can be made by copying the old le or by renaming it. This makes a dierence when the old le has multiple names (hard links). If the old le is renamed into the backup le, then the alternate names become names for the backup le. If the old le is copied instead, then the alternate names remain names for the le that you are editing, and the contents accessed by those names will be the new contents. The method of making a backup le may also aect the les owner and group. If copying is used, these do not change. If renaming is used, you become the les owner, and the les group becomes the default (dierent operating systems have dierent defaults for the group). The choice of renaming or copying is made as follows: If the variable backup-by-copying is non-nil (the default is nil), use copying. Otherwise, if the variable backup-by-copying-when-linked is non-nil (the default is nil), and the le has multiple names, use copying. Otherwise, if the variable backup-by-copying-when-mismatch is non-nil (the default is t), and renaming would change the les owner or group, use copying. If you change backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to nil, Emacs checks the numeric user-id of the les owner. If this is higher than backup-by-copyingwhen-privileged-mismatch, then it behaves as though backup-by-copyingwhen-mismatch is non-nil anyway. Otherwise, renaming is the default choice. When a le is managed with a version control system (see Section 25.1 [Version Control], page 292), Emacs does not normally make backups in the usual way for that le. But check-in and check-out are similar in some ways to making backups. One unfortunate similarity is that these operations typically break hard links, disconnecting the le name you visited from any alternate names for the same le. This has nothing to do with Emacsthe version control system does it. 15.3.3 Customizing Saving of Files If the value of the variable require-final-newline is t, saving or writing a le silently puts a newline at the end if there isnt already one there. If the value is visit, Emacs adds a newline at the end of any le that doesnt have one, just after it visits the le. (This marks the buer as modied, and you can undo it.) If the value is visit-save, Emacs adds such newlines both on visiting and on saving. If the value is nil, Emacs leaves the end of the le unchanged; any other non-nil value means to asks you whether to add a newline. The default is nil. Some major modes are designed for specic kinds of les that are always supposed to end in newlines. Such major modes set the variable require-finalnewline to the value of mode-require-final-newline, which defaults to t. By setting the latter variable, you can control how these modes handle nal newlines.

Chapter 15: File Handling

133

When Emacs saves a le, it invokes the fsync system call to force the data immediately out to disk. This is important for safety if the system crashes or in case of power outage. However, it can be disruptive on laptops using power saving, as it may force a disk spin-up each time you save a le. If you accept an increased risk of data loss, you can set write-region-inhibit-fsync to a non-nil value to disable the synchronization. 15.3.4 Protection against Simultaneous Editing Simultaneous editing occurs when two users visit the same le, both make changes, and then both save them. If nobody is informed that this is happening, whichever user saves rst would later nd that his changes were lost. On some systems, Emacs notices immediately when the second user starts to change the le, and issues an immediate warning. On all systems, Emacs checks when you save the le, and warns if you are about to overwrite another users changes. You can prevent loss of the other users work by taking the proper corrective action instead of saving the le. When you make the rst modication in an Emacs buer that is visiting a le, Emacs records that the le is locked by you. (It does this by creating a speciallynamed symbolic link in the same directory.) Emacs removes the lock when you save the changes. The idea is that the le is locked whenever an Emacs buer visiting it has unsaved changes. If you begin to modify the buer while the visited le is locked by someone else, this constitutes a collision. When Emacs detects a collision, it asks you what to do, by calling the Lisp function ask-user-about-lock. You can redene this function for the sake of customization. The standard denition of this function asks you a question and accepts three possible answers: s p q Steal the lock. Whoever was already changing the le loses the lock, and you gain the lock. Proceed. Go ahead and edit the le despite its being locked by someone else. Quit. This causes an error (file-locked), and the buer contents remain unchangedthe modication you were trying to make does not actually take place.

If Emacs or the operating system crashes, this may leave behind lock les which are stale, so you may occasionally get warnings about spurious collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just use p to tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. Note that locking works on the basis of a le name; if a le has multiple names, Emacs does not prevent two users from editing it simultaneously under dierent names. A lock le cannot be written in some circumstances, e.g. if Emacs lacks the system permissions or the system does not support symbolic links. In these cases, Emacs can still detect the collision when you try to save a le, by checking the les

Chapter 15: File Handling

134

last-modication date. If the le has changed since the last time Emacs visited or saved it, that implies that changes have been made in some other way, and will be lost if Emacs proceeds with saving. Emacs then displays a warning message and asks for conrmation before saving; answer yes to save, and no or C-g cancel the save. If you are notied that simultaneous editing has already taken place, one way to compare the buer to its le is the M-x diff-buffer-with-file command. See Section 15.8 [Comparing Files], page 140. 15.3.5 Shadowing Files M-x shadow-initialize Set up le shadowing. M-x shadow-define-literal-group Declare a single le to be shared between sites. M-x shadow-define-regexp-group Make all les that match each of a group of les be shared between hosts. M-x shadow-define-cluster RET name RET Dene a shadow le cluster name. M-x shadow-copy-files Copy all pending shadow les. M-x shadow-cancel Cancel the instruction to shadow some les. You can arrange to keep identical shadow copies of certain les in more than one placepossibly on dierent machines. To do this, rst you must set up a shadow le group, which is a set of identically-named les shared between a list of sites. The le group is permanent and applies to further Emacs sessions as well as the current one. Once the group is set up, every time you exit Emacs, it will copy the le you edited to the other les in its group. You can also do the copying without exiting Emacs, by typing M-x shadow-copy-files. To set up a shadow le group, use M-x shadow-define-literal-group or M-x shadow-define-regexp-group. See their documentation strings for further information. Before copying a le to its shadows, Emacs asks for conrmation. You can answer no to bypass copying of this le, this time. If you want to cancel the shadowing permanently for a certain le, use M-x shadow-cancel to eliminate or change the shadow le group. A shadow cluster is a group of hosts that share directories, so that copying to or from one of them is sucient to update the le on all of them. Each shadow cluster has a name, and species the network address of a primary host (the one we copy les to), and a regular expression that matches the host names of all the other hosts in the cluster. You can dene a shadow cluster with M-x shadow-define-cluster.

Chapter 15: File Handling 15.3.6 Updating Time Stamps Automatically

135

You can arrange to put a time stamp in a le, so that it is updated automatically each time you edit and save the le. The time stamp must be in the rst eight lines of the le, and you should insert it like this: Time-stamp: <> or like this: Time-stamp: " " Then add the function time-stamp to the hook before-save-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). When you save the le, this function then automatically updates the time stamp with the current date and time. You can also use the command M-x time-stamp to update the time stamp manually. For other customizations, see the Custom group time-stamp. Note that the time stamp is formatted according to your locale setting (see Section C.4 [Environment], page 509).

15.4 Reverting a Buer

If you have made extensive changes to a le-visiting buer and then change your mind, you can revert the changes and go back to the saved version of the le. To do this, type M-x revert-buffer. Since reverting unintentionally could lose a lot of work, Emacs asks for conrmation rst. The revert-buffer command tries to position point in such a way that, if the le was edited only slightly, you will be at approximately the same part of the text as before. But if you have made major changes, point may end up in a totally dierent location. Reverting marks the buer as not modied. It also clears the buers undo history (see Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110). Thus, the reversion cannot be undone if you change your mind yet again, you cant use the undo commands to bring the reverted changes back. Some kinds of buers that are not associated with les, such as Dired buers, can also be reverted. For them, reverting means recalculating their contents. Buers created explicitly with C-x b cannot be reverted; revert-buffer reports an error if you try. When you edit a le that changes automatically and frequentlyfor example, a log of output from a process that continues to runit may be useful for Emacs to revert the le without querying you. To request this behavior, set the variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. When a le name matches one of these regular expressions, find-file and revert-buffer will revert it automatically if it has changedprovided the buer itself is not modied. (If you have edited the text, it would be wrong to discard your changes.) You can also tell Emacs to revert buers periodically. To do this for a specic buer, enable the minor mode Auto-Revert mode by typing M-x auto-revert-mode. This automatically reverts the current buer every ve seconds; you can change the interval through the variable auto-revert-interval. To do the same for all le buers, type M-x global-auto-revert-mode to enable Global Auto-Revert mode.

Chapter 15: File Handling

136

These minor modes do not check or revert remote les, because that is usually too slow. One use of Auto-Revert mode is to tail a le such as a system log, so that changes made to that le by other programs are continuously displayed. To do this, just move the point to the end of the buer, and it will stay there as the le contents change. However, if you are sure that the le will only change by growing at the end, use Auto-Revert Tail mode instead (auto-revert-tail-mode). It is more ecient for this. Auto-Revert Tail mode works also for remote les. See Section 25.1.8 [VC Undo], page 304, for commands to revert to earlier versions of les under version control. See Section 25.1.2 [VC Mode Line], page 296, for Auto Revert peculiarities when visiting les under version control.

15.5 Auto-Saving: Protection Against Disasters

From time to time, Emacs automatically saves each visited le in a separate le, without altering the le you actually use. This is called auto-saving. It prevents you from losing more than a limited amount of work if the system crashes. When Emacs determines that it is time for auto-saving, it considers each buer, and each is auto-saved if auto-saving is enabled for it and it has been changed since the last time it was auto-saved. The message Auto-saving... is displayed in the echo area during auto-saving, if any les are actually auto-saved. Errors occurring during auto-saving are caught so that they do not interfere with the execution of commands you have been typing. 15.5.1 Auto-Save Files Auto-saving does not normally save in the les that you visited, because it can be very undesirable to save a change that you did not want to make permanent. Instead, auto-saving is done in a dierent le called the auto-save le, and the visited le is changed only when you request saving explicitly (such as with C-x C-s). Normally, the auto-save le name is made by appending # to the front and rear of the visited le name. Thus, a buer visiting le foo.c is auto-saved in a le #foo.c#. Most buers that are not visiting les are auto-saved only if you request it explicitly; when they are auto-saved, the auto-save le name is made by appending # to the front and rear of buer name, then adding digits and letters at the end for uniqueness. For example, the *mail* buer in which you compose messages to be sent might be auto-saved in a le named #*mail*#704juu. Auto-save le names are made this way unless you reprogram parts of Emacs to do something dierent (the functions make-auto-save-file-name and auto-save-file-name-p). The le name to be used for auto-saving in a buer is calculated when auto-saving is turned on in that buer. The variable auto-save-file-name-transforms allows a degree of control over the auto-save le name. It lets you specify a series of regular expressions and replacements to transform the auto save le name. The default value puts the

Chapter 15: File Handling

137

auto-save les for remote les (see Section 15.13 [Remote Files], page 145) into the temporary le directory on the local machine. When you delete a substantial part of the text in a large buer, auto save turns o temporarily in that buer. This is because if you deleted the text unintentionally, you might nd the auto-save le more useful if it contains the deleted text. To reenable auto-saving after this happens, save the buer with C-x C-s, or use C-u 1 M-x auto-save-mode. If you want auto-saving to be done in the visited le rather than in a separate auto-save le, set the variable auto-save-visited-file-name to a non-nil value. In this mode, there is no real dierence between auto-saving and explicit saving. A buers auto-save le is deleted when you save the buer in its visited le. (You can inhibit this by setting the variable delete-auto-save-files to nil.) Changing the visited le name with C-x C-w or set-visited-file-name renames any auto-save le to go with the new visited name. 15.5.2 Controlling Auto-Saving Each time you visit a le, auto-saving is turned on for that les buer if the variable auto-save-default is non-nil (but not in batch mode; see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507). The default for this variable is t, so auto-saving is the usual practice for le-visiting buers. To toggle auto-saving in the current buer, type M-x auto-save-mode. Auto Save mode acts as a buer-local minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). Emacs auto-saves periodically based on how many characters you have typed since the last auto-save. The variable auto-save-interval species how many characters there are between auto-saves. By default, it is 300. Emacs doesnt accept values that are too small: if you customize auto-save-interval to a value less than 20, Emacs will behave as if the value is 20. Auto-saving also takes place when you stop typing for a while. By default, it does this after 30 seconds of idleness (at this time, Emacs may also perform garbage collection; see Section Garbage Collection in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). To change this interval, customize the variable auto-save-timeout. The actual time period is longer if the current buer is long; this is a heuristic which aims to keep out of your way when you are editing long buers, in which auto-save takes an appreciable amount of time. Auto-saving during idle periods accomplishes two things: rst, it makes sure all your work is saved if you go away from the terminal for a while; second, it may avoid some auto-saving while you are actually typing. Emacs also does auto-saving whenever it gets a fatal error. This includes killing the Emacs job with a shell command such as kill %emacs, or disconnecting a phone line or network connection. You can perform an auto-save explicitly with the command M-x do-auto-save. 15.5.3 Recovering Data from Auto-Saves You can use the contents of an auto-save le to recover from a loss of data with the command M-x recover-file RET file RET. This visits le and then (after your

Chapter 15: File Handling

138

conrmation) restores the contents from its auto-save le #file #. You can then save with C-x C-s to put the recovered text into le itself. For example, to recover le foo.c from its auto-save le #foo.c#, do: M-x recover-file RET foo.c RET yes RET C-x C-s Before asking for conrmation, M-x recover-file displays a directory listing describing the specied le and the auto-save le, so you can compare their sizes and dates. If the auto-save le is older, M-x recover-file does not oer to read it. If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover all the les you were editing from their auto save les with the command M-x recover-session. This rst shows you a list of recorded interrupted sessions. Move point to the one you choose, and type C-c C-c. Then recover-session asks about each of the les that were being edited during that session, asking whether to recover that le. If you answer y, it calls recoverfile, which works in its normal fashion. It shows the dates of the original le and its auto-save le, and asks once again whether to recover that le. When recover-session is done, the les youve chosen to recover are present in Emacs buers. You should then save them. Only thissaving themupdates the les themselves. Emacs records information about interrupted sessions in les named .saves-pid-hostname in the directory ~/.emacs.d/auto-save-list/. This directory is determined by the variable auto-save-list-file-prefix. If you set auto-save-list-file-prefix to nil, sessions are not recorded for recovery.

15.6 File Name Aliases

Symbolic links and hard links both make it possible for several le names to refer to the same le. Hard links are alternate names that refer directly to the le; all the names are equally valid, and no one of them is preferred. By contrast, a symbolic link is a kind of dened alias: when foo is a symbolic link to bar, you can use either name to refer to the le, but bar is the real name, while foo is just an alias. More complex cases occur when symbolic links point to directories. Normally, if you visit a le which Emacs is already visiting under a dierent name, Emacs displays a message in the echo area and uses the existing buer visiting that le. This can happen on systems that support hard or symbolic links, or if you use a long le name on a system that truncates long le names, or on a case-insensitive le system. You can suppress the message by setting the variable find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings to a non-nil value. You can disable this feature entirely by setting the variable find-file-existing-other-name to nil: then if you visit the same le under two dierent names, you get a separate buer for each le name. If the variable find-file-visit-truename is non-nil, then the le name recorded for a buer is the les truename (made by replacing all symbolic links

Chapter 15: File Handling

139

with their target names), rather than the name you specify. Setting find-filevisit-truename also implies the eect of find-file-existing-other-name. Sometimes, a directory is ordinarily accessed through a symbolic link, and you may want Emacs to preferentially show its linked name. To do this, customize directory-abbrev-alist. Each element in this list should have the form (from . to ), which means to replace from with to whenever from appears in a directory name. The from string is a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). It is matched against directory names anchored at the rst character, and should start with \ (to support directory names with embedded newlines, which would defeat ^). The to string should be an ordinary absolute directory name pointing to the same directory. Do not use ~ to stand for a home directory in the to string; Emacs performs these substitutions separately. Heres an example, from a system on which /home/fsf is normally accessed through a symbolic link named /fsf: (("\\/home/fsf" . "/fsf"))

15.7 File Directories

The le system groups les into directories. A directory listing is a list of all the les in a directory. Emacs provides commands to create and delete directories, and to make directory listings in brief format (le names only) and verbose format (sizes, dates, and authors included). Emacs also includes a directory browser feature called Dired; see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329. C-x C-d dir-or-pattern RET Display a brief directory listing (list-directory). C-u C-x C-d dir-or-pattern RET Display a verbose directory listing. M-x make-directory RET dirname RET Create a new directory named dirname. M-x delete-directory RET dirname RET Delete the directory named dirname. If it isnt empty, you will be asked whether you want to delete it recursively. The command to display a directory listing is C-x C-d (list-directory). It reads using the minibuer a le name which is either a directory to be listed or a wildcard-containing pattern for the les to be listed. For example, C-x C-d /u2/emacs/etc RET lists all the les in directory /u2/emacs/etc. Here is an example of specifying a le name pattern: C-x C-d /u2/emacs/src/*.c RET Normally, C-x C-d displays a brief directory listing containing just le names. A numeric argument (regardless of value) tells it to make a verbose listing including sizes, dates, and owners (like ls -l). The text of a directory listing is mostly obtained by running ls in an inferior process. Two Emacs variables control the switches passed to ls: list-directorybrief-switches is a string giving the switches to use in brief listings ("-CF" by

Chapter 15: File Handling

140

default), and list-directory-verbose-switches is a string giving the switches to use in a verbose listing ("-l" by default). In verbose directory listings, Emacs adds information about the amount of free space on the disk that contains the directory. To do this, it runs the program specied by directory-free-space-program with arguments directory-freespace-args. The command M-x delete-directory prompts for a directory name using the minibuer, and deletes the directory if it is empty. If the directory is not empty, you will be asked whether you want to delete it recursively. On systems that have a Trash (or Recycle Bin) feature, you can make this command move the specied directory to the Trash instead of deleting it outright, by changing the variable delete-by-moving-to-trash to t. See Section 15.10 [Misc File Ops], page 143, for more information about using the Trash.

15.8 Comparing Files

The command M-x diff prompts for two le names, using the minibuer, and displays the dierences between the two les in a buer named *diff*. This works by running the diff program, using options taken from the variable diffswitches. The value of diff-switches should be a string; the default is "-c" to specify a context di. See Section Di in Comparing and Merging Files , for more information about the diff program. The output of the diff command is shown using a major mode called Di mode. See Section 15.9 [Di Mode], page 141. The command M-x diff-backup compares a specied le with its most recent backup. If you specify the name of a backup le, diff-backup compares it with the source le that it is a backup of. In all other respects, this behaves like M-x diff. The command M-x diff-buffer-with-file compares a specied buer with its corresponding le. This shows you what changes you would make to the le if you save the buer. The command M-x compare-windows compares the text in the current window with that in the next window. (For more information about windows in Emacs, Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159.) Comparison starts at point in each window, after pushing each initial point value on the mark ring in its respective buer. Then it moves point forward in each window, one character at a time, until it reaches characters that dont match. Then the command exits. If point in the two windows is followed by non-matching text when the command starts, M-x compare-windows tries heuristically to advance up to matching text in the two windows, and then exits. So if you use M-x compare-windows repeatedly, each time it either skips one matching range or nds the start of another. With a numeric argument, compare-windows ignores changes in whitespace. If the variable compare-ignore-case is non-nil, the comparison ignores dierences in case as well. If the variable compare-ignore-whitespace is non-nil, compare-

Chapter 15: File Handling

141

windows normally ignores changes in whitespace, and a prex argument turns that o. You can use M-x smerge-mode to turn on Smerge mode, a minor mode for editing output from the diff3 program. This is typically the result of a failed merge from a version control system update outside VC, due to conicting changes to a le. Smerge mode provides commands to resolve conicts by selecting specic changes. See Section Emerge in Specialized Emacs Features , for the Emerge facility, which provides a powerful interface for merging les.

15.9 Di Mode
Di mode is a major mode used for the output of M-x diff and other similar commands. This kind of output is called a patch, because it can be passed to the patch command to automatically apply the specied changes. To select Di mode manually, type M-x diff-mode. The changes specied in a patch are grouped into hunks, which are contiguous chunks of text that contain one or more changed lines. Hunks can also include unchanged lines to provide context for the changes. Each hunk is preceded by a hunk header, which species the old and new line numbers at which the hunk occurs. Di mode highlights each hunk header, to distinguish it from the actual contents of the hunk. You can edit a Di mode buer like any other buer. (If it is read-only, you need to make it writable rst. See Section 16.3 [Misc Buer], page 152.) Whenever you change a hunk, Di mode attempts to automatically correct the line numbers in the hunk headers, to ensure that the di remains correct. To disable automatic line number correction, change the variable diff-update-on-the-fly to nil. Di mode treats each hunk as an error message, similar to Compilation mode. Thus, you can use commands such as C-x to visit the corresponding source locations. See Section 24.2 [Compilation Mode], page 272. In addition, Di mode provides the following commands to navigate, manipulate and apply parts of patches: M-n Move to the next hunk-start (diff-hunk-next). This command has a side eect: it renes the hunk you move to, highlighting its changes with better granularity. To disable this feature, type M-x diff-auto-refine-mode to toggle o the minor mode Di Auto-Rene mode. To disable Di Auto Rene mode by default, add this to your init le (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445): (add-hook diff-mode-hook (lambda () (diff-auto-refine-mode -1))) Move to the previous hunk-start (diff-hunk-prev). Like M-n, this has the side-eect of rening the hunk you move to, unless you disable Di Auto-Rene mode. Move to the next le-start, in a multi-le patch (diff-file-next). Move to the previous le-start, in a multi-le patch (diff-file-prev).

M-p

M-} M-{

Chapter 15: File Handling M-k M-K C-c C-a C-c C-b Kill the hunk at point (diff-hunk-kill). In a multi-le patch, kill the current le part. (diff-file-kill).

142

Apply this hunk to its target le (diff-apply-hunk). With a prex argument of C-u, revert this hunk. Highlight the changes of the hunk at point with a ner granularity (diff-refine-hunk). This allows you to see exactly which parts of each changed line were actually changed. Go to the source le and line corresponding to this hunk (diff-gotosource). Start an Edi session with the patch (diff-ediff-patch). See Section Edi in The Edi Manual . Restrict the view to the current hunk (diff-restrict-view). See Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74. With a prex argument of C-u, restrict the view to the current le of a multiple-le patch. To widen again, use C-x n w (widen). Reverse the direction of comparison for the entire buer (diffreverse-direction). Split the hunk at point (diff-split-hunk). This is for manually editing patches, and only works with the unied di format produced by the -u or --unified options to the diff program. If you need to split a hunk in the context di format produced by the -c or --context options to diff, rst convert the buer to the unied di format with C-c C-u. Convert the entire buer to the context di format (diff-unified>context). With a prex argument, convert only the text within the region. Convert the entire buer to unied di format (diff-context>unified). With a prex argument, convert unied format to context format. When the mark is active, convert only the text within the region. Rene the current hunk so that it disregards changes in whitespace (diff-refine-hunk). Generate a ChangeLog entry, like C-x 4 a does (see Section 25.2 [Change Log], page 309), for each one of the hunks (diff-add-changelog-entries-other-window). This creates a skeleton of the log of changes that you can later ll with the actual descriptions of the changes. C-x 4 a itself in Di mode operates on behalf of the current hunks le, but gets the function name from the patch itself. This is useful for making log entries for functions that are deleted by the patch.

C-c C-c C-c C-e C-c C-n

C-c C-r C-c C-s

C-c C-d

C-c C-u

C-c C-w C-x 4 A

Chapter 15: File Handling

143

By default, Di mode highlights trailing whitespace on modied lines, so that they are more obvious. This is done by enabling Whitespace mode in the Di buer (see Section 11.16 [Useless Whitespace], page 84). Di mode buers are set up so that Whitespace mode avoids highlighting trailing whitespace occurring in the di context.

15.10 Miscellaneous File Operations

Emacs has commands for performing many other operations on les. All operate on one le; they do not accept wildcard le names. M-x delete-file prompts for a le and deletes it. If you are deleting many les in one directory, it may be more convenient to use Dired rather than delete-file. See Section 27.3 [Dired Deletion], page 330. M-x move-file-to-trash moves a le into the system Trash (or Recycle Bin). This is a facility available on most operating systems; les that are moved into the Trash can be brought back later if you change your mind. By default, Emacs deletion commands do not use the Trash. To use the Trash (when it is available) for common deletion commands, change the variable deleteby-moving-to-trash to t. This aects the commands M-x delete-file and M-x delete-directory (see Section 15.7 [Directories], page 139), as well as the deletion commands in Dired (see Section 27.3 [Dired Deletion], page 330). Supplying a prex argument to M-x delete-file or M-x delete-directory makes them delete outright, instead of using the Trash, regardless of delete-by-moving-to-trash. M-x copy-file reads the le old and writes a new le named new with the same contents. M-x copy-directory copies directories, similar to the cp -r shell command. It prompts for a directory old and a destination new. If new is an existing directory, it creates a copy of the old directory and puts it in new. If new is not an existing directory, it copies all the contents of old into a new directory named new. M-x rename-file reads two le names old and new using the minibuer, then renames le old as new. If the le name new already exists, you must conrm with yes or renaming is not done; this is because renaming causes the old meaning of the name new to be lost. If old and new are on dierent le systems, the le old is copied and deleted. If the argument new is just a directory name, the real new name is in that directory, with the same non-directory component as old. For example, M-x rename-file RET ~/foo RET /tmp RET renames ~/foo to /tmp/foo. The same rule applies to all the remaining commands in this section. All of them ask for conrmation when the new le name already exists, too. M-x add-name-to-file adds an additional name to an existing le without removing its old name. The new name is created as a hard link to the existing le. The new name must belong on the same le system that the le is on. On MS-Windows, this command works only if the le resides in an NTFS le system. On MS-DOS, it works by copying the le. M-x make-symbolic-link reads two le names target and linkname, then creates a symbolic link named linkname, which points at target. The eect is that

Chapter 15: File Handling

144

future attempts to open le linkname will refer to whatever le is named target at the time the opening is done, or will get an error if the name target is nonexistent at that time. This command does not expand the argument target, so that it allows you to specify a relative name as the target of the link. Not all systems support symbolic links; on systems that dont support them, this command is not dened. M-x insert-file (also C-x i) inserts a copy of the contents of the specied le into the current buer at point, leaving point unchanged before the contents. The position after the inserted contents is added to the mark ring, without activating the mark (see Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51). M-x insert-file-literally is like M-x insert-file, except the le is inserted literally: it is treated as a sequence of ASCII characters with no special encoding or conversion, similar to the M-x find-file-literally command (see Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125). M-x write-region is the inverse of M-x insert-file; it copies the contents of the region into the specied le. M-x append-to-file adds the text of the region to the end of the specied le. See Section 9.4 [Accumulating Text], page 61. The variable write-region-inhibit-fsync applies to these commands, as well as saving les; see Section 15.3.3 [Customize Save], page 132. M-x set-file-modes reads a le name followed by a le mode, and applies that le mode to the specied le. File modes, also called le permissions, determine whether a le can be read, written to, or executed, and by whom. This command reads le modes using the same symbolic or octal format accepted by the chmod command; for instance, u+x means to add execution permission for the user who owns the le. It has no eect on operating systems that do not support le modes. chmod is a convenience alias for this function.

15.11 Accessing Compressed Files

Emacs automatically uncompresses compressed les when you visit them, and automatically recompresses them if you alter them and save them. Emacs recognizes compressed les by their le names. File names ending in .gz indicate a le compressed with gzip. Other endings indicate other compression programs. Automatic uncompression and compression apply to all the operations in which Emacs uses the contents of a le. This includes visiting it, saving it, inserting its contents into a buer, loading it, and byte compiling it. To disable this feature, type the command M-x auto-compression-mode. You can disable it permanently by customizing the variable auto-compression-mode.

15.12 File Archives

A le whose name ends in .tar is normally an archive made by the tar program. Emacs views these les in a special mode called Tar mode which provides a Diredlike list of the contents (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329). You can move around through the list just as you would in Dired, and visit the subles contained in the archive. However, not all Dired commands are available in Tar mode.

Chapter 15: File Handling

145

If Auto Compression mode is enabled (see Section 15.11 [Compressed Files], page 144), then Tar mode is used also for compressed archivesles with extensions .tgz, .tar.Z and .tar.gz. The keys e, f and RET all extract a component le into its own buer. You can edit it there, and if you save the buer, the edited version will replace the version in the Tar buer. Clicking with the mouse on the le name in the Tar buer does likewise. v extracts a le into a buer in View mode (see Section 11.6 [View Mode], page 75). o extracts the le and displays it in another window, so you could edit the le and operate on the archive simultaneously. d marks a le for deletion when you later use x, and u unmarks a le, as in Dired. C copies a le from the archive to disk and R renames a le within the archive. g reverts the buer from the archive on disk. The keys M, G, and O change the les permission bits, group, and owner, respectively. Saving the Tar buer writes a new version of the archive to disk with the changes you made to the components. You dont need the tar program to use Tar modeEmacs reads the archives directly. However, accessing compressed archives requires the appropriate uncompression program. A separate but similar Archive mode is used for arc, jar, lzh, zip, rar, 7z, and zoo archives, as well as exe les that are self-extracting executables. The key bindings of Archive mode are similar to those in Tar mode, with the addition of the m key which marks a le for subsequent operations, and M-DEL which unmarks all the marked les. Also, the a key toggles the display of detailed le information, for those archive types where it wont t in a single line. Operations such as renaming a suble, or changing its mode or owner, are supported only for some of the archive formats. Unlike Tar mode, Archive mode runs the archiving programs to unpack and repack archives. However, you dont need these programs to look at the archive table of contents, only to extract or manipulate the subles in the archive. Details of the program names and their options can be set in the Archive Customize group.

15.13 Remote Files

You can refer to les on other machines using a special le name syntax: /host :filename /user @host :filename /user @host #port :filename /method :user @host :filename /method :user @host #port :filename To carry out this request, Emacs uses a remote-login program such as ftp, ssh, rlogin, or telnet. You can always specify in the le name which method to usefor example, /ftp:user @host :filename uses FTP, whereas /ssh:user @host :filename uses ssh. When you dont specify a method in the le name, Emacs chooses the method as follows:

Chapter 15: File Handling 1. If the host name starts with ftp. (with dot), Emacs uses FTP. 2. If the user name is ftp or anonymous, Emacs uses FTP. 3. If the variable tramp-default-method is set to ftp, Emacs uses FTP. 4. If ssh-agent is running, Emacs uses scp. 5. Otherwise, Emacs uses ssh.

146

You can entirely turn o the remote le name feature by setting the variable trampmode to nil. You can turn o the feature in individual cases by quoting the le name with /: (see Section 15.14 [Quoted File Names], page 146). Remote le access through FTP is handled by the Ange-FTP package, which is documented in the following. Remote le access through the other methods is handled by the Tramp package, which has its own manual. See Section Top in The Tramp Manual . When the Ange-FTP package is used, Emacs logs in through FTP using the name user, if that is specied in the remote le name. If user is unspecied, Emacs logs in using your user name on the local system; but if you set the variable angeftp-default-user to a string, that string is used instead. When logging in, Emacs may also ask for a password. For performance reasons, Emacs does not make backup les for les accessed via FTP by default. To make it do so, change the variable ange-ftp-make-backupfiles to a non-nil value. By default, auto-save les for remote les are made in the temporary le directory on the local machine, as specied by the variable auto-save-file-nametransforms. See Section 15.5.1 [Auto Save Files], page 136. To visit les accessible by anonymous FTP, you use special user names anonymous or ftp. Passwords for these user names are handled specially. The variable ange-ftp-generate-anonymous-password controls what happens: if the value of this variable is a string, then that string is used as the password; if non-nil (the default), then the value of user-mail-address is used; if nil, then Emacs prompts you for a password as usual (see Section 5.6 [Passwords], page 36). Sometimes you may be unable to access les on a remote machine because a rewall in between blocks the connection for security reasons. If you can log in on a gateway machine from which the target les are accessible, and whose FTP server supports gatewaying features, you can still use remote le names; all you have to do is specify the name of the gateway machine by setting the variable ange-ftpgateway-host, and set ange-ftp-smart-gateway to t. Otherwise you may be able to make remote le names work, but the procedure is complex. You can read the instructions by typing M-x finder-commentary RET ange-ftp RET.

15.14 Quoted File Names

You can quote an absolute le name to prevent special characters and syntax in it from having their special eects. The way to do this is to add /: at the beginning. For example, you can quote a local le name which appears remote, to prevent it from being treated as a remote le name. Thus, if you have a directory

Chapter 15: File Handling

147

named /foo: and a le named bar in it, you can refer to that le in Emacs as /:/foo:/bar. /: can also prevent ~ from being treated as a special character for a users home directory. For example, /:/tmp/~hack refers to a le whose name is ~hack in directory /tmp. Quoting with /: is also a way to enter in the minibuer a le name that contains $. In order for this to work, the /: must be at the beginning of the minibuer contents. (You can also double each $; see [File Names with $], page 125.) You can also quote wildcard characters with /:, for visiting. For example, /:/tmp/foo*bar visits the le /tmp/foo*bar. Another method of getting the same result is to enter /tmp/foo[*]bar, which is a wildcard specication that matches only /tmp/foo*bar. However, in many cases there is no need to quote the wildcard characters because even unquoted they give the right result. For example, if the only le name in /tmp that starts with foo and ends with bar is foo*bar, then specifying /tmp/foo*bar will visit only /tmp/foo*bar.

15.15 File Name Cache

You can use the le name cache to make it easy to locate a le by name, without having to remember exactly where it is located. When typing a le name in the minibuer, C-TAB (file-cache-minibuffer-complete) completes it using the le name cache. If you repeat C-TAB, that cycles through the possible completions of what you had originally typed. (However, note that the C-TAB character cannot be typed on most text terminals.) The le name cache does not ll up automatically. Instead, you load le names into the cache using these commands: M-x file-cache-add-directory RET directory RET Add each le name in directory to the le name cache. M-x file-cache-add-directory-using-find RET directory RET Add each le name in directory and all of its nested subdirectories to the le name cache. M-x file-cache-add-directory-using-locate RET directory RET Add each le name in directory and all of its nested subdirectories to the le name cache, using locate to nd them all. M-x file-cache-add-directory-list RET variable RET Add each le name in each directory listed in variable to the le name cache. variable should be a Lisp variable whose value is a list of directory names, like load-path. M-x file-cache-clear-cache RET Clear the cache; that is, remove all le names from it. The le name cache is not persistent: it is kept and maintained only for the duration of the Emacs session. You can view the contents of the cache with the file-cache-display command.

Chapter 15: File Handling

148

15.16 Convenience Features for Finding Files

In this section, we introduce some convenient facilities for nding recently-opened les, reading le names from a buer, and viewing image les. If you enable Recentf mode, with M-x recentf-mode, the File menu includes a submenu containing a list of recently opened les. M-x recentf-save-list saves the current recent-file-list to a le, and M-x recentf-edit-list edits it. The M-x ffap command generalizes find-file with more powerful heuristic defaults (see Section 31.11.3 [FFAP], page 427), often based on the text at point. Partial Completion mode oers other features extending find-file, which can be used with ffap. See Section 5.3.5 [Completion Options], page 33. Visiting image les automatically selects Image mode. In this major mode, you can type C-c C-c (image-toggle-display) to toggle between displaying the le as an image in the Emacs buer, and displaying its underlying text (or raw byte) representation. Displaying the le as an image works only if Emacs is compiled with support for displaying such images. If the displayed image is wider or taller than the frame, the usual point motion keys (C-f, C-p, and so forth) cause dierent parts of the image to be displayed. If the image can be animated, the command RET (image-toggle-animation) starts or stops the animation. Animation plays once, unless the option image-animate-loop is non-nil. Currently, Emacs only supports animation in GIF les. If your Emacs was compiled with ImageMagick support, it is possible to view a much wider variety of image types in Image mode, by rendering the images via ImageMagick. However, this feature is currently disabled by default. To enable it, add the following line to your init le: (imagemagick-register-types) The Image-Dired package can also be used to view images as thumbnails. See Section 27.17 [Image-Dired], page 343.

15.17 Filesets
If you regularly edit a certain group of les, you can dene them as a leset. This lets you perform certain operations, such as visiting, query-replace, and shell commands on all the les at once. To make use of lesets, you must rst add the expression (filesets-init) to your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). This adds a Filesets menu to the menu bar. The simplest way to dene a leset is by adding les to it one at a time. To add a le to leset name, visit the le and type M-x filesets-add-buffer RET name RET. If there is no leset name, this creates a new one, which initially contains only the current le. The command M-x filesets-remove-buffer removes the current le from a leset. You can also edit the list of lesets directly, with M-x filesets-edit (or by choosing Edit Filesets from the Filesets menu). The editing is performed in a Customize buer (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). Normally, a leset is a simple list of les, but you can also dene a leset as a regular expression matching le names. Some examples of these more complicated lesets are shown

Chapter 15: File Handling

149

in the Customize buer. Remember to select Save for future sessions if you want to use the same lesets in future Emacs sessions. You can use the command M-x filesets-open to visit all the les in a leset, and M-x filesets-close to close them. Use M-x filesets-run-cmd to run a shell command on all the les in a leset. These commands are also available from the Filesets menu, where each existing leset is represented by a submenu. See Section 25.1 [Version Control], page 292, for a dierent concept of lesets: groups of les bundled together for version control operations. Filesets of that type are unnamed, and do not persist across Emacs sessions.

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

150

16 Using Multiple Buers

The text you are editing in Emacs resides in an object called a buer. Each time you visit a le, a buer is used to hold the les text. Each time you invoke Dired, a buer is used to hold the directory listing. If you send a message with C-x m, a buer is used to hold the text of the message. When you ask for a commands documentation, that appears in a buer named *Help*. Each buer has a unique name, which can be of any length. When a buer is displayed in a window, its name is shown in the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). The distinction between upper and lower case matters in buer names. Most buers are made by visiting les, and their names are derived from the les names; however, you can also create an empty buer with any name you want. A newly started Emacs has several buers, including one named *scratch*, which can be used for evaluating Lisp expressions and is not associated with any le (see Section 24.10 [Lisp Interaction], page 290). At any time, one and only one buer is selected ; we call it the current buer. We sometimes say that a command operates on the buer; this really means that it operates on the current buer. When there is only one Emacs window, the buer displayed in that window is current. When there are multiple windows, the buer displayed in the selected window is current. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. Aside from its textual contents, each buer records several pieces of information, such as what le it is visiting (if any), whether it is modied, and what major mode and minor modes are in eect (see Chapter 20 [Modes], page 204). These are stored in buer-local variablesvariables that can have a dierent value in each buer. See Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446. A buers size cannot be larger than some maximum, which is dened by the largest buer position representable by Emacs integers. This is because Emacs tracks buer positions using that data type. For typical 64-bit machines, this maximum buer size is 26 1 2 bytes, or about 2 EiB. For typical 32-bit machines, the maximum is usually 22 9 2 bytes, or about 512 MiB. Buer sizes are also limited by the amount of memory in the system.

16.1 Creating and Selecting Buers

C-x b buffer RET Select or create a buer named buer (switch-to-buffer). C-x 4 b buffer RET Similar, but select buer in another window (switch-to-bufferother-window). C-x 5 b buffer RET Similar, but select buer in a separate frame (switch-to-bufferother-frame). C-x LEFT C-x RIGHT Select the previous buer in the buer list (previous-buffer). Select the next buer in the buer list (next-buffer).

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

151

C-u M-g M-g C-u M-g g Read a number n and move to line n in the most recently selected buer other than the current buer. The C-x b (switch-to-buffer) command reads a buer name using the minibuer. Then it makes that buer current, and displays it in the currently-selected window. An empty input species the buer that was current most recently among those not now displayed in any window. While entering the buer name, you can use the usual completion and history commands (see Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27). Note that C-x b, and related commands, use permissive completion with conrmation for minibuer completion: if you type RET immediately after completing up to a nonexistent buer name, Emacs prints [Confirm] and you must type a second RET to submit that buer name. See Section 5.3.3 [Completion Exit], page 31, for details. If you specify a buer that does not exist, C-x b creates a new, empty buer that is not visiting any le, and selects it for editing. The default value of the variable major-mode determines the new buers major mode; the default value is Fundamental mode. See Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204. One reason to create a new buer is to use it for making temporary notes. If you try to save it, Emacs asks for the le name to use, and the buers major mode is re-established taking that le name into account (see Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207). For conveniently switching between a few buers, use the commands C-x LEFT and C-x RIGHT. C-x LEFT (previous-buffer) selects the previous buer (following the order of most recent selection in the current frame), while C-x RIGHT (nextbuffer) moves through buers in the reverse direction. To select a buer in a window other than the current one, type C-x 4 b (switchto-buffer-other-window). This prompts for a buer name using the minibuer, displays that buer in another window, and selects that window. Similarly, C-x 5 b (switch-to-buffer-other-frame) prompts for a buer name, displays that buer in another frame, and selects that frame. If the buer is already being shown in a window on another frame, Emacs selects that window and frame instead of creating a new frame. See Section 17.6 [Displaying Buers], page 163, for how the C-x 4 b and C-x 5 b commands get the window and/or frame to display in. In addition, C-x C-f, and any other command for visiting a le, can also be used to switch to an existing le-visiting buer. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. C-u M-g M-g, that is goto-line with a plain prex argument, reads a number n using the minibuer, selects the most recently selected buer other than the current buer in another window, and then moves point to the beginning of line number n in that buer. This is mainly useful in a buer that refers to line numbers in another buer: if point is on or just after a number, goto-line uses that number as the default for n. Note that prex arguments other than just C-u behave dierently. C-u 4 M-g M-g goes to line 4 in the current buer, without reading a number from the minibuer. (Remember that M-g M-g without prex argument reads a number n and then moves to line number n in the current buer. See Section 4.2 [Moving Point], page 18.)

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

152

Emacs uses buer names that start with a space for internal purposes. It treats these buers specially in minor waysfor example, by default they do not record undo information. It is best to avoid using such buer names yourself.

16.2 Listing Existing Buers

C-x C-b List the existing buers (list-buffers). To display a list of existing buers, type C-x C-b. Each line in the list shows one buers name, major mode and visited le. The buers are listed in the order that they were current; the buers that were current most recently come rst. . in the rst eld of a line indicates that the buer is current. % indicates a read-only buer. * indicates that the buer is modied. If several buers are modied, it may be time to save some with C-x s (see Section 15.3.1 [Save Commands], page 128). Here is an example of a buer list:
CRM Buffer . * .emacs % *Help* search.c % src * *mail* % HELLO % NEWS *scratch* * *Messages* Size 3294 101 86055 20959 42 1607 481184 191 1554 Mode Emacs-Lisp Help C Dired by name Mail Fundamental Outline Lisp Interaction Fundamental File ~/.emacs ~/cvs/emacs/src/search.c ~/cvs/emacs/src/ ~/cvs/emacs/etc/HELLO ~/cvs/emacs/etc/NEWS

The buer *Help* was made by a help request (see Chapter 7 [Help], page 38); it is not visiting any le. The buer src was made by Dired on the directory ~/cvs/emacs/src/. You can list only buers that are visiting les by giving the command a prex argument, as in C-u C-x C-b. list-buffers omits buers whose names begin with a space, unless they visit les: such buers are used internally by Emacs.

16.3 Miscellaneous Buer Operations

C-x C-q Toggle read-only status of buer (toggle-read-only).

M-x rename-buffer RET name RET Change the name of the current buer. M-x rename-uniquely Rename the current buer by adding <number > to the end. M-x view-buffer RET buffer RET Scroll through buer buer. See Section 11.6 [View Mode], page 75. A buer can be read-only, which means that commands to change its contents are not allowed. The mode line indicates read-only buers with %% or %* near the left margin. Read-only buers are usually made by subsystems such as Dired and Rmail that have special commands to operate on the text; also by visiting a le whose access control says you cannot write it.

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

153

The command C-x C-q (toggle-read-only) makes a read-only buer writable, and makes a writable buer read-only. This works by setting the variable bufferread-only, which has a local value in each buer and makes the buer read-only if its value is non-nil. M-x rename-buffer changes the name of the current buer. You specify the new name as a minibuer argument; there is no default. If you specify a name that is in use for some other buer, an error happens and no renaming is done. M-x rename-uniquely renames the current buer to a similar name with a numeric sux added to make it both dierent and unique. This command does not need an argument. It is useful for creating multiple shell buers: if you rename the *shell* buer, then do M-x shell again, it makes a new shell buer named *shell*; meanwhile, the old shell buer continues to exist under its new name. This method is also good for mail buers, compilation buers, and most Emacs features that create special buers with particular names. (With some of these features, such as M-x compile, M-x grep, you need to switch to some other buer before using the command again, otherwise it will reuse the current buer despite the name change.) The commands M-x append-to-buffer and M-x insert-buffer can also be used to copy text from one buer to another. See Section 9.4 [Accumulating Text], page 61.

16.4 Killing Buers

If you continue an Emacs session for a while, you may accumulate a large number of buers. You may then nd it convenient to kill the buers you no longer need. On most operating systems, killing a buer releases its space back to the operating system so that other programs can use it. Here are some commands for killing buers: C-x k bufname RET Kill buer bufname (kill-buffer). M-x kill-some-buffers Oer to kill each buer, one by one. M-x kill-matching-buffers Oer to kill all buers matching a regular expression. C-x k (kill-buffer) kills one buer, whose name you specify in the minibuer. The default, used if you type just RET in the minibuer, is to kill the current buer. If you kill the current buer, another buer becomes current: one that was current in the recent past but is not displayed in any window now. If you ask to kill a le-visiting buer that is modied, then you must conrm with yes before the buer is killed. The command M-x kill-some-buffers asks about each buer, one by one. An answer of y means to kill the buer, just like kill-buffer. This command ignores buers whose names begin with a space, which are used internally by Emacs.

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

154

The command M-x kill-matching-buffers prompts for a regular expression and kills all buers whose names match that expression. See Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97. Like kill-some-buffers, it asks for conrmation before each kill. This command normally ignores buers whose names begin with a space, which are used internally by Emacs. To kill internal buers as well, call kill-matching-buffers with a prex argument. The buer menu feature is also convenient for killing various buers. See Section 16.5 [Several Buers], page 154. If you want to do something special every time a buer is killed, you can add hook functions to the hook kill-buffer-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). If you run one Emacs session for a period of days, as many people do, it can ll up with buers that you used several days ago. The command M-x clean-buffer-list is a convenient way to purge them; it kills all the unmodied buers that you have not used for a long time. An ordinary buer is killed if it has not been displayed for three days; however, you can specify certain buers that should never be killed automatically, and others that should be killed if they have been unused for a mere hour. You can also have this buer purging done for you, once a day, by enabling Midnight mode. Midnight mode operates each day at midnight; at that time, it runs clean-buffer-list, or whichever functions you have placed in the normal hook midnight-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). To enable Midnight mode, use the Customization buer to set the variable midnight-mode to t. See Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434.

16.5 Operating on Several Buers

M-x buffer-menu Begin editing a buer listing all Emacs buers. M-x buffer-menu-other-window. Similar, but do it in another window. The buer menu opened by C-x C-b (see Section 16.2 [List Buers], page 152) does not merely list buers. It also allows you to perform various operations on buers, through an interface similar to Dired (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329). You can save buers, kill them (here called deleting them, for consistency with Dired), or display them. To use the buer menu, type C-x C-b and switch to the window displaying the *Buffer List* buer. You can also type M-x buffer-menu to open the buer menu in the selected window. Alternatively, the command M-x buffer-menu-other-window opens the buer menu in another window, and selects that window. The buer menu is a read-only buer, and can be changed only through the special commands described in this section. The usual cursor motion commands can be used in this buer. The following commands apply to the buer described on the current line:

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers d

155

Request to delete (kill) the buer, then move down. The request shows as a D on the line, before the buer name. Requested deletions take place when you type the x command. Like d but move up afterwards instead of down. Request to save the buer. The request shows as an S on the line. Requested saves take place when you type the x command. You may request both saving and deletion for the same buer. Perform previously requested deletions and saves. Remove any request made for the current line, and move down. Move to previous line and remove any request made for that line.

C-d s

x u DEL

The d, C-d, s and u commands to add or remove ags also move down (or up) one line. They accept a numeric argument as a repeat count. These commands operate immediately on the buer listed on the current line: ~ % t Mark the buer unmodied. The command ~ does this immediately when you type it. Toggle the buers read-only ag. The command % does this immediately when you type it. Visit the buer as a tags table. See Section 25.3.4 [Select Tags Table], page 317. There are also commands to select another buer or buers: q RET f o C-o 1 2 Quit the buer menuimmediately display the most recent formerly visible buer in its place. Immediately select this lines buer in place of the *Buffer List* buer. Immediately select this lines buer in another window as if by C-x 4 b, leaving *Buffer List* visible. Immediately display this lines buer in another window, but dont select the window. Immediately select this lines buer in a full-screen window. Immediately set up two windows, with this lines buer selected in one, and the previously current buer (aside from the buer *Buffer List*) displayed in the other. Bury the buer listed on this line. Mark this lines buer to be displayed in another window if you exit with the v command. The request shows as a > at the beginning of the line. (A single buer may not have both a delete request and a display request.)

b m

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers v

156

Immediately select this lines buer, and also display in other windows any buers previously marked with the m command. If you have not marked any buers, this command is equivalent to 1. There is also a command that aects the entire buer list:

Delete, or reinsert, lines for non-le buers. This command toggles the inclusion of such buers in the buer list.

What buffer-menu actually does is create and switch to a suitable buer, and turn on Buer Menu mode in it. Everything else described above is implemented by the special commands provided in Buer Menu mode. One consequence of this is that you can switch from the *Buffer List* buer to another Emacs buer, and edit there. You can reselect the *Buffer List* buer later, to perform the operations already requested, or you can kill it, or pay no further attention to it. Normally, the buer *Buffer List* is not updated automatically when buers are created and killed; its contents are just text. If you have created, deleted or renamed buers, the way to update *Buffer List* to show what you have done is to type g (revert-buffer). You can make this happen regularly every autorevert-interval seconds if you enable Auto Revert mode in this buer, as long as it is not marked modied. Global Auto Revert mode applies to the *Buffer List* buer only if global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers is non-nil. See Info le emacs-xtra, node Autorevert, for details.

16.6 Indirect Buers

An indirect buer shares the text of some other buer, which is called the base buer of the indirect buer. In some ways it is a buer analogue of a symbolic link between les. M-x make-indirect-buffer RET base-buffer RET indirect-name RET Create an indirect buer named indirect-name with base buer basebuer. M-x clone-indirect-buffer RET Create an indirect buer that is a twin copy of the current buer. C-x 4 c Create an indirect buer that is a twin copy of the current buer, and select it in another window (clone-indirect-buffer-otherwindow).

The text of the indirect buer is always identical to the text of its base buer; changes made by editing either one are visible immediately in the other. But in all other respects, the indirect buer and its base buer are completely separate. They can have dierent names, dierent values of point, dierent narrowing, dierent markers, dierent major modes, and dierent local variables. An indirect buer cannot visit a le, but its base buer can. If you try to save the indirect buer, that actually works by saving the base buer. Killing the base buer eectively kills the indirect buer, but killing an indirect buer has no eect on its base buer.

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

157

One way to use indirect buers is to display multiple views of an outline. See Section 22.8.4 [Outline Views], page 228. A quick and handy way to make an indirect buer is with the command M-x clone-indirect-buffer. It creates and selects an indirect buer whose base buer is the current buer. With a numeric argument, it prompts for the name of the indirect buer; otherwise it uses the name of the current buer, with a <n > sux added. C-x 4 c (clone-indirect-buffer-other-window) works like M-x clone-indirect-buffer, but it selects the new buer in another window. These functions run the hook clone-indirect-buffer-hook after creating the indirect buer. The more general way to make an indirect buer is with the command M-x make-indirect-buffer. It creates an indirect buer named indirect-name from a buer base-buer, prompting for both using the minibuer.

16.7 Convenience Features and Customization of Buer Handling

This section describes several modes and features that make it more convenient to switch between buers. 16.7.1 Making Buer Names Unique When several buers visit identically-named les, Emacs must give the buers distinct names. The usual method for making buer names unique adds <2>, <3>, etc. to the end of the buer names (all but one of them). Other methods work by adding parts of each les directory to the buer name. To select one, load the library uniquify (e.g. using (require uniquify)), and customize the variable uniquify-buffer-name-style (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). To begin with, the forward naming method includes part of the les directory name at the beginning of the buer name; using this method, buers visiting the les /u/rms/tmp/Makefile and /usr/projects/zaphod/Makefile would be named tmp/Makefile and zaphod/Makefile, respectively (instead of Makefile and Makefile<2>). In contrast, the post-forward naming method would call the buers Makefile|tmp and Makefile|zaphod, and the reverse naming method would call them Makefile\tmp and Makefile\zaphod. The nontrivial dierence between post-forward and reverse occurs when just one directory name is not enough to distinguish two les; then reverse puts the directory names in reverse order, so that /top/middle/file becomes file\middle\top, while post-forward puts them in forward order after the le name, as in file|top/middle. Which rule to follow for putting the directory names in the buer name is not very important if you are going to look at the buer names before you type one. But as an experienced user, if you know the rule, you wont have to look. And

Chapter 16: Using Multiple Buers

158

then you may nd that one rule or another is easier for you to remember and apply quickly. 16.7.2 Switching Between Buers using Substrings Iswitchb global minor mode provides convenient switching between buers using substrings of their names. It replaces the normal denitions of C-x b, C-x 4 b, C-x 5 b, and C-x 4 C-o with alternative commands that are somewhat smarter. When one of these commands prompts you for a buer name, you can type in just a substring of the name you want to choose. As you enter the substring, Iswitchb mode continuously displays a list of buers that match the substring you have typed. At any time, you can type RET to select the rst buer in the list. So the way to select a particular buer is to make it the rst in the list. There are two ways to do this. You can type more of the buer name and thus narrow down the list, excluding unwanted buers above the desired one. Alternatively, you can use C-s and C-r to rotate the list until the desired buer is rst. TAB while entering the buer name performs completion on the string you have entered, based on the displayed list of buers. To enable Iswitchb mode, type M-x iswitchb-mode, or customize the variable iswitchb-mode to t (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). 16.7.3 Customizing Buer Menus M-x bs-show Make a list of buers similarly to M-x list-buffers but customizable. M-x bs-show pops up a buer list similar to the one normally displayed by C-x C-b but which you can customize. If you prefer this to the usual buer list, you can bind this command to C-x C-b. To customize this buer list, use the bs Custom group (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). MSB global minor mode (MSB stands for mouse select buer) provides a dierent and customizable mouse buer menu which you may prefer. It replaces the bindings of mouse-buffer-menu, normally on C-Down-Mouse-1, and the menu bar buer menu. You can customize the menu in the msb Custom group.

Chapter 17: Multiple Windows

159

17 Multiple Windows
Emacs can split a frame into two or many windows. Multiple windows can display parts of dierent buers, or dierent parts of one buer. Multiple frames always imply multiple windows, because each frame has its own set of windows. Each window belongs to one and only one frame.

17.1 Concepts of Emacs Windows

Each Emacs window displays one Emacs buer at any time. A single buer may appear in more than one window; if it does, any changes in its text are displayed in all the windows where it appears. But these windows can show dierent parts of the buer, because each window has its own value of point. At any time, one Emacs window is the selected window ; the buer this window is displaying is the current buer. On graphical displays, the point is indicated by a solid blinking cursor in the selected window, and by a hollow box in non-selected windows. On text terminals, the cursor is drawn only in the selected window. See Section 11.20 [Cursor Display], page 88. Commands to move point aect the value of point for the selected Emacs window only. They do not change the value of point in other Emacs windows, even those showing the same buer. The same is true for buer-switching commands such as C-x b; they do not aect other windows at all. However, there are other commands such as C-x 4 b that select a dierent window and switch buers in it. Also, all commands that display information in a window, including (for example) C-h f (describe-function) and C-x C-b (list-buffers), work by switching buers in a nonselected window without aecting the selected window. When multiple windows show the same buer, they can have dierent regions, because they can have dierent values of point. However, they all have the same value for the mark, because each buer has only one mark position. Each window has its own mode line, which displays the buer name, modication status and major and minor modes of the buer that is displayed in the window. The selected windows mode line appears in a dierent color. See Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8, for details.

17.2 Splitting Windows

C-x 2 C-x 3 C-Mouse-2 Split the selected window into two windows, one above the other (split-window-below). Split the selected window into two windows, positioned side by side (split-window-right). In the mode line of a window, split that window.

C-x 2 (split-window-below) splits the selected window into two windows, one above the other. After splitting, the selected window is the upper one, and the newly split-o window is below. Both windows have the same value of point as

Chapter 17: Multiple Windows

160

before, and display the same portion of the buer (or as close to it as possible). If necessary, the windows are scrolled to keep point on-screen. By default, the two windows each get half the height of the original window. A positive numeric argument species how many lines to give to the top window; a negative numeric argument species how many lines to give to the bottom window. If you change the variable split-window-keep-point to nil, C-x 2 instead adjusts the portion of the buer displayed by the two windows, as well as the value of point in each window, in order to keep the text on the screen as close as possible to what it was before; furthermore, if point was in the lower half of the original window, the bottom window is selected instead of the upper one. C-x 3 (split-window-right) splits the selected window into two side-by-side windows. The left window is the selected one; the right window displays the same portion of the same buer, and has the same value of point. A positive numeric argument species how many columns to give the left window; a negative numeric argument species how many columns to give the right window. When you split a window with C-x 3, each resulting window occupies less than the full width of the frame. If it becomes too narrow, the buer may be dicult to read if continuation lines are in use (see Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23). Therefore, Emacs automatically switches to line truncation if the window width becomes narrower than 50 columns. This truncation occurs regardless of the value of the variable truncate-lines (see Section 11.21 [Line Truncation], page 89); it is instead controlled by the variable truncate-partial-width-windows. If the value of this variable is a positive integer (the default is 50), that species the minimum width for a partial-width window before automatic line truncation occurs; if the value is nil, automatic line truncation is disabled; and for any other non-nil value, Emacs truncates lines in every partial-width window regardless of its width. On text terminals, side-by-side windows are separated by a vertical divider which is drawn using the vertical-border face. If you click C-Mouse-2 in the mode line of a window, that splits the window, putting a vertical divider where you click. Depending on how Emacs is compiled, you can also split a window by clicking C-Mouse-2 in the scroll bar, which puts a horizontal divider where you click (this feature does not work when Emacs uses GTK+ scroll bars).

17.3 Using Other Windows

C-x o C-M-v Mouse-1 Select another window (other-window). Scroll the next window (scroll-other-window). Mouse-1, in the text area of a window, selects the window and moves point to the position clicked. Clicking in the mode line selects the window without moving point in it.

With the keyboard, you can switch windows by typing C-x o (other-window). That is an o, for other, not a zero. When there are more than two windows, this command moves through all the windows in a cyclic order, generally top to

Chapter 17: Multiple Windows

161

bottom and left to right. After the rightmost and bottommost window, it goes back to the one at the upper left corner. A numeric argument means to move several steps in the cyclic order of windows. A negative argument moves around the cycle in the opposite order. When the minibuer is active, the minibuer is the last window in the cycle; you can switch from the minibuer window to one of the other windows, and later switch back and nish supplying the minibuer argument that is requested. See Section 5.2 [Minibuer Edit], page 28. The usual scrolling commands (see Chapter 11 [Display], page 70) apply to the selected window only, but there is one command to scroll the next window. C-M-v (scroll-other-window) scrolls the window that C-x o would select. It takes arguments, positive and negative, like C-v. (In the minibuer, C-M-v scrolls the help window associated with the minibuer, if any, rather than the next window in the standard cyclic order; see Section 5.2 [Minibuer Edit], page 28.) If you set mouse-autoselect-window to a non-nil value, moving the mouse over a dierent window selects that window. This feature is o by default.

17.4 Displaying in Another Window

C-x 4 is a prex key for a variety of commands that switch to a buer in a dierent windoweither another existing window, or a new window created by splitting the selected window. See Section 17.6.1 [Window Choice], page 163, for how Emacs picks or creates the window to use. C-x 4 b bufname RET Select buer bufname in another window (switch-to-buffer-otherwindow). C-x 4 C-o bufname RET Display buer bufname in some window, without trying to select it (display-buffer). See Section 17.6 [Displaying Buers], page 163, for details about how the window is chosen. C-x 4 f filename RET Visit le lename and select its buer in another window (find-fileother-window). See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. C-x 4 d directory RET Select a Dired buer for directory directory in another window (dired-other-window). See Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329. C-x 4 m Start composing a mail message, similar to C-x m (see Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367), but in another window (mail-otherwindow). Find a tag in the current tags table, similar to M-. (see Section 25.3 [Tags], page 311), but in another window (find-tag-other-window).

C-x 4 .

C-x 4 r filename RET Visit le lename read-only, and select its buer in another window (find-file-read-only-other-window). See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125.

Chapter 17: Multiple Windows

162

17.5 Deleting and Rearranging Windows

C-x 0 C-x 1 C-x 4 0 Delete the selected window (delete-window). Delete all windows in the selected frame except the selected window (delete-other-windows). Delete the selected window and kill the buer that was showing in it (kill-buffer-and-window). The last character in this key sequence is a zero. Make selected window taller (enlarge-window). Make selected window wider (enlarge-window-horizontally). Make selected window narrower (shrink-window-horizontally). Shrink this window if its buer doesnt need so many lines (shrinkwindow-if-larger-than-buffer). Make all windows the same height (balance-windows).

C-x ^ C-x } C-x { C-x C-x +

To delete the selected window, type C-x 0 (delete-window). (That is a zero.) Once a window is deleted, the space that it occupied is given to an adjacent window (but not the minibuer window, even if that is active at the time). Deleting the window has no eect on the buer it used to display; the buer continues to exist, and you can still switch to with C-x b. C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) is a stronger command than C-x 0; it kills the current buer and then deletes the selected window. C-x 1 (delete-other-windows) deletes all the windows, except the selected one; the selected window expands to use the whole frame. (This command cannot be used while the minibuer window is active; attempting to do so signals an error.) The command C-x ^ (enlarge-window) makes the selected window one line taller, taking space from a vertically adjacent window without changing the height of the frame. With a positive numeric argument, this command increases the window height by that many lines; with a negative argument, it reduces the height by that many lines. If there are no vertically adjacent windows (i.e. the window is at the full frame height), that signals an error. The command also signals an error if you attempt to reduce the height of any window below a certain minimum number of lines, specied by the variable window-min-height (the default is 4). Similarly, C-x } (enlarge-window-horizontally) makes the selected window wider, and C-x { (shrink-window-horizontally) makes it narrower. These commands signal an error if you attempt to reduce the width of any window below a certain minimum number of columns, specied by the variable window-min-width (the default is 10). C-x - (shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer) reduces the height of the selected window, if it is taller than necessary to show the whole text of the buer it is displaying. It gives the extra lines to other windows in the frame. You can also use C-x + (balance-windows) to even out the heights of all the windows in the selected frame.

Chapter 17: Multiple Windows

163

Mouse clicks on the mode line provide another way to change window heights and to delete windows. See Section 18.5 [Mode Line Mouse], page 169.

17.6 Displaying a Buer in a Window

It is a common Emacs operation to display or pop up some buer in response to a user command. There are several dierent ways in which commands do this. Many commands, like C-x C-f (find-file), display the buer by taking over the selected window, expecting that the users attention will be diverted to that buer. These commands usually work by calling switch-to-buffer internally (see Section 16.1 [Select Buer], page 150). Some commands try to display intelligently, trying not to take over the selected window, e.g. by splitting o a new window and displaying the desired buer there. Such commands, which include the various help commands (see Chapter 7 [Help], page 38), work by calling display-buffer internally. See Section 17.6.1 [Window Choice], page 163, for details. Other commands do the same as display-buffer, and additionally select the displaying window so that you can begin editing its buer. The command C-x (next-error) is one example (see Section 24.2 [Compilation Mode], page 272). Such commands work by calling the function pop-to-buffer internally. See Section Switching to a Buer in a Window in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . Commands with names ending in -other-window behave like display-buffer, except that they never display in the selected window. Several of these commands are bound in the C-x 4 prex key (see Section 17.4 [Pop Up Window], page 161). Commands with names ending in -other-frame behave like display-buffer, except that they (i) never display in the selected window and (ii) prefer to create a new frame to display the desired buer instead of splitting a windowas though the variable pop-up-frames is set to t (see Section 17.6.1 [Window Choice], page 163). Several of these commands are bound in the C-x 5 prex key. 17.6.1 How display-buffer works The display-buffer command (as well as commands that call it internally) chooses a window to display by following the steps given below. See Section Choosing a Window for Display in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for details about how to alter this sequence of steps. First, check if the buer should be displayed in the selected window regardless of other considerations. You can tell Emacs to do this by adding the desired buers name to the list same-window-buffer-names, or adding a matching regular expression to the list same-window-regexps. By default, these variables are nil, so this step is skipped. Otherwise, if the buer is already displayed in an existing window, reuse that window. Normally, only windows on the selected frame are considered, but windows on other frames are also reusable if you change display-bufferreuse-frames to t, or if you change pop-up-frames (see below) to t.

Chapter 17: Multiple Windows

164

Otherwise, if you specied that the buer should be displayed in a special frame by customizing special-display-buffer-names or special-displayregexps, do so. See Section Choosing Window Options in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . Otherwise, optionally create a new frame and display the buer there. By default, this step is skipped. To enable it, change the variable pop-up-frames to a non-nil value. The special value graphic-only means to do this only on graphical displays. Otherwise, try to create a new window by splitting the selected window, and display the buer in that new window. The split can be either vertical or horizontal, depending on the variables split-height-threshold and split-width-threshold. These variables should have integer values. If split-height-threshold is smaller than the selected windows height, the split puts the new window below. Otherwise, if split-width-threshold is smaller than the windows width, the split puts the new window on the right. If neither condition holds, Emacs tries to split so that the new window is belowbut only if the window was not split before (to avoid excessive splitting). Otherwise, display the buer in an existing window on the selected frame. If all the above methods fail for whatever reason, create a new frame and display the buer there.

17.7 Convenience Features for Window Handling

Winner mode is a global minor mode that records the changes in the window conguration (i.e. how the frames are partitioned into windows), so that you can undo them. You can toggle Winner mode with M-x winner-mode, or by customizing the variable winner-mode. When the mode is enabled, C-c left (winner-undo) undoes the last window conguration change. If you change your mind while undoing, you can redo the changes you had undone using C-c right (M-x winner-redo). Follow mode (M-x follow-mode) synchronizes several windows on the same buer so that they always display adjacent sections of that buer. See Section 11.7 [Follow Mode], page 75. The Windmove package denes commands for moving directionally between neighboring windows in a frame. M-x windmove-right selects the window immediately to the right of the currently selected one, and similarly for the left, up, and down counterparts. M-x windmove-default-keybindings binds these commands to S-right etc.; doing so disables shift selection for those keys (see Section 8.6 [Shift Selection], page 52). The command M-x compare-windows lets you compare the text shown in dierent windows. See Section 15.8 [Comparing Files], page 140. Scroll All mode (M-x scroll-all-mode) is a global minor mode that causes scrolling commands and point motion commands to apply to every single window.

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

165

18 Frames and Graphical Displays

When Emacs is started on a graphical display, e.g. on the X Window System, it occupies a graphical system-level window. In this manual, we call this a frame, reserving the word window for the part of the frame used for displaying a buer. A frame initially contains one window, but it can be subdivided into multiple windows (see Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159). A frame normally also contains a menu bar, tool bar, and echo area. You can also create additional frames (see Section 18.6 [Creating Frames], page 169). All frames created in the same Emacs session have access to the same underlying buers and other data. For instance, if a buer is being shown in more than one frame, any changes made to it in one frame show up immediately in the other frames too. Typing C-x C-c closes all the frames on the current display, and ends the Emacs session if it has no frames open on any other displays (see Section 3.2 [Exiting], page 15). To close just the selected frame, type C-x 5 0 (that is zero, not o). This chapter describes Emacs features specic to graphical displays (particularly mouse commands), and features for managing multiple frames. On text terminals, many of these features are unavailable. However, it is still possible to create multiple frames on text terminals; such frames are displayed one at a time, lling the entire terminal screen (see Section 18.19 [Non-Window Terminals], page 179). It is also possible to use the mouse on some text terminals (see Section 18.20 [Text-Only Mouse], page 179, for doing so on GNU and Unix systems; and see Section MSDOS Mouse in Specialized Emacs Features , for doing so on MS-DOS).

18.1 Mouse Commands for Editing

Mouse-1 Move point to where you click (mouse-set-point).

Drag-Mouse-1 Activate the region around the text selected by dragging, and copy it to the kill ring (mouse-set-region). Mouse-2 Mouse-3 Move point to where you click, and insert the contents of the primary selection there (mouse-yank-primary). If the region is active, move the nearer end of the region to the click position; otherwise, set mark at the current value of point and point at the click position. Save the resulting region in the kill ring; on a second click, kill it (mouse-save-then-kill).

The most basic mouse command is mouse-set-point, which is invoked by clicking with the left mouse button, Mouse-1, in the text area of a window. This moves point to the position where you clicked. If that window was not the selected window, it becomes the selected window. Normally, if the frame you clicked in was not the selected frame, it is made the selected frame, in addition to selecting the window and setting the cursor. On the

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

166

X Window System, you can change this by setting the variable x-mouse-clickfocus-ignore-position to t. In that case, the initial click on an unselected frame just selects the frame, without doing anything else; clicking again selects the window and sets the cursor position. Holding down Mouse-1 and dragging the mouse over a stretch of text activates the region around that text (mouse-set-region), placing the mark where you started holding down the mouse button, and point where you release it (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). In addition, the text in the region becomes the primary selection (see Section 9.3.2 [Primary Selection], page 60). If you change the variable mouse-drag-copy-region to a non-nil value, dragging the mouse over a stretch of text also adds the text to the kill ring. The default is nil. If you move the mouse o the top or bottom of the window while dragging, the window scrolls at a steady rate until you move the mouse back into the window. This way, you can select regions that dont t entirely on the screen. The number of lines scrolled per step depends on how far away from the window edge the mouse has gone; the variable mouse-scroll-min-lines species a minimum step size. Clicking with the middle mouse button, Mouse-2, moves point to the position where you clicked and inserts the contents of the primary selection (mouse-yankprimary). See Section 9.3.2 [Primary Selection], page 60. This behavior is consistent with other X applications. Alternatively, you can rebind Mouse-2 to mouseyank-at-click, which performs a yank at point. If you change the variable mouse-yank-at-point to a non-nil value, Mouse-2 does not move point; it inserts the text at point, regardless of where you clicked or even which of the frames windows you clicked on. This variable aects both mouse-yank-primary and mouse-yank-at-click. Clicking with the right mouse button, Mouse-3, runs the command mouse-savethen-kill. This performs several actions depending on where you click and the status of the region: If no region is active, clicking Mouse-3 activates the region, placing the mark where point was and point at the clicked position. If a region is active, clicking Mouse-3 adjusts the nearer end of the region by moving it to the clicked position. The adjusted regions text is copied to the kill ring; if the text in the original region was already on the kill ring, it replaces it there. If you originally specied the region using a double or triple Mouse-1, so that the region is dened to consist of entire words or lines (see Section 18.2 [Word and Line Mouse], page 167), then adjusting the region with Mouse-3 also proceeds by entire words or lines. If you use Mouse-3 a second time consecutively, at the same place, that kills the region already selected. Thus, the simplest way to kill text with the mouse is to click Mouse-1 at one end, then click Mouse-3 twice at the other end. To copy the text into the kill ring without deleting it from the buer, press Mouse-3 just onceor just drag across the text with Mouse-1. Then you can copy it elsewhere by yanking it.

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

167

The mouse-save-then-kill command also obeys the variable mouse-dragcopy-region (described above). If the value is non-nil, then whenever the command sets or adjusts the active region, the text in the region is also added to the kill ring. If the latest kill ring entry had been added the same way, that entry is replaced rather than making a new entry. Whenever you set the region using any of the mouse commands described above, the mark will be deactivated by any subsequent unshifted cursor motion command, in addition to the usual ways of deactivating the mark. See Section 8.6 [Shift Selection], page 52. Some mice have a wheel which can be used for scrolling. Emacs supports scrolling windows with the mouse wheel, by default, on most graphical displays. To toggle this feature, use M-x mouse-wheel-mode. The variables mouse-wheelfollow-mouse and mouse-wheel-scroll-amount determine where and by how much buers are scrolled. The variable mouse-wheel-progressive-speed determines whether the scroll speed is linked to how fast you move the wheel.

18.2 Mouse Commands for Words and Lines

These variants of Mouse-1 select entire words or lines at a time. Emacs activates the region around the selected text, which is also copied to the kill ring. Double-Mouse-1 Select the text around the word which you click on. Double-clicking on a character with symbol syntax (such as underscore, in C mode) selects the symbol surrounding that character. Double-clicking on a character with open- or close-parenthesis syntax selects the parenthetical grouping which that character starts or ends. Double-clicking on a character with string-delimiter syntax (such as a single-quote or double-quote in C) selects the string constant (Emacs uses heuristics to gure out whether that character is the beginning or the end of it). Double-Drag-Mouse-1 Select the text you drag across, in the form of whole words. Triple-Mouse-1 Select the line you click on. Triple-Drag-Mouse-1 Select the text you drag across, in the form of whole lines.

18.3 Following References with the Mouse

Some Emacs buers include buttons, or hyperlinks : pieces of text that perform some action (e.g. following a reference) when activated (e.g. by clicking on them). Usually, a buttons text is visually highlighted: it is underlined, or a box is drawn around it. If you move the mouse over a button, the shape of the mouse cursor

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

168

changes and the button lights up. If you change the variable mouse-highlight to nil, Emacs disables this highlighting. You can activate a button by moving point to it and typing RET, or by clicking either Mouse-1 or Mouse-2 on the button. For example, in a Dired buer, each le name is a button; activating it causes Emacs to visit that le (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329). In a *Compilation* buer, each error message is a button, and activating it visits the source code for that error (see Section 24.1 [Compilation], page 271). Although clicking Mouse-1 on a button usually activates the button, if you hold the mouse button down for a period of time before releasing it (specically, for more than 450 milliseconds), then Emacs moves point where you clicked, without activating the button. In this way, you can use the mouse to move point over a button without activating it. Dragging the mouse over or onto a button has its usual behavior of setting the region, and does not activate the button. You can change how Mouse-1 applies to buttons by customizing the variable mouse-1-click-follows-link. If the value is a positive integer, that determines how long you need to hold the mouse button down for, in milliseconds, to cancel button activation; the default is 450, as described in the previous paragraph. If the value is nil, Mouse-1 just sets point where you clicked, and does not activate buttons. If the value is double, double clicks activate buttons but single clicks just set point. Normally, Mouse-1 on a button activates the button even if it is in a non-selected window. If you change the variable mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows to nil, Mouse-1 on a button in an unselected window moves point to the clicked position and selects that window, without activating the button.

18.4 Mouse Clicks for Menus

Several mouse clicks with the CTRL and SHIFT modiers bring up menus. C-Mouse-1 This menu is for selecting a buer. The MSB (mouse select buer) global minor mode makes this menu smarter and more customizable. See Section 16.7.3 [Buer Menus], page 158. C-Mouse-2 This menu contains entries for examining faces and other text properties, and well as for setting them (the latter is mainly useful when editing enriched text; see Section 22.13 [Enriched Text], page 237). This menu is mode-specic. For most modes if Menu-bar mode is on, this menu has the same items as all the mode-specic menu-bar menus put together. Some modes may specify a dierent menu for this button. If Menu Bar mode is o, this menu contains all the items which would be present in the menu barnot just the mode-specic onesso that you can access them without having to display the menu bar.

C-Mouse-3

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays S-Mouse-1

169

This menu is for changing the default face within the windows buer. See Section 11.11 [Text Scale], page 79.

Some graphical applications use Mouse-3 for a mode-specic menu. If you prefer Mouse-3 in Emacs to bring up such a menu instead of running the mouse-savethen-kill command, rebind Mouse-3 by adding the following line to your init le (see Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455):
(global-set-key [mouse-3] mouse-popup-menubar-stuff)

18.5 Mode Line Mouse Commands

You can use mouse clicks on window mode lines to select and manipulate windows. Some areas of the mode line, such as the buer name, and major and minor mode names, have their own special mouse bindings. These areas are highlighted when you hold the mouse over them, and information about the special bindings will be displayed (see Section 18.17 [Tooltips], page 178). This sections commands do not apply in those areas. Mouse-1 Mouse-1 on a mode line selects the window it belongs to. By dragging Mouse-1 on the mode line, you can move it, thus changing the height of the windows above and below. Changing heights with the mouse in this way never deletes windows, it just refuses to make any window smaller than the minimum height. Mouse-2 on a mode line expands that window to ll its frame. Mouse-3 on a mode line deletes the window it belongs to. If the frame has only one window, it does nothing. C-Mouse-2 on a mode line splits that window, producing two side-byside windows with the boundary running through the click position (see Section 17.2 [Split Window], page 159).

Mouse-2 Mouse-3 C-Mouse-2

Furthermore, by clicking and dragging Mouse-1 on the divider between two side-by-side mode lines, you can move the vertical boundary to the left or right.

18.6 Creating Frames

The prex key C-x 5 is analogous to C-x 4. Whereas each C-x 4 command pops up a buer in a dierent window in the selected frame (see Section 17.4 [Pop Up Window], page 161), the C-x 5 commands use a dierent frame. If an existing visible or iconied (minimized) frame already displays the requested buer, that frame is raised and deiconied (un-minimized); otherwise, a new frame is created on the current display terminal. The various C-x 5 commands dier in how they nd or create the buer to select: C-x 5 2 Create a new frame (make-frame-command). This runs switch-toC-x 5 b bufname RET Select buer bufname in another frame. buffer-other-frame.

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

170

C-x 5 f filename RET Visit le lename and select its buer in another frame. This runs find-file-other-frame. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. C-x 5 d directory RET Select a Dired buer for directory directory in another frame. This runs dired-other-frame. See Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329. C-x 5 m Start composing a mail message in another frame. This runs mailother-frame. It is the other-frame variant of C-x m. See Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367. Find a tag in the current tag table in another frame. This runs findtag-other-frame, the multiple-frame variant of M-.. See Section 25.3 [Tags], page 311.

C-x 5 .

C-x 5 r filename RET Visit le lename read-only, and select its buer in another frame. This runs find-file-read-only-other-frame. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. You can control the appearance and behavior of the newly-created frames by specifying frame parameters. See Section 18.11 [Frame Parameters], page 175.

18.7 Frame Commands

The following commands are used to delete and operate on frames: C-x 5 0 C-z C-x 5 o C-x 5 1 Delete the selected frame (delete-frame). This signals an error if there is only one frame. Minimize (or iconify) the selected Emacs frame (suspend-frame). See Section 3.2 [Exiting], page 15. Select another frame, and raise it. If you repeat this command, it cycles through all the frames on your terminal. Delete all frames on the current terminal, except the selected one.

The C-x 5 0 (delete-frame) command deletes the selected frame. However, it will refuse to delete the last frame in an Emacs session, to prevent you from losing the ability to interact with the Emacs session. Note that when Emacs is run as a daemon (see Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412), there is always a virtual frame that remains after all the ordinary, interactive frames are deleted. In this case, C-x 5 0 can delete the last interactive frame; you can use emacsclient to reconnect to the Emacs session. The C-x 5 1 (delete-other-frames) command deletes all other frames on the current terminal (this terminal refers to either a graphical display, or a text terminal; see Section 18.19 [Non-Window Terminals], page 179). If the Emacs session has frames open on other graphical displays or text terminals, those are not deleted. The C-x 5 o (other-frame) command selects the next frame on the current terminal. If you are using Emacs on the X Window System with a window manager

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

171

that selects (or gives focus to ) whatever frame the mouse cursor is over, you have to change the variable focus-follows-mouse to t in order for this command to work properly. Then invoking C-x 5 o will also warp the mouse cursor to the chosen frame.

18.8 Fonts
By default, Emacs displays text on graphical displays using a 12-point monospace font. There are several dierent ways to specify a dierent font: Click on Set Default Font in the Options menu. To save this for future sessions, click on Save Options in the Options menu. Add a line to your init le, modifying the variable default-frame-alist to specify the font parameter (see Section 18.11 [Frame Parameters], page 175), like this: (add-to-list default-frame-alist (font . "DejaVu Sans Mono-10")) Add an emacs.font X resource setting to your X resource le, like this: emacs.font: DejaVu Sans Mono-12 You must restart X, or use the xrdb command, for the X resources le to take eect. See Section D.1 [Resources], page 521. Do not quote font names in X resource les. If you are running Emacs on the GNOME desktop, you can tell Emacs to use the default system font by setting the variable font-use-system-font to t (the default is nil). For this to work, Emacs must have been compiled with Gconf support. Use the command line option -fn (or --font). See Section C.6 [Font X], page 515. To check what font youre currently using, the C-u C-x = command can be helpful. It describes the character at point, and names the font that its rendered in. On X, there are four dierent ways to express a font name. The rst is to use a Fontcong pattern. Fontcong patterns have the following form: fontname [-fontsize ][:name1 =values1 ][:name2 =values2 ]... Within this format, any of the elements in braces may be omitted. Here, fontname is the family name of the font, such as Monospace or DejaVu Sans Mono; fontsize is the point size of the font (one printers point is about 1/72 of an inch); and the name =values entries specify settings such as the slant and weight of the font. Each values may be a single value, or a list of values separated by commas. In addition, some property values are valid with only one kind of property name, in which case the name = part may be omitted. Here is a list of common font properties: slant weight One of italic, oblique, or roman. One of light, medium, demibold, bold or black.

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays style

172

Some fonts dene special styles which are a combination of slant and weight. For instance, Dejavu Sans denes the book style, which overrides the slant and weight properties. One of condensed, normal, or expanded. One of monospace, proportional, dual-width, or charcell.

width spacing

Here are some examples of Fontcong patterns: Monospace Monospace-12 Monospace-12:bold DejaVu Sans Mono:bold:italic Monospace-12:weight=bold:slant=italic For a more detailed description of Fontcong patterns, see the Fontcong manual, which is distributed with Fontcong and available online at http://fontconfig.org/fontconfig-user.html. The second way to specify a font is to use a GTK font pattern. These have the syntax fontname [properties ] [fontsize ] where fontname is the family name, properties is a list of property values separated by spaces, and fontsize is the point size. The properties that you may specify for GTK font patterns are as follows: Slant properties: Italic or Oblique. If omitted, the default (roman) slant is implied. Weight properties: Bold, Book, Light, Medium, Semi-bold, or Ultra-light. If omitted, Medium weight is implied. Width properties: Semi-Condensed or Condensed. If omitted, a default width is used. Here are some examples of GTK font patterns: Monospace 12 Monospace Bold Italic 12 The third way to specify a font is to use an XLFD (X Logical Font Description). This is the traditional method for specifying fonts under X. Each XLFD consists of fourteen words or numbers, separated by dashes, like this: -misc-fixed-medium-r-semicondensed--13-*-*-*-c-60-iso8859-1 A wildcard character (*) in an XLFD matches any sequence of characters (including none), and ? matches any single character. However, matching is implementation-dependent, and can be inaccurate when wildcards match dashes in a long name. For reliable results, supply all 14 dashes and use wildcards only within a eld. Case is insignicant in an XLFD. The syntax for an XLFD is as follows: -maker-family-weight-slant-widthtype-style ... ...-pixels-height-horiz-vert-spacing-width-registry-encoding The entries have the following meanings:

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays maker family weight slant widthtype style pixels height The name of the font manufacturer. The name of the font family (e.g. courier).

173

The font weightnormally either bold, medium or light. Some font names support other values. The font slantnormally r (roman), i (italic), o (oblique), ri (reverse italic), or ot (other). Some font names support other values. The font widthnormally normal, condensed, semicondensed, or extended. Some font names support other values. An optional additional style name. Usually it is emptymost XLFDs have two hyphens in a row at this point. The font height, in pixels. The font height on the screen, measured in tenths of a printers point. This is the point size of the font, times ten. For a given vertical resolution, height and pixels are proportional; therefore, it is common to specify just one of them and use * for the other. The horizontal resolution, in pixels per inch, of the screen for which the font is intended. The vertical resolution, in pixels per inch, of the screen for which the font is intended. Normally the resolution of the fonts on your system is the right value for your screen; therefore, you normally specify * for this and horiz. This is m (monospace), p (proportional) or c (character cell). The average character width, in pixels, multiplied by ten. The X font character set that the font depicts. (X font character sets are not the same as Emacs character sets, but they are similar.) You can use the xfontsel program to check which choices you have. Normally you should use iso8859 for registry and 1 for encoding.

horiz vert

spacing width registry encoding

The fourth and nal method of specifying a font is to use a font nickname. Certain fonts have shorter nicknames, which you can use instead of a normal font specication. For instance, 6x13 is equivalent to -misc-fixed-medium-r-semicondensed--13-*-*-*-c-60-iso8859-1 On X, Emacs recognizes two types of fonts: client-side fonts, which are provided by the Xft and Fontcong libraries, and server-side fonts, which are provided by the X server itself. Most client-side fonts support advanced font features such as antialiasing and subpixel hinting, while server-side fonts do not. Fontcong and GTK patterns match only client-side fonts. You will probably want to use a xed-width default fontthat is, a font in which all characters have the same width. For Xft and Fontcong fonts, you can use the fc-list command to list the available xed-width fonts, like this:

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

174

fc-list :spacing=mono fc-list :spacing=charcell For server-side X fonts, you can use the xlsfonts program to list the available xed-width fonts, like this: xlsfonts -fn *x* | egrep "^[0-9]+x[0-9]+" xlsfonts -fn *-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-m* xlsfonts -fn *-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-c* Any font with m or c in the spacing eld of the XLFD is a xed-width font. To see what a particular font looks like, use the xfd command. For example: xfd -fn 6x13 displays the entire font 6x13. While running Emacs, you can also set the font of a specic kind of text (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75), or a particular frame (see Section 18.11 [Frame Parameters], page 175).

18.9 Speedbar Frames

The speedbar is a special frame for conveniently navigating in or operating on another frame. The speedbar, when it exists, is always associated with a specic frame, called its attached frame ; all speedbar operations act on that frame. Type M-x speedbar to create the speedbar and associate it with the current frame. To dismiss the speedbar, type M-x speedbar again, or select the speedbar and type q. (You can also delete the speedbar frame like any other Emacs frame.) If you wish to associate the speedbar with a dierent frame, dismiss it and call M-x speedbar from that frame. The speedbar can operate in various modes. Its default mode is File Display mode, which shows the les in the current directory of the selected window of the attached frame, one le per line. Clicking on a le name visits that le in the selected window of the attached frame, and clicking on a directory name shows that directory in the speedbar (see Section 18.3 [Mouse References], page 167). Each line also has a box, [+] or <+>, that you can click on to expand the contents of that item. Expanding a directory adds the contents of that directory to the speedbar display, underneath the directorys own line. Expanding an ordinary le adds a list of the tags in that le to the speedbar display; you can click on a tag name to jump to that tag in the selected window of the attached frame. When a le or directory is expanded, the [+] changes to [-]; you can click on that box to contract the item, hiding its contents. You navigate through the speedbar using the keyboard, too. Typing RET while point is on a line in the speedbar is equivalent to clicking the item on the current line, and SPC expands or contracts the item. U displays the parent directory of the current directory. To copy, delete, or rename the le on the current line, type C, D, and R respectively. To create a new directory, type M. Another general-purpose speedbar mode is Buer Display mode; in this mode, the speedbar displays a list of Emacs buers. To switch to this mode, type b in the speedbar. To return to File Display mode, type f. You can also change the display

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

175

mode by clicking mouse-3 anywhere in the speedbar window (or mouse-1 on the mode-line) and selecting Displays in the pop-up menu. Some major modes, including Rmail mode, Info, and GUD, have specialized ways of putting useful items into the speedbar for you to select. For example, in Rmail mode, the speedbar shows a list of Rmail les, and lets you move the current message to another Rmail le by clicking on its <M> box. For more details on using and programming the speedbar, See Section Top in Speedbar Manual .

18.10 Multiple Displays

A single Emacs can talk to more than one X display. Initially, Emacs uses just one displaythe one specied with the DISPLAY environment variable or with the --display option (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507). To connect to another display, use the command make-frame-on-display: M-x make-frame-on-display RET display RET Create a new frame on display display. A single X server can handle more than one screen. When you open frames on two screens belonging to one server, Emacs knows they share a single keyboard, and it treats all the commands arriving from these screens as a single stream of input. When you open frames on dierent X servers, Emacs makes a separate input stream for each server. Each server also has its own selected frame. The commands you enter with a particular X server apply to that servers selected frame.

18.11 Frame Parameters

You can control the default appearance and behavior of all frames by specifying a default list of frame parameters in the variable default-frame-alist. Its value should be a list of entries, each specifying a parameter name and a value for that parameter. These entries take eect whenever Emacs creates a new frame, including the initial frame. For example, you can add the following lines to your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461) to set the default frame width to 90 character columns, the default frame height to 40 character rows, and the default font to Monospace-10: (add-to-list default-frame-alist (width . 90)) (add-to-list default-frame-alist (height . 40)) (add-to-list default-frame-alist (font . "Monospace-10")) For a list of frame parameters and their eects, see Section Frame Parameters in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . You can also specify a list of frame parameters which apply to just the initial frame, by customizing the variable initial-frame-alist. If Emacs is compiled to use an X toolkit, frame parameters that specify colors and fonts dont aect menus and the menu bar, since those are drawn by the toolkit and not directly by Emacs.

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

176

18.12 Scroll Bars

On graphical displays, there is a scroll bar on the side of each Emacs window. Clicking Mouse-1 on the scroll bars up and down buttons scrolls the window by one line at a time. Clicking Mouse-1 above or below the scroll bars inner box scrolls the window by nearly the entire height of the window, like M-v and C-v respectively (see Section 4.2 [Moving Point], page 18). Dragging the inner box scrolls continuously. If Emacs is compiled on the X Window System without X toolkit support, the scroll bar behaves dierently. Clicking Mouse-1 anywhere on the scroll bar scrolls forward like C-v, while Mouse-3 scrolls backward like M-v. Clicking Mouse-2 in the scroll bar lets you drag the inner box up and down. To toggle the use of scroll bars, type M-x scroll-bar-mode. This command applies to all frames, including frames yet to be created. To toggle scroll bars for just the selected frame, use the command M-x toggle-scroll-bar. To control the use of scroll bars at startup, customize the variable scrollbar-mode. Its value should be either right (put scroll bars on the right side of windows), left (put them on the left), or nil (disable scroll bars). By default, Emacs puts scroll bars on the right if it was compiled with GTK+ support on the X Window System, and on MS-Windows or Mac OS; Emacs puts scroll bars on the left if compiled on the X Window System without GTK+ support (following the old convention for X applications). You can also use the X resource verticalScrollBars to enable or disable the scroll bars (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521). To control the scroll bar width, change the scroll-bar-width frame parameter (see Section Frame Parameters in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ).

18.13 Drag and Drop

In most graphical desktop environments, Emacs has basic support for drag and drop operations. For instance, dropping text onto an Emacs frame inserts the text where it is dropped. Dropping a le onto an Emacs frame visits that le. As a special case, dropping the le on a Dired buer moves or copies the le (according to the conventions of the application it came from) into the directory displayed in that buer. Dropping a le normally visits it in the window you drop it on. If you prefer to visit the le in a new window in such cases, customize the variable dnd-openfile-other-window. The XDND and Motif drag and drop protocols, and the old KDE 1.x protocol, are currently supported.

18.14 Menu Bars

You can toggle the use of menu bars with M-x menu-bar-mode. With no argument, this command toggles Menu Bar mode, a global minor mode. With an argument, the command turns Menu Bar mode on if the argument is positive, o if the argument

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

177

is not positive. To control the use of menu bars at startup, customize the variable menu-bar-mode. Expert users often turn o the menu bar, especially on text terminals, where this makes one additional line available for text. If the menu bar is o, you can still pop up a menu of its contents with C-Mouse-3 on a display which supports pop-up menus. See Section 18.4 [Menu Mouse Clicks], page 168. See Section 1.4 [Menu Bar], page 10, for information on how to invoke commands with the menu bar. See Appendix D [X Resources], page 521, for how to customize the menu bar menus visual appearance.

18.15 Tool Bars

On graphical displays, Emacs puts a tool bar at the top of each frame, just below the menu bar. This is a row of icons which you can click on with the mouse to invoke various commands. The global (default) tool bar contains general commands. Some major modes dene their own tool bars; whenever a buer with such a major mode is current, the modes tool bar replaces the global tool bar. To toggle the use of tool bars, type M-x tool-bar-mode. This command applies to all frames, including frames yet to be created. To control the use of tool bars at startup, customize the variable tool-bar-mode. When Emacs is compiled with GTK+ support, each tool bar item can consist of an image, or a text label, or both. By default, Emacs follows the Gnome desktops tool bar style setting; if none is dened, it displays tool bar items as just images. To impose a specic tool bar style, customize the variable tool-bar-style. You can also control the placement of the tool bar for the GTK+ tool bar with the frame parameter tool-bar-position. See Section Frame Parameters in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

18.16 Using Dialog Boxes

A dialog box is a special kind of menu for asking you a yes-or-no question or some other special question. Many Emacs commands use a dialog box to ask a yes-or-no question, if you used the mouse to invoke the command that led to the question. To disable the use of dialog boxes, change the variable use-dialog-box to nil. In that case, Emacs always performs yes-or-no prompts using the echo area and keyboard input. This variable also controls whether to use le selection windows (but those are not supported on all platforms). A le selection window is a special kind of dialog box for asking for le names. You can customize the variable use-file-dialog to suppress the use of le selection windows, even if you still want other kinds of dialogs. This variable has no eect if you have suppressed all dialog boxes with the variable use-dialog-box. When Emacs is compiled with GTK+ support, it uses the GTK+ le chooser dialog. Emacs adds an additional toggle button to this dialog, which you can use to enable or disable the display of hidden les (les starting with a dot) in that

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays

178

dialog. If you want this toggle to be activated by default, change the variable xgtk-show-hidden-files to t. In addition, Emacs adds help text to the GTK+ le chooser dialog; to disable this help text, change the variable x-gtk-file-dialoghelp-text to nil.

18.17 Tooltips
Tooltips are small windows that display text information at the current mouse position. They activate when there is a pause in mouse movement over some signicant piece of text in a window, or the mode line, or some other part of the Emacs frame such as a tool bar button or menu item. You can toggle the use of tooltips with the command M-x tooltip-mode. When Tooltip mode is disabled, the help text is displayed in the echo area instead. To control the use of tooltips at startup, customize the variable tooltip-mode. The variables tooltip-delay species how long Emacs should wait before displaying a tooltip. For additional customization options for displaying tooltips, use M-x customize-group RET tooltip RET. If Emacs is built with GTK+ support, it displays tooltips via GTK+, using the default appearance of GTK+ tooltips. To disable this, change the variable x-gtkuse-system-tooltips to nil. If you do this, or if Emacs is built without GTK+ support, most attributes of the tooltip text are specied by the tooltip face, and by X resources (see Appendix D [X Resources], page 521). GUD tooltips are special tooltips that show the values of variables when debugging a program with GUD. See Section 24.6.2 [Debugger Operation], page 277.

18.18 Mouse Avoidance

On graphical terminals, the mouse pointer may obscure the text in the Emacs frame. Emacs provides two methods to avoid this problem. Firstly, Emacs hides the mouse pointer each time you type a self-inserting character, if the pointer lies inside an Emacs frame; moving the mouse pointer makes it visible again. To disable this feature, set the variable make-pointer-invisible to nil. Secondly, you can use Mouse Avoidance mode, a minor mode, to keep the mouse pointer away from point. To use Mouse Avoidance mode, customize the variable mouse-avoidance-mode. You can set this to various values to move the mouse in several ways: banish exile jump animate Move the mouse to the upper-right corner on any key-press; Move the mouse to the corner only if the cursor gets too close, and allow it to return once the cursor is out of the way; If the cursor gets too close to the mouse, displace the mouse a random distance & direction; As jump, but shows steps along the way for illusion of motion;

Chapter 18: Frames and Graphical Displays cat-and-mouse The same as animate; proteus As animate, but changes the shape of the mouse pointer too.

179

You can also use the command M-x mouse-avoidance-mode to enable the mode. Whenever Mouse Avoidance mode moves the mouse, it also raises the frame.

18.19 Non-Window Terminals

On a text terminal, Emacs can display only one Emacs frame at a time. However, you can still create multiple Emacs frames, and switch between them. Switching frames on these terminals is much like switching between dierent window congurations. Use C-x 5 2 to create a new frame and switch to it; use C-x 5 o to cycle through the existing frames; use C-x 5 0 to delete the current frame. Each frame has a number to distinguish it. If your terminal can display only one frame at a time, the selected frames number n appears near the beginning of the mode line, in the form Fn . Fn is in fact the frames initial name. You can give frames more meaningful names if you wish, and you can select a frame by its name. Use the command M-x set-frame-name RET name RET to specify a new name for the selected frame, and use M-x select-frame-by-name RET name RET to select a frame according to its name. The name you specify appears in the mode line when the frame is selected.

18.20 Using a Mouse in Text Terminals

Some text terminals support mouse clicks in the terminal window. In a terminal emulator which is compatible with xterm, you can use M-x xterm-mouse-mode to give Emacs control over simple uses of the mousebasically, only non-modied single clicks are supported. The normal xterm mouse functionality for such clicks is still available by holding down the SHIFT key when you press the mouse button. Xterm Mouse mode is a global minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). Repeating the command turns the mode o again. In the console on GNU/Linux, you can use M-x gpm-mouse-mode to enable mouse support. You must have the gpm server installed and running on your system in order for this to work. See Section MS-DOS Mouse in Specialized Emacs Features , for information about mouse support on MS-DOS.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

180

19 International Character Set Support

Emacs supports a wide variety of international character sets, including European and Vietnamese variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Cyrillic, Devanagari (for Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopic, Greek, Han (for Chinese and Japanese), Hangul (for Korean), Hebrew, IPA, Kannada, Lao, Malayalam, Tamil, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. Emacs also supports various encodings of these characters that are used by other internationalized software, such as word processors and mailers. Emacs allows editing text with international characters by supporting all the related activities: You can visit les with non-ASCII characters, save non-ASCII text, and pass non-ASCII text between Emacs and programs it invokes (such as compilers, spell-checkers, and mailers). Setting your language environment (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183) takes care of setting up the coding systems and other options for a specic language or culture. Alternatively, you can specify how Emacs should encode or decode text for each command; see Section 19.10 [Text Coding], page 193. You can display non-ASCII characters encoded by the various scripts. This works by using appropriate fonts on graphics displays (see Section 19.15 [Dening Fontsets], page 198), and by sending special codes to text displays (see Section 19.13 [Terminal Coding], page 196). If some characters are displayed incorrectly, refer to Section 19.17 [Undisplayable Characters], page 200, which describes possible problems and explains how to solve them. Characters from scripts whose natural ordering of text is from right to left are reordered for display (see Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202). These scripts include Arabic, Hebrew, Syriac, Thaana, and a few others. You can insert non-ASCII characters or search for them. To do that, you can specify an input method (see Section 19.5 [Select Input Method], page 186) suitable for your language, or use the default input method set up when you chose your language environment. If your keyboard can produce nonASCII characters, you can select an appropriate keyboard coding system (see Section 19.13 [Terminal Coding], page 196), and Emacs will accept those characters. Latin-1 characters can also be input by using the C-x 8 prex, see Section 19.18 [Unibyte Mode], page 200. With the X Window System, your locale should be set to an appropriate value to make sure Emacs interprets keyboard input correctly; see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183. The rest of this chapter describes these issues in detail.

19.1 Introduction to International Character Sets

The users of international character sets and scripts have established many moreor-less standard coding systems for storing les. These coding systems are typically multibyte, meaning that sequences of two or more bytes are used to represent individual non-ASCII characters.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

181

Internally, Emacs uses its own multibyte character encoding, which is a superset of the Unicode standard. This internal encoding allows characters from almost every known script to be intermixed in a single buer or string. Emacs translates between the multibyte character encoding and various other coding systems when reading and writing les, and when exchanging data with subprocesses. The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays the le etc/HELLO, which illustrates various scripts by showing how to say hello in many languages. If some characters cant be displayed on your terminal, they appear as ? or as hollow boxes (see Section 19.17 [Undisplayable Characters], page 200). Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, generally dont have keys for all the characters in them. You can insert characters that your keyboard does not support, using C-q (quoted-insert) or C-x 8 RET (ucsinsert). See Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17. Emacs also supports various input methods, typically one for each script or language, which make it easier to type characters in the script. See Section 19.4 [Input Methods], page 185. The prex key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. The command C-x = (what-cursor-position) shows information about the character at point. In addition to the character position, which was described in Section 4.9 [Position Info], page 23, this command displays how the character is encoded. For instance, it displays the following line in the echo area for the character c:
Char: c (99, #o143, #x63) point=28062 of 36168 (78%) column=53

The four values after Char: describe the character that follows point, rst by showing it and then by giving its character code in decimal, octal and hex. For a non-ASCII multibyte character, these are followed by file and the characters representation, in hex, in the buers coding system, if that coding system encodes the character safely and with a single byte (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188). If the characters encoding is longer than one byte, Emacs shows file .... As a special case, if the character lies in the range 128 (0200 octal) through 159 (0237 octal), it stands for a raw byte that does not correspond to any specic displayable character. Such a character lies within the eight-bit-control character set, and is displayed as an escaped octal character code. In this case, C-x = shows part of display ... instead of file. With a prex argument (C-u C-x =), this command displays a detailed description of the character in a window: The character set name, and the codes that identify the character within that character set; ASCII characters are identied as belonging to the ascii character set. The characters syntax and categories. The characters encodings, both internally in the buer, and externally if you were to save the le. What keys to type to input the character in the current input method (if it

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support supports the character).

182

If you are running Emacs on a graphical display, the font name and glyph code for the character. If you are running Emacs on a text terminal, the code(s) sent to the terminal. The characters text properties (see Section Text Properties in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ), including any non-default faces used to display the character, and any overlays containing it (see Section Overlays in the same manual ). Heres an example showing the Latin-1 character A with grave accent, in a buer whose coding system is utf-8-unix:
position: character: preferred charset: code point in charset: syntax: category: 1 of 1 (0%), column: 0 ` A (displayed as ` A) (codepoint 192, #o300, #xc0) unicode (Unicode (ISO10646)) 0xC0 w which means: word .:Base, L:Left-to-right (strong), j:Japanese, l:Latin, v:Viet buffer code: #xC3 #x80 file code: not encodable by coding system undecided-unix display: by this font (glyph code) xft:-unknown-DejaVu Sans Mono-normal-normalnormal-*-13-*-*-*-m-0-iso10646-1 (#x82)

Character code properties: customize what to show name: LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE old-name: LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A GRAVE general-category: Lu (Letter, Uppercase) decomposition: (65 768) (A )

19.2 Disabling Multibyte Characters

By default, Emacs starts in multibyte mode: it stores the contents of buers and strings using an internal encoding that represents non-ASCII characters using multibyte sequences. Multibyte mode allows you to use all the supported languages and scripts without limitations. Under very special circumstances, you may want to disable multibyte character support, for a specic buer. When multibyte characters are disabled in a buer, we call that unibyte mode. In unibyte mode, each character in the buer has a character code ranging from 0 through 255 (0377 octal); 0 through 127 (0177 octal) represent ASCII characters, and 128 (0200 octal) through 255 (0377 octal) represent non-ASCII characters. To edit a particular le in unibyte representation, visit it using find-fileliterally. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. You can convert a multibyte buer to unibyte by saving it to a le, killing the buer, and visiting the le again with find-file-literally. Alternatively, you can use C-x RET c (universalcoding-system-argument) and specify raw-text as the coding system with which to visit or save a le. See Section 19.10 [Text Coding], page 193. Unlike find-

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

183

file-literally, nding a le as raw-text doesnt disable format conversion, uncompression, or auto mode selection. Emacs normally loads Lisp les as multibyte. This includes the Emacs initialization le, .emacs, and the initialization les of packages such as Gnus. However, you can specify unibyte loading for a particular Lisp le, by adding an entry unibyte: t in a le local variables section (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). Then that le is always loaded as unibyte text. Note that this does not represent a real unibyte variable, rather it just acts as an indicator to Emacs in the same way as coding does (see Section 19.8 [Specify Coding], page 192). Note also that this feature only applies to loading Lisp les for evaluation, not to visiting them for editing. You can also load a Lisp le as unibyte, on any one occasion, by typing C-x RET c raw-text RET immediately before loading it. The buer-local variable enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil in multibyte buers, and nil in unibyte ones. The mode line also indicates whether a buer is multibyte or not. See Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8. With a graphical display, in a multibyte buer, the portion of the mode line that indicates the character set has a tooltip that (amongst other things) says that the buer is multibyte. In a unibyte buer, the character set indicator is absent. Thus, in a unibyte buer (when using a graphical display) there is normally nothing before the indication of the visited les end-of-line convention (colon, backslash, etc.), unless you are using an input method. You can turn o multibyte support in a specic buer by invoking the command toggle-enable-multibyte-characters in that buer.

19.3 Language Environments

All supported character sets are supported in Emacs buers whenever multibyte characters are enabled; there is no need to select a particular language in order to display its characters. However, it is important to select a language environment in order to set various defaults. Roughly speaking, the language environment represents a choice of preferred script rather than a choice of language. The language environment controls which coding systems to recognize when reading text (see Section 19.7 [Recognize Coding], page 190). This applies to les, incoming mail, and any other text you read into Emacs. It may also specify the default coding system to use when you create a le. Each language environment also species a default input method. To select a language environment, customize current-language-environment or use the command M-x set-language-environment. It makes no dierence which buer is current when you use this command, because the eects apply globally to the Emacs session. The supported language environments (see the variable language-info-alist) include: ASCII, Belarusian, Bengali, Brazilian Portuguese, Bulgarian, Cham, Chinese-BIG5, Chinese-CNS, Chinese-EUC-TW, Chinese-GB, ChineseGBK, Chinese-GB18030, Croatian, Cyrillic-ALT, Cyrillic-ISO, CyrillicKOI8, Czech, Devanagari, Dutch, English, Esperanto, Ethiopic, French, Georgian, German, Greek, Gujarati, Hebrew, IPA, Italian, Japanese,

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

184

Kannada, Khmer, Korean, Lao, Latin-1, Latin-2, Latin-3, Latin-4, Latin5, Latin-6, Latin-7, Latin-8 (Celtic), Latin-9 (updated Latin-1 with the Euro sign), Latvian, Lithuanian, Malayalam, Oriya, Polish, Punjabi, Romanian, Russian, Sinhala, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, TaiViet, Tajik, Tamil, Telugu, Thai, Tibetan, Turkish, UTF-8 (for a setup which prefers Unicode characters and les encoded in UTF-8), Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Welsh, and Windows-1255 (for a setup which prefers Cyrillic characters and les encoded in Windows-1255). To display the script(s) used by your language environment on a graphical display, you need to have suitable fonts. See Section 19.14 [Fontsets], page 197, for more details about setting up your fonts. Some operating systems let you specify the character-set locale you are using by setting the locale environment variables LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, or LANG. (If more than one of these is set, the rst one that is nonempty species your locale for this purpose.) During startup, Emacs looks up your character-set locales name in the system locale alias table, matches its canonical name against entries in the value of the variables locale-charset-language-names and locale-language-names (the former overrides the latter), and selects the corresponding language environment if a match is found. It also adjusts the display table and terminal coding system, the locale coding system, the preferred coding system as needed for the locale, andlast but not leastthe way Emacs decodes non-ASCII characters sent by your keyboard. If you modify the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, or LANG environment variables while running Emacs (by using M-x setenv), you may want to invoke the set-localeenvironment function afterwards to readjust the language environment from the new locale. The set-locale-environment function normally uses the preferred coding system established by the language environment to decode system messages. But if your locale matches an entry in the variable locale-preferred-coding-systems, Emacs uses the corresponding coding system instead. For example, if the locale ja_JP.PCK matches japanese-shift-jis in locale-preferred-codingsystems, Emacs uses that encoding even though it might normally use japaneseiso-8bit. You can override the language environment chosen at startup with explicit use of the command set-language-environment, or with customization of currentlanguage-environment in your init le. To display information about the eects of a certain language environment langenv, use the command C-h L lang-env RET (describe-language-environment). This tells you which languages this language environment is useful for, and lists the character sets, coding systems, and input methods that go with it. It also shows some sample text to illustrate scripts used in this language environment. If you give an empty input for lang-env, this command describes the chosen language environment. You can customize any language environment with the normal hook setlanguage-environment-hook. The command set-language-environment runs that hook after setting up the new language environment. The hook functions

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

185

can test for a specic language environment by checking the variable currentlanguage-environment. This hook is where you should put non-default settings for specic language environments, such as coding systems for keyboard input and terminal output, the default input method, etc. Before it starts to set up the new language environment, set-languageenvironment rst runs the hook exit-language-environment-hook. This hook is useful for undoing customizations that were made with set-languageenvironment-hook. For instance, if you set up a special key binding in a specic language environment using set-language-environment-hook, you should set up exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal binding for that key.

19.4 Input Methods

An input method is a kind of character conversion designed specically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language has its own input method; sometimes several languages that use the same characters can share one input method. A few languages support several input methods. The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into another alphabet; this allows you to use one other alphabet instead of ASCII. The Greek and Russian input methods work this way. A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of characters into one letter. Many European input methods use composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence that consists of a letter followed by accent characters (or vice versa). For example, some methods convert the sequence o ^ into a single accented letter. These input methods have no special commands of their own; all they do is compose sequences of printing characters. The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed by composition. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone marks; then, sequences of these that make up a whole syllable are mapped into one syllable sign. Chinese and Japanese require more complex methods. In Chinese input methods, rst you enter the phonetic spelling of a Chinese word (in input method chinese-py, among others), or a sequence of portions of the character (input methods chinese-4corner and chinese-sw, and others). One input sequence typically corresponds to many possible Chinese characters. You select the one you mean using keys such as C-f, C-b, C-n, C-p (or the arrow keys), and digits, which have special meanings in this situation. The possible characters are conceptually arranged in several rows, with each row holding up to 10 alternatives. Normally, Emacs displays just one row at a time, in the echo area; (i /j ) appears at the beginning, to indicate that this is the i th row out of a total of j rows. Type C-n or C-p to display the next row or the previous row. Type C-f and C-b to move forward and backward among the alternatives in the current row. As you do this, Emacs highlights the current alternative with a special color; type C-SPC to select the current alternative and use it as input.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

186

The alternatives in the row are also numbered; the number appears before the alternative. Typing a number selects the associated alternative of the current row and uses it as input. TAB in these Chinese input methods displays a buer showing all the possible characters at once; then clicking Mouse-2 on one of them selects that alternative. The keys C-f, C-b, C-n, C-p, and digits continue to work as usual, but they do the highlighting in the buer showing the possible characters, rather than in the echo area. In Japanese input methods, rst you input a whole word using phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buer, Emacs converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. One phonetic spelling corresponds to a number of dierent Japanese words; to select one of them, use C-n and C-p to cycle through the alternatives. Sometimes it is useful to cut o input method processing so that the characters you have just entered will not combine with subsequent characters. For example, in input method latin-1-postfix, the sequence o ^ combines to form an o with an accent. What if you want to enter them as separate characters? One way is to type the accent twice; this is a special feature for entering the separate letter and accent. For example, o ^ ^ gives you the two characters o^. Another way is to type another letter after the osomething that wont combine with thatand immediately delete it. For example, you could type o o DEL ^ to get separate o and ^. Another method, more general but not quite as easy to type, is to use C-\ C-\ between two characters to stop them from combining. This is the command C-\ (toggle-input-method) used twice. C-\ C-\ is especially useful inside an incremental search, because it stops waiting for more characters to combine, and starts searching for what you have already entered. To nd out how to input the character after point using the current input method, type C-u C-x =. See Section 4.9 [Position Info], page 23. The variables input-method-highlight-flag and input-method-verboseflag control how input methods explain what is happening. If input-methodhighlight-flag is non-nil, the partial sequence is highlighted in the buer (for most input methodssome disable this feature). If input-method-verbose-flag is non-nil, the list of possible characters to type next is displayed in the echo area (but not when you are in the minibuer). Another facility for typing characters not on your keyboard is by using C-x 8 RET (ucs-insert) to insert a single character based on its Unicode name or code-point; see Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17.

19.5 Selecting an Input Method

C-\ Enable or disable use of the selected input method (toggle-inputmethod).

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

187

C-x RET C-\ method RET Select a new input method for the current buer (set-input-method). C-h I method RET C-h C-\ method RET Describe the input method method (describe-input-method). By default, it describes the current input method (if any). This description should give you the full details of how to use any particular input method. M-x list-input-methods Display a list of all the supported input methods. To choose an input method for the current buer, use C-x RET C-\ (set-inputmethod). This command reads the input method name from the minibuer; the name normally starts with the language environment that it is meant to be used with. The variable current-input-method records which input method is selected. Input methods use various sequences of ASCII characters to stand for non-ASCII characters. Sometimes it is useful to turn o the input method temporarily. To do this, type C-\ (toggle-input-method). To reenable the input method, type C-\ again. If you type C-\ and you have not yet selected an input method, it prompts you to specify one. This has the same eect as using C-x RET C-\ to specify an input method. When invoked with a numeric argument, as in C-u C-\, toggle-input-method always prompts you for an input method, suggesting the most recently selected one as the default. Selecting a language environment species a default input method for use in various buers. When you have a default input method, you can select it in the current buer by typing C-\. The variable default-input-method species the default input method (nil means there is none). In some language environments, which support several dierent input methods, you might want to use an input method dierent from the default chosen by setlanguage-environment. You can instruct Emacs to select a dierent default input method for a certain language environment, if you wish, by using set-languageenvironment-hook (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183). For example: (defun my-chinese-setup () "Set up my private Chinese environment." (if (equal current-language-environment "Chinese-GB") (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy"))) (add-hook set-language-environment-hook my-chinese-setup) This sets the default input method to be chinese-tonepy whenever you choose a Chinese-GB language environment. You can instruct Emacs to activate a certain input method automatically. For example: (add-hook text-mode-hook

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

188

(lambda () (set-input-method "german-prefix"))) This automatically activates the input method german-prex in Text mode. Some input methods for alphabetic scripts work by (in eect) remapping the keyboard to emulate various keyboard layouts commonly used for those scripts. How to do this remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify which layout your keyboard has, use the command M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. You can use the command M-x quail-show-key to show what key (or key sequence) to type in order to input the character following point, using the selected keyboard layout. The command C-u C-x = also shows that information, in addition to other information about the character. M-x list-input-methods displays a list of all the supported input methods. The list gives information about each input method, including the string that stands for it in the mode line.

19.6 Coding Systems

Users of various languages have established many more-or-less standard coding systems for representing them. Emacs does not use these coding systems internally; instead, it converts from various coding systems to its own system when reading data, and converts the internal coding system to other coding systems when writing data. Conversion is possible in reading or writing les, in sending or receiving from the terminal, and in exchanging data with subprocesses. Emacs assigns a name to each coding system. Most coding systems are used for one language, and the name of the coding system starts with the language name. Some coding systems are used for several languages; their names usually start with iso. There are also special coding systems, such as no-conversion, raw-text, and emacs-internal. A special class of coding systems, collectively known as codepages, is designed to support text encoded by MS-Windows and MS-DOS software. The names of these coding systems are cpnnnn , where nnnn is a 3- or 4-digit number of the codepage. You can use these encodings just like any other coding system; for example, to visit a le encoded in codepage 850, type C-x RET c cp850 RET C-x C-f filename RET. In addition to converting various representations of non-ASCII characters, a coding system can perform end-of-line conversion. Emacs handles three dierent conventions for how to separate lines in a le: newline (unix), carriage-return linefeed (dos), and just carriage-return (mac). C-h C coding RET Describe coding system coding (describe-coding-system). C-h C RET Describe the coding systems currently in use.

M-x list-coding-systems Display a list of all the supported coding systems. The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays information about particular coding systems, including the end-of-line conversion specied by those

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

189

coding systems. You can specify a coding system name as the argument; alternatively, with an empty argument, it describes the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, both in the current buer and as the defaults, and the priority list for recognizing coding systems (see Section 19.7 [Recognize Coding], page 190). To display a list of all the supported coding systems, type M-x list-coding-systems. The list gives information about each coding system, including the letter that stands for it in the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). Each of the coding systems that appear in this listexcept for no-conversion, which means no conversion of any kindspecies how and whether to convert printing characters, but leaves the choice of end-of-line conversion to be decided based on the contents of each le. For example, if the le appears to use the sequence carriage-return linefeed to separate lines, DOS end-of-line conversion will be used. Each of the listed coding systems has three variants, which specify exactly what to do for end-of-line conversion: ...-unix Dont do any end-of-line conversion; assume the le uses newline to separate lines. (This is the convention normally used on Unix and GNU systems, and Mac OS X.) Assume the le uses carriage-return linefeed to separate lines, and do the appropriate conversion. (This is the convention normally used on Microsoft systems.1 ) Assume the le uses carriage-return to separate lines, and do the appropriate conversion. (This was the convention used on the Macintosh system prior to OS X.)

...-dos

...-mac

These variant coding systems are omitted from the list-coding-systems display for brevity, since they are entirely predictable. For example, the coding system iso-latin-1 has variants iso-latin-1-unix, iso-latin-1-dos and iso-latin1-mac. The coding systems unix, dos, and mac are aliases for undecided-unix, undecided-dos, and undecided-mac, respectively. These coding systems specify only the end-of-line conversion, and leave the character code conversion to be deduced from the text itself. The coding system raw-text is good for a le which is mainly ASCII text, but may contain byte values above 127 that are not meant to encode non-ASCII characters. With raw-text, Emacs copies those byte values unchanged, and sets enable-multibyte-characters to nil in the current buer so that they will be interpreted properly. raw-text handles end-of-line conversion in the usual way, based on the data encountered, and has the usual three variants to specify the kind of end-of-line conversion to use. In contrast, the coding system no-conversion species no character code conversion at allnone for non-ASCII byte values and none for end of line. This is
1

It is also specied for MIME text/* bodies and in other network transport contexts. It is dierent from the SGML reference syntax record-start/record-end format, which Emacs doesnt support directly.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

190

useful for reading or writing binary les, tar les, and other les that must be examined verbatim. It, too, sets enable-multibyte-characters to nil. The easiest way to edit a le with no conversion of any kind is with the M-x find-file-literally command. This uses no-conversion, and also suppresses other Emacs features that might convert the le contents before you see them. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. The coding system emacs-internal (or utf-8-emacs, which is equivalent) means that the le contains non-ASCII characters stored with the internal Emacs encoding. This coding system handles end-of-line conversion based on the data encountered, and has the usual three variants to specify the kind of end-of-line conversion.

19.7 Recognizing Coding Systems

Whenever Emacs reads a given piece of text, it tries to recognize which coding system to use. This applies to les being read, output from subprocesses, text from X selections, etc. Emacs can select the right coding system automatically most of the timeonce you have specied your preferences. Some coding systems can be recognized or distinguished by which byte sequences appear in the data. However, there are coding systems that cannot be distinguished, not even potentially. For example, there is no way to distinguish between Latin-1 and Latin-2; they use the same byte values with dierent meanings. Emacs handles this situation by means of a priority list of coding systems. Whenever Emacs reads a le, if you do not specify the coding system to use, Emacs checks the data against each coding system, starting with the rst in priority and working down the list, until it nds a coding system that ts the data. Then it converts the le contents assuming that they are represented in this coding system. The priority list of coding systems depends on the selected language environment (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183). For example, if you use French, you probably want Emacs to prefer Latin-1 to Latin-2; if you use Czech, you probably want Latin-2 to be preferred. This is one of the reasons to specify a language environment. However, you can alter the coding system priority list in detail with the command M-x prefer-coding-system. This command reads the name of a coding system from the minibuer, and adds it to the front of the priority list, so that it is preferred to all others. If you use this command several times, each use adds one element to the front of the priority list. If you use a coding system that species the end-of-line conversion type, such as iso-8859-1-dos, what this means is that Emacs should attempt to recognize iso-8859-1 with priority, and should use DOS end-of-line conversion when it does recognize iso-8859-1. Sometimes a le name indicates which coding system to use for the le. The variable file-coding-system-alist species this correspondence. There is a special function modify-coding-system-alist for adding elements to this list. For exam-

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

191

ple, to read and write all .txt les using the coding system chinese-iso-8bit, you can execute this Lisp expression:
(modify-coding-system-alist file "\\.txt\\" chinese-iso-8bit)

The rst argument should be file, the second argument should be a regular expression that determines which les this applies to, and the third argument says which coding system to use for these les. Emacs recognizes which kind of end-of-line conversion to use based on the contents of the le: if it sees only carriage-returns, or only carriage-return linefeed sequences, then it chooses the end-of-line conversion accordingly. You can inhibit the automatic use of end-of-line conversion by setting the variable inhibit-eolconversion to non-nil. If you do that, DOS-style les will be displayed with the ^M characters visible in the buer; some people prefer this to the more subtle (DOS) end-of-line type indication near the left edge of the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). By default, the automatic detection of coding system is sensitive to escape sequences. If Emacs sees a sequence of characters that begin with an escape character, and the sequence is valid as an ISO-2022 code, that tells Emacs to use one of the ISO-2022 encodings to decode the le. However, there may be cases that you want to read escape sequences in a le as is. In such a case, you can set the variable inhibit-iso-escape-detection to non-nil. Then the code detection ignores any escape sequences, and never uses an ISO-2022 encoding. The result is that all escape sequences become visible in the buer. The default value of inhibit-iso-escape-detection is nil. We recommend that you not change it permanently, only for one specic operation. Thats because some Emacs Lisp source les in the Emacs distribution contain non-ASCII characters encoded in the coding system iso-2022-7bit, and they wont be decoded correctly when you visit those les if you suppress the escape sequence detection. The variables auto-coding-alist and auto-coding-regexp-alist are the strongest way to specify the coding system for certain patterns of le names, or for les containing certain patterns, respectively. These variables even override -*-coding:-*- tags in the le itself (see Section 19.8 [Specify Coding], page 192). For example, Emacs uses auto-coding-alist for tar and archive les, to prevent it from being confused by a -*-coding:-*- tag in a member of the archive and thinking it applies to the archive le as a whole. Another way to specify a coding system is with the variable auto-codingfunctions. For example, one of the builtin auto-coding-functions detects the encoding for XML les. Unlike the previous two, this variable does not override any -*-coding:-*- tag. When you get new mail in Rmail, each message is translated automatically from the coding system it is written in, as if it were a separate le. This uses the priority list of coding systems that you have specied. If a MIME message species a character set, Rmail obeys that specication. For reading and saving Rmail les themselves, Emacs uses the coding system specied by the variable rmail-file-

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

192

coding-system. The default value is nil, which means that Rmail les are not translated (they are read and written in the Emacs internal character code).

19.8 Specifying a Files Coding System

If Emacs recognizes the encoding of a le incorrectly, you can reread the le using the correct coding system with C-x RET r (revert-buffer-with-coding-system). This command prompts for the coding system to use. To see what coding system Emacs actually used to decode the le, look at the coding system mnemonic letter near the left edge of the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8), or type C-h C (describe-coding-system). You can specify the coding system for a particular le in the le itself, using the -*-...-*- construct at the beginning, or a local variables list at the end (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). You do this by dening a value for the variable named coding. Emacs does not really have a variable coding; instead of setting a variable, this uses the specied coding system for the le. For example, -*-mode: C; coding: latin-1;-*- species use of the Latin-1 coding system, as well as C mode. When you specify the coding explicitly in the le, that overrides file-coding-system-alist.

19.9 Choosing Coding Systems for Output

Once Emacs has chosen a coding system for a buer, it stores that coding system in buffer-file-coding-system. That makes it the default for operations that write from this buer into a le, such as save-buffer and write-region. You can specify a dierent coding system for further le output from the buer using set-buffer-file-coding-system (see Section 19.10 [Text Coding], page 193). You can insert any character Emacs supports into any Emacs buer, but most coding systems can only handle a subset of these characters. Therefore, its possible that the characters you insert cannot be encoded with the coding system that will be used to save the buer. For example, you could visit a text le in Polish, encoded in iso-8859-2, and add some Russian words to it. When you save that buer, Emacs cannot use the current value of buffer-file-coding-system, because the characters you added cannot be encoded by that coding system. When that happens, Emacs tries the most-preferred coding system (set by M-x prefer-coding-system or M-x set-language-environment). If that coding system can safely encode all of the characters in the buer, Emacs uses it, and stores its value in buffer-file-coding-system. Otherwise, Emacs displays a list of coding systems suitable for encoding the buers contents, and asks you to choose one of those coding systems. If you insert the unsuitable characters in a mail message, Emacs behaves a bit dierently. It additionally checks whether the most-preferred coding system is recommended for use in MIME messages; if not, it informs you of this fact and prompts you for another coding system. This is so you wont inadvertently send a message encoded in a way that your recipients mail software will have diculty

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

193

decoding. (You can still use an unsuitable coding system if you enter its name at the prompt.) When you send a mail message (see Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367), Emacs has four dierent ways to determine the coding system to use for encoding the message text. It tries the buers own value of buffer-file-coding-system, if that is non-nil. Otherwise, it uses the value of sendmail-coding-system, if that is non-nil. The third way is to use the default coding system for new les, which is controlled by your choice of language environment, if that is non-nil. If all of these three values are nil, Emacs encodes outgoing mail using the Latin-1 coding system.

19.10 Specifying a Coding System for File Text

In cases where Emacs does not automatically choose the right coding system for a les contents, you can use these commands to specify one: C-x RET f coding RET Use coding system coding to save or revisit the le in the current buer (set-buffer-file-coding-system). C-x RET c coding RET Specify coding system coding for the immediately following command (universal-coding-system-argument). C-x RET r coding RET Revisit the current le using the coding system coding (revertbuffer-with-coding-system). M-x recode-region RET right RET wrong RET Convert a region that was decoded using coding system wrong, decoding it using coding system right instead. The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) sets the le coding system for the current buerin other words, it says which coding system to use when saving or reverting the visited le. You specify which coding system using the minibuer. If you specify a coding system that cannot handle all of the characters in the buer, Emacs warns you about the troublesome characters when you actually save the buer. You can also use this command to specify the end-of-line conversion (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188) for encoding the current buer. For example, C-x RET f dos RET will cause Emacs to save the current buers text with DOS-style carriage-return linefeed line endings. Another way to specify the coding system for a le is when you visit the le. First use the command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument); this command uses the minibuer to read a coding system name. After you exit the minibuer, the specied coding system is used for the immediately following command. So if the immediately following command is C-x C-f, for example, it reads the le using that coding system (and records the coding system for when you later

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

194

save the le). Or if the immediately following command is C-x C-w, it writes the le using that coding system. When you specify the coding system for saving in this way, instead of with C-x RET f, there is no warning if the buer contains characters that the coding system cannot handle. Other le commands aected by a specied coding system include C-x i and C-x C-v, as well as the other-window variants of C-x C-f. C-x RET c also aects commands that start subprocesses, including M-x shell (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401). If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, then C-x RET c ultimately has no eect. An easy way to visit a le with no conversion is with the M-x find-file-literally command. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. The default value of the variable buffer-file-coding-system species the choice of coding system to use when you create a new le. It applies when you nd a new le, and when you create a buer and then save it in a le. Selecting a language environment typically sets this variable to a good choice of default coding system for that language environment. If you visit a le with a wrong coding system, you can correct this with C-x RET r (revert-buffer-with-coding-system). This visits the current le again, using a coding system you specify. If a piece of text has already been inserted into a buer using the wrong coding system, you can redo the decoding of it using M-x recode-region. This prompts you for the proper coding system, then for the wrong coding system that was actually used, and does the conversion. It rst encodes the region using the wrong coding system, then decodes it again using the proper coding system.

19.11 Coding Systems for Interprocess Communication

This section explains how to specify coding systems for use in communication with other processes. C-x RET x coding RET Use coding system coding for transferring selections to and from other graphical applications (set-selection-coding-system). C-x RET X coding RET Use coding system coding for transferring one selectionthe next oneto or from another graphical application (set-next-selectioncoding-system). C-x RET p input-coding RET output-coding RET Use coding systems input-coding and output-coding for subprocess input and output in the current buer (set-buffer-process-codingsystem). The command C-x RET x (set-selection-coding-system) species the coding system for sending selected text to other windowing applications, and for receiving the text of selections made in other applications. This command applies to all subsequent selections, until you override it by using the command again. The

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

195

command C-x RET X (set-next-selection-coding-system) species the coding system for the next selection made in Emacs or read by Emacs. The variable x-select-request-type species the data type to request from the X Window System for receiving text selections from other applications. If the value is nil (the default), Emacs tries UTF8_STRING and COMPOUND_TEXT, in this order, and uses various heuristics to choose the more appropriate of the two results; if none of these succeed, Emacs falls back on STRING. If the value of x-selectrequest-type is one of the symbols COMPOUND_TEXT, UTF8_STRING, STRING, or TEXT, Emacs uses only that request type. If the value is a list of some of these symbols, Emacs tries only the request types in the list, in order, until one of them succeeds, or until the list is exhausted. The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) species the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. This command applies to the current buer; normally, each subprocess has its own buer, and thus you can use this command to specify translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command in the corresponding buer. You can also use C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) just before the command that runs or starts a subprocess, to specify the coding system for communicating with that subprocess. See Section 19.10 [Text Coding], page 193. The default for translation of process input and output depends on the current language environment. The variable locale-coding-system species a coding system to use when encoding and decoding system strings such as system error messages and formattime-string formats and time stamps. That coding system is also used for decoding non-ASCII keyboard input on the X Window System. You should choose a coding system that is compatible with the underlying systems text representation, which is normally specied by one of the environment variables LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG. (The rst one, in the order specied above, whose value is nonempty is the one that determines the text representation.)

19.12 Coding Systems for File Names

C-x RET F coding RET Use coding system coding for encoding and decoding le names (setfile-name-coding-system). The command C-x RET F (set-file-name-coding-system) species a coding system to use for encoding le names. It has no eect on reading and writing the contents of les. In fact, all this command does is set the value of the variable file-namecoding-system. If you set the variable to a coding system name (as a Lisp symbol or a string), Emacs encodes le names using that coding system for all le operations. This makes it possible to use non-ASCII characters in le namesor, at least, those non-ASCII characters that the specied coding system can encode. If file-name-coding-system is nil, Emacs uses a default coding system determined by the selected language environment, and stored in the default-file-

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

196

name-coding-system variable. In the default language environment, non-ASCII characters in le names are not encoded specially; they appear in the le system using the internal Emacs representation. Warning: if you change file-name-coding-system (or the language environment) in the middle of an Emacs session, problems can result if you have already visited les whose names were encoded using the earlier coding system and cannot be encoded (or are encoded dierently) under the new coding system. If you try to save one of these buers under the visited le name, saving may use the wrong le name, or it may encounter an error. If such a problem happens, use C-x C-w to specify a new le name for that buer. If a mistake occurs when encoding a le name, use the command M-x recode-file-name to change the le names coding system. This prompts for an existing le name, its old coding system, and the coding system to which you wish to convert.

19.13 Coding Systems for Terminal I/O

C-x RET t coding RET Use coding system coding for terminal output (set-terminalcoding-system). C-x RET k coding RET Use coding system coding for keyboard input (set-keyboardcoding-system). The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) species the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are translated into that coding system. This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built to support specic languages or character setsfor example, European terminals that support one of the ISO Latin character sets. You need to specify the terminal coding system when using multibyte text, so that Emacs knows which characters the terminal can actually handle. By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all, unless Emacs can deduce the proper coding system from your terminal type or your locale specication (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183). The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system), or the variable keyboard-coding-system, species the coding system for keyboard input. Character-code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals with keys that send non-ASCII graphic charactersfor example, some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. By default, keyboard input is translated based on your system locale setting. If your terminal does not really support the encoding implied by your locale (for example, if you nd it inserts a non-ASCII character if you type M-i), you will need to set keyboard-coding-system to nil to turn o encoding. You can do this by putting

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

197

(set-keyboard-coding-system nil) in your init le. There is a similarity between using a coding system translation for keyboard input, and using an input method: both dene sequences of keyboard input that translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed to be convenient for interactive use by humans, and the sequences that are translated are typically sequences of ASCII printing characters. Coding systems typically translate sequences of non-graphic characters.

19.14 Fontsets
A font typically denes shapes for a single alphabet or script. Therefore, displaying the entire range of scripts that Emacs supports requires a collection of many fonts. In Emacs, such a collection is called a fontset. A fontset is dened by a list of font specications, each assigned to handle a range of character codes, and may fall back on another fontset for characters that are not covered by the fonts it species. Each fontset has a name, like a font. However, while fonts are stored in the system and the available font names are dened by the system, fontsets are dened within Emacs itself. Once you have dened a fontset, you can use it within Emacs by specifying its name, anywhere that you could use a single font. Of course, Emacs fontsets can use only the fonts that the system supports. If some characters appear on the screen as empty boxes or hex codes, this means that the fontset in use for them has no font for those characters. In this case, or if the characters are shown, but not as well as you would like, you may need to install extra fonts. Your operating system may have optional fonts that you can install; or you can install the GNU Intlfonts package, which includes fonts for most supported scripts.2 Emacs creates three fontsets automatically: the standard fontset, the startup fontset and the default fontset. The default fontset is most likely to have fonts for a wide variety of non-ASCII characters, and is the default fallback for the other two fontsets, and if you set a default font rather than fontset. However, it does not specify font family names, so results can be somewhat random if you use it directly. You can specify use of a particular fontset by starting Emacs with the -fn option. For example, emacs -fn fontset-standard You can also specify a fontset with the Font resource (see Appendix D [X Resources], page 521). If no fontset is specied for use, then Emacs uses an ASCII font, with fontset-default as a fallback for characters the font does not cover. The standard fontset is only used if explicitly requested, despite its name.
2

If you run Emacs on X, you may need to inform the X server about the location of the newly installed fonts with commands such as: xset fp+ /usr/local/share/emacs/fonts xset fp rehash

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

198

A fontset does not necessarily specify a font for every character code. If a fontset species no font for a certain character, or if it species a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot display that character properly. It will display that character as a hex code or thin space or an empty box instead. (See Section 11.19 [glyphless characters], page 87, for details.)

19.15 Dening fontsets

When running on X, Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value of standard-fontset-spec. This fontsets name is -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-16-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-standard or just fontset-standard for short. On GNUstep and Mac OS X, the standard fontset is created using the value of ns-standard-fontset-spec, and on MS Windows it is created using the value of w32-standard-fontset-spec. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the standard fontset are created automatically. Their names have bold instead of medium, or i instead of r, or both. Emacs generates a fontset automatically, based on any default ASCII font that you specify with the Font resource or the -fn argument, or the default font that Emacs found when it started. This is the startup fontset and its name is fontsetstartup. It does this by replacing the charset registry eld with fontset, and replacing charset encoding eld with startup, then using the resulting string to specify a fontset. For instance, if you start Emacs with a font of this form, emacs -fn "*courier-medium-r-normal--14-140-*-iso8859-1" Emacs generates the following fontset and uses it for the initial X window frame: -*-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-140-*-*-*-*-fontset-startup The startup fontset will use the font that you specify, or a variant with a dierent registry and encoding, for all the characters that are supported by that font, and fallback on fontset-default for other characters. With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Fontthat wildcard specication matches various other resources, such as for menus, and menus cannot handle fontsets. See Appendix D [X Resources], page 521. You can specify additional fontsets using X resources named Fontset-n , where n is an integer starting from 0. The resource value should have this form:
fontpattern, [charset :font ]. . .

fontpattern should have the form of a standard X font name (see the previous fontset-startup example), except for the last two elds. They should have the form fontset-alias . The fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is fontpattern. The short name is fontset-alias . You can refer to the fontset by either name.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

199

The construct charset :font species which font to use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here, charset is the name of a character set, and font is the font to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of times in dening one fontset. For the other character sets, Emacs chooses a font based on fontpattern. It replaces fontset-alias with values that describe the character set. For the ASCII character font, fontset-alias is replaced with ISO8859-1. In addition, when several consecutive elds are wildcards, Emacs collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not also useful, because it is better to use the smaller font in its own size, which is what Emacs does. Thus if fontpattern is this, -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 the font specication for ASCII characters would be this: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 and the font specication for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-* You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font specication. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that have song ti or fangsong ti in the family eld. In such a case, Fontset-n can be specied as:
Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\ chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*

Then, the font specications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have fixed in the family eld, and the font specication for Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card * in the family eld. The function that processes the fontset resource value to create the fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call this function explicitly to create a fontset. See Section 18.8 [Fonts], page 171, for more information about font naming.

19.16 Modifying Fontsets

Fontsets do not always have to be created from scratch. If only minor changes are required it may be easier to modify an existing fontset. Modifying fontset-default will also aect other fontsets that use it as a fallback, so can be an eective way of xing problems with the fonts that Emacs chooses for a particular script. Fontsets can be modied using the function set-fontset-font, specifying a character, a charset, a script, or a range of characters to modify the font for, and a font specication for the font to be used. Some examples are: ;; Use Liberation Mono for latin-3 charset. (set-fontset-font "fontset-default" iso-8859-3 "Liberation Mono") ;; Prefer a big5 font for han characters

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support (set-fontset-font "fontset-default" han (font-spec :registry "big5") nil prepend) ;; Use DejaVu Sans Mono as a fallback in fontset-startup ;; before resorting to fontset-default. (set-fontset-font "fontset-startup" nil "DejaVu Sans Mono" nil append) ;; Use MyPrivateFont for the Unicode private use area. (set-fontset-font "fontset-default" (#xe000 . #xf8ff) "MyPrivateFont")

200

19.17 Undisplayable Characters

There may be some non-ASCII characters that your terminal cannot display. Most text terminals support just a single character set (use the variable defaultterminal-coding-system to tell Emacs which one, Section 19.13 [Terminal Coding], page 196); characters that cant be encoded in that coding system are displayed as ? by default. Graphical displays can display a broader range of characters, but you may not have fonts installed for all of them; characters that have no font appear as a hollow box. If you use Latin-1 characters but your terminal cant display Latin-1, you can arrange to display mnemonic ASCII sequences instead, e.g. "o for o-umlaut. Load the library iso-ascii to do this. If your terminal can display Latin-1, you can display characters from other European character sets using a mixture of equivalent Latin-1 characters and ASCII mnemonics. Customize the variable latin1-display to enable this. The mnemonic ASCII sequences mostly correspond to those of the prex input methods.

19.18 Unibyte Editing Mode

The ISO 8859 Latin-n character sets dene character codes in the range 0240 to 0377 octal (160 to 255 decimal) to handle the accented letters and punctuation needed by various European languages (and some non-European ones). Note that Emacs considers bytes with codes in this range as raw bytes, not as characters, even in a unibyte buer, i.e. if you disable multibyte characters. However, Emacs can still handle these character codes as if they belonged to one of the singlebyte character sets at a time. To specify which of these codes to use, invoke M-x set-language-environment and specify a suitable language environment such as Latin-n . For more information about unibyte operation, see Section 19.2 [Disabling Multibyte], page 182.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

201

Emacs can also display bytes in the range 160 to 255 as readable characters, provided the terminal or font in use supports them. This works automatically. On a graphical display, Emacs can also display single-byte characters through fontsets, in eect by displaying the equivalent multibyte characters according to the current language environment. To request this, set the variable unibyte-display-vialanguage-environment to a non-nil value. Note that setting this only aects how these bytes are displayed, but does not change the fundamental fact that Emacs treats them as raw bytes, not as characters. If your terminal does not support display of the Latin-1 character set, Emacs can display these characters as ASCII sequences which at least give you a clear idea of what the characters are. To do this, load the library iso-ascii. Similar libraries for other Latin-n character sets could be implemented, but have not been so far. Normally non-ISO-8859 characters (decimal codes between 128 and 159 inclusive) are displayed as octal escapes. You can change this for non-standard extended versions of ISO-8859 character sets by using the function standarddisplay-8bit in the disp-table library. There are two ways to input single-byte non-ASCII characters: You can use an input method for the selected language environment. See Section 19.4 [Input Methods], page 185. When you use an input method in a unibyte buer, the non-ASCII character you specify with it is converted to unibyte. If your keyboard can generate character codes 128 (decimal) and up, representing non-ASCII characters, you can type those character codes directly. On a graphical display, you should not need to do anything special to use these keys; they should simply work. On a text terminal, you should use the command M-x set-keyboard-coding-system or customize the variable keyboard-coding-system to specify which coding system your keyboard uses (see Section 19.13 [Terminal Coding], page 196). Enabling this feature will probably require you to use ESC to type Meta characters; however, on a console terminal or in xterm, you can arrange for Meta to be converted to ESC and still be able type 8-bit characters present directly on the keyboard or using Compose or AltGr keys. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. For Latin-1 only, you can use the key C-x 8 as a compose character prex for entry of non-ASCII Latin-1 printing characters. C-x 8 is good for insertion (in the minibuer as well as other buers), for searching, and in any other context where a key sequence is allowed. C-x 8 works by loading the iso-transl library. Once that library is loaded, the ALT modier key, if the keyboard has one, serves the same purpose as C-x 8: use ALT together with an accent character to modify the following letter. In addition, if the keyboard has keys for the Latin-1 dead accent characters, they too are dened to compose with the following character, once iso-transl is loaded. Use C-x 8 C-h to list all the available C-x 8 translations.

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

202

19.19 Charsets
In Emacs, charset is short for character set. Emacs supports most popular charsets (such as ascii, iso-8859-1, cp1250, big5, and unicode), in addition to some charsets of its own (such as emacs, unicode-bmp, and eight-bit). All supported characters belong to one or more charsets. Emacs normally does the right thing with respect to charsets, so that you dont have to worry about them. However, it is sometimes helpful to know some of the underlying details about charsets. One example is font selection (see Section 18.8 [Fonts], page 171). Each language environment (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183) denes a priority list for the various charsets. When searching for a font, Emacs initially attempts to nd one that can display the highest-priority charsets. For instance, in the Japanese language environment, the charset japanese-jisx0208 has the highest priority, so Emacs tries to use a font whose registry property is JISX0208.1983-0. There are two commands that can be used to obtain information about charsets. The command M-x list-charset-chars prompts for a charset name, and displays all the characters in that character set. The command M-x describe-character-set prompts for a charset name, and displays information about that charset, including its internal representation within Emacs. M-x list-character-sets displays a list of all supported charsets. The list gives the names of charsets and additional information to identity each charset; see the International Register of Coded Character Sets for more details. In this list, charsets are divided into two categories: normal charsets are listed rst, followed by supplementary charsets. A supplementary charset is one that is used to dene another charset (as a parent or a subset), or to provide backward-compatibility for older Emacs versions. To nd out which charset a character in the buer belongs to, put point before it and type C-u C-x = (see Section 19.1 [International Chars], page 180).

19.20 Bidirectional Editing

Emacs supports editing text written in scripts, such as Arabic and Hebrew, whose natural ordering of horizontal text for display is from right to left. However, digits and Latin text embedded in these scripts are still displayed left to right. It is also not uncommon to have small portions of text in Arabic or Hebrew embedded in an otherwise Latin document; e.g., as comments and strings in a program source le. For these reasons, text that uses these scripts is actually bidirectional : a mixture of runs of left-to-right and right-to-left characters. This section describes the facilities and options provided by Emacs for editing bidirectional text. Emacs stores right-to-left and bidirectional text in the so-called logical (or reading ) order: the buer or string position of the rst character you read precedes that of the next character. Reordering of bidirectional text into the visual order happens at display time. As result, character positions no longer increase monotonically with

Chapter 19: International Character Set Support

203

their positions on display. Emacs implements the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm described in the Unicode Standard Annex #9, for reordering of bidirectional text for display. The buer-local variable bidi-display-reordering controls whether text in the buer is reordered for display. If its value is non-nil, Emacs reorders characters that have right-to-left directionality when they are displayed. The default value is t. Each paragraph of bidirectional text can have its own base direction, either rightto-left or left-to-right. (Paragraph boundaries are empty lines, i.e. lines consisting entirely of whitespace characters.) Text in left-to-right paragraphs begins on the screen at the left margin of the window and is truncated or continued when it reaches the right margin. By contrast, text in right-to-left paragraphs is displayed starting at the right margin and is continued or truncated at the left margin. Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph dynamically, based on the text at the beginning of the paragraph. However, sometimes a buer may need to force a certain base direction for its paragraphs. The variable bidi-paragraphdirection, if non-nil, disables the dynamic determination of the base direction, and instead forces all paragraphs in the buer to have the direction specied by its buer-local value. The value can be either right-to-left or left-to-right. Any other value is interpreted as nil. Alternatively, you can control the base direction of a paragraph by inserting special formatting characters in front of the paragraph. The special character RIGHTTO-LEFT MARK, or rlm, forces the right-to-left direction on the following paragraph, while LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or lrm forces the left-to-right direction. (You can use C-x 8 RET to insert these characters.) In a GUI session, the lrm and rlm characters display as very thin blank characters; on text terminals they display as blanks. Because characters are reordered for display, Emacs commands that operate in the logical order or on stretches of buer positions may produce unusual eects. For example, C-f and C-b commands move point in the logical order, so the cursor will sometimes jump when point traverses reordered bidirectional text. Similarly, a highlighted region covering a contiguous range of character positions may look discontinuous if the region spans reordered text. This is normal and similar to the behavior of other programs that support bidirectional text.

Chapter 20: Major and Minor Modes

204

20 Major and Minor Modes

Emacs contains many editing modes that alter its basic behavior in useful ways. These are divided into major modes and minor modes. Major modes provide specialized facilities for working on a particular le type, such as a C source le (see Chapter 23 [Programs], page 249), or a particular type of non-le buer, such as a shell buer (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401). Major modes are mutually exclusive; each buer has one and only one major mode at any time. Minor modes are optional features which you can turn on or o, not necessarily specic to a type of le or buer. For example, Auto Fill mode is a minor mode in which SPC breaks lines between words as you type (see Section 22.5.1 [Auto Fill], page 218). Minor modes are independent of one another, and of the selected major mode.

20.1 Major Modes

Every buer possesses a major mode, which determines the editing behavior of Emacs while that buer is current. The mode line normally shows the name of the current major mode, in parentheses (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). The least specialized major mode is called Fundamental mode. This mode has no mode-specic redenitions or variable settings, so that each Emacs command behaves in its most general manner, and each user option variable is in its default state. For editing text of a specic type that Emacs knows about, such as Lisp code or English text, you typically use a more specialized major mode, such as Lisp mode or Text mode. Most major modes fall into three major groups. The rst group contains modes for normal text, either plain or with mark-up. It includes Text mode, HTML mode, SGML mode, TEX mode and Outline mode. The second group contains modes for specic programming languages. These include Lisp mode (which has several variants), C mode, Fortran mode, and others. The third group consists of major modes that are not associated directly with les; they are used in buers created for specic purposes by Emacs, such as Dired mode for buers made by Dired (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329), Message mode for buers made by C-x m (see Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367), and Shell mode for buers used to communicate with an inferior shell process (see Section 31.3.2 [Interactive Shell], page 403). Usually, the major mode is automatically set by Emacs, when you rst visit a le or create a buer (see Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207). You can explicitly select a new major mode by using an M-x command. Take the name of the mode and add -mode to get the name of the command to select that mode (e.g., M-x lisp-mode enters Lisp mode). The value of the buer-local variable major-mode is a symbol with the same name as the major mode command (e.g. lisp-mode). This variable is set automatically; you should not change it yourself.

Chapter 20: Major and Minor Modes

205

The default value of major-mode determines the major mode to use for les that do not specify a major mode, and for new buers created with C-x b. Normally, this default value is the symbol fundamental-mode, which species Fundamental mode. You can change this default value via the Customization interface (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434), or by adding a line like this to your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461): (setq-default major-mode text-mode) If the default value of major-mode is nil, the major mode is taken from the previously current buer. Specialized major modes often change the meanings of certain keys to do something more suitable for the mode. For instance, programming language modes bind TAB to indent the current line according to the rules of the language (see Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210). The keys that are commonly changed are TAB, DEL, and C-j. Many modes also dene special commands of their own, usually bound in the prex key C-c. Major modes can also alter user options and variables; for instance, programming language modes typically set a buer-local value for the variable comment-start, which determines how source code comments are delimited (see Section 23.5 [Comments], page 258). To view the documentation for the current major mode, including a list of its key bindings, type C-h m (describe-mode). Every major mode, apart from Fundamental mode, denes a mode hook, a customizable list of Lisp functions to run each time the mode is enabled in a buer. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445, for more information about hooks. Each mode hook is named after its major mode, e.g. Fortran mode has fortran-mode-hook. Furthermore, all text-based major modes run text-mode-hook, and all programming language modes run prog-mode-hook, prior to running their own mode hooks. Hook functions can look at the value of the variable major-mode to see which mode is actually being entered. Mode hooks are commonly used to enable minor modes (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). For example, you can put the following lines in your init le to enable Flyspell minor mode in all text-based major modes (see Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112), and Eldoc minor mode in Emacs Lisp mode (see Section 23.6.3 [Lisp Doc], page 263): (add-hook text-mode-hook flyspell-mode) (add-hook emacs-lisp-mode-hook eldoc-mode)

20.2 Minor Modes

A minor mode is an optional editing mode that alters the behavior of Emacs in some well-dened way. Unlike major modes, any number of minor modes can be in eect at any time. Some minor modes are buer-local, and can be turned on (enabled) in certain buers and o (disabled) in others. Other minor modes are global : while enabled, they aect everything you do in the Emacs session, in all buers. Most minor modes are disabled by default, but a few are enabled by default.

Chapter 20: Major and Minor Modes

206

Most buer-local minor modes say in the mode line when they are enabled, just after the major mode indicator. For example, Fill in the mode line means that Auto Fill mode is enabled. See Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8. Like major modes, each minor mode is associated with a mode command, whose name consists of the mode name followed by -mode. For instance, the mode command for Auto Fill mode is auto-fill-mode. But unlike a major mode command, which simply enables the mode, the mode command for a minor mode can either enable or disable it: If you invoke the mode command directly with no prex argument (either via M-x, or by binding it to a key and typing that key; see Section 33.3 [Key Bindings], page 452), that toggles the minor mode. The minor mode is turned on if it was o, and turned o if it was on. If you invoke the mode command with a prex argument, the minor mode is unconditionally turned o if that argument is zero or negative; otherwise, it is unconditionally turned on. If the mode command is called via Lisp, the minor mode is unconditionally turned on if the argument is omitted or nil. This makes it easy to turn on a minor mode from a major modes mode hook (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204). A non-nil argument is handled like an interactive prex argument, as described above. Most minor modes also have a mode variable, with the same name as the mode command. Its value is non-nil if the mode is enabled, and nil if it is disabled. In general, you should not try to enable or disable the mode by changing the value of the mode variable directly in Lisp; you should run the mode command instead. However, setting the mode variable through the Customize interface (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434) will always properly enable or disable the mode, since Customize automatically runs the mode command for you. The following is a list of some buer-local minor modes: Abbrev mode automatically expands text based on pre-dened abbreviation denitions. See Chapter 26 [Abbrevs], page 322. Auto Fill mode inserts newlines as you type to prevent lines from becoming too long. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. Auto Save mode saves the buer contents periodically to reduce the amount of work you can lose in case of a crash. See Section 15.5 [Auto Save], page 136. Enriched mode enables editing and saving of formatted text. See Section 22.13 [Enriched Text], page 237. Flyspell mode automatically highlights misspelled words. See Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112. Font-Lock mode automatically highlights certain textual units found in programs. It is enabled globally by default, but you can disable it in individual buers. See Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75. Linum mode displays each lines line number in the windows left margin.

Chapter 20: Major and Minor Modes

207

Outline minor mode provides similar facilities to the major mode called Outline mode. See Section 22.8 [Outline Mode], page 224. Overwrite mode causes ordinary printing characters to replace existing text instead of shoving it to the right. For example, if point is in front of the B in FOOBAR, then in Overwrite mode typing a G changes it to FOOGAR, instead of producing FOOGBAR as usual. In Overwrite mode, the command C-q inserts the next character whatever it may be, even if it is a digitthis gives you a way to insert a character instead of replacing an existing character. The mode command, overwrite-mode, is bound to the INSERT key. Binary Overwrite mode is a variant of Overwrite mode for editing binary les; it treats newlines and tabs like other characters, so that they overwrite other characters and can be overwritten by them. In Binary Overwrite mode, digits after C-q specify an octal character code, as usual. Visual Line mode performs word wrapping, causing long lines to be wrapped at word boundaries. See Section 11.22 [Visual Line Mode], page 89. And here are some useful global minor modes: Column Number mode enables display of the current column number in the mode line. See Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8. Delete Selection mode causes text insertion to rst delete the text in the region, if the region is active. See Section 8.3 [Using Region], page 50. Icomplete mode displays an indication of available completions when you are in the minibuer and completion is active. See Section 5.3.5 [Completion Options], page 33. Line Number mode enables display of the current line number in the mode line. It is enabled by default. See Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8. Menu Bar mode gives each frame a menu bar. It is enabled by default. See Section 18.14 [Menu Bars], page 176. Scroll Bar mode gives each window a scroll bar. It is enabled by default, but the scroll bar is only displayed on graphical terminals. See Section 18.12 [Scroll Bars], page 176. Tool Bar mode gives each frame a tool bar. It is enabled by default, but the tool bar is only displayed on graphical terminals. See Section 18.15 [Tool Bars], page 177. Transient Mark mode highlights the region, and makes many Emacs commands operate on the region when the mark is active. It is enabled by default. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47.

20.3 Choosing File Modes

When you visit a le, Emacs chooses a major mode automatically. Normally, it makes the choice based on the le namefor example, les whose names end in .c are normally edited in C modebut sometimes it chooses the major mode based on special text in the le. This special text can also be used to enable buer-local minor modes.

Chapter 20: Major and Minor Modes

208

Here is the exact procedure: First, Emacs checks whether the le contains le-local mode variables. See Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447. If there is a le-local variable that species a major mode, then Emacs uses that major mode, ignoring all other criteria. There are several methods to specify a major mode using a le-local variable; the simplest is to put the mode name in the rst nonblank line, preceded and followed by -*-. Other text may appear on the line as well. For example, ; -*-Lisp-*tells Emacs to use Lisp mode. Note how the semicolon is used to make Lisp treat this line as a comment. You could equivalently write ; -*- mode: Lisp;-*You can also use le-local variables to specify buer-local minor modes, by using eval specications. For example, this rst nonblank line puts the buer in Lisp mode and enables Auto-Fill mode: ; -*- mode: Lisp; eval: (auto-fill-mode 1); -*Note, however, that it is usually inappropriate to enable minor modes this way, since most minor modes represent individual user preferences. If you personally want to use a minor mode for a particular le type, it is better to enable the minor mode via a major mode hook (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204). Second, if there is no le variable specifying a major mode, Emacs checks whether the les contents begin with #!. If so, that indicates that the le can serve as an executable shell command, which works by running an interpreter named on the les rst line (the rest of the le is used as input to the interpreter). Therefore, Emacs tries to use the interpreter name to choose a mode. For instance, a le that begins with #!/usr/bin/perl is opened in Perl mode. The variable interpretermode-alist species the correspondence between interpreter program names and major modes. When the rst line starts with #!, you usually cannot use the -*- feature on the rst line, because the system would get confused when running the interpreter. So Emacs looks for -*- on the second line in such les as well as on the rst line. The same is true for man pages which start with the magic string \" to specify a list of tro preprocessors. Third, Emacs tries to determine the major mode by looking at the text at the start of the buer, based on the variable magic-mode-alist. By default, this variable is nil (an empty list), so Emacs skips this step; however, you can customize it in your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). The value should be a list of elements of the form (regexp . mode-function ) where regexp is a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97), and mode-function is a major mode command. If the text at the beginning of the le matches regexp, Emacs chooses the major mode specied by mode-function. Alternatively, an element of magic-mode-alist may have the form (match-function . mode-function )

Chapter 20: Major and Minor Modes

209

where match-function is a Lisp function that is called at the beginning of the buer; if the function returns non-nil, Emacs set the major mode with mode-function. Fourthif Emacs still hasnt found a suitable major modeit looks at the les name. The correspondence between le names and major modes is controlled by the variable auto-mode-alist. Its value is a list in which each element has this form, (regexp . mode-function ) or this form, (regexp mode-function flag ) For example, one element normally found in the list has the form ("\\.c\\" . c-mode), and it is responsible for selecting C mode for les whose names end in .c. (Note that \\ is needed in Lisp syntax to include a \ in the string, which must be used to suppress the special meaning of . in regexps.) If the element has the form (regexp mode-function flag ) and ag is non-nil, then after calling mode-function, Emacs discards the sux that matched regexp and searches the list again for another match. On GNU/Linux and other systems with case-sensitive le names, Emacs performs a case-sensitive search through auto-mode-alist; if this search fails, it performs a second case-insensitive search through the alist. To suppress the second search, change the variable auto-mode-case-fold to nil. On systems with caseinsensitive le names, such as Microsoft Windows, Emacs performs a single caseinsensitive search through auto-mode-alist. Finally, if Emacs still hasnt found a major mode to use, it compares the text at the start of the buer to the variable magic-fallback-mode-alist. This variable works like magic-mode-alist, described above, except that is consulted only after auto-mode-alist. By default, magic-fallback-mode-alist contains forms that check for image les, HTML/XML/SGML les, and PostScript les. If you have changed the major mode of a buer, you can return to the major mode Emacs would have chosen automatically, by typing M-x normal-mode. This is the same function that find-file calls to choose the major mode. It also processes the les -*- line or local variables list (if any). See Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447. The commands C-x C-w and set-visited-file-name change to a new major mode if the new le name implies a mode (see Section 15.3 [Saving], page 128). (C-x C-s does this too, if the buer wasnt visiting a le.) However, this does not happen if the buer contents specify a major mode, and certain special major modes do not allow the mode to change. You can turn o this mode-changing feature by setting change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil.

Chapter 21: Indentation

210

21 Indentation
Indentation refers to inserting or adjusting whitespace characters (space and/or tab characters) at the beginning of a line of text. This chapter documents indentation commands and options which are common to Text mode and related modes, as well as programming language modes. See Section 23.3 [Program Indent], page 252, for additional documentation about indenting in programming modes. The simplest way to perform indentation is the TAB key. In most major modes, this runs the command indent-for-tab-command. (In C and related modes, TAB runs the command c-indent-line-or-region, which behaves similarly). TAB Insert whitespace, or indent the current line, in a mode-appropriate way (indent-for-tab-command). If the region is active, indent all the lines within it.

The exact behavior of TAB depends on the major mode. In Text mode and related major modes, TAB normally inserts some combination of space and tab characters to advance point to the next tab stop (see Section 21.2 [Tab Stops], page 211). For this purpose, the position of the rst non-whitespace character on the preceding line is treated as an additional tab stop, so you can use TAB to align point with the preceding line. If the region is active (see Section 8.3 [Using Region], page 50), TAB acts specially: it indents each line in the region so that its rst non-whitespace character is aligned with the preceding line. In programming modes, TAB indents the current line of code in a way that makes sense given the code in the preceding lines. If the region is active, all the lines in the region are indented this way. If point was initially within the current lines indentation, it is repositioned to the rst non-whitespace character on the line. If you just want to insert a tab character in the buer, type C-q TAB (see Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17).

21.1 Indentation Commands

Apart from the TAB (indent-for-tab-command) command, Emacs provides a variety of commands to perform indentation in other ways. C-j C-M-o Perform RET followed by TAB (newline-and-indent). Split the current line at point (split-line). The text on the line after point becomes a new line, indented to the same column where point is located. This command rst moves point forward over any spaces and tabs. Afterward, point is positioned before the inserted newline. Move (forward or back) to the rst non-whitespace character on the current line (back-to-indentation). If there are no non-whitespace characters on the line, move to the end of the line. Indent whitespace at point, up to the next tab stop (tab-to-tabstop). See Section 21.2 [Tab Stops], page 211.

M-m

M-i

Chapter 21: Indentation

211

M-x indent-relative Insert whitespace at point, until point is aligned with the rst nonwhitespace character on the previous line (actually, the last non-blank line). If point is already farther right than that, run tab-to-tabstop insteadunless called with a numeric argument, in which case do nothing. M-^ Merge the previous and the current line (delete-indentation). This joins the two lines cleanly, by replacing any indentation at the front of the current line, together with the line boundary, with a single space. As a special case (useful for Lisp code), the single space is omitted if the characters to be joined are consecutive opening and closing parentheses, or if the junction follows another newline. If there is a ll prex, M-^ deletes the ll prex if it appears after the newline that is deleted. See Section 22.5.3 [Fill Prex], page 220. Indent all the lines in the region, as though you had typed TAB at the beginning of each line (indent-region). If a numeric argument is supplied, indent every line in the region to that column number. Shift each line in the region by a xed distance, to the right or left (indent-rigidly). The distance to move is determined by the numeric argument (positive to move rightward, negative to move leftward). This command can be used to remove all indentation from the lines in the region, by invoking it with a large negative argument, e.g. C-u -1000 C-x TAB.

C-M-\

C-x TAB

21.2 Tab Stops

Emacs denes certain column numbers to be tab stops. These are used as stopping points by TAB when inserting whitespace in Text mode and related modes (see Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210), and by commands like M-i (see Section 21.1 [Indentation Commands], page 210). By default, tab stops are located every 8 columns. These positions are stored in the variable tab-stop-list, whose value is a list of column numbers in increasing order. Instead of customizing the variable tab-stop-list directly, a convenient way to view and set tab stops is via the command M-x edit-tab-stops. This switches to a buer containing a description of the tab stop settings, which looks like this: : : : : : : 0 1 2 3 4 0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678 To install changes, type C-c C-c The rst line contains a colon at each tab stop. The numbers on the next two lines are present just to indicate where the colons are.

Chapter 21: Indentation

212

You can edit this buer to specify dierent tab stops by placing colons on the desired columns. The buer uses Overwrite mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). When you are done, type C-c C-c to make the new tab stops take eect. Normally, the new tab stop settings apply to all buers. However, if you have made the tab-stop-list variable local to the buer where you called M-x edit-tab-stops (see Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446), then the new tab stop settings apply only to that buer. To save the tab stop settings for future Emacs sessions, use the Customize interface to save the value of tab-stop-list (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). Note that the tab stops discussed in this section have nothing to do with how tab characters are displayed in the buer. Tab characters are always displayed as empty spaces extending to the next display tab stop. See Section 11.19 [Text Display], page 87.

21.3 Tabs vs. Spaces

Normally, indentation commands insert (or remove) an optimal mix of space characters and tab characters to align to the desired column. Tab characters are displayed as a stretch of empty space extending to the next display tab stop. By default, there is one display tab stop every tab-width columns (the default is 8). See Section 11.19 [Text Display], page 87. If you prefer, all indentation can be made from spaces only. To request this, set the buer-local variable indent-tabs-mode to nil. See Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446, for information about setting buer-local variables. Note, however, that C-q TAB always inserts a tab character, regardless of the value of indent-tabsmode. One reason to set indent-tabs-mode to nil is that not all editors display tab characters in the same way. Emacs users, too, may have dierent customized values of tab-width. By using spaces only, you can make sure that your le always looks the same. If you only care about how it looks within Emacs, another way to tackle this problem is to set the tab-width variable in a le-local variable (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). There are also commands to convert tabs to spaces or vice versa, always preserving the columns of all non-whitespace text. M-x tabify scans the region for sequences of spaces, and converts sequences of at least two spaces to tabs if that can be done without changing indentation. M-x untabify changes all tabs in the region to appropriate numbers of spaces.

21.4 Convenience Features for Indentation

The variable tab-always-indent tweaks the behavior of the TAB (indent-fortab-command) command. The default value, t, gives the behavior described in Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210. If you change the value to the symbol complete, then TAB rst tries to indent the current line, and if the line was already indented, it tries to complete the text at point (see Section 23.8 [Symbol Completion], page 264).

Chapter 21: Indentation

213

If the value is nil, then TAB indents the current line only if point is at the left margin or in the lines indentation; otherwise, it inserts a tab character. Electric Indent mode is a global minor mode that automatically indents the line after every RET you type. To toggle this minor mode, type M-x electric-indent-mode.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

214

22 Commands for Human Languages

This chapter describes Emacs commands that act on text, by which we mean sequences of characters in a human language (as opposed to, say, a computer programming language). These commands act in ways that take into account the syntactic and stylistic conventions of human languages: conventions involving words, sentences, paragraphs, and capital letters. There are also commands for lling, which means rearranging the lines of a paragraph to be approximately equal in length. These commands, while intended primarily for editing text, are also often useful for editing programs. Emacs has several major modes for editing human-language text. If the le contains ordinary text, use Text mode, which customizes Emacs in small ways for the syntactic conventions of text. Outline mode provides special commands for operating on text with an outline structure. Org mode extends Outline mode and turn Emacs into a full-edged organizer: you can manage TODO lists, store notes and publish them in many formats. See Section 22.8 [Outline Mode], page 224. Emacs has other major modes for text which contains embedded commands, such as TEX and LaTEX (see Section 22.10 [TeX Mode], page 231); HTML and SGML (see Section 22.11 [HTML Mode], page 236); XML (see the nXML mode Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs); and Gro and Nro (see Section 22.12 [Nro Mode], page 237). If you need to edit pictures made out of text characters (commonly referred to as ASCII art), use Picture mode, a special major mode for editing such pictures. See Section Picture Mode in Specialized Emacs Features .

22.1 Words
Emacs denes several commands for moving over or operating on words: M-f M-b M-d M-DEL M-@ M-t Move forward over a word (forward-word). Move backward over a word (backward-word). Kill up to the end of a word (kill-word). Kill back to the beginning of a word (backward-kill-word). Mark the end of the next word (mark-word). Transpose two words or drag a word across others (transpose-words).

Notice how these keys form a series that parallels the character-based C-f, C-b, C-d, DEL and C-t. M-@ is cognate to C-@, which is an alias for C-SPC. The commands M-f (forward-word) and M-b (backward-word) move forward and backward over words. These META-based key sequences are analogous to the key sequences C-f and C-b, which move over single characters. The analogy extends to numeric arguments, which serve as repeat counts. M-f with a negative argument moves backward, and M-b with a negative argument moves forward. Forward motion

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

215

stops right after the last letter of the word, while backward motion stops right before the rst letter. M-d (kill-word) kills the word after point. To be precise, it kills everything from point to the place M-f would move to. Thus, if point is in the middle of a word, M-d kills just the part after point. If some punctuation comes between point and the next word, it is killed along with the word. (If you wish to kill only the next word but not the punctuation before it, simply do M-f to get the end, and kill the word backwards with M-DEL.) M-d takes arguments just like M-f. M-DEL (backward-kill-word) kills the word before point. It kills everything from point back to where M-b would move to. For instance, if point is after the space in FOO, BAR, it kills FOO, . If you wish to kill just FOO, and not the comma and the space, use M-b M-d instead of M-DEL. M-t (transpose-words) exchanges the word before or containing point with the following word. The delimiter characters between the words do not move. For example, FOO, BAR transposes into BAR, FOO rather than BAR FOO,. See Section 13.2 [Transpose], page 111, for more on transposition. To operate on words with an operation which acts on the region, use the command M-@ (mark-word). This command sets the mark where M-f would move to. See Section 8.2 [Marking Objects], page 49, for more information about this command. The word commands understanding of word boundaries is controlled by the syntax table. Any character can, for example, be declared to be a word delimiter. See Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . In addition, see Section 4.9 [Position Info], page 23 for the M-= (count-wordsregion) and M-x count-words commands, which count and report the number of words in the region or buer.

22.2 Sentences
The Emacs commands for manipulating sentences and paragraphs are mostly on Meta keys, like the word-handling commands. M-a M-e M-k C-x DEL Move back to the beginning of the sentence (backward-sentence). Move forward to the end of the sentence (forward-sentence). Kill forward to the end of the sentence (kill-sentence). Kill back to the beginning of the sentence (backward-killsentence).

The commands M-a (backward-sentence) and M-e (forward-sentence) move to the beginning and end of the current sentence, respectively. Their bindings were chosen to resemble C-a and C-e, which move to the beginning and end of a line. Unlike them, M-a and M-e move over successive sentences if repeated. Moving backward over a sentence places point just before the rst character of the sentence; moving forward places point right after the punctuation that ends the sentence. Neither one moves over the whitespace at the sentence boundary.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

216

Just as C-a and C-e have a kill command, C-k, to go with them, M-a and M-e have a corresponding kill command: M-k (kill-sentence) kills from point to the end of the sentence. With a positive numeric argument n, it kills the next n sentences; with a negative argument n, it kills back to the beginning of the nth preceding sentence. The C-x DEL (backward-kill-sentence) kills back to the beginning of a sentence. The sentence commands assume that you follow the American typists convention of putting two spaces at the end of a sentence. That is, a sentence ends wherever there is a ., ? or ! followed by the end of a line or two spaces, with any number of ), ], , or " characters allowed in between. A sentence also begins or ends wherever a paragraph begins or ends. It is useful to follow this convention, because it allows the Emacs sentence commands to distinguish between periods that end a sentence and periods that indicate abbreviations. If you want to use just one space between sentences, you can set the variable sentence-end-double-space to nil to make the sentence commands stop for single spaces. However, this has a drawback: there is no way to distinguish between periods that end sentences and those that indicate abbreviations. For convenient and reliable editing, we therefore recommend you follow the two-space convention. The variable sentence-end-double-space also aects lling (see Section 22.5.2 [Fill Commands], page 219). The variable sentence-end controls how to recognize the end of a sentence. If non-nil, its value should be a regular expression, which is used to match the last few characters of a sentence, together with the whitespace following the sentence (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). If the value is nil, the default, then Emacs computes sentence ends according to various criteria such as the value of sentenceend-double-space. Some languages, such as Thai, do not use periods to indicate the end of a sentence. Set the variable sentence-end-without-period to t in such cases.

22.3 Paragraphs
The Emacs commands for manipulating paragraphs are also on Meta keys. M-{ M-} M-h Move back to previous paragraph beginning (backward-paragraph). Move forward to next paragraph end (forward-paragraph). Put point and mark around this or next paragraph (mark-paragraph).

M-{ (backward-paragraph) moves to the beginning of the current or previous paragraph (see below for the denition of a paragraph). M-} (forward-paragraph) moves to the end of the current or next paragraph. If there is a blank line before the paragraph, M-{ moves to the blank line. When you wish to operate on a paragraph, type M-h (mark-paragraph) to set the region around it. For example, M-h C-w kills the paragraph around or after point. M-h puts point at the beginning and mark at the end of the paragraph point was in. If point is between paragraphs (in a run of blank lines, or at a boundary),

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

217

M-h sets the region around the paragraph following point. If there are blank lines preceding the rst line of the paragraph, one of these blank lines is included in the region. If the region is already active, the command sets the mark without changing point, and each subsequent M-h further advances the mark by one paragraph. The denition of a paragraph depends on the major mode. In Fundamental mode, as well as Text mode and related modes, a paragraph is separated each neighboring paragraph another by one or more blank lineslines that are either empty, or consist solely of space, tab and/or formfeed characters. In programming language modes, paragraphs are usually dened in a similar way, so that you can use the paragraph commands even though there are no paragraphs as such in a program. Note that an indented line is not itself a paragraph break in Text mode. If you want indented lines to separate paragraphs, use Paragraph-Indent Text mode instead. See Section 22.7 [Text Mode], page 223. If you set a ll prex, then paragraphs are delimited by all lines which dont start with the ll prex. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. The precise denition of a paragraph boundary is controlled by the variables paragraph-separate and paragraph-start. The value of paragraph-start is a regular expression that should match lines that either start or separate paragraphs (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). The value of paragraph-separate is another regular expression that should match lines that separate paragraphs without being part of any paragraph (for example, blank lines). Lines that start a new paragraph and are contained in it must match only paragraph-start, not paragraph-separate. For example, in Fundamental mode, paragraph-start is "\f\\|[ \t]*$", and paragraph-separate is "[ \t\f]*$".

22.4 Pages
Within some text les, text is divided into pages delimited by the formfeed character (ASCII code 12, also denoted as CONTROL-L), which is displayed in Emacs as the escape sequence ^L (see Section 11.19 [Text Display], page 87). Traditionally, when such text les are printed to hardcopy, each formfeed character forces a page break. Most Emacs commands treat it just like any other character, so you can insert it with C-q C-l, delete it with DEL, etc. In addition, Emacs provides commands to move over pages and operate on them. M-x what-page Display the page number of point, and the line number within that page. C-x [ C-x ] C-x C-p C-x l Move point to previous page boundary (backward-page). Move point to next page boundary (forward-page). Put point and mark around this page (or another page) (mark-page). Count the lines in this page (count-lines-page).

M-x what-page counts pages from the beginning of the le, and counts lines within the page, showing both numbers in the echo area.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

218

The C-x [ (backward-page) command moves point to immediately after the previous page delimiter. If point is already right after a page delimiter, it skips that one and stops at the previous one. A numeric argument serves as a repeat count. The C-x ] (forward-page) command moves forward past the next page delimiter. The C-x C-p command (mark-page) puts point at the beginning of the current page (after that page delimiter at the front), and the mark at the end of the page (after the page delimiter at the end). C-x C-p C-w is a handy way to kill a page to move it elsewhere. If you move to another page delimiter with C-x [ and C-x ], then yank the killed page, all the pages will be properly delimited once again. The reason C-x C-p includes only the following page delimiter in the region is to ensure that. A numeric argument to C-x C-p species which page to go to, relative to the current one. Zero means the current page, one the next page, and 1 the previous one. The C-x l command (count-lines-page) is good for deciding where to break a page in two. It displays in the echo area the total number of lines in the current page, and then divides it up into those preceding the current line and those following, as in Page has 96 (72+25) lines Notice that the sum is o by one; this is correct if point is not at the beginning of a line. The variable page-delimiter controls where pages begin. Its value is a regular expression that matches the beginning of a line that separates pages (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). The normal value of this variable is "^\f", which matches a formfeed character at the beginning of a line.

22.5 Filling Text

Filling text means breaking it up into lines that t a specied width. Emacs does lling in two ways. In Auto Fill mode, inserting text with self-inserting characters also automatically lls it. There are also explicit ll commands that you can use when editing text. 22.5.1 Auto Fill Mode Auto Fill mode is a buer-local minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205) in which lines are broken automatically when they become too wide. Breaking happens only when you type a SPC or RET. M-x auto-fill-mode Enable or disable Auto Fill mode. SPC RET In Auto Fill mode, break lines when appropriate.

The mode command M-x auto-fill-mode toggles Auto Fill mode in the current buer. With a positive numeric argument, it enables Auto Fill mode, and with a negative argument it disables it. If auto-fill-mode is called from Lisp with an

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

219

omitted or nil argument, it enables Auto Fill mode. To enable Auto Fill mode automatically in certain major modes, add auto-fill-mode to the mode hooks (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204). When Auto Fill mode is enabled, the mode indicator Fill appears in the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). Auto Fill mode breaks lines automatically at spaces whenever they get longer than the desired width. This line breaking occurs only when you type SPC or RET. If you wish to insert a space or newline without permitting line-breaking, type C-q SPC or C-q C-j respectively. Also, C-o inserts a newline without line breaking. When Auto Fill mode breaks a line, it tries to obey the adaptive ll prex : if a ll prex can be deduced from the rst and/or second line of the current paragraph, it is inserted into the new line (see Section 22.5.4 [Adaptive Fill], page 222). Otherwise the new line is indented, as though you had typed TAB on it (see Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210). In a programming language mode, if a line is broken in the middle of a comment, the comment is split by inserting new comment delimiters as appropriate. Auto Fill mode does not rell entire paragraphs; it breaks lines but does not merge lines. Therefore, editing in the middle of a paragraph can result in a paragraph that is not correctly lled. To ll it, call the explicit ll commands described in the next section. 22.5.2 Explicit Fill Commands M-q C-x f Fill current paragraph (fill-paragraph). Set the ll column (set-fill-column).

M-x fill-region Fill each paragraph in the region (fill-region). M-x fill-region-as-paragraph Fill the region, considering it as one paragraph. M-o M-s Center a line.

The command M-q (fill-paragraph) lls the current paragraph. It redistributes the line breaks within the paragraph, and deletes any excess space and tab characters occurring within the paragraph, in such a way that the lines end up tting within a certain maximum width. Normally, M-q acts on the paragraph where point is, but if point is between paragraphs, it acts on the paragraph after point. If the region is active, it acts instead on the text in the region. You can also call M-x fill-region to specically ll the text in the region. M-q and fill-region use the usual Emacs criteria for nding paragraph boundaries (see Section 22.3 [Paragraphs], page 216). For more control, you can use M-x fill-region-as-paragraph, which rells everything between point and mark as a single paragraph. This command deletes any blank lines within the region, so separate blocks of text end up combined into one block.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

220

A numeric argument to M-q tells it to justify the text as well as lling it. This means that extra spaces are inserted to make the right margin line up exactly at the ll column. To remove the extra spaces, use M-q with no argument. (Likewise for fill-region.) The maximum line width for lling is specied by the buer-local variable fillcolumn. The default value (see Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446) is 70. The easiest way to set fill-column in the current buer is to use the command C-x f (setfill-column). With a numeric argument, it uses that as the new ll column. With just C-u as argument, it sets fill-column to the current horizontal position of point. The command M-o M-s (center-line) centers the current line within the current ll column. With an argument n, it centers n lines individually and moves past them. This binding is made by Text mode and is available only in that and related modes (see Section 22.7 [Text Mode], page 223). By default, Emacs considers a period followed by two spaces or by a newline as the end of a sentence; a period followed by just one space indicates an abbreviation, not the end of a sentence. Accordingly, the ll commands will not break a line after a period followed by just one space. If you set the variable sentence-enddouble-space to nil, the ll commands will break a line after a period followed by one space, and put just one space after each period. See Section 22.2 [Sentences], page 215, for other eects and possible drawbacks of this. If the variable colon-double-space is non-nil, the ll commands put two spaces after a colon. To specify additional conditions where line-breaking is not allowed, customize the abnormal hook variable fill-nobreak-predicate (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). Each function in this hook is called with no arguments, with point positioned where Emacs is considering breaking a line. If a function returns a nonnil value, Emacs will not break the line there. Two functions you can use are fill-single-word-nobreak-p (dont break after the rst word of a sentence or before the last) and fill-french-nobreak-p (dont break after ( or before ), : or ?). 22.5.3 The Fill Prex The ll prex feature allows paragraphs to be lled so that each line starts with a special string of characters (such as a sequence of spaces, giving an indented paragraph). You can specify a ll prex explicitly; otherwise, Emacs tries to deduce one automatically (see Section 22.5.4 [Adaptive Fill], page 222). C-x . M-q Set the ll prex (set-fill-prefix). Fill a paragraph using current ll prex (fill-paragraph).

M-x fill-individual-paragraphs Fill the region, considering each change of indentation as starting a new paragraph.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

221

M-x fill-nonuniform-paragraphs Fill the region, considering only paragraph-separator lines as starting a new paragraph. To specify a ll prex for the current buer, move to a line that starts with the desired prex, put point at the end of the prex, and type C-x . (set-fillprefix). (Thats a period after the C-x.) To turn o the ll prex, specify an empty prex: type C-x . with point at the beginning of a line. When a ll prex is in eect, the ll commands remove the ll prex from each line of the paragraph before lling, and insert it on each line after lling. (The beginning of the rst line of the paragraph is left unchanged, since often that is intentionally dierent.) Auto Fill mode also inserts the ll prex automatically when it makes a new line (see Section 22.5.1 [Auto Fill], page 218). The C-o command inserts the ll prex on new lines it creates, when you use it at the beginning of a line (see Section 4.7 [Blank Lines], page 22). Conversely, the command M-^ deletes the prex (if it occurs) after the newline that it deletes (see Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210). For example, if fill-column is 40 and you set the ll prex to ;; , then M-q in the following text ;; This is an ;; example of a paragraph ;; inside a Lisp-style comment. produces this: ;; This is an example of a paragraph ;; inside a Lisp-style comment. Lines that do not start with the ll prex are considered to start paragraphs, both in M-q and the paragraph commands; this gives good results for paragraphs with hanging indentation (every line indented except the rst one). Lines which are blank or indented once the prex is removed also separate or start paragraphs; this is what you want if you are writing multi-paragraph comments with a comment delimiter on each line. You can use M-x fill-individual-paragraphs to set the ll prex for each paragraph automatically. This command divides the region into paragraphs, treating every change in the amount of indentation as the start of a new paragraph, and lls each of these paragraphs. Thus, all the lines in one paragraph have the same amount of indentation. That indentation serves as the ll prex for that paragraph. M-x fill-nonuniform-paragraphs is a similar command that divides the region into paragraphs in a dierent way. It considers only paragraph-separating lines (as dened by paragraph-separate) as starting a new paragraph. Since this means that the lines of one paragraph may have dierent amounts of indentation, the ll prex used is the smallest amount of indentation of any of the lines of the paragraph. This gives good results with styles that indent a paragraphs rst line more or less that the rest of the paragraph. The ll prex is stored in the variable fill-prefix. Its value is a string, or nil when there is no ll prex. This is a per-buer variable; altering the variable

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

222

aects only the current buer, but there is a default value which you can change as well. See Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446. The indentation text property provides another way to control the amount of indentation paragraphs receive. See Section 22.13.5 [Enriched Indentation], page 240. 22.5.4 Adaptive Filling The ll commands can deduce the proper ll prex for a paragraph automatically in certain cases: either whitespace or certain punctuation characters at the beginning of a line are propagated to all lines of the paragraph. If the paragraph has two or more lines, the ll prex is taken from the paragraphs second line, but only if it appears on the rst line as well. If a paragraph has just one line, ll commands may take a prex from that line. The decision is complicated because there are three reasonable things to do in such a case: Use the rst lines prex on all the lines of the paragraph. Indent subsequent lines with whitespace, so that they line up under the text that follows the prex on the rst line, but dont actually copy the prex from the rst line. Dont do anything special with the second and following lines. All three of these styles of formatting are commonly used. So the ll commands try to determine what you would like, based on the prex that appears and on the major mode. Here is how. If the prex found on the rst line matches adaptive-fill-first-lineregexp, or if it appears to be a comment-starting sequence (this depends on the major mode), then the prex found is used for lling the paragraph, provided it would not act as a paragraph starter on subsequent lines. Otherwise, the prex found is converted to an equivalent number of spaces, and those spaces are used as the ll prex for the rest of the lines, provided they would not act as a paragraph starter on subsequent lines. In Text mode, and other modes where only blank lines and page delimiters separate paragraphs, the prex chosen by adaptive lling never acts as a paragraph starter, so it can always be used for lling. The variable adaptive-fill-regexp determines what kinds of line beginnings can serve as a ll prex: any characters at the start of the line that match this regular expression are used. If you set the variable adaptive-fill-mode to nil, the ll prex is never chosen automatically. You can specify more complex ways of choosing a ll prex automatically by setting the variable adaptive-fill-function to a function. This function is called with point after the left margin of a line, and it should return the appropriate ll prex based on that line. If it returns nil, adaptive-fill-regexp gets a chance to nd a prex.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

223

22.6 Case Conversion Commands

Emacs has commands for converting either a single word or any arbitrary range of text to upper case or to lower case. M-l M-u M-c C-x C-l C-x C-u Convert following word to lower case (downcase-word). Convert following word to upper case (upcase-word). Capitalize the following word (capitalize-word). Convert region to lower case (downcase-region). Convert region to upper case (upcase-region).

M-l (downcase-word) converts the word after point to lower case, moving past it. Thus, repeating M-l converts successive words. M-u (upcase-word) converts to all capitals instead, while M-c (capitalize-word) puts the rst letter of the word into upper case and the rest into lower case. All these commands convert several words at once if given an argument. They are especially convenient for converting a large amount of text from all upper case to mixed case, because you can move through the text using M-l, M-u or M-c on each word as appropriate, occasionally using M-f instead to skip a word. When given a negative argument, the word case conversion commands apply to the appropriate number of words before point, but do not move point. This is convenient when you have just typed a word in the wrong case: you can give the case conversion command and continue typing. If a word case conversion command is given in the middle of a word, it applies only to the part of the word which follows point. (This is comparable to what M-d (kill-word) does.) With a negative argument, case conversion applies only to the part of the word before point. The other case conversion commands are C-x C-u (upcase-region) and C-x C-l (downcase-region), which convert everything between point and mark to the specied case. Point and mark do not move. The region case conversion commands upcase-region and downcase-region are normally disabled. This means that they ask for conrmation if you try to use them. When you conrm, you may enable the command, which means it will not ask for conrmation again. See Section 33.3.11 [Disabling], page 460.

22.7 Text Mode

Text mode is a major mode for editing les of text in a human language. Files which have names ending in the extension .txt are usually opened in Text mode (see Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207). To explicitly switch to Text mode, type M-x text-mode. In Text mode, only blank lines and page delimiters separate paragraphs. As a result, paragraphs can be indented, and adaptive lling determines what indentation to use when lling a paragraph. See Section 22.5.4 [Adaptive Fill], page 222.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

224

In Text mode, the TAB (indent-for-tab-command) command usually inserts whitespace up to the next tab stop, instead of indenting the current line. See Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210, for details. Text mode turns o the features concerned with comments except when you explicitly invoke them. It changes the syntax table so that single-quotes are considered part of words (e.g. dont is considered one word). However, if a word starts with a single-quote, it is treated as a prex for the purposes of capitalization (e.g. M-c converts hello into Hello, as expected). If you indent the rst lines of paragraphs, then you should use Paragraph-Indent Text mode (M-x paragraph-indent-text-mode) rather than Text mode. In that mode, you do not need to have blank lines between paragraphs, because the rstline indentation is sucient to start a paragraph; however paragraphs in which every line is indented are not supported. Use M-x paragraph-indent-minor-mode to enable an equivalent minor mode for situations where you shouldnt change the major modein mail composition, for instance. Text mode binds M-TAB to ispell-complete-word. This command performs completion of the partial word in the buer before point, using the spelling dictionary as the space of possible words. See Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112. If your window manager denes M-TAB to switch windows, you can type ESC TAB or C-M-i instead. Entering Text mode runs the mode hook text-mode-hook (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204). The following sections describe several major modes that are derived from Text mode. These derivatives share most of the features of Text mode described above. In particular, derivatives of Text mode run text-mode-hook prior to running their own mode hooks.

22.8 Outline Mode

Outline mode is a major mode derived from Text mode, which is specialized for editing outlines. It provides commands to navigate between entries in the outline structure, and commands to make parts of a buer temporarily invisible, so that the outline structure may be more easily viewed. Type M-x outline-mode to switch to Outline mode. Entering Outline mode runs the hook text-mode-hook followed by the hook outline-mode-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). When you use an Outline mode command to make a line invisible (see Section 22.8.3 [Outline Visibility], page 226), the line disappears from the screen. An ellipsis (three periods in a row) is displayed at the end of the previous visible line, to indicate the hidden text. Multiple consecutive invisible lines produce just one ellipsis. Editing commands that operate on lines, such as C-n and C-p, treat the text of the invisible line as part of the previous visible line. Killing the ellipsis at the end of a visible line really kills all the following invisible text associated with the ellipsis. Outline minor mode is a buer-local minor mode which provides the same commands as the major mode, Outline mode, but can be used in conjunction with

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

225

other major modes. You can type M-x outline-minor-mode to toggle Outline minor mode in the current buer, or use a le-local variable setting to enable it in a specic le (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). The major mode, Outline mode, provides special key bindings on the C-c prex. Outline minor mode provides similar bindings with C-c @ as the prex; this is to reduce the conicts with the major modes special commands. (The variable outline-minor-mode-prefix controls the prex used.) 22.8.1 Format of Outlines Outline mode assumes that the lines in the buer are of two types: heading lines and body lines. A heading line represents a topic in the outline. Heading lines start with one or more asterisk (*) characters; the number of asterisks determines the depth of the heading in the outline structure. Thus, a heading line with one * is a major topic; all the heading lines with two *s between it and the next one-* heading are its subtopics; and so on. Any line that is not a heading line is a body line. Body lines belong with the preceding heading line. Here is an example: * Food This is the body, which says something about the topic of food. ** Delicious Food This is the body of the second-level header. ** Distasteful Food This could have a body too, with several lines. *** Dormitory Food * Shelter Another first-level topic with its header line. A heading line together with all following body lines is called collectively an entry. A heading line together with all following deeper heading lines and their body lines is called a subtree. You can customize the criterion for distinguishing heading lines by setting the variable outline-regexp. (The recommended ways to do this are in a major mode function or with a le local variable.) Any line whose beginning has a match for this regexp is considered a heading line. Matches that start within a line (not at the left margin) do not count. The length of the matching text determines the level of the heading; longer matches make a more deeply nested level. Thus, for example, if a text formatter has commands @chapter, @section and @subsection to divide the document into chapters and sections, you could make those lines count as heading lines by setting outline-regexp to "@chap\\|@\\(sub\\)*section". Note the trick: the

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

226

two words chapter and section are equally long, but by dening the regexp to match only chap we ensure that the length of the text matched on a chapter heading is shorter, so that Outline mode will know that sections are contained in chapters. This works as long as no other command starts with @chap. You can explicitly specify a rule for calculating the level of a heading line by setting the variable outline-level. The value of outline-level should be a function that takes no arguments and returns the level of the current heading. The recommended ways to set this variable are in a major mode command or with a le local variable. 22.8.2 Outline Motion Commands Outline mode provides special motion commands that move backward and forward to heading lines. C-c C-n C-c C-p C-c C-f C-c C-b C-c C-u Move point to the next visible heading line (outline-next-visibleheading). Move point to the previous visible heading line (outline-previousvisible-heading). Move point to the next visible heading line at the same level as the one point is on (outline-forward-same-level). Move point to the previous visible heading line at the same level (outline-backward-same-level). Move point up to a lower-level (more inclusive) visible heading line (outline-up-heading).

C-c C-n (outline-next-visible-heading) moves down to the next heading line. C-c C-p (outline-previous-visible-heading) moves similarly backward. Both accept numeric arguments as repeat counts. C-c C-f (outline-forward-same-level) and C-c C-b (outline-backwardsame-level) move from one heading line to another visible heading at the same depth in the outline. C-c C-u (outline-up-heading) moves backward to another heading that is less deeply nested. 22.8.3 Outline Visibility Commands Outline mode provides several commands for temporarily hiding or revealing parts of the buer, based on the outline structure. These commands are not undoable; their eects are simply not recorded by the undo mechanism, so you can undo right past them (see Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110). Many of these commands act on the current heading line. If point is on a heading line, that is the current heading line; if point is on a body line, the current heading line is the nearest preceding header line. C-c C-c C-c C-e Make the current heading lines body invisible (hide-entry). Make the current heading lines body visible (show-entry).

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages C-c C-d C-c C-s C-c C-l C-c C-k C-c C-i C-c C-t C-c C-a C-c C-q C-c C-o

227

Make everything under the current heading invisible, not including the heading itself (hide-subtree). Make everything under the current heading visible, including body, subheadings, and their bodies (show-subtree). Make the body of the current heading line, and of all its subheadings, invisible (hide-leaves). Make all subheadings of the current heading line, at all levels, visible (show-branches). Make immediate subheadings (one level down) of the current heading line visible (show-children). Make all body lines in the buer invisible (hide-body). Make all lines in the buer visible (show-all). Hide everything except the top n levels of heading lines (hidesublevels). Hide everything except for the heading or body that point is in, plus the headings leading up from there to the top level of the outline (hide-other).

The simplest of these commands are C-c C-c (hide-entry), which hides the body lines directly following the current heading line, and C-c C-e (show-entry), which reveals them. Subheadings and their bodies are not aected. The commands C-c C-d (hide-subtree) and C-c C-s (show-subtree) are more powerful. They apply to the current heading lines subtree : its body, all of its subheadings, both direct and indirect, and all of their bodies. The command C-c C-l (hide-leaves) hides the body of the current heading line as well as all the bodies in its subtree; the subheadings themselves are left visible. The command C-c C-k (show-branches) reveals the subheadings, if they had previously been hidden (e.g. by C-c C-d). The command C-c C-i (show-children) is a weaker version of this; it reveals just the direct subheadings, i.e. those one level down. The command C-c C-o (hide-other) hides everything except the entry that point is in, plus its parents (the headers leading up from there to top level in the outline) and the top level headings. The remaining commands aect the whole buer. C-c C-t (hide-body) makes all body lines invisible, so that you see just the outline structure (as a special exception, it will not hide lines at the top of the le, preceding the rst header line, even though these are technically body lines). C-c C-a (show-all) makes all lines visible. C-c C-q (hide-sublevels) hides all but the top level headings; with a numeric argument n, it hides everything except the top n levels of heading lines. When incremental search nds text that is hidden by Outline mode, it makes that part of the buer visible. If you exit the search at that position, the text remains visible. You can also automatically make text visible as you navigate in it by using Reveal mode (M-x reveal-mode), a buer-local minor mode.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages 22.8.4 Viewing One Outline in Multiple Views

228

You can display two views of a single outline at the same time, in dierent windows. To do this, you must create an indirect buer using M-x make-indirect-buffer. The rst argument of this command is the existing outline buer name, and its second argument is the name to use for the new indirect buer. See Section 16.6 [Indirect Buers], page 156. Once the indirect buer exists, you can display it in a window in the normal fashion, with C-x 4 b or other Emacs commands. The Outline mode commands to show and hide parts of the text operate on each buer independently; as a result, each buer can have its own view. If you want more than two views on the same outline, create additional indirect buers. 22.8.5 Folding Editing The Foldout package extends Outline mode and Outline minor mode with folding commands. The idea of folding is that you zoom in on a nested portion of the outline, while hiding its relatives at higher levels. Consider an Outline mode buer with all the text and subheadings under level-1 headings hidden. To look at what is hidden under one of these headings, you could use C-c C-e (M-x show-entry) to expose the body, or C-c C-i to expose the child (level-2) headings. With Foldout, you use C-c C-z (M-x foldout-zoom-subtree). This exposes the body and child subheadings, and narrows the buer so that only the level-1 heading, the body and the level-2 headings are visible. Now to look under one of the level-2 headings, position the cursor on it and use C-c C-z again. This exposes the level-2 body and its level-3 child subheadings and narrows the buer again. Zooming in on successive subheadings can be done as much as you like. A string in the mode line shows how deep youve gone. When zooming in on a heading, to see only the child subheadings specify a numeric argument: C-u C-c C-z. The number of levels of children can be specied too (compare M-x show-children), e.g. M-2 C-c C-z exposes two levels of child subheadings. Alternatively, the body can be specied with a negative argument: M-- C-c C-z. The whole subtree can be expanded, similarly to C-c C-s (M-x show-subtree), by specifying a zero argument: M-0 C-c C-z. While youre zoomed in, you can still use Outline modes exposure and hiding functions without disturbing Foldout. Also, since the buer is narrowed, global editing actions will only aect text under the zoomed-in heading. This is useful for restricting changes to a particular chapter or section of your document. To unzoom (exit) a fold, use C-c C-x (M-x foldout-exit-fold). This hides all the text and subheadings under the top-level heading and returns you to the previous view of the buer. Specifying a numeric argument exits that many levels of folds. Specifying a zero argument exits all folds. To cancel the narrowing of a fold without hiding the text and subheadings, specify a negative argument. For example, M--2 C-c C-x exits two folds and leaves the text and subheadings exposed.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

229

Foldout mode also provides mouse commands for entering and exiting folds, and for showing and hiding text: C-M-Mouse-1 zooms in on the heading clicked on single click: expose body. double click: expose subheadings. triple click: expose body and subheadings. quad click: expose entire subtree. C-M-Mouse-2 exposes text under the heading clicked on single click: expose body. double click: expose subheadings. triple click: expose body and subheadings. quad click: expose entire subtree. C-M-Mouse-3 hides text under the heading clicked on or exits fold single click: hide subtree. double click: exit fold and hide text. triple click: exit fold without hiding text. quad click: exit all folds and hide text. You can specify dierent modier keys (instead of Control-Meta-) by setting foldout-mouse-modifiers; but if you have already loaded the foldout.el library, you must reload it in order for this to take eect. To use the Foldout package, you can type M-x load-library RET foldout RET; or you can arrange for to do that automatically by putting the following in your init le: (eval-after-load "outline" (require foldout))

22.9 Org Mode

Org mode is a variant of Outline mode for using Emacs as an organizer and/or authoring system. Files with names ending in the extension .org are opened in Org mode (see Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207). To explicitly switch to Org mode, type M-x org-mode. In Org mode, as in Outline mode, each entry has a heading line that starts with one or more * characters. See Section 22.8.1 [Outline Format], page 225. In addition, any line that begins with the # character is treated as a comment. Org mode provides commands for easily viewing and manipulating the outline structure. The simplest of these commands is TAB (org-cycle). If invoked on a heading line, it cycles through the dierent visibility states of the subtree: (i) showing only that heading line, (ii) showing only the heading line and the heading lines of its direct children, if any, and (iii) showing the entire subtree. If invoked in a body line, the global binding for TAB is executed. Typing S-TAB (org-shifttab) anywhere in an Org mode buer cycles the visibility of the entire outline structure, between (i) showing only top-level heading lines, (ii) showing all heading lines but no body lines, and (iii) showing everything.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

230

You can move an entire entry up or down in the buer, including its body lines and subtree (if any), by typing M-<up> (org-metaup) or M-<down> (org-metadown) on the heading line. Similarly, you can promote or demote a heading line with M-<left> (org-metaleft) and M-<right> (org-metaright). These commands execute their global bindings if invoked on a body line. The following subsections give basic instructions for using Org mode as an organizer and as an authoring system. For details, see Section Introduction in The Org Manual . 22.9.1 Org as an organizer You can tag an Org entry as a TODO item by typing C-c C-t (org-todo) anywhere in the entry. This adds the keyword TODO to the heading line. Typing C-c C-t again switches the keyword to DONE; another C-c C-t removes the keyword entirely, and so forth. You can customize the keywords used by C-c C-t via the variable org-todo-keywords. Apart from marking an entry as TODO, you can attach a date to it, by typing C-c C-s (org-schedule) in the entry. This prompts for a date by popping up the Emacs Calendar (see Chapter 28 [Calendar/Diary], page 346), and then adds the tag SCHEDULED, together with the selected date, beneath the heading line. The command C-c C-d (org-deadline) has the same eect, except that it uses the tag DEADLINE. Once you have some TODO items planned in an Org le, you can add that le to the list of agenda les by typing C-c [ (org-agenda-file-to-front). Org mode is designed to let you easily maintain multiple agenda les, e.g. for organizing dierent aspects of your life. The list of agenda les is stored in the variable orgagenda-files. To view items coming from your agenda les, type M-x org-agenda. This command prompts for what you want to see: a list of things to do this week, a list of TODO items with specic keywords, etc. 22.9.2 Org as an authoring system You may want to format your Org notes nicely and to prepare them for export and publication. To export the current buer, type C-c C-e (org-export) anywhere in an Org buer. This command prompts for an export format; currently supported formats include HTML, LaTEX, OpenDocument (.odt), and PDF. Some formats, such as PDF, require certain system tools to be installed. To export several les at once to a specic directory, either locally or over the network, you must dene a list of projects through the variable org-publishproject-alist. See its documentation for details. Org supports a simple markup scheme for applying text formatting to exported documents: - This text is /emphasized/ - This text is *in bold* - This text is _underlined_ - This text uses =a teletype font=

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

231

#+begin_quote This is a quote. #+end_quote #+begin_example This is an example. #+end_example For further details, see Section Exporting in The Org Manual and Section Publishing in The Org Manual .

22.10 TEX Mode

Emacs provides special major modes for editing les written in TEX and its related formats. TEX is a powerful text formatter written by Donald Knuth; like GNU Emacs, it is free software. LaTEX is a simplied input format for TEX, implemented using TEX macros. DocTEX is a special le format in which the LaTEX sources are written, combining sources with documentation. SliTEX is an obsolete special form of LaTEX.1 TEX mode has four variants: Plain TEX mode, LaTEX mode, DocTEX mode, and SliTEX mode. These distinct major modes dier only slightly, and are designed for editing the four dierent formats. Emacs selects the appropriate mode by looking at the contents of the buer. (This is done by the tex-mode command, which is normally called automatically when you visit a TEX-like le. See Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207.) If the contents are insucient to determine this, Emacs chooses the mode specied by the variable tex-default-mode; its default value is latex-mode. If Emacs does not guess right, you can select the correct variant of TEX mode using the command M-x plain-tex-mode, M-x latex-mode, M-x slitex-mode, or doctex-mode. The following sections document the features of TEX mode and its variants. There are several other TEX-related Emacs packages, which are not documented in this manual: BibTEX mode is a major mode for BibTEX les, which are commonly used for keeping bibliographic references for LaTEX documents. For more information, see the documentation string for the command bibtex-mode. The RefTEX package provides a minor mode which can be used with LaTEX mode to manage bibliographic references. For more information, see the RefTEX Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs. The AUCTEX package provides more advanced features for editing TEX and its related formats, including the ability to preview TEX equations within Emacs buers. Unlike BibTEX mode and the RefTEX package, AUCTEX is not distributed with Emacs by default. It can be downloaded via the Package Menu (see Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430); once installed, see the AUCTEX manual, which is included with the package.
1

It has been replaced by the slides document class, which comes with LaTEX.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages 22.10.1 TEX Editing Commands " C-j

232

Insert, according to context, either or " or (tex-insertquote). Insert a paragraph break (two newlines) and check the previous paragraph for unbalanced braces or dollar signs (tex-terminateparagraph).

M-x tex-validate-region Check each paragraph in the region for unbalanced braces or dollar signs. C-c { C-c } Insert {} and position point between them (tex-insert-braces). Move forward past the next unmatched close brace (up-list).

In TEX, the character " is not normally used; instead, quotations begin with and end with . TEX mode therefore binds the " key to the tex-insertquote command. This inserts after whitespace or an open brace, " after a backslash, and after any other character. As a special exception, if you type " when the text before point is either or , Emacs replaces that preceding text with a single " character. You can therefore type "" to insert ", should you ever need to do so. (You can also use C-q " to insert this character.) In TEX mode, $ has a special syntax code which attempts to understand the way TEX math mode delimiters match. When you insert a $ that is meant to exit math mode, the position of the matching $ that entered math mode is displayed for a second. This is the same feature that displays the open brace that matches a close brace that is inserted. However, there is no way to tell whether a $ enters math mode or leaves it; so when you insert a $ that enters math mode, the previous $ position is shown as if it were a match, even though they are actually unrelated. TEX uses braces as delimiters that must match. Some users prefer to keep braces balanced at all times, rather than inserting them singly. Use C-c { (tex-insertbraces) to insert a pair of braces. It leaves point between the two braces so you can insert the text that belongs inside. Afterward, use the command C-c } (up-list) to move forward past the close brace. There are two commands for checking the matching of braces. C-j (texterminate-paragraph) checks the paragraph before point, and inserts two newlines to start a new paragraph. It outputs a message in the echo area if any mismatch is found. M-x tex-validate-region checks a region, paragraph by paragraph. The errors are listed in an *Occur* buer; you can use the usual Occur mode commands in that buer, such as C-c C-c, to visit a particular mismatch (see Section 12.10 [Other Repeating Search], page 107). Note that Emacs commands count square brackets and parentheses in TEX mode, not just braces. This is not strictly correct for the purpose of checking TEX syntax. However, parentheses and square brackets are likely to be used in text as matching delimiters, and it is useful for the various motion commands and automatic match display to work with them.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages 22.10.2 LaTEX Editing Commands LaTEX mode provides a few extra features not applicable to plain TEX: C-c C-o C-c C-e

233

Insert \begin and \end for LaTEX block and position point on a line between them (tex-latex-block). Close the innermost LaTEX block not yet closed (tex-close-latexblock).

In LaTEX input, \begin and \end tags are used to group blocks of text. To insert a block, type C-c C-o (tex-latex-block). This prompts for a block type, and inserts the appropriate matching \begin and \end tags, leaving a blank line between the two and moving point there. When entering the block type argument to C-c C-o, you can use the usual completion commands (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29). The default completion list contains the standard LaTEX block types. If you want additional block types for completion, customize the list variable latex-block-names. In LaTEX input, \begin and \end tags must balance. You can use C-c C-e (tex-close-latex-block) to insert an \end tag which matches the last unmatched \begin. It also indents the \end to match the corresponding \begin, and inserts a newline after the \end tag if point is at the beginning of a line. The minor mode latex-electric-env-pair-mode automatically inserts an \end or \begin tag for you when you type the corresponding one. 22.10.3 TEX Printing Commands You can invoke TEX as an subprocess of Emacs, supplying either the entire contents of the buer or just part of it (e.g. one chapter of a larger document). C-c C-b C-c C-r C-c C-f C-c C-v C-c C-p C-c TAB C-c C-l C-c C-k C-c C-c Invoke TEX on the entire current buer (tex-buffer). Invoke TEX on the current region, together with the buers header (tex-region). Invoke TEX on the current le (tex-file). Preview the output from the last C-c C-r, C-c C-b, or C-c C-f command (tex-view). Print the output from the last C-c C-b, C-c C-r, or C-c C-f command (tex-print). Invoke BibTEX on the current le (tex-bibtex-file). Recenter the window showing output from TEX so that the last line can be seen (tex-recenter-output-buffer). Kill the TEX subprocess (tex-kill-job). Invoke some other compilation command on the entire current buer (tex-compile).

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

234

To pass the current buer through TEX, type C-c C-b (tex-buffer). The formatted output goes in a temporary le, normally a .dvi le. Afterwards, you can type C-c C-v (tex-view) to launch an external program, such as xdvi, to view this output le. You can also type C-c C-p (tex-print) to print a hardcopy of the output le. By default, C-c C-b runs TEX in the current directory. The output of TEX also goes in this directory. To run TEX in a dierent directory, change the variable texdirectory to the desired directory name. If your environment variable TEXINPUTS contains relative directory names, or if your les contains \input commands with relative le names, then tex-directory must be "." or you will get the wrong results. Otherwise, it is safe to specify some other directory, such as "/tmp". The buers TEX variant determines what shell command C-c C-b actually runs. In Plain TEX mode, it is specied by the variable tex-run-command, which defaults to "tex". In LaTEX mode, it is specied by latex-run-command, which defaults to "latex". The shell command that C-c C-v runs to view the .dvi output is determined by the variable tex-dvi-view-command, regardless of the TEX variant. The shell command that C-c C-p runs to print the output is determined by the variable tex-dvi-print-command. Normally, Emacs automatically appends the output le name to the shell command strings described in the preceding paragraph. For example, if tex-dvi-viewcommand is "xdvi", C-c C-v runs xdvi output-file-name . In some cases, however, the le name needs to be embedded in the command, e.g. if you need to provide the le name as an argument to one command whose output is piped to another. You can specify where to put the le name with * in the command string. For example, (setq tex-dvi-print-command "dvips -f * | lpr") The terminal output from TEX, including any error messages, appears in a buer called *tex-shell*. If TEX gets an error, you can switch to this buer and feed it input (this works as in Shell mode; see Section 31.3.2 [Interactive Shell], page 403). Without switching to this buer you can scroll it so that its last line is visible by typing C-c C-l. Type C-c C-k (tex-kill-job) to kill the TEX process if you see that its output is no longer useful. Using C-c C-b or C-c C-r also kills any TEX process still running. You can also pass an arbitrary region through TEX by typing C-c C-r (texregion). This is tricky, however, because most les of TEX input contain commands at the beginning to set parameters and dene macros, without which no later part of the le will format correctly. To solve this problem, C-c C-r allows you to designate a part of the le as containing essential commands; it is included before the specied region as part of the input to TEX. The designated part of the le is called the header. To indicate the bounds of the header in Plain TEX mode, you insert two special strings in the le. Insert %**start of header before the header, and %**end of header after it. Each string must appear entirely on one line, but there may be other text on the line before or after. The lines containing the two strings are

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

235

included in the header. If %**start of header does not appear within the rst 100 lines of the buer, C-c C-r assumes that there is no header. In LaTEX mode, the header begins with \documentclass or \documentstyle and ends with \begin{document}. These are commands that LaTEX requires you to use in any case, so nothing special needs to be done to identify the header. The commands (tex-buffer) and (tex-region) do all of their work in a temporary directory, and do not have available any of the auxiliary les needed by TEX for cross-references; these commands are generally not suitable for running the nal copy in which all of the cross-references need to be correct. When you want the auxiliary les for cross references, use C-c C-f (tex-file) which runs TEX on the current buers le, in that les directory. Before running TEX, it oers to save any modied buers. Generally, you need to use (tex-file) twice to get the cross-references right. The value of the variable tex-start-options species options for the TEX run. The value of the variable tex-start-commands species TEX commands for starting TEX. The default value causes TEX to run in nonstop mode. To run TEX interactively, set the variable to "". Large TEX documents are often split into several lesone main le, plus subles. Running TEX on a suble typically does not work; you have to run it on the main le. In order to make tex-file useful when you are editing a suble, you can set the variable tex-main-file to the name of the main le. Then tex-file runs TEX on that le. The most convenient way to use tex-main-file is to specify it in a local variable list in each of the subles. See Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447. For LaTEX les, you can use BibTEX to process the auxiliary le for the current buers le. BibTEX looks up bibliographic citations in a data base and prepares the cited references for the bibliography section. The command C-c TAB (tex-bibtexfile) runs the shell command (tex-bibtex-command) to produce a .bbl le for the current buers le. Generally, you need to do C-c C-f (tex-file) once to generate the .aux le, then do C-c TAB (tex-bibtex-file), and then repeat C-c C-f (tex-file) twice more to get the cross-references correct. To invoke some other compilation program on the current TEX buer, type C-c C-c (tex-compile). This command knows how to pass arguments to many common programs, including pdflatex, yap, xdvi, and dvips. You can select your desired compilation program using the standard completion keys (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29). 22.10.4 TEX Mode Miscellany Entering any variant of TEX mode runs the hooks text-mode-hook and tex-modehook. Then it runs either plain-tex-mode-hook, latex-mode-hook, or slitexmode-hook, whichever is appropriate. Starting the TEX shell runs the hook texshell-hook. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. The commands M-x iso-iso2tex, M-x iso-tex2iso, M-x iso-iso2gtex and M-x iso-gtex2iso can be used to convert between Latin-1 encoded les and TEXencoded equivalents.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

236

22.11 SGML and HTML Modes

The major modes for SGML and HTML provide indentation support and commands for operating on tags. HTML mode is a slightly customized variant of SGML mode. C-c C-n C-c C-t Interactively specify a special character and insert the SGML &command for that character (sgml-name-char). Interactively specify a tag and its attributes (sgml-tag). This command asks you for a tag name and for the attribute values, then inserts both the opening tag and the closing tag, leaving point between them. With a prex argument n, the command puts the tag around the n words already present in the buer after point. Whenever a region is active, it puts the tag around the region (when Transient Mark mode is o, it does this when a numeric argument of 1 is supplied.) Interactively insert attribute values for the current tag (sgmlattributes). Skip across a balanced tag group (which extends from an opening tag through its corresponding closing tag) (sgml-skip-tag-forward). A numeric argument acts as a repeat count. Skip backward across a balanced tag group (which extends from an opening tag through its corresponding closing tag) (sgml-skip-tagbackward). A numeric argument acts as a repeat count. Delete the tag at or after point, and delete the matching tag too (sgmldelete-tag). If the tag at or after point is an opening tag, delete the closing tag too; if it is a closing tag, delete the opening tag too.

C-c C-a C-c C-f

C-c C-b

C-c C-d

C-c ? tag RET Display a description of the meaning of tag tag (sgml-tag-help). If the argument tag is empty, describe the tag at point. C-c / Insert a close tag for the innermost unterminated tag (sgml-closetag). If called within a tag or a comment, close it instead of inserting a close tag. Toggle a minor mode in which Latin-1 characters insert the corresponding SGML commands that stand for them, instead of the characters themselves (sgml-name-8bit-mode). Run a shell command (which you must specify) to validate the current buer as SGML (sgml-validate). Toggle the visibility of existing tags in the buer. This can be used as a cheap preview (sgml-tags-invisible).

C-c 8

C-c C-v C-c TAB

The major mode for editing XML documents is called nXML mode. This is a powerful major mode that can recognize many existing XML schema and use them to provide completion of XML elements via C-RET or M-TAB, as well as onthe-y XML validation with error highlighting. To enable nXML mode in an

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

237

existing buer, type M-x nxml-mode, or, equivalently, M-x xml-mode. Emacs uses nXML mode for les which have the extension .xml. For XHTML les, which have the extension .xhtml, Emacs uses HTML mode by default; you can make it use nXML mode by customizing the variable auto-mode-alist (see Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207). nXML mode is described in an Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs. You may choose to use the less powerful SGML mode for editing XML, since XML is a strict subset of SGML. To enable SGML mode in an existing buer, type M-x sgml-mode. On enabling SGML mode, Emacs examines the buer to determine whether it is XML; if so, it sets the variable sgml-xml-mode to a non-nil value. This causes SGML modes tag insertion commands, described above, to always insert explicit closing tags as well.

22.12 Nro Mode

Nro mode, a major mode derived from Text mode, is specialized for editing nro les (e.g. Unix man pages). Type M-x nroff-mode to enter this mode. Entering Nro mode runs the hook text-mode-hook, then nroff-mode-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). In Nro mode, nro command lines are treated as paragraph separators, pages are separated by .bp commands, and comments start with backslash-doublequote. It also denes these commands: M-n M-p M-? Move to the beginning of the next line that isnt an nro command (forward-text-line). An argument is a repeat count. Like M-n but move up (backward-text-line). Displays in the echo area the number of text lines (lines that are not nro commands) in the region (count-text-lines).

Electric Nro mode is a buer-local minor mode that can be used with Nro mode. To toggle this minor mode, type M-x electric-nroff-mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). When the mode is on, each time you type RET to end a line containing an nro command that opens a kind of grouping, the nro command to close that grouping is automatically inserted on the following line. If you use Outline minor mode with Nro mode (see Section 22.8 [Outline Mode], page 224), heading lines are lines of the form .H followed by a number (the header level).

22.13 Enriched Text

Enriched mode is a minor mode for editing formatted text les in a WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) fashion. When Enriched mode is enabled, you can apply various formatting properties to the text in the buer, such as fonts and colors; upon saving the buer, those properties are saved together with the text, using the MIME text/enriched le format. Enriched mode is typically used with Text mode (see Section 22.7 [Text Mode], page 223). It is not compatible with Font Lock mode, which is used by many major

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

238

modes, including most programming language modes, for syntax highlighting (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80). Unlike Enriched mode, Font Lock mode assigns text properties automatically, based on the current buer contents; those properties are not saved to disk. The le etc/enriched.doc in the Emacs distribution serves as an example of the features of Enriched mode. 22.13.1 Enriched Mode Enriched mode is a buer-local minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). When you visit a le that has been saved in the text/enriched format, Emacs automatically enables Enriched mode, and applies the formatting information in the le to the buer text. When you save a buer with Enriched mode enabled, it is saved using the text/enriched format, including the formatting information. To create a new le of formatted text, visit the nonexistent le and type M-x enriched-mode. This command actually toggles Enriched mode. With a prex argument, it enables Enriched mode if the argument is positive, and disables Enriched mode otherwise. If you disable Enriched mode, Emacs no longer saves the buer using the text/enriched format; any formatting properties that have been added to the buer remain in the buer, but they are not saved to disk. Enriched mode does not save all Emacs text properties, only those specied in the variable enriched-translations. These include properties for fonts, colors, indentation, and justication. If you visit a le and Emacs fails to recognize that it is in the text/enriched format, type M-x format-decode-buffer. This command prompts for a le format, and re-reads the le in that format. Specifying the text/enriched format automatically enables Enriched mode. To view a text/enriched le in raw form (as plain text with markup tags rather than formatted text), use M-x find-file-literally (see Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125). See Section Format Conversion in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for details of how Emacs recognizes and converts le formats like text/enriched. See Section Text Properties in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for more information about text properties. 22.13.2 Hard and Soft Newlines In Enriched mode, Emacs distinguishes between two dierent kinds of newlines, hard newlines and soft newlines. You can also enable or disable this feature in other buers, by typing M-x use-hard-newlines. Hard newlines are used to separate paragraphs, or anywhere there needs to be a line break regardless of how the text is lled; soft newlines are used for lling. The RET (newline) and C-o (open-line) commands insert hard newlines. The ll commands, including Auto Fill (see Section 22.5.1 [Auto Fill], page 218), insert only soft newlines and delete only soft newlines, leaving hard newlines alone.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

239

Thus, when editing with Enriched mode, you should not use RET or C-o to break lines in the middle of lled paragraphs. Use Auto Fill mode or explicit ll commands (see Section 22.5.2 [Fill Commands], page 219) instead. Use RET or C-o where line breaks should always remain, such as in tables and lists. For such lines, you may also want to set the justication style to unfilled (see Section 22.13.6 [Enriched Justication], page 241). 22.13.3 Editing Format Information The easiest way to alter properties is with the Text Properties menu. You can get to this menu from the Edit menu in the menu bar (see Section 1.4 [Menu Bar], page 10), or with C-Mouse-2 (see Section 18.4 [Menu Mouse Clicks], page 168). Some of the commands in the Text Properties menu are listed below (you can also invoke them with M-x): Remove Face Properties Remove face properties from the region (facemenu-remove-faceprops). Remove Text Properties Remove all text properties from the region, including face properties (facemenu-remove-all). Describe Properties List all text properties and other information about the character following point (describe-text-properties). Display Faces Display a list of dened faces (list-faces-display). See Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75. Display Colors Display a list of dened colors (list-colors-display). Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76. The other menu entries are described in the following sections. 22.13.4 Faces in Enriched Text The following commands can be used to add or remove faces (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). Each applies to the text in the region if the mark is active, and to the next self-inserting character if the mark is inactive. With a prex argument, each command applies to the next self-inserting character even if the region is active. M-o d M-o b M-o i M-o l M-o u Remove all face properties (facemenu-set-default). Apply the bold face (facemenu-set-bold). Apply the italic face (facemenu-set-italic). Apply the bold-italic face (facemenu-set-bold-italic). Apply the underline face (facemenu-set-underline). See

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages M-o o face RET Apply the face face (facemenu-set-face).

240

M-x facemenu-set-foreground Prompt for a color (see Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76), and apply it as a foreground color. M-x facemenu-set-background Prompt for a color, and apply it as a background color. These command are also available via the Text Properties menu. A self-inserting character normally inherits the face properties (and most other text properties) from the preceding character in the buer. If you use one of the above commands to specify the face for the next self-inserting character, that character will not inherit the faces properties from the preceding character, but it will still inherit other text properties. Enriched mode denes two additional faces: excerpt and fixed. These correspond to codes used in the text/enriched le format. The excerpt face is intended for quotations; by default, it appears the same as italic. The fixed face species xed-width text; by default, it appears the same as bold. 22.13.5 Indentation in Enriched Text In Enriched mode, you can specify dierent amounts of indentation for the right or left margin of a paragraph or a part of a paragraph. These margins also aect ll commands such as M-q (see Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218). The Indentation submenu of Text Properties oers commands for specifying indentation: Indent More Indent the region by 4 columns (increase-left-margin). In Enriched mode, this command is also available on C-x TAB; if you supply a numeric argument, that says how many columns to add to the margin (a negative argument reduces the number of columns). Indent Less Remove 4 columns of indentation from the region. Indent Right More Make the text narrower by indenting 4 columns at the right margin. Indent Right Less Remove 4 columns of indentation from the right margin. The variable standard-indent species how many columns these commands should add to or subtract from the indentation. The default value is 4. The default right margin for Enriched mode is controlled by the variable fill-column, as usual. You can also type C-c [ (set-left-margin) and C-c ] (set-right-margin) to set the left and right margins. You can specify the margin width with a numeric argument; otherwise these commands prompt for a value via the minibuer.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

241

The ll prex, if any, works in addition to the specied paragraph indentation: C-x . does not include the specied indentations whitespace in the new value for the ll prex, and the ll commands look for the ll prex after the indentation on each line. See Section 22.5.3 [Fill Prex], page 220. 22.13.6 Justication in Enriched Text In Enriched mode, you can use the following commands to specify various justication styles for lling. These commands apply to the paragraph containing point, or, if the region is active, to all paragraphs overlapping the region. M-j l M-j r M-j b Align lines to the left margin (set-justification-left). Align lines to the right margin (set-justification-right). Align lines to both margins, inserting spaces in the middle of the line to achieve this (set-justification-full).

M-j c M-S M-j u

Center lines between the margins (set-justification-center). Turn o lling entirely (set-justification-none). The ll commands do nothing on text with this setting. You can, however, still indent the left margin.

You can also specify justication styles using the Justication submenu in the Text Properties menu. The default justication style is specied by the per-buer variable default-justification. Its value should be one of the symbols left, right, full, center, or none. 22.13.7 Setting Other Text Properties The Special Properties submenu of Text Properties has entries for adding or removing three other text properties: read-only, (which disallows alteration of the text), invisible (which hides text), and intangible (which disallows moving point within the text). The Remove Special menu item removes all of these special properties from the text in the region. The invisible and intangible properties are not saved.

22.14 Editing Text-based Tables

The table package provides commands to easily edit text-based tables. Here is an example of what such a table looks like:

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

242

+-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+ | Command | Description | Key Binding | +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+ | forward-char |Move point right N characters | C-f | | |(left if N is negative). | | | | | | +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+ | backward-char |Move point left N characters | C-b | | |(right if N is negative). | | | | | | +-----------------+--------------------------------+-----------------+

When Emacs recognizes such a stretch of text as a table (see Section 22.14.3 [Table Recognition], page 243), editing the contents of each table cell will automatically resize the table, whenever the contents become too large to t in the cell. You can use the commands dened in the following sections for navigating and editing the table layout. Type M-x table-fixed-width-mode to toggle the automatic table resizing feature. 22.14.1 What is a Text-based Table? A table consists of a rectangular text area which is divided into cells. Each cell must be at least one character wide and one character high, not counting its border lines. A cell can be subdivided into more cells, but they cannot overlap. Cell border lines are drawn with three special characters, specied by the following variables: table-cell-vertical-char The character used for vertical lines. The default is |. table-cell-horizontal-chars The characters used for horizontal lines. The default is "-=". table-cell-intersection-char The character used for the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines. The default is +. The following are examples of invalid tables: +-----+ +--+ +-++--+ | | | | | || | | | | | | || | +--+ | +--+--+ +-++--+ | | | | | | +-++--+ | | | | | | | || | +--+--+ +--+--+ +-++--+ a b c From left to right: a. Overlapped cells or non-rectangular cells are not allowed. b. The border must be rectangular.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages c. Cells must have a minimum width/height of one character. 22.14.2 Creating a Table

243

To create a text-based table from scratch, type M-x table-insert. This command prompts for the number of table columns, the number of table rows, cell width and cell height. The cell width and cell height do not include the cell borders; each can be specied as a single integer (which means each cell is given the same width/height), or as a sequence of integers separated by spaces or commas (which specify the width/height of the individual table columns/rows, counting from left to right for table columns and from top to bottom for table rows). The specied table is then inserted at point. The table inserted by M-x table-insert contains special text properties, which tell Emacs to treat it specially as a text-based table. If you save the buer to a le and visit it again later, those properties are lost, and the table appears to Emacs as an ordinary piece of text. See the next section, for how to convert it back into a table. 22.14.3 Table Recognition Existing text-based tables in a buer, which lack the special text properties applied by M-x table-insert, are not treated specially as tables. To apply those text properties, type M-x table-recognize. This command scans the current buer, recognizes valid table cells, and applies the relevant text properties. Conversely, type M-x table-unrecognize to unrecognize all tables in the current buer, removing the special text properties and converting tables back to plain text. You can also use the following commands to selectively recognize or unrecognize tables: M-x table-recognize-region Recognize tables within the current region. M-x table-unrecognize-region Unrecognize tables within the current region. M-x table-recognize-table Recognize the table at point and activate it. M-x table-unrecognize-table Deactivate the table at point. M-x table-recognize-cell Recognize the cell at point and activate it. M-x table-unrecognize-cell Deactivate the cell at point. See Section 22.14.7 [Table Conversion], page 245, for another way to recognize a table.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages 22.14.4 Commands for Table Cells

244

The commands M-x table-forward-cell and M-x table-backward-cell move point from the current cell to an adjacent cell. The order is cyclic: when point is in the last cell of a table, M-x table-forward-cell moves to the rst cell. Likewise, when point is on the rst cell, M-x table-backward-cell moves to the last cell. M-x table-span-cell prompts for a directionright, left, above, or below and merges the current cell with the adjacent cell in that direction. This command signals an error if the merge would result in an illegitimate cell layout. M-x table-split-cell splits the current cell vertically or horizontally, prompting for the direction with the minibuer. To split in a specic direction, use M-x table-split-cell-vertically and M-x table-split-cell-horizontally. When splitting vertically, the old cell contents are automatically split between the two new cells. When splitting horizontally, you are prompted for how to divide the cell contents, if the cell is non-empty; the options are split (divide the contents at point), left (put all the contents in the left cell), and right (put all the contents in the right cell). The following commands enlarge or shrink a cell. By default, they resize by one row or column; if a numeric argument is supplied, that species the number of rows or columns to resize by. M-x table-heighten-cell Enlarge the current cell vertically. M-x table-shorten-cell Shrink the current cell vertically. M-x table-widen-cell Enlarge the current cell horizontally. M-x table-narrow-cell Shrink the current cell horizontally. 22.14.5 Cell Justication The command M-x table-justify imposes justication on one or more cells in a text-based table. Justication determines how the text in the cell is aligned, relative to the edges of the cell. Each cell in a table can be separately justied. M-x table-justify rst prompts for what to justify; the options are cell (just the current cell), column (all cells in the current table column) and row (all cells in the current table row). The command then prompts for the justication style; the options are left, center, right, top, middle, bottom, or none (meaning no vertical justication). Horizontal and vertical justication styles are specied independently, and both types can be in eect simultaneously; for instance, you can call M-x table-justify twice, once to specify right justication and once to specify bottom justication, to align the contents of a cell to the bottom right.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

245

The justication style is stored in the buer as a text property, and is lost when you kill the buer or exit Emacs. However, the table recognition commands, such as M-x table-recognize (see Section 22.14.3 [Table Recognition], page 243), attempt to determine and re-apply each cells justication style, by examining its contents. To disable this feature, change the variable table-detect-cell-alignment to nil. 22.14.6 Table Rows and Columns M-x table-insert-row inserts a row of cells before the current table row. The current row, together with point, is pushed down past the new row. To insert a row after the last row at the bottom of a table, invoke this command with point below the table, just below the bottom edge. You can insert more than one row at a time by using a numeric prex argument. Similarly, M-x table-insert-column inserts a column of cells to the left of the current table column. To insert a column to the right side of the rightmost column, invoke this command with point to the right of the rightmost column, outside the table. A numeric prex argument species the number of columns to insert. M-x table-delete-column deletes the column of cells at point. Similarly, M-x table-delete-row deletes the row of cells at point. A numeric prex argument to either command species the number of columns or rows to delete. 22.14.7 Converting Between Plain Text and Tables The command M-x table-capture captures plain text in a region and turns it into a table. Unlike M-x table-recognize (see Section 22.14.3 [Table Recognition], page 243), the original text does not need to have a table appearance; it only needs to have a logical table-like structure. For example, suppose we have the following numbers, which are divided into three lines and separated horizontally by commas: 1, 2, 3, 4 5, 6, 7, 8 , 9, 10 Invoking M-x table-capture on that text produces this table: +-----+-----+-----+-----+ |1 |2 |3 |4 | +-----+-----+-----+-----+ |5 |6 |7 |8 | +-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |9 |10 | | +-----+-----+-----+-----+ M-x table-release does the opposite: it converts a table back to plain text, removing its cell borders. One application of this pair of commands is to edit a text in layout. Look at the following three paragraphs (the latter two are indented with header lines): table-capture is a powerful command. Here are some things it can do:

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

246

Parse Cell Items

Using row and column delimiter regexps, it parses the specified text area and extracts cell items into a table.

Applying table-capture to a region containing the above text, with empty strings for the column and row delimiter regexps, creates a table with a single cell like the following one.
+----------------------------------------------------------+ |table-capture is a powerful command. | |Here are some things it can do: | | | |Parse Cell Items Using row and column delimiter regexps,| | it parses the specified text area and | | extracts cell items into a table. | +----------------------------------------------------------+

We can then use the cell splitting commands (see Section 22.14.4 [Cell Commands], page 244) to subdivide the table so that each paragraph occupies a cell:
+----------------------------------------------------------+ |table-capture is a powerful command. | |Here are some things it can do: | +-----------------+----------------------------------------+ |Parse Cell Items | Using row and column delimiter regexps,| | | it parses the specified text area and | | | extracts cell items into a table. | +-----------------+----------------------------------------+

Each cell can now be edited independently without aecting the layout of other cells. When nished, we can invoke M-x table-release to convert the table back to plain text.

22.14.8 Table Miscellany The command table-query-dimension reports the layout of the table and table cell at point. Here is an example of its output:
Cell: (21w, 6h), Table: (67w, 16h), Dim: (2c, 3r), Total Cells: 5

This indicates that the current cell is 21 characters wide and 6 lines high, the table is 67 characters wide and 16 lines high with 2 columns and 3 rows, and a total of 5 cells. M-x table-insert-sequence inserts a string into each cell. Each string is a part of a sequence i.e. a series of increasing integer numbers. M-x table-generate-source generates a table formatted for a specic markup language. It asks for a language (which must be one of html, latex, or cals), a destination buer in which to put the result, and a table caption, and then inserts the generated table into the specied buer. The default destination buer is table.lang , where lang is the language you specied.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

247

22.15 Two-Column Editing

Two-column mode lets you conveniently edit two side-by-side columns of text. It uses two side-by-side windows, each showing its own buer. There are three ways to enter two-column mode: F2 2 or C-x 6 2 Enter two-column mode with the current buer on the left, and on the right, a buer whose name is based on the current buers name (2C-two-columns). If the right-hand buer doesnt already exist, it starts out empty; the current buers contents are not changed. This command is appropriate when the current buer is empty or contains just one column and you want to add another column. F2 s or C-x 6 s Split the current buer, which contains two-column text, into two buers, and display them side by side (2C-split). The current buer becomes the left-hand buer, but the text in the right-hand column is moved into the right-hand buer. The current column species the split point. Splitting starts with the current line and continues to the end of the buer. This command is appropriate when you have a buer that already contains two-column text, and you wish to separate the columns temporarily. F2 b buffer RET C-x 6 b buffer RET Enter two-column mode using the current buer as the lefthand buer, and using buer buer as the right-hand buer (2C-associate-buffer). F2 s or C-x 6 s looks for a column separator, which is a string that appears on each line between the two columns. You can specify the width of the separator with a numeric argument to F2 s; that many characters, before point, constitute the separator string. By default, the width is 1, so the column separator is the character before point. When a line has the separator at the proper place, F2 s puts the text after the separator into the right-hand buer, and deletes the separator. Lines that dont have the column separator at the proper place remain unsplit; they stay in the left-hand buer, and the right-hand buer gets an empty line to correspond. (This is the way to write a line that spans both columns while in two-column mode: write it in the left-hand buer, and put an empty line in the right-hand buer.) The command C-x 6 RET or F2 RET (2C-newline) inserts a newline in each of the two buers at corresponding positions. This is the easiest way to add a new line to the two-column text while editing it in split buers. When you have edited both buers as you wish, merge them with F2 1 or C-x 6 1 (2C-merge). This copies the text from the right-hand buer as a second column in the other buer. To go back to two-column editing, use F2 s.

Chapter 22: Commands for Human Languages

248

Use F2 d or C-x 6 d to dissociate the two buers, leaving each as it stands (2Cdissociate). If the other buer, the one not current when you type F2 d, is empty, F2 d kills it.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

249

23 Editing Programs
This chapter describes Emacs features for facilitating editing programs. Some of the things these features can do are: Find or move over top-level denitions (see Section 23.2 [Defuns], page 250). Apply the usual indentation conventions of the language (see Section 23.3 [Program Indent], page 252). Balance parentheses (see Section 23.4 [Parentheses], page 256). Insert, kill or align comments (see Section 23.5 [Comments], page 258). Highlight program syntax (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80).

23.1 Major Modes for Programming Languages

Emacs has specialized major modes (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204) for many programming languages. A programming language mode typically species the syntax of expressions, the customary rules for indentation, how to do syntax highlighting for the language, and how to nd the beginning or end of a function denition. It often has features for compiling and debugging programs as well. The major mode for each language is named after the language; for instance, the major mode for the C programming language is c-mode. Emacs has programming language modes for Lisp, Scheme, the Scheme-based DSSSL expression language, Ada, ASM, AWK, C, C++, Delphi, Fortran, Icon, IDL (CORBA), IDLWAVE, Java, Javascript, Metafont (TEXs companion for font creation), Modula2, Objective-C, Octave, Pascal, Perl, Pike, PostScript, Prolog, Python, Ruby, Simula, Tcl, and VHDL. An alternative mode for Perl is called CPerl mode. Modes are also available for the scripting languages of the common GNU and Unix shells, VMS DCL, and MS-DOS/MS-Windows BAT les, and for makeles, DNS master les, and various sorts of conguration les. Ideally, Emacs should have a major mode for each programming language that you might want to edit. If it doesnt have a mode for your favorite language, the mode might be implemented in a package not distributed with Emacs (see Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430); or you can contribute one. In most programming languages, indentation should vary from line to line to illustrate the structure of the program. Therefore, in most programming language modes, typing TAB updates the indentation of the current line (see Section 23.3 [Program Indent], page 252). Furthermore, DEL is usually bound to backwarddelete-char-untabify, which deletes backward treating each tab as if it were the equivalent number of spaces, so that you can delete one column of indentation without worrying whether the whitespace consists of spaces or tabs. Entering a programming language mode runs the custom Lisp functions specied in the hook variable prog-mode-hook, followed by those specied in the modes own mode hook (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204). For instance, entering C mode runs the hooks prog-mode-hook and c-mode-hook. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445, for information about hooks.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

250

The Emacs distribution contains Info manuals for the major modes for Ada, C/C++/Objective C/Java/Corba IDL/Pike/AWK, and IDLWAVE. For Fortran mode, see Section Fortran in Specialized Emacs Features .

23.2 Top-Level Denitions, or Defuns

In Emacs, a major denition at the top level in the buer, such as a function, is called a defun. The name comes from Lisp, but in Emacs we use it for all languages. 23.2.1 Left Margin Convention Many programming-language modes assume by default that any opening delimiter found at the left margin is the start of a top-level denition, or defun. Therefore, dont put an opening delimiter at the left margin unless it should have that significance. For instance, never put an open-parenthesis at the left margin in a Lisp le unless it is the start of a top-level list. The convention speeds up many Emacs operations, which would otherwise have to scan back to the beginning of the buer to analyze the syntax of the code. If you dont follow this convention, not only will you have trouble when you explicitly use the commands for motion by defuns; other features that use them will also give you trouble. This includes the indentation commands (see Section 23.3 [Program Indent], page 252) and Font Lock mode (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80). The most likely problem case is when you want an opening delimiter at the start of a line inside a string. To avoid trouble, put an escape character (\, in C and Emacs Lisp, / in some other Lisp dialects) before the opening delimiter. This will not aect the contents of the string, but will prevent that opening delimiter from starting a defun. Heres an example: (insert "Foo: \(bar) ") To help you catch violations of this convention, Font Lock mode highlights confusing opening delimiters (those that ought to be quoted) in bold red. If you need to override this convention, you can do so by setting the variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start. If this user option is set to t (the default), opening parentheses or braces at column zero always start defuns. When it is nil, defuns are found by searching for parens or braces at the outermost level. Usually, you should leave this option at its default value of t. If your buer contains parentheses or braces in column zero which dont start defuns, and it is somehow impractical to remove these parentheses or braces, it might be helpful to set the option to nil. Be aware that this might make scrolling and display in large buers quite sluggish. Furthermore, the parentheses and braces must be correctly matched throughout the buer for it to work properly.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs 23.2.2 Moving by Defuns

251

These commands move point or set up the region based on top-level major denitions, also called defuns. C-M-a C-M-e C-M-h Move to beginning of current or preceding defun (beginning-ofdefun). Move to end of current or following defun (end-of-defun). Put region around whole current or following defun (mark-defun).

The commands to move to the beginning and end of the current defun are C-M-a (beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (end-of-defun). If you repeat one of these commands, or use a positive numeric argument, each repetition moves to the next defun in the direction of motion. C-M-a with a negative argument n moves forward n times to the next beginning of a defun. This is not exactly the same place that C-M-e with argument n would move to; the end of this defun is not usually exactly the same place as the beginning of the following defun. (Whitespace, comments, and perhaps declarations can separate them.) Likewise, C-M-e with a negative argument moves back to an end of a defun, which is not quite the same as C-M-a with a positive argument. To operate on the current defun, use C-M-h (mark-defun), which sets the mark at the end of the current defun and puts point at its beginning. See Section 8.2 [Marking Objects], page 49. This is the easiest way to get ready to kill the defun in order to move it to a dierent place in the le. If you use the command while point is between defuns, it uses the following defun. If you use the command while the mark is already active, it sets the mark but does not move point; furthermore, each successive use of C-M-h extends the end of the region to include one more defun. In C mode, C-M-h runs the function c-mark-function, which is almost the same as mark-defun; the dierence is that it backs up over the argument declarations, function name and returned data type so that the entire C function is inside the region. This is an example of how major modes adjust the standard key bindings so that they do their standard jobs in a way better tting a particular language. Other major modes may replace any or all of these key bindings for that purpose. 23.2.3 Imenu The Imenu facility oers a way to nd the major denitions in a le by name. It is also useful in text formatter major modes, where it treats each chapter, section, etc., as a denition. (See Section 25.3 [Tags], page 311, for a more powerful feature that handles multiple les together.) If you type M-x imenu, it reads the name of a denition using the minibuer, then moves point to that denition. You can use completion to specify the name; the command always displays the whole list of valid names. Alternatively, you can bind the command imenu to a mouse click. Then it displays mouse menus for you to select a denition name. You can also add the buers index to the menu bar by calling imenu-add-menubar-index. If you want to have this menu bar item available for all buers in a certain major mode, you

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

252

can do this by adding imenu-add-menubar-index to its mode hook. But if you have done that, you will have to wait a little while each time you visit a le in that mode, while Emacs nds all the denitions in that buer. When you change the contents of a buer, if you add or delete denitions, you can update the buers index based on the new contents by invoking the *Rescan* item in the menu. Rescanning happens automatically if you set imenu-auto-rescan to a non-nil value. There is no need to rescan because of small changes in the text. You can customize the way the menus are sorted by setting the variable imenusort-function. By default, names are ordered as they occur in the buer; if you want alphabetic sorting, use the symbol imenu--sort-by-name as the value. You can also dene your own comparison function by writing Lisp code. Imenu provides the information to guide Which Function mode (see below). The Speedbar can also use it (see Section 18.9 [Speedbar], page 174). 23.2.4 Which Function Mode Which Function mode is a global minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205) which displays the current function name in the mode line, updating it as you move around in a buer. To either enable or disable Which Function mode, use the command M-x which-function-mode. Although Which Function mode is a global minor mode, it takes eect only in certain major modes: those listed in the variable which-funcmodes. If the value of which-func-modes is t rather than a list of modes, then Which Function mode applies to all major modes that know how to support itin other words, all the major modes that support Imenu.

23.3 Indentation for Programs

The best way to keep a program properly indented is to use Emacs to reindent it as you change it. Emacs has commands to indent either a single line, a specied number of lines, or all of the lines inside a single parenthetical grouping. See Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210, for general information about indentation. This section describes indentation features specic to programming language modes. Emacs also provides a Lisp pretty-printer in the pp package, which reformats Lisp objects with nice-looking indentation. 23.3.1 Basic Program Indentation Commands TAB C-j Adjust indentation of current line (indent-for-tab-command). Insert a newline, then adjust indentation of following line (newlineand-indent).

The basic indentation command is TAB (indent-for-tab-command), which was documented in Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210. In programming language modes, TAB indents the current line, based on the indentation and syntactic con-

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

253

tent of the preceding lines; if the region is active, TAB indents each line within the region, not just the current line. The command C-j (newline-and-indent), which was documented in Section 21.1 [Indentation Commands], page 210, does the same as RET followed by TAB: it inserts a new line, then adjusts the lines indentation. When indenting a line that starts within a parenthetical grouping, Emacs usually places the start of the line under the preceding line within the group, or under the text after the parenthesis. If you manually give one of these lines a nonstandard indentation (e.g. for aesthetic purposes), the lines below will follow it. The indentation commands for most programming language modes assume that a open-parenthesis, open-brace or other opening delimiter at the left margin is the start of a function. If the code you are editing violates this assumptioneven if the delimiters occur in strings or commentsyou must set open-paren-in-column-0is-defun-start to nil for indentation to work properly. See Section 23.2.1 [Left Margin Paren], page 250. 23.3.2 Indenting Several Lines Sometimes, you may want to reindent several lines of code at a time. One way to do this is to use the mark; when the mark is active and the region is non-empty, TAB indents every line in the region. Alternatively, the command C-M-\ (indentregion) indents every line in the region, whether or not the mark is active (see Section 21.1 [Indentation Commands], page 210). In addition, Emacs provides the following commands for indenting large chunks of code: C-M-q C-u TAB Reindent all the lines within one parenthetical grouping. Shift an entire parenthetical grouping rigidly sideways so that its rst line is properly indented.

M-x indent-code-rigidly Shift all the lines in the region rigidly sideways, but do not alter lines that start inside comments and strings. To reindent the contents of a single parenthetical grouping, position point before the beginning of the grouping and type C-M-q. This changes the relative indentation within the grouping, without aecting its overall indentation (i.e. the indentation of the line where the grouping starts). The function that C-M-q runs depends on the major mode; it is indent-pp-sexp in Lisp mode, c-indent-exp in C mode, etc. To correct the overall indentation as well, type TAB rst. If you like the relative indentation within a grouping but not the indentation of its rst line, move point to that rst line and type C-u TAB. In Lisp, C, and some other major modes, TAB with a numeric argument reindents the current line as usual, then reindents by the same amount all the lines in the parenthetical grouping starting on the current line. It is clever, though, and does not alter lines that start inside strings. Neither does it alter C preprocessor lines when in C mode, but it does reindent any continuation lines that may be attached to them.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

254

The command M-x indent-code-rigidly rigidly shifts all the lines in the region sideways, like indent-rigidly does (see Section 21.1 [Indentation Commands], page 210). It doesnt alter the indentation of lines that start inside a string, unless the region also starts inside that string. The prex arg species the number of columns to indent. 23.3.3 Customizing Lisp Indentation The indentation pattern for a Lisp expression can depend on the function called by the expression. For each Lisp function, you can choose among several predened patterns of indentation, or dene an arbitrary one with a Lisp program. The standard pattern of indentation is as follows: the second line of the expression is indented under the rst argument, if that is on the same line as the beginning of the expression; otherwise, the second line is indented underneath the function name. Each following line is indented under the previous line whose nesting depth is the same. If the variable lisp-indent-offset is non-nil, it overrides the usual indentation pattern for the second line of an expression, so that such lines are always indented lisp-indent-offset more columns than the containing list. Certain functions override the standard pattern. Functions whose names start with def treat the second lines as the start of a body, by indenting the second line lisp-body-indent additional columns beyond the open-parenthesis that starts the expression. You can override the standard pattern in various ways for individual functions, according to the lisp-indent-function property of the function name. This is normally done for macro denitions, using the declare construct. See Section Dening Macros in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . 23.3.4 Commands for C Indentation Here are special features for indentation in C mode and related modes: C-c C-q C-M-q Reindent the current top-level function denition or aggregate type declaration (c-indent-defun). Reindent each line in the balanced expression that follows point (cindent-exp). A prex argument inhibits warning messages about invalid syntax. Reindent the current line, and/or in some cases insert a tab character (c-indent-command). If c-tab-always-indent is t, this command always reindents the current line and does nothing else. This is the default. If that variable is nil, this command reindents the current line only if point is at the left margin or in the lines indentation; otherwise, it inserts a tab (or the equivalent number of spaces, if indent-tabs-mode is nil).

TAB

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

255

Any other value (not nil or t) means always reindent the line, and also insert a tab if within a comment or a string. To reindent the whole current buer, type C-x h C-M-\. This rst selects the whole buer as the region, then reindents that region. To reindent the current block, use C-M-u C-M-q. This moves to the front of the block and then reindents it all. 23.3.5 Customizing C Indentation C mode and related modes use a exible mechanism for customizing indentation. C mode indents a source line in two steps: rst it classies the line syntactically according to its contents and context; second, it determines the indentation oset associated by your selected style with the syntactic construct and adds this onto the indentation of the anchor statement. C-c . RET style RET Select a predened style style (c-set-style). A style is a named collection of customizations that can be used in C mode and the related modes. Section Styles in The CC Mode Manual , for a complete description. Emacs comes with several predened styles, including gnu, k&r, bsd, stroustrup, linux, python, java, whitesmith, ellemtel, and awk. Some of these styles are primarily intended for one language, but any of them can be used with any of the languages supported by these modes. To nd out what a style looks like, select it and reindent some code, e.g., by typing C-M-Q at the start of a function denition. To choose a style for the current buer, use the command C-c .. Specify a style name as an argument (case is not signicant). This command aects the current buer only, and it aects only future invocations of the indentation commands; it does not reindent the code already in the buer. To reindent the whole buer in the new style, you can type C-x h C-M-\. You can also set the variable c-default-style to specify the default style for various major modes. Its value should be either the styles name (a string) or an alist, in which each element species one major mode and which indentation style to use for it. For example, (setq c-default-style ((java-mode . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))) species explicit choices for Java and AWK modes, and the default gnu style for the other C-like modes. (These settings are actually the defaults.) This variable takes eect when you select one of the C-like major modes; thus, if you specify a new default style for Java mode, you can make it take eect in an existing Java mode buer by typing M-x java-mode there. The gnu style species the formatting recommended by the GNU Project for C; it is the default, so as to encourage use of our recommended style.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

256

See Section Indentation Engine Basics in the CC Mode Manual , and Section Customizing Indentation in the CC Mode Manual , for more information on customizing indentation for C and related modes, including how to override parts of an existing style and how to dene your own styles. As an alternative to specifying a style, you can tell Emacs to guess a style by typing M-x c-guess in a sample code buer. You can then apply the guessed style to other buers with M-x c-guess-install. See Section Guessing the Style in the CC Mode Manual , for details.

23.4 Commands for Editing with Parentheses

This section describes the commands and features that take advantage of the parenthesis structure in a program, or help you keep it balanced. When talking about these facilities, the term parenthesis also includes braces, brackets, or whatever delimiters are dened to match in pairs. The major mode controls which delimiters are signicant, through the syntax table (see Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). In Lisp, only parentheses count; in C, these commands apply to braces and brackets too. You can use M-x check-parens to nd any unbalanced parentheses and unbalanced string quotes in the buer. 23.4.1 Expressions with Balanced Parentheses Each programming language mode has its own denition of a balanced expression. Balanced expressions typically include individual symbols, numbers, and string constants, as well as pieces of code enclosed in a matching pair of delimiters. The following commands deal with balanced expressions (in Emacs, such expressions are referred to internally as sexps 1 ). C-M-f C-M-b C-M-k C-M-t C-M-@ C-M-SPC Move forward over a balanced expression (forward-sexp). Move backward over a balanced expression (backward-sexp). Kill balanced expression forward (kill-sexp). Transpose expressions (transpose-sexps). Put mark after following expression (mark-sexp).

To move forward over a balanced expression, use C-M-f (forward-sexp). If the rst signicant character after point is an opening delimiter (e.g. (, [ or { in C), this command moves past the matching closing delimiter. If the character begins a symbol, string, or number, the command moves over that. The command C-M-b (backward-sexp) moves backward over a balanced expressionlike C-M-f, but in the reverse direction. If the expression is preceded by any prex characters (single-quote, backquote and comma, in Lisp), the command moves back over them as well.
1

The word sexp is used to refer to an expression in Lisp.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

257

C-M-f or C-M-b with an argument repeats that operation the specied number of times; with a negative argument means to move in the opposite direction. In most modes, these two commands move across comments as if they were whitespace. Note that their keys, C-M-f and C-M-b, are analogous to C-f and C-b, which move by characters (see Section 4.2 [Moving Point], page 18), and M-f and M-b, which move by words (see Section 22.1 [Words], page 214). To kill a whole balanced expression, type C-M-k (kill-sexp). This kills the text that C-M-f would move over. C-M-t (transpose-sexps) switches the positions of the previous balanced expression and the next one. It is analogous to the C-t command, which transposes characters (see Section 13.2 [Transpose], page 111). An argument to C-M-t serves as a repeat count, moving the previous expression over that many following ones. A negative argument moves the previous balanced expression backwards across those before it. An argument of zero, rather than doing nothing, transposes the balanced expressions ending at or after point and the mark. To operate on balanced expressions with a command which acts on the region, type C-M-SPC (mark-sexp). This sets the mark where C-M-f would move to. While the mark is active, each successive call to this command extends the region by shifting the mark by one expression. Positive or negative numeric arguments move the mark forward or backward by the specied number of expressions. The alias C-M-@ is equivalent to C-M-SPC. See Section 8.2 [Marking Objects], page 49, for more information about this and related commands. In languages that use inx operators, such as C, it is not possible to recognize all balanced expressions because there can be multiple possibilities at a given position. For example, C mode does not treat foo + bar as a single expression, even though it is one C expression; instead, it recognizes foo as one expression and bar as another, with the + as punctuation between them. However, C mode recognizes (foo + bar) as a single expression, because of the parentheses. 23.4.2 Moving in the Parenthesis Structure The following commands move over groupings delimited by parentheses (or whatever else serves as delimiters in the language you are working with). They ignore strings and comments, including any parentheses within them, and also ignore parentheses that are quoted with an escape character. These commands are mainly intended for editing programs, but can be useful for editing any text containing parentheses. They are referred to internally as list commands because in Lisp these groupings are lists. These commands assume that the starting point is not inside a string or a comment. If you invoke them from inside a string or comment, the results are unreliable. C-M-n C-M-p C-M-u C-M-d Move forward over a parenthetical group (forward-list). Move backward over a parenthetical group (backward-list). Move up in parenthesis structure (backward-up-list). Move down in parenthesis structure (down-list).

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

258

The list commands C-M-n (forward-list) and C-M-p (backward-list) move forward or backward over one (or n) parenthetical groupings. C-M-n and C-M-p try to stay at the same level in the parenthesis structure. To move up one (or n) levels, use C-M-u (backward-up-list). C-M-u moves backward up past one unmatched opening delimiter. A positive argument serves as a repeat count; a negative argument reverses the direction of motion, so that the command moves forward and up one or more levels. To move down in the parenthesis structure, use C-M-d (down-list). In Lisp mode, where ( is the only opening delimiter, this is nearly the same as searching for a (. An argument species the number of levels to go down. 23.4.3 Matching Parentheses Emacs has a number of parenthesis matching features, which make it easy to see how and whether parentheses (or other delimiters) match up. Whenever you type a self-inserting character that is a closing delimiter, the cursor moves momentarily to the location of the matching opening delimiter, provided that is on the screen. If it is not on the screen, Emacs displays some of the text near it in the echo area. Either way, you can tell which grouping you are closing o. If the opening delimiter and closing delimiter are mismatchedsuch as in [x)a warning message is displayed in the echo area. Three variables control the display of matching parentheses: blink-matching-paren turns the feature on or o: nil disables it, but the default is t to enable it. blink-matching-delay says how many seconds to leave the cursor on the matching opening delimiter, before bringing it back to the real location of point. This may be an integer or oating-point number; the default is 1. blink-matching-paren-distance species how many characters back to search to nd the matching opening delimiter. If the match is not found in that distance, Emacs stops scanning and nothing is displayed. The default is 102400. Show Paren mode, a global minor mode, provides a more powerful kind of automatic matching. Whenever point is before an opening delimiter or after a closing delimiter, both that delimiter and its opposite delimiter are highlighted. To toggle Show Paren mode, type M-x show-paren-mode. Electric Pair mode, a global minor mode, provides a way to easily insert matching delimiters. Whenever you insert an opening delimiter, the matching closing delimiter is automatically inserted as well, leaving point between the two. To toggle Electric Pair mode, type M-x electric-pair-mode.

23.5 Manipulating Comments

Because comments are such an important part of programming, Emacs provides special commands for editing and inserting comments. It can also do spell checking on comments with Flyspell Prog mode (see Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112).

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

259

Some major modes have special rules for indenting dierent kinds of comments. For example, in Lisp code, comments starting with two semicolons are indented as if they were lines of code, while those starting with three semicolons are supposed to be aligned to the left margin and are often used for sectioning purposes. Emacs understand these conventions; for instance, typing TAB on a comment line will indent the comment to the appropriate position. ;; This function is just an example. ;;; Here either two or three semicolons are appropriate. (defun foo (x) ;;; And now, the first part of the function: ;; The following line adds one. (1+ x)) ; This line adds one. 23.5.1 Comment Commands The following commands operate on comments: M-; C-u M-; C-x ; C-M-j M-j Insert or realign comment on current line; if the region is active, comment or uncomment the region instead (comment-dwim). Kill comment on current line (comment-kill). Set comment column (comment-set-column). Like RET followed by inserting and aligning a comment (commentindent-new-line). See Section 23.5.2 [Multi-Line Comments], page 260.

M-x comment-region C-c C-c (in C-like modes) Add comment delimiters to all the lines in the region. The command to create or align a comment is M-; (comment-dwim). The word dwim is an acronym for Do What I Mean; it indicates that this command can be used for many dierent jobs relating to comments, depending on the situation where you use it. When a region is active (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47), M-; either adds comment delimiters to the region, or removes them. If every line in the region is already a comment, it uncomments each of those lines by removing their comment delimiters. Otherwise, it adds comment delimiters to enclose the text in the region. If you supply a prex argument to M-; when a region is active, that species the number of comment delimiters to add or delete. A positive argument n adds n delimiters, while a negative argument -n removes n delimiters. If the region is not active, and there is no existing comment on the current line, M-; adds a new comment to the current line. If the line is blank (i.e. empty or containing only whitespace characters), the comment is indented to the same position where TAB would indent to (see Section 23.3.1 [Basic Indent], page 252). If the line is non-blank, the comment is placed after the last non-whitespace character on the line; normally, Emacs tries putting it at the column specied by the variable

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

260

comment-column (see Section 23.5.3 [Options for Comments], page 261), but if the line already extends past that column, it puts the comment at some suitable position, usually separated from the non-comment text by at least one space. In each case, Emacs places point after the comments starting delimiter, so that you can start typing the comment text right away. You can also use M-; to align an existing comment. If a line already contains the comment-start string, M-; realigns it to the conventional alignment and moves point after the comments starting delimiter. As an exception, comments starting in column 0 are not moved. Even when an existing comment is properly aligned, M-; is still useful for moving directly to the start of the comment text. C-u M-; (comment-dwim with a prex argument) kills any comment on the current line, along with the whitespace before it. Since the comment is saved to the kill ring, you can reinsert it on another line by moving to the end of that line, doing C-y, and then M-; to realign the comment. You can achieve the same eect as C-u M-; by typing M-x comment-kill (comment-dwim actually calls comment-kill as a subroutine when it is given a prex argument). The command M-x comment-region is equivalent to calling M-; on an active region, except that it always acts on the region, even if the mark is inactive. In C mode and related modes, this command is bound to C-c C-c. The command M-x uncomment-region uncomments each line in the region; a numeric prex argument species the number of comment delimiters to remove (negative arguments specify the number of comment to delimiters to add). For C-like modes, you can congure the exact eect of M-; by setting the variables c-indent-comment-alist and c-indent-comments-syntactically-p. For example, on a line ending in a closing brace, M-; puts the comment one space after the brace rather than at comment-column. For full details see Section Comment Commands in The CC Mode Manual . 23.5.2 Multiple Lines of Comments If you are typing a comment and wish to continue it to another line, type M-j or C-M-j (comment-indent-new-line). This breaks the current line, and inserts the necessary comment delimiters and indentation to continue the comment. For languages with closing comment delimiters (e.g. */ in C), the exact behavior of M-j depends on the value of the variable comment-multi-line. If the value is nil, the command closes the comment on the old line and starts a new comment on the new line. Otherwise, it opens a new line within the current comment delimiters. When Auto Fill mode is on, going past the ll column while typing a comment also continues the comment, in the same way as an explicit invocation of M-j. To turn existing lines into comment lines, use M-; with the region active, or use M-x comment-region as described in the preceding section. You can congure C Mode such that when you type a / at the start of a line in a multi-line block comment, this closes the comment. Enable the comment-closeslash clean-up for this. See Section Clean-ups in The CC Mode Manual .

Chapter 23: Editing Programs 23.5.3 Options Controlling Comments

261

As mentioned in Section 23.5.1 [Comment Commands], page 259, when the M-j command adds a comment to a line, it tries to place the comment at the column specied by the buer-local variable comment-column. You can set either the local value or the default value of this buer-local variable in the usual way (see Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446). Alternatively, you can type C-x ; (comment-set-column) to set the value of comment-column in the current buer to the column where point is currently located. C-u C-x ; sets the comment column to match the last comment before point in the buer, and then does a M-; to align the current lines comment under the previous one. The comment commands recognize comments based on the regular expression that is the value of the variable comment-start-skip. Make sure this regexp does not match the null string. It may match more than the comment starting delimiter in the strictest sense of the word; for example, in C mode the value of the variable is "\\(//+\\|/\\*+\\)\\s *", which matches extra stars and spaces after the /* itself, and accepts C++ style comments also. (Note that \\ is needed in Lisp syntax to include a \ in the string, which is needed to deny the rst star its special meaning in regexp syntax. See Section 12.6 [Regexp Backslash], page 100.) When a comment command makes a new comment, it inserts the value of comment-start as an opening comment delimiter. It also inserts the value of comment-end after point, as a closing comment delimiter. For example, in Lisp mode, comment-start is ";" and comment-end is "" (the empty string). In C mode, comment-start is "/* " and comment-end is " */". The variable comment-padding species a string that the commenting commands should insert between the comment delimiter(s) and the comment text. The default, " ", species a single space. Alternatively, the value can be a number, which species that number of spaces, or nil, which means no spaces at all. The variable comment-multi-line controls how M-j and Auto Fill mode continue comments over multiple lines. See Section 23.5.2 [Multi-Line Comments], page 260. The variable comment-indent-function should contain a function that will be called to compute the alignment for a newly inserted comment or for aligning an existing comment. It is set dierently by various major modes. The function is called with no arguments, but with point at the beginning of the comment, or at the end of a line if a new comment is to be inserted. It should return the column in which the comment ought to start. For example, in Lisp mode, the indent hook function bases its decision on how many semicolons begin an existing comment, and on the code in the preceding lines.

23.6 Documentation Lookup

Emacs provides several features you can use to look up the documentation of functions, variables and commands that you plan to use in your program.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs 23.6.1 Info Documentation Lookup

262

For major modes that apply to languages which have documentation in Info, you can use C-h S (info-lookup-symbol) to view the Info documentation for a symbol used in the program. You specify the symbol with the minibuer; the default is the symbol appearing in the buer at point. For example, in C mode this looks for the symbol in the C Library Manual. The command only works if the appropriate manuals Info les are installed. The major mode determines where to look for documentation for the symbol which Info les to look in, and which indices to search. You can also use M-x info-lookup-file to look for documentation for a le name. If you use C-h S in a major mode that does not support it, it asks you to specify the symbol help mode. You should enter a command such as c-mode that would select a major mode which C-h S does support. 23.6.2 Man Page Lookup On Unix, the main form of on-line documentation was the manual page or man page. In the GNU operating system, we aim to replace man pages with better-organized manuals that you can browse with Info (see Section 7.7 [Misc Help], page 44). This process is not nished, so it is still useful to read manual pages. You can read the man page for an operating system command, library function, or system call, with the M-x man command. This prompts for a topic, with completion (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29), and runs the man program to format the corresponding man page. If the system permits, it runs man asynchronously, so that you can keep on editing while the page is being formatted. The result goes in a buer named *Man topic *. These buers use a special major mode, Man mode, that facilitates scrolling and jumping to other manual pages. For details, type C-h m while in a Man mode buer. Each man page belongs to one of ten or more sections, each named by a digit or by a digit and a letter. Sometimes there are man pages with the same name in different sections. To read a man page from a specic section, type topic (section ) or section topic when M-x manual-entry prompts for the topic. For example, the man page for the C library function chmod is in section 2, but there is a shell command of the same name, whose man page is in section 1; to view the former, type M-x manual-entry RET chmod(2) RET. If you do not specify a section, M-x man normally displays only the rst man page found. On some systems, the man program accepts a -a command-line option, which tells it to display all the man pages for the specied topic. To make use of this, change the value of the variable Man-switches to "-a". Then, in the Man mode buer, you can type M-n and M-p to switch between man pages in dierent sections. The mode line shows how many manual pages are available. An alternative way of reading manual pages is the M-x woman command. Unlike M-x man, it does not run any external programs to format and display the man pages; the formatting is done by Emacs, so it works on systems such as MS-Windows where the man program may be unavailable. It prompts for a man page, and displays it in a buer named *WoMan section topic .

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

263

M-x woman computes the completion list for manpages the rst time you invoke the command. With a numeric argument, it recomputes this list; this is useful if you add or delete manual pages. If you type a name of a manual page and M-x woman nds that several manual pages by the same name exist in dierent sections, it pops up a window with possible candidates asking you to choose one of them. For more information about setting up and using M-x woman, see the WoMan Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs. 23.6.3 Emacs Lisp Documentation Lookup When editing Emacs Lisp code, you can use the commands C-h f (describefunction) and C-h v (describe-variable) to view the built-in documentation for the Lisp functions and variables that you want to use. See Section 7.2 [Name Help], page 40. Eldoc is a buer-local minor mode that helps with looking up Lisp documention. When it is enabled, the echo area displays some useful information whenever there is a Lisp function or variable at point; for a function, it shows the argument list, and for a variable it shows the rst line of the variables documentation string. To toggle Eldoc mode, type M-x eldoc-mode. Eldoc mode can be used with the Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction major modes.

23.7 Hideshow minor mode

Hideshow mode is a buer-local minor mode that allows you to selectively display portions of a program, which are referred to as blocks. Type M-x hs-minor-mode to toggle this minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). When you use Hideshow mode to hide a block, the block disappears from the screen, to be replaced by an ellipsis (three periods in a row). Just what constitutes a block depends on the major mode. In C mode and related modes, blocks are delimited by braces, while in Lisp mode they are delimited by parentheses. Multiline comments also count as blocks. Hideshow mode provides the following commands: C-c @ C-h C-c @ C-s C-c @ C-c S-Mouse-2 C-c @ C-M-h Hide all top-level blocks (hs-hide-all). C-c @ C-M-s Show all blocks in the buer (hs-show-all). C-c @ C-l Hide all blocks n levels below this block (hs-hide-level). These variables can be used to customize Hideshow mode: Hide the current block (hs-hide-block). Show the current block (hs-show-block). Either hide or show the current block (hs-toggle-hiding). Toggle hiding for the block you click on (hs-mouse-toggle-hiding).

Chapter 23: Editing Programs hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all If non-nil, C-c @ C-M-h (hs-hide-all) hides comments too.

264

hs-isearch-open This variable species the conditions under which incremental search should unhide a hidden block when matching text occurs within the block. Its value should be either code (unhide only code blocks), comment (unhide only comments), t (unhide both code blocks and comments), or nil (unhide neither code blocks nor comments). The default value is code.

23.8 Completion for Symbol Names

Completion is normally done in the minibuer (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29), but you can also complete symbol names in ordinary Emacs buers. In programming language modes, type C-M-i or M-TAB to complete the partial symbol before point. On graphical displays, the M-TAB key is usually reserved by the window manager for switching graphical windows, so you should type C-M-i or ESC TAB instead. In most programming language modes, C-M-i (or M-TAB) invokes the command completion-at-point, which generates its completion list in a exible way. If Semantic mode is enabled, it tries to use the Semantic parser data for completion (see Section 23.10 [Semantic], page 265). If Semantic mode is not enabled or fails at performing completion, it tries to complete using the selected tags table (see Section 25.3 [Tags], page 311). If in Emacs Lisp mode, it performs completion using the function, variable, or property names dened in the current Emacs session. In all other respects, in-buer symbol completion behaves like minibuer completion. For instance, if Emacs cannot complete to a unique symbol, it displays a list of completion alternatives in another window. See Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29. In Text mode and related modes, M-TAB completes words based on the spellcheckers dictionary. See Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112.

23.9 Glasses minor mode

Glasses mode is a buer-local minor mode that makes it easier to read mixedcase (or CamelCase) symbols like unReadableSymbol, by altering how they are displayed. By default, it displays extra underscores between each lower-case letter and the following capital letter. This does not alter the buer text, only how it is displayed. To toggle Glasses mode, type M-x glasses-mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). When Glasses mode is enabled, the minor mode indicator o^o appears in the mode line. For more information about Glasses mode, type C-h P glasses RET.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

265

23.10 Semantic
Semantic is a package that provides language-aware editing commands based on source code parsers. This section provides a brief description of Semantic; for full details, see the Semantic Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs. Most of the language aware features in Emacs, such as Font Lock mode (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80), rely on rules of thumb2 that usually give good results but are never completely exact. In contrast, the parsers used by Semantic have an exact understanding of programming language syntax. This allows Semantic to provide search, navigation, and completion commands that are powerful and precise. To begin using Semantic, type M-x semantic-mode or click on the menu item named Source Code Parsers (Semantic) in the Tools menu. This enables Semantic mode, a global minor mode. When Semantic mode is enabled, Emacs automatically attempts to parses each le you visit. Currently, Semantic understands C, C++, Scheme, Javascript, Java, HTML, and Make. Within each parsed buer, the following commands are available: C-c , j C-c , J C-c , SPC Prompt for the name of a function dened in the current le, and move point there (semantic-complete-jump-local). Prompt for the name of a function dened in any le Emacs has parsed, and move point there (semantic-complete-jump). Display a list of possible completions for the symbol at point (semantic-complete-analyze-inline). This also activates a set of special key bindings for choosing a completion: RET accepts the current completion, M-n and M-p cycle through possible completions, TAB completes as far as possible and then cycles, and C-g or any other key aborts completion. Display a list of the possible completions of the symbol at point, in another window (semantic-analyze-possible-completions).

C-c , l

In addition to the above commands, the Semantic package provides a variety of other ways to make use of parser information. For instance, you can use it to display a list of completions when Emacs is idle.

23.11 Other Features Useful for Editing Programs

Some Emacs commands that arent designed specically for editing programs are useful for that nonetheless. The Emacs commands that operate on words, sentences and paragraphs are useful for editing code. Most symbols names contain words (see Section 22.1 [Words], page 214), while sentences can be found in strings and comments (see Section 22.2 [Sentences], page 215). As for paragraphs, they are dened in most programming language modes to begin and end at blank lines (see Section 22.3 [Paragraphs],
2

Regular expressions and syntax tables.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

266

page 216). Therefore, judicious use of blank lines to make the program clearer will also provide useful chunks of text for the paragraph commands to work on. Auto Fill mode, if enabled in a programming language major mode, indents the new lines which it creates. Electric Layout mode (M-x electric-layout-mode) is a global minor mode that automatically inserts newlines when you type certain characters; for example, {, } and ; in Javascript mode. Apart from Hideshow mode (see Section 23.7 [Hideshow], page 263), another way to selectively display parts of a program is to use the selective display feature (see Section 11.17 [Selective Display], page 85). Programming modes often also support Outline minor mode (see Section 22.8 [Outline Mode], page 224), which can be used with the Foldout package (see Section 22.8.5 [Foldout], page 228).

23.12 C and Related Modes

This section gives a brief description of the special features available in C, C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL, Pike and AWK modes. (These are called C mode and related modes.) For more details, see the CC mode Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs. 23.12.1 C Mode Motion Commands This section describes commands for moving point, in C mode and related modes. C-M-a C-M-e Move point to the beginning or end of the current function or top-level denition. In languages with enclosing scopes (such as C++s classes) the current function is the immediate one, possibly inside a scope. Otherwise it is the one dened by the least enclosing braces. (By contrast, beginning-of-defun and end-of-defun search for braces in column zero.) See Section 23.2.2 [Moving by Defuns], page 251. Move point back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark behind. A prex argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument, move point forward to the end of the containing preprocessor conditional. #elif is equivalent to #else followed by #if, so the function will stop at a #elif when going backward, but not when going forward. C-c C-p Move point back over a preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark behind. A prex argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument, move forward. Move point forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark behind. A prex argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument, move backward. Move point to the beginning of the innermost C statement (cbeginning-of-statement). If point is already at the beginning of

C-c C-u

C-c C-n

M-a

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

267

a statement, move to the beginning of the preceding statement. With prex argument n, move back n 1 statements. In comments or in strings which span more than one line, this command moves by sentences instead of statements. M-e Move point to the end of the innermost C statement or sentence; like M-a except that it moves in the other direction (c-end-ofstatement).

23.12.2 Electric C Characters In C mode and related modes, certain printing characters are electricin addition to inserting themselves, they also reindent the current line, and optionally also insert newlines. The electric characters are {, }, :, #, ;, ,, <, >, /, *, (, and ). You might nd electric indentation inconvenient if you are editing chaotically indented code. If you are new to CC Mode, you might nd it disconcerting. You can toggle electric action with the command C-c C-l; when it is enabled, /l appears in the mode line after the mode name: C-c C-l Toggle electric action (c-toggle-electric-state). With a positive prex argument, this command enables electric action, with a negative one it disables it.

Electric characters insert newlines only when, in addition to the electric state, the auto-newline feature is enabled (indicated by /la in the mode line after the mode name). You can turn this feature on or o with the command C-c C-a: C-c C-a Toggle the auto-newline feature (c-toggle-auto-newline). With a prex argument, this command turns the auto-newline feature on if the argument is positive, and o if it is negative.

Usually the CC Mode style congures the exact circumstances in which Emacs inserts auto-newlines. You can also congure this directly. See Section Custom Auto-newlines in The CC Mode Manual . 23.12.3 Hungry Delete Feature in C If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can use hungry deletion. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace either before point or after point in a single operation. Whitespace here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or preprocessor commands. C-c C-DEL C-c DEL Delete the entire block of whitespace preceding point (c-hungrydelete-backwards).

C-c C-d C-c C-DELETE C-c DELETE Delete the entire block of whitespace after point (c-hungry-deleteforward).

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

268

As an alternative to the above commands, you can enable hungry delete mode. When this feature is enabled (indicated by /h in the mode line after the mode name), a single DEL deletes all preceding whitespace, not just one space, and a single C-c C-d (but not plain DELETE) deletes all following whitespace. M-x c-toggle-hungry-state Toggle the hungry-delete feature (c-toggle-hungry-state). With a prex argument, this command turns the hungry-delete feature on if the argument is positive, and o if it is negative. The variable c-hungry-delete-key controls whether the hungry-delete feature is enabled. 23.12.4 Other Commands for C Mode C-c C-w M-x subword-mode Enable (or disable) subword mode. In subword mode, Emacss word commands recognize upper case letters in StudlyCapsIdentifiers as word boundaries. This is indicated by the ag /w on the mode line after the mode name (e.g. C/law). You can even use M-x subword-mode in non-CC Mode buers. In the GNU project, we recommend using underscores to separate words within an identier in C or C++, rather than using case distinctions. M-x c-context-line-break This command inserts a line break and indents the new line in a manner appropriate to the context. In normal code, it does the work of C-j (newline-and-indent), in a C preprocessor line it additionally inserts a \ at the line break, and within comments its like M-j (cindent-new-comment-line). c-context-line-break isnt bound to a key by default, but it needs a binding to be useful. The following code will bind it to C-j. We use c-initialization-hook here to make sure the keymap is loaded before we try to change it. (defun my-bind-clb () (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-j" c-context-line-break)) (add-hook c-initialization-hook my-bind-clb) C-M-h M-q Put mark at the end of a function denition, and put point at the beginning (c-mark-function). Fill a paragraph, handling C and C++ comments (c-fill-paragraph). If any part of the current line is a comment or within a comment, this command lls the comment or the paragraph of it that point is in, preserving the comment indentation and comment delimiters.

Chapter 23: Editing Programs C-c C-e

269

Run the C preprocessor on the text in the region, and show the result, which includes the expansion of all the macro calls (c-macro-expand). The buer text before the region is also included in preprocessing, for the sake of macros dened there, but the output from this part isnt shown. When you are debugging C code that uses macros, sometimes it is hard to gure out precisely how the macros expand. With this command, you dont have to gure it out; you can see the expansions. Insert or align \ characters at the ends of the lines of the region (cbackslash-region). This is useful after writing or editing a C macro denition. If a line already ends in \, this command adjusts the amount of whitespace before it. Otherwise, it inserts a new \. However, the last line in the region is treated specially; no \ is inserted on that line, and any \ there is deleted.

C-c C-\

M-x cpp-highlight-buffer Highlight parts of the text according to its preprocessor conditionals. This command displays another buer named *CPP Edit*, which serves as a graphic menu for selecting how to display particular kinds of conditionals and their contents. After changing various settings, click on [A]pply these settings (or go to that buer and type a) to rehighlight the C mode buer accordingly. C-c C-s Display the syntactic information about the current source line (cshow-syntactic-information). This information directs how the line is indented.

M-x cwarn-mode M-x global-cwarn-mode CWarn minor mode highlights certain suspicious C and C++ constructions: Assignments inside expressions. Semicolon following immediately after if, for, and while (except after a do ... while statement); C++ functions with reference parameters. You can enable the mode for one buer with the command M-x cwarn-mode, or for all suitable buers with the command M-x global-cwarn-mode or by customizing the variable globalcwarn-mode. You must also enable Font Lock mode to make it work. M-x hide-ifdef-mode Hide-ifdef minor mode hides selected code within #if and #ifdef preprocessor blocks. If you change the variable hide-ifdef-shadow to t, Hide-ifdef minor mode shadows preprocessor blocks by displaying

Chapter 23: Editing Programs

270

them with a less prominent face, instead of hiding them entirely. See the documentation string of hide-ifdef-mode for more information. M-x ff-find-related-file Find a le related in a special way to the le visited by the current buer. Typically this will be the header le corresponding to a C/C++ source le, or vice versa. The variable ff-related-file-alist species how to compute related le names.

23.13 Asm Mode

Asm mode is a major mode for editing les of assembler code. It denes these commands: TAB C-j : ; tab-to-tab-stop. Insert a newline and then indent using tab-to-tab-stop. Insert a colon and then remove the indentation from before the label preceding colon. Then do tab-to-tab-stop. Insert or align a comment.

The variable asm-comment-char species which character starts comments in assembler syntax.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

271

24 Compiling and Testing Programs

The previous chapter discusses the Emacs commands that are useful for making changes in programs. This chapter deals with commands that assist in the process of compiling and testing programs.

24.1 Running Compilations under Emacs

Emacs can run compilers for languages such as C and Fortran, feeding the compilation log into an Emacs buer. It can also parse the error messages and show you where the errors occurred. M-x compile Run a compiler asynchronously under Emacs, with error messages going to the *compilation* buer. M-x recompile Invoke a compiler with the same command as in the last invocation of M-x compile. M-x kill-compilation Kill the running compilation subprocess. To run make or another compilation command, type M-x compile. This reads a shell command line using the minibuer, and then executes the command by running a shell as a subprocess (or inferior process ) of Emacs. The output is inserted in a buer named *compilation*. The current buers default directory is used as the working directory for the execution of the command; normally, therefore, compilation takes place in this directory. The default compilation command is make -k, which is usually correct for programs compiled using the make utility (the -k ag tells make to continue compiling as much as possible after an error). See Section Make in GNU Make Manual . If you have done M-x compile before, the command that you specied is automatically stored in the variable compile-command; this is used as the default the next time you type M-x compile. A le can also specify a le-local value for compile-command (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). Starting a compilation displays the *compilation* buer in another window but does not select it. While the compilation is running, the word run is shown in the major mode indicator for the *compilation* buer, and the word Compiling appears in all mode lines. You do not have to keep the *compilation* buer visible while compilation is running; it continues in any case. When the compilation ends, for whatever reason, the mode line of the *compilation* buer changes to say exit (followed by the exit code: [0] for a normal exit), or signal (if a signal terminated the process). If you want to watch the compilation transcript as it appears, switch to the *compilation* buer and move point to the end of the buer. When point is at the end, new compilation output is inserted above point, which remains at the end. Otherwise, point remains xed while compilation output is added at the end of the buer.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

272

If you change the variable compilation-scroll-output to a non-nil value, the *compilation* buer scrolls automatically to follow the output. If the value is first-error, scrolling stops when the rst error appears, leaving point at that error. For any other non-nil value, scrolling continues until there is no more output. To rerun the last compilation with the same command, type M-x recompile. This reuses the compilation command from the last invocation of M-x compile. It also reuses the *compilation* buer and starts the compilation in its default directory, which is the directory in which the previous compilation was started. Starting a new compilation also kills any compilation already running in *compilation*, as the buer can only handle one compilation at any time. However, M-x compile asks for conrmation before actually killing a compilation that is running. You can also kill the compilation process with M-x kill-compilation. To run two compilations at once, start the rst one, then rename the *compilation* buer (perhaps using rename-uniquely; see Section 16.3 [Misc Buer], page 152), then switch buers and start the other compilation. This will create a new *compilation* buer. You can control the environment passed to the compilation command with the variable compilation-environment. Its value is a list of environment variable settings; each element should be a string of the form "envvarname =value ". These environment variable settings override the usual ones.

24.2 Compilation Mode

The *compilation* buer uses a major mode called Compilation mode. Compilation mode turns each error message in the buer into a hyperlink; you can move point to it and type RET, or click on it with the mouse (see Section 18.3 [Mouse References], page 167), to visit the locus of the error message in a separate window. The locus is the specic position in a le where that error occurred. If you change the variable compilation-auto-jump-to-first-error to a nonnil value, Emacs automatically visits the locus of the rst error message that appears in the *compilation* buer. Compilation mode provides the following additional commands. These commands can also be used in *grep* buers, where the hyperlinks are search matches rather than error messages (see Section 24.4 [Grep Searching], page 275). M-g M-n M-g n C-x M-g M-p M-g p M-n M-p

Visit the locus of the next error message or match (next-error). Visit the locus of the previous error message or match (previouserror). Move point to the next error message or match, without visiting its locus (compilation-next-error). Move point to the previous error message or match, without visiting its locus (compilation-previous-error).

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs M-} M-{ C-c C-f

273

Move point to the next error message or match occurring in a dierent le (compilation-next-file). Move point to the previous error message or match occurring in a dierent le (compilation-previous-file). Toggle Next Error Follow minor mode, which makes cursor motion in the compilation buer produce automatic source display.

To visit errors sequentially, type C-x (next-error), or equivalently M-g M-n or M-g n. This command can be invoked from any buer, not just a Compilation mode buer. The rst time you invoke it after a compilation, it visits the locus of the rst error message. Each subsequent C-x visits the next error, in a similar fashion. If you visit a specic error with RET or a mouse click in the *compilation* buer, subsequent C-x commands advance from there. When C-x nds no more error messages to visit, it signals an error. C-u C-x starts again from the beginning of the compilation buer, and visits the rst locus. M-g M-p or M-g p (previous-error) iterates through errors in the opposite direction. The next-error and previous-error commands dont just act on the errors or matches listed in *compilation* and *grep* buers; they also know how to iterate through error or match lists produced by other commands, such as M-x occur (see Section 12.10 [Other Repeating Search], page 107). If you are already in a buer containing error messages or matches, those are the ones that are iterated through; otherwise, Emacs looks for a buer containing error messages or matches amongst the windows of the selected frame, then for one that next-error or previouserror previously iterated through, and nally amongst all other buers. If the buer chosen for iterating through is not currently displayed in a window, it will be displayed. By default, the next-error and previous-error commands skip less important messages. The variable compilation-skip-threshold controls this. The default value, 1, means to skip anything less important than a warning. A value of 2 means to skip anything less important than an error, while 0 means not to skip any messages. When Emacs visits the locus of an error message, it momentarily highlights the relevant source line. The duration of this highlight is determined by the variable next-error-highlight. If the *compilation* buer is shown in a window with a left fringe (see Section 11.14 [Fringes], page 83), the locus-visiting commands put an arrow in the fringe, pointing to the current error message. If the window has no left fringe, such as on a text terminal, these commands scroll the window so that the current message is at the top of the window. If you change the variable compilationcontext-lines to an integer value n, these commands scroll the window so that the current error message is n lines from the top, whether or not there is a fringe; the default value, nil, gives the behavior described above. To parse messages from the compiler, Compilation mode uses the variable compilation-error-regexp-alist which lists various error message formats and

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

274

tells Emacs how to extract the locus from each. A similar variable, grep-regexpalist, tells Emacs how to parse output from a grep command (see Section 24.4 [Grep Searching], page 275). Compilation mode also denes the keys SPC and DEL to scroll by screenfuls; M-n (compilation-next-error) and M-p (compilation-previous-error) to move to the next or previous error message; and M-{ (compilation-next-file) and M-} (compilation-previous-file) to move to the next or previous error message for a dierent source le. You can type C-c C-f to toggle Next Error Follow mode. In this minor mode, ordinary cursor motion in the compilation buer automatically updates the source buer, i.e. moving the cursor over an error message causes the locus of that error to be displayed. The features of Compilation mode are also available in a minor mode called Compilation Minor mode. This lets you parse error messages in any buer, not just a normal compilation output buer. Type M-x compilation-minor-mode to enable the minor mode. For instance, in an Rlogin buer (see Section 31.3.10 [Remote Host], page 411), Compilation minor mode automatically accesses remote source les by FTP (see Section 15.1 [File Names], page 124).

24.3 Subshells for Compilation

The M-x compile command uses a shell to run the compilation command, but species the option for a noninteractive shell. This means, in particular, that the shell should start with no prompt. If you nd your usual shell prompt making an unsightly appearance in the *compilation* buer, it means you have made a mistake in your shells init le by setting the prompt unconditionally. (This init le may be named .bashrc, .profile, .cshrc, .shrc, etc., depending on what shell you use.) The shell init le should set the prompt only if there already is a prompt. Heres how to do it in bash: if [ "${PS1+set}" = set ] then PS1=... fi And heres how to do it in csh: if ($?prompt) set prompt = ... Emacs does not expect a compiler process to launch asynchronous subprocesses; if it does, and they keep running after the main compiler process has terminated, Emacs may kill them or their output may not arrive in Emacs. To avoid this problem, make the main compilation process wait for its subprocesses to nish. In a shell script, you can do this using $! and wait, like this: (sleep 10; echo 2nd)& pid=$! # Record pid of subprocess echo first message wait $pid # Wait for subprocess If the background process does not output to the compilation buer, so you only need to prevent it from being killed when the main compilation process terminates, this is sucient:

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs nohup command ; sleep 1

275

24.4 Searching with Grep under Emacs

Just as you can run a compiler from Emacs and then visit the lines with compilation errors, you can also run grep and then visit the lines on which matches were found. This works by treating the matches reported by grep as if they were errors. The output buer uses Grep mode, which is a variant of Compilation mode (see Section 24.2 [Compilation Mode], page 272). M-x grep M-x lgrep Run grep asynchronously under Emacs, listing matching lines in the buer named *grep*.

M-x grep-find M-x find-grep M-x rgrep Run grep via find, and collect output in the *grep* buer. M-x zrgrep Run zgrep and collect output in the *grep* buer. M-x kill-grep Kill the running grep subprocess. To run grep, type M-x grep, then enter a command line that species how to run grep. Use the same arguments you would give grep when running it normally: a grep-style regexp (usually in single-quotes to quote the shells special characters) followed by le names, which may use wildcards. If you specify a prex argument for M-x grep, it nds the tag (see Section 25.3 [Tags], page 311) in the buer around point, and puts that into the default grep command. Your command need not simply run grep; you can use any shell command that produces output in the same format. For instance, you can chain grep commands, like this: grep -nH -e foo *.el | grep bar | grep toto The output from grep goes in the *grep* buer. You can nd the corresponding lines in the original les using C-x , RET, and so forth, just like compilation errors. Some grep programs accept a --color option to output special markers around matches for the purpose of highlighting. You can make use of this feature by setting grep-highlight-matches to t. When displaying a match in the source buer, the exact match will be highlighted, instead of the entire source line. The command M-x grep-find (also available as M-x find-grep) is similar to M-x grep, but it supplies a dierent initial default for the commandone that runs both find and grep, so as to search every le in a directory tree. See also the find-grep-dired command, in Section 27.15 [Dired and Find], page 342. The commands M-x lgrep (local grep) and M-x rgrep (recursive grep) are more user-friendly versions of grep and grep-find, which prompt separately for the regular expression to match, the les to search, and the base directory for the search. Case sensitivity of the search is controlled by the current value of case-

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

276

fold-search. The command M-x zrgrep is similar to M-x rgrep, but it calls zgrep instead of grep to search the contents of gzipped les. These commands build the shell commands based on the variables greptemplate (for lgrep) and grep-find-template (for rgrep). The les to search can use aliases dened in the variable grep-files-aliases. Directories listed in the variable grep-find-ignored-directories are automatically skipped by M-x rgrep. The default value includes the data directories used by various version control systems.

24.5 Finding Syntax Errors On The Fly

Flymake mode is a minor mode that performs on-the-y syntax checking for many programming and markup languages, including C, C++, Perl, HTML, and TEX/LaTEX. It is somewhat analogous to Flyspell mode, which performs spell checking for ordinary human languages in a similar fashion (see Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112). As you edit a le, Flymake mode runs an appropriate syntax checking tool in the background, using a temporary copy of the buer. It then parses the error and warning messages, and highlights the erroneous lines in the buer. The syntax checking tool used depends on the language; for example, for C/C++ les this is usually the C compiler. Flymake can also use build tools such as make for checking complicated projects. To enable Flymake mode, type M-x flymake-mode. You can jump to the errors that it nds by using M-x flymake-goto-next-error and M-x flymake-goto-prev-error. To display any error messages associated with the current line, type M-x flymake-display-err-menu-for-current-line. For more details about using Flymake, see the Flymake Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs.

24.6 Running Debuggers Under Emacs

The GUD (Grand Unied Debugger) library provides an Emacs interface to a wide variety of symbolic debuggers. It can run the GNU Debugger (GDB), as well as DBX, SDB, XDB, Perls debugging mode, the Python debugger PDB, and the Java Debugger JDB. Emacs provides a special interface to GDB, which uses extra Emacs windows to display the state of the debugged program. See Section 24.6.5 [GDB Graphical Interface], page 281. Emacs also has a built-in debugger for Emacs Lisp programs. See Section The Lisp Debugger in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . 24.6.1 Starting GUD There are several commands for starting a debugger subprocess, each corresponding to a particular debugger program.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs M-x gdb

277

Run GDB as a subprocess, and interact with it via an IDE-like Emacs interface. See Section 24.6.5 [GDB Graphical Interface], page 281, for more information about this command. Run GDB, using a GUD interaction buer for input and output to the GDB subprocess (see Section 24.6.2 [Debugger Operation], page 277). If such a buer already exists, switch to it; otherwise, create the buer and switch to it. The other commands in this list do the same, for other debugger programs.

M-x gud-gdb

M-x perldb Run the Perl interpreter in debug mode. M-x jdb M-x pdb M-x dbx M-x xdb M-x sdb Run the Java debugger. Run the Python debugger. Run the DBX debugger. Run the XDB debugger. Run the SDB debugger.

Each of these commands reads a command line to invoke the debugger, using the minibuer. The minibuers initial contents contain the standard executable name and options for the debugger, and sometimes also a guess for the name of the executable le you want to debug. Shell wildcards and variables are not allowed in this command line. Emacs assumes that the rst command argument which does not start with a - is the executable le name. Tramp provides a facility for remote debugging, whereby both the debugger and the program being debugged are on the same remote host. See Section Running a debugger on a remote host in The Tramp Manual , for details. This is separate from GDBs remote debugging feature, where the program and the debugger run on dierent machines (see Section Debugging Remote Programs in The GNU debugger ). 24.6.2 Debugger Operation The GUD interaction buer is an Emacs buer which is used to send text commands to a debugger subprocess, and record its output. This is the basic interface for interacting with a debugger, used by M-x gud-gdb and other commands listed in the preceding section. The M-x gdb command extends this interface with additional specialized buers for controlling breakpoints, stack frames, and other aspects of the debugger state (see Section 24.6.5 [GDB Graphical Interface], page 281). The GUD interaction buer uses a variant of Shell mode, so the Emacs commands dened by Shell mode are available (see Section 31.3.3 [Shell Mode], page 403). Completion is available for most debugger commands (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29), and you can use the usual Shell mode history commands to repeat them. See the next section for special commands that can be used in the GUD interaction buer.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

278

As you debug a program, Emacs displays the relevant source les by visiting them in Emacs buers, with an arrow in the left fringe indicating the current execution line. (On a text terminal, the arrow appears as =>, overlaid on the rst two text columns.) Moving point in such a buer does not move the arrow. You are free to edit these source les, but note that inserting or deleting lines will throw o the arrows positioning, as Emacs has no way to gure out which edited source line corresponds to the line reported by the debugger subprocess. To update this information, you typically have to recompile and restart the program. GUD Tooltip mode is a global minor mode that adds tooltip support to GUD. To toggle this mode, type M-x gud-tooltip-mode. It is disabled by default. If enabled, you can move the mouse cursor over a variable to show its value in a tooltip (see Section 18.17 [Tooltips], page 178); this takes eect in the GUD interaction buer, and in all source buers with major modes listed in the variable gud-tooltipmodes. If the variable gud-tooltip-echo-area is non-nil, values are shown in the echo area instead of a tooltip. When using GUD Tooltip mode with M-x gud-gdb, you should note that displaying an expressions value in GDB can sometimes expand a macro, potentially causing side eects in the debugged program. If you use the M-x gdb interface, this problem does not occur, as there is special code to avoid side-eects; furthermore, you can display macro denitions associated with an identier when the program is not executing. 24.6.3 Commands of GUD GUD provides commands for setting and clearing breakpoints, selecting stack frames, and stepping through the program. C-x SPC Set a breakpoint on the source line that point is on.

C-x SPC (gud-break), when called in a source buer, sets a debugger breakpoint on the current source line. This command is available only after starting GUD. If you call it in a buer that is not associated with any debugger subprocess, it signals a error. The following commands are available both in the GUD interaction buer and globally, but with dierent key bindings. The keys starting with C-c are available only in the GUD interaction buer, while those starting with C-x C-a are available globally. Some of these commands are also available via the tool bar; some are not supported by certain debuggers. C-c C-l C-x C-a C-l Display, in another window, the last source line referred to in the GUD interaction buer (gud-refresh). C-c C-s C-x C-a C-s Execute the next single line of code (gud-step). If the line contains a function call, execution stops after entering the called function.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs C-c C-n C-x C-a C-n

279

Execute the next single line of code, stepping across function calls without stopping inside the functions (gud-next). C-c C-i C-x C-a C-i Execute a single machine instruction (gud-stepi). C-c C-p C-x C-a C-p Evaluate the expression at point (gud-print). If Emacs does not print the exact expression that you want, mark it as a region rst. C-c C-r C-x C-a C-r Continue execution without specifying any stopping point. The program will run until it hits a breakpoint, terminates, or gets a signal that the debugger is checking for (gud-cont). C-c C-d C-x C-a C-d Delete the breakpoint(s) on the current source line, if any (gudremove). If you use this command in the GUD interaction buer, it applies to the line where the program last stopped. C-c C-t C-x C-a C-t Set a temporary breakpoint on the current source line, if any (gudtbreak). If you use this command in the GUD interaction buer, it applies to the line where the program last stopped. C-c < C-x C-a < C-c > C-x C-a > C-c C-u C-x C-a C-u Continue execution to the current line (gud-until). The program will run until it hits a breakpoint, terminates, gets a signal that the debugger is checking for, or reaches the line on which the cursor currently sits. C-c C-f C-x C-a C-f Run the program until the selected stack frame returns or stops for some other reason (gud-finish). Select the next enclosing stack frame (gud-up). This is equivalent to the GDB command up. Select the next inner stack frame (gud-down). This is equivalent to the GDB command down.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs If you are using GDB, these additional key bindings are available: C-x C-a C-j

280

Only useful in a source buer, gud-jump transfers the programs execution point to the current line. In other words, the next line that the program executes will be the one where you gave the command. If the new execution line is in a dierent function from the previously one, GDB prompts for conrmation since the results may be bizarre. See the GDB manual entry regarding jump for details. TAB With GDB, complete a symbol name (gud-gdb-complete-command). This key is available only in the GUD interaction buer.

These commands interpret a numeric argument as a repeat count, when that makes sense. Because TAB serves as a completion command, you cant use it to enter a tab as input to the program you are debugging with GDB. Instead, type C-q TAB to enter a tab. 24.6.4 GUD Customization On startup, GUD runs one of the following hooks: gdb-mode-hook, if you are using GDB; dbx-mode-hook, if you are using DBX; sdb-mode-hook, if you are using SDB; xdb-mode-hook, if you are using XDB; perldb-mode-hook, for Perl debugging mode; pdb-mode-hook, for PDB; jdb-mode-hook, for JDB. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. The gud-def Lisp macro (see Section Dening Macros in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ) provides a convenient way to dene an Emacs command that sends a particular command string to the debugger, and set up a key binding for in the GUD interaction buer: (gud-def function cmdstring binding docstring ) This denes a command named function which sends cmdstring to the debugger process, and gives it the documentation string docstring. You can then use the command function in any buer. If binding is non-nil, gud-def also binds the command to C-c binding in the GUD buers mode and to C-x C-a binding generally. The command string cmdstring may contain certain %-sequences that stand for data to be lled in at the time function is called: %f The name of the current source le. If the current buer is the GUD buer, then the current source le is the le that the program stopped in. The number of the current source line. If the current buer is the GUD buer, then the current source line is the line that the program stopped in. In transient-mark-mode the text in the region, if it is active. Otherwise the text of the C lvalue or function-call expression at or adjacent to point.

%l

%e

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs %a %p The text of the hexadecimal address at or adjacent to point.

281

The numeric argument of the called function, as a decimal number. If the command is used without a numeric argument, %p stands for the empty string. If you dont use %p in the command string, the command you dene ignores any numeric argument.

%d %c

The name of the directory of the current source le. Fully qualied class name derived from the expression surrounding point (jdb only).

24.6.5 GDB Graphical Interface The command M-x gdb starts GDB in an IDE-like interface, with specialized buers for controlling breakpoints, stack frames, and other aspects of the debugger state. It also provides additional ways to control the debugging session with the mouse, such as clicking in the fringe of a source buer to set a breakpoint there. To run GDB using just the GUD interaction buer interface, without these additional features, use M-x gud-gdb (see Section 24.6.1 [Starting GUD], page 276). You must use this if you want to debug multiple programs within one Emacs session, as that is currently unsupported by M-x gdb. Internally, M-x gdb informs GDB that its screen size is unlimited; for correct operation, you must not change GDBs screen height and width values during the debugging session. 24.6.5.1 GDB User Interface Layout If the variable gdb-many-windows is nil (the default), M-x gdb normally displays only the GUD interaction buer. However, if the variable gdb-show-main is also non-nil, it starts with two windows: one displaying the GUD interaction buer, and the other showing the source for the main function of the program you are debugging. If gdb-many-windows is non-nil, then M-x gdb displays the following frame layout:
+--------------------------------+--------------------------------+ | GUD interaction buffer | Locals/Registers buffer | |--------------------------------+--------------------------------+ | Primary Source buffer | I/O buffer for debugged pgm | |--------------------------------+--------------------------------+ | Stack buffer | Breakpoints/Threads buffer | +--------------------------------+--------------------------------+

However, if gdb-use-separate-io-buffer is nil, the I/O buer does not appear and the primary source buer occupies the full width of the frame. If you ever change the window layout, you can restore the many windows layout by typing M-x gdb-restore-windows. To toggle between the many windows layout and a simple layout with just the GUD interaction buer and a source le, type M-x gdb-many-windows.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

282

You may also specify additional GDB-related buers to display, either in the same frame or a dierent one. Select the buers you want by typing M-x gdb-display-buffertype -buffer or M-x gdb-frame-buffertype -buffer, where buertype is the relevant buer type, such as breakpoints. You can do the same with the menu bar, with the GDB-Windows and GDB-Frames sub-menus of the GUD menu. When you nish debugging, kill the GUD interaction buer with C-x k, which will also kill all the buers associated with the session. However you need not do this if, after editing and re-compiling your source code within Emacs, you wish to continue debugging. When you restart execution, GDB automatically nds the new executable. Keeping the GUD interaction buer has the advantage of keeping the shell history as well as GDBs breakpoints. You do need to check that the breakpoints in recently edited source les are still in the right places. 24.6.5.2 Source Buers Mouse-1 (in fringe) Set or clear a breakpoint on that line. C-Mouse-1 (in fringe) Enable or disable a breakpoint on that line. Mouse-3 (in fringe) Continue execution to that line. C-Mouse-3 (in fringe) Jump to that line. On a graphical display, you can click Mouse-1 in the fringe of a source buer, to set a breakpoint on that line (see Section 11.14 [Fringes], page 83). A red dot appears in the fringe, where you clicked. If a breakpoint already exists there, the click removes it. A C-Mouse-1 click enables or disables an existing breakpoint; a breakpoint that is disabled, but not unset, is indicated by a gray dot. On a text terminal, or when fringes are disabled, enabled breakpoints are indicated with a B character in the left margin of the window. Disabled breakpoints are indicated with b. (The margin is only displayed if a breakpoint is present.) A solid arrow in the left fringe of a source buer indicates the line of the innermost frame where the debugged program has stopped. A hollow arrow indicates the current execution line of a higher-level frame. If you drag the arrow in the fringe with Mouse-1, that causes execution to advance to the line where you release the button. Alternatively, you can click Mouse-3 in the fringe to advance to that line. You can click C-Mouse-3 in the fringe to jump to that line without executing the intermediate lines. This command allows you to go backwards, which can be useful for running through code that has already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail. 24.6.5.3 Breakpoints Buer The GDB Breakpoints buer shows the breakpoints, watchpoints and catchpoints in the debugger session. See Section Breakpoints in The GNU debugger . It

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

283

provides the following commands, which mostly apply to the current breakpoint (the breakpoint which point is on): SPC Enable/disable current breakpoint (gdb-toggle-breakpoint). On a graphical display, this changes the color of the dot in the fringe of the source buer at that line. The dot is red when the breakpoint is enabled, and gray when it is disabled. Delete the current breakpoint (gdb-delete-breakpoint). Visit the source line for the current breakpoint (gdb-gotobreakpoint). Visit the source line for the breakpoint you click on.

D RET Mouse-2

When gdb-many-windows is non-nil, the GDB Breakpoints buer shares its window with the GDB Threads buer. To switch from one to the other click with Mouse-1 on the relevant button in the header line. If gdb-show-threads-bydefault is non-nil, the GDB Threads buer is the one shown by default. 24.6.5.4 Threads Buer The GDB Threads buer displays a summary of the threads in the debugged program. See Section Debugging programs with multiple threads in The GNU debugger . To select a thread, move point there and type RET (gdb-select-thread), or click on it with Mouse-2. This also displays the associated source buer, and updates the contents of the other GDB buers. You can customize variables under gdb-buffers group to select elds included in GDB Threads buer. gdb-thread-buffer-verbose-names Show long thread names like Thread 0x4e2ab70 (LWP 1983). gdb-thread-buffer-arguments Show arguments of thread top frames. gdb-thread-buffer-locations Show le information or library names. gdb-thread-buffer-addresses Show addresses for thread frames in threads buer. To view information for several threads simultaneously, use the following commands from the GDB Threads buer. d f l Display disassembly buer for the thread (gdb-display-disassembly-for-thread). at current line

Display the GDB Stack buer for the thread at current line (gdbdisplay-stack-for-thread). Display the GDB Locals buer for the thread at current line (gdbdisplay-locals-for-thread).

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs r

284

Display the GDB Registers buer for the thread at current line (gdbdisplay-registers-for-thread).

Their upper-case counterparts, D, F ,L and R, display the corresponding buer in a new frame. When you create a buer showing information about some specic thread, it becomes bound to that thread and keeps showing actual information while you debug your program. The mode indicator for each GDB buer shows the number of thread it is showing information about. The thread number is also included in the buer name of bound buers. Further commands are available in the GDB Threads buer which depend on the mode of GDB that is used for controlling execution of your program. See Section 24.6.5.8 [Multithreaded Debugging], page 286. 24.6.5.5 Stack Buer The GDB Stack buer displays a call stack, with one line for each of the nested subroutine calls (stack frames ) in the debugger session. See Section Backtraces in The GNU debugger . On graphical displays, the selected stack frame is indicated by an arrow in the fringe. On text terminals, or when fringes are disabled, the selected stack frame is displayed in reverse contrast. To select a stack frame, move point in its line and type RET (gdb-frames-select), or click Mouse-2 on it. Doing so also updates the Locals buer (described in the next section). 24.6.5.6 Other GDB Buers Locals Buer This buer displays the values of local variables of the current frame for simple data types (see Section Information on a frame in The GNU debugger ). Press RET or click Mouse-2 on the value if you want to edit it. Arrays and structures display their type only. With GDB 6.4 or later, you can examine the value of the local variable at point by typing RET, or with a Mouse-2 click. With earlier versions of GDB, use RET or Mouse-2 on the type description ([struct/union] or [array]). See Section 24.6.5.7 [Watch Expressions], page 285. Registers Buer This buer displays the values held by the registers (see Section Registers in The GNU debugger ). Press RET or click Mouse-2 on a register if you want to edit its value. With GDB 6.4 or later, recently changed register values display with font-lock-warning-face. Assembler Buer The assembler buer displays the current frame as machine code. An arrow points to the current instruction, and you can set and remove breakpoints as in a source buer. Breakpoint icons also appear in the fringe or margin.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

285

Memory Buer The memory buer lets you examine sections of program memory (see Section Examining memory in The GNU debugger ). Click Mouse-1 on the appropriate part of the header line to change the starting address or number of data items that the buer displays. Alternatively, use S or N respectively. Click Mouse-3 on the header line to select the display format or unit size for these data items. When gdb-many-windows is non-nil, the locals buer shares its window with the registers buer, just like breakpoints and threads buers. To switch from one to the other, click with Mouse-1 on the relevant button in the header line. 24.6.5.7 Watch Expressions If you want to see how a variable changes each time your program stops, move point into the variable name and click on the watch icon in the tool bar (gud-watch) or type C-x C-a C-w. If you specify a prex argument, you can enter the variable name in the minibuer. Each watch expression is displayed in the speedbar (see Section 18.9 [Speedbar], page 174). Complex data types, such as arrays, structures and unions are represented in a tree format. Leaves and simple data types show the name of the expression and its value and, when the speedbar frame is selected, display the type as a tooltip. Higher levels show the name, type and address value for pointers and just the name and type otherwise. Root expressions also display the frame address as a tooltip to help identify the frame in which they were dened. To expand or contract a complex data type, click Mouse-2 or press SPC on the tag to the left of the expression. Emacs asks for conrmation before expanding the expression if its number of immediate children exceeds the value of the variable gdb-max-children. To delete a complex watch expression, move point to the root expression in the speedbar and type D (gdb-var-delete). To edit a variable with a simple data type, or a simple element of a complex data type, move point there in the speedbar and type RET (gdb-edit-value). Or you can click Mouse-2 on a value to edit it. Either way, this reads the new value using the minibuer. If you set the variable gdb-show-changed-values to non-nil (the default value), Emacs uses font-lock-warning-face to highlight values that have recently changed and shadow face to make variables which have gone out of scope less noticeable. When a variable goes out of scope you cant edit its value. If the variable gdb-delete-out-of-scope is non-nil (the default value), Emacs automatically deletes watch expressions which go out of scope. Sometimes, when re-entering the same function, it may be useful to set this value to nil so that you dont need to recreate the watch expression. If the variable gdb-use-colon-colon-notation is non-nil, Emacs uses the function ::variable format. This allows the user to display watch expressions which share the same variable name. The default value is nil.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

286

To automatically raise the speedbar every time the display of watch expressions updates, set gdb-speedbar-auto-raise to non-nil. This can be useful if you are debugging with a full screen Emacs frame. 24.6.5.8 Multithreaded Debugging In GDBs all-stop mode, whenever your program stops, all execution threads stop. Likewise, whenever you restart the program, all threads start executing. See Section All-Stop Mode in The GNU debugger . For some multi-threaded targets, GDB supports a further mode of operation, called non-stop mode, in which you can examine stopped program threads in the debugger while other threads continue to execute freely. See Section Non-Stop Mode in The GNU debugger . Versions of GDB prior to 7.0 do not support non-stop mode, and it does not work on all targets. The variable gdb-non-stop-setting determines whether Emacs runs GDB in all-stop mode or non-stop mode. The default is t, which means it tries to use nonstop mode if that is available. If you change the value to nil, or if non-stop mode is unavailable, Emacs runs GDB in all-stop mode. The variable takes eect when Emacs begins a debugging session; if you change its value, you should restart any active debugging session. When a thread stops in non-stop mode, Emacs usually switches to that thread. If you dont want Emacs to do this switch if another stopped thread is already selected, change the variable gdb-switch-when-another-stopped to nil. Emacs can decide whether or not to switch to the stopped thread depending on the reason which caused the stop. Customize the variable gdb-switch-reasons to select the stop reasons which will cause a thread switch. The variable gdb-stopped-hooks allows you to execute your functions whenever some thread stops. In non-stop mode, you can switch between dierent modes for GUD execution control commands. Non-stop/A When gdb-gud-control-all-threads is t (the default value), interruption and continuation commands apply to all threads, so you can halt or continue all your threads with one command using gud-stopsubjob and gud-cont, respectively. The Go button is shown on the toolbar when at least one thread is stopped, whereas Stop button is shown when at least one thread is running. Non-stop/T When gdb-gud-control-all-threads is nil, only the current thread is stopped/continued. Go and Stop buttons on the GUD toolbar are shown depending on the state of current thread. You can change the current value of gdb-gud-control-all-threads from the tool bar or from GUD->GDB-MI menu. Stepping commands always apply to the current thread.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

287

In non-stop mode, you can interrupt/continue your threads without selecting them. Hitting i in threads buer interrupts thread under point, c continues it, s steps through. More such commands may be added in the future. Note that when you interrupt a thread, it stops with the signal received reason. If that reason is included in your gdb-switch-reasons (it is by default), Emacs will switch to that thread.

24.7 Executing Lisp Expressions

Emacs has major modes for several variants of Lisp. They use the same editing commands as other programming language modes (see Chapter 23 [Programs], page 249). In addition, they provide special commands for executing Lisp expressions. Emacs Lisp mode The mode for editing Emacs Lisp source les. It denes C-M-x to evaluate the current top-level Lisp expression. See Section 24.9 [Lisp Eval], page 288. Lisp Interaction mode The mode for an interactive Emacs Lisp session. It denes C-j to evaluate the expression before point and insert its value in the buer. See Section 24.10 [Lisp Interaction], page 290. Lisp mode The mode for editing source les of programs that run in Lisps other than Emacs Lisp. It denes C-M-x to evaluate the current top-level expression in an external Lisp. See Section 24.11 [External Lisp], page 290.

Inferior Lisp mode The mode for an interactive session with an external Lisp which is being run as a subprocess (or inferior process ) of Emacs. Scheme mode Like Lisp mode, but for Scheme programs. Inferior Scheme mode Like Inferior Lisp mode, but for Scheme.

24.8 Libraries of Lisp Code for Emacs

Emacs Lisp code is stored in les whose names conventionally end in .el. Such les are automatically visited in Emacs Lisp mode. Emacs Lisp code can be compiled into byte-code, which loads faster, takes up less space, and executes faster. By convention, compiled Emacs Lisp code goes in a separate le whose name ends in .elc. For example, the compiled code for foo.el goes in foo.elc. See Section Byte Compilation in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . To load an Emacs Lisp le, type M-x load-file. This command reads a le name using the minibuer, and executes the contents of that le as Emacs Lisp

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

288

code. It is not necessary to visit the le rst; this command reads the le directly from disk, not from an existing Emacs buer. If an Emacs Lisp le is installed in the Emacs Lisp load path (dened below), you can load it by typing M-x load-library, instead of using M-x load-file. The M-x load-library command prompts for a library name rather than a le name; it searches through each directory in the Emacs Lisp load path, trying to nd a le matching that library name. If the library name is foo , it tries looking for les named foo.elc, foo.el, and lastly just foo ; the rst one found is loaded. This command prefers .elc les over .el les because compiled les load and run faster. If it nds that lib.el is newer than lib.elc, it issues a warning, in case someone made changes to the .el le and forgot to recompile it, but loads the .elc le anyway. (Due to this behavior, you can save unnished edits to Emacs Lisp source les, and not recompile until your changes are ready for use.) Emacs Lisp programs usually load Emacs Lisp les using the load function. This is similar to load-library, but is lower-level and accepts additional arguments. See Section How Programs Do Loading in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . The Emacs Lisp load path is specied by the variable load-path. Its value should be a list of directory names (strings). These directories are searched, in the specied order, by the M-x load-library command, the lower-level load function, and other Emacs functions that nd Emacs Lisp libraries. A list entry in load-path can also have the special value nil, which stands for the current default directory, but it is almost always a bad idea to use this. (If you nd yourself wishing that nil were in the list, most likely what you really want is to use M-x load-file.) The default value of load-path is a list of directories where the Lisp code for Emacs itself is stored. If you have libraries of your own in another directory, you can add that directory to the load path. Unlike most other variables described in this manual, load-path cannot be changed via the Customize interface (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434), but you can add a directory to it by putting a line like this in your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461): (add-to-list load-path "/path/to/my/lisp/library") Some commands are autoloaded : when you run them, Emacs automatically loads the associated library rst. For instance, the M-x compile command (see Section 24.1 [Compilation], page 271) is autoloaded; if you call it, Emacs automatically loads the compile library rst. In contrast, the command M-x recompile is not autoloaded, so it is unavailable until you load the compile library. By default, Emacs refuses to load compiled Lisp les which were compiled with XEmacs, a modied versions of Emacsthey can cause Emacs to crash. Set the variable load-dangerous-libraries to t if you want to try loading them.

24.9 Evaluating Emacs Lisp Expressions

Emacs Lisp mode is the major mode for editing Emacs Lisp. Its mode command is M-x emacs-lisp-mode. Emacs provides several commands for evaluating Emacs Lisp expressions. You can use these commands in Emacs Lisp mode, to test your Emacs Lisp code as

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

289

it is being written. For example, after re-writing a function, you can evaluate the function denition to make it take eect for subsequent function calls. These commands are also available globally, and can be used outside Emacs Lisp mode. M-: C-x C-e Read a single Emacs Lisp expression in the minibuer, evaluate it, and print the value in the echo area (eval-expression). Evaluate the Emacs Lisp expression before point, and print the value in the echo area (eval-last-sexp).

C-M-x (in Emacs Lisp mode) M-x eval-defun Evaluate the defun containing or after point, and print the value in the echo area (eval-defun). M-x eval-region Evaluate all the Emacs Lisp expressions in the region. M-x eval-buffer Evaluate all the Emacs Lisp expressions in the buer. M-: (eval-expression) reads an expression using the minibuer, and evaluates it. (Before evaluating the expression, the current buer switches back to the buer that was current when you typed M-:, not the minibuer into which you typed the expression.) The command C-x C-e (eval-last-sexp) evaluates the Emacs Lisp expression preceding point in the buer, and displays the value in the echo area. When the result of an evaluation is an integer, you can type C-x C-e a second time to display the value of the integer result in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, and character). If M-: or C-x C-e is given a prex argument, it inserts the value into the current buer at point, rather than displaying it in the echo area. The arguments value does not matter. The eval-defun command is bound to C-M-x in Emacs Lisp mode. It evaluates the top-level Lisp expression containing or following point, and prints the value in the echo area. In this context, a top-level expression is referred to as a defun, but it need not be an actual defun (function denition). In particular, this command treats defvar expressions specially. Normally, evaluating a defvar expression does nothing if the variable it denes already has a value. But this command unconditionally resets the variable to the initial value specied by the defvar; this is convenient for debugging Emacs Lisp programs. defcustom and defface expressions are treated similarly. Note that the other commands documented in this section do not have this special feature. With a prex argument, C-M-x instruments the function denition for Edebug, the Emacs Lisp Debugger. See Section Instrumenting in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . The command M-x eval-region parses the text of the region as one or more Lisp expressions, evaluating them one by one. M-x eval-buffer is similar but evaluates the entire buer.

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

290

The options eval-expression-print-level and eval-expression-printlength control the maximum depth and length of lists to print in the result of the evaluation commands before abbreviating them. eval-expression-debug-onerror controls whether evaluation errors invoke the debugger when these commands are used; its default is t.

24.10 Lisp Interaction Buers

When Emacs starts up, it contains a buer named *scratch*, which is provided for evaluating Emacs Lisp expressions interactively. Its major mode is Lisp Interaction mode. You can also enable Lisp Interaction mode by typing M-x lisp-interaction-mode. In the *scratch* buer, and other Lisp Interaction mode buers, C-j (evalprint-last-sexp) evaluates the Lisp expression before point, and inserts the value at point. Thus, as you type expressions into the buer followed by C-j after each expression, the buer records a transcript of the evaluated expressions and their values. All other commands in Lisp Interaction mode are the same as in Emacs Lisp mode. At startup, the *scratch* buer contains a short message, in the form of a Lisp comment, that explains what it is for. This message is controlled by the variable initial-scratch-message, which should be either a string, or nil (which means to suppress the message). An alternative way of evaluating Emacs Lisp expressions interactively is to use Inferior Emacs Lisp mode, which provides an interface rather like Shell mode (see Section 31.3.3 [Shell Mode], page 403) for evaluating Emacs Lisp expressions. Type M-x ielm to create an *ielm* buer which uses this mode. For more information, see that commands documentation.

24.11 Running an External Lisp

Lisp mode is the major mode for editing programs written in general-purpose Lisp dialects, such as Common Lisp. Its mode command is M-x lisp-mode. Emacs uses Lisp mode automatically for les whose names end in .l, .lsp, or .lisp. You can run an external Lisp session as a subprocess or inferior process of Emacs, and pass expressions to it to be evaluated. To begin an external Lisp session, type M-x run-lisp. This runs the program named lisp, and sets it up so that both input and output go through an Emacs buer named *inferior-lisp*. To change the name of the Lisp program run by M-x run-lisp, change the variable inferior-lisp-program. The major mode for the *lisp* buer is Inferior Lisp mode, which combines the characteristics of Lisp mode and Shell mode (see Section 31.3.3 [Shell Mode], page 403). To send input to the Lisp session, go to the end of the *lisp* buer and type the input, followed by RET. Terminal output from the Lisp session is automatically inserted in the buer. When you edit a Lisp program in Lisp mode, you can type C-M-x (lisp-evaldefun) to send an expression from the Lisp mode buer to a Lisp session that you

Chapter 24: Compiling and Testing Programs

291

had started with M-x run-lisp. The expression sent is the top-level Lisp expression at or following point. The resulting value goes as usual into the *inferior-lisp* buer. Note that the eect of C-M-x in Lisp mode is thus very similar to its eect in Emacs Lisp mode (see Section 24.9 [Lisp Eval], page 288), except that the expression is sent to a dierent Lisp environment instead of being evaluated in Emacs. The facilities for editing Scheme code, and for sending expressions to a Scheme subprocess, are very similar. Scheme source les are edited in Scheme mode, which can be explicitly enabled with M-x scheme-mode. You can initiate a Scheme session by typing M-x run-scheme (the buer for interacting with Scheme is named *scheme*), and send expressions to it by typing C-M-x.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

292

25 Maintaining Large Programs

This chapter describes Emacs features for maintaining large programs. If you are maintaining a large Lisp program, then in addition to the features described here, you may nd the ERT (Emacs Lisp Regression Testing) library useful (see Section ERT in Emacs Lisp Regression Testing ).

25.1 Version Control

A version control system is a program that can record multiple versions of a source le, storing information such as the creation time of each version, who made it, and a description of what was changed. The Emacs version control interface is called VC. VC commands work with several dierent version control systems; currently, it supports GNU Arch, Bazaar, CVS, Git, Mercurial, Monotone, RCS, SCCS/CSSC, and Subversion. Of these, the GNU project distributes CVS, Arch, RCS, and Bazaar. VC is enabled automatically whenever you visit a le governed by a version control system. To disable VC entirely, set the customizable variable vc-handledbackends to nil (see Section Customizing VC in Specialized Emacs Features ). 25.1.1 Introduction to Version Control VC allows you to use a version control system from within Emacs, integrating the version control operations smoothly with editing. It provides a uniform interface for common operations in many version control operations. Some uncommon or intricate version control operations, such as altering repository settings, are not supported in VC. You should perform such tasks outside Emacs, e.g. via the command line. This section provides a general overview of version control, and describes the version control systems that VC supports. You can skip this section if you are already familiar with the version control system you want to use. 25.1.1.1 Understanding the problems it addresses Version control systems provide you with three important capabilities: Reversibility : the ability to back up to a previous state if you discover that some modication you did was a mistake or a bad idea. Concurrency : the ability to have many people modifying the same collection of les knowing that conicting modications can be detected and resolved. History : the ability to attach historical data to your data, such as explanatory comments about the intention behind each change to it. Even for a programmer working solo, change histories are an important aid to memory; for a multiperson project, they are a vitally important form of communication among developers.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs 25.1.1.2 Supported Version Control Systems

293

VC currently works with many dierent version control systems, which it refers to as back ends : SCCS was the rst version control system ever built, and was long ago superseded by more advanced ones. VC compensates for certain features missing in SCCS (e.g. tag names for releases) by implementing them itself. Other VC features, such as multiple branches, are simply unavailable. Since SCCS is non-free, we recommend avoiding it. CSSC is a free replacement for SCCS. You should use CSSC only if, for some reason, you cannot use a more recent and better-designed version control system. RCS is the free version control system around which VC was initially built. It is relatively primitive: it cannot be used over the network, and works at the level of individual les. Almost everything you can do with RCS can be done through VC. CVS is the free version control system that was, until recently (circa 2008), used by the majority of free software projects. Nowadays, it is slowly being superseded by newer systems. CVS allows concurrent multi-user development either locally or over the network. Unlike newer systems, it lacks support for atomic commits and le moving/renaming. VC supports all basic editing operations under CVS. Subversion (svn) is a free version control system designed to be similar to CVS but without its problems (e.g., it supports atomic commits of lesets, and versioning of directories, symbolic links, meta-data, renames, copies, and deletes). GNU Arch is one of the earliest decentralized version control systems (the other being Monotone). See Section 25.1.1.3 [VCS Concepts], page 293, for a description of decentralized version control systems. It is no longer under active development, and has been deprecated in favor of Bazaar. Git is a decentralized version control system originally invented by Linus Torvalds to support development of Linux (his kernel). VC supports many common Git operations, but others, such as repository syncing, must be done from the command line. Mercurial (hg) is a decentralized version control system broadly resembling Git. VC supports most Mercurial commands, with the exception of repository sync operations. Bazaar (bzr) is a decentralized version control system that supports both repository-based and decentralized versioning. VC supports most basic editing operations under Bazaar. 25.1.1.3 Concepts of Version Control When a le is under version control, we say that it is registered in the version control system. The system has a repository which stores both the les present state and

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

294

its change historyenough to reconstruct the current version or any earlier version. The repository also contains other information, such as log entries that describe the changes made to each le. The copy of a version-controlled le that you actually edit is called the work le. You can change each work le as you would an ordinary le. After you are done with a set of changes, you may commit (or check in) the changes; this records the changes in the repository, along with a descriptive log entry. A directory tree of work les is called a working tree. Each commit creates a new revision in the repository. The version control system keeps track of all past revisions and the changes that were made in each revision. Each revision is named by a revision ID, whose format depends on the version control system; in the simplest case, it is just an integer. To go beyond these basic concepts, you will need to understand three aspects in which version control systems dier. As explained in the next three sections, they can be lock-based or merge-based; le-based or changeset-based; and centralized or decentralized. VC handles all these modes of operation, but it cannot hide the dierences. 25.1.1.4 Merge-based vs lock-based Version Control A version control system typically has some mechanism to coordinate between users who want to change the same le. There are two ways to do this: merging and locking. In a version control system that uses merging, each user may modify a work le at any time. The system lets you merge your work le, which may contain changes that have not been committed, with the latest changes that others have committed. Older version control systems use a locking scheme instead. Here, work les are normally read-only. To edit a le, you ask the version control system to make it writable for you by locking it; only one user can lock a given le at any given time. This procedure is analogous to, but dierent from, the locking that Emacs uses to detect simultaneous editing of ordinary les (see Section 15.3.4 [Interlocking], page 133). When you commit your changes, that unlocks the le, and the work le becomes read-only again. Other users may then lock the le to make their own changes. Both locking and merging systems can have problems when multiple users try to modify the same le at the same time. Locking systems have lock conicts ; a user may try to check a le out and be unable to because it is locked. In merging systems, merge conicts happen when you commit a change to a le that conicts with a change committed by someone else after your checkout. Both kinds of conict have to be resolved by human judgment and communication. Experience has shown that merging is superior to locking, both in convenience to developers and in minimizing the number and severity of conicts that actually occur. SCCS always uses locking. RCS is lock-based by default but can be told to operate in a merging style. CVS and Subversion are merge-based by default but can be told to operate in a locking mode. Decentralized version control systems, such as GNU Arch, Git, and Mercurial, are exclusively merging-based.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

295

VC mode supports both locking and merging version control. The terms commit and update are used in newer version control systems; older lock-based systems use the terms check in and check out. VC hides the dierences between them as much as possible. 25.1.1.5 Changeset-based vs File-based Version Control On SCCS, RCS, CVS, and other early version control systems, version control operations are le-based : each le has its own comment and revision history separate from that of all other les. Newer systems, beginning with Subversion, are changeset-based : a commit may include changes to several les, and the entire set of changes is handled as a unit. Any comment associated with the change does not belong to a single le, but to the changeset itself. Changeset-based version control is more exible and powerful than le-based version control; usually, when a change to multiple les has to be reversed, its good to be able to easily identify and remove all of it. 25.1.1.6 Decentralized vs Centralized Repositories Early version control systems were designed around a centralized model in which each project has only one repository used by all developers. SCCS, RCS, CVS, and Subversion share this kind of model. One of its drawbacks is that the repository is a choke point for reliability and eciency. GNU Arch pioneered the concept of distributed or decentralized version control, later implemented in Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar. A project may have several different repositories, and these systems support a sort of super-merge between repositories that tries to reconcile their change histories. In eect, there is one repository for each developer, and repository merges take the place of commit operations. VC helps you manage the trac between your personal workles and a repository. Whether the repository is a single master, or one of a network of peer repositories, is not something VC has to care about. 25.1.1.7 Types of Log File Projects that use a version control system can have two types of log for changes. One is the log maintained by the version control system: each time you commit a change, you ll out a log entry for the change (see Section 25.1.4 [Log Buer], page 299). This is called the version control log. The other kind of log is the le ChangeLog (see Section 25.2 [Change Log], page 309). It provides a chronological record of all changes to a large portion of a programtypically one directory and its subdirectories. A small program would use one ChangeLog le; a large program may have a ChangeLog le in each major directory. See Section 25.2 [Change Log], page 309. Programmers have used change logs since long before version control systems. Changeset-based version systems typically maintain a changeset-based modication log for the entire system, which makes change log les somewhat redundant. One advantage that they retain is that it is sometimes useful to be able to view the transaction history of a single directory separately from those of other directories.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

296

A project maintained with version control can use just the version control log, or it can use both kinds of logs. It can handle some les one way and some les the other way. Each project has its policy, which you should follow. When the policy is to use both, you typically want to write an entry for each change just once, then put it into both logs. You can write the entry in ChangeLog, then copy it to the log buer with C-c C-a when committing the change (see Section 25.1.4 [Log Buer], page 299). Or you can write the entry in the log buer while committing the change, and later use the C-x v a command to copy it to ChangeLog (see Section Change Logs and VC in Specialized Emacs Features ). 25.1.2 Version Control and the Mode Line When you visit a le that is under version control, Emacs indicates this on the mode line. For example, Bzr-1223 says that Bazaar is used for that le, and the current revision ID is 1223. The character between the back-end name and the revision ID indicates the version control status of the work le. In a merge-based version control system, a - character indicates that the work le is unmodied, and : indicates that it has been modied. ! indicates that the le contains conicts as result of a recent merge operation (see Section 25.1.10.3 [Merging], page 308), or that the le was removed from the version control. Finally, ? means that the le is under version control, but is missing from the working tree. In a lock-based system, - indicates an unlocked le, and : a locked le; if the le is locked by another user (for instance, jim), that is displayed as RCS:jim:1.3. @ means that the le was locally added, but not yet committed to the master repository. On a graphical display, you can move the mouse over this mode line indicator to pop up a tool-tip, which displays a more verbose description of the version control status. Pressing Mouse-1 over the indicator pops up a menu of VC commands, identical to Tools / Version Control on the menu bar. When Auto Revert mode (see Section 15.4 [Reverting], page 135) reverts a buer that is under version control, it updates the version control information in the mode line. However, Auto Revert mode may not properly update this information if the version control status changes without changes to the work le, from outside the current Emacs session. If you set auto-revert-check-vc-info to t, Auto Revert mode updates the version control status information every auto-revert-interval seconds, even if the work le itself is unchanged. The resulting CPU usage depends on the version control system, but is usually not excessive. 25.1.3 Basic Editing under Version Control Most VC commands operate on VC lesets. A VC leset is a collection of one or more les that a VC operation acts on. When you type VC commands in a buer visiting a version-controlled le, the VC leset is simply that one le. When you type them in a VC Directory buer, and some les in it are marked, the VC leset consists of the marked les (see Section 25.1.9 [VC Directory Mode], page 304).

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

297

On modern changeset-based version control systems (see Section 25.1.1.5 [VCS Changesets], page 295), VC commands handle multi-le VC lesets as a group. For example, committing a multi-le VC leset generates a single revision, containing the changes to all those les. On older le-based version control systems like CVS, each le in a multi-le VC leset is handled individually; for example, a commit generates one revision for each changed le. C-x v v Perform the next appropriate version control operation on the current VC leset.

The principal VC command is a multi-purpose command, C-x v v (vc-nextaction), which performs the most appropriate action on the current VC leset: either registering it with a version control system, or committing it, or unlocking it, or merging changes into it. The precise actions are described in detail in the following subsections. You can use C-x v v either in a le-visiting buer or in a VC Directory buer. Note that VC lesets are distinct from the named lesets used for viewing and visiting les in functional groups (see Section 15.17 [Filesets], page 148). Unlike named lesets, VC lesets are not named and dont persist across sessions. 25.1.3.1 Basic Version Control with Merging On a merging-based version control system (i.e. most modern ones; see Section 25.1.1.4 [VCS Merging], page 294), C-x v v does the following: If there is more than one le in the VC leset and the les have inconsistent version control statuses, signal an error. (Note, however, that a leset is allowed to include both newly-added les and modied les; see Section 25.1.5 [Registering], page 300.) If none of the les in the VC leset are registered with a version control system, register the VC leset, i.e. place it under version control. See Section 25.1.5 [Registering], page 300. If Emacs cannot nd a system to register under, it prompts for a repository type, creates a new repository, and registers the VC leset with it. If every work le in the VC leset is unchanged, do nothing. If every work le in the VC leset has been modied, commit the changes. To do this, Emacs pops up a *vc-log* buer; type the desired log entry for the new revision, followed by C-c C-c to commit. See Section 25.1.4 [Log Buer], page 299. If committing to a shared repository, the commit may fail if the repository that has been changed since your last update. In that case, you must perform an update before trying again. On a decentralized version control system, use C-x v + (see Section 25.1.10.2 [VC Pull], page 308) or C-x v m (see Section 25.1.10.3 [Merging], page 308). On a centralized version control system, type C-x v v again to merge in the repository changes. Finally, if you are using a centralized version control system, check if each work le in the VC leset is up-to-date. If any le has been changed in the repository, oer to update it.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

298

These rules also apply when you use RCS in its non-locking mode, except that changes are not automatically merged from the repository. Nothing informs you if another user has committed changes in the same le since you began editing it; when you commit your revision, his changes are removed (however, they remain in the repository and are thus not irrevocably lost). Therefore, you must verify that the current revision is unchanged before committing your changes. In addition, locking is possible with RCS even in this mode: C-x v v with an unmodied le locks the le, just as it does with RCS in its normal locking mode (see Section 25.1.3.2 [VC With A Locking VCS], page 298). 25.1.3.2 Basic Version Control with Locking On a locking-based version control system (such as SCCS, and RCS in its default mode), C-x v v does the following: If there is more than one le in the VC leset and the les have inconsistent version control statuses, signal an error. If each le in the VC leset is not registered with a version control system, register the VC leset. See Section 25.1.5 [Registering], page 300. If Emacs cannot nd a system to register under, it prompts for a repository type, creates a new repository, and registers the VC leset with it. If each le is registered and unlocked, lock it and make it writable, so that you can begin to edit it. If each le is locked by you and contains changes, commit the changes. To do this, Emacs pops up a *vc-log* buer; type the desired log entry for the new revision, followed by C-c C-c to commit (see Section 25.1.4 [Log Buer], page 299). If each le is locked by you, but you have not changed it, release the lock and make the le read-only again. If each le is locked by another user, ask whether you want to steal the lock. If you say yes, the le becomes locked by you, and a warning message is sent to the user who had formerly locked the le. These rules also apply when you use CVS in locking mode, except that CVS does not support stealing locks. 25.1.3.3 Advanced Control in C-x v v When you give a prex argument to vc-next-action (C-u C-x v v), it still performs the next logical version control operation, but accepts additional arguments to specify precisely how to do the operation. You can specify the name of a version control system. This is useful if the leset can be managed by more than one version control system, and Emacs fails to detect the correct one. Otherwise, if using CVS or RCS, you can specify a revision ID. If the leset is modied (or locked), this makes Emacs commit with that revision ID. You can create a new branch by supplying an appropriate revision ID (see Section 25.1.10 [Branches], page 307).

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

299

If the leset is unmodied (and unlocked), this checks the specied revision into the working tree. You can also specify a revision on another branch by giving its revision or branch ID (see Section 25.1.10.1 [Switching Branches], page 307). An empty argument (i.e. C-u C-x v v RET) checks out the latest (head) revision on the current branch. This signals an error on a decentralized version control system. Those systems do not let you specify your own revision IDs, nor do they use the concept of checking out individual les. 25.1.4 Features of the Log Entry Buer When you tell VC to commit a change, it pops up a buer named *vc-log*. In this buer, you should write a log entry describing the changes you have made (see Section 25.1.1.1 [Why Version Control?], page 292). After you are done, type C-c C-c (log-edit-done) to exit the buer and commit the change, together with your log entry. The major mode for the *vc-log* buer is Log Edit mode, a variant of Text mode (see Section 22.7 [Text Mode], page 223). On entering Log Edit mode, Emacs runs the hooks text-mode-hook and vc-log-mode-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). In the *vc-log* buer, you can write one or more header lines, specifying additional information to be supplied to the version control system. Each header line must occupy a single line at the top of the buer; the rst line that is not a header line is treated as the start of the log entry. For example, the following header line states that the present change was not written by you, but by another developer:
Author: J. R. Hacker <[email protected]>

Apart from the Author header, Emacs recognizes the headers Date (a manuallyspecied commit time) and Fixes (a reference to a bug xed by the change). Not all version control systems recognize all headers: Bazaar recognizes all three headers, while Git, Mercurial, and Monotone recognize only Author and Date. If you specify a header for a system that does not support it, the header is treated as part of the log entry. While in the *vc-log* buer, the current VC leset is considered to be the leset that will be committed if you type C-c C-c. To view a list of the les in the VC leset, type C-c C-f (log-edit-show-files). To view a di of changes between the VC leset and the version from which you started editing (see Section 25.1.6 [Old Revisions], page 300), type C-c C-d (log-edit-show-diff). If the VC leset includes one or more ChangeLog les (see Section 25.2 [Change Log], page 309), type C-c C-a (log-edit-insert-changelog) to pull the relevant entries into the *vc-log* buer. If the topmost item in each ChangeLog was made under your user name on the current date, this command searches that item for entries matching the le(s) to be committed, and inserts them. To abort a commit, just dont type C-c C-c in that buer. You can switch buers and do other editing. As long as you dont try to make another commit,

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

300

the entry you were editing remains in the *vc-log* buer, and you can go back to that buer at any time to complete the commit. You can also browse the history of previous log entries to duplicate a commit comment. This can be useful when you want to make several commits with similar comments. The commands M-n, M-p, M-s and M-r for doing this work just like the minibuer history commands (see Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34), except that they are used outside the minibuer. 25.1.5 Registering a File for Version Control C-x v i Register the visited le for version control.

The command C-x v i (vc-register) registers each le in the current VC leset, placing it under version control. This is essentially equivalent to the action of C-x v v on an unregistered VC leset (see Section 25.1.3 [Basic VC Editing], page 296), except that if the VC leset is already registered, C-x v i signals an error whereas C-x v v performs some other action. To register a le, Emacs must choose a version control system. For a multi-le VC leset, the VC Directory buer species the system to use (see Section 25.1.9 [VC Directory Mode], page 304). For a single-le VC leset, if the les directory already contains les registered in a version control system, or if the directory is part of a directory tree controlled by a version control system, Emacs chooses that system. In the event that more than one version control system is applicable, Emacs uses the one that appears rst in the variable vc-handled-backends. If Emacs cannot nd a version control system to register the le under, it prompts for a repository type, creates a new repository, and registers the le into that repository. On most version control systems, registering a le with C-x v i or C-x v v adds it to the working tree but not to the repository. Such les are labeled as added in the VC Directory buer, and show a revision ID of @@ in the mode line. To make the registration take eect in the repository, you must perform a commit (see Section 25.1.3 [Basic VC Editing], page 296). Note that a single commit can include both le additions and edits to existing les. On a locking-based version control system (see Section 25.1.1.4 [VCS Merging], page 294), registering a le leaves it unlocked and read-only. Type C-x v v to start editing it. 25.1.6 Examining And Comparing Old Revisions C-x v = Compare the work les in the current VC leset with the versions you started from (vc-diff). With a prex argument, prompt for two revisions of the current VC leset and compare them. You can also call this command from a Dired buer (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329). Compare the entire working tree to the revision you started from (vcroot-diff). With a prex argument, prompt for two revisions and compare their trees. Prompt for a revision of the current le, and visit it in a separate buer (vc-revision-other-window).

C-x v D

C-x v ~

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs C-x v g

301

Display an annotated version of the current le: for each line, show the latest revision in which it was modied (vc-annotate).

C-x v = (vc-diff) displays a di which compares each work le in the current VC leset to the version(s) from which you started editing. The di is displayed in another window, in a Di mode buer (see Section 15.9 [Di Mode], page 141) named *vc-diff*. The usual Di mode commands are available in this buer. In particular, the g (revert-buffer) command performs the le comparison again, generating a new di. To compare two arbitrary revisions of the current VC leset, call vc-diff with a prex argument: C-u C-x v =. This prompts for two revision IDs (see Section 25.1.1.3 [VCS Concepts], page 293), and displays a di between those versions of the leset. This will not work reliably for multi-le VC lesets, if the version control system is le-based rather than changeset-based (e.g. CVS), since then revision IDs for dierent les would not be related in any meaningful way. Instead of the revision ID, some version control systems let you specify revisions in other formats. For instance, under Bazaar you can enter date:yesterday for the argument to C-u C-x v = (and related commands) to specify the rst revision committed after yesterday. See the documentation of the version control system for details. If you invoke C-x v = or C-u C-x v = from a Dired buer (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329), the le listed on the current line is treated as the current VC leset. C-x v D (vc-root-diff) is similar to C-x v =, but it displays the changes in the entire current working tree (i.e. the working tree containing the current VC leset). If you invoke this command from a Dired buer, it applies to the working tree containing the directory. You can customize the diff options that C-x v = and C-x v D use for generating dis. The options used are taken from the rst non-nil value amongst the variables vc-backend -diff-switches, vc-diff-switches, and diff-switches (see Section 15.8 [Comparing Files], page 140), in that order. Here, backend stands for the relevant version control system, e.g. bzr for Bazaar. Since nil means to check the next variable in the sequence, either of the rst two may use the value t to mean no switches at all. Most of the vc-backend -diff-switches variables default to nil, but some default to t; these are for version control systems whose diff implementations do not accept common di options, such as Subversion. To directly examine an older version of a le, visit the work le and type C-x v ~ revision RET (vc-revision-other-window). This retrieves the le version corresponding to revision, saves it to filename.~revision ~, and visits it in a separate window. Many version control systems allow you to view les annotated with per-line revision information, by typing C-x v g (vc-annotate). This creates a new buer (the annotate buer) displaying the les text, with each line colored to show how old it is. Red text is new, blue is old, and intermediate colors indicate intermediate ages. By default, the color is scaled over the full range of ages, such that the oldest changes are blue, and the newest changes are red.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

302

When you give a prex argument to this command, Emacs reads two arguments using the minibuer: the revision to display and annotate (instead of the current le contents), and the time span in days the color range should cover. From the annotate buer, these and other color scaling options are available from the VC-Annotate menu. In this buer, you can also use the following keys to browse the annotations of past revisions, view dis, or view log entries: p Annotate the previous revision, i.e. the revision before the one currently annotated. A numeric prex argument is a repeat count, so C-u 10 p would take you back 10 revisions. Annotate the next revision, i.e. the revision after the one currently annotated. A numeric prex argument is a repeat count. Annotate the revision indicated by the current line. Annotate the revision before the one indicated by the current line. This is useful to see the state the le was in before the change on the current line was made. Show in a buer the le revision indicated by the current line. Display the di between the current lines revision and the previous revision. This is useful to see what the current lines revision actually changed in the le. Display the di between the current lines revision and the previous revision for all les in the changeset (for VC systems that support changesets). This is useful to see what the current lines revision actually changed in the tree. Show the log of the current lines revision. This is useful to see the authors description of the changes in the revision on the current line. Annotate the working revisionthe one you are editing. If you used p and n to browse to other revisions, use this key to return to your working revision. Toggle the annotation visibility. This is useful for looking just at the le contents without distraction from the annotations.

n j a

f d

l w

25.1.7 VC Change Log C-x v l C-x v L C-x v I C-x v O Display the change history for the current leset (vc-print-log). Display the change history for the current repository (vc-print-rootlog). Display the changes that a pull operation will retrieve (vc-logincoming). Display the changes that will be sent by the next push operation (vclog-outgoing).

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

303

C-x v l (vc-print-log) displays a buer named *vc-change-log*, showing the history of changes made to the current le, including who made the changes, the dates, and the log entry for each change (these are the same log entries you would enter via the *vc-log* buer; see Section 25.1.4 [Log Buer], page 299). Point is centered at the revision of the le currently being visited. With a prex argument, the command prompts for the revision to center on, and the maximum number of revisions to display. If you call C-x v l from a VC Directory buer (see Section 25.1.9 [VC Directory Mode], page 304) or a Dired buer (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329), it applies to the le listed on the current line. C-x v L (vc-print-root-log) displays a *vc-change-log* buer showing the history of the entire version-controlled directory tree (RCS, SCCS, and CVS do not support this feature). With a prex argument, the command prompts for the maximum number of revisions to display. The C-x v L history is shown in a compact form, usually showing only the rst line of each log entry. However, you can type RET (log-view-toggle-entrydisplay) in the *vc-change-log* buer to reveal the entire log entry for the revision at point. A second RET hides it again. On a decentralized version control system, the C-x v I (vc-log-incoming) command displays a log buer showing the changes that will be applied, the next time you run the version control systems pull command to get new revisions from another repository (see Section 25.1.10.2 [VC Pull], page 308). This other repository is the default one from which changes are pulled, as dened by the version control system; with a prex argument, vc-log-incoming prompts for a specic repository. Similarly, C-x v O (vc-log-outgoing) shows the changes that will be sent to another repository, the next time you run the push command; with a prex argument, it prompts for a specic destination repository. In the *vc-change-log* buer, you can use the following keys to move between the logs of revisions and of les, and to examine and compare past revisions (see Section 25.1.6 [Old Revisions], page 300): p Move to the previous revision entry. (Revision entries in the log buer are usually in reverse-chronological order, so the previous revision-item usually corresponds to a newer revision.) A numeric prex argument is a repeat count. Move to the next revision entry. A numeric prex argument is a repeat count. Move to the log of the previous le, if showing logs for a multi-le VC leset. Otherwise, just move to the beginning of the log. A numeric prex argument is a repeat count. Move to the log of the next le, if showing logs for a multi-le VC leset. A numeric prex argument is a repeat count. Annotate the revision on the current line (see Section 25.1.6 [Old Revisions], page 300).

n P

N a

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs e f d D

304

Modify the change comment displayed at point. Note that not all VC systems support modifying change comments. Visit the revision indicated at the current line. Display a di between the revision at point and the next earlier revision, for the specic le. Display the changeset di between the revision at point and the next earlier revision. This shows the changes to all les made in that revision. In a compact-style log buer (e.g. the one created by C-x v L), toggle between showing and hiding the full log entry for the revision at point.

RET

Because fetching many log entries can be slow, the *vc-change-log* buer displays no more than 2000 revisions by default. The variable vc-log-show-limit species this limit; if you set the value to zero, that removes the limit. You can also increase the number of revisions shown in an existing *vc-change-log* buer by clicking on the Show 2X entries or Show unlimited entries buttons at the end of the buer. However, RCS, SCCS, and CVS do not support this feature. 25.1.8 Undoing Version Control Actions C-x v u Revert the work le(s) in the current VC leset to the last revision (vc-revert).

If you want to discard all the changes you have made to the current VC leset, type C-x v u (vc-revert-buffer). This shows you a di between the work le(s) and the revision from which you started editing, and asks for conrmation for discarding the changes. If you agree, the leset is reverted. If you dont want C-x v u to show a di, set the variable vc-revert-show-diff to nil (you can still view the di directly with C-x v =; see Section 25.1.6 [Old Revisions], page 300). Note that C-x v u cannot be reversed with the usual undo commands (see Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110), so use it with care. On locking-based version control systems, C-x v u leaves les unlocked; you must lock again to resume editing. You can also use C-x v u to unlock a le if you lock it and then decide not to change it. 25.1.9 VC Directory Mode The VC Directory buer is a specialized buer for viewing the version control statuses of the les in a directory tree, and performing version control operations on those les. In particular, it is used to specify multi-le VC lesets for commands like C-x v v to act on (see Section 25.1.9.2 [VC Directory Commands], page 305). To use the VC Directory buer, type C-x v d (vc-dir). This reads a directory name using the minibuer, and switches to a VC Directory buer for that directory. By default, the buer is named *vc-dir*. Its contents are described below. The vc-dir command automatically detects the version control system to be used in the specied directory. In the event that more than one system is being

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

305

used in the directory, you should invoke the command with a prex argument, C-u C-x v d; this prompts for the version control system which the VC Directory buer should use. 25.1.9.1 The VC Directory Buer The VC Directory buer contains a list of version-controlled les and their version control statuses. It lists les in the current directory (the one specied when you called C-x v d) and its subdirectories, but only those with a noteworthy status. Files that are up-to-date (i.e. the same as in the repository) are omitted. If all the les in a subdirectory are up-to-date, the subdirectory is not listed either. As an exception, if a le has become up-to-date as a direct result of a VC command, it is listed. Here is an example of a VC Directory buer listing:
edited added unregistered edited ./ configure.ac README temp.txt src/ src/main.c

Two work les have been modied but not committed: configure.ac in the current directory, and foo.c in the src/ subdirectory. The le named README has been added but is not yet committed, while temp.txt is not under version control (see Section 25.1.5 [Registering], page 300). The * characters next to the entries for README and src/main.c indicate that the user has marked out these les as the current VC leset (see below). The above example is typical for a decentralized version control system like Bazaar, Git, or Mercurial. Other systems can show other statuses. For instance, CVS shows the needs-update status if the repository has changes that have not been applied to the work le. RCS and SCCS show the name of the user locking a le as its status. The VC Directory buer omits subdirectories listed in the variable vcdirectory-exclusion-list. Its default value contains directories that are used internally by version control systems. 25.1.9.2 VC Directory Commands Emacs provides several commands for navigating the VC Directory buer, and for marking les as belonging to the current VC leset. n SPC p TAB S-TAB Move point to the next entry (vc-dir-next-line). Move point to the previous entry (vc-dir-previous-line). Move to the next directory entry (vc-dir-next-directory). Move to the previous directory entry (vc-dir-previous-directory).

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs RET f o m

306

Visit the le or directory listed on the current line (vc-dir-findfile). Visit the le or directory on the current line, in a separate window (vc-dir-find-file-other-window). Mark the le or directory on the current line (vc-dir-mark), putting it in the current VC leset. If the region is active, mark all les in the region. A le cannot be marked with this command if it is already in a marked directory, or one of its subdirectories. Similarly, a directory cannot be marked with this command if any le in its tree is marked.

If point is on a le entry, mark all les with the same status; if point is on a directory entry, mark all les in that directory tree (vc-dirmark-all-files). With a prex argument, mark all listed les and directories. Bury the VC Directory buer, and delete its window if the window was created just for that buer. Unmark the le or directory on the current line. If the region is active, unmark all the les in the region (vc-dir-unmark). If point is on a le entry, unmark all les with the same status; if point is on a directory entry, unmark all les in that directory tree (vc-dir-unmark-all-files). With a prex argument, unmark all les and directories. Hide les with up-to-date status (vc-dir-hide-up-to-date). Quit the VC Directory buer, and bury it (quit-window).

q u U

x q

While in the VC Directory buer, all the les that you mark with m (vc-dirmark) or M (vc-dir-mark) are in the current VC leset. If you mark a directory entry with m, all the listed les in that directory tree are in the current VC leset. The les and directories that belong to the current VC leset are indicated with a * character in the VC Directory buer, next to their VC status. In this way, you can set up a multi-le VC leset to be acted on by VC commands like C-x v v (see Section 25.1.3 [Basic VC Editing], page 296), C-x v = (see Section 25.1.6 [Old Revisions], page 300), and C-x v u (see Section 25.1.8 [VC Undo], page 304). The VC Directory buer also denes some single-key shortcuts for VC commands with the C-x v prex: =, +, l, i, and v. For example, you can commit a set of edited les by opening a VC Directory buer, where the les are listed with the edited status; marking the les; and typing v or C-x v v (vc-next-action). If the version control system is changesetbased, Emacs will commit the les in a single revision. While in the VC Directory buer, you can also perform search and replace on the current VC leset, with the following commands:

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs S Q M-s a C-s M-s a C-M-s Search the leset (vc-dir-search).

307

Do a regular expression query replace on the leset (vc-dir-queryreplace-regexp). Do an incremental search on the leset (vc-dir-isearch). Do an incremental regular expression search on the leset (vc-dirisearch-regexp).

Apart from acting on multiple les, these commands behave much like their singlebuer counterparts (see Chapter 12 [Search], page 91). The above commands are also available via the menu bar, and via a context menu invoked by Mouse-2. Furthermore, some VC backends use the menu to provide extra backend-specic commands. For example, Git and Bazaar allow you to manipulate stashes and shelves (where are a way to temporarily put aside uncommitted changes, and bring them back at a later time). 25.1.10 Version Control Branches One use of version control is to support multiple independent lines of development, which are called branches. Branches are used for maintaining separate stable and development versions of a program, and for developing unrelated features in isolation from one another. VCs support for branch operations is currently fairly limited. For decentralized version control systems, it provides commands for updating one branch with the contents of another, and for merging the changes made to two dierent branches (see Section 25.1.10.3 [Merging], page 308). For centralized version control systems, it supports checking out dierent branches and committing into new or dierent branches. 25.1.10.1 Switching between Branches The various version control systems dier in how branches are implemented, and these dierences cannot be entirely concealed by VC. On some decentralized version control systems, including Bazaar and Mercurial in its normal mode of operation, each branch has its own working directory tree, so switching between branches just involves switching directories. On Git, switching between branches is done using the git branch command, which changes the contents of the working tree itself. On centralized version control systems, you can switch between branches by typing C-u C-x v v in an up-to-date work le (see Section 25.1.3.3 [Advanced C-x v v], page 298), and entering the revision ID for a revision on another branch. On CVS, for instance, revisions on the trunk (the main line of development) normally have IDs of the form 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . . , while the rst branch created from (say) revision 1.2 has revision IDs 1.2.1.1, 1.2.1.2, . . . , the second branch created from revision 1.2 has revision IDs 1.2.2.1, 1.2.2.2, . . . , and so forth. You can also specify the branch ID, which is a branch revision ID omitting its nal component (e.g. 1.2.1), to switch to the latest revision on that branch.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

308

On a locking-based system, switching to a dierent branch also unlocks (writeprotects) the working tree. Once you have switched to a branch, VC commands will apply to that branch until you switch away; for instance, any VC lesets that you commit will be committed to that specic branch. 25.1.10.2 Pulling Changes into a Branch C-x v + On a decentralized version control system, update the current branch by pulling in changes from another location. On a centralized version control system, update the current VC leset. On a decentralized version control system, the command C-x v + (vc-pull) updates the current branch and working tree. It is typically used to update a copy of a remote branch. If you supply a prex argument, the command prompts for the exact version control command to use, which lets you specify where to pull changes from. Otherwise, it pulls from a default location determined by the version control system. Amongst decentralized version control systems, C-x v + is currently supported only by Bazaar, Git, and Mercurial. On Bazaar, it calls bzr pull for ordinary branches (to pull from a master branch into a mirroring branch), and bzr update for a bound branch (to pull from a central repository). On Git, it calls git pull to fetch changes from a remote repository and merge it into the current branch. On Mercurial, it calls hg pull -u to fetch changesets from the default remote repository and update the working directory. Prior to pulling, you can use C-x v I (vc-log-incoming) to view a log buer of the changes to be applied. See Section 25.1.7 [VC Change Log], page 302. On a centralized version control system like CVS, C-x v + updates the current VC leset from the repository. 25.1.10.3 Merging Branches C-x v m On a decentralized version control system, merge changes from another branch into the current one. On a centralized version control system, merge changes from another branch into the current VC leset. While developing a branch, you may sometimes need to merge in changes that have already been made in another branch. This is not a trivial operation, as overlapping changes may have been made to the two branches. On a decentralized version control system, merging is done with the command C-x v m (vc-merge). On Bazaar, this prompts for the exact arguments to pass to bzr merge, oering a sensible default if possible. On Git, this prompts for the name of a branch to merge from, with completion (based on the branch names known to the current repository). The output from running the merge command is shown in a separate buer.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

309

On a centralized version control system like CVS, C-x v m prompts for a branch ID, or a pair of revision IDs (see Section 25.1.10.1 [Switching Branches], page 307); then it nds the changes from that branch, or the changes between the two revisions you specied, and merges those changes into the current VC leset. If you just type RET, Emacs simply merges any changes that were made on the same branch since you checked the le out. Immediately after performing a merge, only the working tree is modied, and you can review the changes produced by the merge with C-x v D and related commands (see Section 25.1.6 [Old Revisions], page 300). If the two branches contained overlapping changes, merging produces a conict; a warning appears in the output of the merge command, and conict markers are inserted into each aected work le, surrounding the two sets of conicting changes. You must then resolve the conict by editing the conicted les. Once you are done, the modied les must be committed in the usual way for the merge to take eect (see Section 25.1.3 [Basic VC Editing], page 296). 25.1.10.4 Creating New Branches On centralized version control systems like CVS, Emacs supports creating new branches as part of a commit operation. When committing a modied VC leset, type C-u C-x v v (vc-next-action with a prex argument; see Section 25.1.3.3 [Advanced C-x v v], page 298). Then Emacs prompts for a revision ID for the new revision. You should specify a suitable branch ID for a branch starting at the current revision. For example, if the current revision is 2.5, the branch ID should be 2.5.1, 2.5.2, and so on, depending on the number of existing branches at that point. To create a new branch at an older revision (one that is no longer the head of a branch), rst select that revision (see Section 25.1.10.1 [Switching Branches], page 307). Your procedure will then dier depending on whether you are using a locking or merging-based VCS. On a locking VCS, you will need to lock the old revision branch with C-x v v. Youll be asked to conrm, when you lock the old revision, that you really mean to create a new branchif you say no, youll be oered a chance to lock the latest revision instead. On a merging-based VCS you will skip this step. Then make your changes and type C-x v v again to commit a new revision. This creates a new branch starting from the selected revision. After the branch is created, subsequent commits create new revisions on that branch. To leave the branch, you must explicitly select a dierent revision with C-u C-x v v.

25.2 Change Logs

Many software projects keep a change log. This is a le, normally named ChangeLog, containing a chronological record of when and how the program was changed. Sometimes, there are several change log les, each recording the changes in one directory or directory tree.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs 25.2.1 Change Log Commands

310

The Emacs command C-x 4 a adds a new entry to the change log le for the le you are editing (add-change-log-entry-other-window). If that le is actually a backup le, it makes an entry appropriate for the les parentthat is useful for making log entries for functions that have been deleted in the current version. C-x 4 a visits the change log le and creates a new entry unless the most recent entry is for todays date and your name. It also creates a new item for the current le. For many languages, it can even guess the name of the function or other object that was changed. When the variable add-log-keep-changes-together is non-nil, C-x 4 a adds to any existing item for the le rather than starting a new item. You can combine multiple changes of the same nature. If you dont enter any text after the initial C-x 4 a, any subsequent C-x 4 a adds another symbol to the change log entry. If add-log-always-start-new-record is non-nil, C-x 4 a always makes a new entry, even if the last entry was made by you and on the same date. If the value of the variable change-log-version-info-enabled is non-nil, C-x 4 a adds the les version number to the change log entry. It nds the version number by searching the rst ten percent of the le, using regular expressions from the variable change-log-version-number-regexp-list. The change log le is visited in Change Log mode. In this major mode, each bunch of grouped items counts as one paragraph, and each entry is considered a page. This facilitates editing the entries. C-j and auto-ll indent each new line like the previous line; this is convenient for entering the contents of an entry. You can use the next-error command (by default bound to C-x ) to move between entries in the Change Log, when Change Log mode is on. You will jump to the actual site in the le that was changed, not just to the next Change Log entry. You can also use previous-error to move back in the same list. You can use the command M-x change-log-merge to merge other log les into a buer in Change Log Mode, preserving the date ordering of entries. Version control systems are another way to keep track of changes in your program and keep a change log. In the VC log buer, typing C-c C-a (log-edit-insertchangelog) inserts the relevant Change Log entry, if one exists. See Section 25.1.4 [Log Buer], page 299. 25.2.2 Format of ChangeLog A change log entry starts with a header line that contains the current date, your name (taken from the variable add-log-full-name), and your email address (taken from the variable add-log-mailing-address). Aside from these header lines, every line in the change log starts with a space or a tab. The bulk of the entry consists of items, each of which starts with a line starting with whitespace and a star. Here are two entries, both dated in May 1993, with two items and one item respectively.
1993-05-25 Richard Stallman <[email protected]>

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

* man.el: Rename symbols man-* to Man-*. (manual-entry): Make prompt string clearer. * simple.el (blink-matching-paren-distance): Change default to 12,000. 1993-05-24 Richard Stallman <[email protected]>

311

* vc.el (minor-mode-map-alist): Dont use it if its void. (vc-cancel-version): Doc fix.

One entry can describe several changes; each change should have its own item, or its own line in an item. Normally there should be a blank line between items. When items are related (parts of the same change, in dierent places), group them by leaving no blank line between them. You should put a copyright notice and permission notice at the end of the change log le. Here is an example:
Copyright 1997, 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved.

Of course, you should substitute the proper years and copyright holder.

25.3 Tags Tables

A tag is a reference to a subunit in a program or in a document. In source code, tags reference syntactic elements of the program: functions, subroutines, data types, macros, etc. In a document, tags reference chapters, sections, appendices, etc. Each tag species the name of the le where the corresponding subunit is dened, and the position of the subunits denition in that le. A tags table records the tags extracted by scanning the source code of a certain program or a certain document. Tags extracted from generated les reference the original les, rather than the generated les that were scanned during tag extraction. Examples of generated les include C les generated from Cweb source les, from a Yacc parser, or from Lex scanner denitions; .i preprocessed C les; and Fortran les produced by preprocessing .fpp source les. To produce a tags table, you run the etags shell command on a document or the source code le. The etags program writes the tags to a tags table le, or tags le in short. The conventional name for a tags le is TAGS. See Section 25.3.2 [Create Tags Table], page 314. Emacs provides many commands for searching and replacing using the information recorded in tags tables. For instance, the M-. (find-tag) jumps to the location of a specied function denition in its source le. See Section 25.3.5 [Find Tag], page 317. The Ebrowse facility is similar to etags but specically tailored for C++. See Section Ebrowse in Ebrowse Users Manual . The Semantic package provides another way to generate and use tags, separate from the etags facility. See Section 23.10 [Semantic], page 265.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs 25.3.1 Source File Tag Syntax

312

Here is how tag syntax is dened for the most popular languages: In C code, any C function or typedef is a tag, and so are denitions of struct, union and enum. #define macro denitions, #undef and enum constants are also tags, unless you specify --no-defines when making the tags table. Similarly, global variables are tags, unless you specify --no-globals, and so are struct members, unless you specify --no-members. Use of --no-globals, --no-defines and --no-members can make the tags table le much smaller. You can tag function declarations and external variables in addition to function denitions by giving the --declarations option to etags. In C++ code, in addition to all the tag constructs of C code, member functions are also recognized; member variables are also recognized, unless you use the --no-members option. Tags for variables and functions in classes are named class ::variable and class ::function . operator denitions have tag names like operator+. In Java code, tags include all the constructs recognized in C++, plus the interface, extends and implements constructs. Tags for variables and functions in classes are named class.variable and class.function . In LaTEX documents, the arguments for \chapter, \section, \subsection, \subsubsection, \eqno, \label, \ref, \cite, \bibitem, \part, \appendix, \entry, \index, \def, \newcommand, \renewcommand, \newenvironment and \renewenvironment are tags. Other commands can make tags as well, if you specify them in the environment variable TEXTAGS before invoking etags. The value of this environment variable should be a colon-separated list of command names. For example, TEXTAGS="mycommand:myothercommand" export TEXTAGS species (using Bourne shell syntax) that the commands \mycommand and \myothercommand also dene tags. In Lisp code, any function dened with defun, any variable dened with defvar or defconst, and in general the rst argument of any expression that starts with (def in column zero is a tag. In Scheme code, tags include anything dened with def or with a construct whose name starts with def. They also include variables set with set! at top level in the le. Several other languages are also supported: In Ada code, functions, procedures, packages, tasks and types are tags. Use the --packages-only option to create tags for packages only. In Ada, the same name can be used for dierent kinds of entity (e.g., for a procedure and for a function). Also, for things like packages, procedures and functions, there is the spec (i.e. the interface) and the body (i.e. the implementation). To make it easier to pick the denition you want, Ada tag name have suxes indicating the type of entity:

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs /b /f /k /p /s /t package body. function. task. procedure. package spec. type.

313

Thus, M-x find-tag RET bidule/b RET will go directly to the body of the package bidule, while M-x find-tag RET bidule RET will just search for any tag bidule. In assembler code, labels appearing at the start of a line, followed by a colon, are tags. In Bison or Yacc input les, each rule denes as a tag the nonterminal it constructs. The portions of the le that contain C code are parsed as C code. In Cobol code, tags are paragraph names; that is, any word starting in column 8 and followed by a period. In Erlang code, the tags are the functions, records and macros dened in the le. In Fortran code, functions, subroutines and block data are tags. In HTML input les, the tags are the title and the h1, h2, h3 headers. Also, tags are name= in anchors and all occurrences of id=. In Lua input les, all functions are tags. In makeles, targets are tags; additionally, variables are tags unless you specify --no-globals. In Objective C code, tags include Objective C denitions for classes, class categories, methods and protocols. Tags for variables and functions in classes are named class ::variable and class ::function . In Pascal code, the tags are the functions and procedures dened in the le. In Perl code, the tags are the packages, subroutines and variables dened by the package, sub, my and local keywords. Use --globals if you want to tag global variables. Tags for subroutines are named package ::sub . The name for subroutines dened in the default package is main::sub . In PHP code, tags are functions, classes and denes. Vars are tags too, unless you use the --no-members option. In PostScript code, the tags are the functions. In Prolog code, tags are predicates and rules at the beginning of line. In Python code, def or class at the beginning of a line generate a tag. You can also generate tags based on regexp matching (see Section 25.3.3 [Etags Regexps], page 315) to handle other formats and languages.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs 25.3.2 Creating Tags Tables

314

The etags program is used to create a tags table le. It knows the syntax of several languages, as described in the previous section. Here is how to run etags: etags inputfiles ... The etags program reads the specied les, and writes a tags table named TAGS in the current working directory. You can optionally specify a dierent le name for the tags table by using the --output=file option; specifying - as a le name prints the tags table to standard output. If the specied les dont exist, etags looks for compressed versions of them and uncompresses them to read them. Under MS-DOS, etags also looks for le names like mycode.cgz if it is given mycode.c on the command line and mycode.c does not exist. If the tags table becomes outdated due to changes in the les described in it, you can update it by running the etags program again. If the tags table does not record a tag, or records it for the wrong le, then Emacs will not be able to nd that denition until you update the tags table. But if the position recorded in the tags table becomes a little bit wrong (due to other editing), Emacs will still be able to nd the right position, with a slight delay. Thus, there is no need to update the tags table after each edit. You should update a tags table when you dene new tags that you want to have listed, or when you move tag denitions from one le to another, or when changes become substantial. You can make a tags table include another tags table, by passing the --include=file option to etags. It then covers all the les covered by the included tags le, as well as its own. If you specify the source les with relative le names when you run etags, the tags le will contain le names relative to the directory where the tags le was initially written. This way, you can move an entire directory tree containing both the tags le and the source les, and the tags le will still refer correctly to the source les. If the tags le is - or is in the /dev directory, however, the le names are made relative to the current working directory. This is useful, for example, when writing the tags to /dev/stdout. When using a relative le name, it should not be a symbolic link pointing to a tags le in a dierent directory, because this would generally render the le names invalid. If you specify absolute le names as arguments to etags, then the tags le will contain absolute le names. This way, the tags le will still refer to the same les even if you move it, as long as the source les remain in the same place. Absolute le names start with /, or with device :/ on MS-DOS and MS-Windows. When you want to make a tags table from a great number of les, you may have problems listing them on the command line, because some systems have a limit on its length. You can circumvent this limit by telling etags to read the le names from its standard input, by typing a dash in place of the le names, like this:
find . -name "*.[chCH]" -print | etags -

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

315

etags recognizes the language used in an input le based on its le name and contents. You can specify the language explicitly with the --language=name option. You can intermix these options with le names; each one applies to the le names that follow it. Specify --language=auto to tell etags to resume guessing the language from the le names and le contents. Specify --language=none to turn o language-specic processing entirely; then etags recognizes tags by regexp matching alone (see Section 25.3.3 [Etags Regexps], page 315). The option --parse-stdin=file is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can be used (only once) in place of a le name on the command line. etags will read from standard input and mark the produced tags as belonging to the le le. etags --help outputs the list of the languages etags knows, and the le name rules for guessing the language. It also prints a list of all the available etags options, together with a short explanation. If followed by one or more --language=lang options, it outputs detailed information about how tags are generated for lang. 25.3.3 Etags Regexps The --regex option to etags allows tags to be recognized by regular expression matching. You can intermix this option with le names; each one applies to the source les that follow it. If you specify multiple --regex options, all of them are used in parallel. The syntax is:
--regex=[{language}]/tagregexp /[nameregexp /]modifiers

The essential part of the option value is tagregexp, the regexp for matching tags. It is always used anchored, that is, it only matches at the beginning of a line. If you want to allow indented tags, use a regexp that matches initial whitespace; start it with [ \t]*. In these regular expressions, \ quotes the next character, and all the GCC character escape sequences are supported (\a for bell, \b for back space, \d for delete, \e for escape, \f for formfeed, \n for newline, \r for carriage return, \t for tab, and \v for vertical tab). Ideally, tagregexp should not match more characters than are needed to recognize what you want to tag. If the syntax requires you to write tagregexp so it matches more characters beyond the tag itself, you should add a nameregexp, to pick out just the tag. This will enable Emacs to nd tags more accurately and to do completion on tag names more reliably. You can nd some examples below. The modiers are a sequence of zero or more characters that modify the way etags does the matching. A regexp with no modiers is applied sequentially to each line of the input le, in a case-sensitive way. The modiers and their meanings are: i m s Ignore case when matching this regexp. Match this regular expression against the whole le, so that multi-line matches are possible. Match this regular expression against the whole le, and allow . in tagregexp to match newlines.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

316

The -R option cancels all the regexps dened by preceding --regex options. It too applies to the le names following it. Heres an example:
etags --regex=/reg1 /i voo.doo --regex=/reg2 /m \ bar.ber -R --lang=lisp los.er

Here etags chooses the parsing language for voo.doo and bar.ber according to their contents. etags also uses reg1 to recognize additional tags in voo.doo, and both reg1 and reg2 to recognize additional tags in bar.ber. reg1 is checked against each line of voo.doo and bar.ber, in a case-insensitive way, while reg2 is checked against the whole bar.ber le, permitting multi-line matches, in a casesensitive way. etags uses only the Lisp tags rules, with no user-specied regexp matching, to recognize tags in los.er. You can restrict a --regex option to match only les of a given language by using the optional prex {language}. (etags --help prints the list of languages recognized by etags.) This is particularly useful when storing many predened regular expressions for etags in a le. The following example tags the DEFVAR macros in the Emacs source les, for the C language only:
--regex={c}/[ \t]*DEFVAR_[A-Z_ \t(]+"\([^"]+\)"/

When you have complex regular expressions, you can store the list of them in a le. The following option syntax instructs etags to read two les of regular expressions. The regular expressions contained in the second le are matched without regard to case.
--regex=@case-sensitive-file --ignore-case-regex=@ignore-case-file

A regex le for etags contains one regular expression per line. Empty lines, and lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. When the rst character in a line is @, etags assumes that the rest of the line is the name of another le of regular expressions; thus, one such le can include another le. All the other lines are taken to be regular expressions. If the rst non-whitespace text on the line is --, that line is a comment. For example, we can create a le called emacs.tags with the following contents:
-- This is for GNU Emacs C source files {c}/[ \t]*DEFVAR_[A-Z_ \t(]+"\([^"]+\)"/\1/

and then use it like this:

etags [email protected] *.[ch] */*.[ch]

Here are some more examples. The regexps are quoted to protect them from shell interpretation. Tag Octave les:
etags --language=none \ --regex=/[ \t]*function.*=[ \t]*\([^ \t]*\)[ \t]*(/\1/ \ --regex=/###key \(.*\)/\1/ \ --regex=/[ \t]*global[ \t].*/ \ *.m

Note that tags are not generated for scripts, so that you have to add a line by yourself of the form ###key scriptname if you want to jump to it. Tag Tcl les:
etags --language=none --regex=/proc[ \t]+\([^ \t]+\)/\1/ *.tcl

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs Tag VHDL les:

etags --language=none \ --regex=/[ \t]*\(ARCHITECTURE\|CONFIGURATION\) +[^ ]* +OF/ \ --regex=/[ \t]*\(ATTRIBUTE\|ENTITY\|FUNCTION\|PACKAGE\ \( BODY\)?\|PROCEDURE\|PROCESS\|TYPE\)[ \t]+\([^ \t(]+\)/\3/

317

25.3.4 Selecting a Tags Table Emacs has at any time one selected tags table. All the commands for working with tags tables use the selected one. To select a tags table, type M-x visit-tags-table, which reads the tags table le name as an argument, with TAGS in the default directory as the default. Emacs does not actually read in the tags table contents until you try to use them; all visit-tags-table does is store the le name in the variable tags-filename, and setting the variable yourself is just as good. The variables initial value is nil; that value tells all the commands for working with tags tables that they must ask for a tags table le name to use. Using visit-tags-table when a tags table is already loaded gives you a choice: you can add the new tags table to the current list of tags tables, or start a new list. The tags commands use all the tags tables in the current list. If you start a new list, the new tags table is used instead of others. If you add the new table to the current list, it is used as well as the others. You can specify a precise list of tags tables by setting the variable tags-tablelist to a list of strings, like this: (setq tags-table-list ("~/emacs" "/usr/local/lib/emacs/src")) This tells the tags commands to look at the TAGS les in your ~/emacs directory and in the /usr/local/lib/emacs/src directory. The order depends on which le you are in and which tags table mentions that le, as explained above. Do not set both tags-file-name and tags-table-list. 25.3.5 Finding a Tag The most important thing that a tags table enables you to do is to nd the denition of a specic tag. M-. tag RET Find rst denition of tag (find-tag). C-u M-. C-u - M-. Find next alternate denition of last tag specied. Go back to previous tag found.

C-M-. pattern RET Find a tag whose name matches pattern (find-tag-regexp). C-u C-M-. Find the next tag whose name matches the last pattern used.

C-x 4 . tag RET Find rst denition of tag, but display it in another window (findtag-other-window).

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

318

C-x 5 . tag RET Find rst denition of tag, and create a new frame to select the buer (find-tag-other-frame). M-* Pop back to where you previously invoked M-. and friends.

M-. (find-tag) prompts for a tag name and jumps to its source denition. It works by searching through the tags table for that tags le and approximate character position, visiting that le, and searching for the tag denition at everincreasing distances away from the recorded approximate position. When entering the tag argument to M-., the usual minibuer completion commands can be used (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29), with the tag names in the selected tags table as completion candidates. If you specify an empty argument, the balanced expression in the buer before or around point is the default argument. See Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256. You dont need to give M-. the full name of the tag; a part will do. M-. nds tags which contain that argument as a substring. However, it prefers an exact match to a substring match. To nd other tags that match the same substring, give find-tag a numeric argument, as in C-u M-. or M-0 M-.; this does not read a tag name, but continues searching the tags tables text for another tag containing the same substring last used. Like most commands that can switch buers, find-tag has a variant that displays the new buer in another window, and one that makes a new frame for it. The former is C-x 4 . (find-tag-other-window), and the latter is C-x 5 . (findtag-other-frame). To move back to previous tag denitions, use C-u - M-.; more generally, M-. with a negative numeric argument. Similarly, C-x 4 . with a negative argument nds the previous tag location in another window. As well as going back to places youve found tags recently, you can go back to places from where you found them, using M-* (pop-tag-mark). Thus you can nd and examine the denition of something with M-. and then return to where you were with M-*. Both C-u - M-. and M-* allow you to retrace your steps to a depth determined by the variable find-tag-marker-ring-length. The command C-M-. (find-tag-regexp) visits the tags that match a specied regular expression. It is just like M-. except that it does regexp matching instead of substring matching. 25.3.6 Searching and Replacing with Tags Tables The commands in this section visit and search all the les listed in the selected tags table, one by one. For these commands, the tags table serves only to specify a sequence of les to search. These commands scan the list of tags tables starting with the rst tags table (if any) that describes the current le, proceed from there to the end of the list, and then scan from the beginning of the list until they have covered all the tables in the list.

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs M-x tags-search RET regexp RET Search for regexp through the les in the selected tags table.

319

M-x tags-query-replace RET regexp RET replacement RET Perform a query-replace-regexp on each le in the selected tags table. M-, Restart one of the commands above, from the current location of point (tags-loop-continue).

M-x tags-search reads a regexp using the minibuer, then searches for matches in all the les in the selected tags table, one le at a time. It displays the name of the le being searched so you can follow its progress. As soon as it nds an occurrence, tags-search returns. Having found one match, you probably want to nd all the rest. Type M-, (tags-loop-continue) to resume the tags-search, nding one more match. This searches the rest of the current buer, followed by the remaining les of the tags table. M-x tags-query-replace performs a single query-replace-regexp through all the les in the tags table. It reads a regexp to search for and a string to replace with, just like ordinary M-x query-replace-regexp. It searches much like M-x tags-search, but repeatedly, processing matches according to your input. See Section 12.9 [Replace], page 103, for more information on query replace. You can control the case-sensitivity of tags search commands by customizing the value of the variable tags-case-fold-search. The default is to use the same setting as the value of case-fold-search (see Section 12.8 [Search Case], page 103). It is possible to get through all the les in the tags table with a single invocation of M-x tags-query-replace. But often it is useful to exit temporarily, which you can do with any input event that has no special query replace meaning. You can resume the query replace subsequently by typing M-,; this command resumes the last tags search or replace command that you did. For instance, to skip the rest of the current le, you can type M-> M-,. The commands in this section carry out much broader searches than the findtag family. The find-tag commands search only for denitions of tags that match your substring or regexp. The commands tags-search and tags-query-replace nd every occurrence of the regexp, as ordinary search commands and replace commands do in the current buer. These commands create buers only temporarily for the les that they have to search (those which are not already visited in Emacs buers). Buers in which no match is found are quickly killed; the others continue to exist. As an alternative to tags-search, you can run grep as a subprocess and have Emacs show you the matching lines one by one. See Section 24.4 [Grep Searching], page 275. 25.3.7 Tags Table Inquiries

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs C-M-i M-TAB

320

Perform completion on the text around point, using the selected tags table if one is loaded (completion-at-point).

M-x list-tags RET file RET Display a list of the tags dened in the program le le. M-x tags-apropos RET regexp RET Display a list of all tags matching regexp. In most programming language modes, you can type C-M-i or M-TAB (completion-at-point) to complete the symbol at point. If there is a selected tags table, this command can use it to generate completion candidates. See Section 23.8 [Symbol Completion], page 264. M-x list-tags reads the name of one of the les covered by the selected tags table, and displays a list of tags dened in that le. Do not include a directory as part of the le name unless the le name recorded in the tags table includes a directory. M-x tags-apropos is like apropos for tags (see Section 7.3 [Apropos], page 41). It displays a list of tags in the selected tags table whose entries match regexp. If the variable tags-apropos-verbose is non-nil, it displays the names of the tags les together with the tag names. You can customize the appearance of the output by setting the variable tags-tag-face to a face. You can display additional output by customizing the variable tags-apropos-additional-actions; see its documentation for details. M-x next-file visits les covered by the selected tags table. The rst time it is called, it visits the rst le covered by the table. Each subsequent call visits the next covered le, unless a prex argument is supplied, in which case it returns to the rst le.

25.4 Emacs Development Environment

EDE (Emacs Development Environment) is a package that simplies the task of creating, building, and debugging large programs with Emacs. It provides some of the features of an IDE, or Integrated Development Environment, in Emacs. This section provides a brief description of EDE usage. For full details on Ede, type C-h i and then select the EDE manual. EDE is implemented as a global minor mode (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). To enable it, type M-x global-ede-mode or click on the Project Support (EDE) item in the Tools menu. You can also enable EDE each time you start Emacs, by adding the following line to your initialization le:
(global-ede-mode t)

Activating EDE adds a menu named Development to the menu bar. Many EDE commands, including the ones described below, can be invoked from this menu. EDE organizes les into projects, which correspond to directory trees. The project root is the topmost directory of a project. To dene a new project, visit a le in the desired project root and type M-x ede-new. This command prompts for

Chapter 25: Maintaining Large Programs

321

a project type, which refers to the underlying method that EDE will use to manage the project (see Section Creating a Project in Emacs Development Environment). The most common project types are Make, which uses Makeles, and Automake, which uses GNU Automake (see Section Top in Automake ). In both cases, EDE also creates a le named Project.ede, which stores information about the project. A project may contain one or more targets. A target can be an object le, executable program, or some other type of le, which is built from one or more of the les in the project. To add a new target to a project, type C-c . t (M-x ede-new-target). This command also asks if you wish to add the current le to that target, which means that the target is to be built from that le. After you have dened a target, you can add more les to it by typing C-c . a (ede-add-file). To build a target, type C-c . c (ede-compile-target). To build all the targets in the project, type C-c . C (ede-compile-project). EDE uses the le types to guess how the target should be built.

Chapter 26: Abbrevs

322

26 Abbrevs
A dened abbrev is a word which expands, if you insert it, into some dierent text. Abbrevs are dened by the user to expand in specic ways. For example, you might dene foo as an abbrev expanding to find outer otter. Then you could insert find outer otter into the buer by typing f o o SPC. A second kind of abbreviation facility is called dynamic abbrev expansion. You use dynamic abbrev expansion with an explicit command to expand the letters in the buer before point by looking for other words in the buer that start with those letters. See Section 26.6 [Dynamic Abbrevs], page 326. Hippie expansion generalizes abbreviation expansion. See Section Hippie Expansion in Features for Automatic Typing .

26.1 Abbrev Concepts

An abbrev is a word that has been dened to expand into a specied expansion. When you insert a word-separator character following the abbrev, that expands the abbrevreplacing the abbrev with its expansion. For example, if foo is dened as an abbrev expanding to find outer otter, then typing f o o . will insert find outer otter.. Abbrevs expand only when Abbrev mode, a buer-local minor mode, is enabled. Disabling Abbrev mode does not cause abbrev denitions to be forgotten, but they do not expand until Abbrev mode is enabled again. The command M-x abbrev-mode toggles Abbrev mode; with a numeric argument, it turns Abbrev mode on if the argument is positive, o otherwise. See Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205. Abbrevs can have mode-specic denitions, active only in one major mode. Abbrevs can also have global denitions that are active in all major modes. The same abbrev can have a global denition and various mode-specic denitions for dierent major modes. A mode-specic denition for the current major mode overrides a global denition. You can dene abbrevs interactively during the editing session, irrespective of whether Abbrev mode is enabled. You can also save lists of abbrev denitions in les, which you can the reload for use in later sessions.

26.2 Dening Abbrevs

C-x a g C-x a l C-x a i g C-x a i l Dene an abbrev, using one or more words before point as its expansion (add-global-abbrev). Similar, but dene an abbrev specic to the current major mode (addmode-abbrev). Dene a word in the buer as an abbrev (inverse-add-globalabbrev). Dene a word in the buer as a mode-specic abbrev (inverse-addmode-abbrev).

Chapter 26: Abbrevs M-x define-global-abbrev RET abbrev RET exp RET Dene abbrev as an abbrev expanding into exp. M-x define-mode-abbrev RET abbrev RET exp RET Dene abbrev as a mode-specic abbrev expanding into exp. M-x kill-all-abbrevs Discard all abbrev denitions, leaving a blank slate.

323

The usual way to dene an abbrev is to enter the text you want the abbrev to expand to, position point after it, and type C-x a g (add-global-abbrev). This reads the abbrev itself using the minibuer, and then denes it as an abbrev for one or more words before point. Use a numeric argument to say how many words before point should be taken as the expansion. For example, to dene the abbrev foo as mentioned above, insert the text find outer otter and then type C-u 3 C-x a g f o o RET. An argument of zero to C-x a g means to use the contents of the region as the expansion of the abbrev being dened. The command C-x a l (add-mode-abbrev) is similar, but denes a mode-specic abbrev for the current major mode. The arguments work the same as for C-x a g. C-x a i g (inverse-add-global-abbrev) and C-x a i l (inverse-add-modeabbrev) perform the opposite task: if the abbrev text is already in the buer, you use these commands to dene an abbrev by specifying the expansion in the minibuer. These commands will expand the abbrev text used for the denition. You can dene an abbrev without inserting either the abbrev or its expansion in the buer using the command define-global-abbrev. It reads two arguments the abbrev, and its expansion. The command define-mode-abbrev does likewise for a mode-specic abbrev. To change the denition of an abbrev, just make a new denition. When an abbrev has a prior denition, the abbrev denition commands ask for conrmation before replacing it. To remove an abbrev denition, give a negative argument to the abbrev denition command: C-u - C-x a g or C-u - C-x a l. The former removes a global denition, while the latter removes a mode-specic denition. M-x kill-all-abbrevs removes all abbrev denitions, both global and local.

26.3 Controlling Abbrev Expansion

When Abbrev mode is enabled, an abbrev expands whenever it is present in the buer just before point and you type a self-inserting whitespace or punctuation character (SPC, comma, etc.). More precisely, any character that is not a word constituent expands an abbrev, and any word-constituent character can be part of an abbrev. The most common way to use an abbrev is to insert it and then insert a punctuation or whitespace character to expand it. Abbrev expansion preserves case: foo expands to find outer otter, and Foo to Find outer otter. FOO expands to Find Outer Otter by default, but if you change the variable abbrev-all-caps to a non-nil value, it expands to FIND OUTER OTTER.

Chapter 26: Abbrevs These commands are used to control abbrev expansion: M- C-x a e

324

Separate a prex from a following abbrev to be expanded (abbrevprefix-mark). Expand the abbrev before point (expand-abbrev). This is eective even when Abbrev mode is not enabled.

M-x expand-region-abbrevs Expand some or all abbrevs found in the region. You may wish to expand an abbrev and attach a prex to the expansion; for example, if cnst expands into construction, you might want to use it to enter reconstruction. It does not work to type recnst, because that is not necessarily a dened abbrev. What you can do is use the command M- (abbrev-prefix-mark) in between the prex re and the abbrev cnst. First, insert re. Then type M-; this inserts a hyphen in the buer to indicate that it has done its work. Then insert the abbrev cnst; the buer now contains re-cnst. Now insert a non-word character to expand the abbrev cnst into construction. This expansion step also deletes the hyphen that indicated M- had been used. The result is the desired reconstruction. If you actually want the text of the abbrev in the buer, rather than its expansion, you can accomplish this by inserting the following punctuation with C-q. Thus, foo C-q , leaves foo, in the buer, not expanding it. If you expand an abbrev by mistake, you can undo the expansion by typing C-/ (undo). See Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110. This undoes the insertion of the abbrev expansion and brings back the abbrev text. If the result you want is the terminating non-word character plus the unexpanded abbrev, you must reinsert the terminating character, quoting it with C-q. You can also use the command M-x unexpand-abbrev to cancel the last expansion without deleting the terminating character. M-x expand-region-abbrevs searches through the region for dened abbrevs, and for each one found oers to replace it with its expansion. This command is useful if you have typed in text using abbrevs but forgot to turn on Abbrev mode rst. It may also be useful together with a special set of abbrev denitions for making several global replacements at once. This command is eective even if Abbrev mode is not enabled. Expanding any abbrev runs abbrev-expand-functions, a special hook. Functions in this special hook can make arbitrary changes to the abbrev expansion. See Section Abbrev Expansion in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

26.4 Examining and Editing Abbrevs

M-x list-abbrevs Display a list of all abbrev denitions. With a numeric argument, list only local abbrevs. M-x edit-abbrevs Edit a list of abbrevs; you can add, alter or remove denitions.

Chapter 26: Abbrevs

325

The output from M-x list-abbrevs looks like this: various other tables... (lisp-mode-abbrev-table) "dk" 0 "define-key" (global-abbrev-table) "dfn" 0 "definition" (Some blank lines of no semantic signicance, and some other abbrev tables, have been omitted.) A line containing a name in parentheses is the header for abbrevs in a particular abbrev table; global-abbrev-table contains all the global abbrevs, and the other abbrev tables that are named after major modes contain the mode-specic abbrevs. Within each abbrev table, each nonblank line denes one abbrev. The word at the beginning of the line is the abbrev. The number that follows is the number of times the abbrev has been expanded. Emacs keeps track of this to help you see which abbrevs you actually use, so that you can eliminate those that you dont use often. The string at the end of the line is the expansion. Some abbrevs are marked with (sys). These system abbrevs (see Section Abbrevs in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ) are pre-dened by various modes, and are not saved to your abbrev le. To disable a system abbrev, dene an abbrev of the same name that expands to itself, and save it to your abbrev le. M-x edit-abbrevs allows you to add, change or kill abbrev denitions by editing a list of them in an Emacs buer. The list has the same format described above. The buer of abbrevs is called *Abbrevs*, and is in Edit-Abbrevs mode. Type C-c C-c in this buer to install the abbrev denitions as specied in the buerand delete any abbrev denitions not listed. The command edit-abbrevs is actually the same as list-abbrevs except that it selects the buer *Abbrevs* whereas list-abbrevs merely displays it in another window.

26.5 Saving Abbrevs

These commands allow you to keep abbrev denitions between editing sessions. M-x write-abbrev-file RET file RET Write a le le describing all dened abbrevs. M-x read-abbrev-file RET file RET Read the le le and dene abbrevs as specied therein. M-x define-abbrevs Dene abbrevs from denitions in current buer. M-x insert-abbrevs Insert all abbrevs and their expansions into current buer. M-x write-abbrev-file reads a le name using the minibuer and then writes a description of all current abbrev denitions into that le. This is used to save abbrev denitions for use in a later session. The text stored in the le is a series of

Chapter 26: Abbrevs

326

Lisp expressions that, when executed, dene the same abbrevs that you currently have. M-x read-abbrev-file reads a le name using the minibuer and then reads the le, dening abbrevs according to the contents of the le. The function quietlyread-abbrev-file is similar except that it does not display a message in the echo area; you cannot invoke it interactively, and it is used primarily in your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). If either of these functions is called with nil as the argument, it uses the le given by the variable abbrev-file-name, which is ~/.emacs.d/abbrev_defs by default. This is your standard abbrev denition le, and Emacs loads abbrevs from it automatically when it starts up. (As an exception, Emacs does not load the abbrev le when it is started in batch mode. See Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507, for a description of batch mode.) Emacs will oer to save abbrevs automatically if you have changed any of them, whenever it oers to save all les (for C-x s or C-x C-c). It saves them in the le specied by abbrev-file-name. This feature can be inhibited by setting the variable save-abbrevs to nil. The commands M-x insert-abbrevs and M-x define-abbrevs are similar to the previous commands but work on text in an Emacs buer. M-x insert-abbrevs inserts text into the current buer after point, describing all current abbrev denitions; M-x define-abbrevs parses the entire current buer and denes abbrevs accordingly.

26.6 Dynamic Abbrev Expansion

The abbrev facility described above operates automatically as you insert text, but all abbrevs must be dened explicitly. By contrast, dynamic abbrevs allow the meanings of abbreviations to be determined automatically from the contents of the buer, but dynamic abbrev expansion happens only when you request it explicitly. M-/ Expand the word in the buer before point as a dynamic abbrev, by searching in the buer for words starting with that abbreviation (dabbrev-expand). Complete the word before point as a dynamic abbrev (dabbrevcompletion).

C-M-/

For example, if the buer contains does this follow and you type f o M-/, the eect is to insert follow because that is the last word in the buer that starts with fo. A numeric argument to M-/ says to take the second, third, etc. distinct expansion found looking backward from point. Repeating M-/ searches for an alternative expansion by looking farther back. After scanning all the text before point, it searches the text after point. The variable dabbrev-limit, if non-nil, species how far away in the buer to search for an expansion. After scanning the current buer, M-/ normally searches other buers, unless you have set dabbrev-check-all-buffers to nil. For ner control over which buers to scan, customize the variable dabbrevignored-buffer-regexps. Its value is a list of regular expressions. If a buers

Chapter 26: Abbrevs

327

name matches any of these regular expressions, dynamic abbrev expansion skips that buer. A negative argument to M-/, as in C-u - M-/, says to search rst for expansions after point, then other buers, and consider expansions before point only as a last resort. If you repeat the M-/ to look for another expansion, do not specify an argument. Repeating M-/ cycles through all the expansions after point and then the expansions before point. After you have expanded a dynamic abbrev, you can copy additional words that follow the expansion in its original context. Simply type SPC M-/ for each additional word you want to copy. The spacing and punctuation between words is copied along with the words. The command C-M-/ (dabbrev-completion) performs completion of a dynamic abbrev. Instead of trying the possible expansions one by one, it nds all of them, then inserts the text that they have in common. If they have nothing in common, C-M-/ displays a list of completions, from which you can select a choice in the usual manner. See Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29. Dynamic abbrev expansion is completely independent of Abbrev mode; the expansion of a word with M-/ is completely independent of whether it has a denition as an ordinary abbrev.

26.7 Customizing Dynamic Abbreviation

Normally, dynamic abbrev expansion ignores case when searching for expansions. That is, the expansion need not agree in case with the word you are expanding. This feature is controlled by the variable dabbrev-case-fold-search. If it is t, case is ignored in this search; if it is nil, the word and the expansion must match in case. If the value is case-fold-search (the default), then the variable case-fold-search controls whether to ignore case while searching for expansions (see Section 12.8 [Search Case], page 103). Normally, dynamic abbrev expansion preserves the case pattern of the dynamic abbrev you are expanding, by converting the expansion to that case pattern. The variable dabbrev-case-replace controls whether to preserve the case pattern of the dynamic abbrev. If it is t, the dynamic abbrevs case pattern is preserved in most cases; if it is nil, the expansion is always copied verbatim. If the value is case-replace (the default), then the variable case-replace controls whether to copy the expansion verbatim (see Section 12.9.3 [Replacement and Case], page 105). However, if the expansion contains a complex mixed case pattern, and the dynamic abbrev matches this pattern as far as it goes, then the expansion is always copied verbatim, regardless of those variables. Thus, for example, if the buer contains variableWithSillyCasePattern, and you type v a M-/, it copies the expansion verbatim including its case pattern. The variable dabbrev-abbrev-char-regexp, if non-nil, controls which characters are considered part of a word, for dynamic expansion purposes. The regular expression must match just one character, never two or more. The same regular expression also determines which characters are part of an expansion. The value

Chapter 26: Abbrevs

328

nil has a special meaning: dynamic abbrevs are made of word characters, but expansions are made of word and symbol characters. In shell scripts and makeles, a variable name is sometimes prexed with $ and sometimes not. Major modes for this kind of text can customize dynamic abbrev expansion to handle optional prexes by setting the variable dabbrev-abbrevskip-leading-regexp. Its value should be a regular expression that matches the optional prex that dynamic abbrev expression should ignore.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

329

27 Dired, the Directory Editor

Dired makes an Emacs buer containing a listing of a directory, and optionally some of its subdirectories as well. You can use the normal Emacs commands to move around in this buer, and special Dired commands to operate on the listed les. The Dired buer is read-only, and inserting text in it is not allowed. Ordinary printing characters such as d and x are redened for special Dired commands. Some Dired commands mark or ag the current le (that is, the le on the current line); other commands operate on the marked les or on the agged les. You rst mark certain les in order to operate on all of them with one command. The Dired-X package provides various extra features for Dired mode. See Section Top in Dired Extra Users Manual . You can also view a list of les in a directory with C-x C-d (list-directory). Unlike Dired, this command does not allow you to operate on the listed les. See Section 15.7 [Directories], page 139.

27.1 Entering Dired

To invoke Dired, type C-x d (dired). This reads a directory name using the minibuer, and opens a Dired buer listing the les in that directory. You can also supply a wildcard le name pattern as the minibuer argument, in which case the Dired buer lists all les matching that pattern. The usual history and completion commands can be used in the minibuer; in particular, M-n puts the name of the visited le (if any) in the minibuer (see Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34). You can also invoke Dired by giving C-x C-f (find-file) a directory name. The variable dired-listing-switches species the options to give to ls for listing the directory; this string must contain -l. If you use a prex argument with the dired command, you can specify the ls switches with the minibuer before you enter the directory specication. No matter how they are specied, the ls switches can include short options (that is, single characters) requiring no arguments, and long options (starting with --) whose arguments are specied with =. If your ls program supports the --dired option, Dired automatically passes it that option; this causes ls to emit special escape sequences for certain unusual le names, without which Dired will not be able to parse those names. The rst time you run Dired in an Emacs session, it checks whether ls supports the --dired option by calling it once with that option. If the exit code is 0, Dired will subsequently use the --dired option; otherwise it will not. You can inhibit this check by customizing the variable dired-use-ls-dired. The value unspecified (the default) means to perform the check; any other non-nil value means to use the --dired option; and nil means not to use the --dired option. On MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems, Emacs emulates ls. See Section G.4 [ls in Lisp], page 538, for options and peculiarities of this emulation. To display the Dired buer in another window, use C-x 4 d (dired-otherwindow). C-x 5 d (dired-other-frame) displays the Dired buer in a separate frame.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

330

Typing q (quit-window) buries the Dired buer, and deletes its window if the window was created just for that buer.

27.2 Navigation in the Dired Buer

All the usual Emacs cursor motion commands are available in Dired buers. The keys C-n and C-p are redened to put the cursor at the beginning of the le name on the line, rather than at the beginning of the line. For extra convenience, SPC and n in Dired are equivalent to C-n. p is equivalent to C-p. (Moving by lines is so common in Dired that it deserves to be easy to type.) DEL (move up and unag) is also often useful simply for moving up (see Section 27.3 [Dired Deletion], page 330). j (dired-goto-file) prompts for a le name using the minibuer, and moves point to the line in the Dired buer describing that le. M-s f C-s (dired-isearch-filenames) performs a forward incremental search in the Dired buer, looking for matches only amongst the le names and ignoring the rest of the text in the buer. M-s f M-C-s (dired-isearch-filenames-regexp) does the same, using a regular expression search. If you change the variable diredisearch-filenames to t, then the usual search commands also limit themselves to the le names; for instance, C-s behaves like M-s f C-s. If the value is dwim, then search commands match the le names only when point was on a le name initially. See Chapter 12 [Search], page 91, for information about incremental search. Some additional navigation commands are available when the Dired buer includes several directories. See Section 27.12 [Subdirectory Motion], page 340.

27.3 Deleting Files with Dired

One of the most frequent uses of Dired is to rst ag les for deletion, then delete the les that were agged. d u DEL x Flag this le for deletion. Remove deletion ag on this line. Move point to previous line and remove the deletion ag on that line. Delete the les that are agged for deletion.

You can ag a le for deletion by moving to the line describing the le and typing d (dired-flag-file-deletion). The deletion ag is visible as a D at the beginning of the line. This command moves point to the next line, so that repeated d commands ag successive les. A numeric argument serves as a repeat count. The reason for agging les for deletion, rather than deleting les immediately, is to reduce the danger of deleting a le accidentally. Until you direct Dired to delete the agged les, you can remove deletion ags using the commands u and DEL. u (dired-unmark) works just like d, but removes ags rather than making ags. DEL (dired-unmark-backward) moves upward, removing ags; it is like u with argument 1.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

331

To delete the agged les, type x (dired-do-flagged-delete). This command rst displays a list of all the le names agged for deletion, and requests conrmation with yes. If you conrm, Dired deletes the agged les, then deletes their lines from the text of the Dired buer. The Dired buer, with somewhat fewer lines, remains selected. If you answer no or quit with C-g when asked to conrm, you return immediately to Dired, with the deletion ags still present in the buer, and no les actually deleted. You can delete empty directories just like other les, but normally Dired cannot delete directories that are nonempty. If the variable dired-recursive-deletes is non-nil, then Dired can delete nonempty directories including all their contents. That can be somewhat risky. If you change the variable delete-by-moving-to-trash to t, the above deletion commands will move the aected les or directories into the operating systems Trash, instead of deleting them outright. See Section 15.10 [Misc File Ops], page 143.

27.4 Flagging Many Files at Once

The #, ~, ., % &, and % d commands ag many les for deletion, based on their le names: # ~ . (Period) %& Flag all auto-save les (les whose names start and end with #) for deletion (see Section 15.5 [Auto Save], page 136). Flag all backup les (les whose names end with ~) for deletion (see Section 15.3.2 [Backup], page 130). Flag excess numeric backup les for deletion. The oldest and newest few backup les of any one le are exempt; the middle ones are agged. Flag for deletion all les with certain kinds of names which suggest you could easily create those les again.

% d regexp RET Flag for deletion all les whose names match the regular expression regexp. # (dired-flag-auto-save-files) ags all les whose names look like autosave lesthat is, les whose names begin and end with #. See Section 15.5 [Auto Save], page 136. ~ (dired-flag-backup-files) ags all les whose names say they are backup lesthat is, les whose names end in ~. See Section 15.3.2 [Backup], page 130. . (period, dired-clean-directory) ags just some of the backup les for deletion: all but the oldest few and newest few backups of any one le. Normally, the number of newest versions kept for each le is given by the variable dired-keptversions (not kept-new-versions; that applies only when saving). The number of oldest versions to keep is given by the variable kept-old-versions.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

332

Period with a positive numeric argument, as in C-u 3 ., species the number of newest versions to keep, overriding dired-kept-versions. A negative numeric argument overrides kept-old-versions, using minus the value of the argument to specify the number of oldest versions of each le to keep. % & (dired-flag-garbage-files) ags les whose names match the regular expression specied by the variable dired-garbage-files-regexp. By default, this matches certain les produced by TEX, .bak les, and the .orig and .rej les produced by patch. % d ags all les whose names match a specied regular expression (dired-flagfiles-regexp). Only the non-directory part of the le name is used in matching. You can use ^ and $ to anchor matches. You can exclude certain subdirectories from marking by hiding them while you use % d. See Section 27.13 [Hiding Subdirectories], page 340.

27.5 Visiting Files in Dired

There are several Dired commands for visiting or examining the les listed in the Dired buer. All of them apply to the current lines le; if that le is really a directory, these commands invoke Dired on that subdirectory (making a separate Dired buer). f Visit the le described on the current line, like typing C-x C-f and supplying that le name (dired-find-file). See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125. Equivalent to f. Like f, but uses another window to display the les buer (diredfind-file-other-window). The Dired buer remains visible in the rst window. This is like using C-x 4 C-f to visit the le. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. Visit the le described on the current line, and display the buer in another window, but do not select that window (dired-displayfile). Visit the le whose name you clicked on (dired-mouse-find-fileother-window). This uses another window to display the le, like the o command. View the le described on the current line, with View mode (diredview-file). View mode provides convenient commands to navigate the buer but forbids changing it; See Section 11.6 [View Mode], page 75. Visit the parent directory of the current directory (dired-updirectory). This is equivalent to moving to the line for .. and typing f there.

RET e o

C-o

Mouse-1 Mouse-2

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

333

27.6 Dired Marks vs. Flags

Instead of agging a le with D, you can mark the le with some other character (usually *). Most Dired commands to operate on les use the les marked with *. The only command that operates on agged les is x, which deletes them. Here are some commands for marking with *, for unmarking, and for operating on marks. (See Section 27.3 [Dired Deletion], page 330, for commands to ag and unag les.) m *m Mark the current le with * (dired-mark). With a numeric argument n, mark the next n les starting with the current le. (If n is negative, mark the previous n les.) Mark all executable les with * (dired-mark-executables). With a numeric argument, unmark all those les. Mark all symbolic links with * (dired-mark-symlinks). With a numeric argument, unmark all those les. Mark with * all les which are directories, except for . and .. (dired-mark-directories). With a numeric argument, unmark all those les. Mark all the les in the current subdirectory, aside from . and .. (dired-mark-subdir-files). Remove any mark on this line (dired-unmark). Move point to previous line and remove any mark on that line (diredunmark-backward). Remove all marks from all the les in this Dired buer (dired-unmarkall-marks).

** *@ */

*s u *u DEL * DEL *! U

* ? markchar M-DEL Remove all marks that use the character markchar (dired-unmarkall-files). The argument is a single characterdo not use RET to terminate it. See the description of the * c command below, which lets you replace one mark character with another. With a numeric argument, this command queries about each marked le, asking whether to remove its mark. You can answer y meaning yes, n meaning no, or ! to remove the marks from the remaining les without asking about them. * C-n M-} Move down to the next marked le (dired-next-marked-file) A le is marked if it has any kind of mark.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor * C-p M-{ t *t

334

Move up to the previous marked le (dired-prev-marked-file) Toggle all marks (dired-toggle-marks): les marked with * become unmarked, and unmarked les are marked with *. Files marked in any other way are not aected.

* c old-markchar new-markchar Replace all marks that use the character old-markchar with marks that use the character new-markchar (dired-change-marks). This command is the primary way to create or use marks other than * or D. The arguments are single charactersdo not use RET to terminate them. You can use almost any character as a mark character by means of this command, to distinguish various classes of les. If old-markchar is a space ( ), then the command operates on all unmarked les; if new-markchar is a space, then the command unmarks the les it acts on. To illustrate the power of this command, here is how to put D ags on all the les that have no marks, while unagging all those that already have D ags: * c D t * c SPC D * c t SPC This assumes that no les were already marked with t. % m regexp RET * % regexp RET Mark (with *) all les whose names match the regular expression regexp (dired-mark-files-regexp). This command is like % d, except that it marks les with * instead of agging with D. Only the non-directory part of the le name is used in matching. Use ^ and $ to anchor matches. You can exclude subdirectories by temporarily hiding them (see Section 27.13 [Hiding Subdirectories], page 340). % g regexp RET Mark (with *) all les whose contents contain a match for the regular expression regexp (dired-mark-files-containing-regexp). This command is like % m, except that it searches the le contents instead of the le name. C-/ C-x u C-_

Undo changes in the Dired buer, such as adding or removing marks (dired-undo). This command does not revert the actual le operations, nor recover lost les! It just undoes changes in the buer itself. In some cases, using this after commands that operate on les can cause trouble. For example, after renaming one or more les, dired-

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

335

undo restores the original names in the Dired buer, which gets the Dired buer out of sync with the actual contents of the directory.

27.7 Operating on Files

This section describes the basic Dired commands to operate on one le or several les. All of these commands are capital letters; all of them use the minibuer, either to read an argument or to ask for conrmation, before they act. All of them let you specify the les to manipulate in these ways: If you give the command a numeric prex argument n, it operates on the next n les, starting with the current le. (If n is negative, the command operates on the n les preceding the current line.) Otherwise, if some les are marked with *, the command operates on all those les. Otherwise, the command operates on the current le only. Certain other Dired commands, such as ! and the % commands, use the same conventions to decide which les to work on. Commands which ask for a destination directory, such as those which copy and rename les or create links for them, try to guess the default target directory for the operation. Normally, they suggest the Dired buers default directory, but if the variable dired-dwim-target is non-nil, and if there is another Dired buer displayed in the next window, that other buers directory is suggested instead. Here are the le-manipulating Dired commands that operate on les. C new RET Copy the specied les (dired-do-copy). The argument new is the directory to copy into, or (if copying a single le) the new name. This is like the shell command cp. If dired-copy-preserve-time is non-nil, then copying with this command preserves the modication time of the old le in the copy, like cp -p. The variable dired-recursive-copies controls whether to copy directories recursively (like cp -r). The default is top, which means to ask before recursively copying a directory. Delete the specied les (dired-do-delete). This is like the shell command rm. Like the other commands in this section, this command operates on the marked les, or the next n les. By contrast, x (dired-do-flaggeddelete) deletes all agged les. Rename the specied les (dired-do-rename). If you rename a single le, the argument new is the new name of the le. If you rename several les, the argument new is the directory into which to move the les (this is like the shell command mv). Dired automatically changes the visited le name of buers associated with renamed les so that they refer to the new names.

R new RET

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor H new RET

336

Make hard links to the specied les (dired-do-hardlink). This is like the shell command ln. The argument new is the directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the name to give the link. Make symbolic links to the specied les (dired-do-symlink). This is like ln -s. The argument new is the directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the name to give the link.

S new RET

M modespec RET Change the mode (also called permission bits ) of the specied les (dired-do-chmod). modespec can be in octal or symbolic notation, like arguments handled by the chmod program. G newgroup RET Change the group of the specied les to newgroup (dired-do-chgrp). O newowner RET Change the owner of the specied les to newowner (dired-dochown). (On most systems, only the superuser can do this.) The variable dired-chown-program species the name of the program to use to do the work (dierent systems put chown in dierent places). T timestamp RET Touch the specied les (dired-do-touch). This means updating their modication times to the present time. This is like the shell command touch. P command RET Print the specied les (dired-do-print). You must specify the command to print them with, but the minibuer starts out with a suitable guess made using the variables lpr-command and lpr-switches (the same variables that lpr-buffer uses; see Section 31.5 [Printing], page 417). Z :d :v :s :e L Compress the specied les (dired-do-compress). If the le appears to be a compressed le already, uncompress it instead. Decrypt the specied les (epa-dired-do-decrypt). See Section Dired integration in EasyPG Assistant Users Manual . Verify digital signatures on the specied les (epa-dired-do-verify). See Section Dired integration in EasyPG Assistant Users Manual . Digitally sign the specied les (epa-dired-do-sign). See Section Dired integration in EasyPG Assistant Users Manual . Encrypt the specied les (epa-dired-do-encrypt). See Section Dired integration in EasyPG Assistant Users Manual . Load the specied Emacs Lisp les (dired-do-load). See Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor B

337

Byte compile the specied Emacs Lisp les (dired-do-bytecompile). See Section Byte Compilation in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

A regexp RET Search all the specied les for the regular expression regexp (direddo-search). This command is a variant of tags-search. The search stops at the rst match it nds; use M-, to resume the search and nd the next match. See Section 25.3.6 [Tags Search], page 318. Q regexp RET to RET Perform query-replace-regexp on each of the specied les, replacing matches for regexp with the string to (dired-do-query-replaceregexp). This command is a variant of tags-query-replace. If you exit the query replace loop, you can use M-, to resume the scan and replace more matches. See Section 25.3.6 [Tags Search], page 318.

27.8 Shell Commands in Dired

The Dired command ! (dired-do-shell-command) reads a shell command string in the minibuer and runs that shell command on one or more les. The les that the shell command operates on are determined in the usual way for Dired commands (see Section 27.7 [Operating on Files], page 335). The command X is a synonym for !. The command & (dired-do-async-shell-command) does the same, except that it runs the shell command asynchronously. You can also do this with !, by appending a & character to the end of the shell command. For both ! and &, the working directory for the shell command is the top-level directory of the Dired buer. If you tell ! or & to operate on more than one le, the shell command string determines how those les are passed to the shell command: If you use * surrounded by whitespace in the command string, then the command runs just once, with the list of le names substituted for the *. The order of le names is the order of appearance in the Dired buer. Thus, ! tar cf foo.tar * RET runs tar on the entire list of le names, putting them into one tar le foo.tar. If you want to use * as a shell wildcard with whitespace around it, write *"". In the shell, this is equivalent to *; but since the * is not surrounded by whitespace, Dired does not treat it specially. Otherwise, if the command string contains ? surrounded by whitespace, Emacs runs the shell command once for each le, substituting the current le name for ? each time. You can use ? more than once in the command; the same le name replaces each occurrence.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

338

If the command string contains neither * nor ?, Emacs runs the shell command once for each le, adding the le name at the end. For example, ! uudecode RET runs uudecode on each le. To iterate over the le names in a more complicated fashion, use an explicit shell loop. For example, here is how to uuencode each le, making the output le name by appending .uu to the input le name: for file in * ; do uuencode "$file" "$file" >"$file".uu; done The ! and & commands do not attempt to update the Dired buer to show new or modied les, because they dont know what les will be changed. Use the g command to update the Dired buer (see Section 27.14 [Dired Updating], page 341). See Section 31.3.1 [Single Shell], page 402, for information about running shell commands outside Dired.

27.9 Transforming File Names in Dired

This section describes Dired commands which alter le names in a systematic way. Each command operates on some or all of the marked les, using a new name made by transforming the existing name. Like the basic Dired le-manipulation commands (see Section 27.7 [Operating on Files], page 335), the commands described here operate either on the next n les, or on all les marked with *, or on the current le. (To mark les, use the commands described in Section 27.6 [Marks vs Flags], page 333.) All of the commands described in this section work interactively : they ask you to conrm the operation for each candidate le. Thus, you can select more les than you actually need to operate on (e.g., with a regexp that matches many les), and then lter the selected names by typing y or n when the command prompts for conrmation. %u Rename each of the selected les to an upper-case name (diredupcase). If the old le names are Foo and bar, the new names are FOO and BAR. Rename each of the selected les to a lower-case name (direddowncase). If the old le names are Foo and bar, the new names are foo and bar. from from from from RET to RET RET to RET RET to RET RET to RET These four commands rename, copy, make hard links and make soft links, in each case computing the new name by regular-expression substitution from the name of the old le.

%l

% % % %

R C H S

The four regular-expression substitution commands eectively perform a searchand-replace on the selected le names. They read two arguments: a regular expression from, and a substitution pattern to ; they match each old le name against from, and then replace the matching part with to. You can use \& and \digit

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

339

in to to refer to all or part of what the pattern matched in the old le name, as in replace-regexp (see Section 12.9.2 [Regexp Replace], page 104). If the regular expression matches more than once in a le name, only the rst match is replaced. For example, % R ^.*$ RET x-\& RET renames each selected le by prepending x- to its name. The inverse of this, removing x- from the front of each le name, is also possible: one method is % R ^x-\(.*\)$ RET \1 RET; another is % R ^x- RET RET. (Use ^ and $ to anchor matches that should span the whole le name.) Normally, the replacement process does not consider the les directory names; it operates on the le name within the directory. If you specify a numeric argument of zero, then replacement aects the entire absolute le name including directory name. (A non-zero argument species the number of les to operate on.) You may want to select the set of les to operate on using the same regexp from that you will use to operate on them. To do this, mark those les with % m from RET, then use the same regular expression in the command to operate on the les. To make this more convenient, the % commands to operate on les use the last regular expression specied in any % command as a default.

27.10 File Comparison with Dired

Here are two Dired commands that compare specied les using diff. They show the output in a buer using Di mode (see Section 15.8 [Comparing Files], page 140). = Compare the current le (the le at point) with another le (the le at the mark) using the diff program (dired-diff). The le at the mark is the rst argument of diff, and the le at point is the second argument. This refers to the ordinary Emacs mark, not Dired marks; use C-SPC (set-mark-command) to set the mark at the rst les line (see Section 8.1 [Setting Mark], page 47). Compare the current le with its latest backup le (dired-backupdiff). If the current le is itself a backup, compare it with the le it is a backup of; this way, you can compare a le with any one of its backups. The backup le is the rst le given to diff.

M-=

27.11 Subdirectories in Dired

A Dired buer usually displays just one directory, but you can optionally include its subdirectories as well. The simplest way to include multiple directories in one Dired buer is to specify the options -lR for running ls. (If you give a numeric argument when you run Dired, then you can specify these options in the minibuer.) That produces a recursive directory listing showing all subdirectories at all levels. More often, you will want to show only specic subdirectories. You can do this with i (dired-maybe-insert-subdir): i Insert the contents of a subdirectory later in the buer.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

340

If you use this command on a line that describes a le which is a directory, it inserts the contents of that directory into the same Dired buer, and moves there. Inserted subdirectory contents follow the top-level directory of the Dired buer, just as they do in ls -lR output. If the subdirectorys contents are already present in the buer, the i command just moves to it. In either case, i sets the Emacs mark before moving, so C-u C-SPC returns to your previous position in the Dired buer (see Section 8.1 [Setting Mark], page 47). You can also use ^ to return to the parent directory in the same Dired buer (see Section 27.5 [Dired Visiting], page 332). Use the l command (dired-do-redisplay) to update the subdirectorys contents, and use C-u k on the subdirectory header line to remove the subdirectory listing (see Section 27.14 [Dired Updating], page 341). You can also hide and show inserted subdirectories (see Section 27.13 [Hiding Subdirectories], page 340).

27.12 Moving Over Subdirectories

When a Dired buer lists subdirectories, you can use the page motion commands C-x [ and C-x ] to move by entire directories (see Section 22.4 [Pages], page 217). The following commands move across, up and down in the tree of directories within one Dired buer. They move to directory header lines, which are the lines that give a directorys name, at the beginning of the directorys contents. C-M-n C-M-p C-M-u C-M-d < Go to next subdirectory header line, regardless of level (dired-nextsubdir). Go to previous subdirectory header line, regardless of level (diredprev-subdir). Go up to the parent directorys header line (dired-tree-up). Go down in the directory tree, to the rst subdirectorys header line (dired-tree-down). Move up to the previous directory-le line (dired-prev-dirline). These lines are the ones that describe a directory as a le in its parent directory. Move down to the next directory-le line (dired-prev-dirline).

>

27.13 Hiding Subdirectories

Hiding a subdirectory means to make it invisible, except for its header line. $ Hide or show the subdirectory that point is in, and move point to the next subdirectory (dired-hide-subdir). This is a toggle. A numeric argument serves as a repeat count. Hide all subdirectories in this Dired buer, leaving only their header lines (dired-hide-all). Or, if any subdirectory is currently hidden,

M-$

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

341

make all subdirectories visible again. You can use this command to get an overview in very deep directory trees or to move quickly to subdirectories far away. Ordinary Dired commands never consider les inside a hidden subdirectory. For example, the commands to operate on marked les ignore les in hidden directories even if they are marked. Thus you can use hiding to temporarily exclude subdirectories from operations without having to remove the Dired marks on les in those subdirectories. See Section 27.14 [Dired Updating], page 341, for how to insert or delete a subdirectory listing.

27.14 Updating the Dired Buer

This section describes commands to update the Dired buer to reect outside (nonDired) changes in the directories and les, and to delete part of the Dired buer. g l k s Update the entire contents of the Dired buer (revert-buffer). Update the specied les (dired-do-redisplay). You specify the les for l in the same way as for le operations. Delete the specied le linesnot the les, just the lines (dired-dokill-lines). Toggle between alphabetical order and date/time order (dired-sorttoggle-or-edit).

C-u s switches RET Refresh the Dired buer using switches as dired-listing-switches. Type g (revert-buffer) to update the contents of the Dired buer, based on changes in the les and directories listed. This preserves all marks except for those on les that have vanished. Hidden subdirectories are updated but remain hidden. To update only some of the les, type l (dired-do-redisplay). Like the Dired le-operating commands, this command operates on the next n les (or previous n les), or on the marked les if any, or on the current le. Updating the les means reading their current status, then updating their lines in the buer to indicate that status. If you use l on a subdirectory header line, it updates the contents of the corresponding subdirectory. If you use C-x d or some other Dired command to visit a directory that is already being shown in a Dired buer, Dired switches to that buer but does not update it. If the buer is not up-to-date, Dired displays a warning telling you to type G to update it. You can also tell Emacs to revert each Dired buer automatically when you revisit it, by setting the variable dired-auto-revert-buffer to a non-nil value. To delete the specied le lines from the buernot delete the lestype k (dired-do-kill-lines). Like the le-operating commands, this command oper-

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

342

ates on the next n les, or on the marked les if any; but it does not operate on the current le as a last resort. If you use k with a numeric prex argument to kill the line for a le that is a directory, which you have inserted in the Dired buer as a subdirectory, it removed that subdirectory line from the buer as well. Typing C-u k on the header line for a subdirectory also removes the subdirectory line from the Dired buer. The g command brings back any individual lines that you have killed in this way, but not subdirectoriesyou must use i to reinsert a subdirectory. The les in a Dired buers are normally listed in alphabetical order by le names. Alternatively Dired can sort them by date/time. The Dired command s (dired-sort-toggle-or-edit) switches between these two sorting modes. The mode line in a Dired buer indicates which way it is currently sortedby name, or by date. C-u s switches RET lets you specify a new value for dired-listing-switches.

27.15 Dired and find

You can select a set of les for display in a Dired buer more exibly by using the find utility to choose the les. To search for les with names matching a wildcard pattern use M-x find-name-dired. It reads arguments directory and pattern, and chooses all the les in directory or its subdirectories whose individual names match pattern. The les thus chosen are displayed in a Dired buer, in which the ordinary Dired commands are available. If you want to test the contents of les, rather than their names, use M-x find-grep-dired. This command reads two minibuer arguments, directory and regexp ; it chooses all the les in directory or its subdirectories that contain a match for regexp. It works by running the programs find and grep. See also M-x grep-find, in Section 24.4 [Grep Searching], page 275. Remember to write the regular expression for grep, not for Emacs. (An alternative method of showing les whose contents match a given regexp is the % g regexp command, see Section 27.6 [Marks vs Flags], page 333.) The most general command in this series is M-x find-dired, which lets you specify any condition that find can test. It takes two minibuer arguments, directory and nd-args ; it runs find in directory, passing nd-args to tell find what condition to test. To use this command, you need to know how to use find. The format of listing produced by these commands is controlled by the variable find-ls-option. This is a pair of options; the rst specifying how to call find to produce the le listing, and the second telling Dired to parse the output. The command M-x locate provides a similar interface to the locate program. M-x locate-with-filter is similar, but keeps only les whose names match a given regular expression. These buers dont work entirely like ordinary Dired buers: le operations work, but do not always automatically update the buer. Reverting the buer with g deletes all inserted subdirectories, and erases all ags and marks.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

343

27.16 Editing the Dired Buer

Wdired is a special mode that allows you to perform le operations by editing the Dired buer directly (the W in Wdired stands for writable.) To enter Wdired mode, type C-x C-q (dired-toggle-read-only) while in a Dired buer. Alternatively, use the Immediate / Edit File Names menu item. While in Wdired mode, you can rename les by editing the le names displayed in the Dired buer. All the ordinary Emacs editing commands, including rectangle operations and query-replace, are available for this. Once you are done editing, type C-c C-c (wdired-finish-edit). This applies your changes and switches back to ordinary Dired mode. Apart from simply renaming les, you can move a le to another directory by typing in the new le name (either absolute or relative). To mark a le for deletion, delete the entire le name. To change the target of a symbolic link, edit the link target name which appears next to the link name. The rest of the text in the buer, such as the le sizes and modication dates, is marked read-only, so you cant edit it. However, if you set wdired-allow-tochange-permissions to t, you can edit the le permissions. For example, you can change -rw-r--r-- to -rw-rw-rw- to make a le world-writable. These changes also take eect when you type C-c C-c.

27.17 Viewing Image Thumbnails in Dired

Image-Dired is a facility for browsing image les. It provides viewing the images either as thumbnails or in full size, either inside Emacs or through an external viewer. To enter Image-Dired, mark the image les you want to look at in the Dired buer, using m as usual. Then type C-t d (image-dired-display-thumbs). This creates and switches to a buer containing image-dired, corresponding to the marked les. You can also enter Image-Dired directly by typing M-x image-dired. This prompts for a directory; specify one that has image les. This creates thumbnails for all the images in that directory, and displays them all in the thumbnail buer. This takes a long time if the directory contains many image les, and it asks for conrmation if the number of image les exceeds image-dired-show-allfrom-dir-max-files. With point in the thumbnail buer, you can type RET (image-dired-displaythumbnail-original-image) to display a sized version of it in another window. This sizes the image to t the window. Use the arrow keys to move around in the buer. For easy browsing, use SPC (image-dired-display-next-thumbnailoriginal) to advance and display the next image. Typing DEL (image-direddisplay-previous-thumbnail-original) backs up to the previous thumbnail and displays that instead. To view and the image in its original size, either provide a prex argument (C-u) before pressing RET, or type C-RET (image-dired-thumbnail-display-external)

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

344

to display the image in an external viewer. You must rst congure image-diredexternal-viewer. You can delete images through Image-Dired also. Type d (image-dired-flagthumb-original-file) to ag the image le for deletion in the Dired buer. You can also delete the thumbnail image from the thumbnail buer with C-d (imagedired-delete-char). More advanced features include image tags, which are metadata used to categorize image les. The tags are stored in a plain text le congured by image-direddb-file. To tag image les, mark them in the dired buer (you can also mark les in Dired from the thumbnail buer by typing m) and type C-t t (image-dired-tag-files). This reads the tag name in the minibuer. To mark les having a certain tag, type C-t f (image-dired-mark-tagged-files). After marking image les with a certain tag, you can use C-t d to view them. You can also tag a le directly from the thumbnail buer by typing t t and you can remove a tag by typing t r. There is also a special tag called comment for each le (it is not a tag in the exact same sense as the other tags, it is handled slightly dierent). That is used to enter a comment or description about the image. You comment a le from the thumbnail buer by typing c. You will be prompted for a comment. Type C-t c to add a comment from Dired (image-dired-diredcomment-files). Image-Dired also provides simple image manipulation. In the thumbnail buer, type L to rotate the original image 90 degrees anti clockwise, and R to rotate it 90 degrees clockwise. This rotation is lossless, and uses an external utility called JpegTRAN.

27.18 Other Dired Features

The command + (dired-create-directory) reads a directory name, and creates that directory. It signals an error if the directory already exists. The command M-s a C-s (dired-do-isearch) begins a multi-le incremental search on the marked les. If a search fails at the end of a le, typing C-s advances to the next marked le and repeats the search; at the end of the last marked le, the search wraps around to the rst marked le. The command M-s a M-C-s (dired-do-isearch-regexp) does the same with a regular expression search. See Section 12.1.2 [Repeat Isearch], page 92, for information about search repetition. The command w (dired-copy-filename-as-kill) puts the names of the marked (or next n) les into the kill ring, as if you had killed them with C-w. The names are separated by a space. With a zero prex argument, this uses the absolute le name of each marked le. With just C-u as the prex argument, it uses le names relative to the Dired buers default directory. (This can still contain slashes if in a subdirectory.) As a special case, if point is on a directory headerline, w gives you the absolute name of that directory. Any prex argument or marked les are ignored in this case.

Chapter 27: Dired, the Directory Editor

345

The main purpose of this command is so that you can yank the le names into arguments for other Emacs commands. It also displays what it added to the kill ring, so you can use it to display the list of currently marked les in the echo area. If the directory you are visiting is under version control (see Section 25.1 [Version Control], page 292), then the normal VC di and log commands will operate on the selected les. The command M-x dired-compare-directories is used to compare the current Dired buer with another directory. It marks all the les that are dierent between the two directories. It puts these marks in all Dired buers where these les are listed, which of course includes the current buer. The default comparison method (used if you type RET at the prompt) is to compare just the le nameseach le name that does not appear in the other directory is dierent. You can specify more stringent comparisons by entering a Lisp expression, which can refer to the variables size1 and size2, the respective le sizes; mtime1 and mtime2, the last modication times in seconds, as oating point numbers; and fa1 and fa2, the respective le attribute lists (as returned by the function file-attributes). This expression is evaluated for each pair of like-named les, and if the expressions value is non-nil, those les are considered dierent. For instance, the sequence M-x dired-compare-directories RET (> mtime1 mtime2) RET marks les newer in this directory than in the other, and marks les older in the other directory than in this one. It also marks les with no counterpart, in both directories, as always. On the X Window System, Emacs supports the drag and drop protocol. You can drag a le object from another program, and drop it onto a Dired buer; this either moves, copies, or creates a link to the le in that directory. Precisely which action is taken is determined by the originating program. Dragging les out of a Dired buer is currently not supported.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

346

28 The Calendar and the Diary

Emacs provides the functions of a desk calendar, with a diary of planned or past events. It also has facilities for managing your appointments, and keeping track of how much time you spend working on certain projects. To enter the calendar, type M-x calendar; this displays a three-month calendar centered on the current month, with point on the current date. With a numeric argument, as in C-u M-x calendar, it prompts you for the month and year to be the center of the three-month calendar. The calendar uses its own buer, whose major mode is Calendar mode. Mouse-3 in the calendar brings up a menu of operations on a particular date; Mouse-2 brings up a menu of commonly used calendar features that are independent of any particular date. To exit the calendar, type q. This chapter describes the basic calendar features. For more advanced topics, see Section Advanced Calendar/Diary Usage in Specialized Emacs Features .

28.1 Movement in the Calendar

Calendar mode provides commands to move through the calendar in logical units of time such as days, weeks, months, and years. If you move outside the three months originally displayed, the calendar display scrolls automatically through time to make the selected date visible. Moving to a date lets you view its holidays or diary entries, or convert it to other calendars; moving by long time periods is also useful simply to scroll the calendar. 28.1.1 Motion by Standard Lengths of Time The commands for movement in the calendar buer parallel the commands for movement in text. You can move forward and backward by days, weeks, months, and years. C-f C-b C-n C-p M-} M-{ C-x ] C-x [ Move point one day forward (calendar-forward-day). Move point one day backward (calendar-backward-day). Move point one week forward (calendar-forward-week). Move point one week backward (calendar-backward-week). Move point one month forward (calendar-forward-month). Move point one month backward (calendar-backward-month). Move point one year forward (calendar-forward-year). Move point one year backward (calendar-backward-year).

The day and week commands are natural analogues of the usual Emacs commands for moving by characters and by lines. Just as C-n usually moves to the same column in the following line, in Calendar mode it moves to the same day in the following week. And C-p moves to the same day in the previous week.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

347

The arrow keys are equivalent to C-f, C-b, C-n and C-p, just as they normally are in other modes. The commands for motion by months and years work like those for weeks, but move a larger distance. The month commands M-} and M-{ move forward or backward by an entire month. The year commands C-x ] and C-x [ move forward or backward a whole year. The easiest way to remember these commands is to consider months and years analogous to paragraphs and pages of text, respectively. But the commands themselves are not quite analogous. The ordinary Emacs paragraph commands move to the beginning or end of a paragraph, whereas these month and year commands move by an entire month or an entire year, keeping the same date within the month or year. All these commands accept a numeric argument as a repeat count. For convenience, the digit keys and the minus sign specify numeric arguments in Calendar mode even without the Meta modier. For example, 100 C-f moves point 100 days forward from its present location. 28.1.2 Beginning or End of Week, Month or Year A week (or month, or year) is not just a quantity of days; we think of weeks (months, years) as starting on particular dates. So Calendar mode provides commands to move to the start or end of a week, month or year: C-a C-e M-a M-e M-< M-> Move point to start of week (calendar-beginning-of-week). Move point to end of week (calendar-end-of-week). Move point to start of month (calendar-beginning-of-month). Move point to end of month (calendar-end-of-month). Move point to start of year (calendar-beginning-of-year). Move point to end of year (calendar-end-of-year).

These commands also take numeric arguments as repeat counts, with the repeat count indicating how many weeks, months, or years to move backward or forward. By default, weeks begin on Sunday. To make them begin on Monday instead, set the variable calendar-week-start-day to 1. 28.1.3 Specied Dates Calendar mode provides commands for moving to a particular date specied in various ways. gd gD gw o Move point to specied date (calendar-goto-date). Move point to specied day of year (calendar-goto-day-of-year). Move point to specied week of year (calendar-iso-goto-week). Center calendar around specied month (calendar-other-month).

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary . Move point to todays date (calendar-goto-today).

348

g d (calendar-goto-date) prompts for a year, a month, and a day of the month, and then moves to that date. Because the calendar includes all dates from the beginning of the current era, you must type the year in its entirety; that is, type 1990, not 90. g D (calendar-goto-day-of-year) prompts for a year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers count backward from the end of the year. g w (calendar-iso-goto-week) prompts for a year and week number, and moves to that week. o (calendar-other-month) prompts for a month and year, then centers the three-month calendar around that month. You can return to todays date with . (calendar-goto-today).

28.2 Scrolling in the Calendar

The calendar display scrolls automatically through time when you move out of the visible portion. You can also scroll it manually. Imagine that the calendar window contains a long strip of paper with the months on it. Scrolling the calendar means moving the strip horizontally, so that new months become visible in the window. > < C-v NEXT M-v PRIOR Scroll calendar one month forward (calendar-scroll-left). Scroll calendar one month backward (calendar-scroll-right). Scroll forward by three months (calendar-scroll-left-threemonths). Scroll backward by three months (calendar-scroll-right-threemonths).

The most basic calendar scroll commands scroll by one month at a time. This means that there are two months of overlap between the display before the command and the display after. > scrolls the calendar contents one month forward in time. < scrolls the contents one month backwards in time. The commands C-v and M-v scroll the calendar by an entire screenfulthree monthsin analogy with the usual meaning of these commands. C-v makes later dates visible and M-v makes earlier dates visible. These commands take a numeric argument as a repeat count; in particular, since C-u multiplies the next command by four, typing C-u C-v scrolls the calendar forward by a year and typing C-u M-v scrolls the calendar backward by a year. The function keys NEXT and PRIOR are equivalent to C-v and M-v, just as they are in other modes.

28.3 Counting Days

M-= Display the number of days in the current region (calendar-countdays-region).

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

349

To determine the number of days in a range, set the mark on one date using C-SPC, move point to another date, and type M-= (calendar-count-days-region). The numbers of days shown is inclusive ; that is, it includes the days specied by mark and point.

28.4 Miscellaneous Calendar Commands

pd C-c C-l SPC DEL q Display day-in-year (calendar-print-day-of-year). Regenerate the calendar window (calendar-redraw). Scroll the next window up (scroll-other-window). Scroll the next window down (scroll-other-window-down). Exit from calendar (calendar-exit).

To display the number of days elapsed since the start of the year, or the number of days remaining in the year, type the p d command (calendar-print-day-ofyear). This displays both of those numbers in the echo area. The count of days elapsed includes the selected date. The count of days remaining does not include that date. If the calendar window text gets corrupted, type C-c C-l (calendar-redraw) to redraw it. (This can only happen if you use non-Calendar-mode editing commands.) In Calendar mode, you can use SPC (scroll-other-window) and DEL (scrollother-window-down) to scroll the other window (if there is one) up or down, respectively. This is handy when you display a list of holidays or diary entries in another window. To exit from the calendar, type q (calendar-exit). This buries all buers related to the calendar, selecting other buers. (If a frame contains a dedicated calendar window, exiting from the calendar deletes or iconies that frame depending on the value of calendar-remove-frame-by-deleting.)

28.5 Writing Calendar Files

You can write calendars and diary entries to HTML and LaTEX les. The Calendar HTML commands produce les of HTML code that contain calendar and diary entries. Each le applies to one month, and has a name of the format yyyy-mm.html, where yyyy and mm are the four-digit year and two-digit month, respectively. The variable cal-html-directory species the default output directory for the HTML les. Diary entries enclosed by < and > are interpreted as HTML tags (for example: this is a diary entry with <font color=red>some red text</font>). You can change the overall appearance of the displayed HTML pages (for example, the color of various page elements, header styles) via a stylesheet cal.css in the directory containing the HTML les (see the value of the variable cal-html-css-default for relevant style settings). Hm Generate a one-month calendar (cal-html-cursor-month).

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary Hy

350

Generate a calendar le for each month of a year, as well as an index page (cal-html-cursor-year). By default, this command writes les to a yyyy subdirectory - if this is altered some hyperlinks between years will not work.

If the variable cal-html-print-day-number-flag is non-nil, then the monthly calendars show the day-of-the-year number. The variable cal-html-year-indexcols species the number of columns in the yearly index page. The Calendar LaTEX commands produce a buer of LaTEX code that prints as a calendar. Depending on the command you use, the printed calendar covers the day, week, month or year that point is in. tm tM td tw1 tw2 tw3 tw4 tfw tfW ty tY tfy Generate a one-month calendar (cal-tex-cursor-month). Generate a sideways-printing one-month calendar (cal-tex-cursormonth-landscape). Generate a one-day calendar (cal-tex-cursor-day). Generate a one-page calendar for one week (cal-tex-cursor-week). Generate a two-page calendar for one week (cal-tex-cursor-week2). Generate an ISO-style calendar for one week (cal-tex-cursor-weekiso). Generate a calendar for one Monday-starting week (cal-tex-cursorweek-monday). Generate a Filofax-style two-weeks-at-a-glance calendar (cal-texcursor-filofax-2week). Generate a Filofax-style one-week-at-a-glance calendar (cal-texcursor-filofax-week). Generate a calendar for one year (cal-tex-cursor-year). Generate a sideways-printing calendar for one year (cal-tex-cursoryear-landscape). Generate a Filofax-style calendar for one year (cal-tex-cursorfilofax-year).

Some of these commands print the calendar sideways (in landscape mode), so it can be wider than it is long. Some of them use Filofax paper size (3.75in x 6.75in). All of these commands accept a prex argument, which species how many days, weeks, months or years to print (starting always with the selected one). If the variable cal-tex-holidays is non-nil (the default), then the printed calendars show the holidays in calendar-holidays. If the variable cal-tex-diary is non-nil (the default is nil), diary entries are included also (in monthly, lofax, and iso-week calendars only). If the variable cal-tex-rules is non-nil (the default is nil), the calendar displays ruled pages in styles that have sucient room. Consult the documentation of the individual cal-tex functions to see which calendars support which features.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

351

You can use the variable cal-tex-preamble-extra to insert extra LaTEX commands in the preamble of the generated document if you need to.

28.6 Holidays
The Emacs calendar knows about many major and minor holidays, and can display them. You can add your own holidays to the default list. Mouse-3 Holidays h Display holidays for the selected date (calendar-cursor-holidays). x u a Mark holidays in the calendar window (calendar-mark-holidays). Unmark calendar window (calendar-unmark). List all holidays for the displayed three months in another window (calendar-list-holidays).

M-x holidays List all holidays for three months around todays date in another window. M-x list-holidays List holidays in another window for a specied range of years. To see if any holidays fall on a given date, position point on that date in the calendar window and use the h command. Alternatively, click on that date with Mouse-3 and then choose Holidays from the menu that appears. Either way, this displays the holidays for that date, in the echo area if they t there, otherwise in a separate window. To view the distribution of holidays for all the dates shown in the calendar, use the x command. This displays the dates that are holidays in a dierent face. See Section Calendar Customizing in Specialized Emacs Features . The command applies both to the currently visible months and to other months that subsequently become visible by scrolling. To turn marking o and erase the current marks, type u, which also erases any diary marks (see Section 28.10 [Diary], page 358). If the variable calendar-mark-holidays-flag is non-nil, creating or updating the calendar marks holidays automatically. To get even more detailed information, use the a command, which displays a separate buer containing a list of all holidays in the current three-month range. You can use SPC and DEL in the calendar window to scroll that list up and down, respectively. The command M-x holidays displays the list of holidays for the current month and the preceding and succeeding months; this works even if you dont have a calendar window. If the variable calendar-view-holidays-initially-flag is non-nil, creating the calendar displays holidays in this way. If you want the list of holidays centered around a dierent month, use C-u M-x holidays, which prompts for the month and year.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

352

The holidays known to Emacs include United States holidays and the major Bah a , Chinese, Christian, Islamic, and Jewish holidays; also the solstices and equinoxes. The command M-x holiday-list displays the list of holidays for a range of years. This function asks you for the starting and stopping years, and allows you to choose all the holidays or one of several categories of holidays. You can use this command even if you dont have a calendar window. The dates used by Emacs for holidays are based on current practice, not historical fact. For example Veterans Day began in 1919, but is shown in earlier years.

28.7 Times of Sunrise and Sunset

Special calendar commands can tell you, to within a minute or two, the times of sunrise and sunset for any date. Mouse-3 Sunrise/sunset S Display times of sunrise and sunset for the selected date (calendarsunrise-sunset). M-x sunrise-sunset Display times of sunrise and sunset for todays date. C-u M-x sunrise-sunset Display times of sunrise and sunset for a specied date. M-x calendar-sunrise-sunset-month Display times of sunrise and sunset for the selected month. Within the calendar, to display the local times of sunrise and sunset in the echo area, move point to the date you want, and type S. Alternatively, click Mouse-3 on the date, then choose Sunrise/sunset from the menu that appears. The command M-x sunrise-sunset is available outside the calendar to display this information for todays date or a specied date. To specify a date other than today, use C-u M-x sunrise-sunset, which prompts for the year, month, and day. You can display the times of sunrise and sunset for any location and any date with C-u C-u M-x sunrise-sunset. This asks you for a longitude, latitude, number of minutes dierence from Coordinated Universal Time, and date, and then tells you the times of sunrise and sunset for that location on that date. Because the times of sunrise and sunset depend on the location on earth, you need to tell Emacs your latitude, longitude, and location name before using these commands. Here is an example of what to set: (setq calendar-latitude 40.1) (setq calendar-longitude -88.2) (setq calendar-location-name "Urbana, IL") Use one decimal place in the values of calendar-latitude and calendarlongitude. Your time zone also aects the local time of sunrise and sunset. Emacs usually gets time zone information from the operating system, but if these values are not

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

353

what you want (or if the operating system does not supply them), you must set them yourself. Here is an example: (setq calendar-time-zone -360) (setq calendar-standard-time-zone-name "CST") (setq calendar-daylight-time-zone-name "CDT") The value of calendar-time-zone is the number of minutes dierence between your local standard time and Coordinated Universal Time (Greenwich time). The values of calendar-standard-time-zone-name and calendar-daylight-timezone-name are the abbreviations used in your time zone. Emacs displays the times of sunrise and sunset corrected for daylight saving time. See Section 28.13 [Daylight Saving], page 365, for how daylight saving time is determined. As a user, you might nd it convenient to set the calendar location variables for your usual physical location in your .emacs le. If you are a system administrator, you may want to set these variables for all users in a default.el le. See Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461.

28.8 Phases of the Moon

These calendar commands display the dates and times of the phases of the moon (new moon, rst quarter, full moon, last quarter). This feature is useful for debugging problems that depend on the phase of the moon. M Display the dates and times for all the quarters of the moon for the three-month period shown (calendar-lunar-phases).

M-x lunar-phases Display dates and times of the quarters of the moon for three months around todays date. Within the calendar, use the M command to display a separate buer of the phases of the moon for the current three-month range. The dates and times listed are accurate to within a few minutes. Outside the calendar, use the command M-x lunar-phases to display the list of the phases of the moon for the current month and the preceding and succeeding months. For information about a dierent month, use C-u M-x lunar-phases, which prompts for the month and year. The dates and times given for the phases of the moon are given in local time (corrected for daylight saving, when appropriate). See the discussion in the previous section. See Section 28.7 [Sunrise/Sunset], page 352.

28.9 Conversion To and From Other Calendars

The Emacs calendar displayed is always the Gregorian calendar, sometimes called the new style calendar, which is used in most of the world today. However, this calendar did not exist before the sixteenth century and was not widely used before the eighteenth century; it did not fully displace the Julian calendar and gain universal acceptance until the early twentieth century. The Emacs calendar can display any month since January, year 1 of the current era, but the calendar

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

354

displayed is always the Gregorian, even for a date at which the Gregorian calendar did not exist. While Emacs cannot display other calendars, it can convert dates to and from several other calendars. 28.9.1 Supported Calendar Systems The ISO commercial calendar is often used in business. The Julian calendar, named after Julius Caesar, was the one used in Europe throughout medieval times, and in many countries up until the nineteenth century. Astronomers use a simple counting of days elapsed since noon, Monday, January 1, 4713 B.C. on the Julian calendar. The number of days elapsed is called the Julian day number or the Astronomical day number. The Hebrew calendar is used by tradition in the Jewish religion. The Emacs calendar program uses the Hebrew calendar to determine the dates of Jewish holidays. Hebrew calendar dates begin and end at sunset. The Islamic calendar is used in many predominantly Islamic countries. Emacs uses it to determine the dates of Islamic holidays. There is no universal agreement in the Islamic world about the calendar; Emacs uses a widely accepted version, but the precise dates of Islamic holidays often depend on proclamation by religious authorities, not on calculations. As a consequence, the actual dates of observance can vary slightly from the dates computed by Emacs. Islamic calendar dates begin and end at sunset. The French Revolutionary calendar was created by the Jacobins after the 1789 revolution, to represent a more secular and nature-based view of the annual cycle, and to install a 10-day week in a rationalization measure similar to the metric system. The French government ocially abandoned this calendar at the end of 1805. The Maya of Central America used three separate, overlapping calendar systems, the long count, the tzolkin, and the haab. Emacs knows about all three of these calendars. Experts dispute the exact correlation between the Mayan calendar and our calendar; Emacs uses the Goodman-Martinez-Thompson correlation in its calculations. The Copts use a calendar based on the ancient Egyptian solar calendar. Their calendar consists of twelve 30-day months followed by an extra ve-day period. Once every fourth year they add a leap day to this extra period to make it six days. The Ethiopic calendar is identical in structure, but has dierent year numbers and month names. The Persians use a solar calendar based on a design of Omar Khayyam. Their calendar consists of twelve months of which the rst six have 31 days, the next ve have 30 days, and the last has 29 in ordinary years and 30 in leap years. Leap years occur in a complicated pattern every four or ve years. The calendar implemented here is the arithmetical Persian calendar championed by Birashk, based on a 2,820year cycle. It diers from the astronomical Persian calendar, which is based on astronomical events. As of this writing the rst future discrepancy is projected to

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

355

occur on March 20, 2025. It is currently not clear what the ocial calendar of Iran will be at that time. The Chinese calendar is a complicated system of lunar months arranged into solar years. The years go in cycles of sixty, each year containing either twelve months in an ordinary year or thirteen months in a leap year; each month has either 29 or 30 days. Years, ordinary months, and days are named by combining one of ten celestial stems with one of twelve terrestrial branches for a total of sixty names that are repeated in a cycle of sixty. The Bah a calendar system is based on a solar cycle of 19 months with 19 days each. The four remaining intercalary days are placed between the 18th and 19th months. 28.9.2 Converting To Other Calendars The following commands describe the selected date (the date at point) in various other calendar systems: Mouse-3 Other calendars po Display the selected date in various other calendars. print-other-dates). pc pj pa ph pi pf pb pC pk pe pp (calendar-

Display ISO commercial calendar equivalent for selected day (calendar-iso-print-date). Display Julian date for selected day (calendar-julian-print-date). Display astronomical (Julian) day number for selected day (calendarastro-print-day-number). Display Hebrew date for selected day (calendar-hebrew-printdate). Display Islamic date for selected day (calendar-islamic-printdate). Display French Revolutionary date for selected day (calendarfrench-print-date). Display Bah a date for selected day (calendar-bahai-print-date). Display Chinese date for selected day (calendar-chinese-printdate). Display Coptic date for selected day (calendar-coptic-print-date). Display Ethiopic date for selected day (calendar-ethiopic-printdate). Display Persian date for selected day (calendar-persian-printdate).

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary pm

356

Display Mayan date for selected day (calendar-mayan-print-date).

Otherwise, move point to the date you want to convert, then type the appropriate command starting with p from the table above. The prex p is a mnemonic for print, since Emacs prints the equivalent date in the echo area. p o displays the date in all forms known to Emacs. You can also use Mouse-3 and then choose Other calendars from the menu that appears. This displays the equivalent forms of the date in all the calendars Emacs understands, in the form of a menu. (Choosing an alternative from this menu doesnt actually do anythingthe menu is used only for display.) 28.9.3 Converting From Other Calendars You can use the other supported calendars to specify a date to move to. This section describes the commands for doing this using calendars other than Mayan; for the Mayan calendar, see the following section. gc gw gj ga gb gh gi gf gC gp gk ge Move to a date specied in the ISO commercial calendar (calendariso-goto-date). Move to a week specied in the ISO commercial calendar (calendariso-goto-week). Move to a date specied in the Julian calendar (calendar-juliangoto-date). Move to a date specied with an astronomical (Julian) day number (calendar-astro-goto-day-number). Move to a date specied in the Bah a calendar (calendar-bahaigoto-date). Move to a date specied in the Hebrew calendar (calendar-hebrewgoto-date). Move to a date specied in the Islamic calendar (calendar-islamicgoto-date). Move to a date specied in the French Revolutionary calendar (calendar-french-goto-date). Move to a date specied in the Chinese calendar (calendar-chinesegoto-date). Move to a date specied in the Persian calendar (calendar-persiangoto-date). Move to a date specied in the Coptic calendar (calendar-copticgoto-date). Move to a date specied in the Ethiopic calendar (calendarethiopic-goto-date).

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

357

These commands ask you for a date on the other calendar, move point to the Gregorian calendar date equivalent to that date, and display the other calendars date in the echo area. Emacs uses strict completion (see Section 5.3.3 [Completion Exit], page 31) whenever it asks you to type a month name, so you dont have to worry about the spelling of Hebrew, Islamic, or French names. One common issue concerning the Hebrew calendar is the computation of the anniversary of a date of death, called a yahrzeit. The Emacs calendar includes a facility for such calculations. If you are in the calendar, the command M-x calendar-hebrew-list-yahrzeits asks you for a range of years and then displays a list of the yahrzeit dates for those years for the date given by point. If you are not in the calendar, this command rst asks you for the date of death and the range of years, and then displays the list of yahrzeit dates. 28.9.4 Converting from the Mayan Calendar Here are the commands to select dates based on the Mayan calendar: gml gmnt gmpt gmnh gmph gmnc gmpc Move to a date specied by the long count calendar (calendar-mayangoto-long-count-date). Move to the next occurrence of a place in the tzolkin calendar (calendar-mayan-next-tzolkin-date). Move to the previous occurrence of a place in the tzolkin calendar (calendar-mayan-previous-tzolkin-date). Move to the next occurrence of a place in the haab calendar (calendar-mayan-next-haab-date). Move to the previous occurrence of a place in the haab calendar (calendar-mayan-previous-haab-date). Move to the next occurrence of a place in the calendar round (calendar-mayan-next-calendar-round-date). Move to the previous occurrence of a place in the calendar round (calendar-mayan-previous-calendar-round-date).

To understand these commands, you need to understand the Mayan calendars. The long count is a counting of days with these units: 1 kin = 1 day 1 uinal = 20 kin 1 tun = 18 uinal 1 katun = 20 tun 1 baktun = 20 katun Thus, the long count date 12.16.11.16.6 means 12 baktun, 16 katun, 11 tun, 16 uinal, and 6 kin. The Emacs calendar can handle Mayan long count dates as early as 7.17.18.13.3, but no earlier. When you use the g m l command, type the Mayan long count date with the baktun, katun, tun, uinal, and kin separated by periods. The Mayan tzolkin calendar is a cycle of 260 days formed by a pair of independent cycles of 13 and 20 days. Since this cycle repeats endlessly, Emacs provides commands to move backward and forward to the previous or next point in the cycle. Type g m p t to go to the previous tzolkin date; Emacs asks you for a tzolkin date

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

358

and moves point to the previous occurrence of that date. Similarly, type g m n t to go to the next occurrence of a tzolkin date. The Mayan haab calendar is a cycle of 365 days arranged as 18 months of 20 days each, followed by a 5-day monthless period. Like the tzolkin cycle, this cycle repeats endlessly, and there are commands to move backward and forward to the previous or next point in the cycle. Type g m p h to go to the previous haab date; Emacs asks you for a haab date and moves point to the previous occurrence of that date. Similarly, type g m n h to go to the next occurrence of a haab date. The Maya also used the combination of the tzolkin date and the haab date. This combination is a cycle of about 52 years called a calendar round. If you type g m p c, Emacs asks you for both a haab and a tzolkin date and then moves point to the previous occurrence of that combination. Use g m n c to move point to the next occurrence of a combination. These commands signal an error if the haab/tzolkin date combination you have typed is impossible. Emacs uses strict completion (see Section 5.3.3 [Completion Exit], page 31) whenever it asks you to type a Mayan name, so you dont have to worry about spelling.

28.10 The Diary

The Emacs diary keeps track of appointments or other events on a daily basis, in conjunction with the calendar. To use the diary feature, you must rst create a diary le containing a list of events and their dates. Then Emacs can automatically pick out and display the events for today, for the immediate future, or for any specied date. The name of the diary le is specied by the variable diary-file; ~/diary is the default. Heres an example showing what that le looks like: 12/22/2012 Twentieth wedding anniversary!! &1/1. Happy New Year! 10/22 Ruths birthday. * 21, *: Payday Tuesday--weekly meeting with grad students at 10am Supowit, Shen, Bitner, and Kapoor to attend. 1/13/89 Friday the thirteenth!! &thu 4pm squash game with Lloyd. mar 16 Dads birthday April 15, 2013 Income tax due. &* 15 time cards due. This format is essentially the same as the one used by the separate calendar utility that is present on some Unix systems. This example uses extra spaces to align the event descriptions of most of the entries. Such formatting is purely a matter of taste. Although you probably will start by creating a diary manually, Emacs provides a number of commands to let you view, add, and change diary entries.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary 28.10.1 Displaying the Diary

359

Once you have created a diary le, you can use the calendar to view it. You can also view todays events outside of Calendar mode. In the following, key bindings refer to the Calendar buer. Mouse-3 Diary d Display all diary entries for the selected date (diary-view-entries). s m u Display the entire diary le (diary-show-all-entries). Mark all visible dates that have diary entries (diary-mark-entries). Unmark the calendar window (calendar-unmark).

M-x diary-print-entries Print hard copy of the diary display as it appears. M-x diary Display all diary entries for todays date.

M-x diary-mail-entries Mail yourself email reminders about upcoming diary entries. Displaying the diary entries with d shows in a separate window the diary entries for the selected date in the calendar. The mode line of the new window shows the date of the diary entries. Holidays are shown either in the buer or in the mode line, depending on the display method you choose (see Section Diary Display in Specialized Emacs Features ). If you specify a numeric argument with d, it shows all the diary entries for that many successive days. Thus, 2 d displays all the entries for the selected date and for the following day. Another way to display the diary entries for a date is to click Mouse-3 on the date, and then choose Diary entries from the menu that appears. If the variable calendar-view-diary-initially-flag is non-nil, creating the calendar lists the diary entries for the current date (provided the current date is visible). To get a broader view of which days are mentioned in the diary, use the m command. This marks the dates that have diary entries in a dierent face. See Section Calendar Customizing in Specialized Emacs Features . This command applies both to the months that are currently visible and to those that subsequently become visible after scrolling. To turn marking o and erase the current marks, type u, which also turns o holiday marks (see Section 28.6 [Holidays], page 351). If the variable calendar-mark-diary-entries-flag is nonnil, creating or updating the calendar marks diary dates automatically. To see the full diary le, rather than just some of the entries, use the s command. The command M-x diary displays the diary entries for the current date, independently of the calendar display, and optionally for the next few days as well; the variable diary-number-of-entries species how many days to include. See Section Diary Customizing in Specialized Emacs Features . If you put (diary) in your .emacs le, this automatically displays a window with the days diary entries when you start Emacs.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

360

Some people like to receive email notications of events in their diary. To send such mail to yourself, use the command M-x diary-mail-entries. A prex argument species how many days (starting with today) to check; otherwise, the variable diary-mail-days says how many days. 28.10.2 The Diary File Your diary le is a le that records events associated with particular dates. The name of the diary le is specied by the variable diary-file; ~/diary is the default. The calendar utility program supports a subset of the format allowed by the Emacs diary facilities, so you can use that utility to view the diary le, with reasonable results aside from the entries it cannot understand. Each entry in the diary le describes one event and consists of one or more lines. An entry always begins with a date specication at the left margin. The rest of the entry is simply text to describe the event. If the entry has more than one line, then the lines after the rst must begin with whitespace to indicate they continue a previous entry. Lines that do not begin with valid dates and do not continue a preceding entry are ignored. You can also use a format where the rst line of a diary entry consists only of the date or day name (with no following blanks or punctuation). For example: 02/11/2012 Bill B. visits Princeton today 2pm Cognitive Studies Committee meeting 2:30-5:30 Liz at Lawrenceville 4:00pm Dentist appt 7:30pm Dinner at Georges 8:00-10:00pm concert This entry will have a dierent appearance if you use the simple diary display (see Section Diary Display in Specialized Emacs Features ). The simple diary display omits the date line at the beginning; only the continuation lines appear. This style of entry looks neater when you display just a single days entries, but can cause confusion if you ask for more than one days entries. You can inhibit the marking of certain diary entries in the calendar window; to do this, insert the string that diary-nonmarking-symbol species (default &) at the beginning of the entry, before the date. This has no eect on display of the entry in the diary window; it only aects marks on dates in the calendar window. Nonmarking entries are especially useful for generic entries that would otherwise mark many dierent dates. 28.10.3 Date Formats Here are some sample diary entries, illustrating dierent ways of formatting a date. The examples all show dates in American order (month, day, year), but Calendar mode supports European order (day, month, year) and ISO order (year, month, day) as options. 4/20/12 Switch-over to new tabulation system apr. 25 Start tabulating annual results

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

361

4/30 Results for April are due */25 Monthly cycle finishes Friday Dont leave without backing up files The rst entry appears only once, on April 20, 2012. The second and third appear every year on the specied dates, and the fourth uses a wildcard (asterisk) for the month, so it appears on the 25th of every month. The nal entry appears every week on Friday. You can use just numbers to express a date, as in month /day or month /day /year . This must be followed by a nondigit. In the date itself, month and day are numbers of one or two digits. The optional year is also a number, and may be abbreviated to the last two digits; that is, you can use 11/12/2012 or 11/12/12. Dates can also have the form monthname day or monthname day, year , where the months name can be spelled in full or abbreviated (with or without a period). The preferred abbreviations for month and day names can be set using the variables calendar-abbrev-length, calendar-month-abbrev-array, and calendarday-abbrev-array. The default is to use the rst three letters of a name as its abbreviation. Case is not signicant. A date may be generic ; that is, partially unspecied. Then the entry applies to all dates that match the specication. If the date does not contain a year, it is generic and applies to any year. Alternatively, month, day, or year can be *; this matches any month, day, or year, respectively. Thus, a diary entry 3/*/* matches any day in March of any year; so does march *. If you prefer the European style of writing dates (in which the day comes before the month), or the ISO style (in which the order is year, month, day), type M-x calendar-set-date-style while in the calendar, or customize the variable calendar-date-style. This aects how diary dates are interpreted, date display, and the order in which some commands expect their arguments to be given. You can use the name of a day of the week as a generic date which applies to any date falling on that day of the week. You can abbreviate the day of the week as described above, or spell it in full; case is not signicant. 28.10.4 Commands to Add to the Diary While in the calendar, there are several commands to create diary entries. The basic commands are listed here; more sophisticated commands are in the next section (see Section 28.10.5 [Special Diary Entries], page 362). Entries can also be based on non-Gregorian calendars. See Section Non-Gregorian Diary in Specialized Emacs Features . id iw im Add a diary entry for the selected date (diary-insert-entry). Add a diary entry for the selected day of the week (diary-insertweekly-entry). Add a diary entry for the selected day of the month (diary-insertmonthly-entry).

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary iy

362

Add a diary entry for the selected day of the year (diary-insertyearly-entry).

You can make a diary entry for a specic date by selecting that date in the calendar window and typing the i d command. This command displays the end of your diary le in another window and inserts the date; you can then type the rest of the diary entry. If you want to make a diary entry that applies to a specic day of the week, select that day of the week (any occurrence will do) and type i w. This inserts the day-of-week as a generic date; you can then type the rest of the diary entry. You can make a monthly diary entry in the same fashion: select the day of the month, use the i m command, and type the rest of the entry. Similarly, you can insert a yearly diary entry with the i y command. All of the above commands make marking diary entries by default. To make a nonmarking diary entry, give a prex argument to the command. For example, C-u i w makes a nonmarking weekly diary entry. When you modify the diary le, be sure to save the le before exiting Emacs. Saving the diary le after using any of the above insertion commands will automatically update the diary marks in the calendar window, if appropriate. You can use the command calendar-redraw to force an update at any time. 28.10.5 Special Diary Entries In addition to entries based on calendar dates, the diary le can contain sexp entries for regular events such as anniversaries. These entries are based on Lisp expressions (sexps) that Emacs evaluates as it scans the diary le. Instead of a date, a sexp entry contains %% followed by a Lisp expression which must begin and end with parentheses. The Lisp expression determines which dates the entry applies to. Calendar mode provides commands to insert certain commonly used sexp entries: ia ib ic Add an anniversary diary entry for the selected date (diary-insertanniversary-entry). Add a block diary entry for the current region (diary-insert-blockentry). Add a cyclic diary entry starting at the date (diary-insert-cyclicentry).

If you want to make a diary entry that applies to the anniversary of a specic date, move point to that date and use the i a command. This displays the end of your diary le in another window and inserts the anniversary description; you can then type the rest of the diary entry. The entry looks like this: %%(diary-anniversary 10 31 1948) Arthurs birthday This entry applies to October 31 in any year after 1948; 10 31 1948 species the date. (If you are using the European or ISO calendar style, the input order of month, day and year is dierent.) The reason this expression requires a beginning year is that advanced diary functions can use it to calculate the number of elapsed years.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

363

A block diary entry applies to a specied range of consecutive dates. Here is a block diary entry that applies to all dates from June 24, 2012 through July 10, 2012: %%(diary-block 6 24 2012 7 10 2012) Vacation The 6 24 2012 indicates the starting date and the 7 10 2012 indicates the stopping date. (Again, if you are using the European or ISO calendar style, the input order of month, day and year is dierent.) To insert a block entry, place point and the mark on the two dates that begin and end the range, and type i b. This command displays the end of your diary le in another window and inserts the block description; you can then type the diary entry. Cyclic diary entries repeat after a xed interval of days. To create one, select the starting date and use the i c command. The command prompts for the length of interval, then inserts the entry, which looks like this: %%(diary-cyclic 50 3 1 2012) Renew medication This entry applies to March 1, 2012 and every 50th day following; 3 1 2012 species the starting date. (If you are using the European or ISO calendar style, the input order of month, day and year is dierent.) All three of these commands make marking diary entries. To insert a nonmarking entry, give a prex argument to the command. For example, C-u i a makes a nonmarking anniversary diary entry. Marking sexp diary entries in the calendar can be time-consuming, since every date visible in the calendar window must be individually checked. So its a good idea to make sexp diary entries nonmarking (with &) when possible. Another sophisticated kind of sexp entry, a oating diary entry, species a regularly occurring event by osets specied in days, weeks, and months. It is comparable to a crontab entry interpreted by the cron utility. Here is a nonmarking, oating diary entry that applies to the fourth Thursday in November: &%%(diary-float 11 4 4) American Thanksgiving The 11 species November (the eleventh month), the 4 species Thursday (the fourth day of the week, where Sunday is numbered zero), and the second 4 species the fourth Thursday (1 would mean rst, 2 would mean second, 2 would mean second-to-last, and so on). The month can be a single month or a list of months. Thus you could change the 11 above to (1 2 3) and have the entry apply to the last Thursday of January, February, and March. If the month is t, the entry applies to all months of the year. Each of the standard sexp diary entries takes an optional parameter specifying the name of a face or a single-character string to use when marking the entry in the calendar. Most generally, sexp diary entries can perform arbitrary computations to determine when they apply. See Section Sexp Diary Entries in Specialized Emacs Features .

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

364

28.11 Appointments
If you have a diary entry for an appointment, and that diary entry begins with a recognizable time of day, Emacs can warn you in advance that an appointment is pending. Emacs alerts you to the appointment by displaying a message in your chosen format, as specied by the variable appt-display-format. If the value of appt-audible is non-nil, the warning includes an audible reminder. In addition, if appt-display-mode-line is non-nil, Emacs displays the number of minutes to the appointment on the mode line. If appt-display-format has the value window, then the variable apptdisplay-duration controls how long the reminder window is visible for; and the variables appt-disp-window-function and appt-delete-window-function give the names of functions used to create and destroy the window, respectively. To enable appointment notication, type M-x appt-activate. With a positive argument, it enables notication; with a negative argument, it disables notication; with no argument, it toggles. Enabling notication also sets up an appointment list for today from the diary le, giving all diary entries found with recognizable times of day, and reminds you just before each of them. For example, suppose the diary le contains these lines: Monday 9:30am Coffee break 12:00pm Lunch Then on Mondays, you will be reminded at around 9:20am about your coee break and at around 11:50am about lunch. The variable appt-message-warning-time species how many minutes (default 12) in advance to warn you. This is a default warning time. Each appointment can specify a dierent warning time by adding a piece matching appt-warning-time-regexp (see that variables documentation for details). You can write times in am/pm style (with 12:00am standing for midnight and 12:00pm standing for noon), or 24-hour European/military style. You need not be consistent; your diary le can have a mixture of the two styles. Times must be at the beginning of diary entries if they are to be recognized. Emacs updates the appointments list from the diary le automatically just after midnight. You can force an update at any time by re-enabling appointment notication. Both these actions also display the days diary buer, unless you set appt-display-diary to nil. The appointments list is also updated whenever the diary le (or a le it includes; see Section Fancy Diary Display in Specialized Emacs Features ) is saved. You can also use the appointment notication facility like an alarm clock. The command M-x appt-add adds entries to the appointment list without aecting your diary le. You delete entries from the appointment list with M-x appt-delete.

28.12 Importing and Exporting Diary Entries

You can transfer diary entries between Emacs diary les and a variety of other formats.

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

365

You can import diary entries from Outlook-generated appointment messages. While viewing such a message in Rmail or Gnus, do M-x diary-from-outlook to import the entry. You can make this command recognize additional appointment message formats by customizing the variable diary-outlook-formats. The icalendar package allows you to transfer data between your Emacs diary le and iCalendar les, which are dened in RFC 2445Internet Calendaring and Scheduling Core Object Specication (iCalendar) (as well as the earlier vCalendar format). The command icalendar-import-buffer extracts iCalendar data from the current buer and adds it to your diary le. This function is also suitable for automatic extraction of iCalendar data; for example with the Rmail mail client one could use: (add-hook rmail-show-message-hook icalendar-import-buffer) The command icalendar-import-file imports an iCalendar le and adds the results to an Emacs diary le. For example: (icalendar-import-file "/here/is/calendar.ics" "/there/goes/ical-diary") You can use an #include directive to add the import le contents to the main diary le, if these are dierent les. See Section Fancy Diary Display in Specialized Emacs Features . Use icalendar-export-file to interactively export an entire Emacs diary le to iCalendar format. To export only a part of a diary le, mark the relevant area, and call icalendar-export-region. In both cases, Emacs appends the result to the target le.

28.13 Daylight Saving Time

Emacs understands the dierence between standard time and daylight saving time the times given for sunrise, sunset, solstices, equinoxes, and the phases of the moon take that into account. The rules for daylight saving time vary from place to place and have also varied historically from year to year. To do the job properly, Emacs needs to know which rules to use. Some operating systems keep track of the rules that apply to the place where you are; on these systems, Emacs gets the information it needs from the system automatically. If some or all of this information is missing, Emacs lls in the gaps with the rules currently used in Cambridge, Massachusetts. If the resulting rules are not what you want, you can tell Emacs the rules to use by setting certain variables: calendar-daylight-savings-starts and calendar-daylight-savings-ends. These values should be Lisp expressions that refer to the variable year, and evaluate to the Gregorian date on which daylight saving time starts or (respectively) ends, in the form of a list (month day year ). The values should be nil if your area does not use daylight saving time. Emacs uses these expressions to determine the starting date of daylight saving time for the holiday list and for correcting times of day in the solar and lunar calculations. The values for Cambridge, Massachusetts are as follows:

Chapter 28: The Calendar and the Diary

366

(calendar-nth-named-day 2 0 3 year) (calendar-nth-named-day 1 0 11 year) That is, the second 0th day (Sunday) of the third month (March) in the year specied by year, and the rst Sunday of the eleventh month (November) of that year. If daylight saving time were changed to start on October 1, you would set calendar-daylight-savings-starts to this: (list 10 1 year) If there is no daylight saving time at your location, or if you want all times in standard time, set calendar-daylight-savings-starts and calendardaylight-savings-ends to nil. The variable calendar-daylight-time-offset species the dierence between daylight saving time and standard time, measured in minutes. The value for Cambridge, Massachusetts is 60. Finally, the two variables calendar-daylight-savings-starts-time and calendar-daylight-savings-ends-time specify the number of minutes after midnight local time when the transition to and from daylight saving time should occur. For Cambridge, Massachusetts both variables values are 120.

28.14 Summing Time Intervals

The timeclock package adds up time intervals, so you can (for instance) keep track of how much time you spend working on particular projects. Use the M-x timeclock-in command when you start working on a project, and M-x timeclock-out command when youre done. Each time you do this, it adds one time interval to the record of the project. You can change to working on a dierent project with M-x timeclock-change. Once youve collected data from a number of time intervals, you can use M-x timeclock-workday-remaining to see how much time is left to work today (assuming a typical average of 8 hours a day), and M-x timeclock-when-to-leave which will calculate when youre done. If you want Emacs to display the amount of time left of your workday in the mode line, either customize the timeclock-modeline-display variable and set its value to t, or invoke the M-x timeclock-modeline-display command. Terminating the current Emacs session might or might not mean that you have stopped working on the project and, by default, Emacs asks you. You can, however, customize the value of the variable timeclock-ask-before-exiting to nil to avoid the question; then, only an explicit M-x timeclock-out or M-x timeclock-change will tell Emacs that the current interval is over. The timeclock functions work by accumulating the data in a le called .timelog in your home directory. You can specify a dierent name for this le by customizing the variable timeclock-file. If you edit the timeclock le manually, or if you change the value of any of timeclocks customizable variables, you should run the command M-x timeclock-reread-log to update the data in Emacs from the le.

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

367

29 Sending Mail
To send an email message from Emacs, type C-x m. This switches to a buer named *unsent mail*, where you can edit the text and headers of the message. When done, type C-c C-s or C-c C-c to send it. C-x m C-x 4 m C-x 5 m C-c C-s C-c C-c Begin composing mail (compose-mail). Likewise, in another window (compose-mail-other-window). Likewise, but in a new frame (compose-mail-other-frame). In the mail buer, send the message (message-send). In the mail buer, send the message and bury the buer (messagesend-and-exit).

The mail buer is an ordinary Emacs buer, so you can switch to other buers while composing the mail. If you want to send another mail before nishing the current one, type C-x m again to open a new mail buer whose name has a dierent numeric sux (see Section 16.3 [Misc Buer], page 152). If you invoke the command with a prex argument, C-u C-x m, Emacs switches back to the last mail buer, and asks if you want to erase the message in that buer; if you answer no, this lets you pick up editing the message where you left o. The command C-x 4 m (compose-mail-other-window) does the same as C-x m, except it displays the mail buer in a dierent window. The command C-x 5 m (compose-mail-other-frame) does it in a new frame. When you type C-c C-c or C-c C-s to send the mail, Emacs may ask you how it should deliver the maileither directly via SMTP, or using some other method. See Section 29.4.1 [Mail Sending], page 370, for details.

29.1 The Format of the Mail Buer

Here is an example of the contents of a mail buer: To: [email protected] CC: [email protected], [email protected] Subject: Re: What is best in life? From: [email protected] --text follows this line-To crush your enemies, see them driven before you, and to hear the lamentation of their women. At the top of the mail buer is a set of header elds, which are used for specifying information about the emails recipient(s), subject, and so on. The above buer contains header elds for To, Cc, Subject, and From. Some header elds are automatically pre-initialized in the mail buer, when appropriate. The line that says --text follows this line-- separates the header elds from the body (or text) of the message. Everything above that line is treated as part of the headers; everything below it is treated as the body. The delimiter line itself does not appear in the message actually sent.

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

368

You can insert and edit header elds using ordinary editing commands. See Section 29.4.2 [Header Editing], page 372, for commands specic to editing header elds. Certain headers, such as Date and Message-Id, are normally omitted from the mail buer and are created automatically when the message is sent.

29.2 Mail Header Fields

A header eld in the mail buer starts with a eld name at the beginning of a line, terminated by a colon. Upper and lower case are equivalent in eld names. After the colon and optional whitespace comes the contents of the eld. You can use any name you like for a header eld, but normally people use only standard eld names with accepted meanings. The From header eld identies the person sending the email (i.e. you). This should be a valid mailing address, as replies are normally sent there. The default contents of this header eld are computed from the variables user-full-name (which species your full name) and user-mail-address (your email address). On some operating systems, Emacs initializes these two variables using environment variables (see Section C.4.1 [General Variables], page 510). If this information is unavailable or wrong, you should customize the variables yourself (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). The value of the variable mail-from-style species how to format the contents of the From eld: nil parens angles Use just the address, as in [email protected]. Use both address and full name, as in: [email protected] (Elvis Parsley). Use both address and full name, as in: Elvis Parsley <[email protected]>.

any other value Use angles normally. But if the address must be quoted to remain syntactically valid under the angles format but not under the parens format, use parens instead. This is the default. Apart from From, here is a table of commonly-used elds: To Subject CC The mailing address(es) to which the message is addressed. To list more than one address, use commas to separate them. The subject of the message. Additional mailing address(es) to send the message to. This is like To, except that these readers should not regard the message as directed at them. Additional mailing address(es) to send the message to, which should not appear in the header of the message actually sent. BCC stands for blind carbon copies.

BCC

Chapter 29: Sending Mail FCC

369

The name of a le, to which a copy of the sent message should be appended. Emacs writes the message in mbox format, unless the le is in Babyl format (used by Rmail before Emacs 23), in which case Emacs writes in Babyl format. If an Rmail buer is visiting the le, Emacs updates it accordingly. To specify more than one le, use several FCC elds, with one le name in each eld. An address to which replies should be sent, instead of From. This is used if, for some reason, your From address cannot receive replies.

Reply-to

Mail-reply-to This eld takes precedence over Reply-to. It is used because some mailing lists set the Reply-to eld for their own purposes (a somewhat controversial practice). Mail-followup-to One of more address(es) to use as default recipient(s) for follow-up messages. This is typically used when you reply to a message from a mailing list that you are subscribed to, and want replies to go to the list without sending an extra copy to you. In-reply-to An identier for the message you are replying to. Most mail readers use this information to group related messages together. Normally, this header is lled in automatically when you reply to a message in any mail program built into Emacs. References Identiers for previous related messages. Like In-reply-to, this is normally lled in automatically for you. The To, CC, and BCC elds can appear any number of times, and each such header eld can contain multiple addresses, separated by commas. This way, you can specify any number of places to send the message. These elds can also have continuation lines: one or more lines starting with whitespace, following the starting line of the eld, are considered part of the eld. Heres an example of a To eld with a continuation line: To: [email protected], [email protected], [email protected] You can direct Emacs to insert certain default headers into the mail buer by setting the variable mail-default-headers to a string. Then C-x m inserts this string into the message headers. For example, here is how to add a Reply-to and FCC header to each message:
(setq mail-default-headers "Reply-to: [email protected]\nFCC: ~/Mail/sent")

If the default header elds are not appropriate for a particular message, edit them as necessary before sending the message.

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

370

29.3 Mail Aliases

You can dene mail aliases, which are short mnemonic names that stand for one or more mailing addresses. By default, mail aliases are dened in the le ~/.mailrc. You can specify a dierent le name to use, by setting the variable mail-personalalias-file. To dene an alias in .mailrc, write a line like this: alias nick fulladdresses This means that nick should expand into fulladdresses, where fulladdresses can be either a single address, or multiple addresses separated with spaces. For instance, to make maingnu stand for [email protected] plus a local address of your own, put in this line: alias maingnu [email protected] local-gnu If an address contains a space, quote the whole address with a pair of double quotes, like this: alias jsmith "John Q. Smith <[email protected]>" Note that you need not include double quotes around individual parts of the address, such as the persons full name. Emacs puts them in if they are needed. For instance, it inserts the above address as "John Q. Smith" <[email protected]>. Emacs also recognizes include commands in .mailrc. They look like this: source filename The .mailrc le is not unique to Emacs; many other mail-reading programs use it for mail aliases, and it can contain various other commands. However, Emacs ignores everything except alias denitions and include commands. Mail aliases expand as abbrevsthat is to say, as soon as you type a wordseparator character after an alias (see Chapter 26 [Abbrevs], page 322). This expansion takes place only within the To, From, CC, BCC, and Reply-to header elds (plus their Resent- variants); it does not take place in other header elds, such as Subject. You can also insert an aliased address directly, using the command M-x mail-abbrev-insert-alias. This reads an alias name, with completion, and inserts its denition at point.

29.4 Mail Commands

The default major mode for the *mail* buer is called Message mode. It behaves like Text mode in many ways, but provides several additional commands on the C-c prex, which make editing a message more convenient. In this section, we will describe some of the most commonly-used commands available in Message mode. 29.4.1 Mail Sending C-c C-c C-c C-s Send the message, and bury the mail buer (message-send-andexit). Send the message, and leave the mail buer selected (message-send).

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

371

The usual command to send a message is C-c C-c (mail-send-and-exit). This sends the message and then buries the mail buer, putting it at the lowest priority for reselection. If you want it to kill the mail buer instead, change the variable message-kill-buffer-on-exit to t. The command C-c C-s (message-send) sends the message and leaves the buer selected. Use this command if you want to modify the message (perhaps with new recipients) and send it again. Sending a message runs the hook message-send-hook. It also marks the mail buer as unmodied, except if the mail buer is also a le-visiting buer (in that case, only saving the le does that, and you dont get a warning if you try to send the same message twice). The variable send-mail-function controls how the message is delivered. Its value should be one of the following functions: sendmail-query-once Query for a delivery method (one of the other entries in this list), and use that method for this message; then save the method to sendmail-function, so that it is used for future deliveries. This is the default, unless you have already set the variables for sending mail via smtpmail-send-it (see below). smtpmail-send-it Send mail using the through an external mail host, such as your Internet service providers outgoing SMTP mail server. If you have not told Emacs how to contact the SMTP server, it prompts for this information, which is saved in the smtpmail-smtp-server variable and the le ~/.authinfo. See Section Emacs SMTP Library in Sending mail via SMTP . sendmail-send-it Send mail using the systems default sendmail program, or equivalent. This requires the system to be set up for delivering mail directly via SMTP. mailclient-send-it Pass the mail buer on to the systems designated mail client. See the commentary section in the le mailclient.el for details. feedmail-send-it This is similar to sendmail-send-it, but allows you to queue messages for later sending. See the commentary section in the le feedmail.el for details. When you send a message containing non-ASCII characters, they need to be encoded with a coding system (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188). Usually the coding system is specied automatically by your chosen language environment (see Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183). You can explicitly specify the coding system for outgoing mail by setting the variable sendmail-codingsystem (see Section 19.7 [Recognize Coding], page 190). If the coding system thus

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

372

determined does not handle the characters in a particular message, Emacs asks you to select the coding system to use, showing a list of possible coding systems. 29.4.2 Mail Header Editing Message mode provides the following special commands to move to particular header elds and to complete addresses in headers. C-c C-f C-t Move to the To header (message-goto-to). C-c C-f C-s Move to the Subject header (message-goto-subject). C-c C-f C-c Move to the CC header (message-goto-cc). C-c C-f C-b Move to the BCC header (message-goto-bcc). C-c C-f C-r Move to the Reply-To header (message-goto-reply-to). C-c C-f C-f Move to the Mail-Followup-To header eld (message-gotofollowup-to). C-c C-f C-w Add a new FCC header eld, with le-name completion (messagegoto-fcc). C-c C-b TAB Move to the start of the message body (message-goto-body). Complete a mailing address (message-tab).

The commands to move point to particular header elds are all based on the prex C-c C-f (C-f is for eld). If the eld in question does not exist, the command creates one (the exception is mail-fcc, which creates a new eld each time). The command C-c C-b (message-goto-body) moves point to just after the header separator linethat is, to the beginning of the body. While editing a header eld that contains addresses, such as To:, CC: and BCC:, you can complete an address by typing TAB (message-tab). This attempts to insert the full name corresponding to the address based on a couple of methods, including EUDC, a library that recognizes a number of directory server protocols (see Section EUDC in The Emacs Unied Directory Client). Failing that, it attempts to expand the address as a mail alias (see Section 29.3 [Mail Aliases], page 370). If point is on a header eld that does not take addresses, or if it is in the message body, then TAB just inserts a tab character.

Chapter 29: Sending Mail 29.4.3 Citing Mail C-c C-y C-c C-q

373

Yank the selected message from the mail reader, as a citation (message-yank-original). Fill each paragraph cited from another message (message-fillyanked-message).

You can use the command C-c C-y (message-yank-original) to cite a message that you are replying to. This inserts the text of that message into the mail buer. This command works only if the mail buer is invoked from a mail reader running in Emacs, such as Rmail. By default, Emacs inserts the string > in front of each line of the cited text; this prex string is specied by the variable message-yank-prefix. If you call message-yank-original with a prex argument, the citation prex is not inserted. After using C-c C-y, you can type C-c C-q (message-fill-yanked-message) to ll the paragraphs of the cited message. One use of C-c C-q lls all such paragraphs, each one individually. To ll a single paragraph of the quoted message, use M-q. If lling does not automatically handle the type of citation prex you use, try setting the ll prex explicitly. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. You can customize mail citation through the hook mail-citation-hook. For example, you can use the Supercite package, which provides more exible citation (see Section Introduction in Supercite ). 29.4.4 Mail Miscellany You can attach a le to an outgoing message by typing C-c C-a (mml-attachfile) in the mail buer. Attaching is done using the Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) standard. The mml-attach-file command prompts for the name of the le, and for the attachments content type, description, and disposition. The content type is normally detected automatically; just type RET to accept the default. The description is a single line of text that the recipient will see next to the attachment; you may also choose to leave this empty. The disposition is either inline (the default), which means the recipient will see a link to the attachment within the message body, or attachment, which means the link will be separate from the body. The mml-attach-file command is specic to Message mode; in Mail mode use mail-add-attachment instead. It will prompt only for the name of the le, and will determine the content type and the disposition automatically. If you want to include some description of the attached le, type that in the message body. The actual contents of the attached le are not inserted into the mail buer. Instead, some placeholder text is inserted into the mail buer, like this:
<#part type="text/plain" filename="~/foo.txt" disposition=inline> <#/part>

When you type C-c C-c or C-c C-s to send the message, the attached le will be delivered with it. While composing a message, you can do spelling correction on the message text by typing M-x ispell-message. If you have yanked an incoming message into the

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

374

outgoing draft, this command skips what was yanked, but it checks the text that you yourself inserted (it looks for indentation or mail-yank-prefix to distinguish the cited lines from your input). See Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112. Turning on Message mode (which C-x m does automatically) runs the normal hooks text-mode-hook and message-mode-hook. Initializing a new outgoing message runs the normal hook message-setup-hook; you can use this hook if you want to make changes to the appearance of the mail buer. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. The main dierence between these hooks is just when they are invoked. Whenever you type C-x m, message-mode-hook runs as soon as the mail buer is created. Then the message-setup function inserts the default contents of the buer. After these default contents are inserted, message-setup-hook runs. If you use C-x m to continue an existing composition, message-mode-hook runs immediately after switching to the mail buer. If the buer is unmodied, or if you decide to erase it and start again, message-setup-hook runs after the default contents are inserted.

29.5 Mail Signature

You can add a standard piece of textyour mail signatureto the end of every message. This signature may contain information such as your telephone number or your physical location. The variable mail-signature determines how Emacs handles the mail signature. The default value of mail-signature is t; this means to look for your mail signature in the le ~/.signature. If this le exists, its contents are automatically inserted into the end of the mail buer. You can change the signature le via the variable mail-signature-file. If you change mail-signature to a string, that species the text of the signature directly. If you change mail-signature to nil, Emacs will not insert your mail signature automatically. You can insert your mail signature by typing C-c C-w (messageinsert-signature) in the mail buer. Emacs will look for your signature in the signature le. By convention, a mail signature should be marked by a line whose contents are -- . If your signature lacks this prex, it is added for you. The remainder of your signature should be no more than four lines.

29.6 Mail Amusements

M-x spook adds a line of randomly chosen keywords to an outgoing mail message. The keywords are chosen from a list of words that suggest you are discussing something subversive. The idea behind this feature is the suspicion that the NSA1 and other intelligence agencies snoop on all electronic mail messages that contain keywords suggesting
1

The US National Security Agency.

Chapter 29: Sending Mail

375

they might nd them interesting. (The agencies say that they dont, but thats what they would say.) The idea is that if lots of people add suspicious words to their messages, the agencies will get so busy with spurious input that they will have to give up reading it all. Whether or not this is true, it at least amuses some people. You can use the fortune program to put a fortune cookie message into outgoing mail. To do this, add fortune-to-signature to mail-setup-hook: (add-hook mail-setup-hook fortune-to-signature) You will probably need to set the variable fortune-file before using this.

29.7 Mail-Composition Methods

In this chapter we have described the usual Emacs mode for editing and sending mailMessage mode. This is only one of several available modes. Prior to Emacs 23.2, the default mode was Mail mode, which is similar to Message mode in many respects but lacks features such as MIME support. Another available mode is MH-E (see Section MH-E in The Emacs Interface to MH ). You can choose any of these mail user agents as your preferred method for editing and sending mail. The commands C-x m, C-x 4 m and C-x 5 m use whichever agent you have specied; so do various other parts of Emacs that send mail, such as the bug reporter (see Section 34.3 [Bugs], page 473). To specify a mail user agent, customize the variable mail-user-agent. Currently, legitimate values include message-useragent (Message mode) sendmail-user-agent (Mail mode), gnus-user-agent, and mh-e-user-agent. If you select a dierent mail-composition method, the information in this chapter about the mail buer and Message mode does not apply; the other methods use a dierent format of text in a dierent buer, and their commands are dierent as well. Similarly, to specify your preferred method for reading mail, customize the variable read-mail-command. The default is rmail (see Chapter 30 [Rmail], page 376).

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

376

30 Reading Mail with Rmail

Rmail is an Emacs subsystem for reading and disposing of mail that you receive. Rmail stores mail messages in les called Rmail les. Reading the messages in an Rmail le is done in a special major mode, Rmail mode, which redenes most letters to run commands for managing mail.

30.1 Basic Concepts of Rmail

Using Rmail in the simplest fashion, you have one Rmail le ~/RMAIL in which all of your mail is saved. It is called your primary Rmail le. The command M-x rmail reads your primary Rmail le, merges new mail in from your inboxes, displays the rst message you havent read yet, and lets you begin reading. The variable rmail-file-name species the name of the primary Rmail le. Rmail displays only one message in the Rmail le at a time. The message that is shown is called the current message. Rmail modes special commands can do such things as delete the current message, copy it into another le, send a reply, or move to another message. You can also create multiple Rmail les and use Rmail to move messages between them. Within the Rmail le, messages are normally arranged sequentially in order of receipt; you can specify other ways to sort them (see Section 30.12 [Rmail Sorting], page 390). Messages are identied by consecutive integers which are their message numbers. The number of the current message is displayed in Rmails mode line, followed by the total number of messages in the le. You can move to a message by specifying its message number with the j key (see Section 30.3 [Rmail Motion], page 377). Following the usual conventions of Emacs, changes in an Rmail le become permanent only when you save the le. You can save it with s (rmail-expungeand-save), which also expunges deleted messages from the le rst (see Section 30.4 [Rmail Deletion], page 378). To save the le without expunging, use C-x C-s. Rmail also saves the Rmail le after merging new mail from an inbox le (see Section 30.5 [Rmail Inbox], page 379). You can exit Rmail with q (rmail-quit); this expunges and saves the Rmail le, then buries the Rmail buer as well as its summary buer, if present (see Section 30.11 [Rmail Summary], page 386). But there is no need to exit formally. If you switch from Rmail to editing in other buers, and never switch back, you have exited. Just make sure to save the Rmail le eventually (like any other le you have changed). C-x s is a suitable way to do this (see Section 15.3.1 [Save Commands], page 128). The Rmail command b, rmail-bury, buries the Rmail buer and its summary without expunging and saving the Rmail le.

30.2 Scrolling Within a Message

When Rmail displays a message that does not t on the screen, you must scroll through it to read the rest. You could do this with C-v, M-v and M-<, but in Rmail scrolling is so frequent that it deserves to be easier.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail SPC DEL . / Scroll forward (scroll-up-command). Scroll backward (scroll-down-command). Scroll to start of message (rmail-beginning-of-message). Scroll to end of message (rmail-end-of-message).

377

Since the most common thing to do while reading a message is to scroll through it by screenfuls, Rmail makes SPC and DEL do the same as C-v (scroll-up-command) and M-v (scroll-down-command) respectively. The command . (rmail-beginning-of-message) scrolls back to the beginning of the selected message. This is not quite the same as M-<: for one thing, it does not set the mark; for another, it resets the buer boundaries of the current message if you have changed them. Similarly, the command / (rmail-end-of-message) scrolls forward to the end of the selected message.

30.3 Moving Among Messages

The most basic thing to do with a message is to read it. The way to do this in Rmail is to make the message current. The usual practice is to move sequentially through the le, since this is the order of receipt of messages. When you enter Rmail, you are positioned at the rst message that you have not yet made current (that is, the rst one that has the unseen attribute; see Section 30.9 [Rmail Attributes], page 384). Move forward to see the other new messages; move backward to re-examine old messages. n p M-n M-p C-c C-n C-c C-p j > < Move to the next nondeleted message, skipping any intervening deleted messages (rmail-next-undeleted-message). Move to the previous nondeleted message (rmail-previousundeleted-message). Move to the next message, including deleted messages (rmail-nextmessage). Move to the previous message, including deleted messages (rmailprevious-message). Move to the next message with the same subject as the current one (rmail-next-same-subject). Move to the previous message with the same subject as the current one (rmail-previous-same-subject). Move to the rst message. With argument n, move to message number n (rmail-show-message). Move to the last message (rmail-last-message). Move to the rst message (rmail-first-message).

M-s regexp RET Move to the next message containing a match for regexp (rmailsearch).

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail - M-s regexp RET Move to the previous message containing a match for regexp.

378

n and p are the usual way of moving among messages in Rmail. They move through the messages sequentially, but skip over deleted messages, which is usually what you want to do. Their command denitions are named rmail-nextundeleted-message and rmail-previous-undeleted-message. If you do not want to skip deleted messagesfor example, if you want to move to a message to undelete ituse the variants M-n and M-p (rmail-next-message and rmailprevious-message). A numeric argument to any of these commands serves as a repeat count. In Rmail, you can specify a numeric argument by typing just the digits. You dont need to type C-u rst. The M-s (rmail-search) command is Rmails version of search. The usual incremental search command C-s works in Rmail, but it searches only within the current message. The purpose of M-s is to search for another message. It reads a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97) nonincrementally, then searches starting at the beginning of the following message for a match. It then selects that message. If regexp is empty, M-s reuses the regexp used the previous time. To search backward in the le for another message, give M-s a negative argument. In Rmail you can do this with - M-s. This begins searching from the end of the previous message. It is also possible to search for a message based on labels. See Section 30.8 [Rmail Labels], page 383. The C-c C-n (rmail-next-same-subject) command moves to the next message with the same subject as the current one. A prex argument serves as a repeat count. With a negative argument, this command moves backward, acting like C-c C-p (rmail-previous-same-subject). When comparing subjects, these commands ignore the prexes typically added to the subjects of replies. To move to a message specied by absolute message number, use j (rmail-showmessage) with the message number as argument. With no argument, j selects the rst message. < (rmail-first-message) also selects the rst message. > (rmaillast-message) selects the last message.

30.4 Deleting Messages

When you no longer need to keep a message, you can delete it. This ags it as ignorable, and some Rmail commands pretend it is no longer present; but it still has its place in the Rmail le, and still has its message number. Expunging the Rmail le actually removes the deleted messages. The remaining messages are renumbered consecutively. d C-d Delete the current message, and move to the next nondeleted message (rmail-delete-forward). Delete the current message, and move to the previous nondeleted message (rmail-delete-backward).

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail u x

379

Undelete the current message, or move back to the previous deleted message and undelete it (rmail-undelete-previous-message). Expunge the Rmail le (rmail-expunge).

There are two Rmail commands for deleting messages. Both delete the current message and select another. d (rmail-delete-forward) moves to the following message, skipping messages already deleted, while C-d (rmail-delete-backward) moves to the previous nondeleted message. If there is no nondeleted message to move to in the specied direction, the message that was just deleted remains current. d with a prex argument is equivalent to C-d. Note that the Rmail summary versions of these commands behave slightly dierently (see Section 30.11.2 [Rmail Summary Edit], page 388). Whenever Rmail deletes a message, it runs the hook rmail-delete-messagehook. When the hook functions are invoked, the message has been marked deleted, but it is still the current message in the Rmail buer. To make all the deleted messages nally vanish from the Rmail le, type x (rmail-expunge). Until you do this, you can still undelete the deleted messages. The undeletion command, u (rmail-undelete-previous-message), is designed to cancel the eect of a d command in most cases. It undeletes the current message if the current message is deleted. Otherwise it moves backward to previous messages until a deleted message is found, and undeletes that message. You can usually undo a d with a u because the u moves back to and undeletes the message that the d deleted. But this does not work when the d skips a few already-deleted messages that follow the message being deleted; then the u command undeletes the last of the messages that were skipped. There is no clean way to avoid this problem. However, by repeating the u command, you can eventually get back to the message that you intend to undelete. You can also select a particular deleted message with the M-p command, then type u to undelete it. A deleted message has the deleted attribute, and as a result deleted appears in the mode line when the current message is deleted. In fact, deleting or undeleting a message is nothing more than adding or removing this attribute. See Section 30.9 [Rmail Attributes], page 384.

30.5 Rmail Files and Inboxes

When you receive mail locally, the operating system places incoming mail for you in a le that we call your inbox. When you start up Rmail, it runs a C program called movemail to copy the new messages from your local inbox into your primary Rmail le, which also contains other messages saved from previous Rmail sessions. It is in this le that you actually read the mail with Rmail. This operation is called getting new mail. You can get new mail at any time in Rmail by typing g. The variable rmail-primary-inbox-list contains a list of the les that are inboxes for your primary Rmail le. If you dont set this variable explicitly, Rmail uses the MAIL environment variable, or, as a last resort, a default inbox based on rmail-spool-directory. The default inbox le depends on your oper-

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

380

ating system; often it is /var/mail/username , /var/spool/mail/username , or /usr/spool/mail/username . You can specify the inbox le(s) for any Rmail le for the current session with the command set-rmail-inbox-list; see Section 30.6 [Rmail Files], page 380. There are two reasons for having separate Rmail les and inboxes. 1. The inbox le format varies between operating systems and according to the other mail software in use. Only one part of Rmail needs to know about the alternatives, and it need only understand how to convert all of them to Rmails own format. 2. It is very cumbersome to access an inbox le without danger of losing mail, because it is necessary to interlock with mail delivery. Moreover, dierent operating systems use dierent interlocking techniques. The strategy of moving mail out of the inbox once and for all into a separate Rmail le avoids the need for interlocking in all the rest of Rmail, since only Rmail operates on the Rmail le. Rmail was originally written to use the Babyl format as its internal format. Since then, we have recognized that the usual inbox format (mbox) on Unix and GNU systems is adequate for the job, and so since Emacs 23 Rmail uses that as its internal format. The Rmail le is still separate from the inbox le, even though their format is the same. When getting new mail, Rmail rst copies the new mail from the inbox le to the Rmail le; then it saves the Rmail le; then it clears out the inbox le. This way, a system crash may cause duplication of mail between the inbox and the Rmail le, but cannot lose mail. If rmail-preserve-inbox is non-nil, then Rmail does not clear out the inbox le when it gets new mail. You may wish to set this, for example, on a portable computer you use to check your mail via POP while traveling, so that your mail will remain on the server and you can save it later on your workstation. In some cases, Rmail copies the new mail from the inbox le indirectly. First it runs the movemail program to move the mail from the inbox to an intermediate le called .newmail-inboxname , in the same directory as the Rmail le. Then Rmail merges the new mail from that le, saves the Rmail le, and only then deletes the intermediate le. If there is a crash at the wrong time, this le continues to exist, and Rmail will use it again the next time it gets new mail from that inbox. If Rmail is unable to convert the data in .newmail-inboxname into mbox format, it renames the le to RMAILOSE.n (n is an integer chosen to make the name unique) so that Rmail will not have trouble with the data again. You should look at the le, nd whatever message confuses Rmail (probably one that includes the control-underscore character, octal code 037), and delete it. Then you can use 1 g to get new mail from the corrected le.

30.6 Multiple Rmail Files

Rmail operates by default on your primary Rmail le, which is named ~/RMAIL and receives your incoming mail from your system inbox le. But you can also have other Rmail les and edit them with Rmail. These les can receive mail through their

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

381

own inboxes, or you can move messages into them with explicit Rmail commands (see Section 30.7 [Rmail Output], page 381). i file RET Read le into Emacs and run Rmail on it (rmail-input). M-x set-rmail-inbox-list RET files RET Specify inbox le names for current Rmail le to get mail from. g Merge new mail from current Rmail les inboxes (rmail-get-newmail).

C-u g file RET Merge new mail from inbox le le. To run Rmail on a le other than your primary Rmail le, you can use the i (rmail-input) command in Rmail. This visits the le in Rmail mode. You can use M-x rmail-input even when not in Rmail, but it is easier to type C-u M-x rmail, which does the same thing. The le you read with i should normally be a valid mbox le. If it is not, Rmail tries to convert its text to mbox format, and visits the converted text in the buer. If you save the buer, that converts the le. If you specify a le name that doesnt exist, i initializes a new buer for creating a new Rmail le. You can also select an Rmail le from a menu. In the Classify menu, choose the Input Rmail File item; then choose the Rmail le you want. The variables rmail-secondary-file-directory and rmail-secondary-file-regexp specify which les to oer in the menu: the rst variable says which directory to nd them in; the second says which les in that directory to oer (all those that match the regular expression). If no les match, you cannot select this menu item. These variables also apply to choosing a le for output (see Section 30.7 [Rmail Output], page 381). The inbox les to use are specied by the variable rmail-inbox-list, which is buer-local in Rmail mode. As a special exception, if you have specied no inbox les for your primary Rmail le, it uses the MAIL environment variable, or your standard system inbox. The g command (rmail-get-new-mail) merges mail into the current Rmail le from its inboxes. If the Rmail le has no inboxes, g does nothing. The command M-x rmail also merges new mail into your primary Rmail le. To merge mail from a le that is not the usual inbox, give the g key a numeric argument, as in C-u g. Then it reads a le name and merges mail from that le. The inbox le is not deleted or changed in any way when g with an argument is used. This is, therefore, a general way of merging one le of messages into another.

30.7 Copying Messages Out to Files

These commands copy messages from an Rmail le into another le. o file RET Append a full copy of the current message to the le le (rmailoutput).

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

382

C-o file RET Append a copy of the current message, as displayed, to the le le (rmail-output-as-seen). w file RET Output just the message body to the le le, taking the default le name from the message Subject header. The commands o and C-o copy the current message into a specied le, adding it at the end. The two commands dier mainly in how much to copy: o copies the full message headers, even if they are not all visible, while C-o copies exactly the headers currently displayed and no more. See Section 30.13 [Rmail Display], page 391. In addition, o converts the message to Babyl format (used by Rmail in Emacs version 22 and before) if the le is in Babyl format; C-o cannot output to Babyl les at all. If the output le is currently visited in an Emacs buer, the output commands append the message to that buer. It is up to you to save the buer eventually in its le. Sometimes you may receive a message whose body holds the contents of a le. You can save the body to a le (excluding the message header) with the w command (rmail-output-body-to-file). Often these messages contain the intended le name in the Subject eld, so the w command uses the Subject eld as the default for the output le name. However, the le name is read using the minibuer, so you can specify a dierent name if you wish. You can also output a message to an Rmail le chosen with a menu. In the Classify menu, choose the Output Rmail File menu item; then choose the Rmail le you want. This outputs the current message to that le, like the o command. The variables rmail-secondary-file-directory and rmail-secondary-file-regexp specify which les to oer in the menu: the rst variable says which directory to nd them in; the second says which les in that directory to oer (all those that match the regular expression). If no les match, you cannot select this menu item. Copying a message with o or C-o gives the original copy of the message the filed attribute, so that filed appears in the mode line when such a message is current. If you like to keep just a single copy of every mail message, set the variable rmail-delete-after-output to t; then the o, C-o and w commands delete the original message after copying it. (You can undelete it afterward if you wish.) The variable rmail-output-file-alist lets you specify intelligent defaults for the output le, based on the contents of the current message. The value should be a list whose elements have this form: (regexp . name-exp ) If theres a match for regexp in the current message, then the default le name for output is name-exp. If multiple elements match the message, the rst matching element decides the default le name. The subexpression name-exp may be a string constant giving the le name to use, or more generally it may be any Lisp expression that returns a le name as a string. rmail-output-file-alist applies to both o and C-o.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

383

Rmail can automatically save messages from your primary Rmail le (the one that rmail-file-name species) to other les, based on the value of the variable rmail-automatic-folder-directives. This variable is a list of elements (directives) that say which messages to save where. Each directive is a list consisting of an output le, followed by one or more pairs of a header name and a regular expression. If a message has a header matching the specied regular expression, that message is saved to the given le. If the directive has more than one header entry, all must match. Rmail checks directives when it shows a message from the le rmail-file-name, and applies the rst that matches (if any). If the output le is nil, the message is deleted, not saved. For example, you can use this feature to save messages from a particular address, or with a particular subject, to a dedicated le.

30.8 Labels
Each message can have various labels assigned to it as a means of classication. Each label has a name; dierent names are dierent labels. Any given label is either present or absent on a particular message. A few label names have standard meanings and are given to messages automatically by Rmail when appropriate; these special labels are called attributes. All other labels are assigned only by users. a label RET Assign the label label to the current message (rmail-add-label). k label RET Remove the label label from the current message (rmail-kill-label). C-M-n labels RET Move to the next message that has one of the labels labels (rmailnext-labeled-message). C-M-p labels RET Move to the previous message that has one of the labels labels (rmailprevious-labeled-message). l labels RET C-M-l labels RET Make a summary of all messages containing any of the labels labels (rmail-summary-by-labels). The a (rmail-add-label) and k (rmail-kill-label) commands allow you to assign or remove any label on the current message. If the label argument is empty, it means to assign or remove the same label most recently assigned or removed. Once you have given messages labels to classify them as you wish, there are three ways to use the labels: in moving, in summaries, and in sorting. C-M-n labels RET (rmail-next-labeled-message) moves to the next message that has one of the labels labels. The argument labels species one or more label names, separated by commas. C-M-p (rmail-previous-labeled-message) is similar, but moves backwards to previous messages. A numeric argument to either command serves as a repeat count.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

384

The command C-M-l labels RET (rmail-summary-by-labels) displays a summary containing only the messages that have at least one of a specied set of labels. The argument labels is one or more label names, separated by commas. See Section 30.11 [Rmail Summary], page 386, for information on summaries. If the labels argument to C-M-n, C-M-p or C-M-l is empty, it means to use the last set of labels specied for any of these commands. See Section 30.12 [Rmail Sorting], page 390, for information on sorting messages with labels.

30.9 Rmail Attributes

Some labels such as deleted and filed have built-in meanings, and Rmail assigns them to messages automatically at appropriate times; these labels are called attributes. Here is a list of Rmail attributes: unseen Means the message has never been current. Assigned to messages when they come from an inbox le, and removed when a message is made current. When you start Rmail, it initially shows the rst message that has this attribute. Means the message is deleted. Assigned by deletion commands and removed by undeletion commands (see Section 30.4 [Rmail Deletion], page 378). Means the message has been copied to some other le. Assigned by the o and C-o le output commands (see Section 30.7 [Rmail Output], page 381). Means you have mailed an answer to the message. Assigned by the r command (rmail-reply). See Section 30.10 [Rmail Reply], page 385.

deleted

filed

answered

forwarded Means you have forwarded the message. Assigned by the f command (rmail-forward). See Section 30.10 [Rmail Reply], page 385. edited Means you have edited the text of the message within Rmail. See Section 30.15 [Rmail Editing], page 392. Means you have resent the message. Assigned by the command M-x rmail-resend. See Section 30.10 [Rmail Reply], page 385. Means you have retried a failed outgoing message. Assigned by the command M-x rmail-retry-failure. See Section 30.10 [Rmail Reply], page 385.

resent

retried

All other labels are assigned or removed only by users, and have no standard meaning.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

385

30.10 Sending Replies

Rmail has several commands to send outgoing mail. See Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367, for information on using Message mode, including certain features meant to work with Rmail. What this section documents are the special commands of Rmail for entering the mail buer. Note that the usual keys for sending mailC-x m, C-x 4 m, and C-x 5 malso work normally in Rmail mode. m c r f C-u f M-m Send a message (rmail-mail). Continue editing the already started outgoing message (rmailcontinue). Send a reply to the current Rmail message (rmail-reply). Forward the current message to other users (rmail-forward). Resend the current message to other users (rmail-resend). Try sending a bounced message a second time (rmail-retryfailure).

The most common reason to send a message while in Rmail is to reply to the message you are reading. To do this, type r (rmail-reply). This displays a mail composition buer in another window, much like C-x 4 m, but preinitializes the Subject, To, CC, In-reply-to and References header elds based on the message you are replying to. The To eld starts out as the address of the person who sent the message you received, and the CC eld starts out with all the other recipients of that message. You can exclude certain recipients from being included automatically in replies, using the variable mail-dont-reply-to-names. Its value should be a regular expression; any recipients that match are excluded from the CC eld. They are also excluded from the To eld, unless this would leave the eld empty. If this variable is nil, then the rst time you compose a reply it is initialized to a default value that matches your own address. To omit the CC eld completely for a particular reply, enter the reply command with a numeric argument: C-u r or 1 r. This means to reply only to the sender of the original message. Once the mail composition buer has been initialized, editing and sending the mail goes as usual (see Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367). You can edit the presupplied header elds if they are not what you want. You can also use commands such as C-c C-y, which yanks in the message that you are replying to (see Section 29.4 [Mail Commands], page 370). You can also switch to the Rmail buer, select a dierent message there, switch back, and yank the new current message. Sometimes a message does not reach its destination. Mailers usually send the failed message back to you, enclosed in a failure message. The Rmail command M-m (rmail-retry-failure) prepares to send the same message a second time: it sets up a mail composition buer with the same text and header elds as before. If you type C-c C-c right away, you send the message again exactly the same as the rst time. Alternatively, you can edit the text or headers and then send it. The variable

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

386

rmail-retry-ignored-headers, in the same format as rmail-ignored-headers (see Section 30.13 [Rmail Display], page 391), controls which headers are stripped from the failed message when retrying it. Another frequent reason to send mail in Rmail is to forward the current message to other users. f (rmail-forward) makes this easy by preinitializing the mail composition buer with the current message as the text, and a subject of the form [from : subject ], where from and subject are the sender and subject of the original message. All you have to do is ll in the recipients and send. When you forward a message, recipients get a message which is from you, and which has the original message in its contents. Rmail oers two formats for forwarded messages. The default is to use MIME (see Section 30.13 [Rmail Display], page 391) format. This includes the original message as a separate part. You can use a simpler format if you prefer, by setting the variable rmail-enable-mime-composing to nil. In this case, Rmail just includes the original message enclosed between two delimiter lines. It also modies every line that starts with a dash, by inserting - at the start of the line. When you receive a forwarded message in this format, if it contains something besides ordinary textfor example, program source codeyou might nd it useful to undo that transformation. You can do this by selecting the forwarded message and typing M-x unforward-rmail-message. This command extracts the original forwarded message, deleting the inserted - strings, and inserts it into the Rmail le as a separate message immediately following the current one. Resending is an alternative similar to forwarding; the dierence is that resending sends a message that is from the original sender, just as it reached youwith a few added header elds (Resent-From and Resent-To) to indicate that it came via you. To resend a message in Rmail, use C-u f. (f runs rmail-forward, which invokes rmail-resend if you provide a numeric argument.) Use the m (rmail-mail) command to start editing an outgoing message that is not a reply. It leaves the header elds empty. Its only dierence from C-x 4 m is that it makes the Rmail buer accessible for C-c C-y, just as r does. The c (rmail-continue) command resumes editing the mail composition buer, to nish editing an outgoing message you were already composing, or to alter a message you have sent. If you set the variable rmail-mail-new-frame to a non-nil value, then all the Rmail commands to start sending a message create a new frame to edit it in. This frame is deleted when you send the message. All the Rmail commands to send a message use the mail-composition method that you have chosen (see Section 29.7 [Mail Methods], page 375).

30.11 Summaries
A summary is a buer containing one line per message to give you an overview of the mail in an Rmail le. Each line shows the message number and date, the sender, the line count, the labels, and the subject. Moving point in the summary buer selects messages as you move to their summary lines. Almost all Rmail commands

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

387

are valid in the summary buer also; when used there, they apply to the message described by the current line of the summary. A summary buer applies to a single Rmail le only; if you are editing multiple Rmail les, each one can have its own summary buer. The summary buer name is made by appending -summary to the Rmail buers name. Normally only one summary buer is displayed at a time. 30.11.1 Making Summaries Here are the commands to create a summary for the current Rmail buer. Once the Rmail buer has a summary, changes in the Rmail buer (such as deleting or expunging messages, and getting new mail) automatically update the summary. h C-M-h Summarize all messages (rmail-summary).

l labels RET C-M-l labels RET Summarize messages that have one or more of the specied labels (rmail-summary-by-labels). C-M-r rcpts RET Summarize messages that match the specied recipients (rmailsummary-by-recipients). C-M-t topic RET Summarize messages that have a match for the specied regexp topic in their subjects (rmail-summary-by-topic). C-M-s regexp RET Summarize messages whose headers match the specied regular expression regexp (rmail-summary-by-regexp). C-M-f senders RET Summarize messages that match the specied senders. summary-by-senders). (rmail-

The h or C-M-h (rmail-summary) command lls the summary buer for the current Rmail buer with a summary of all the messages in the buer. It then displays and selects the summary buer in another window. C-M-l labels RET (rmail-summary-by-labels) makes a partial summary mentioning only the messages that have one or more of the labels labels. labels should contain label names separated by commas. C-M-r rcpts RET (rmail-summary-by-recipients) makes a partial summary mentioning only the messages that have one or more recipients matching the regular expression rcpts. You can use commas to separate multiple regular expressions. These are matched against the To, From, and CC headers (supply a prex argument to exclude this header). C-M-t topic RET (rmail-summary-by-topic) makes a partial summary mentioning only the messages whose subjects have a match for the regular expression

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

388

topic. You can use commas to separate multiple regular expressions. With a prex argument, the match is against the whole message, not just the subject. C-M-s regexp RET (rmail-summary-by-regexp) makes a partial summary that mentions only the messages whose headers (including the date and the subject lines) match the regular expression regexp. C-M-f senders RET (rmail-summary-by-senders) makes a partial summary that mentions only the messages whose From elds match the regular expression senders. You can use commas to separate multiple regular expressions. Note that there is only one summary buer for any Rmail buer; making any kind of summary discards any previous summary. The variable rmail-summary-window-size says how many lines to use for the summary window. The variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag controls whether the summary line for a message should include the line count of the message. Setting this option to nil might speed up the generation of summaries. 30.11.2 Editing in Summaries You can use the Rmail summary buer to do almost anything you can do in the Rmail buer itself. In fact, once you have a summary buer, theres no need to switch back to the Rmail buer. You can select and display various messages in the Rmail buer, from the summary buer, just by moving point in the summary buer to dierent lines. It doesnt matter what Emacs command you use to move point; whichever line point is on at the end of the command, that message is selected in the Rmail buer. Almost all Rmail commands work in the summary buer as well as in the Rmail buer. Thus, d in the summary buer deletes the current message, u undeletes, and x expunges. (However, in the summary buer, a numeric argument to d, C-d and u serves as a repeat count. A negative argument reverses the meaning of d and C-d. Also, if there are no more undeleted messages in the relevant direction, the delete commands go to the rst or last message, rather than staying on the current message.) o and C-o output the current message to a FILE; r starts a reply to it; etc. You can scroll the current message while remaining in the summary buer using SPC and DEL. M-u (rmail-summary-undelete-many) undeletes all deleted messages in the summary. A prex argument means to undelete that many of the previous deleted messages. The Rmail commands to move between messages also work in the summary buer, but with a twist: they move through the set of messages included in the summary. They also ensure the Rmail buer appears on the screen (unlike cursor motion commands, which update the contents of the Rmail buer but dont display it in a window unless it already appears). Here is a list of these commands: n p Move to next line, skipping lines saying deleted, and select its message (rmail-summary-next-msg). Move to previous line, skipping lines saying deleted, and select its message (rmail-summary-previous-msg).

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail M-n M-p > < j RET

389

Move to next line and select its message (rmail-summary-next-all). Move to previous line and select its message (rmail-summaryprevious-all). Move to the last line, and select its message (rmail-summary-lastmessage). Move to the rst line, and select its message (rmail-summary-firstmessage). Select the message on the current line (ensuring that the Rmail buer appears on the screen; rmail-summary-goto-msg). With argument n, select message number n and move to its line in the summary buer; this signals an error if the message is not listed in the summary buer.

M-s pattern RET Search through messages for pattern starting with the current message; select the message found, and move point in the summary buer to that messages line (rmail-summary-search). A prex argument acts as a repeat count; a negative argument means search backward (equivalent to rmail-summary-search-backward.) C-M-n labels RET Move to the next message with at least one of the specied labels (rmail-summary-next-labeled-message). labels is a commaseparated list of labels. A prex argument acts as a repeat count. C-M-p labels RET Move to the previous message with at least one of the specied labels (rmail-summary-previous-labeled-message). C-c C-n RET Move to the next message with the same subject as the current message (rmail-summary-next-same-subject). A prex argument acts as a repeat count. C-c C-p RET Move to the previous message with the same subject as the current message (rmail-summary-previous-same-subject). Deletion, undeletion, and getting new mail, and even selection of a dierent message all update the summary buer when you do them in the Rmail buer. If the variable rmail-redisplay-summary is non-nil, these actions also bring the summary buer back onto the screen. When you are nished using the summary, type Q (rmail-summary-wipe) to delete the summary buers window. You can also exit Rmail while in the summary: q (rmail-summary-quit) deletes the summary window, then exits from Rmail by saving the Rmail le and switching to another buer. Alternatively, b (rmailsummary-bury) simply buries the Rmail summary and buer.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

390

30.12 Sorting the Rmail File

C-c C-s C-d M-x rmail-sort-by-date Sort messages of current Rmail buer by date. C-c C-s C-s M-x rmail-sort-by-subject Sort messages of current Rmail buer by subject. C-c C-s C-a M-x rmail-sort-by-author Sort messages of current Rmail buer by authors name. C-c C-s C-r M-x rmail-sort-by-recipient Sort messages of current Rmail buer by recipients names. C-c C-s C-c M-x rmail-sort-by-correspondent Sort messages of current Rmail buer by the name of the other correspondent. C-c C-s C-l M-x rmail-sort-by-lines Sort messages of current Rmail buer by number of lines. C-c C-s C-k RET labels RET M-x rmail-sort-by-labels RET labels RET Sort messages of current Rmail buer by labels. The argument labels should be a comma-separated list of labels. The order of these labels species the order of messages; messages with the rst label come rst, messages with the second label come second, and so on. Messages that have none of these labels come last. The Rmail sort commands perform a stable sort : if there is no reason to prefer either one of two messages, their order remains unchanged. You can use this to sort by more than one criterion. For example, if you use rmail-sort-by-date and then rmail-sort-by-author, messages from the same author appear in order by date. With a prex argument, all these commands reverse the order of comparison. This means they sort messages from newest to oldest, from biggest to smallest, or in reverse alphabetical order. The same keys in the summary buer run similar functions; for example, C-c C-s C-l runs rmail-summary-sort-by-lines. Note that these commands always sort the whole Rmail buer, even if the summary is only showing a subset of messages. Note that you cannot undo a sort, so you may wish to save the Rmail buer before sorting it.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

391

30.13 Display of Messages

This section describes how Rmail displays mail headers, MIME sections and attachments, URLs, and encrypted messages. t Toggle display of complete header (rmail-toggle-header). Before displaying each message for the rst time, Rmail reformats its header, hiding uninteresting header elds to reduce clutter. The t (rmail-toggle-header) command toggles this, switching between showing the reformatted header elds and showing the complete, original header. With a positive prex argument, the command shows the reformatted header; with a zero or negative prex argument, it shows the full header. Selecting the message again also reformats it if necessary. The variable rmail-ignored-headers holds a regular expression specifying the header elds to hide; any matching header line will be hidden. The variable rmailnonignored-headers overrides this: any header eld matching that regular expression is shown even if it matches rmail-ignored-headers too. The variable rmail-displayed-headers is an alternative to these two variables; if non-nil, this should be a regular expression specifying which headers to display (the default is nil). Rmail highlights certain header elds that are especially interestingby default, the From and Subject elds. This highlighting uses the rmail-highlight face. The variable rmail-highlighted-headers holds a regular expression specifying the header elds to highlight; if it matches the beginning of a header eld, that whole eld is highlighted. To disable this feature, set rmail-highlighted-headers to nil. If a message is in MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) format and contains multiple parts (MIME entities), Rmail displays each part with a tagline. The tagline summarizes the parts index, size, and content type. Depending on the content type, it may also contain one or more buttons; these perform actions such as saving the part into a le. RET TAB S-TAB v Hide or show the MIME part at point (rmail-mime-toggle-hidden). Move point to the next MIME tagline button. (rmail-mime-nextitem). Move point to the previous MIME part (rmail-mime-previous-item). Toggle between MIME display and raw message (rmail-mime).

Each plain-text MIME part is initially displayed immediately after its tagline, as part of the Rmail buer, while MIME parts of other types are represented only by their taglines, with their actual contents hidden. In either case, you can toggle a MIME part between its displayed and hidden states by typing RET anywhere in the partor anywhere in its tagline (except for buttons for other actions, if there are any). Type RET (or click with the mouse) to activate a tagline button, and TAB to cycle point between tagline buttons. The v (rmail-mime) command toggles between the default MIME display described above, and a raw display showing the undecoded MIME data. With a prex argument, this command toggles the display of only an entity at point.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

392

To prevent Rmail from handling MIME decoded messages, change the variable rmail-enable-mime to nil. When this is the case, the v (rmail-mime) command instead creates a temporary buer to display the current MIME message. If the current message is an encrypted one, use the command M-x rmail-epa-decrypt to decrypt it, using the EasyPG library (see Section EasyPG in EasyPG Assistant Users Manual ). You can highlight and activate URLs in the Rmail buer using Goto Address mode: (add-hook rmail-show-message-hook goto-address-mode) Then you can browse these URLs by clicking on them with Mouse-2 (or Mouse-1 quickly) or by moving to one and typing C-c RET. See Section 31.11.2 [Activating URLs], page 426.

30.14 Rmail and Coding Systems

Rmail automatically decodes messages which contain non-ASCII characters, just as Emacs does with les you visit and with subprocess output. Rmail uses the standard charset=charset header in the message, if any, to determine how the message was encoded by the sender. It maps charset into the corresponding Emacs coding system (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188), and uses that coding system to decode message text. If the message header doesnt have the charset specication, or if charset is not recognized, Rmail chooses the coding system with the usual Emacs heuristics and defaults (see Section 19.7 [Recognize Coding], page 190). Occasionally, a message is decoded incorrectly, either because Emacs guessed the wrong coding system in the absence of the charset specication, or because the specication was inaccurate. For example, a miscongured mailer could send a message with a charset=iso-8859-1 header when the message is actually encoded in koi8-r. When you see the message text garbled, or some of its characters displayed as hex codes or empty boxes, this may have happened. You can correct the problem by decoding the message again using the right coding system, if you can gure out or guess which one is right. To do this, invoke the M-x rmail-redecode-body command. It reads the name of a coding system, and then redecodes the message using the coding system you specied. If you specied the right coding system, the result should be readable.

30.15 Editing Within a Message

Most of the usual Emacs key bindings are available in Rmail mode, though a few, such as C-M-n and C-M-h, are redened by Rmail for other purposes. However, the Rmail buer is normally read only, and most of the letters are redened as Rmail commands. If you want to edit the text of a message, you must use the Rmail command e. e Edit the current message as ordinary text.

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

393

The e command (rmail-edit-current-message) switches from Rmail mode into Rmail Edit mode, another major mode which is nearly the same as Text mode. The mode line indicates this change. In Rmail Edit mode, letters insert themselves as usual and the Rmail commands are not available. You can edit the message body and header elds. When you are nished editing the message, type C-c C-c to switch back to Rmail mode. Alternatively, you can return to Rmail mode but cancel any editing that you have done, by typing C-c C-]. Entering Rmail Edit mode runs the hook text-mode-hook; then it runs the hook rmail-edit-mode-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). Returning to ordinary Rmail mode adds the attribute edited to the message, if you have made any changes in it.

30.16 Digest Messages

A digest message is a message which exists to contain and carry several other messages. Digests are used on some mailing lists; all the messages that arrive for the list during a period of time such as one day are put inside a single digest which is then sent to the subscribers. Transmitting the single digest uses less computer time than transmitting the individual messages even though the total size is the same, because of the per-message overhead in network mail transmission. When you receive a digest message, the most convenient way to read it is to undigestify it: to turn it back into many individual messages. Then you can read and delete the individual messages as it suits you. To do this, select the digest message and type the command M-x undigestify-rmail-message. This extracts the submessages as separate Rmail messages, and inserts them following the digest. The digest message itself is agged as deleted.

30.17 Reading Rot13 Messages

Mailing list messages that might oend or annoy some readers are sometimes encoded in a simple code called rot13so named because it rotates the alphabet by 13 letters. This code is not for secrecy, as it provides none; rather, it enables those who wish to to avoid seeing the real text of the message. For example, a review of a lm might use rot13 to hide important plot points. To view a buer that uses the rot13 code, use the command M-x rot13-other-window. This displays the current buer in another window which applies the code when displaying the text.

30.18 movemail program

Rmail uses the movemail program to move mail from your inbox to your Rmail le (see Section 30.5 [Rmail Inbox], page 379). When loaded for the rst time, Rmail attempts to locate the movemail program and determine its version. There are two versions of the movemail program: the native one, shipped with GNU Emacs (the emacs version) and the one included in GNU mailutils (the mailutils version,

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

394

see Section movemail in GNU mailutils ). They support the same command line syntax and the same basic subset of options. However, the Mailutils version oers additional features. The Emacs version of movemail is able to retrieve mail from the usual Unix mailbox formats and from remote mailboxes using the POP3 protocol. The Mailutils version is able to handle a wide set of mailbox formats, such as plain Unix mailboxes, maildir and MH mailboxes, etc. It is able to access remote mailboxes using the POP3 or IMAP4 protocol, and can retrieve mail from them using a TLS encrypted channel. It also accepts mailbox arguments in URL form. The detailed description of mailbox URLs can be found in Section URL in Mailbox URL Formats . In short, a URL is:
proto ://[user [:password ]@]host-or-file-name

where square brackets denote optional elements. proto Species the mailbox protocol, or format to use. The exact semantics of the rest of URL elements depends on the actual value of proto (see below). User name to access the remote mailbox. User password to access the remote mailbox.

user password

host-or-le-name Hostname of the remote server for remote mailboxes or le name of a local mailbox. Proto can be one of: mbox Usual Unix mailbox format. In this case, neither user nor pass are used, and host-or-le-name denotes the le name of the mailbox le, e.g., mbox://var/spool/mail/smith. A local mailbox in the MH format. User and pass are not used. Hostor-le-name denotes the name of MH folder, e.g., mh://Mail/inbox. A local mailbox in the maildir format. User and pass are not used, and host-or-le-name denotes the name of maildir mailbox, e.g., maildir://mail/inbox. Any local mailbox format. Its actual format is detected automatically by movemail. A remote mailbox to be accessed via POP3 protocol. species the remote user name to use, pass may be to specify the user password, host-or-le-name is the or IP address of the remote mail server to connect to; pop://smith:[email protected]. A remote mailbox to be accessed via IMAP4 protocol. species the remote user name to use, pass may be to specify the user password, host-or-le-name is the or IP address of the remote mail server to connect to; imap://smith:[email protected]. User used name e.g., User used name e.g.,

mh maildir

file pop

imap

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

395

Alternatively, you can specify the le name of the mailbox to use. This is equivalent to specifying the file protocol:
/var/spool/mail/user file://var/spool/mail/user

The variable rmail-movemail-program controls which version of movemail to use. If that is a string, it species the absolute le name of the movemail executable. If it is nil, Rmail searches for movemail in the directories listed in rmail-movemailsearch-path, then in exec-path (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401), then in execdirectory.

30.19 Retrieving Mail from Remote Mailboxes

Some sites use a method called POP for accessing users inbox data instead of storing the data in inbox les. By default, the Emacs movemail can work with POP (unless the Emacs configure script was run with the option --without-pop). Similarly, the Mailutils movemail by default supports POP, unless it was congured with the --disable-pop option. Both versions of movemail only work with POP3, not with older versions of POP. No matter which avor of movemail you use, you can specify a POP inbox by using a POP URL (see Section 30.18 [Movemail], page 393). A POP URL is a le name of the form pop://username @hostname , where hostname is the host name or IP address of the remote mail server and username is the user name on that server. Additionally, you may specify the password in the mailbox URL: pop://username :password @hostname . In this case, password takes preference over the one set by rmail-remote-password (see below). This is especially useful if you have several remote mailboxes with dierent passwords. For backward compatibility, Rmail also supports an alternative way of specifying remote POP mailboxes. Specifying an inbox name in the form po:username :hostname is equivalent to pop://username @hostname . If you omit the :hostname part, the MAILHOST environment variable species the machine on which to look for the POP server. Another method for accessing remote mailboxes is IMAP. This method is supported only by the Mailutils movemail. To specify an IMAP mailbox in the inbox list, use the following mailbox URL: imap://username [:password ]@hostname . The password part is optional, as described above. Accessing a remote mailbox may require a password. Rmail uses the following algorithm to retrieve it: 1. If a password is present in the mailbox URL (see above), it is used. 2. If the variable rmail-remote-password-required is nil, Rmail assumes no password is required. 3. If the variable rmail-remote-password is non-nil, its value is used. 4. Otherwise, Rmail will ask you for the password to use. If you need to pass additional command-line ags to movemail, set the variable rmail-movemail-flags a list of the ags you wish to use. Do not use this variable

Chapter 30: Reading Mail with Rmail

396

to pass the -p ag to preserve your inbox contents; use rmail-preserve-inbox instead. The movemail program installed at your site may support Kerberos authentication (the Emacs movemail does so if Emacs was congured with the option --with-kerberos or --with-kerberos5). If it is supported, it is used by default whenever you attempt to retrieve POP mail when rmail-remote-password and rmail-remote-password-required are unset. Some POP servers store messages in reverse order. If your server does this, and you would rather read your mail in the order in which it was received, you can tell movemail to reverse the order of downloaded messages by adding the -r ag to rmail-movemail-flags. Mailutils movemail supports TLS encryption. If you wish to use it, add the --tls ag to rmail-movemail-flags.

30.20 Retrieving Mail from Local Mailboxes in Various Formats

If your incoming mail is stored on a local machine in a format other than Unix mailbox, you will need the Mailutils movemail to retrieve it. See Section 30.18 [Movemail], page 393, for the detailed description of movemail versions. For example, to access mail from a inbox in maildir format located in /var/spool/mail/in, you would include the following in the Rmail inbox list:
maildir://var/spool/mail/in

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

397

31 Miscellaneous Commands
This chapter contains several brief topics that do not t anywhere else: viewing document les, reading Usenet news, running shell commands and shell subprocesses, using a single shared Emacs for utilities that expect to run an editor as a subprocess, printing hardcopy, sorting text, narrowing display to part of the buer, editing binary les, saving an Emacs session for later resumption, following hyperlinks, browsing images, emulating other editors, and various diversions and amusements.

31.1 Gnus
Gnus is an Emacs package primarily designed for reading and posting Usenet news. It can also be used to read and respond to messages from a number of other sources email, remote directories, digests, and so on. Here we introduce Gnus and describe several basic features. For full details on Gnus, type C-h i and then select the Gnus manual. 31.1.1 Gnus Buers Gnus uses several buers to display information and to receive commands. The three most commonly-used Gnus buers are the group buer, the summary buer and the article buer. The group buer contains a list of article sources (e.g. newsgroups and email inboxes), which are collectively referred to as groups. This is the rst buer Gnus displays when it starts up. It normally displays only the groups to which you subscribe and that contain unread articles. From this buer, you can select a group to read. The summary buer lists the articles in a single group, showing one article per line. By default, it displays each articles author, subject, and line number. The summary buer is created when you select a group in the group buer, and is killed when you exit the group. From the summary buer, you can choose an article to view. The article is displayed in the article buer. In normal Gnus usage, you view this buer but do not select itall useful Gnus commands can be invoked from the summary buer. But you can select the article buer, and execute Gnus commands from it, if you wish. 31.1.2 When Gnus Starts Up If your system has been set up for reading Usenet news, getting started with Gnus is easyjust type M-x gnus. On starting up, Gnus reads your news initialization le : a le named .newsrc in your home directory which lists your Usenet newsgroups and subscriptions (this le is not unique to Gnus; it is used by many other newsreader programs). It then tries to contact the systems default news server, which is typically specied by the NNTPSERVER environment variable.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

398

If your system does not have a default news server, or if you wish to use Gnus for reading email, then before invoking M-x gnus you need to tell Gnus where to get news and/or mail. To do this, customize the variables gnus-select-method and/or gnus-secondary-select-methods. See the Gnus manual for details. Once Gnus has started up, it displays the group buer. By default, the group buer shows only a small number of subscribed groups. Groups with other statusesunsubscribed, killed, or zombieare hidden. The rst time you start Gnus, any group to which you are not subscribed is made into a killed group; any group that subsequently appears on the news server becomes a zombie group. To proceed, you must select a group in the group buer to open the summary buer for that group; then, select an article in the summary buer to view its article buer in a separate window. The following sections explain how to use the group and summary buers to do this. To quit Gnus, type q in the group buer. This automatically records your group statuses in the les .newsrc and .newsrc.eld, so that they take eect in subsequent Gnus sessions. 31.1.3 Using the Gnus Group Buer The following commands are available in the Gnus group buer: SPC l As L Au Ak Az u Switch to the summary buer for the group on the current line. In the group buer, list only the groups to which you subscribe and which contain unread articles (this is the default listing). List all subscribed and unsubscribed groups, but not killed or zombie groups. List killed groups. List zombie groups. Toggle the subscription status of the group on the current line (i.e. turn a subscribed group into an unsubscribed group, or vice versa). Invoking this on a killed or zombie group turns it into an unsubscribed group. Kill the group on the current line. Killed groups are not recorded in the .newsrc le, and they are not shown in the l or L listings. Move point to the previous group containing unread articles. Move point to the next unread group. Move point to the previous unread group. Update your Gnus settings, and quit Gnus.

C-k DEL n p q

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands 31.1.4 Using the Gnus Summary Buer The following commands are available in the Gnus summary buer: SPC

399

If there is no article selected, select the article on the current line and display its article buer. Otherwise, try scrolling the selected article buer in its window; on reaching the end of the buer, select the next unread article. Thus, you can read through all articles by repeatedly typing SPC. Scroll the text of the article backwards. Select the next unread article. Select the previous unread article. Do an incremental search on the selected article buer, as if you switched to the buer and typed C-s (see Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91).

DEL n p s

M-s regexp RET Search forward for articles containing a match for regexp. q Exit the summary buer and return to the group buer.

31.2 Document Viewing

DocView mode is a major mode for viewing DVI, PostScript (PS), PDF, OpenDocument, and Microsoft Oce documents. It provides features such as slicing, zooming, and searching inside documents. It works by converting the document to a set of images using the gs (GhostScript) command and other external tools1 , and displaying those images. When you visit a document le that can be displayed with DocView mode, Emacs automatically uses DocView mode2 . As an exception, when you visit a PostScript le, Emacs switches to PS mode, a major mode for editing PostScript les as text; however, it also enables DocView minor mode, so you can type C-c C-c to view the document with DocView. In either DocView mode or DocView minor mode, repeating C-c C-c (doc-view-toggle-display) toggles between DocView and the underlying le contents. You can explicitly enable DocView mode with the command M-x doc-viewmode. You can toggle DocView minor mode with M-x doc-view-minor-mode. When DocView mode starts, it displays a welcome screen and begins formatting the le, page by page. It displays the rst page once that has been formatted. To kill the DocView buer, type k (doc-view-kill-proc-and-buffer). To bury it, type q (quit-window).
1 2

gs is a hard requirement. For DVI les, dvipdf or dvipdfm is needed. For OpenDocument and Microsoft Oce documents, the unoconv tool is needed. The needed external tools for the document type must be available, and Emacs must be running in a graphical frame and have PNG image support. If any of these requirements is not fullled, Emacs falls back to another major mode.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands 31.2.1 DocView Navigation

400

In DocView mode, you can scroll the current page using the usual Emacs movement keys: C-p, C-n, C-b, C-f, and the arrow keys. By default, the line-motion keys C-p and C-n stop scrolling at the beginning and end of the current page, respectively. However, if you change the variable docview-continuous to a non-nil value, then C-p displays the previous page if you are already at the beginning of the current page, and C-n displays the next page if you are at the end of the current page. You can also display the next page by typing n, NEXT or C-x ] (doc-viewnext-page). To display the previous page, type p, PRIOR or C-x [ (doc-viewprevious-page). SPC (doc-view-scroll-up-or-next-page) is a convenient way to advance through the document. It scrolls within the current page or advances to the next. DEL moves backwards in a similar way (doc-view-scroll-down-or-previouspage). To go to the rst page, type M-< (doc-view-first-page); to go to the last one, type M-> (doc-view-last-page). To jump to a page by its number, type M-g M-g or M-g g (doc-view-goto-page). You can enlarge or shrink the document with + (doc-view-enlarge) and (doc-view-shrink). These commands work by reconverting the document at the new size. To specify the default size for DocView, customize the variable doc-viewresolution. 31.2.2 DocView Searching In DocView mode, you can search the les text for a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). The interface for searching is inspired by isearch (see Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91). To begin a search, type C-s (doc-view-search) or C-r (doc-view-searchbackward). This reads a regular expression using a minibuer, then echoes the number of matches found within the document. You can move forward and back among the matches by typing C-s and C-r. DocView mode has no way to show the match inside the page image; instead, it displays a tooltip (at the mouse position) listing all matching lines in the current page. To force display of this tooltip, type C-t (doc-view-show-tooltip). To start a new search, use the search command with a prex argument; i.e., C-u C-s for a forward search or C-u C-r for a backward search. 31.2.3 DocView Slicing Documents often have wide margins for printing. They are annoying when reading the document on the screen, because they use up screen space and can cause inconvenient scrolling. With DocView you can hide these margins by selecting a slice of pages to display. A slice is a rectangle within the page area; once you specify a slice in DocView, it applies to whichever page you look at.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

401

To specify the slice numerically, type s s (doc-view-set-slice); then enter the top left pixel position and the slices width and height. A more convenient graphical way to specify the slice is with s m (doc-viewset-slice-using-mouse), where you use the mouse to select the slice. To cancel the selected slice, type s r (doc-view-reset-slice). Then DocView shows the entire page including its entire margins. 31.2.4 DocView Conversion For eciency, DocView caches the images produced by gs. The name of this directory is given by the variable doc-view-cache-directory. You can clear the cache directory by typing M-x doc-view-clear-cache. To force reconversion of the currently viewed document, type r or g (revertbuffer). To kill the converter process associated with the current buer, type K (doc-view-kill-proc). The command k (doc-view-kill-proc-and-buffer) kills the converter process and the DocView buer.

31.3 Running Shell Commands from Emacs

Emacs has commands for passing single command lines to shell subprocesses, and for running a shell interactively with input and output to an Emacs buer, and for running a shell in a terminal emulator window. M-! cmd RET Run the shell command cmd and display the output (shell-command). M-| cmd RET Run the shell command cmd with region contents as input; optionally replace the region with the output (shell-command-on-region). M-& cmd RET Run the shell command cmd asynchronously, and display the output (async-shell-command). M-x shell M-x term Run a subshell with input and output through an Emacs buer. You can then give commands interactively. Run a subshell with input and output through an Emacs buer. You can then give commands interactively. Full terminal emulation is available.

Whenever you specify a relative le name for an executable program (either in the cmd argument to one of the above commands, or in other contexts), Emacs searches for the program in the directories specied by the variable exec-path. The value of this variable must be a list of directory names; the default value is initialized from the environment variable PATH when Emacs is started (see Section C.4.1 [General Variables], page 510). M-x eshell invokes a shell implemented entirely in Emacs. It is documented in its own manual. See the Eshell Info manual, which is distributed with Emacs.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands 31.3.1 Single Shell Commands

402

M-! (shell-command) reads a line of text using the minibuer and executes it as a shell command, in a subshell made just for that command. Standard input for the command comes from the null device. If the shell command produces any output, the output appears either in the echo area (if it is short), or in an Emacs buer named *Shell Command Output*, displayed in another window (if the output is long). For instance, one way to decompress a le named foo.gz is to type M-! gunzip foo.gz RET. That shell command normally creates the le foo and produces no terminal output. A numeric argument to shell-command, e.g. M-1 M-!, causes it to insert terminal output into the current buer instead of a separate buer. It puts point before the output, and sets the mark after the output. For instance, M-1 M-! gunzip < foo.gz RET would insert the uncompressed form of the le foo.gz into the current buer. Provided the specied shell command does not end with &, it runs synchronously, and you must wait for it to exit before continuing to use Emacs. To stop waiting, type C-g to quit; this sends a SIGINT signal to terminate the shell command (this is the same signal that C-c normally generates in the shell). Emacs then waits until the command actually terminates. If the shell command doesnt stop (because it ignores the SIGINT signal), type C-g again; this sends the command a SIGKILL signal, which is impossible to ignore. A shell command that ends in & is executed asynchronously, and you can continue to use Emacs as it runs. You can also type M-& (async-shell-command) to execute a shell command asynchronously; this is exactly like calling M-! with a trailing &, except that you do not need the &. The output buer for asynchronous shell commands is named *Async Shell Command*. Emacs inserts the output into this buer as it comes in, whether or not the buer is visible in a window. M-| (shell-command-on-region) is like M-!, but passes the contents of the region as the standard input to the shell command, instead of no input. With a numeric argument, it deletes the old region and replaces it with the output from the shell command. For example, you can use M-| with the gpg program to see what keys are in the buer. If the buer contains a GnuPG key, type C-x h M-| gpg RET to feed the entire buer contents to gpg. This will output the list of keys to the *Shell Command Output* buer. The above commands use the shell specied by the variable shell-file-name. Its default value is determined by the SHELL environment variable when Emacs is started. If the le name is relative, Emacs searches the directories listed in execpath (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401). To specify a coding system for M-! or M-|, use the command C-x RET c immediately beforehand. See Section 19.11 [Communication Coding], page 194. By default, error output is intermixed with the regular output in the output buer. But if you change the value of the variable shell-command-default-errorbuffer to a string, error output is inserted into a buer of that name.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands 31.3.2 Interactive Subshell

403

To run a subshell interactively, type M-x shell. This creates (or reuses) a buer named *shell*, and runs a shell subprocess with input coming from and output going to that buer. That is to say, any terminal output from the subshell goes into the buer, advancing point, and any terminal input for the subshell comes from text in the buer. To give input to the subshell, go to the end of the buer and type the input, terminated by RET. While the subshell is waiting or running a command, you can switch windows or buers and perform other editing in Emacs. Emacs inserts the output from the subshell into the Shell buer whenever it has time to process it (e.g. while waiting for keyboard input). In the Shell buer, prompts are displayed with the face comint-highlightprompt, and submitted input lines are displayed with the face comint-highlightinput. This makes it easier to distinguish input lines from the shell output. See Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75. To make multiple subshells, invoke M-x shell with a prex argument (e.g. C-u M-x shell). Then the command will read a buer name, and create (or reuse) a subshell in that buer. You can also rename the *shell* buer using M-x rename-uniquely, then create a new *shell* buer using plain M-x shell. Subshells in dierent buers run independently and in parallel. To specify the shell le name used by M-x shell, customize the variable explicit-shell-file-name. If this is nil (the default), Emacs uses the environment variable ESHELL if it exists. Otherwise, it usually uses the variable shellfile-name (see Section 31.3.1 [Single Shell], page 402); but if the default directory is remote (see Section 15.13 [Remote Files], page 145), it prompts you for the shell le name. Emacs sends the new shell the contents of the le ~/.emacs_shellname as input, if it exists, where shellname is the name of the le that the shell was loaded from. For example, if you use bash, the le sent to it is ~/.emacs_bash. If this le is not found, Emacs tries with ~/.emacs.d/init_shellname.sh. To specify a coding system for the shell, you can use the command C-x RET c immediately before M-x shell. You can also change the coding system for a running subshell by typing C-x RET p in the shell buer. See Section 19.11 [Communication Coding], page 194. Emacs sets the environment variable INSIDE_EMACS in the subshell to version,comint, where version is the Emacs version (e.g. 24.1). Programs can check this variable to determine whether they are running inside an Emacs subshell. (It also sets the EMACS environment variable to t, if that environment variable is not already dened. However, this environment variable is deprecated; programs that use it should switch to using INSIDE_EMACS instead.) 31.3.3 Shell Mode The major mode for Shell buers is Shell mode. Many of its special commands are bound to the C-c prex, and resemble the usual editing and job control characters

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

404

present in ordinary shells, except that you must type C-c rst. Here is a list of Shell mode commands: RET Send the current line as input to the subshell (comint-send-input). Any shell prompt at the beginning of the line is omitted (see Section 31.3.4 [Shell Prompts], page 406). If point is at the end of buer, this is like submitting the command line in an ordinary interactive shell. However, you can also invoke RET elsewhere in the shell buer to submit the current line as input. Complete the command name or le name before point in the shell buer (completion-at-point). This uses the usual Emacs completion rules (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29), with the completion alternatives being le names, environment variable names, the shell command history, and history references (see Section 31.3.5.3 [History References], page 408). The variable shell-completion-fignore species a list of le name extensions to ignore in Shell mode completion. The default setting is nil, but some users prefer ("~" "#" "%") to ignore le names ending in ~, # or %. Other related Comint modes use the variable comintcompletion-fignore instead. Display temporarily a list of the possible completions of the le name before point (comint-dynamic-list-filename-completions). Either delete a character or send EOF (comint-delchar-or-maybeeof). Typed at the end of the shell buer, this sends EOF to the subshell. Typed at any other position in the buer, this deletes a character as usual. Move to the beginning of the line, but after the prompt if any (comintbol-or-process-mark). If you repeat this command twice in a row, the second time it moves back to the process mark, which is the beginning of the input that you have not yet sent to the subshell. (Normally that is the same placethe end of the prompt on this linebut after C-c SPC the process mark may be in a previous line.) Accumulate multiple lines of input, then send them together. This command inserts a newline before point, but does not send the preceding text as input to the subshellat least, not yet. Both lines, the one before this newline and the one after, will be sent together (along with the newline that separates them), when you type RET. Kill all text pending at end of buer to be sent as input (comintkill-input). If point is not at end of buer, this only kills the part of this text that precedes point. Kill a word before point (backward-kill-word). Interrupt the shell or its current subjob if any (comint-interruptsubjob). This command also kills any shell input pending in the shell buer and not yet sent.

TAB

M-? C-d

C-c C-a

C-c SPC

C-c C-u

C-c C-w C-c C-c

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands C-c C-z

405

Stop the shell or its current subjob if any (comint-stop-subjob). This command also kills any shell input pending in the shell buer and not yet sent. Send quit signal to the shell or its current subjob if any (comintquit-subjob). This command also kills any shell input pending in the shell buer and not yet sent. Delete the last batch of output from a shell command (comintdelete-output). This is useful if a shell command spews out lots of output that just gets in the way. Write the last batch of output from a shell command to a le (comintwrite-output). With a prex argument, the le is appended to instead. Any prompt at the end of the output is not written. Scroll to display the beginning of the last batch of output at the top of the window; also move the cursor there (comint-show-output). Scroll to put the end of the buer at the bottom of the window (comint-show-maximum-output). Move forward across one shell command, but not beyond the current line (shell-forward-command). The variable shell-command-regexp species how to recognize the end of a command. Move backward across one shell command, but not beyond the current line (shell-backward-command). Ask the shell for its working directory, and update the Shell buers default directory. See Section 31.3.6 [Directory Tracking], page 409.

C-c C-\

C-c C-o

C-c C-s

C-c C-r C-M-l C-c C-e C-c C-f

C-c C-b M-x dirs

M-x send-invisible RET text RET Send text as input to the shell, after reading it without echoing. This is useful when a shell command runs a program that asks for a password. Please note that Emacs will not echo passwords by default. If you really want them to be echoed, evaluate the following Lisp expression: (remove-hook comint-output-filter-functions comint-watch-for-password-prompt) M-x comint-continue-subjob Continue the shell process. This is useful if you accidentally suspend the shell process.3 M-x comint-strip-ctrl-m Discard all control-M characters from the current group of shell output. The most convenient way to use this command is to make it run
3

You should not suspend the shell process. Suspending a subjob of the shell is a completely dierent matterthat is normal practice, but you must use the shell to continue the subjob; this command wont do it.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

406

automatically when you get output from the subshell. To do that, evaluate this Lisp expression: (add-hook comint-output-filter-functions comint-strip-ctrl-m) M-x comint-truncate-buffer This command truncates the shell buer to a certain maximum number of lines, specied by the variable comint-buffer-maximum-size. Heres how to do this automatically each time you get output from the subshell: (add-hook comint-output-filter-functions comint-truncate-buffer) Shell mode is a derivative of Comint mode, a general-purpose mode for communicating with interactive subprocesses. Most of the features of Shell mode actually come from Comint mode, as you can see from the command names listed above. The special features of Shell mode include the directory tracking feature, and a few user commands. Other Emacs features that use variants of Comint mode include GUD (see Section 24.6 [Debuggers], page 276) and M-x run-lisp (see Section 24.11 [External Lisp], page 290). You can use M-x comint-run to execute any program of your choice in a subprocess using unmodied Comint modewithout the specializations of Shell mode. 31.3.4 Shell Prompts A prompt is text output by a program to show that it is ready to accept new user input. Normally, Comint mode (and thus Shell mode) automatically gures out part of the buer is a prompt, based on the output of the subprocess. (Specically, it assumes that any received output line which doesnt end with a newline is a prompt.) Comint mode divides the buer into two types of elds : input elds (where user input is typed) and output elds (everywhere else). Prompts are part of the output elds. Most Emacs motion commands do not cross eld boundaries, unless they move over multiple lines. For instance, when point is in the input eld on a shell command line, C-a puts point at the beginning of the input eld, after the prompt. Internally, the elds are implemented using the field text property (see Section Text Properties in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). If you change the variable comint-use-prompt-regexp to a non-nil value, then Comint mode recognize prompts using a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). In Shell mode, the regular expression is specied by the variable shell-prompt-pattern. The default value of comint-use-prompt-regexp is nil, because this method for recognizing prompts is unreliable, but you may want to set it to a non-nil value in unusual circumstances. In that case, Emacs does not divide the Comint buer into elds, so the general motion commands behave as they normally do in buers without special text properties. However, you can use the paragraph motion commands to conveniently navigate the buer (see Section 22.3

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

407

[Paragraphs], page 216); in Shell mode, Emacs uses shell-prompt-pattern as paragraph boundaries. 31.3.5 Shell Command History Shell buers support three ways of repeating earlier commands. You can use keys like those used for the minibuer history; these work much as they do in the minibuer, inserting text from prior commands while point remains always at the end of the buer. You can move through the buer to previous inputs in their original place, then resubmit them or copy them to the end. Or you can use a !-style history reference. 31.3.5.1 Shell History Ring M-p C-UP M-n C-DOWN M-r C-c C-x C-c . C-c C-l Fetch the next earlier old shell command. Fetch the next later old shell command. Begin an incremental regexp search of old shell commands. Fetch the next subsequent command from the history. Fetch one argument from an old shell command. Display the buers history of shell commands in another window (comint-dynamic-list-input-ring).

Shell buers provide a history of previously entered shell commands. To reuse shell commands from the history, use the editing commands M-p, M-n, M-r and M-s. These work just like the minibuer history commands (see Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34), except that they operate within the Shell buer rather than the minibuer. M-p fetches an earlier shell command to the end of the shell buer. Successive use of M-p fetches successively earlier shell commands, each replacing any text that was already present as potential shell input. M-n does likewise except that it nds successively more recent shell commands from the buer. C-UP works like M-p, and C-DOWN like M-n. The history search command M-r begins an incremental regular expression search of previous shell commands. After typing M-r, start typing the desired string or regular expression; the last matching shell command will be displayed in the current line. Incremental search commands have their usual eectsfor instance, C-s and C-r search forward and backward for the next match (see Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91). When you nd the desired input, type RET to terminate the search. This puts the input in the command line. Any partial input you were composing before navigating the history list is restored when you go to the beginning or end of the history ring. Often it is useful to reexecute several successive shell commands that were previously executed in sequence. To do this, rst nd and reexecute the rst command

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

408

of the sequence. Then type C-c C-x; that will fetch the following commandthe one that follows the command you just repeated. Then type RET to reexecute this command. You can reexecute several successive commands by typing C-c C-x RET over and over. The command C-c . (comint-input-previous-argument) copies an individual argument from a previous command, like ESC . in Bash. The simplest use copies the last argument from the previous shell command. With a prex argument n, it copies the nth argument instead. Repeating C-c . copies from an earlier shell command instead, always using the same value of n (dont give a prex argument when you repeat the C-c . command). These commands get the text of previous shell commands from a special history list, not from the shell buer itself. Thus, editing the shell buer, or even killing large parts of it, does not aect the history that these commands access. Some shells store their command histories in les so that you can refer to commands from previous shell sessions. Emacs reads the command history le for your chosen shell, to initialize its own command history. The le name is ~/.bash_history for bash, ~/.sh_history for ksh, and ~/.history for other shells. 31.3.5.2 Shell History Copying C-c C-p C-c C-n C-c RET Move point to the previous prompt (comint-previous-prompt). Move point to the following prompt (comint-next-prompt). Copy the input command at point, inserting the copy at the end of the buer (comint-copy-old-input). This is useful if you move point back to a previous command. After you copy the command, you can submit the copy as input with RET. If you wish, you can edit the copy before resubmitting it. If you use this command on an output line, it copies that line to the end of the buer. If comint-use-prompt-regexp is nil (the default), copy the old input command that you click on, inserting the copy at the end of the buer (comint-insert-input). If comint-use-prompt-regexp is non-nil, or if the click is not over old input, just yank as usual.

Mouse-2

Moving to a previous input and then copying it with C-c RET or Mouse-2 produces the same resultsthe same buer contentsthat you would get by using M-p enough times to fetch that previous input from the history list. However, C-c RET copies the text from the buer, which can be dierent from what is in the history list if you edit the input text in the buer after it has been sent. 31.3.5.3 Shell History References Various shells including csh and bash support history references that begin with ! and ^. Shell mode recognizes these constructs, and can perform the history substitution for you.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

409

If you insert a history reference and type TAB, this searches the input history for a matching command, performs substitution if necessary, and places the result in the buer in place of the history reference. For example, you can fetch the most recent command beginning with mv with ! m v TAB. You can edit the command if you wish, and then resubmit the command to the shell by typing RET. Shell mode can optionally expand history references in the buer when you send them to the shell. To request this, set the variable comint-input-autoexpand to input. You can make SPC perform history expansion by binding SPC to the command comint-magic-space. Shell mode recognizes history references when they follow a prompt. See Section 31.3.4 [Shell Prompts], page 406, for how Shell mode recognizes prompts. 31.3.6 Directory Tracking Shell mode keeps track of cd, pushd and popd commands given to the subshell, in order to keep the Shell buers default directory (see Section 15.1 [File Names], page 124) the same as the shells working directory. It recognizes these commands by examining lines of input that you send. If you use aliases for these commands, you can tell Emacs to recognize them also, by setting the variables shell-pushd-regexp, shell-popd-regexp, and shell-cdregexp to the appropriate regular expressions (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). For example, if shell-pushd-regexp matches the beginning of a shell command line, that line is regarded as a pushd command. These commands are recognized only at the beginning of a shell command line. If Emacs gets confused about changes in the working directory of the subshell, type M-x dirs. This command asks the shell for its working directory and updates the default directory accordingly. It works for shells that support the most common command syntax, but may not work for unusual shells. You can also use Dirtrack mode, a buer-local minor mode that implements an alternative method of tracking the shells working directory. To use this method, your shell prompt must contain the working directory at all times, and you must supply a regular expression for recognizing which part of the prompt contains the working directory; see the documentation of the variable dirtrack-list for details. To use Dirtrack mode, type M-x dirtrack-mode in the Shell buer, or add dirtrack-mode to shell-mode-hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). 31.3.7 Shell Mode Options If the variable comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input is non-nil, insertion and yank commands scroll the selected window to the bottom before inserting. The default is nil. If comint-scroll-show-maximum-output is non-nil, then arrival of output when point is at the end tries to scroll the last line of text to the bottom line of the window, showing as much useful text as possible. (This mimics the scrolling behavior of most terminals.) The default is t. By setting comint-move-point-for-output, you can opt for having point jump to the end of the buer whenever output arrivesno matter where in the buer

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

410

point was before. If the value is this, point jumps in the selected window. If the value is all, point jumps in each window that shows the Comint buer. If the value is other, point jumps in all nonselected windows that show the current buer. The default value is nil, which means point does not jump to the end. If you set comint-prompt-read-only, the prompts in the Comint buer are read-only. The variable comint-input-ignoredups controls whether successive identical inputs are stored in the input history. A non-nil value means to omit an input that is the same as the previous input. The default is nil, which means to store each input even if it is equal to the previous input. Three variables customize le name completion. The variable comintcompletion-addsuffix controls whether completion inserts a space or a slash to indicate a fully completed le or directory name (non-nil means do insert a space or slash). comint-completion-recexact, if non-nil, directs TAB to choose the shortest possible completion if the usual Emacs completion algorithm cannot add even a single character. comint-completion-autolist, if non-nil, says to list all the possible completions whenever completion is not exact. Command completion normally considers only executable les. If you set shellcompletion-execonly to nil, it considers nonexecutable les as well. You can congure the behavior of pushd. Variables control whether pushd behaves like cd if no argument is given (shell-pushd-tohome), pop rather than rotate with a numeric argument (shell-pushd-dextract), and only add directories to the directory stack if they are not already on it (shell-pushd-dunique). The values you choose should match the underlying shell, of course. 31.3.8 Emacs Terminal Emulator To run a subshell in a terminal emulator, use M-x term. This creates (or reuses) a buer named *terminal*, and runs a subshell with input coming from your keyboard, and output going to that buer. The terminal emulator uses Term mode, which has two input modes. In line mode, Term basically acts like Shell mode (see Section 31.3.3 [Shell Mode], page 403). In char mode, each character is sent directly to the subshell, as terminal input. Any echoing of your input is the responsibility of the subshell. The sole exception is the terminal escape character, which by default is C-c (see Section 31.3.9 [Term Mode], page 411). Any terminal output from the subshell goes into the buer, advancing point. Some programs (such as Emacs itself) need to control the appearance on the terminal screen in detail. They do this by sending special control codes. The exact control codes needed vary from terminal to terminal, but nowadays most terminals and terminal emulators (including xterm) understand the ANSI-standard (VT100style) escape sequences. Term mode recognizes these escape sequences, and handles each one appropriately, changing the buer so that the appearance of the window matches what it would be on a real terminal. You can actually run Emacs inside an Emacs Term window.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

411

You can also Term mode to communicate with a device connected to a serial port. See Section 31.3.11 [Serial Terminal], page 412. The le name used to load the subshell is determined the same way as for Shell mode. To make multiple terminal emulators, rename the buer *terminal* to something dierent using M-x rename-uniquely, just as with Shell mode. Unlike Shell mode, Term mode does not track the current directory by examining your input. But some shells can tell Term what the current directory is. This is done automatically by bash version 1.15 and later. 31.3.9 Term Mode The terminal emulator uses Term mode, which has two input modes. In line mode, Term basically acts like Shell mode (see Section 31.3.3 [Shell Mode], page 403). In char mode, each character is sent directly to the subshell, except for the Term escape character, normally C-c. To switch between line and char mode, use these commands: C-c C-j C-c C-k Switch to line mode (term-line-mode). Do nothing if already in line mode. Switch to char mode (term-char-mode). Do nothing if already in char mode. Send a literal C-C to the sub-shell. This is equivalent to C-x char in normal Emacs. For example, C-c o invokes the global binding of C-x o, which is normally other-window.

The following commands are only available in char mode: C-c C-c C-c char

Term mode has a page-at-a-time feature. When enabled, it makes output pause at the end of each screenful: C-c C-q Toggle the page-at-a-time feature. This command works in both line and char modes. When the feature is enabled, the mode-line displays the word page, and each time Term receives more than a screenful of output, it pauses and displays **MORE** in the mode-line. Type SPC to display the next screenful of output, or ? to see your other options. The interface is similar to the more program.

31.3.10 Remote Host Shell You can login to a remote computer, using whatever commands you would from a regular terminal (e.g. using the telnet or rlogin commands), from a Term window. A program that asks you for a password will normally suppress echoing of the password, so the password will not show up in the buer. This will happen just as if you were using a real terminal, if the buer is in char mode. If it is in line mode, the password is temporarily visible, but will be erased when you hit return. (This happens automatically; there is no special password processing.) When you log in to a dierent machine, you need to specify the type of terminal youre using, by setting the TERM environment variable in the environment for the

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

412

remote login command. (If you use bash, you do that by writing the variable assignment before the remote login command, without a separating comma.) Terminal types ansi or vt100 will work on most systems. 31.3.11 Serial Terminal If you have a device connected to a serial port of your computer, you can communicate with it by typing M-x serial-term. This command asks for a serial port name and speed, and switches to a new Term mode buer. Emacs communicates with the serial device through this buer just like it does with a terminal in ordinary Term mode. The speed of the serial port is measured in bits per second. The most common speed is 9600 bits per second. You can change the speed interactively by clicking on the mode line. A serial port can be congured even more by clicking on 8N1 in the mode line. By default, a serial port is congured as 8N1, which means that each byte consists of 8 data bits, No parity check bit, and 1 stopbit. If the speed or the conguration is wrong, you cannot communicate with your device and will probably only see garbage output in the window.

31.4 Using Emacs as a Server

Various programs can invoke your choice of editor to edit a particular piece of text. For instance, version control programs invoke an editor to enter version control logs (see Section 25.1 [Version Control], page 292), and the Unix mail utility invokes an editor to enter a message to send. By convention, your choice of editor is specied by the environment variable EDITOR. If you set EDITOR to emacs, Emacs would be invoked, but in an inconvenient wayby starting a new Emacs process. This is inconvenient because the new Emacs process doesnt share buers, a command history, or other kinds of information with any existing Emacs process. You can solve this problem by setting up Emacs as an edit server, so that it listens for external edit requests and acts accordingly. There are two ways to start an Emacs server: Run the command server-start in an existing Emacs process: either type M-x server-start, or put the expression (server-start) in your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). The existing Emacs process is the server; when you exit Emacs, the server dies with the Emacs process. Run Emacs as a daemon, using the --daemon command-line option. See Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507. When Emacs is started this way, it calls server-start after initialization, and returns control to the calling terminal instead of opening an initial frame; it then waits in the background, listening for edit requests. Either way, once an Emacs server is started, you can use a shell command called emacsclient to connect to the Emacs process and tell it to visit a le. You can then

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

413

set the EDITOR environment variable to emacsclient, so that external programs will use the existing Emacs process for editing.4 You can run multiple Emacs servers on the same machine by giving each one a unique server name, using the variable server-name. For example, M-x set-variable RET server-name RET foo RET sets the server name to foo. The emacsclient program can specify a server by name, using the -s option (see Section 31.4.2 [emacsclient Options], page 414). If you have dened a server by a unique server name, it is possible to connect to the server from another Emacs instance and evaluate Lisp expressions on the server, using the server-eval-at function. For instance, (server-eval-at "foo" (+ 1 2)) evaluates the expression (+ 1 2) on the foo server, and returns 3. (If there is no server with that name, an error is signaled.) Currently, this feature is mainly useful for developers. 31.4.1 Invoking emacsclient The simplest way to use the emacsclient program is to run the shell command emacsclient file , where le is a le name. This connects to an Emacs server, and tells that Emacs process to visit le in one of its existing frameseither a graphical frame, or one in a text terminal (see Chapter 18 [Frames], page 165). You can then select that frame to begin editing. If there is no Emacs server, the emacsclient program halts with an error message. If the Emacs process has no existing framewhich can happen if it was started as a daemon (see Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412)then Emacs opens a frame on the terminal in which you called emacsclient. You can also force emacsclient to open a new frame on a graphical display, or on a text terminal, using the -c and -t options. See Section 31.4.2 [emacsclient Options], page 414. If you are running on a single text terminal, you can switch between emacsclients shell and the Emacs server using one of two methods: (i) run the Emacs server and emacsclient on dierent virtual terminals, and switch to the Emacs servers virtual terminal after calling emacsclient; or (ii) call emacsclient from within the Emacs server itself, using Shell mode (see Section 31.3.2 [Interactive Shell], page 403) or Term mode (see Section 31.3.9 [Term Mode], page 411); emacsclient blocks only the subshell under Emacs, and you can still use Emacs to edit the le. When you nish editing le in the Emacs server, type C-x # (server-edit) in its buer. This saves the le and sends a message back to the emacsclient program, telling it to exit. Programs that use EDITOR usually wait for the editorin this case emacsclientto exit before doing something else. You can also call emacsclient with multiple le name arguments: emacsclient file1 file2 ... tells the Emacs server to visit le1, le2, and so forth. Emacs selects the buer visiting le1, and buries the other buers at the bottom of the
4

Some programs use a dierent environment variable; for example, to make TEX use emacsclient, set the TEXEDIT environment variable to emacsclient +%d %s.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

414

buer list (see Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150). The emacsclient program exits once all the specied les are nished (i.e., once you have typed C-x # in each server buer). Finishing with a server buer also kills the buer, unless it already existed in the Emacs session before the server was asked to create it. However, if you set server-kill-new-buffers to nil, then a dierent criterion is used: nishing with a server buer kills it if the le name matches the regular expression server-tempfile-regexp. This is set up to distinguish certain temporary les. Each C-x # checks for other pending external requests to edit various les, and selects the next such le. You can switch to a server buer manually if you wish; you dont have to arrive at it with C-x #. But C-x # is the way to tell emacsclient that you are nished. If you set the value of the variable server-window to a window or a frame, C-x # always displays the next server buer in that window or in that frame. 31.4.2 emacsclient Options You can pass some optional arguments to the emacsclient program, such as: emacsclient -c +12 file1 +4:3 file2 The +line or +line :column arguments specify line numbers, or line and column numbers, for the next le argument. These behave like the command line arguments for Emacs itself. See Section C.1 [Action Arguments], page 505. The other optional arguments recognized by emacsclient are listed below: -a command --alternate-editor=command Specify a command to run if emacsclient fails to contact Emacs. This is useful when running emacsclient in a script. As a special exception, if command is the empty string, then emacsclient starts Emacs in daemon mode (as emacs --daemon) and then tries connecting again. The environment variable ALTERNATE_EDITOR has the same eect as the -a option. If both are present, the latter takes precedence. -c Create a new graphical client frame, instead of using an existing Emacs frame. If you omit a lename argument while supplying the -c option, the new frame displays the *scratch* buer (see Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150). See below for the special behavior of C-x C-c in a client frame. If Emacs is unable to create a new graphical frame (e.g. if it is unable to connect to the X server), it tries to create a text terminal client frame, as though you had supplied the -t option instead (see below). On MS-Windows, a single Emacs session cannot display frames on both graphical and text terminals, nor on multiple text terminals. Thus, if the Emacs server is running on a text terminal, the -c option, like the -t option, creates a new frame in the servers current text terminal. See Section G.1 [Windows Startup], page 535.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

415

-F alist --frame-parameters=alist Set the parameters for a newly-created graphical frame (see Section 18.11 [Frame Parameters], page 175). -d display --display=display Tell Emacs to open the given les on the X display display (assuming there is more than one X display available). -e --eval Tell Emacs to evaluate some Emacs Lisp code, instead of visiting some les. When this option is given, the arguments to emacsclient are interpreted as a list of expressions to evaluate, not as a list of les to visit.

-f server-file --server-file=server-file Specify a server le for connecting to an Emacs server via TCP. An Emacs server usually uses an operating system feature called a local socket to listen for connections. Some operating systems, such as Microsoft Windows, do not support local sockets; in that case, Emacs uses TCP instead. When you start the Emacs server, Emacs creates a server le containing some TCP information that emacsclient needs for making the connection. By default, the server le is in ~/.emacs.d/server/. On Microsoft Windows, if emacsclient does not nd the server le there, it looks in the .emacs.d/server/ subdirectory of the directory pointed to by the APPDATA environment variable. You can tell emacsclient to use a specic server le with the -f or --server-file option, or by setting the EMACS_SERVER_FILE environment variable. Even if local sockets are available, you can tell Emacs to use TCP by setting the variable server-use-tcp to t. One advantage of TCP is that the server can accept connections from remote machines. For this to work, you must (i) set the variable server-host to the hostname or IP address of the machine on which the Emacs server runs, and (ii) provide emacsclient with the server le. (One convenient way to do the latter is to put the server le on a networked le system such as NFS.) When the Emacs server is using TCP, the variable server-port determines the port number to listen on; the default value, nil, means to choose a random port when the server starts. -n --no-wait Let emacsclient exit immediately, instead of waiting until all server buers are nished. You can take as long as you like to edit the server

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

416

buers within Emacs, and they are not killed when you type C-x # in them. --parent-id ID Open an emacsclient frame as a client frame in the parent X window with id ID, via the XEmbed protocol. Currently, this option is mainly useful for developers. -q --quiet Do not let emacsclient display messages about waiting for Emacs or connecting to remote server sockets.

-s server-name --socket-name=server-name Connect to the Emacs server named server-name. The server name is given by the variable server-name on the Emacs server. If this option is omitted, emacsclient connects to the rst server it nds. (This option is not supported on MS-Windows.) -t --tty -nw

Create a new client frame on the current text terminal, instead of using an existing Emacs frame. This is similar to the -c option, above, except that it creates a text terminal frame (see Section 18.19 [Non-Window Terminals], page 179). If you omit a lename argument while supplying this option, the new frame displays the *scratch* buer (see Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150). See below for the special behavior of C-x C-c in a client frame. On MS-Windows, a single Emacs session cannot display frames on both graphical and text terminals, nor on multiple text terminals. Thus, if the Emacs server is using the graphical display, -t behaves like -c (see above); whereas if the Emacs server is running on a text terminal, it creates a new frame in its current text terminal. See Section G.1 [Windows Startup], page 535.

The new graphical or text terminal frames created by the -c or -t options are considered client frames. Any new frame that you create from a client frame is also considered a client frame. If you type C-x C-c (save-buffers-kill-terminal) in a client frame, that command does not kill the Emacs session as it normally does (see Section 3.2 [Exiting], page 15). Instead, Emacs deletes the client frame; furthermore, if the client frame has an emacsclient waiting to regain control (i.e. if you did not supply the -n option), Emacs deletes all other frames of the same client, and marks the clients server buers as nished, as though you had typed C-x # in all of them. If it so happens that there are no remaining frames after the client frame(s) are deleted, the Emacs session exits. As an exception, when Emacs is started as a daemon, all frames are considered client frames, and C-x C-c never kills Emacs. To kill a daemon session, type M-x kill-emacs.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

417

Note that the -t and -n options are contradictory: -t says to take control of the current text terminal to create a new client frame, while -n says not to take control of the text terminal. If you supply both options, Emacs visits the specied les(s) in an existing frame rather than a new client frame, negating the eect of -t.

31.5 Printing Hard Copies

Emacs provides commands for printing hardcopies of either an entire buer or part of one. You can invoke the printing commands directly, as detailed below, or using the File menu on the menu bar. Aside from the commands described in this section, you can also print hardcopies from Dired (see Section 27.7 [Operating on Files], page 335) and the diary (see Section 28.10.1 [Displaying the Diary], page 359). You can also print an Emacs buer to HTML with the command M-x htmlfontify-buffer, which converts the current buer to a HTML le, replacing Emacs faces with CSS-based markup. Furthermore, Org mode allows you to print Org les to a variety of formats, such as PDF (see Section 22.9 [Org Mode], page 229). M-x print-buffer Print hardcopy of current buer with page headings containing the le name and page number. M-x lpr-buffer Print hardcopy of current buer without page headings. M-x print-region Like print-buffer but print only the current region. M-x lpr-region Like lpr-buffer but print only the current region. On most operating system, the above hardcopy commands submit les for printing by calling the lpr program. To change the printer program, customize the variable lpr-command. To specify extra switches to give the printer program, customize the list variable lpr-switches. Its value should be a list of option strings, each of which should start with - (e.g. the option string "-w80" species a line width of 80 columns). The default is the empty list, nil. To specify the printer to use, set the variable printer-name. The default, nil, species the default printer. If you set it to a printer name (a string), that name is passed to lpr with the -P switch; if you are not using lpr, you should specify the switch with lpr-printer-switch. The variable lpr-headers-switches similarly species the extra switches to use to make page headers. The variable lpr-add-switches controls whether to supply -T and -J options (suitable for lpr) to the printer program: nil means dont add them (this should be the value if your printer program is not compatible with lpr).

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands 31.5.1 PostScript Hardcopy

418

These commands convert buer contents to PostScript, either printing it or leaving it in another Emacs buer. M-x ps-print-buffer Print hardcopy of the current buer in PostScript form. M-x ps-print-region Print hardcopy of the current region in PostScript form. M-x ps-print-buffer-with-faces Print hardcopy of the current buer in PostScript form, showing the faces used in the text by means of PostScript features. M-x ps-print-region-with-faces Print hardcopy of the current region in PostScript form, showing the faces used in the text. M-x ps-spool-buffer Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current buer text. M-x ps-spool-region Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current region. M-x ps-spool-buffer-with-faces Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current buer, showing the faces used. M-x ps-spool-region-with-faces Generate and spool a PostScript image for the current region, showing the faces used. M-x ps-despool Send the spooled PostScript to the printer. M-x handwrite Generate/print PostScript for the current buer as if handwritten. The ps-print-buffer and ps-print-region commands print buer contents in PostScript form. One command prints the entire buer; the other, just the region. The commands ps-print-buffer-with-faces and ps-print-region-withfaces behave similarly, but use PostScript features to show the faces (fonts and colors) of the buer text. Interactively, when you use a prex argument (C-u), the command prompts the user for a le name, and saves the PostScript image in that le instead of sending it to the printer. The commands whose names have spool instead of print, generate the PostScript output in an Emacs buer instead of sending it to the printer. Use the command ps-despool to send the spooled images to the printer. This command sends the PostScript generated by -spool- commands (see commands above) to the printer. With a prex argument (C-u), it prompts for a le name, and saves the spooled PostScript image in that le instead of sending it to the printer.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

419

M-x handwrite is more frivolous. It generates a PostScript rendition of the current buer as a cursive handwritten document. It can be customized in group handwrite. This function only supports ISO 8859-1 characters. 31.5.2 Variables for PostScript Hardcopy All the PostScript hardcopy commands use the variables ps-lpr-command and pslpr-switches to specify how to print the output. ps-lpr-command species the command name to run, ps-lpr-switches species command line options to use, and ps-printer-name species the printer. If you dont set the rst two variables yourself, they take their initial values from lpr-command and lpr-switches. If ps-printer-name is nil, printer-name is used. The variable ps-print-header controls whether these commands add header lines to each pageset it to nil to turn headers o. If your printer doesnt support colors, you should turn o color processing by setting ps-print-color-p to nil. By default, if the display supports colors, Emacs produces hardcopy output with color information; on black-and-white printers, colors are emulated with shades of gray. This might produce illegible output, even if your screen colors only use shades of gray. Alternatively, you can set ps-print-color-p to black-white to print colors on black/white printers. By default, PostScript printing ignores the background colors of the faces, unless the variable ps-use-face-background is non-nil. This is to avoid unwanted interference with the zebra stripes and background image/text. The variable ps-paper-type species which size of paper to format for; legitimate values include a4, a3, a4small, b4, b5, executive, ledger, legal, letter, letter-small, statement, tabloid. The default is letter. You can dene additional paper sizes by changing the variable ps-page-dimensions-database. The variable ps-landscape-mode species the orientation of printing on the page. The default is nil, which stands for portrait mode. Any non-nil value species landscape mode. The variable ps-number-of-columns species the number of columns; it takes eect in both landscape and portrait mode. The default is 1. The variable ps-font-family species which font family to use for printing ordinary text. Legitimate values include Courier, Helvetica, NewCenturySchlbk, Palatino and Times. The variable ps-font-size species the size of the font for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. Emacs supports more scripts and characters than a typical PostScript printer. Thus, some of the characters in your buer might not be printable using the fonts built into your printer. You can augment the fonts supplied with the printer with those from the GNU Intlfonts package, or you can instruct Emacs to use Intlfonts exclusively. The variable ps-multibyte-buffer controls this: the default value, nil, is appropriate for printing ASCII and Latin-1 characters; a value of non-latinprinter is for printers which have the fonts for ASCII, Latin-1, Japanese, and Korean characters built into them. A value of bdf-font arranges for the BDF fonts from the Intlfonts package to be used for all characters. Finally, a value of

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

420

bdf-font-except-latin instructs the printer to use built-in fonts for ASCII and Latin-1 characters, and Intlfonts BDF fonts for the rest. To be able to use the BDF fonts, Emacs needs to know where to nd them. The variable bdf-directory-list holds the list of directories where Emacs should look for the fonts; the default value includes a single directory /usr/local/share/emacs/fonts/bdf. Many other customization variables for these commands are dened and described in the Lisp les ps-print.el and ps-mule.el. 31.5.3 Printing Package The basic Emacs facilities for printing hardcopy can be extended using the Printing package. This provides an easy-to-use interface for choosing what to print, previewing PostScript les before printing, and setting various printing options such as print headers, landscape or portrait modes, duplex modes, and so forth. On GNU/Linux or Unix systems, the Printing package relies on the gs and gv utilities, which are distributed as part of the GhostScript program. On MS-Windows, the gstools port of Ghostscript can be used. To use the Printing package, add (require printing) to your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461), followed by (pr-update-menus). This function replaces the usual printing commands in the menu bar with a Printing submenu that contains various printing options. You can also type M-x pr-interface RET; this creates a *Printing Interface* buer, similar to a customization buer, where you can set the printing options. After selecting what and how to print, you start the print job using the Print button (click mouse-2 on it, or move point over it and type RET). For further information on the various options, use the Interface Help button.

31.6 Sorting Text

Emacs provides several commands for sorting text in the buer. All operate on the contents of the region. They divide the text of the region into many sort records, identify a sort key for each record, and then reorder the records into the order determined by the sort keys. The records are ordered so that their keys are in alphabetical order, or, for numeric sorting, in numeric order. In alphabetic sorting, all upper-case letters A through Z come before lower-case a, in accord with the ASCII character sequence. The various sort commands dier in how they divide the text into sort records and in which part of each record is used as the sort key. Most of the commands make each line a separate sort record, but some commands use paragraphs or pages as sort records. Most of the sort commands use each entire sort record as its own sort key, but some use only a portion of the record as the sort key. M-x sort-lines Divide the region into lines, and sort by comparing the entire text of a line. A numeric argument means sort into descending order.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

421

M-x sort-paragraphs Divide the region into paragraphs, and sort by comparing the entire text of a paragraph (except for leading blank lines). A numeric argument means sort into descending order. M-x sort-pages Divide the region into pages, and sort by comparing the entire text of a page (except for leading blank lines). A numeric argument means sort into descending order. M-x sort-fields Divide the region into lines, and sort by comparing the contents of one eld in each line. Fields are dened as separated by whitespace, so the rst run of consecutive non-whitespace characters in a line constitutes eld 1, the second such run constitutes eld 2, etc. Specify which eld to sort by with a numeric argument: 1 to sort by eld 1, etc. A negative argument means count elds from the right instead of from the left; thus, minus 1 means sort by the last eld. If several lines have identical contents in the eld being sorted, they keep the same relative order that they had in the original buer. M-x sort-numeric-fields Like M-x sort-fields except the specied eld is converted to an integer for each line, and the numbers are compared. 10 comes before 2 when considered as text, but after it when considered as a number. By default, numbers are interpreted according to sort-numeric-base, but numbers beginning with 0x or 0 are interpreted as hexadecimal and octal, respectively. M-x sort-columns Like M-x sort-fields except that the text within each line used for comparison comes from a xed range of columns. See below for an explanation. M-x reverse-region Reverse the order of the lines in the region. This is useful for sorting into descending order by elds or columns, since those sort commands do not have a feature for doing that. For example, if the buer contains this:
On systems where clash detection (locking of files being edited) is implemented, Emacs also checks the first time you modify a buffer whether the file has changed on disk since it was last visited or saved. If it has, you are asked to confirm that you want to change the buffer.

applying M-x sort-lines to the entire buer produces this:

On systems where clash detection (locking of files being edited) is implemented, Emacs also checks the first time you modify a buffer saved. If it has, you are asked to confirm that you want to change the buffer.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

whether the file has changed on disk since it was last visited or

422

where the upper-case O sorts before all lower-case letters. If you use C-u 2 M-x sort-fields instead, you get this:
implemented, Emacs also checks the first time you modify a buffer saved. If it has, you are asked to confirm that you want to change the buffer. On systems where clash detection (locking of files being edited) is whether the file has changed on disk since it was last visited or

where the sort keys were Emacs, If, buffer, systems and the. M-x sort-columns requires more explanation. You specify the columns by putting point at one of the columns and the mark at the other column. Because this means you cannot put point or the mark at the beginning of the rst line of the text you want to sort, this command uses an unusual denition of region: all of the line point is in is considered part of the region, and so is all of the line the mark is in, as well as all the lines in between. For example, to sort a table by information found in columns 10 to 15, you could put the mark on column 10 in the rst line of the table, and point on column 15 in the last line of the table, and then run sort-columns. Equivalently, you could run it with the mark on column 15 in the rst line and point on column 10 in the last line. This can be thought of as sorting the rectangle specied by point and the mark, except that the text on each line to the left or right of the rectangle moves along with the text inside the rectangle. See Section 9.5 [Rectangles], page 63. Many of the sort commands ignore case dierences when comparing, if sortfold-case is non-nil.

31.7 Editing Binary Files

There is a special major mode for editing binary les: Hexl mode. To use it, use M-x hexl-find-file instead of C-x C-f to visit the le. This command converts the les contents to hexadecimal and lets you edit the translation. When you save the le, it is converted automatically back to binary. You can also use M-x hexl-mode to translate an existing buer into hex. This is useful if you visit a le normally and then discover it is a binary le. Ordinary text characters overwrite in Hexl mode. This is to reduce the risk of accidentally spoiling the alignment of data in the le. There are special commands for insertion. Here is a list of the commands of Hexl mode: C-M-d C-M-o C-M-x C-x [ C-x ] M-g Insert a byte with a code typed in decimal. Insert a byte with a code typed in octal. Insert a byte with a code typed in hex. Move to the beginning of a 1k-byte page. Move to the end of a 1k-byte page. Move to an address specied in hex.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands M-j C-c C-c Move to an address specied in decimal.

423

Leave Hexl mode, going back to the major mode this buer had before you invoked hexl-mode.

Other Hexl commands let you insert strings (sequences) of binary bytes, move by shorts or ints, etc.; type C-h a hexl-RET for details.

31.8 Saving Emacs Sessions

Use the desktop library to save the state of Emacs from one session to another. Once you save the Emacs desktopthe buers, their le names, major modes, buer positions, and so onthen subsequent Emacs sessions reload the saved desktop. You can save the desktop manually with the command M-x desktop-save. You can also enable automatic saving of the desktop when you exit Emacs, and automatic restoration of the last saved desktop when Emacs starts: use the Customization buer (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434) to set desktop-savemode to t for future sessions, or add this line in your init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461): (desktop-save-mode 1) If you turn on desktop-save-mode in your init le, then when Emacs starts, it looks for a saved desktop in the current directory. (More precisely, it looks in the directories specied by desktop-path, and uses the rst desktop it nds.) Thus, you can have separate saved desktops in dierent directories, and the starting directory determines which one Emacs reloads. You can save the current desktop and reload one saved in another directory by typing M-x desktop-change-dir. Typing M-x desktop-revert reverts to the desktop previously reloaded. Specify the option --no-desktop on the command line when you dont want it to reload any saved desktop. This turns o desktop-save-mode for the current session. Starting Emacs with the --no-init-file option also disables desktop reloading, since it bypasses the init le, where desktop-save-mode is usually turned on. By default, all the buers in the desktop are restored at one go. However, this may be slow if there are a lot of buers in the desktop. You can specify the maximum number of buers to restore immediately with the variable desktoprestore-eager; the remaining buers are restored lazily, when Emacs is idle. Type M-x desktop-clear to empty the Emacs desktop. This kills all buers except for internal ones, and clears the global variables listed in desktop-globalsto-clear. If you want this to preserve certain buers, customize the variable desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp, whose value is a regular expression matching the names of buers not to kill. If you want to save minibuer history from one session to another, use the savehist library.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

424

31.9 Recursive Editing Levels

A recursive edit is a situation in which you are using Emacs commands to perform arbitrary editing while in the middle of another Emacs command. For example, when you type C-r inside of a query-replace, you enter a recursive edit in which you can change the current buer. On exiting from the recursive edit, you go back to the query-replace. Exiting the recursive edit means returning to the unnished command, which continues execution. The command to exit is C-M-c (exit-recursive-edit). You can also abort the recursive edit. This is like exiting, but also quits the unnished command immediately. Use the command C-] (abort-recursive-edit) to do this. See Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468. The mode line shows you when you are in a recursive edit by displaying square brackets around the parentheses that always surround the major and minor mode names. Every windows mode line shows this in the same way, since being in a recursive edit is true of Emacs as a whole rather than any particular window or buer. It is possible to be in recursive edits within recursive edits. For example, after typing C-r in a query-replace, you may type a command that enters the debugger. This begins a recursive editing level for the debugger, within the recursive editing level for C-r. Mode lines display a pair of square brackets for each recursive editing level currently in progress. Exiting the inner recursive edit (such as with the debugger c command) resumes the command running in the next level up. When that command nishes, you can then use C-M-c to exit another recursive editing level, and so on. Exiting applies to the innermost level only. Aborting also gets out of only one level of recursive edit; it returns immediately to the command level of the previous recursive edit. If you wish, you can then abort the next recursive editing level. Alternatively, the command M-x top-level aborts all levels of recursive edits, returning immediately to the top-level command reader. It also exits the minibuer, if it is active. The text being edited inside the recursive edit need not be the same text that you were editing at top level. It depends on what the recursive edit is for. If the command that invokes the recursive edit selects a dierent buer rst, that is the buer you will edit recursively. In any case, you can switch buers within the recursive edit in the normal manner (as long as the buer-switching keys have not been rebound). You could probably do all the rest of your editing inside the recursive edit, visiting les and all. But this could have surprising eects (such as stack overow) from time to time. So remember to exit or abort the recursive edit when you no longer need it. In general, we try to minimize the use of recursive editing levels in GNU Emacs. This is because they constrain you to go back in a particular orderfrom the innermost level toward the top level. When possible, we present dierent activities in separate buers so that you can switch between them as you please. Some commands switch to a new major mode which provides a command to switch back.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

425

These approaches give you more exibility to go back to unnished tasks in the order you choose.

31.10 Emulation
GNU Emacs can be programmed to emulate (more or less) most other editors. Standard facilities can emulate these: CRiSP/Brief (PC editor) M-x crisp-mode enables key bindings to emulate the CRiSP/Brief editor. Note that this rebinds M-x to exit Emacs unless you set the variable crisp-override-meta-x. You can also use the command M-x scroll-all-mode or set the variable crisp-load-scroll-all to emulate CRiSPs scroll-all feature (scrolling all windows together). EDT (DEC VMS editor) Turn on EDT emulation with M-x edt-emulation-on; restore normal command bindings with M-x edt-emulation-off. Most of the EDT emulation commands are keypad keys, and most standard Emacs key bindings are still available. The EDT emulation rebindings are done in the global keymap, so there is no problem switching buers or major modes while in EDT emulation. TPU (DEC VMS editor) M-x tpu-edt-on turns on emulation of the TPU editor emulating EDT. vi (Berkeley editor) Viper is the newest emulator for vi. It implements several levels of emulation; level 1 is closest to vi itself, while level 5 departs somewhat from strict emulation to take advantage of the capabilities of Emacs. To invoke Viper, type M-x viper-mode; it will guide you the rest of the way and ask for the emulation level. See Info le viper, node Top. vi (another emulator) M-x vi-mode enters a major mode that replaces the previously established major mode. All of the vi commands that, in real vi, enter input mode are programmed instead to return to the previous major mode. Thus, ordinary Emacs serves as vis input mode. Because vi emulation works through major modes, it does not work to switch buers during emulation. Return to normal Emacs rst. If you plan to use vi emulation much, you probably want to bind a key to the vi-mode command. vi (alternate emulator) M-x vip-mode invokes another vi emulator, said to resemble real vi more thoroughly than M-x vi-mode. Input mode in this emulator is changed from ordinary Emacs so you can use ESC to go back to

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

426

emulated vi command mode. To get from emulated vi command mode back to ordinary Emacs, type C-z. This emulation does not work through major modes, and it is possible to switch buers in various ways within the emulator. It is not so necessary to assign a key to the command vip-mode as it is with vimode because terminating insert mode does not use it. See Info le vip, node Top, for full information. WordStar (old wordprocessor) M-x wordstar-mode provides a major mode with WordStar-like key bindings.

31.11 Hyperlinking and Navigation Features

The following subsections describe convenience features for handling URLs and other types of links occurring in Emacs buer text. 31.11.1 Following URLs M-x browse-url RET url RET Load a URL into a Web browser. The Browse-URL package allows you to easily follow URLs from within Emacs. Most URLs are followed by invoking a web browser; mailto: URLs are followed by invoking the compose-mail Emacs command to send mail to the specied address (see Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367). The command M-x browse-url prompts for a URL, and follows it. If point is located near a plausible URL, that URL is oered as the default. The Browse-URL package also provides other commands which you might like to bind to keys, such as browse-url-at-point and browse-url-at-mouse. You can customize Browse-URLs behavior via various options in the browseurl Customize group. In particular, the option browse-url-mailto-function lets you dene how to follow mailto: URLs, while browse-url-browser-function lets you dene how to follow other types of URLs. For more information, view the package commentary by typing C-h P browse-url RET. 31.11.2 Activating URLs M-x goto-address-mode Activate URLs and e-mail addresses in the current buer. You can make Emacs mark out URLs specially in the current buer, by typing M-x goto-address-mode. When this buer-local minor mode is enabled, it nds all the URLs in the buer, highlights them, and turns them into clickable buttons. You can follow the URL by typing C-c RET (goto-address-at-point) while point is on its text; or by clicking with Mouse-2, or by clicking Mouse-1 quickly (see Section 18.3 [Mouse References], page 167). Following a URL is done by calling browse-url as a subroutine (see Section 31.11.1 [Browse-URL], page 426).

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

427

It can be useful to add goto-address-mode to mode hooks and hooks for displaying an incoming message (e.g. rmail-show-message-hook for Rmail, and mhshow-mode-hook for MH-E). This is not needed for Gnus, which has a similar feature of its own. 31.11.3 Finding Files and URLs at Point The FFAP package replaces certain key bindings for nding les, such as C-x C-f, with commands that provide more sensitive defaults. These commands behave like the ordinary ones when given a prex argument. Otherwise, they get the default le name or URL from the text around point. If what is found in the buer has the form of a URL rather than a le name, the commands use browse-url to view it (see Section 31.11.1 [Browse-URL], page 426). This feature is useful for following references in mail or news buers, README les, MANIFEST les, and so on. For more information, view the package commentary by typing C-h P ffap RET. To enable FFAP, type M-x ffap-bindings. This makes the following key bindings, and also installs hooks for additional FFAP functionality in Rmail, Gnus and VM article buers. C-x C-f filename RET Find lename, guessing a default from text around point (find-fileat-point). C-x C-r C-x C-v ffap-read-only, analogous to find-file-read-only. ffap-alternate-file, analogous to find-alternate-file.

C-x d directory RET Start Dired on directory, defaulting to the directory name at point (dired-at-point). C-x C-d C-x 4 f C-x 4 r C-x 4 d C-x 5 f C-x 5 r C-x 5 d ffap-list-directory, analogous to list-directory. ffap-other-window, analogous to find-file-other-window. ffap-read-only-other-window, only-other-window. analogous to find-file-read-

ffap-dired-other-window, like dired-other-window. ffap-other-frame, analogous to find-file-other-frame. ffap-read-only-other-frame, analogous to find-file-read-onlyother-frame. ffap-dired-other-frame, analogous to dired-other-frame.

M-x ffap-next Search buer for next le name or URL, then nd that le or URL. S-Mouse-3 ffap-at-mouse nds the le guessed from text around the position of a mouse click.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands C-S-Mouse-3

428

Display a menu of les and URLs mentioned in current buer, then nd the one you select (ffap-menu).

31.12 Other Amusements

The animate package makes text dance (e.g. M-x animate-birthday-present). M-x blackbox, M-x mpuz and M-x 5x5 are puzzles. blackbox challenges you to determine the location of objects inside a box by tomography. mpuz displays a multiplication puzzle with letters standing for digits in a code that you must guessto guess a value, type a letter and then the digit you think it stands for. The aim of 5x5 is to ll in all the squares. M-x bubbles is a game in which the object is to remove as many bubbles as you can in the smallest number of moves. M-x decipher helps you to cryptanalyze a buer which is encrypted in a simple monoalphabetic substitution cipher. M-x dissociated-press scrambles the text in the current Emacs buer, word by word or character by character, writing its output to a buer named *Dissociation*. A positive argument tells it to operate character by character, and species the number of overlap characters. A negative argument tells it to operate word by word, and species the number of overlap words. Dissociated Press produces results fairly like those of a Markov chain, but is however, an independent, ignoriginal invention; it techniquitously copies several consecutive characters from the sample text between random jumps, unlike a Markov chain which would jump randomly after each word or character. Keep dissociwords out of your documentation, if you want it to be well userenced and properbose. M-x dunnet runs an text-based adventure game. If you want a little more personal involvement, try M-x gomoku, which plays the game Go Moku with you. If you are a little bit bored, you can try M-x hanoi. If you are considerably bored, give it a numeric argument. If you are very, very bored, try an argument of 9. Sit back and watch. M-x life runs Conways Life cellular automaton. M-x landmark runs a relatively non-participatory game in which a robot attempts to maneuver towards a tree at the center of the window based on unique olfactory cues from each of the four directions. M-x morse-region converts the text in the region to Morse code; M-x unmorse-region converts it back. M-x nato-region converts the text in the region to NATO phonetic alphabet; M-x denato-region converts it back. M-x pong, M-x snake and M-x tetris are implementations of the well-known Pong, Snake and Tetris games. M-x solitaire plays a game of solitaire in which you jump pegs across other pegs. The command M-x zone plays games with the display when Emacs is idle.

Chapter 31: Miscellaneous Commands

429

Finally, if you nd yourself frustrated, try describing your problems to the famous psychotherapist Eliza. Just do M-x doctor. End each input by typing RET twice.

Chapter 32: Emacs Lisp Packages

430

32 Emacs Lisp Packages

Emacs includes a facility that lets you easily download and install packages that implement additional features. Each package is a separate Emacs Lisp program, sometimes including other components such as an Info manual. M-x list-packages brings up a buer named *Packages* with a list of all packages. You can install or uninstall packages via this buer. See Section 32.1 [Package Menu], page 430. The command C-h P (describe-package) prompts for the name of a package, and displays a help buer describing the attributes of the package and the features that it implements. By default, Emacs downloads packages from a package archive maintained by the Emacs developers and hosted by the GNU project. Optionally, you can also download packages from archives maintained by third parties. See Section 32.2 [Package Installation], page 431. For information about turning an Emacs Lisp program into an installable package, See Section Packaging in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . For information about nding third-party packages and other Emacs Lisp extensions, See Section Packages that do not come with Emacs in GNU Emacs FAQ .

32.1 The Package Menu Buer

The command M-x list-packages brings up the package menu. This is a buer listing all the packages that Emacs knows about, one on each line, with the following information: The package name (e.g. auctex). The packages version number (e.g. 11.86). The packages statusnormally one of available (can be downloaded from the package archive), installed, or built-in (included in Emacs by default). In some instances, the status can be held, disabled, or obsolete. See Section 32.2 [Package Installation], page 431. A short description of the package. The list-packages command accesses the network, to retrieve the list of available packages from the package archive server. If the network is unavailable, it falls back on the most recently retrieved list. The following commands are available in the package menu: h ? RET Print a short message summarizing how to use the package menu (package-menu-quick-help). Display a help buer for the package on the current line (packagemenu-describe-package), similar to the help window displayed by the C-h P command (see Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430).

Chapter 32: Emacs Lisp Packages i

431

Mark the package on the current line for installation (package-menumark-install). If the package status is available, this adds an I character to the start of the line; typing x (see below) will download and install the package. Mark the package on the current line for deletion (package-menumark-delete). If the package status is installed, this adds a D character to the start of the line; typing x (see below) will delete the package. See Section 32.3 [Package Files], page 432, for information about what package deletion entails. Remove any installation or deletion mark previously added to the current line by an i or d command. Mark all package with a newer available version for upgrading (package-menu-mark-upgrades). This places an installation mark on the new available versions, and a deletion mark on the old installed versions. Download and install all packages marked with i, and their dependencies; also, delete all packages marked with d (package-menu-execute). This also removes the marks. Refresh the package list (package-menu-refresh). This fetches the list of available packages from the package archive again, and recomputes the package list.

u U

For example, you can install a package by typing i on the line listing that package, followed by x.

32.2 Package Installation

Packages are most conveniently installed using the package menu (see Section 32.1 [Package Menu], page 430), but you can also use the command M-x package-install. This prompts for the name of a package with the available status, then downloads and installs it. A package may require certain other packages to be installed, because it relies on functionality provided by them. When Emacs installs such a package, it also automatically downloads and installs any required package that is not already installed. (If a required package is somehow unavailable, Emacs signals an error and stops installation.) A packages requirements list is shown in its help buer. By default, packages are downloaded from a single package archive maintained by the Emacs developers. This is controlled by the variable package-archives, whose value is a list of package archives known to Emacs. Each list element must have the form (id . location ), where id is the name of a package archive and location is the HTTP address or directory name of the package archive. You can alter this list if you wish to use third party package archivesbut do so at your own risk, and use only third parties that you think you can trust! Once a package is downloaded and installed, it is loaded into the current Emacs session. Loading a package is not quite the same as loading a Lisp library (see

Chapter 32: Emacs Lisp Packages

432

Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287); its eect varies from package to package. Most packages just make some new commands available, while others have more wide-ranging eects on the Emacs session. For such information, consult the packages help buer. By default, Emacs also automatically loads all installed packages in subsequent Emacs sessions. This happens at startup, after processing the init le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). As an exception, Emacs does not load packages at startup if invoked with the -q or --no-init-file options (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507). To disable automatic package loading, change the variable package-enableat-startup to nil. The reason automatic package loading occurs after loading the init le is that user options only receive their customized values after loading the init le, including user options which aect the packaging system. In some circumstances, you may want to load packages explicitly in your init le (usually because some other code in your init le depends on a package). In that case, your init le should call the function package-initialize. It is up to you to ensure that relevant user options, such as package-load-list (see below), are set up prior to the packageinitialize call. You should also set package-enable-at-startup to nil, to avoid loading the packages again after processing the init le. Alternatively, you may choose to completely inhibit package loading at startup, and invoke the command M-x package-initialize to load your packages manually. For ner control over package loading, you can use the variable package-loadlist. Its value should be a list. A list element of the form (name version ) tells Emacs to load version version of the package named name. Here, version should be a version string (corresponding to a specic version of the package), or t (which means to load any installed version), or nil (which means no version; this disables the package, preventing it from being loaded). A list element can also be the symbol all, which means to load the latest installed version of any package not named by the other list elements. The default value is just (all). For example, if you set package-load-list to ((muse "3.20") all), then Emacs only loads version 3.20 of the muse package, plus any installed version of packages other than muse. Any other version of muse that happens to be installed will be ignored. The muse package will be listed in the package menu with the held status.

32.3 Package Files and Directory Layout

Each package is downloaded from the package archive in the form of a single package leeither an Emacs Lisp source le, or a tar le containing multiple Emacs Lisp source and other les. Package les are automatically retrieved, processed, and disposed of by the Emacs commands that install packages. Normally, you will not need to deal directly with them, unless you are making a package (see Section Packaging in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). Should you ever need to install a package directly from a package le, use the command M-x package-install-file.

Chapter 32: Emacs Lisp Packages

433

Once installed, the contents of a package are placed in a subdirectory of ~/.emacs.d/elpa/ (you can change the name of that directory by changing the variable package-user-dir). The package subdirectory is named name-version , where name is the package name and version is its version string. In addition to package-user-dir, Emacs looks for installed packages in the directories listed in package-directory-list. These directories are meant for system administrators to make Emacs packages available system-wide; Emacs itself never installs packages there. The package subdirectories for package-directorylist are laid out in the same way as in package-user-dir. Deleting a package (see Section 32.1 [Package Menu], page 430) involves deleting the corresponding package subdirectory. This only works for packages installed in package-user-dir; if told to act on a package in a system-wide package directory, the deletion command signals an error.

Chapter 33: Customization

434

33 Customization
This chapter describes some simple methods to customize the behavior of Emacs. Apart from the methods described here, see Appendix D [X Resources], page 521 for information about using X resources to customize Emacs, and see Chapter 14 [Keyboard Macros], page 116 for information about recording and replaying keyboard macros. Making more far-reaching and open-ended changes involves writing Emacs Lisp code; see The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.

33.1 Easy Customization Interface

Emacs has many settings which you can change. Most settings are customizable variables (see Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443), which are also called user options. There is a huge number of customizable variables, controlling numerous aspects of Emacs behavior; the variables documented in this manual are listed in [Variable Index], page 604. A separate class of settings are the faces, which determine the fonts, colors, and other attributes of text (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). To browse and alter settings (both variables and faces), type M-x customize. This creates a customization buer, which lets you navigate through a logically organized list of settings, edit and set their values, and save them permanently. 33.1.1 Customization Groups Customization settings are organized into customization groups. These groups are collected into bigger groups, all the way up to a master group called Emacs. M-x customize creates a customization buer that shows the top-level Emacs group. It looks like this, in part:
To apply changes, use the Save or Set buttons. For details, see [Saving Customizations] in the [Emacs manual]. ________________________________________ [ Search ] Operate on all settings in this buffer: [ Set for current session ] [ Save for future sessions ] [ Undo edits ] [ Reset to saved ] [ Erase customizations ] [ Exit ]

Emacs group: Customization of the One True Editor. [State]: visible group members are all at standard values. See also [Manual]. [Editing] : Basic text editing facilities. [Convenience] : Convenience features for faster editing. more second-level groups

The main part of this buer shows the Emacs customization group, which contains several other groups (Editing, Convenience, etc.). The contents of those groups are not listed here, only one line of documentation each.

Chapter 33: Customization

435

The state of the group indicates whether setting in that group has been edited, set or saved. See Section 33.1.3 [Changing a Variable], page 436. Most of the customization buer is read-only, but it includes some editable elds that you can edit. For example, at the top of the customization buer is an editable eld for searching for settings (see Section 33.1.2 [Browsing Custom], page 435). There are also buttons and links, which you can activate by either clicking with the mouse, or moving point there and typing RET. For example, the group names like [Editing] are links; activating one of these links brings up the customization buer for that group. In the customizable buer, you can type TAB (widget-forward) to move forward to the next button or editable eld. S-TAB (widget-backward) moves back to the previous button or editable eld. 33.1.2 Browsing and Searching for Settings From the top-level customization buer created by M-x customize, you can follow the links to the subgroups of the Emacs customization group. These subgroups may contain settings for you to customize; they may also contain further subgroups, dealing with yet more specialized subsystems of Emacs. As you navigate the hierarchy of customization groups, you should nd some settings that you want to customize. If you are interested in customizing a particular setting or customization group, you can go straight there with the commands M-x customize-option, M-x customize-face, or M-x customize-group. See Section 33.1.6 [Specic Customization], page 440. If you dont know exactly what groups or settings you want to customize, you can search for them using the editable search eld at the top of each customization buer. Here, you can type in a search termeither one or more words separated by spaces, or a regular expression (see Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97). Then type RET in the eld, or activate the Search button next to it, to switch to a customization buer containing groups and settings that match those terms. Note, however, that this feature only nds groups and settings that are loaded in the current Emacs session. If you dont want customization buers to show the search eld, change the variable custom-search-field to nil. The command M-x customize-apropos is similar to using the search eld, except that it reads the search term(s) using the minibuer. See Section 33.1.6 [Specic Customization], page 440. M-x customize-browse is another way to browse the available settings. This command creates a special customization buer which shows only the names of groups and settings, in a structured layout. You can show the contents of a group, in the same buer, by invoking the [+] button next to the group name. When the group contents are shown, the button changes to [-]; invoking that hides the group contents again. Each group or setting in this buer has a link which says [Group], [Option] or [Face]. Invoking this link creates an ordinary customization buer

Chapter 33: Customization

436

showing just that group, option, or face; this is the way to change settings that you nd with M-x customize-browse. 33.1.3 Changing a Variable Here is an example of what a variable, or user option, looks like in the customization buer:
[Hide] Kill Ring Max: 60 [State]: STANDARD. Maximum length of kill ring before oldest elements are thrown away.

The rst line shows that the variable is named kill-ring-max, formatted as Kill Ring Max for easier viewing. Its value is 60. The button labeled [Hide], if activated, hides the variables value and state; this is useful to avoid cluttering up the customization buer with very long values (for this reason, variables that have very long values may start out hidden). If you use the [Hide] button, it changes to [Show Value], which you can activate to reveal the value and state. On a graphical display, the [Hide] and [Show Value] buttons are replaced with graphical triangles pointing downwards and rightwards respectively. The line after the variable name indicates the customization state of the variable: in this example, STANDARD means you have not changed the variable, so its value is the default one. The [State] button gives a menu of operations for customizing the variable. Below the customization state is the documentation for the variable. This is the same documentation that would be shown by the C-h v command (see Section 33.2.1 [Examining], page 443). If the documentation is more than one line long, only one line may be shown. If so, that line ends with a [More] button; activate this to see the full documentation. To enter a new value for Kill Ring Max, just move point to the value and edit it. For example, type M-d to delete the 60 and type in another number. As you begin to alter the text, the [State] line will change:
[State]: EDITED, shown value does not take effect until you set or save it.

Editing the value does not make it take eect right away. To do that, you must set the variable by activating the [State] button and choosing Set for Current Session. Then the variables state becomes:
[State]: SET for current session only.

You dont have to worry about specifying a value that is not valid; the Set for Current Session operation checks for validity and will not install an unacceptable value. While editing certain kinds of values, such as le names, directory names, and Emacs command names, you can perform completion with C-M-i (widgetcomplete), or the equivalent keys M-TAB or ESC TAB. This behaves much like minibuer completion (see Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29). Typing RET on an editable value eld moves point forward to the next eld or button, like TAB. You can thus type RET when you are nished editing a eld, to

Chapter 33: Customization

437

move on to the next button or eld. To insert a newline within an editable eld, use C-o or C-q C-j. For some variables, there is only a xed set of legitimate values, and you are not allowed to edit the value directly. Instead, a [Value Menu] button appears before the value; activating this button presents a choice of values. For a boolean on or o value, the button says [Toggle], and ips the value. After using the [Value Menu] or [Toggle] button, you must again set the variable to make the chosen value take eect. Some variables have values with complex structure. For example, the value of minibuffer-frame-alist is an association list. Here is how it appears in the customization buer:
[Hide] Minibuffer Frame Alist: [INS] [DEL] Parameter: width Value: 80 [INS] [DEL] Parameter: height Value: 2 [INS] [ State ]: STANDARD. Alist of parameters for the initial minibuffer frame. [Hide] [. . . more lines of documentation. . . ]

In this case, each association in the list consists of two items, one labeled Parameter and one labeled Value; both are editable elds. You can delete an association from the list with the [DEL] button next to it. To add an association, use the [INS] button at the position where you want to insert it; the very last [INS] button inserts at the end of the list. When you set a variable, the new value takes eect only in the current Emacs session. To save the value for future sessions, use the [State] button and select the Save for Future Sessions operation. See Section 33.1.4 [Saving Customizations], page 438. You can also restore the variable to its standard value by using the [State] button and selecting the Erase Customization operation. There are actually four reset operations: Undo Edits If you have modied but not yet set the variable, this restores the text in the customization buer to match the actual value. Reset to Saved This restores the value of the variable to the last saved value, and updates the text accordingly. Erase Customization This sets the variable to its standard value. Any saved value that you have is also eliminated. Set to Backup Value This sets the variable to a previous value that was set in the customization buer in this session. If you customize a variable and then reset it,

Chapter 33: Customization

438

which discards the customized value, you can get the discarded value back again with this operation. Sometimes it is useful to record a comment about a specic customization. Use the Add Comment item from the [State] menu to create a eld for entering the comment. Near the top of the customization buer are two lines of buttons:
[Set for Current Session] [Save for Future Sessions] [Undo Edits] [Reset to Saved] [Erase Customization] [Exit]

Each of the rst ve buttons performs the stated operationset, save, reset, etc. on all the settings in the buer that could meaningfully be aected. They do not operate on settings that are hidden, nor on subgroups that are hidden or not visible in the buer. The command C-c C-c (Custom-set) is equivalent using to the [Set for Current Session] button. The command C-x C-s (Custom-save) is like using the [Save for Future Sessions] button. The [Exit] button switches out of the customization buer, and buries the buer at the bottom of the buer list. To make it kill the customization buer instead, change the variable custom-buffer-done-kill to t. 33.1.4 Saving Customizations In the customization buer, you can save a customization setting by choosing the Save for Future Sessions choice from its [State] button. The C-x C-s (Custom-save) command, or the [Save for Future Sessions] button at the top of the customization buer, saves all applicable settings in the buer. Saving works by writing code to a le, usually your initialization le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). Future Emacs sessions automatically read this le at startup, which sets up the customizations again. You can choose to save customizations somewhere other than your initialization le. To make this work, you must add a couple of lines of code to your initialization le, to set the variable custom-file to the name of the desired le, and to load that le. For example: (setq custom-file "~/.emacs-custom.el") (load custom-file) You can even specify dierent customization les for dierent Emacs versions, like this: (cond ((< emacs-major-version 22) ;; Emacs 21 customization. (setq custom-file "~/.custom-21.el")) ((and (= emacs-major-version 22) (< emacs-minor-version 3)) ;; Emacs 22 customization, before version 22.3. (setq custom-file "~/.custom-22.el")) (t ;; Emacs version 22.3 or later. (setq custom-file "~/.emacs-custom.el")))

Chapter 33: Customization

439

(load custom-file) If Emacs was invoked with the -q or --no-init-file options (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507), it will not let you save your customizations in your initialization le. This is because saving customizations from such a session would wipe out all the other customizations you might have on your initialization le. 33.1.5 Customizing Faces You can customize faces (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75), which determine how Emacs displays dierent types of text. Customization groups can contain both variables and faces. For example, in programming language modes, source code comments are shown with font-lock-comment-face (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80). In a customization buer, that face appears like this:
[Hide] Font Lock Comment Face:[sample] [State] : STANDARD. Font Lock mode face used to highlight comments. [ ] Font Family: -[ ] Font Foundry: -[ ] Width: -[ ] Height: -[ ] Weight: -[ ] Slant: -[ ] Underline: -[ ] Overline: -[ ] Strike-through: -[ ] Box around text: -[ ] Inverse-video: -[X] Foreground: Firebrick [Choose] (sample) [ ] Background: -[ ] Stipple: -[ ] Inherit: -[Hide Unused Attributes]

The rst three lines show the name, [State] button, and documentation for the face. Below that is a list of face attributes. In front of each attribute is a checkbox. A lled checkbox, [X], means that the face species a value for this attribute; an empty checkbox, [ ], means that the face does not specify any special value for the attribute. You can activate a checkbox to specify or unspecify its attribute. Most faces only specify a few attributes (in the above example, font-lockcomment-face only species the foreground color). Emacs has a special face, default, whose attributes are all specied; it determines the attributes left unspecied by other faces. The Hide Unused Attributes button, at the end of the attribute list, hides the unspecied attributes of the face. When attributes are being hidden, the button changes to [Show All Attributes], which reveals the entire attribute list. The customization buer may start out with unspecied attributes hidden, to avoid cluttering the interface.

Chapter 33: Customization

440

When an attribute is specied, you can change its value in the usual ways. Foreground and background colors can be specied using either color names or RGB triplets (see Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76). You can also use the [Choose] button to switch to a list of color names; select a color with RET in that buer to put the color name in the value eld. Setting, saving and resetting a face work like the same operations for variables (see Section 33.1.3 [Changing a Variable], page 436). A face can specify dierent appearances for dierent types of displays. For example, a face can make text red on a color display, but use a bold font on a monochrome display. To specify multiple appearances for a face, select For All Kinds of Displays in the menu you get from invoking [State]. 33.1.6 Customizing Specic Items M-x customize-option RET option RET M-x customize-variable RET option RET Set up a customization buer for just one user option, option. M-x customize-face RET face RET Set up a customization buer for just one face, face. M-x customize-group RET group RET Set up a customization buer for just one group, group. M-x customize-apropos RET regexp RET Set up a customization buer for all the settings and groups that match regexp. M-x customize-changed RET version RET Set up a customization buer with all the settings and groups whose meaning has changed since Emacs version version. M-x customize-saved Set up a customization buer containing all settings that you have saved with customization buers. M-x customize-unsaved Set up a customization buer containing all settings that you have set but not saved. If you want to customize a particular user option, type M-x customize-option. This reads the variable name, and sets up the customization buer with just that one user option. When entering the variable name into the minibuer, completion is available, but only for the names of variables that have been loaded into Emacs. Likewise, you can customize a specic face using M-x customize-face. You can set up a customization buer for a specic customization group using M-x customize-group. M-x customize-apropos prompts for a search termeither one or more words separated by spaces, or a regular expressionand sets up a customization buer for all loaded settings and groups with matching names. This is like using the

Chapter 33: Customization

441

search eld at the top of the customization buer (see Section 33.1.1 [Customization Groups], page 434). When you upgrade to a new Emacs version, you might want to consider customizing new settings, and settings whose meanings or default values have changed. To do this, use M-x customize-changed and specify a previous Emacs version number using the minibuer. It creates a customization buer which shows all the settings and groups whose denitions have been changed since the specied version, loading them if necessary. If you change settings and then decide the change was a mistake, you can use two commands to revisit your changes. Use M-x customize-saved to customize settings that you have saved. Use M-x customize-unsaved to customize settings that you have set but not saved. 33.1.7 Custom Themes Custom themes are collections of settings that can be enabled or disabled as a unit. You can use Custom themes to switch easily between various collections of settings, and to transfer such collections from one computer to another. A Custom theme is stored an Emacs Lisp source le. If the name of the Custom theme is name, the theme le is named name-theme.el. See Section 33.1.8 [Creating Custom Themes], page 442, for the format of a theme le and how to make one. Type M-x customize-themes to switch to a buer named *Custom Themes*, which lists the Custom themes that Emacs knows about. By default, Emacs looks for theme les in two locations: the directory specied by the variable custom-theme-directory (which defaults to ~/.emacs.d/), and a directory named etc/themes in your Emacs installation (see the variable data-directory). The latter contains several Custom themes which are distributed with Emacs, which customize Emacss faces to t various color schemes. (Note, however, that Custom themes need not be restricted to this purpose; they can be used to customize variables too). If you want Emacs to look for Custom themes in some other directory, add the directory name to the list variable custom-theme-load-path. Its default value is (custom-theme-directory t); here, the symbol custom-theme-directory has the special meaning of the value of the variable custom-theme-directory, while t stands for the built-in theme directory etc/themes. The themes listed in the *Custom Themes* buer are those found in the directories specied by customtheme-load-path. In the *Custom Themes* buer, you can activate the checkbox next to a Custom theme to enable or disable the theme for the current Emacs session. When a Custom theme is enabled, all of its settings (variables and faces) take eect in the Emacs session. To apply the choice of theme(s) to future Emacs sessions, type C-x C-s (custom-theme-save) or use the [Save Theme Settings] button. When you rst enable a Custom theme, Emacs displays the contents of the theme le and asks if you really want to load it. Because loading a Custom theme can execute arbitrary Lisp code, you should only say yes if you know that the theme

Chapter 33: Customization

442

is safe; in that case, Emacs oers to remember in the future that the theme is safe (this is done by saving the theme les SHA-256 hash to the variable custom-safethemes; if you want to treat all themes as safe, change its value to t). Themes that come with Emacs (in the etc/themes directory) are exempt from this check, and are always considered safe. Setting or saving Custom themes actually works by customizing the variable custom-enabled-themes. The value of this variable is a list of Custom theme names (as Lisp symbols, e.g. tango). Instead of using the *Custom Themes* buer to set custom-enabled-themes, you can customize the variable using the usual customization interface, e.g. with M-x customize-option. Note that Custom themes are not allowed to set custom-enabled-themes themselves. Any customizations that you make through the customization buer take precedence over theme settings. This lets you easily override individual theme settings that you disagree with. If settings from two dierent themes overlap, the theme occurring earlier in custom-enabled-themes takes precedence. In the customization buer, if a setting has been changed from its default by a Custom theme, its State display shows THEMED instead of STANDARD. You can enable a specic Custom theme in the current Emacs session by typing M-x load-theme. This prompts for a theme name, loads the theme from the theme le, and enables it. If a theme le has been loaded before, you can enable the theme without loading its le by typing M-x enable-theme. To disable a Custom theme, type M-x disable-theme. To see a description of a Custom theme, type ? on its line in the *Custom Themes* buer; or type M-x describe-theme anywhere in Emacs and enter the theme name. 33.1.8 Creating Custom Themes You can dene a Custom theme using an interface similar to the customization buer, by typing M-x customize-create-theme. This switches to a buer named *Custom Theme*. It also oers to insert some common Emacs faces into the theme (a convenience, since Custom themes are often used to customize faces). If you answer no, the theme will initially contain no settings. Near the top of the *Custom Theme* buer are editable elds where you can enter the themes name and description. The name can be anything except user. The description is the one that will be shown when you invoke M-x describe-theme for the theme. Its rst line should be a brief one-sentence summary; in the buer made by M-x customize-themes, this sentence is displayed next to the theme name. To add a new setting to the theme, use the [Insert Additional Face] or [Insert Additional Variable] buttons. Each button reads a face or variable name using the minibuer, with completion, and inserts a customization entry for the face or variable. You can edit the variable values or face attributes in the same way as in a normal customization buer. To remove a face or variable from the theme, uncheck the checkbox next to its name. After specifying the Custom themes faces and variables, type C-x C-s (customtheme-write) or use the buers [Save Theme] button. This saves the theme le,

Chapter 33: Customization

443

named name-theme.el where name is the theme name, in the directory named by custom-theme-directory. From the *Custom Theme* buer, you can view and edit an existing Custom theme by activating the [Visit Theme] button and specifying the theme name. You can also add the settings of another theme into the buer, using the [Merge Theme] button. You can import your non-theme settings into a Custom theme by using the [Merge Theme] button and specifying the special theme named user. A theme le is simply an Emacs Lisp source le, and loading the Custom theme works by loading the Lisp le. Therefore, you can edit a theme le directly instead of using the *Custom Theme* buer. See Section Custom Themes in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for details.

33.2 Variables
A variable is a Lisp symbol which has a value. The symbols name is also called the variable name. A variable name can contain any characters that can appear in a le, but most variable names consist of ordinary words separated by hyphens. The name of the variable serves as a compact description of its role. Most variables also have a documentation string, which describes what the variables purpose is, what kind of value it should have, and how the value will be used. You can view this documentation using the help command C-h v (describe-variable). See Section 33.2.1 [Examining], page 443. Emacs uses many Lisp variables for internal record keeping, but the most interesting variables for a non-programmer user are those meant for users to change these are called customizable variables or user options (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). In the following sections, we will describe other aspects of Emacs variables, such as how to set them outside Customize. Emacs Lisp allows any variable (with a few exceptions) to have any kind of value. However, many variables are meaningful only if assigned values of a certain type. For example, only numbers are meaningful values for kill-ring-max, which species the maximum length of the kill ring (see Section 9.2.2 [Earlier Kills], page 58); if you give kill-ring-max a string value, commands such as C-y (yank) will signal an error. On the other hand, some variables dont care about type; for instance, if a variable has one eect for nil values and another eect for non-nil values, then any value that is not the symbol nil induces the second eect, regardless of its type (by convention, we usually use the value ta symbol which stands for trueto specify a non-nil value). If you set a variable using the customization buer, you need not worry about giving it an invalid type: the customization buer usually only allows you to enter meaningful values. When in doubt, use C-h v (describe-variable) to check the variables documentation string to see kind of value it expects (see Section 33.2.1 [Examining], page 443). 33.2.1 Examining and Setting Variables

Chapter 33: Customization

444

C-h v var RET Display the value and documentation of variable var (describevariable). M-x set-variable RET var RET value RET Change the value of variable var to value. To examine the value of a variable, use C-h v (describe-variable). This reads a variable name using the minibuer, with completion, and displays both the value and the documentation of the variable. For example, C-h v fill-column RET displays something like this: fill-column is a variable defined in C source code. fill-columns value is 70 Automatically becomes buffer-local when set in any fashion. This variable is safe as a file local variable if its value satisfies the predicate integerp. Documentation: Column beyond which automatic line-wrapping should happen. Interactively, you can set the local value with C-x f. You can customize this variable. The line that says You can customize the variable indicates that this variable is a user option. C-h v is not restricted to user options; it allows non-customizable variables too. The most convenient way to set a specic customizable variable is with M-x set-variable. This reads the variable name with the minibuer (with completion), and then reads a Lisp expression for the new value using the minibuer a second time (you can insert the old value into the minibuer for editing via M-n). For example, M-x set-variable RET fill-column RET 75 RET sets fill-column to 75. M-x set-variable is limited to customizable variables, but you can set any variable with a Lisp expression like this: (setq fill-column 75) To execute such an expression, type M-: (eval-expression) and enter the expression in the minibuer (see Section 24.9 [Lisp Eval], page 288). Alternatively, go to the *scratch* buer, type in the expression, and then type C-j (see Section 24.10 [Lisp Interaction], page 290). Setting variables, like all means of customizing Emacs except where otherwise stated, aects only the current Emacs session. The only way to alter the variable in future sessions is to put something in your initialization le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461).

Chapter 33: Customization 33.2.2 Hooks

445

Hooks are an important mechanism for customizing Emacs. A hook is a Lisp variable which holds a list of functions, to be called on some well-dened occasion. (This is called running the hook.) The individual functions in the list are called the hook functions of the hook. For example, the hook kill-emacs-hook runs just before exiting Emacs (see Section 3.2 [Exiting], page 15). Most hooks are normal hooks. This means that when Emacs runs the hook, it calls each hook function in turn, with no arguments. We have made an eort to keep most hooks normal, so that you can use them in a uniform way. Every variable whose name ends in -hook is a normal hook. A few hooks are abnormal hooks. Their names end in -hooks or -functions, instead of -hook. What makes these hooks abnormal is the way its functions are calledperhaps they are given arguments, or perhaps the values they return are used in some way. For example, find-file-not-found-functions is abnormal because as soon as one hook function returns a non-nil value, the rest are not called at all (see Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125). The documentation of each abnormal hook variable explains how its functions are used. You can set a hook variable with setq like any other Lisp variable, but the recommended way to add a function to a hook (either normal or abnormal) is to use add-hook, as shown by the following examples. See Section Hooks in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for details. Most major modes run one or more mode hooks as the last step of initialization. Mode hooks are a convenient way to customize the behavior of individual modes; they are always normal. For example, heres how to set up a hook to turn on Auto Fill mode in Text mode and other modes based on Text mode: (add-hook text-mode-hook auto-fill-mode) This works by calling auto-fill-mode, which enables the minor mode when no argument is supplied (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). Next, suppose you dont want Auto Fill mode turned on in LaTEX mode, which is one of the modes based on Text mode. You can do this with the following additional line: (add-hook latex-mode-hook (lambda () (auto-fill-mode -1))) Here we have used the special macro lambda to construct an anonymous function (see Section Lambda Expressions in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ), which calls auto-fill-mode with an argument of -1 to disable the minor mode. Because LaTEX mode runs latex-mode-hook after running text-mode-hook, the result leaves Auto Fill mode disabled. Here is a more complex example, showing how to use a hook to customize the indentation of C code: (setq my-c-style ((c-comment-only-line-offset . 4) (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator empty-defun-braces defun-close-semi))))

Chapter 33: Customization

446

(add-hook c-mode-common-hook (lambda () (c-add-style "my-style" my-c-style t))) Major mode hooks also apply to other major modes derived from the original mode (see Section Derived Modes in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). For instance, HTML mode is derived from Text mode (see Section 22.11 [HTML Mode], page 236); when HTML mode is enabled, it runs text-mode-hook before running html-mode-hook. This provides a convenient way to use a single hook to aect several related modes. In particular, if you want to apply a hook function to any programming language mode, add it to prog-mode-hook; Prog mode is a major mode that does little else than to let other major modes inherit from it, exactly for this purpose. It is best to design your hook functions so that the order in which they are executed does not matter. Any dependence on the order is asking for trouble. However, the order is predictable: the hook functions are executed in the order they appear in the hook. If you play with adding various dierent versions of a hook function by calling add-hook over and over, remember that all the versions you added will remain in the hook variable together. You can clear out individual functions by calling remove-hook, or do (setq hook-variable nil) to remove everything. If the hook variable is buer-local, the buer-local variable will be used instead of the global variable. However, if the buer-local variable contains the element t, the global hook variable will be run as well. 33.2.3 Local Variables M-x make-local-variable RET var RET Make variable var have a local value in the current buer. M-x kill-local-variable RET var RET Make variable var use its global value in the current buer. M-x make-variable-buffer-local RET var RET Mark variable var so that setting it will make it local to the buer that is current at that time. Almost any variable can be made local to a specic Emacs buer. This means that its value in that buer is independent of its value in other buers. A few variables are always local in every buer. Every other Emacs variable has a global value which is in eect in all buers that have not made the variable local. M-x make-local-variable reads the name of a variable and makes it local to the current buer. Changing its value subsequently in this buer will not aect others, and changes in its global value will not aect this buer. M-x make-variable-buffer-local marks a variable so it will become local automatically whenever it is set. More precisely, once a variable has been marked in this way, the usual ways of setting the variable automatically do make-localvariable rst. We call such variables per-buer variables. Many variables in Emacs are normally per-buer; the variables document string tells you when this

Chapter 33: Customization

447

is so. A per-buer variables global value is normally never eective in any buer, but it still has a meaning: it is the initial value of the variable for each new buer. Major modes (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204) always make variables local to the buer before setting the variables. This is why changing major modes in one buer has no eect on other buers. Minor modes also work by setting variablesnormally, each minor mode has one controlling variable which is non-nil when the mode is enabled (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). For many minor modes, the controlling variable is per buer, and thus always buer-local. Otherwise, you can make it local in a specic buer like any other variable. A few variables cannot be local to a buer because they are always local to each display instead (see Section 18.10 [Multiple Displays], page 175). If you try to make one of these variables buer-local, youll get an error message. M-x kill-local-variable makes a specied variable cease to be local to the current buer. The global value of the variable henceforth is in eect in this buer. Setting the major mode kills all the local variables of the buer except for a few variables specially marked as permanent locals. To set the global value of a variable, regardless of whether the variable has a local value in the current buer, you can use the Lisp construct setq-default. This construct is used just like setq, but it sets variables global values instead of their local values (if any). When the current buer does have a local value, the new global value may not be visible until you switch to another buer. Here is an example: (setq-default fill-column 75) setq-default is the only way to set the global value of a variable that has been marked with make-variable-buffer-local. Lisp programs can use default-value to look at a variables default value. This function takes a symbol as argument and returns its default value. The argument is evaluated; usually you must quote it explicitly. For example, heres how to obtain the default value of fill-column: (default-value fill-column) 33.2.4 Local Variables in Files A le can specify local variable values to use when editing the le with Emacs. Visiting the le checks for local variable specications; it automatically makes these variables local to the buer, and sets them to the values specied in the le. 33.2.4.1 Specifying File Variables There are two ways to specify le local variable values: in the rst line, or with a local variables list. Heres how to specify them in the rst line: -*- mode: modename ; var : value ; ... -*You can specify any number of variable/value pairs in this way, each pair with a colon and semicolon. The special variable/value pair mode: modename ;, if present, species a major mode. The value s are used literally, and not evaluated.

Chapter 33: Customization

448

You can use M-x add-file-local-variable-prop-line instead of adding entries by hand. This command prompts for a variable and value, and adds them to the rst line in the appropriate way. M-x delete-file-local-variable-prop-line prompts for a variable, and deletes its entry from the line. The command M-x copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals-prop-line copies the current directory-local variables to the rst line (see Section 33.2.5 [Directory Variables], page 450). Here is an example rst line that species Lisp mode and sets two variables with numeric values:
;; -*- mode: Lisp; fill-column: 75; comment-column: 50; -*-

Aside from mode, other keywords that have special meanings as le variables are coding, unibyte, and eval. These are described below. In shell scripts, the rst line is used to identify the script interpreter, so you cannot put any local variables there. To accommodate this, Emacs looks for local variable specications in the second line if the rst line species an interpreter. The same is true for man pages which start with the magic string \" to specify a list of tro preprocessors (not all do, however). Apart from using a -*- line, you can dene le local variables using a local variables list near the end of the le. The start of the local variables list should be no more than 3000 characters from the end of the le, and must be on the last page if the le is divided into pages. If a le has both a local variables list and a -*- line, Emacs processes everything in the -*- line rst, and everything in the local variables list afterward. The exception to this is a major mode specication. Emacs applies this rst, wherever it appears, since most major modes kill all local variables as part of their initialization. A local variables list starts with a line containing the string Local Variables:, and ends with a line containing the string End:. In between come the variable names and values, one set per line, like this: /* Local Variables: */ /* mode: c */ /* comment-column: 0 */ /* End: */ In this example, each line starts with the prex /* and ends with the sux */. Emacs recognizes the prex and sux by nding them surrounding the magic string Local Variables:, on the rst line of the list; it then automatically discards them from the other lines of the list. The usual reason for using a prex and/or sux is to embed the local variables list in a comment, so it wont confuse other programs that the le is intended for. The example above is for the C programming language, where comments start with /* and end with */. Instead of typing in the local variables list directly, you can use the command M-x add-file-local-variable. This prompts for a variable and value, and adds them to the list, adding the Local Variables: string and start and end markers as necessary. The command M-x delete-file-local-variable deletes a variable from the list. M-x copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals copies directory-local variables to the list (see Section 33.2.5 [Directory Variables], page 450).

Chapter 33: Customization

449

As with the -*- line, the variables in a local variables list are used literally, and are not evaluated rst. If you want to split a long string value across multiple lines of the le, you can use backslash-newline, which is ignored in Lisp string constants; you should put the prex and sux on each line, even lines that start or end within the string, as they will be stripped o when processing the list. Here is an example: # Local Variables: # compile-command: "cc foo.c -Dfoo=bar -Dhack=whatever \ # -Dmumble=blaah" # End: Some variable names have special meanings in a local variables list: mode enables the specied major mode. eval evaluates the specied Lisp expression (the value returned by that expression is ignored). coding species the coding system for character code conversion of this le. See Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188. unibyte says to load or compile a le of Emacs Lisp in unibyte mode, if the value is t. See Section 19.2 [Disabling Multibyte], page 182. These four keywords are not really variables; setting them in any other context has no special meaning. Do not use the mode keyword for minor modes. To enable or disable a minor mode in a local variables list, use the eval keyword with a Lisp expression that runs the mode command (see Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205). For example, the following local variables list enables Eldoc mode (see Section 23.6.3 [Lisp Doc], page 263) by calling eldoc-mode with no argument (calling it with an argument of 1 would do the same), and disables Font Lock mode (see Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80) by calling font-lock-mode with an argument of -1. ;; Local Variables: ;; eval: (eldoc-mode) ;; eval: (font-lock-mode -1) ;; End: Note, however, that it is often a mistake to specify minor modes this way. Minor modes represent individual user preferences, and it may be inappropriate to impose your preferences on another user who might edit the le. If you wish to automatically enable or disable a minor mode in a situation-dependent way, it is often better to do it in a major mode hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). Use the command M-x normal-mode to reset the local variables and major mode of a buer according to the le name and contents, including the local variables list if any. See Section 20.3 [Choosing Modes], page 207. 33.2.4.2 Safety of File Variables File-local variables can be dangerous; when you visit someone elses le, theres no telling what its local variables list could do to your Emacs. Improper values of the eval variable, and other variables such as load-path, could execute Lisp code you didnt intend to run.

Chapter 33: Customization

450

Therefore, whenever Emacs encounters le local variable values that are not known to be safe, it displays the les entire local variables list, and asks you for conrmation before setting them. You can type y or SPC to put the local variables list into eect, or n to ignore it. When Emacs is run in batch mode (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507), it cant really ask you, so it assumes the answer n. Emacs normally recognizes certain variable/value pairs as safe. For instance, it is safe to give comment-column or fill-column any integer value. If a le species only known-safe variable/value pairs, Emacs does not ask for conrmation before setting them. Otherwise, you can tell Emacs to record all the variable/value pairs in this le as safe, by typing ! at the conrmation prompt. When Emacs encounters these variable/value pairs subsequently, in the same le or others, it will assume they are safe. Some variables, such as load-path, are considered particularly risky : there is seldom any reason to specify them as local variables, and changing them can be dangerous. If a le contains only risky local variables, Emacs neither oers nor accepts ! as input at the conrmation prompt. If some of the local variables in a le are risky, and some are only potentially unsafe, you can enter ! at the prompt. It applies all the variables, but only marks the non-risky ones as safe for the future. If you really want to record safe values for risky variables, do it directly by customizing safe-local-variable-values (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). The variable enable-local-variables allows you to change the way Emacs processes local variables. Its default value is t, which species the behavior described above. If it is nil, Emacs simply ignores all le local variables. :safe means use only the safe values and ignore the rest. Any other value says to query you about each le that has local variables, without trying to determine whether the values are known to be safe. The variable enable-local-eval controls whether Emacs processes eval variables. The three possibilities for the variables value are t, nil, and anything else, just as for enable-local-variables. The default is maybe, which is neither t nor nil, so normally Emacs does ask for conrmation about processing eval variables. As an exception, Emacs never asks for conrmation to evaluate any eval form if that form occurs within the variable safe-local-eval-forms. 33.2.5 Per-Directory Local Variables Sometimes, you may wish to dene the same set of local variables to all the les in a certain directory and its subdirectories, such as the directory tree of a large software project. This can be accomplished with directory-local variables. The usual way to dene directory-local variables is to put a le named .dir-locals.el1 in a directory. Whenever Emacs visits any le in that directory or any of its subdirectories, it will apply the directory-local variables specied in .dir-locals.el, as though they had been dened as le-local variables
1

On MS-DOS, the name of this le should be _dir-locals.el, due to limitations of the DOS lesystems. If the lesystem is limited to 8+3 le names, the name of the le will be truncated by the OS to _dir-loc.el.

Chapter 33: Customization

451

for that le (see Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447). Emacs searches for .dir-locals.el starting in the directory of the visited le, and moving up the directory tree. To avoid slowdown, this search is skipped for remote les. The .dir-locals.el le should hold a specially-constructed list, which maps major mode names (symbols) to alists (see Section Association Lists in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). Each alist entry consists of a variable name and the directory-local value to assign to that variable, when the specied major mode is enabled. Instead of a mode name, you can specify nil, which means that the alist applies to any mode; or you can specify a subdirectory name (a string), in which case the alist applies to all les in that subdirectory. Heres an example of a .dir-locals.el le: ((nil . ((indent-tabs-mode . t) (fill-column . 80))) (c-mode . ((c-file-style . "BSD"))) (subdirs . nil))) ("src/imported" . ((nil . ((change-log-default-name . "ChangeLog.local")))))) This sets indent-tabs-mode and fill-column for any le in the directory tree, and the indentation style for any C source le. The special subdirs element is not a variable, but a special keyword which indicates that the C mode settings are only to be applied in the current directory, not in any subdirectories. Finally, it species a dierent ChangeLog le name for any le in the src/imported subdirectory. Instead of editing the .dir-locals.el le by hand, you can use the command M-x add-dir-local-variable. This prompts for a mode or subdirectory name, and for variable and value, and adds the entry dening the directory-local variable. M-x delete-dir-local-variable deletes an entry. M-x copy-file-locals-to-dir-locals copies the le-local variables in the current le into .dir-locals.el. Another method of specifying directory-local variables is to dene a group of variables/value pairs in a directory class, using the dir-locals-set-classvariables function; then, tell Emacs which directories correspond to the class by using the dir-locals-set-directory-class function. These function calls normally go in your initialization le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). This method is useful when you cant put .dir-locals.el in a directory for some reason. For example, you could apply settings to an unwritable directory this way: (dir-locals-set-class-variables unwritable-directory ((nil . ((some-useful-setting . value))))) (dir-locals-set-directory-class "/usr/include/" unwritable-directory) If a variable has both a directory-local and le-local value specied, the le-local value takes eect. Unsafe directory-local variables are handled in the same way as unsafe le-local variables (see Section 33.2.4.2 [Safe File Variables], page 449).

Chapter 33: Customization

452

Directory-local variables also take eect in certain buers that do not visit a le directly but perform work within a directory, such as Dired buers (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329).

33.3 Customizing Key Bindings

This section describes key bindings, which map keys to commands, and keymaps, which record key bindings. It also explains how to customize key bindings, which is done by editing your init le (see Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455). 33.3.1 Keymaps As described in Section 2.3 [Commands], page 12, each Emacs command is a Lisp function whose denition provides for interactive use. Like every Lisp function, a command has a function name, which usually consists of lower-case letters and hyphens. A key sequence (key, for short) is a sequence of input events that have a meaning as a unit. Input events include characters, function keys and mouse buttonsall the inputs that you can send to the computer. A key sequence gets its meaning from its binding, which says what command it runs. The bindings between key sequences and command functions are recorded in data structures called keymaps. Emacs has many of these, each used on particular occasions. The global keymap is the most important keymap because it is always in eect. The global keymap denes keys for Fundamental mode (see Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204); most of these denitions are common to most or all major modes. Each major or minor mode can have its own keymap which overrides the global denitions of some keys. For example, a self-inserting character such as g is self-inserting because the global keymap binds it to the command self-insert-command. The standard Emacs editing characters such as C-a also get their standard meanings from the global keymap. Commands to rebind keys, such as M-x global-set-key, work by storing the new binding in the proper place in the global map (see Section 33.3.5 [Rebinding], page 454). Most modern keyboards have function keys as well as character keys. Function keys send input events just as character keys do, and keymaps can have bindings for them. Key sequences can mix function keys and characters. For example, if your keyboard has a HOME function key, Emacs can recognize key sequences like C-x HOME. You can even mix mouse events with keyboard events, such as S-down-mouse-1. On text terminals, typing a function key actually sends the computer a sequence of characters; the precise details of the sequence depends on the function key and on the terminal type. (Often the sequence starts with ESC [.) If Emacs understands your terminal type properly, it automatically handles such sequences as single input events.

Chapter 33: Customization 33.3.2 Prex Keymaps

453

Internally, Emacs records only single events in each keymap. Interpreting a key sequence of multiple events involves a chain of keymaps: the rst keymap gives a denition for the rst event, which is another keymap, which is used to look up the second event in the sequence, and so on. Thus, a prex key such as C-x or ESC has its own keymap, which holds the denition for the event that immediately follows that prex. The denition of a prex key is usually the keymap to use for looking up the following event. The denition can also be a Lisp symbol whose function denition is the following keymap; the eect is the same, but it provides a command name for the prex key that can be used as a description of what the prex key is for. Thus, the binding of C-x is the symbol Control-X-prefix, whose function denition is the keymap for C-x commands. The denitions of C-c, C-x, C-h and ESC as prex keys appear in the global map, so these prex keys are always available. Aside from ordinary prex keys, there is a ctitious prex key which represents the menu bar; see Section Menu Bar in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for special information about menu bar key bindings. Mouse button events that invoke pop-up menus are also prex keys; see Section Menu Keymaps in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for more details. Some prex keymaps are stored in variables with names: ctl-x-map is the variable name for the map used for characters that follow C-x. help-map is for characters that follow C-h. esc-map is for characters that follow ESC. Thus, all Meta characters are actually dened by this map. ctl-x-4-map is for characters that follow C-x 4. mode-specific-map is for characters that follow C-c. 33.3.3 Local Keymaps So far, we have explained the ins and outs of the global map. Major modes customize Emacs by providing their own key bindings in local keymaps. For example, C mode overrides TAB to make it indent the current line for C code. Minor modes can also have local keymaps; whenever a minor mode is in eect, the denitions in its keymap override both the major modes local keymap and the global keymap. In addition, portions of text in the buer can specify their own keymaps, which override all other keymaps. A local keymap can redene a key as a prex key by dening it as a prex keymap. If the key is also dened globally as a prex, its local and global denitions (both keymaps) eectively combine: both denitions are used to look up the event that follows the prex key. For example, if a local keymap denes C-c as a prex keymap, and that keymap denes C-z as a command, this provides a local meaning for C-c C-z. This does not aect other sequences that start with C-c; if those sequences dont have their own local bindings, their global bindings remain in eect.

Chapter 33: Customization

454

Another way to think of this is that Emacs handles a multi-event key sequence by looking in several keymaps, one by one, for a binding of the whole key sequence. First it checks the minor mode keymaps for minor modes that are enabled, then it checks the major modes keymap, and then it checks the global keymap. This is not precisely how key lookup works, but its good enough for understanding the results in ordinary circumstances. 33.3.4 Minibuer Keymaps The minibuer has its own set of local keymaps; they contain various completion and exit commands. minibuffer-local-map is used for ordinary input (no completion). minibuffer-local-ns-map is similar, except that SPC exits just like RET. minibuffer-local-completion-map is for permissive completion. minibuffer-local-must-match-map is for strict completion and for cautious completion. minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map and minibuffer-localfilename-must-match-map are like the two previous ones, but they are specically for le name completion. They do not bind SPC. 33.3.5 Changing Key Bindings Interactively The way to redene an Emacs key is to change its entry in a keymap. You can change the global keymap, in which case the change is eective in all major modes (except those that have their own overriding local bindings for the same key). Or you can change a local keymap, which aects all buers using the same major mode. In this section, we describe how to rebind keys for the present Emacs session. See Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455, for a description of how to make key rebindings aect future Emacs sessions. M-x global-set-key RET key cmd RET Dene key globally to run cmd. M-x local-set-key RET key cmd RET Dene key locally (in the major mode now in eect) to run cmd. M-x global-unset-key RET key Make key undened in the global map. M-x local-unset-key RET key Make key undened locally (in the major mode now in eect). For example, the following binds C-z to the shell command (see Section 31.3.2 [Interactive Shell], page 403), replacing the normal global denition of C-z: M-x global-set-key RET C-z shell RET The global-set-key command reads the command name after the key. After you press the key, a message like this appears so that you can conrm that you are binding the key you want:

Chapter 33: Customization

455

Set key C-z to command: You can redene function keys and mouse events in the same way; just type the function key or click the mouse when its time to specify the key to rebind. You can rebind a key that contains more than one event in the same way. Emacs keeps reading the key to rebind until it is a complete key (that is, not a prex key). Thus, if you type C-f for key, thats the end; it enters the minibuer immediately to read cmd. But if you type C-x, since thats a prex, it reads another character; if that is 4, another prex character, it reads one more character, and so on. For example, M-x global-set-key RET C-x 4 $ spell-other-window RET redenes C-x 4 $ to run the (ctitious) command spell-other-window. You can remove the global denition of a key with global-unset-key. This makes the key undened ; if you type it, Emacs will just beep. Similarly, localunset-key makes a key undened in the current major mode keymap, which makes the global denition (or lack of one) come back into eect in that major mode. If you have redened (or undened) a key and you subsequently wish to retract the change, undening the key will not do the jobyou need to redene the key with its standard denition. To nd the name of the standard denition of a key, go to a Fundamental mode buer in a fresh Emacs and use C-h c. The documentation of keys in this manual also lists their command names. If you want to prevent yourself from invoking a command by mistake, it is better to disable the command than to undene the key. A disabled command is less work to invoke when you really want to. See Section 33.3.11 [Disabling], page 460. 33.3.6 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File If you have a set of key bindings that you like to use all the time, you can specify them in your initialization le by writing Lisp code. See Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461, for a description of the initialization le. There are several ways to write a key binding using Lisp. The simplest is to use the kbd macro, which converts a textual representation of a key sequencesimilar to how we have written key sequences in this manualinto a form that can be passed as an argument to global-set-key. For example, heres how to bind C-z to the shell command (see Section 31.3.2 [Interactive Shell], page 403): (global-set-key (kbd "C-z") shell) The single-quote before the command name, shell, marks it as a constant symbol rather than a variable. If you omit the quote, Emacs would try to evaluate shell as a variable. This probably causes an error; it certainly isnt what you want. Here are some additional examples, including binding function keys and mouse events: (global-set-key (kbd "C-c y") clipboard-yank) (global-set-key (kbd "C-M-q") query-replace) (global-set-key (kbd "<f5>") flyspell-mode) (global-set-key (kbd "C-<f5>") linum-mode) (global-set-key (kbd "C-<right>") forward-sentence)

Chapter 33: Customization

456

(global-set-key (kbd "<mouse-2>") mouse-save-then-kill) Instead of using the kbd macro, you can use a Lisp string or vector to specify the key sequence. Using a string is simpler, but only works for ASCII characters and Meta-modied ASCII characters. For example, heres how to bind C-x M-l to make-symbolic-link (see Section 15.10 [Misc File Ops], page 143): (global-set-key "\C-x\M-l" make-symbolic-link) To put TAB, RET, ESC, or DEL in the string, use the Emacs Lisp escape sequences \t, \r, \e, and \d respectively. Here is an example which binds C-x TAB to indent-rigidly (see Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210): (global-set-key "\C-x\t" indent-rigidly) When the key sequence includes function keys or mouse button events, or nonASCII characters such as C-= or H-a, you can use a vector to specify the key sequence. Each element in the vector stands for an input event; the elements are separated by spaces and surrounded by a pair of square brackets. If a vector element is a character, write it as a Lisp character constant: ? followed by the character as it would appear in a string. Function keys are represented by symbols (see Section 33.3.8 [Function Keys], page 457); simply write the symbols name, with no other delimiters or punctuation. Here are some examples: (global-set-key [?\C-=] make-symbolic-link) (global-set-key [?\M-\C-=] make-symbolic-link) (global-set-key [?\H-a] make-symbolic-link) (global-set-key [f7] make-symbolic-link) (global-set-key [C-mouse-1] make-symbolic-link) You can use a vector for the simple cases too: (global-set-key [?\C-z ?\M-l] make-symbolic-link) Language and coding systems may cause problems with key bindings for nonASCII characters. See Section 33.4.5 [Init Non-ASCII], page 466. As described in Section 33.3.3 [Local Keymaps], page 453, major modes and minor modes can dene local keymaps. These keymaps are constructed when the mode is used for the rst time in a session. If you wish to change one of these keymaps, you must use the mode hook (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). For example, Texinfo mode runs the hook texinfo-mode-hook. Heres how you can use the hook to add local bindings for C-c n and C-c p in Texinfo mode: (add-hook texinfo-mode-hook (lambda () (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-cp" backward-paragraph) (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-cn" forward-paragraph))) 33.3.7 Modier Keys The default key bindings in Emacs are set up so that modied alphabetical characters are case-insensitive. In other words, C-A does the same thing as C-a, and M-A does the same thing as M-a. This concerns only alphabetical characters, and does

Chapter 33: Customization

457

not apply to shifted versions of other keys; for instance, C-@ is not the same as C-2. A CONTROL-modied alphabetical character is always considered caseinsensitive: Emacs always treats C-A as C-a, C-B as C-b, and so forth. The reason for this is historical. For all other modiers, you can make the modied alphabetical characters casesensitive when you customize Emacs. For instance, you could make M-a and M-A run dierent commands. Although only the CONTROL and META modier keys are commonly used, Emacs supports three other modier keys. These are called SUPER, HYPER and ALT. Few terminals provide ways to use these modiers; the key labeled ALT on most keyboards usually issues the META modier, not ALT. The standard key bindings in Emacs do not include any characters with these modiers. However, you can customize Emacs to assign meanings to them. The modier bits are labeled as s-, H- and A- respectively. Even if your keyboard lacks these additional modier keys, you can enter it using C-x @: C-x @ h adds the hyper ag to the next character, C-x @ s adds the super ag, and C-x @ a adds the alt ag. For instance, C-x @ h C-a is a way to enter Hyper-Control-a. (Unfortunately, there is no way to add two modiers by using C-x @ twice for the same character, because the rst one goes to work on the C-x.) 33.3.8 Rebinding Function Keys Key sequences can contain function keys as well as ordinary characters. Just as Lisp characters (actually integers) represent keyboard characters, Lisp symbols represent function keys. If the function key has a word as its label, then that word is also the name of the corresponding Lisp symbol. Here are the conventional Lisp names for common function keys: left, up, right, down Cursor arrow keys. begin, end, home, next, prior Other cursor repositioning keys. select, print, execute, backtab insert, undo, redo, clearline insertline, deleteline, insertchar, deletechar Miscellaneous function keys. f1, f2, . . . f35 Numbered function keys (across the top of the keyboard). kp-add, kp-subtract, kp-multiply, kp-divide kp-backtab, kp-space, kp-tab, kp-enter kp-separator, kp-decimal, kp-equal Keypad keys (to the right of the regular keyboard), with names or punctuation.

Chapter 33: Customization kp-0, kp-1, . . . kp-9 Keypad keys with digits. kp-f1, kp-f2, kp-f3, kp-f4 Keypad PF keys.

458

These names are conventional, but some systems (especially when using X) may use dierent names. To make certain what symbol is used for a given function key on your terminal, type C-h c followed by that key. See Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455, for examples of binding function keys. Many keyboards have a numeric keypad on the right hand side. The numeric keys in the keypad double up as cursor motion keys, toggled by a key labeled Num Lock. By default, Emacs translates these keys to the corresponding keys in the main keyboard. For example, when Num Lock is on, the key labeled 8 on the numeric keypad produces kp-8, which is translated to 8; when Num Lock is o, the same key produces kp-up, which is translated to UP. If you rebind a key such as 8 or UP, it aects the equivalent keypad key too. However, if you rebind a kp- key directly, that wont aect its non-keypad equivalent. Note that the modied keys are not translated: for instance, if you hold down the META key while pressing the 8 key on the numeric keypad, that generates M-KP-8. Emacs provides a convenient method for binding the numeric keypad keys, using the variables keypad-setup, keypad-numlock-setup, keypad-shifted-setup, and keypad-numlock-shifted-setup. These can be found in the keyboard customization group (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). You can rebind the keys to perform other tasks, such as issuing numeric prex arguments. 33.3.9 Named ASCII Control Characters TAB, RET, BS, LFD, ESC and DEL started out as names for certain ASCII control characters, used so often that they have special keys of their own. For instance, TAB was another name for C-i. Later, users found it convenient to distinguish in Emacs between these keys and the same control characters typed with the CTRL key. Therefore, on most modern terminals, they are no longer the same: TAB is dierent from C-i. Emacs can distinguish these two kinds of input if the keyboard does. It treats the special keys as function keys named tab, return, backspace, linefeed, escape, and delete. These function keys translate automatically into the corresponding ASCII characters if they have no bindings of their own. As a result, neither users nor Lisp programs need to pay attention to the distinction unless they care to. If you do not want to distinguish between (for example) TAB and C-i, make just one binding, for the ASCII character TAB (octal code 011). If you do want to distinguish, make one binding for this ASCII character, and another for the function key tab. With an ordinary ASCII terminal, there is no way to distinguish between TAB and C-i (and likewise for other such pairs), because the terminal sends the same character in both cases.

Chapter 33: Customization 33.3.10 Rebinding Mouse Buttons

459

Emacs uses Lisp symbols to designate mouse buttons, too. The ordinary mouse events in Emacs are click events; these happen when you press a button and release it without moving the mouse. You can also get drag events, when you move the mouse while holding the button down. Drag events happen when you nally let go of the button. The symbols for basic click events are mouse-1 for the leftmost button, mouse-2 for the next, and so on. Here is how you can redene the second mouse button to split the current window: (global-set-key [mouse-2] split-window-below) The symbols for drag events are similar, but have the prex drag- before the word mouse. For example, dragging the rst button generates a drag-mouse-1 event. You can also dene bindings for events that occur when a mouse button is pressed down. These events start with down- instead of drag-. Such events are generated only if they have key bindings. When you get a button-down event, a corresponding click or drag event will always follow. If you wish, you can distinguish single, double, and triple clicks. A double click means clicking a mouse button twice in approximately the same place. The rst click generates an ordinary click event. The second click, if it comes soon enough, generates a double-click event instead. The event type for a double-click event starts with double-: for example, double-mouse-3. This means that you can give a special meaning to the second click at the same place, but it must act on the assumption that the ordinary single click denition has run when the rst click was received. This constrains what you can do with double clicks, but user interface designers say that this constraint ought to be followed in any case. A double click should do something similar to the single click, only more so. The command for the double-click event should perform the extra work for the double click. If a double-click event has no binding, it changes to the corresponding singleclick event. Thus, if you dont dene a particular double click specially, it executes the single-click command twice. Emacs also supports triple-click events whose names start with triple-. Emacs does not distinguish quadruple clicks as event types; clicks beyond the third generate additional triple-click events. However, the full number of clicks is recorded in the event list, so if you know Emacs Lisp you can distinguish if you really want to (see Section Click Events in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). We dont recommend distinct meanings for more than three clicks, but sometimes it is useful for subsequent clicks to cycle through the same set of three meanings, so that four clicks are equivalent to one click, ve are equivalent to two, and six are equivalent to three. Emacs also records multiple presses in drag and button-down events. For example, when you press a button twice, then move the mouse while holding the button, Emacs gets a double-drag- event. And at the moment when you press it down

Chapter 33: Customization

460

for the second time, Emacs gets a double-down- event (which is ignored, like all button-down events, if it has no binding). The variable double-click-time species how much time can elapse between clicks and still allow them to be grouped as a multiple click. Its value is in units of milliseconds. If the value is nil, double clicks are not detected at all. If the value is t, then there is no time limit. The default is 500. The variable double-click-fuzz species how much the mouse can move between clicks and still allow them to be grouped as a multiple click. Its value is in units of pixels on windowed displays and in units of 1/8 of a character cell on text-mode terminals; the default is 3. The symbols for mouse events also indicate the status of the modier keys, with the usual prexes C-, M-, H-, s-, A- and S-. These always precede double- or triple-, which always precede drag- or down-. A frame includes areas that dont show text from the buer, such as the mode line and the scroll bar. You can tell whether a mouse button comes from a special area of the screen by means of dummy prex keys. For example, if you click the mouse in the mode line, you get the prex key mode-line before the ordinary mouse-button symbol. Thus, here is how to dene the command for clicking the rst button in a mode line to run scroll-up-command: (global-set-key [mode-line mouse-1] scroll-up-command) Here is the complete list of these dummy prex keys and their meanings: mode-line The mouse was in the mode line of a window.

vertical-line The mouse was in the vertical line separating side-by-side windows. (If you use scroll bars, they appear in place of these vertical lines.) vertical-scroll-bar The mouse was in a vertical scroll bar. (This is the only kind of scroll bar Emacs currently supports.) menu-bar header-line The mouse was in a header line. You can put more than one mouse button in a key sequence, but it isnt usual to do so. 33.3.11 Disabling Commands Disabling a command means that invoking it interactively asks for conrmation from the user. The purpose of disabling a command is to prevent users from executing it by accident; we do this for commands that might be confusing to the uninitiated. Attempting to invoke a disabled command interactively in Emacs displays a window containing the commands name, its documentation, and some instructions on what to do immediately; then Emacs asks for input saying whether to execute the command as requested, enable it and execute it, or cancel. If you decide The mouse was in the menu bar.

Chapter 33: Customization

461

to enable the command, you must then answer another questionwhether to do this permanently, or just for the current session. (Enabling permanently works by automatically editing your initialization le.) You can also type ! to enable all commands, for the current session only. The direct mechanism for disabling a command is to put a non-nil disabled property on the Lisp symbol for the command. Here is the Lisp program to do this: (put delete-region disabled t) If the value of the disabled property is a string, that string is included in the message displayed when the command is used: (put delete-region disabled "Its better to use kill-region instead.\n") You can make a command disabled either by editing the initialization le directly, or with the command M-x disable-command, which edits the initialization le for you. Likewise, M-x enable-command edits the initialization le to enable a command permanently. See Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461. If Emacs was invoked with the -q or --no-init-file options (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507), it will not edit your initialization le. Doing so could lose information because Emacs has not read your initialization le. Whether a command is disabled is independent of what key is used to invoke it; disabling also applies if the command is invoked using M-x. However, disabling a command has no eect on calling it as a function from Lisp programs.

33.4 The Emacs Initialization File

When Emacs is started, it normally tries to load a Lisp program from an initialization le, or init le for short. This le, if it exists, species how to initialize Emacs for you. Emacs looks for your init le using the lenames ~/.emacs, ~/.emacs.el, or ~/.emacs.d/init.el; you can choose to use any one of these three names (see Section 33.4.4 [Find Init], page 466). Here, ~/ stands for your home directory. You can use the command line switch -q to prevent loading your init le, and -u (or --user) to specify a dierent users init le (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507). There can also be a default init le, which is the library named default.el, found via the standard search path for libraries. The Emacs distribution contains no such library; your site may create one for local customizations. If this library exists, it is loaded whenever you start Emacs (except when you specify -q). But your init le, if any, is loaded rst; if it sets inhibit-default-init non-nil, then default is not loaded. Your site may also have a site startup le ; this is named site-start.el, if it exists. Like default.el, Emacs nds this le via the standard search path for Lisp libraries. Emacs loads this library before it loads your init le. To inhibit loading of this library, use the option --no-site-file. See Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507. We recommend against using site-start.el for changes that

Chapter 33: Customization

462

some users may not like. It is better to put them in default.el, so that users can more easily override them. You can place default.el and site-start.el in any of the directories which Emacs searches for Lisp libraries. The variable load-path (see Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287) species these directories. Many sites put these les in the site-lisp subdirectory of the Emacs installation directory, typically /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. Byte-compiling your init le is not recommended (see Section Byte Compilation in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual ). It generally does not speed up startup very much, and often leads to problems when you forget to recompile the le. A better solution is to use the Emacs server to reduce the number of times you have to start Emacs (see Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412). If your init le denes many functions, consider moving them to a separate (byte-compiled) le that you load in your init le. If you are going to write actual Emacs Lisp programs that go beyond minor customization, you should read the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual. 33.4.1 Init File Syntax The init le contains one or more Lisp expressions. Each of these consists of a function name followed by arguments, all surrounded by parentheses. For example, (setq fill-column 60) calls the function setq to set the variable fill-column (see Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218) to 60. You can set any Lisp variable with setq, but with certain variables setq wont do what you probably want in the .emacs le. Some variables automatically become buer-local when set with setq; what you want in .emacs is to set the default value, using setq-default. Some customizable minor mode variables do special things to enable the mode when you set them with Customize, but ordinary setq wont do that; to enable the mode in your .emacs le, call the minor mode command. The following section has examples of both of these methods. The second argument to setq is an expression for the new value of the variable. This can be a constant, a variable, or a function call expression. In .emacs, constants are used most of the time. They can be: Numbers: Strings: Numbers are written in decimal, with an optional initial minus sign. Lisp string syntax is the same as C string syntax with a few extra features. Use a double-quote character to begin and end a string constant. In a string, you can include newlines and special characters literally. But often it is cleaner to use backslash sequences for them: \n for newline, \b for backspace, \r for carriage return, \t for tab, \f for formfeed (control-L), \e for escape, \\ for a backslash, \" for a double-quote, or \ooo for the character whose octal code is ooo. Backslash and double-quote are the only characters for which backslash sequences are mandatory.

Chapter 33: Customization

463

\C- can be used as a prex for a control character, as in \C-s for ASCII control-S, and \M- can be used as a prex for a Meta character, as in \M-a for Meta-A or \M-\C-a for Control-Meta-A. See Section 33.4.5 [Init Non-ASCII], page 466, for information about including non-ASCII in your init le. Characters: Lisp character constant syntax consists of a ? followed by either a character or an escape sequence starting with \. Examples: ?x, ?\n, ?\", ?\). Note that strings and characters are not interchangeable in Lisp; some contexts require one and some contexts require the other. See Section 33.4.5 [Init Non-ASCII], page 466, for information about binding commands to keys which send non-ASCII characters. True: False: t stands for true. nil stands for false.

Other Lisp objects: Write a single-quote () followed by the Lisp object you want. 33.4.2 Init File Examples Here are some examples of doing certain commonly desired things with Lisp expressions: Add a directory to the variable load-path. You can then put Lisp libraries that are not included with Emacs in this directory, and load them with M-x load-library. See Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287. (add-to-list load-path "/path/to/lisp/libraries") Make TAB in C mode just insert a tab if point is in the middle of a line. (setq c-tab-always-indent nil) Here we have a variable whose value is normally t for true and the alternative is nil for false. Make searches case sensitive by default (in all buers that do not override this). (setq-default case-fold-search nil) This sets the default value, which is eective in all buers that do not have local values for the variable (see Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446). Setting casefold-search with setq aects only the current buers local value, which is probably not what you want to do in an init le. Specify your own email address, if Emacs cant gure it out correctly. (setq user-mail-address "[email protected]") Various Emacs packages, such as Message mode, consult user-mail-address when they need to know your email address. See Section 29.2 [Mail Headers], page 368. Make Text mode the default mode for new buers.

Chapter 33: Customization

464

(setq-default major-mode text-mode) Note that text-mode is used because it is the command for entering Text mode. The single-quote before it makes the symbol a constant; otherwise, text-mode would be treated as a variable name. Set up defaults for the Latin-1 character set which supports most of the languages of Western Europe. (set-language-environment "Latin-1") Turn o Line Number mode, a global minor mode. (line-number-mode 0) Turn on Auto Fill mode automatically in Text mode and related modes (see Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445). (add-hook text-mode-hook auto-fill-mode) Load the installed Lisp library named foo (actually a le foo.elc or foo.el in a standard Emacs directory). (load "foo") When the argument to load is a relative le name, not starting with / or ~, load searches the directories in load-path (see Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287). Load the compiled Lisp le foo.elc from your home directory. (load "~/foo.elc") Here a full le name is used, so no searching is done. Tell Emacs to nd the denition for the function myfunction by loading a Lisp library named mypackage (i.e. a le mypackage.elc or mypackage.el): (autoload myfunction "mypackage" "Do what I say." t) Here the string "Do what I say." is the functions documentation string. You specify it in the autoload denition so it will be available for help commands even when the package is not loaded. The last argument, t, indicates that this function is interactive; that is, it can be invoked interactively by typing M-x myfunction RET or by binding it to a key. If the function is not interactive, omit the t or use nil. Rebind the key C-x l to run the function make-symbolic-link (see Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455). (global-set-key "\C-xl" make-symbolic-link) or (define-key global-map "\C-xl" make-symbolic-link) Note once again the single-quote used to refer to the symbol make-symboliclink instead of its value as a variable. Do the same thing for Lisp mode only. (define-key lisp-mode-map "\C-xl" make-symbolic-link) Redene all keys which now run next-line in Fundamental mode so that they run forward-line instead.

Chapter 33: Customization

465

(substitute-key-definition next-line forward-line global-map) Make C-x C-v undened. (global-unset-key "\C-x\C-v") One reason to undene a key is so that you can make it a prex. Simply dening C-x C-v anything will make C-x C-v a prex, but C-x C-v must rst be freed of its usual non-prex denition. Make $ have the syntax of punctuation in Text mode. Note the use of a character constant for $. (modify-syntax-entry ?\$ "." text-mode-syntax-table) Enable the use of the command narrow-to-region without conrmation. (put narrow-to-region disabled nil) Adjusting the conguration to various platforms and Emacs versions. Users typically want Emacs to behave the same on all systems, so the same init le is right for all platforms. However, sometimes it happens that a function you use for customizing Emacs is not available on some platforms or in older Emacs versions. To deal with that situation, put the customization inside a conditional that tests whether the function or facility is available, like this: (if (fboundp blink-cursor-mode) (blink-cursor-mode 0)) (if (boundp coding-category-utf-8) (set-coding-priority (coding-category-utf-8))) You can also simply disregard the errors that occur if the function is not dened. (condition case () (set-face-background region "grey75") (error nil)) A setq on a variable which does not exist is generally harmless, so those do not need a conditional.

33.4.3 Terminal-specic Initialization Each terminal type can have a Lisp library to be loaded into Emacs when it is run on that type of terminal. For a terminal type named termtype, the library is called term/termtype and it is found by searching the directories load-path as usual and trying the suxes .elc and .el. Normally it appears in the subdirectory term of the directory where most Emacs libraries are kept. The usual purpose of the terminal-specic library is to map the escape sequences used by the terminals function keys onto more meaningful names, using inputdecode-map (or function-key-map before it). See the le term/lk201.el for an example of how this is done. Many function keys are mapped automatically according to the information in the Termcap data base; the terminal-specic library needs to map only the function keys that Termcap does not specify.

Chapter 33: Customization

466

When the terminal type contains a hyphen, only the part of the name before the rst hyphen is signicant in choosing the library name. Thus, terminal types aaa-48 and aaa-30-rv both use the library term/aaa. The code in the library can use (getenv "TERM") to nd the full terminal type name. The librarys name is constructed by concatenating the value of the variable term-file-prefix and the terminal type. Your .emacs le can prevent the loading of the terminal-specic library by setting term-file-prefix to nil. Emacs runs the hook term-setup-hook at the end of initialization, after both your .emacs le and any terminal-specic library have been read in. Add hook functions to this hook if you wish to override part of any of the terminal-specic libraries and to dene initializations for terminals that do not have a library. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. 33.4.4 How Emacs Finds Your Init File Normally Emacs uses the environment variable HOME (see Section C.4.1 [General Variables], page 510) to nd .emacs; thats what ~ means in a le name. If .emacs is not found inside ~/ (nor .emacs.el), Emacs looks for ~/.emacs.d/init.el (which, like ~/.emacs.el, can be byte-compiled). However, if you run Emacs from a shell started by su, Emacs tries to nd your own .emacs, not that of the user you are currently pretending to be. The idea is that you should get your own editor customizations even if you are running as the super user. More precisely, Emacs rst determines which users init le to use. It gets your user name from the environment variables LOGNAME and USER; if neither of those exists, it uses eective user-ID. If that user name matches the real user-ID, then Emacs uses HOME; otherwise, it looks up the home directory corresponding to that user name in the systems data base of users. 33.4.5 Non-ASCII Characters in Init Files Language and coding systems may cause problems if your init le contains nonASCII characters, such as accented letters, in strings or key bindings. If you want to use non-ASCII characters in your init le, you should put a -*-coding: coding-system-*- tag on the rst line of the init le, and specify a coding system that supports the character(s) in question. See Section 19.7 [Recognize Coding], page 190. This is because the defaults for decoding non-ASCII text might not yet be set up by the time Emacs reads those parts of your init le which use such strings, possibly leading Emacs to decode those strings incorrectly. You should then avoid adding Emacs Lisp code that modies the coding system in other ways, such as calls to set-language-environment. To bind non-ASCII keys, you must use a vector (see Section 33.3.6 [Init Rebinding], page 455). The string syntax cannot be used, since the non-ASCII characters will be interpreted as meta keys. For instance: (global-set-key [?char ] some-function) Type C-q, followed by the key you want to bind, to insert char.

Chapter 33: Customization

467

Warning: if you change the keyboard encoding, or change between multibyte and unibyte mode, or anything that would alter which code C-q would insert for that character, this key binding may stop working. It is therefore advisable to use one and only one coding system, for your init le as well as the les you edit. For example, dont mix the latin-1 and latin-9 coding systems.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

468

34 Dealing with Common Problems

If you type an Emacs command you did not intend, the results are often mysterious. This chapter tells what you can do to cancel your mistake or recover from a mysterious situation. Emacs bugs and system crashes are also considered.

34.1 Quitting and Aborting

C-g C-BREAK (MS-DOS only) Quit: cancel running or partially typed command. C-] ESC ESC ESC Either quit or abort, whichever makes sense (keyboard-escapequit). M-x top-level Abort all recursive editing levels that are currently executing. C-/ C-x u C-_ Abort innermost recursive editing level and cancel the command which invoked it (abort-recursive-edit).

Cancel a previously made change in the buer contents (undo).

There are two ways of canceling a command before it has nished: quitting with C-g, and aborting with C-] or M-x top-level. Quitting cancels a partially typed command, or one which is still running. Aborting exits a recursive editing level and cancels the command that invoked the recursive edit (see Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424). Quitting with C-g is the way to get rid of a partially typed command, or a numeric argument that you dont want. Furthermore, if you are in the middle of a command that is running, C-g stops the command in a relatively safe way. For example, if you quit out of a kill command that is taking a long time, either your text will all still be in the buer, or it will all be in the kill ring, or maybe both. If the region is active, C-g deactivates the mark, unless Transient Mark mode is o (see Section 8.7 [Disabled Transient Mark], page 52). If you are in the middle of an incremental search, C-g behaves specially; it may take two successive C-g characters to get out of a search. See Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91, for details. On MS-DOS, the character C-BREAK serves as a quit character like C-g. The reason is that it is not feasible, on MS-DOS, to recognize C-g while a command is running, between interactions with the user. By contrast, it is feasible to recognize C-BREAK at all times. See Section MS-DOS Keyboard in Specialized Emacs Features . C-g works by setting the variable quit-flag to t the instant C-g is typed; Emacs Lisp checks this variable frequently, and quits if it is non-nil. C-g is only actually executed as a command if you type it while Emacs is waiting for input. In that case, the command it runs is keyboard-quit.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

469

On a text terminal, if you quit with C-g a second time before the rst C-g is recognized, you activate the emergency escape feature and return to the shell. See Section 34.2.7 [Emergency Escape], page 472. There are some situations where you cannot quit. When Emacs is waiting for the operating system to do something, quitting is impossible unless special pains are taken for the particular system call within Emacs where the waiting occurs. We have done this for the system calls that users are likely to want to quit from, but its possible you will encounter a case not handled. In one very common casewaiting for le input or output using NFSEmacs itself knows how to quit, but many NFS implementations simply do not allow user programs to stop waiting for NFS when the NFS server is hung. Aborting with C-] (abort-recursive-edit) is used to get out of a recursive editing level and cancel the command which invoked it. Quitting with C-g does not do this, and could not do this, because it is used to cancel a partially typed command within the recursive editing level. Both operations are useful. For example, if you are in a recursive edit and type C-u 8 to enter a numeric argument, you can cancel that argument with C-g and remain in the recursive edit. The sequence ESC ESC ESC (keyboard-escape-quit) can either quit or abort. (We dened it this way because ESC means get out in many PC programs.) It can cancel a prex argument, clear a selected region, or get out of a Query Replace, like C-g. It can get out of the minibuer or a recursive edit, like C-]. It can also get out of splitting the frame into multiple windows, as with C-x 1. One thing it cannot do, however, is stop a command that is running. Thats because it executes as an ordinary command, and Emacs doesnt notice it until it is ready for the next command. The command M-x top-level is equivalent to enough C-] commands to get you out of all the levels of recursive edits that you are in; it also exits the minibuer if it is active. C-] gets you out one level at a time, but M-x top-level goes out all levels at once. Both C-] and M-x top-level are like all other commands, and unlike C-g, in that they take eect only when Emacs is ready for a command. C-] is an ordinary key and has its meaning only because of its binding in the keymap. See Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424. C-/ (undo) is not strictly speaking a way of canceling a command, but you can think of it as canceling a command that already nished executing. See Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110, for more information about the undo facility.

34.2 Dealing with Emacs Trouble

This section describes how to recognize and deal with situations in which Emacs does not work as you expect, such as keyboard code mixups, garbled displays, running out of memory, and crashes and hangs. See Section 34.3 [Bugs], page 473, for what to do when you think you have found a bug in Emacs.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems 34.2.1 If DEL Fails to Delete

470

Every keyboard has a large key, usually labeled BACKSPACE, which is ordinarily used to erase the last character that you typed. In Emacs, this key is supposed to be equivalent to DEL. When Emacs starts up on a graphical display, it determines automatically which key should be DEL. In some unusual cases, Emacs gets the wrong information from the system, and BACKSPACE ends up deleting forwards instead of backwards. Some keyboards also have a DELETE key, which is ordinarily used to delete forwards. If this key deletes backward in Emacs, that too suggests Emacs got the wrong informationbut in the opposite sense. On a text terminal, if you nd that BACKSPACE prompts for a Help command, like Control-h, instead of deleting a character, it means that key is actually sending the BS character. Emacs ought to be treating BS as DEL, but it isnt. In all of those cases, the immediate remedy is the same: use the command M-x normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. This toggles between the two modes that Emacs supports for handling DEL, so if Emacs starts in the wrong mode, this should switch to the right mode. On a text terminal, if you want to ask for help when BS is treated as DEL, use F1; C-? may also work, if it sends character code 127. To x the problem in every Emacs session, put one of the following lines into your initialization le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). For the rst case above, where BACKSPACE deletes forwards instead of backwards, use this line to make BACKSPACE act as DEL: (normal-erase-is-backspace-mode 0) For the other two cases, use this line: (normal-erase-is-backspace-mode 1) Another way to x the problem for every Emacs session is to customize the variable normal-erase-is-backspace: the value t species the mode where BS or BACKSPACE is DEL, and nil species the other mode. See Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434. 34.2.2 Recursive Editing Levels Recursive editing levels are important and useful features of Emacs, but they can seem like malfunctions if you do not understand them. If the mode line has square brackets [...] around the parentheses that contain the names of the major and minor modes, you have entered a recursive editing level. If you did not do this on purpose, or if you dont understand what that means, you should just get out of the recursive editing level. To do so, type M-x top-level. See Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424. 34.2.3 Garbage on the Screen If the text on a text terminal looks wrong, the rst thing to do is see whether it is wrong in the buer. Type C-l to redisplay the entire screen. If the screen appears correct after this, the problem was entirely in the previous screen update. (Otherwise, see the following section.)

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

471

Display updating problems often result from an incorrect terminfo entry for the terminal you are using. The le etc/TERMS in the Emacs distribution gives the xes for known problems of this sort. INSTALL contains general advice for these problems in one of its sections. If you seem to be using the right terminfo entry, it is possible that there is a bug in the terminfo entry, or a bug in Emacs that appears for certain terminal types. 34.2.4 Garbage in the Text If C-l shows that the text is wrong, rst type C-h l to see what commands you typed to produce the observed results. Then try undoing the changes step by step using C-x u, until it gets back to a state you consider correct. If a large portion of text appears to be missing at the beginning or end of the buer, check for the word Narrow in the mode line. If it appears, the text you dont see is probably still present, but temporarily o-limits. To make it accessible again, type C-x n w. See Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74. 34.2.5 Running out of Memory If you get the error message Virtual memory exceeded, save your modied buers with C-x s. This method of saving them has the smallest need for additional memory. Emacs keeps a reserve of memory which it makes available when this error happens; that should be enough to enable C-x s to complete its work. When the reserve has been used, !MEM FULL! appears at the beginning of the mode line, indicating there is no more reserve. Once you have saved your modied buers, you can exit this Emacs session and start another, or you can use M-x kill-some-buffers to free space in the current Emacs job. If this frees up sucient space, Emacs will rell its memory reserve, and !MEM FULL! will disappear from the mode line. That means you can safely go on editing in the same Emacs session. Do not use M-x buffer-menu to save or kill buers when you run out of memory, because the buer menu needs a fair amount of memory itself, and the reserve supply may not be enough. 34.2.6 Recovery After a Crash If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover the les you were editing at the time of the crash from their auto-save les. To do this, start Emacs again and type the command M-x recover-session. This command initially displays a buer which lists interrupted session les, each with its date. You must choose which session to recover from. Typically the one you want is the most recent one. Move point to the one you choose, and type C-c C-c. Then recover-session considers each of the les that you were editing during that session; for each such le, it asks whether to recover that le. If you answer y for a le, it shows the dates of that le and its auto-save le, then asks once again whether to recover that le. For the second question, you must conrm with yes. If you do, Emacs visits the le but gets the text from the auto-save le.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

472

When recover-session is done, the les youve chosen to recover are present in Emacs buers. You should then save them. Only thissaving themupdates the les themselves. As a last resort, if you had buers with content which were not associated with any les, or if the autosave was not recent enough to have recorded important changes, you can use the etc/emacs-buffer.gdb script with GDB (the GNU Debugger) to retrieve them from a core dumpprovided that a core dump was saved, and that the Emacs executable was not stripped of its debugging symbols. As soon as you get the core dump, rename it to another name such as core.emacs, so that another crash wont overwrite it. To use this script, run gdb with the le name of your Emacs executable and the le name of the core dump, e.g. gdb /usr/bin/emacs core.emacs. At the (gdb) prompt, load the recovery script: source /usr/src/emacs/etc/emacs-buffer.gdb. Then type the command ybufferlist to see which buers are available. For each buer, it lists a buer number. To save a buer, use ysave-buffer; you specify the buer number, and the le name to write that buer into. You should use a le name which does not already exist; if the le does exist, the script does not make a backup of its old contents. 34.2.7 Emergency Escape On text terminals, the emergency escape feature suspends Emacs immediately if you type C-g a second time before Emacs can actually respond to the rst one by quitting. This is so you can always get out of GNU Emacs no matter how badly it might be hung. When things are working properly, Emacs recognizes and handles the rst C-g so fast that the second one wont trigger emergency escape. However, if some problem prevents Emacs from handling the rst C-g properly, then the second one will get you back to the shell. When you resume Emacs after a suspension caused by emergency escape, it asks two questions before going back to what it had been doing: Auto-save? (y or n) Abort (and dump core)? (y or n) Answer each one with y or n followed by RET. Saying y to Auto-save? causes immediate auto-saving of all modied buers in which auto-saving is enabled. Saying n skips this. Saying y to Abort (and dump core)? causes Emacs to crash, dumping core. This is to enable a wizard to gure out why Emacs was failing to quit in the rst place. Execution does not continue after a core dump. If you answer this question n, Emacs execution resumes. With luck, Emacs will ultimately do the requested quit. If not, each subsequent C-g invokes emergency escape again. If Emacs is not really hung, just slow, you may invoke the double C-g feature without really meaning to. Then just resume and answer n to both questions, and you will get back to the former state. The quit you requested will happen by and by.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

473

Emergency escape is active only for text terminals. On graphical displays, you can use the mouse to kill Emacs or switch to another program. On MS-DOS, you must type C-BREAK (twice) to cause emergency escapebut there are cases where it wont work, when system call hangs or when Emacs is stuck in a tight loop in C code.

34.3 Reporting Bugs

If you think you have found a bug in Emacs, please report it. We cannot promise to x it, or always to agree that it is a bug, but we certainly want to hear about it. The same applies for new features you would like to see added. The following sections will help you to construct an eective bug report. 34.3.1 Reading Existing Bug Reports and Known Problems Before reporting a bug, if at all possible please check to see if it is already known about. Indeed, it may already have been xed in a later release of Emacs, or in the development version. Here is a list of the main places you can read about known issues: The etc/PROBLEMS le; type C-h C-p to read it. This le contains a list of particularly well-known issues that have been encountered in compiling, installing and running Emacs. Often, there are suggestions for workarounds and solutions. Some additional user-level problems can be found in Section Bugs and problems in GNU Emacs FAQ . The GNU Bug Tracker at http://debbugs.gnu.org. Emacs bugs are led in the tracker under the emacs package. The tracker records information about the status of each bug, the initial bug report, and the follow-up messages by the bug reporter and Emacs developers. You can search for bugs by subject, severity, and other criteria. Instead of browsing the bug tracker as a webpage, you can browse it from Emacs using the debbugs package, which can be downloaded via the Package Menu (see Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430). This package provides the command M-x debbugs-gnu to list bugs, and M-x debbugs-gnu-search to search for a specic bug. The bug-gnu-emacs mailing list (also available as the newsgroup gnu.emacs.bug). You can read the archives of this mailing list at http://lists.gnu.org/mailman/listinfo/bug-gnu-emacs. This list works as a mirror of the Emacs bug reports and follow-up messages which are sent to the bug tracker. It also contains old bug reports from before the bug tracker was introduced (in early 2008). If you like, you can subscribe to the list. Be aware that its purpose is to provide the Emacs maintainers with information about bugs and feature requests, so reports may contain fairly large amounts of data; spectators should not complain about this.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

474

The emacs-devel mailing list. Sometimes people report bugs to this mailing list. This is not the main purpose of the list, however, and it is much better to send bug reports to the bug list. You should not feel obliged to read this list before reporting a bug.

34.3.2 When Is There a Bug If Emacs accesses an invalid memory location (segmentation fault), or exits with an operating system error message that indicates a problem in the program (as opposed to something like disk full), then it is certainly a bug. If the Emacs display does not correspond properly to the contents of the buer, then it is a bug. But you should check that features like buer narrowing (see Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74), which can hide parts of the buer or change how it is displayed, are not responsible. Taking forever to complete a command can be a bug, but you must make sure that it is really Emacss fault. Some commands simply take a long time. Type C-g (C-BREAK on MS-DOS) and then C-h l to see whether the input Emacs received was what you intended to type; if the input was such that you know it should have been processed quickly, report a bug. If you dont know whether the command should take a long time, nd out by looking in the manual or by asking for assistance. If a command you are familiar with causes an Emacs error message in a case where its usual denition ought to be reasonable, it is probably a bug. If a command does the wrong thing, that is a bug. But be sure you know for certain what it ought to have done. If you arent familiar with the command, it might actually be working right. If in doubt, read the commands documentation (see Section 7.2 [Name Help], page 40). A commands intended denition may not be the best possible denition for editing with. This is a very important sort of problem, but it is also a matter of judgment. Also, it is easy to come to such a conclusion out of ignorance of some of the existing features. It is probably best not to complain about such a problem until you have checked the documentation in the usual ways, feel condent that you understand it, and know for certain that what you want is not available. Ask other Emacs users, too. If you are not sure what the command is supposed to do after a careful reading of the manual, check the index and glossary for any terms that may be unclear. If after careful rereading of the manual you still do not understand what the command should do, that indicates a bug in the manual, which you should report. The manuals job is to make everything clear to people who are not Emacs experts including you. It is just as important to report documentation bugs as program bugs. If the built-in documentation for a function or variable disagrees with the manual, one of them must be wrong; that is a bug.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems 34.3.3 Understanding Bug Reporting

475

When you decide that there is a bug, it is important to report it and to report it in a way which is useful. What is most useful is an exact description of what commands you type, starting with the shell command to run Emacs, until the problem happens. The most important principle in reporting a bug is to report facts. Hypotheses and verbal descriptions are no substitute for the detailed raw data. Reporting the facts is straightforward, but many people strain to posit explanations and report them instead of the facts. If the explanations are based on guesses about how Emacs is implemented, they will be useless; meanwhile, lacking the facts, we will have no real information about the bug. If you want to actually debug the problem, and report explanations that are more than guesses, that is usefulbut please include the raw facts as well. For example, suppose that you type C-x C-f /glorp/baz.ugh RET, visiting a le which (you know) happens to be rather large, and Emacs displays I feel pretty today. The bug report would need to provide all that information. You should not assume that the problem is due to the size of the le and say, I visited a large le, and Emacs displayed I feel pretty today. This is what we mean by guessing explanations. The problem might be due to the fact that there is a z in the le name. If this is so, then when we got your report, we would try out the problem with some large le, probably with no z in its name, and not see any problem. There is no way we could guess that we should try visiting a le with a z in its name. You should not even say visit a le instead of C-x C-f. Similarly, rather than saying if I have three characters on the line, say after I type RET A B C RET C-p, if that is the way you entered the text. If possible, try quickly to reproduce the bug by invoking Emacs with emacs -Q (so that Emacs starts with no initial customizations; see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507), and repeating the steps that you took to trigger the bug. If you can reproduce the bug this way, that rules out bugs in your personal customizations. Then your bug report should begin by stating that you started Emacs with emacs -Q, followed by the exact sequence of steps for reproducing the bug. If possible, inform us of the exact contents of any le that is needed to reproduce the bug. Some bugs are not reproducible from emacs -Q; some are not easily reproducible at all. In that case, you should report what you havebut, as before, please stick to the raw facts about what you did to trigger the bug the rst time. 34.3.4 Checklist for Bug Reports Before reporting a bug, rst try to see if the problem has already been reported (see Section 34.3.1 [Known Problems], page 473). If you are able to, try the latest release of Emacs to see if the problem has already been xed. Even better is to try the latest development version. We recognize that this is not easy for some people, so do not feel that you absolutely must do this before making a report. The best way to write a bug report for Emacs is to use the command M-x report-emacs-bug. This sets up a mail buer (see Chapter 29 [Sending Mail],

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

476

page 367) and automatically inserts some of the essential information. However, it cannot supply all the necessary information; you should still read and follow the guidelines below, so you can enter the other crucial information by hand before you send the message. You may feel that some of the information inserted by M-x report-emacs-bug is not relevant, but unless you are absolutely sure it is best to leave it, so that the developers can decide for themselves. When you have nished writing your report, type C-c C-c and it will be sent to the Emacs maintainers at [email protected]. (If you want to suggest an improvement or new feature, use the same address.) If you cannot send mail from inside Emacs, you can copy the text of your report to your normal mail client (if your system supports it, you can type C-c m to have Emacs do this for you) and send it to that address. Or you can simply send an email to that address describing the problem. Your report will be sent to the bug-gnu-emacs mailing list, and stored in the GNU Bug Tracker at http://debbugs.gnu.org. Please include a valid reply email address, in case we need to ask you for more information about your report. Submissions are moderated, so there may be a delay before your report appears. You do not need to know how the Gnu Bug Tracker works in order to report a bug, but if you want to, you can read the trackers online documentation to see the various features you can use. All mail sent to the bug-gnu-emacs mailing list is also gatewayed to the gnu.emacs.bug newsgroup. The reverse is also true, but we ask you not to post bug reports (or replies) via the newsgroup. It can make it much harder to contact you if we need to ask for more information, and it does not integrate well with the bug tracker. If your data is more than 500,000 bytes, please dont include it directly in the bug report; instead, oer to send it on request, or make it available by ftp and say where. To enable maintainers to investigate a bug, your report should include all these things: The version number of Emacs. Without this, we wont know whether there is any point in looking for the bug in the current version of GNU Emacs. M-x report-emacs-bug includes this information automatically, but if you are not using that command for your report you can get the version number by typing M-x emacs-version RET. If that command does not work, you probably have something other than GNU Emacs, so you will have to report the bug somewhere else. The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and version number (again, automatically included by M-x report-emacs-bug). M-x emacs-version RET provides this information too. Copy its output from the *Messages* buer, so that you get it all and get it accurately. The operands given to the configure command when Emacs was installed (automatically included by M-x report-emacs-bug). A complete list of any modications you have made to the Emacs source. (We

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

477

may not have time to investigate the bug unless it happens in an unmodied Emacs. But if youve made modications and you dont tell us, you are sending us on a wild goose chase.) Be precise about these changes. A description in English is not enoughsend a context di for them. Adding les of your own, or porting to another machine, is a modication of the source. Details of any other deviations from the standard procedure for installing GNU Emacs. The complete text of any les needed to reproduce the bug. If you can tell us a way to cause the problem without visiting any les, please do so. This makes it much easier to debug. If you do need les, make sure you arrange for us to see their exact contents. For example, it can matter whether there are spaces at the ends of lines, or a newline after the last line in the buer (nothing ought to care whether the last line is terminated, but try telling the bugs that). The precise commands we need to type to reproduce the bug. If at all possible, give a full recipe for an Emacs started with the -Q option (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507). This bypasses your personal customizations. One way to record the input to Emacs precisely is to write a dribble le. To start the le, use the M-x open-dribble-file RET command. From then on, Emacs copies all your input to the specied dribble le until the Emacs process is killed. For possible display bugs, the terminal type (the value of environment variable TERM), the complete termcap entry for the terminal from /etc/termcap (since that le is not identical on all machines), and the output that Emacs actually sent to the terminal. The way to collect the terminal output is to execute the Lisp expression (open-termscript "~/termscript") using M-: or from the *scratch* buer just after starting Emacs. From then on, Emacs copies all terminal output to the specied termscript le as well, until the Emacs process is killed. If the problem happens when Emacs starts up, put this expression into your Emacs initialization le so that the termscript le will be open when Emacs displays the screen for the rst time. Be warned: it is often dicult, and sometimes impossible, to x a terminaldependent bug without access to a terminal of the type that stimulates the bug. If non-ASCII text or internationalization is relevant, the locale that was current when you started Emacs. On GNU/Linux and Unix systems, or if you use a Posix-style shell such as Bash, you can use this shell command to view the relevant values:
echo LC_ALL=$LC_ALL LC_COLLATE=$LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE=$LC_CTYPE \ LC_MESSAGES=$LC_MESSAGES LC_TIME=$LC_TIME LANG=$LANG

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

478

Alternatively, use the locale command, if your system has it, to display your locale settings. You can use the M-! command to execute these commands from Emacs, and then copy the output from the *Messages* buer into the bug report. Alternatively, M-x getenv RET LC_ALL RET will display the value of LC_ALL in the echo area, and you can copy its output from the *Messages* buer. A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is incorrect. For example, The Emacs process gets a fatal signal, or, The resulting text is as follows, which I think is wrong. Of course, if the bug is that Emacs gets a fatal signal, then one cant miss it. But if the bug is incorrect text, the maintainer might fail to notice what is wrong. Why leave it to chance? Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of the source is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and the copy here might not. If you said to expect a crash, then when Emacs here fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening. If you dont say to expect a crash, then we would not know whether the bug was happeningwe would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations. If the bug is that the Emacs Manual or the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual fails to describe the actual behavior of Emacs, or that the text is confusing, copy in the text from the online manual which you think is at fault. If the section is small, just the section name is enough. If the manifestation of the bug is an Emacs error message, it is important to report the precise text of the error message, and a backtrace showing how the Lisp program in Emacs arrived at the error. To get the error message text accurately, copy it from the *Messages* buer into the bug report. Copy all of it, not just part. To make a backtrace for the error, use M-x toggle-debug-on-error before the error happens (that is to say, you must give that command and then make the bug happen). This causes the error to start the Lisp debugger, which shows you a backtrace. Copy the text of the debuggers backtrace into the bug report. See Section The Lisp Debugger in the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual , for information on debugging Emacs Lisp programs with the Edebug package. This use of the debugger is possible only if you know how to make the bug happen again. If you cant make it happen again, at least copy the whole error message. If Emacs appears to be stuck in an innite loop or in a very long operation, typing C-g with the variable debug-on-quit non-nil will start the Lisp debugger and show a backtrace. This backtrace is useful for debugging such long loops, so if you can produce it, copy it into the bug report.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

479

If you cannot get Emacs to respond to C-g (e.g., because inhibit-quit is set), then you can try sending the signal specied by debug-on-event (default SIGUSR2) from outside Emacs to cause it to enter the debugger. Check whether any programs you have loaded into the Lisp world, including your initialization le, set any variables that may aect the functioning of Emacs. Also, see whether the problem happens in a freshly started Emacs without loading your initialization le (start Emacs with the -Q switch to prevent loading the init les). If the problem does not occur then, you must report the precise contents of any programs that you must load into the Lisp world in order to cause the problem to occur. If the problem does depend on an init le or other Lisp programs that are not part of the standard Emacs system, then you should make sure it is not a bug in those programs by complaining to their maintainers rst. After they verify that they are using Emacs in a way that is supposed to work, they should report the bug. If you wish to mention something in the GNU Emacs source, show the line of code with a few lines of context. Dont just give a line number. The line numbers in the development sources dont match those in your sources. It would take extra work for the maintainers to determine what code is in your version at a given line number, and we could not be certain. Additional information from a C debugger such as GDB might enable someone to nd a problem on a machine which he does not have available. If you dont know how to use GDB, please read the GDB manualit is not very long, and using GDB is easy. You can nd the GDB distribution, including the GDB manual in online form, in most of the same places you can nd the Emacs distribution. To run Emacs under GDB, you should switch to the src subdirectory in which Emacs was compiled, then do gdb emacs. It is important for the directory src to be current so that GDB will read the .gdbinit le in this directory. However, you need to think when you collect the additional information if you want it to show what causes the bug. For example, many people send just a backtrace, but that is not very useful by itself. A simple backtrace with arguments often conveys little about what is happening inside GNU Emacs, because most of the arguments listed in the backtrace are pointers to Lisp objects. The numeric values of these pointers have no signicance whatever; all that matters is the contents of the objects they point to (and most of the contents are themselves pointers). To provide useful information, you need to show the values of Lisp objects in Lisp notation. Do this for each variable which is a Lisp object, in several stack frames near the bottom of the stack. Look at the source to see which variables are Lisp objects, because the debugger thinks of them as integers. To show a variables value in Lisp syntax, rst print its value, then use the user-dened GDB command pr to print the Lisp object in Lisp syntax. (If you must use another debugger, call the function debug_print with the object as

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

480

an argument.) The pr command is dened by the le .gdbinit, and it works only if you are debugging a running process (not with a core dump). To make Lisp errors stop Emacs and return to GDB, put a breakpoint at Fsignal. For a short listing of Lisp functions running, type the GDB command xbacktrace. The le .gdbinit denes several other commands that are useful for examining the data types and contents of Lisp objects. Their names begin with x. These commands work at a lower level than pr, and are less convenient, but they may work even when pr does not, such as when debugging a core dump or when Emacs has had a fatal signal. More detailed advice and other useful techniques for debugging Emacs are available in the le etc/DEBUG in the Emacs distribution. That le also includes instructions for investigating problems whereby Emacs stops responding (many people assume that Emacs is hung, whereas in fact it might be in an innite loop). To nd the le etc/DEBUG in your Emacs installation, use the directory name stored in the variable data-directory. Here are some things that are not necessary in a bug report: A description of the envelope of the bugthis is not necessary for a reproducible bug. Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating which changes to the input le will make the bug go away and which changes will not aect it. This is often time-consuming and not very useful, because the way we will nd the bug is by running a single example under the debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples. You might as well save time by not searching for additional examples. It is better to send the bug report right away, go back to editing, and nd another bug to report. Of course, if you can nd a simpler example to report instead of the original one, that is a convenience. Errors in the output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take less time, etc. However, simplication is not vital; if you cant do this or dont have time to try, please report the bug with your original test case. A core dump le. Debugging the core dump might be useful, but it can only be done on your machine, with your Emacs executable. Therefore, sending the core dump le to the Emacs maintainers wont be useful. Above all, dont include the core le in an email bug report! Such a large message can be extremely inconvenient. A system-call trace of Emacs execution. System-call traces are very useful for certain special kinds of debugging, but in most cases they give little useful information. It is therefore strange that

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

481

many people seem to think that the way to report information about a crash is to send a system-call trace. Perhaps this is a habit formed from experience debugging programs that dont have source code or debugging symbols. In most programs, a backtrace is normally far, far more informative than a system-call trace. Even in Emacs, a simple backtrace is generally more informative, though to give full information you should supplement the backtrace by displaying variable values and printing them as Lisp objects with pr (see above). A patch for the bug. A patch for the bug is useful if it is a good one. But dont omit the other information that a bug report needs, such as the test case, on the assumption that a patch is sucient. We might see problems with your patch and decide to x the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all. And if we cant understand what bug you are trying to x, or why your patch should be an improvement, we mustnt install it. A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on. Such guesses are usually wrong. Even experts cant guess right about such things without rst using the debugger to nd the facts. 34.3.5 Sending Patches for GNU Emacs If you would like to write bug xes or improvements for GNU Emacs, that is very helpful. When you send your changes, please follow these guidelines to make it easy for the maintainers to use them. If you dont follow these guidelines, your information might still be useful, but using it will take extra work. Maintaining GNU Emacs is a lot of work in the best of circumstances, and we cant keep up unless you do your best to help. Send an explanation with your changes of what problem they x or what improvement they bring about. For a x for an existing bug, it is best to reply to the relevant discussion on the bug-gnu-emacs list, or the bug entry in the GNU Bug Tracker at http://debbugs.gnu.org. Explain why your change xes the bug. Always include a proper bug report for the problem you think you have xed. We need to convince ourselves that the change is right before installing it. Even if it is correct, we might have trouble understanding it if we dont have a way to reproduce the problem. Include all the comments that are appropriate to help people reading the source in the future understand why this change was needed. Dont mix together changes made for dierent reasons. Send them individually. If you make two changes for separate reasons, then we might not want to install them both. We might want to install just one. If you send them all jumbled together in a single set of dis, we have to do extra work to disentangle them to gure out which parts of the change serve which purpose. If we dont have time for this, we might have to ignore your changes entirely.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

482

If you send each change as soon as you have written it, with its own explanation, then two changes never get tangled up, and we can consider each one properly without any extra work to disentangle them. Send each change as soon as that change is nished. Sometimes people think they are helping us by accumulating many changes to send them all together. As explained above, this is absolutely the worst thing you could do. Since you should send each change separately, you might as well send it right away. That gives us the option of installing it immediately if it is important. Use diff -c to make your dis. Dis without context are hard to install reliably. More than that, they are hard to study; we must always study a patch to decide whether we want to install it. Unidi format is better than contextless dis, but not as easy to read as -c format. If you have GNU di, use diff -c -F^[_a-zA-Z0-9$]+ *( when making dis of C code. This shows the name of the function that each change occurs in. Avoid any ambiguity as to which is the old version and which is the new. Please make the old version the rst argument to di, and the new version the second argument. And please give one version or the other a name that indicates whether it is the old version or your new changed one. Write the change log entries for your changes. This is both to save us the extra work of writing them, and to help explain your changes so we can understand them. The purpose of the change log is to show people where to nd what was changed. So you need to be specic about what functions you changed; in large functions, its often helpful to indicate where within the function the change was. On the other hand, once you have shown people where to nd the change, you need not explain its purpose in the change log. Thus, if you add a new function, all you need to say about it is that it is new. If you feel that the purpose needs explaining, it probably doesbut put the explanation in comments in the code. It will be more useful there. Please read the ChangeLog les in the src and lisp directories to see what sorts of information to put in, and to learn the style that we use. See Section 25.2 [Change Log], page 309. When you write the x, keep in mind that we cant install a change that would break other systems. Please think about what eect your change will have if compiled on another type of system. Sometimes people send xes that might be an improvement in generalbut it is hard to be sure of this. Its hard to install such changes because we have to study them very carefully. Of course, a good explanation of the reasoning by which you concluded the change was correct can help convince us. The safest changes are changes to the conguration les for a particular machine. These are safe because they cant create new bugs on other machines.

Chapter 34: Dealing with Common Problems

483

Please help us keep up with the workload by designing the patch in a form that is clearly safe to install.

34.4 Contributing to Emacs Development

If you would like to help pretest Emacs releases to assure they work well, or if you would like to work on improving Emacs, please contact the maintainers at [email protected]. A pretester should be prepared to investigate bugs as well as report them. If youd like to work on improving Emacs, please ask for suggested projects or suggest your own ideas. If you have already written an improvement, please tell us about it. If you have not yet started work, it is useful to contact [email protected] before you start; it might be possible to suggest ways to make your extension t in better with the rest of Emacs. The development version of Emacs can be downloaded from the repository where it is actively maintained by a group of developers. See the Emacs project page http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/ for details. For more information on how to contribute, see the etc/CONTRIBUTE le in the Emacs distribution.

34.5 How To Get Help with GNU Emacs

If you need help installing, using or changing GNU Emacs, there are two ways to nd it: Send a message to the mailing list [email protected], or post your request on newsgroup gnu.emacs.help. (This mailing list and newsgroup interconnect, so it does not matter which one you use.) Look in the service directory for someone who might help you for a fee. The service directory is found in the le named etc/SERVICE in the Emacs distribution.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

484

Appendix A GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright c 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a programto make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) oer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers and authors protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users and authors sake, the GPL requires that modied versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modied versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

485

provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on generalpurpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it eectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modication follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

0. Denitions. This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. Copyright also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as you. Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations. To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a modied version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work. A covered work means either the unmodied Program or a work based on the Program. To propagate a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modication), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modications to it. Object code means any non-source form of a work.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

486

A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an ocial standard dened by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specied for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The System Libraries of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A Major Component, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specic operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the works System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodied in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface denition les associated with source les for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control ow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly arms your unlimited permission to run the unmodied Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

487

Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an eective technological measure under any applicable law fullling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is eected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modication of the work as a means of enforcing, against the works users, your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Programs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may oer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modied Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a. The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modied it, and giving a relevant date. b. The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices. c. You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d. If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

488

A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilations users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source xed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written oer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you oer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c. Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written oer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an oer, in accord with subsection 6b. d. Convey the object code by oering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and oer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a dierent server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to nd the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. e. Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being oered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

489

A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A User Product is either (1) a consumer product, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only signicant mode of use of the product. Installation Information for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modied versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modied version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suce to ensure that the continued functioning of the modied object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modication has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a xed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modied object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modied or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modied or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modication itself materially and adversely aects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

490

were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a. Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability dierently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b. Requiring preservation of specied reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c. Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modied versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as dierent from the original version; or d. Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e. Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f. Requiring indemnication of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modied versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source les, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those les, or a notice indicating where to nd the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

491

8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and nally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder noties you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the rst time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the partys predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable eorts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or armed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

492

License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, oering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributors contributor version. A contributors essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modication of the contributor version. For purposes of this denition, control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributors essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, oer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a patent license is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benet of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipients use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specic copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specically granted under this License.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

493

You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specic products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Aero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Aero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Aero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may dier in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program species that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

494

If the Program species that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxys public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or dierent permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal eect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Appendix A: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

495

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source le to most eectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each le should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the programs name and a brief idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
program Copyright (C) year name of author This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type show w. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type show c for details.

The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your programs commands might be dierent; for a GUI interface, you would use an about box. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But rst, please read http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html.

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

496

Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License

Version 1.3, 3 November 2008 Copyright c 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. 0. PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the eective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modications made by others. This License is a kind of copyleft, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The Document, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as you. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law. A Modied Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modications and/or translated into another language. A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Documents overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

497

The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not t the above denition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none. The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed, as FrontCover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specication is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent le format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modication by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ascii without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTEX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modication. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only. The Title Page means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the works title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. The publisher means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public. A section Entitled XYZ means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specic section name mentioned below, such as Acknowledgements, Dedications, Endorsements, or History.) To Preserve the Title of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section Entitled XYZ according to this denition.

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

498

The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no eect on the meaning of this License. 2. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies. 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Documents license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to t legibly, you should put the rst ones listed (as many as t reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computernetwork location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

499

4. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modied Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modied Version under precisely this License, with the Modied Version lling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modication of the Modied Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modied Version: A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modications in the Modied Version, together with at least ve of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than ve), unless they release you from this requirement. C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modied Version, as the publisher. D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modications adjacent to the other copyright notices. F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modied Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Documents license notice. H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. I. Preserve the section Entitled History, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modied Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled History in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modied Version as stated in the previous sentence. J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the History section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. K. For any section Entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

500

and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. M. Delete any section Entitled Endorsements. Such a section may not be included in the Modied Version. N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled Endorsements or to conict in title with any Invariant Section. O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. If the Modied Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modied Versions license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. You may add a section Entitled Endorsements, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modied Version by various partiesfor example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative denition of a standard. You may add a passage of up to ve words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modied Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modied Version. 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms dened in section 4 above for modied versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodied, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but dierent contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

501

unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled History in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled History; likewise combine any sections Entitled Acknowledgements, and any sections Entitled Dedications. You must delete all sections Entitled Endorsements. 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilations users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Documents Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate. 8. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modication, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. If a section in the Document is Entitled Acknowledgements, Dedications, or History, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License 9. TERMINATION

502

You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and nally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder noties you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the rst time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may dier in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document species that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specied version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document species that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxys public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document. 11. RELICENSING Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site (or MMC Site) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A Massive Multiauthor Collaboration (or MMC) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site. CC-BY-SA means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-prot corporation with

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

503

a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization. Incorporate means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document. An MMC is eligible for relicensing if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were rst published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008. The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.

Appendix B: GNU Free Documentation License

504

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.

If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the with. . . Texts. line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.

If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

505

Appendix C Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

Emacs supports command line arguments to request various actions when invoking Emacs. These are for compatibility with other editors and for sophisticated activities. We dont recommend using them for ordinary editing (See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412, for a way to access an existing Emacs job from the command line). Arguments starting with - are options, and so is +linenum . All other arguments specify les to visit. Emacs visits the specied les while it starts up. The last le specied on the command line becomes the current buer; the other les are also visited in other buers. As with most programs, the special argument -- says that all subsequent arguments are le names, not options, even if they start with -. Emacs command options can specify many things, such as the size and position of the X window Emacs uses, its colors, and so on. A few options support advanced usage, such as running Lisp functions on les in batch mode. The sections of this chapter describe the available options, arranged according to their purpose. There are two ways of writing options: the short forms that start with a single -, and the long forms that start with --. For example, -d is a short form and --display is the corresponding long form. The long forms with -- are easier to remember, but longer to type. However, you dont have to spell out the whole option name; any unambiguous abbreviation is enough. When a long option takes an argument, you can use either a space or an equal sign to separate the option name and the argument. Thus, you can write either --display sugar-bombs:0.0 or --display=sugar-bombs:0.0. We recommend an equal sign because it makes the relationship clearer, and the tables below always show an equal sign. Most options specify how to initialize Emacs, or set parameters for the Emacs session. We call them initial options. A few options specify things to do, such as loading libraries or calling Lisp functions. These are called action options. These and le names together are called action arguments. The action arguments are stored as a list of strings in the variable command-line-args. (Actually, when Emacs starts up, command-line-args contains all the arguments passed from the command line; during initialization, the initial arguments are removed from this list when they are processed, leaving only the action arguments.)

C.1 Action Arguments

Here is a table of action arguments: file --file=file --find-file=file --visit=file Visit le using find-file. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

506

When Emacs starts up, it displays the startup buer in one window, and the buer visiting le in another window (see Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159). If you supply more than one le argument, the displayed le is the last one specied on the command line; the other les are visited but their buers are not shown. If the startup buer is disabled (see Section 3.1 [Entering Emacs], page 14), then le is visited in a single window if one le argument was supplied; with two le arguments, Emacs displays the les in two dierent windows; with more than two le argument, Emacs displays the last le specied in one window, plus a Buer Menu in a dierent window (see Section 16.5 [Several Buers], page 154). To inhibit using the Buer Menu for this, change the variable inhibit-startupbuffer-menu to t. +linenum file Visit le using find-file, then go to line number linenum in it. +linenum :columnnum file Visit le using find-file, then go to line number linenum and put point at column number columnnum. -l file --load=file Load a Lisp library named le with the function load. If le is not an absolute le name, Emacs rst looks for it in the current directory, then in the directories listed in load-path (see Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287). Warning: If previous command-line arguments have visited les, the current directory is the directory of the last le visited. -L dir --directory=dir Add directory dir to the variable load-path. -f function --funcall=function Call Lisp function function. If it is an interactive function (a command), it reads the arguments interactively just as if you had called the same function with a key sequence. Otherwise, it calls the function with no arguments. --eval=expression --execute=expression Evaluate Lisp expression expression. --insert=file Insert the contents of le into the *scratch* buer (see Section 24.10 [Lisp Interaction], page 290). This is like what M-x insert-file does (see Section 15.10 [Misc File Ops], page 143).

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation --kill --help --version Print Emacs version, then exit successfully. Exit from Emacs without asking for conrmation.

507

Print a usage message listing all available options, then exit successfully.

C.2 Initial Options

The initial options specify parameters for the Emacs session. This section describes the more general initial options; some other options specically related to the X Window System appear in the following sections. Some initial options aect the loading of the initialization le. Normally, Emacs rst loads site-start.el if it exists, then your own initialization le if it exists, and nally the default initialization le default.el if it exists (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). Certain options prevent loading of some of these les or substitute other les for them. -chdir directory --chdir=directory Change to directory before doing anything else. This is mainly used by session management in X so that Emacs starts in the same directory as it stopped. This makes desktop saving and restoring easier. -t device --terminal=device Use device as the device for terminal input and output. This option implies --no-window-system. -d display --display=display Use the X Window System and use the display named display to open the initial Emacs frame. See Section C.5 [Display X], page 514, for more details. -nw --no-window-system Dont communicate directly with the window system, disregarding the DISPLAY environment variable even if it is set. This means that Emacs uses the terminal from which it was launched for all its display and input. -batch --batch Run Emacs in batch mode. Batch mode is used for running programs written in Emacs Lisp from shell scripts, makeles, and so on. To invoke a Lisp program, use the -batch option in conjunction with one or more of -l, -f or --eval (see Section C.1 [Action Arguments], page 505). See Section C.3 [Command Example], page 509, for an example.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

508

In batch mode, Emacs does not display the text being edited, and the standard terminal interrupt characters such as C-z and C-c have their usual eect. Emacs functions that normally print a message in the echo area will print to either the standard output stream (stdout) or the standard error stream (stderr) instead. (To be precise, functions like prin1, princ and print print to stdout, while message and error print to stderr.) Functions that normally read keyboard input from the minibuer take their input from the terminals standard input stream (stdin) instead. --batch implies -q (do not load an initialization le), but site-start.el is loaded nonetheless. It also causes Emacs to exit after processing all the command options. In addition, it disables auto-saving except in buers for which auto-saving is explicitly requested. --script file Run Emacs in batch mode, like --batch, and then read and execute the Lisp code in le. The normal use of this option is in executable script les that run Emacs. They can start with this text on the rst line #!/usr/bin/emacs --script which will invoke Emacs with --script and supply the name of the script le as le. Emacs Lisp then treats the #! on this rst line as a comment delimiter. -q --no-init-file Do not load any initialization le (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). When Emacs is invoked with this option, the Customize facility does not allow options to be saved (see Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434). This option does not disable loading site-start.el. --no-site-file Do not load site-start.el (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). The -Q option does this too, but other options like -q do not. --no-site-lisp Do not include the site-lisp directories in load-path (see Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461). The -Q option does this too. --no-splash Do not display a startup screen. You can also achieve this eect by setting the variable inhibit-startup-screen to non-nil in your initialization le (see Section 3.1 [Entering Emacs], page 14). -Q --quick Start emacs with minimum customizations. This is similar to using -q, --no-site-file, --no-site-lisp, and --no-splash to-

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

509

gether. This also stops Emacs from processing X resources by setting inhibit-x-resources to t (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521). -daemon --daemon Start Emacs as a daemonafter Emacs starts up, it starts the Emacs server and disconnects from the terminal without opening any frames. You can then use the emacsclient command to connect to Emacs for editing. See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412, for information about using Emacs as a daemon.

-daemon=SERVER-NAME Start emacs in background as a daemon, and use SERVER-NAME as the server name. --no-desktop Do not reload any saved desktop. See Section 31.8 [Saving Emacs Sessions], page 423. -u user --user=user Load user s initialization le instead of your own1 . --debug-init Enable the Emacs Lisp debugger for errors in the init le. See Section Entering the Debugger on an Error in The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual .

C.3 Command Argument Example

Here is an example of using Emacs with arguments and options. It assumes you have a Lisp program le called hack-c.el which, when loaded, performs some useful operation on the current buer, expected to be a C program. emacs --batch foo.c -l hack-c -f save-buffer >& log This says to visit foo.c, load hack-c.el (which makes changes in the visited le), save foo.c (note that save-buffer is the function that C-x C-s is bound to), and then exit back to the shell (because of --batch). --batch also guarantees there will be no problem redirecting output to log, because Emacs will not assume that it has a display terminal to work with.

C.4 Environment Variables

The environment is a feature of the operating system; it consists of a collection of variables with names and values. Each variable is called an environment variable ; environment variable names are case-sensitive, and it is conventional to use upper case letters only. The values are all text strings. What makes the environment useful is that subprocesses inherit the environment automatically from their parent process. This means you can set up an environment
1

This option has no eect on MS-Windows.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

510

variable in your login shell, and all the programs you run (including Emacs) will automatically see it. Subprocesses of Emacs (such as shells, compilers, and version control programs) inherit the environment from Emacs, too. Inside Emacs, the command M-x getenv reads the name of an environment variable, and prints its value in the echo area. M-x setenv sets a variable in the Emacs environment, and C-u M-x setenv removes a variable. (Environment variable substitutions with $ work in the value just as in le names; see [File Names with $], page 125.) The variable initial-environment stores the initial environment inherited by Emacs. The way to set environment variables outside of Emacs depends on the operating system, and especially the shell that you are using. For example, heres how to set the environment variable ORGANIZATION to not very much using Bash: export ORGANIZATION="not very much" and heres how to do it in csh or tcsh: setenv ORGANIZATION "not very much" When Emacs is using the X Window System, various environment variables that control X work for Emacs as well. See the X documentation for more information. C.4.1 General Variables Here is an alphabetical list of environment variables that have special meanings in Emacs. Most of these variables are also used by some other programs. Emacs does not require any of these environment variables to be set, but it uses their values if they are set. CDPATH EMACSDATA EMACSDOC Used by the cd command to search for the directory you specify, when you specify a relative directory name. Directory for the architecture-independent les that come with Emacs. This is used to initialize the variable data-directory. Directory for the documentation string le, which is used to initialize the Lisp variable doc-directory.

EMACSLOADPATH A colon-separated list of directories2 to search for Emacs Lisp les. If set, it overrides the usual initial value of the load-path variable (see Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287). EMACSPATH A colon-separated list of directories to search for executable les. If set, Emacs uses this in addition to PATH (see below) when initializing the variable exec-path (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401). Your email address; used to initialize the Lisp variable user-mailaddress, which the Emacs mail interface puts into the From header of outgoing messages (see Section 29.2 [Mail Headers], page 368).

EMAIL

Here and below, whenever we say colon-separated list of directories, it pertains to Unix and GNU/Linux systems. On MS-DOS and MS-Windows, the directories are separated by semi-colons instead, since DOS/Windows le names might include a colon after a drive letter.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation ESHELL HISTFILE

511

Used for shell-mode to override the SHELL environment variable (see Section 31.3.2 [Interactive Shell], page 403). The name of the le that shell commands are saved in between logins. This variable defaults to ~/.bash_history if you use Bash, to ~/.sh_history if you use ksh, and to ~/.history otherwise. The location of your les in the directory tree; used for expansion of le names starting with a tilde (~). On MS-DOS, it defaults to the directory from which Emacs was started, with /bin removed from the end if it was present. On Windows, the default value of HOME is the Application Data subdirectory of the user prole directory (normally, this is C:/Documents and Settings/username /Application Data, where username is your user name), though for backwards compatibility C:/ will be used instead if a .emacs le is found there. The name of the machine that Emacs is running on. A colon-separated list of directories. Used by the complete package to search for les. A colon-separated list of directories in which to search for Info les.

HOME

HOSTNAME INCPATH INFOPATH

LC_ALL LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE LC_MESSAGES LC_MONETARY LC_NUMERIC LC_TIME LANG The users preferred locale. The locale has six categories, specied by the environment variables LC_COLLATE for sorting, LC_CTYPE for character encoding, LC_MESSAGES for system messages, LC_MONETARY for monetary formats, LC_NUMERIC for numbers, and LC_TIME for dates and times. If one of these variables is not set, the category defaults to the value of the LANG environment variable, or to the default C locale if LANG is not set. But if LC_ALL is specied, it overrides the settings of all the other locale environment variables. On MS-Windows, if LANG is not already set in the environment when Emacs starts, Emacs sets it based on the system-wide default language, which you can set in the Regional Settings Control Panel on some versions of MS-Windows. The value of the LC_CTYPE category is matched against entries in locale-language-names, locale-charset-language-names, and locale-preferred-coding-systems, to select a default language environment and coding system. See Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183. LOGNAME The users login name. See also USER.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation MAIL NAME NNTPSERVER The name of your system mail inbox.

512

Your real-world name. This is used to initialize the variable userfull-name (see Section 29.2 [Mail Headers], page 368). The name of the news server. Used by the mh and Gnus packages.

ORGANIZATION The name of the organization to which you belong. Used for setting the Organization: header in your posts from the Gnus package. PATH A colon-separated list of directories containing executable les. This is used to initialize the variable exec-path (see Section 31.3 [Shell], page 401). If set, this should be the default directory when Emacs was started. If set, this species an initial value for the variable mail-defaultreply-to (see Section 29.2 [Mail Headers], page 368). The name of a directory in which news articles are saved by default. Used by the Gnus package. The name of an interpreter used to parse and execute programs run from inside Emacs. The name of the outgoing mail server. This is used to initialize the variable smtpmail-smtp-server (see Section 29.4.1 [Mail Sending], page 370). TERM The type of the terminal that Emacs is using. This variable must be set unless Emacs is run in batch mode. On MS-DOS, it defaults to internal, which species a built-in terminal emulation that handles the machines own display. The name of the termcap library le describing how to program the terminal specied by TERM. This defaults to /etc/termcap.

PWD REPLYTO SAVEDIR SHELL SMTPSERVER

TERMCAP TMPDIR TMP TEMP

These environment variables are used to initialize the variable temporary-file-directory, which species a directory in which to put temporary les (see Section 15.3.2 [Backup], page 130). Emacs tries to use TMPDIR rst; if that is unset, it tries TMP, then TEMP, and nally /tmp. But on MS-Windows and MS-DOS, Emacs tries TEMP, then TMPDIR, then TMP, and nally c:/temp. This species the current time zone and possibly also daylight saving time information. On MS-DOS, if TZ is not set in the environment when Emacs starts, Emacs denes a default value as appropriate for the country code returned by DOS. On MS-Windows, Emacs does not use TZ at all.

TZ

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation USER

513

The users login name. See also LOGNAME. On MS-DOS, this defaults to root.

VERSION_CONTROL Used to initialize the version-control variable (see Section 15.3.2.1 [Backup Names], page 130). C.4.2 Miscellaneous Variables These variables are used only on particular congurations: COMSPEC On MS-DOS and MS-Windows, the name of the command interpreter to use when invoking batch les and commands internal to the shell. On MS-DOS this is also used to make a default value for the SHELL environment variable. On MS-DOS, this variable defaults to the value of the USER variable. On MS-DOS, this species a le to use to log the operation of the internal terminal emulator. This feature is useful for submitting bug reports. On MS-DOS, this species the screen colors. It is useful to set them this way, since otherwise Emacs would display the default colors momentarily when it starts up. The value of this variable should be the two-character encoding of the foreground (the rst character) and the background (the second character) colors of the default face. Each character should be the hexadecimal code for the desired color on a standard PC text-mode display. For example, to get blue text on a light gray background, specify EMACSCOLORS=17, since 1 is the code of the blue color and 7 is the code of the light gray color. The PC display usually supports only eight background colors. However, Emacs switches the DOS display to a mode where all 16 colors can be used for the background, so all four bits of the background color are actually used. PRELOAD_WINSOCK On MS-Windows, if you set this variable, Emacs will load and initialize the network library at startup, instead of waiting until the rst time it is required. emacs_dir On MS-Windows, emacs_dir is a special environment variable, which indicates the full path of the directory in which Emacs is installed. If Emacs is installed in the standard directory structure, it calculates this value automatically. It is not much use setting this variable yourself unless your installation is non-standard, since unlike other environment variables, it will be overridden by Emacs at startup. When setting other environment variables, such as EMACSLOADPATH, you may

NAME EMACSTEST

EMACSCOLORS

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

514

nd it useful to use emacs_dir rather than hard-coding an absolute path. This allows multiple versions of Emacs to share the same environment variable settings, and it allows you to move the Emacs installation directory, without changing any environment or registry settings. C.4.3 The MS-Windows System Registry On MS-Windows, the installation program addpm.exe adds values for emacs_dir, EMACSLOADPATH, EMACSDATA, EMACSPATH, EMACSDOC, SHELL and TERM to the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE section of the system registry, under /Software/GNU/Emacs. It does this because there is no standard place to set environment variables across dierent versions of Windows. Running addpm.exe is no longer strictly necessary in recent versions of Emacs, but if you are upgrading from an older version, running addpm.exe ensures that you do not have older registry entries from a previous installation, which may not be compatible with the latest version of Emacs. When Emacs starts, as well as checking the environment, it also checks the System Registry for those variables and for HOME, LANG and PRELOAD_WINSOCK. To determine the value of those variables, Emacs goes through the following procedure. First, the environment is checked. If the variable is not found there, Emacs looks for registry keys by that name under /Software/GNU/Emacs; rst in the HKEY_CURRENT_USER section of the registry, and if not found there, in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE section. Finally, if Emacs still cannot determine the values, compiled-in defaults are used. In addition to the environment variables above, you can also add many of the settings which on X belong in the .Xdefaults le (see Appendix D [X Resources], page 521) to the /Software/GNU/Emacs registry key.

C.5 Specifying the Display Name

The environment variable DISPLAY tells all X clients, including Emacs, where to display their windows. Its value is set by default in ordinary circumstances, when you start an X server and run jobs locally. You can specify the display yourself; one reason to do this is if you want to log into another system and run Emacs there, and have the window displayed at your local terminal. DISPLAY has the syntax host :display.screen , where host is the host name of the X Window System server machine, display is an arbitrarily-assigned number that distinguishes your server (X terminal) from other servers on the same machine, and screen is a eld that allows an X server to control multiple terminal screens. The period and the screen eld are optional. If included, screen is usually zero. For example, if your host is named glasperle and your server is the rst (or perhaps the only) server listed in the conguration, your DISPLAY is glasperle:0.0.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

515

You can specify the display name explicitly when you run Emacs, either by changing the DISPLAY variable, or with the option -d display or --display=display . Here is an example:
emacs --display=glasperle:0 &

You can inhibit the use of the X window system with the -nw option. Then Emacs uses its controlling text terminal for display. See Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507. Sometimes, security arrangements prevent a program on a remote system from displaying on your local system. In this case, trying to run Emacs produces messages like this:
Xlib: connection to "glasperle:0.0" refused by server

You might be able to overcome this problem by using the xhost command on the local system to give permission for access from your remote machine.

C.6 Font Specication Options

You can use the command line option -fn font (or --font, which is an alias for -fn) to specify a default font: -fn font --font=font Use font as the default font. When passing a font name to Emacs on the command line, you may need to quote it, by enclosing it in quotation marks, if it contains characters that the shell treats specially (e.g. spaces). For example:
emacs -fn "DejaVu Sans Mono-12"

See Section 18.8 [Fonts], page 171, for details about font names and other ways to specify the default font.

C.7 Window Color Options

You can use the following command-line options to specify the colors to use for various parts of the Emacs display. Colors may be specied using either color names or RGB triplets (see Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76). -fg color --foreground-color=color Specify the foreground color, overriding the color specied by the default face (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). -bg color --background-color=color Specify the background color, overriding the color specied by the default face. -bd color --border-color=color Specify the color of the border of the X window. This has no eect if Emacs is compiled with GTK+ support.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

516

-cr color --cursor-color=color Specify the color of the Emacs cursor which indicates where point is. -ms color --mouse-color=color Specify the color for the mouse cursor when the mouse is in the Emacs window. -r -rv --reverse-video Reverse videoswap the foreground and background colors. --color=mode Set the color support mode when Emacs is run on a text terminal. This option overrides the number of supported colors that the character terminal advertises in its termcap or terminfo database. The parameter mode can be one of the following: never no default auto Dont use colors even if the terminals capabilities specify color support. Same as when --color is not used at all: Emacs detects at startup whether the terminal supports colors, and if it does, turns on colored display.

always yes ansi8

Turn on the color support unconditionally, and use color commands specied by the ANSI escape sequences for the 8 standard colors. Use color mode for num colors. If num is -1, turn o color support (equivalent to never); if it is 0, use the default color support for this terminal (equivalent to auto); otherwise use an appropriate standard mode for num colors. Depending on your terminals capabilities, Emacs might be able to turn on a color mode for 8, 16, 88, or 256 as the value of num. If there is no mode that supports num colors, Emacs acts as if num were 0, i.e. it uses the terminals default color support mode.

num

If mode is omitted, it defaults to ansi8. For example, to use a coral mouse cursor and a slate blue text cursor, enter: emacs -ms coral -cr slate blue & You can reverse the foreground and background colors through the -rv option or with the X resource reverseVideo.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

517

The -fg, -bg, and -rv options function on text terminals as well as on graphical displays.

C.8 Options for Window Size and Position

Here is a list of the command-line options for specifying size and position of the initial Emacs frame: -g width xheight [{+-}xoffset {+-}yoffset ]] --geometry=width xheight [{+-}xoffset {+-}yoffset ]] Specify the size width and height (measured in character columns and lines), and positions xoset and yoset (measured in pixels). The width and height parameters apply to all frames, whereas xoset and yoset only to the initial frame. -fs --fullscreen Specify that width and height shall be the size of the screen. Normally no window manager decorations are shown. -mm --maximized Specify that the Emacs frame shall be maximized. This normally means that the frame has window manager decorations. -fh --fullheight Specify that the height shall be the height of the screen. -fw --fullwidth Specify that the width shall be the width of the screen. In the --geometry option, {+-} means either a plus sign or a minus sign. A plus sign before xoset means it is the distance from the left side of the screen; a minus sign means it counts from the right side. A plus sign before yoset means it is the distance from the top of the screen, and a minus sign there indicates the distance from the bottom. The values xoset and yoset may themselves be positive or negative, but that doesnt change their meaning, only their direction. Emacs uses the same units as xterm does to interpret the geometry. The width and height are measured in characters, so a large font creates a larger frame than a small font. (If you specify a proportional font, Emacs uses its maximum bounds width as the width unit.) The xoset and yoset are measured in pixels. You do not have to specify all of the elds in the geometry specication. If you omit both xoset and yoset, the window manager decides where to put the Emacs frame, possibly by letting you place it with the mouse. For example, 164x55 species a window 164 columns wide, enough for two ordinary width windows side by side, and 55 lines tall. The default frame width is 80 characters and the default height is 40 lines. You can omit either the width or the height or both. If you start the geometry with an

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

518

integer, Emacs interprets it as the width. If you start with an x followed by an integer, Emacs interprets it as the height. Thus, 81 species just the width; x45 species just the height. If you start with + or -, that introduces an oset, which means both sizes are omitted. Thus, -3 species the xoset only. (If you give just one oset, it is always xoset.) +3-3 species both the xoset and the yoset, placing the frame near the bottom left of the screen. You can specify a default for any or all of the elds in your X resource le (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521), and then override selected elds with a --geometry option. Since the mode line and the echo area occupy the last 2 lines of the frame, the height of the initial text window is 2 less than the height specied in your geometry. In non-X-toolkit versions of Emacs, the menu bar also takes one line of the specied number. But in the X toolkit version, the menu bar is additional and does not count against the specied height. The tool bar, if present, is also additional. Enabling or disabling the menu bar or tool bar alters the amount of space available for ordinary text. Therefore, if Emacs starts up with a tool bar (which is the default), and handles the geometry specication assuming there is a tool bar, and then your initialization le disables the tool bar, you will end up with a frame geometry dierent from what you asked for. To get the intended size with no tool bar, use an X resource to specify no tool bar (see Section D.2 [Table of Resources], page 522); then Emacs will already know theres no tool bar when it processes the specied geometry. When using one of --fullscreen, --maximized, --fullwidth or --fullheight there may be some space around the frame anyway. That is because Emacs rounds the sizes so they are an even number of character heights and widths. Some window managers have options that can make them ignore both programspecied and user-specied positions. If these are set, Emacs fails to position the window correctly.

C.9 Internal and External Borders

An Emacs frame has an internal border and an external border. The internal border is an extra strip of the background color around the text portion of the frame. Emacs itself draws the internal border. The external border is added by the window manager outside the frame; depending on the window manager you use, it may contain various boxes you can click on to move or iconify the window. -ib width --internal-border=width Specify width as the width of the internal border (between the text and the main border), in pixels. -bw width --border-width=width Specify width as the width of the main border, in pixels.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation

519

When you specify the size of the frame, that does not count the borders. The frames position is measured from the outside edge of the external border. Use the -ib n option to specify an internal border n pixels wide. The default is 1. Use -bw n to specify the width of the external border (though the window manager may not pay attention to what you specify). The default width of the external border is 2.

C.10 Frame Titles

An Emacs frame may or may not have a specied title. The frame title, if specied, appears in window decorations and icons as the name of the frame. If an Emacs frame has no specied title, the default title has the form invocationname @machine (if there is only one frame) or the selected windows buer name (if there is more than one frame). You can specify a title for the initial Emacs frame with a command line option: -T title --title=title Specify title as the title for the initial Emacs frame. The --name option (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521) also species the title for the initial Emacs frame.

C.11 Icons
-iconic --iconic Start Emacs in an iconied (minimized) state.

-nbi --no-bitmap-icon Disable the use of the Emacs icon. Most window managers allow you to iconify (or minimize) an Emacs frame, hiding it from sight. Some window managers replace iconied windows with tiny icons, while others remove them entirely from sight. The -iconic option tells Emacs to begin running in an iconied state, rather than showing a frame right away. The text frame doesnt appear until you deiconify (or un-minimize) it. By default, Emacs uses an icon containing the Emacs logo. On desktop environments such as Gnome, this icon is also displayed in other contexts, e.g. when switching into an Emacs frame. The -nbi or --no-bitmap-icon option tells Emacs to let the window manager choose what sort of icon to useusually just a small rectangle containing the frames title.

C.12 Other Display Options

--parent-id ID Open Emacs as a client X window via the XEmbed protocol, with ID as the parent X window id. Currently, this option is mainly useful for developers.

Appendix C: Command Line Arguments for Emacs Invocation -vb --vertical-scroll-bars Enable vertical scroll bars. -lsp pixels --line-spacing=pixels Specify pixels as additional space to put between lines, in pixels. -nbc --no-blinking-cursor Disable the blinking cursor on graphical displays.

520

-D --basic-display Disable the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, and tool tips, and turn o the blinking cursor. This can be useful for making a test case that simplies debugging of display problems. The --xrm option (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521) species additional X resource values.

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

521

Appendix D X Options and Resources

You can customize some X-related aspects of Emacs behavior using X resources, as is usual for programs that use X. When Emacs is compiled with GTK+ support, the appearance of various graphical widgets, such as the menu-bar, scroll-bar, and dialog boxes, is determined by GTK resources. When Emacs is built without GTK+ support, the appearance of these widgets is determined by additional X resources. On MS-Windows, you can customize some of the same aspects using the system registry (see Section C.4.3 [MS-Windows Registry], page 514).

D.1 X Resources
Programs running under the X Window System organize their user options under a hierarchy of classes and resources. You can specify default values for these options in your X resource le, usually named ~/.Xdefaults or ~/.Xresources. Changes in this le do not take eect immediately, because the X server stores its own list of resources; to update it, use the command xrdbfor instance, xrdb ~/.Xdefaults. (MS-Windows systems do not support X resource les; on such systems, Emacs looks for X resources in the Windows Registry, rst under the key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\GNU\Emacs, which aects only the current user and override the system-wide settings, and then under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\GNU\Emacs, which aects all users of the system. The menu and scroll bars are native widgets on MS-Windows, so they are only customizable via the system-wide settings in the Display Control Panel. You can also set resources using the -xrm command line option, as explained below.) Each line in the X resource le species a value for one option or for a collection of related options. The order in which the lines appear in the le does not matter. Each resource specication consists of a program name and a resource name. Case distinctions are signicant in each of these names. Here is an example: emacs.cursorColor: dark green The program name is the name of the executable le to which the resource applies. For Emacs, this is normally emacs. To specify a denition that applies to all instances of Emacs, regardless of the name of the Emacs executable, use Emacs. The resource name is the name of a program setting. For instance, Emacs recognizes a cursorColor resource that controls the color of the text cursor. Resources are grouped into named classes. For instance, the Foreground class contains the cursorColor, foreground and pointerColor resources (see Section D.2 [Table of Resources], page 522). Instead of using a resource name, you can use a class name to specify the default value for all resources in that class, like this: emacs.Foreground: dark green Emacs does not process X resources at all if you set the variable inhibit-xresources to a non-nil value. If you invoke Emacs with the -Q (or --quick)

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

522

command-line option, inhibit-x-resources is automatically set to t (see Section C.2 [Initial Options], page 507).

D.2 Table of X Resources for Emacs

This table lists the X resource names that Emacs recognizes, excluding those that control the appearance of graphical widgets like the menu bar: background (class Background) Background color (see Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76). bitmapIcon (class BitmapIcon) Tell the window manager to display the Emacs icon if on; dont do so if off. See Section C.11 [Icons X], page 519, for a description of the icon. cursorColor (class Foreground) Text cursor color. If this resource is specied when Emacs starts up, Emacs sets its value as the background color of the cursor face (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). cursorBlink (class CursorBlink) If the value of this resource is off or false or 0 at startup, Emacs disables Blink Cursor mode (see Section 11.20 [Cursor Display], page 88). font (class Font) Font name for the default face (see Section 18.8 [Fonts], page 171). You can also specify a fontset name (see Section 19.14 [Fontsets], page 197). fontBackend (class FontBackend) Comma-delimited list of backend(s) to use for drawing fonts, in order of precedence. For instance, the value x,xft tells Emacs to draw fonts using the X core font driver, falling back on the Xft font driver if that fails. Normally, you should leave this resource unset, in which case Emacs tries using all available font backends. foreground (class Foreground) Default foreground color for text. geometry (class Geometry) Window size and position. The value should be a size and position specication, of the same form as in the -g or --geometry command-line option (see Section C.8 [Window Size X], page 517). The size applies to all frames in the Emacs session, but the position applies only to the initial Emacs frame (or, in the case of a resource for a specic frame name, only that frame). Be careful not to specify this resource as emacs*geometry, as that may aect individual menus as well as the main Emacs frame.

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

523

fullscreen (class Fullscreen) The desired fullscreen size. The value can be one of fullboth, maximized, fullwidth or fullheight, which correspond to the command-line options -fs, -mm, -fw, and -fh (see Section C.8 [Window Size X], page 517). Note that this applies to the initial frame only. lineSpacing (class LineSpacing) Additional space between lines, in pixels. menuBar (class MenuBar) If the value of this resource is off or false or 0, Emacs disables Menu Bar mode at startup (see Section 18.14 [Menu Bars], page 176). pointerColor (class Foreground) Color of the mouse cursor. This has no eect in many graphical desktop environments, as they do not let Emacs change the mouse cursor this way. title (class Title) Name to display in the title bar of the initial Emacs frame. toolBar (class ToolBar) If the value of this resource is off or false or 0, Emacs disables Tool Bar mode at startup (see Section 18.15 [Tool Bars], page 177). useXIM (class UseXIM) Disable use of X input methods (XIM) if false or off. This is only relevant if your Emacs is built with XIM support. It might be useful to turn o XIM on slow X client/server links. verticalScrollBars (class ScrollBars) Give frames scroll bars if on; dont have scroll bars if off. You can also use X resources to customize individual Emacs faces (see Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75). For example, setting the resource face.attributeForeground is equivalent to customizing the foreground attribute of the face face. However, we recommend customizing faces from within Emacs, instead of using X resources. See Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439.

D.3 GTK resources

If Emacs is compiled with GTK+ toolkit support, the simplest way to customize its GTK+ widgets (e.g. menus, dialogs, tool bars and scroll bars) is to choose an appropriate GTK+ theme, for example with the GNOME theme selector. In GTK+ version 2, you can also use GTK+ resources to customize the appearance of GTK+ widgets used by Emacs. These resources are specied in either the le ~/.emacs.d/gtkrc (for Emacs-specic GTK+ resources), or ~/.gtkrc-2.0 (for general GTK+ resources). We recommend using ~/.emacs.d/gtkrc, since GTK+

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

524

seems to ignore ~/.gtkrc-2.0 when running GConf with GNOME. Note, however, that some GTK themes may override customizations in ~/.emacs.d/gtkrc; there is nothing we can do about this. GTK+ resources do not aect aspects of Emacs unrelated to GTK+ widgets, such as fonts and colors in the main Emacs window; those are governed by normal X resources (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521). The following sections describe how to customize GTK+ resources for Emacs. For details about GTK+ resources, see the GTK+ API document at http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gtk/gtk-Resource-Files.html. In GTK+ version 3, GTK+ resources have been replaced by a completely dierent system. The appearance of GTK+ widgets is now determined by CSS-like style les: gtk-3.0/gtk.css in the GTK+ installation directory, and ~/.themes/theme /gtk-3.0/gtk.css for local style settings (where theme is the name of the current GTK+ theme). Therefore, the description of GTK+ resources in this section does not apply to GTK+ 3. For details about the GTK+ 3 styling system, see http://developer.gnome.org/gtk3/3.0/GtkCssProvider.html. D.3.1 GTK Resource Basics In a GTK+ 2 resource le (usually ~/.emacs.d/gtkrc), the simplest kinds of resource settings simply assign a value to a variable. For example, putting the following line in the resource le changes the font on all GTK+ widgets to courier-12:
gtk-font-name = "courier 12"

Note that in this case the font name must be supplied as a GTK font pattern (also called a Pango font name ), not as a Fontcong-style font name or XLFD. See Section 18.8 [Fonts], page 171. To customize widgets you rst dene a style, and then apply the style to the widgets. Here is an example that sets the font for menus (# characters indicate comments):
# Dene the style my_style. style "my_style" { font_name = "helvetica bold 14" } # Specify that widget type *emacs-menuitem* uses my_style. widget "*emacs-menuitem*" style "my_style"

The widget name in this example contains wildcards, so the style is applied to all widgets matching *emacs-menuitem*. The widgets are named by the way they are contained, from the outer widget to the inner widget. Here is another example that applies my_style specically to the Emacs menu bar:
widget "Emacs.pane.menubar.*" style "my_style"

Here is a more elaborate example, showing how to change the parts of the scroll bar:
style "scroll" { fg[NORMAL] = "red" # Arrow color.

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

bg[NORMAL] = "yellow" # Thumb and background around arrow. bg[ACTIVE] = "blue" # Trough color. bg[PRELIGHT] = "white" # Thumb color when the mouse is over it. } widget "*verticalScrollBar*" style "scroll"

525

D.3.2 GTK widget names A GTK+ widget is specied by a widget name and a widget class. The widget name refers to a specic widget (e.g. emacs-menuitem), while the widget class refers to a collection of similar widgets (e.g. GtkMenuItem). A widget always has a class, but need not have a name. Absolute names are sequences of widget names or widget classes, corresponding to hierarchies of widgets embedded within other widgets. For example, if a GtkWindow named top contains a GtkVBox named box, which in turn contains a GtkMenuBar called menubar, the absolute class name of the menu-bar widget is GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar, and its absolute widget name is top.box.menubar. GTK+ resource les can contain two types of commands for specifying widget appearances:

widget

species a style for widgets based on the class name, or just the class.

widget_class species a style for widgets based on the class name. See the previous subsection for examples of using the widget command; the widget_ class command is used similarly. Note that the widget name/class and the style must be enclosed in double-quotes, and these commands must be at the top level in the GTK+ resource le. As previously noted, you may specify a widget name or class with shell wildcard syntax: * matches zero or more characters and ? matches one character. This example assigns a style to all widgets:
widget "*" style "my_style"

D.3.3 GTK Widget Names in Emacs The GTK+ widgets used by an Emacs frame are listed below:

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

526

Emacs (class GtkWindow) pane (class GtkVBox) menubar (class GtkMenuBar) [menu item widgets] [unnamed widget] (class GtkHandleBox) emacs-toolbar (class GtkToolbar) [tool bar item widgets] emacs (class GtkFixed) verticalScrollBar (class GtkVScrollbar) The contents of Emacs windows are drawn in the emacs widget. Note that even if there are multiple Emacs windows, each scroll bar widget is named verticalScrollBar. For example, here are two dierent ways to set the menu bar style:
widget "Emacs.pane.menubar.*" style "my_style" widget_class "GtkWindow.GtkVBox.GtkMenuBar.*" style "my_style"

For GTK+ dialogs, Emacs uses a widget named emacs-dialog, of class GtkDialog. For le selection, Emacs uses a widget named emacs-filedialog, of class GtkFileSelection. Because the widgets for pop-up menus and dialogs are free-standing windows and not contained in the Emacs widget, their GTK+ absolute names do not start with Emacs. To customize these widgets, use wildcards like this:
widget "*emacs-dialog*" style "my_dialog_style" widget "*emacs-filedialog* style "my_file_style" widget "*emacs-menuitem* style "my_menu_style"

If you want to apply a style to all menus in Emacs, use this:

widget_class "*Menu*" style "my_menu_style"

D.3.4 GTK styles Here is an example of two GTK+ style declarations:

pixmap_path "/usr/share/pixmaps:/usr/include/X11/pixmaps" style "default" { font_name = "helvetica 12" bg[NORMAL] = { 0.83, 0.80, 0.73 } bg[SELECTED] = { 0.0, 0.55, 0.55 } bg[INSENSITIVE] = { 0.77, 0.77, 0.66 } bg[ACTIVE] = { 0.0, 0.55, 0.55 } bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.0, 0.55, 0.55 } fg[NORMAL] = fg[SELECTED] fg[ACTIVE] = fg[PRELIGHT] "black" = { 0.9, 0.9, 0.9 } "black" = { 0.9, 0.9, 0.9 }

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

527

base[INSENSITIVE] = "#777766" text[INSENSITIVE] = { 0.60, 0.65, 0.57 } bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "background.xpm" bg_pixmap[INSENSITIVE] = "background.xpm" bg_pixmap[ACTIVE] = "background.xpm" bg_pixmap[PRELIGHT] = "<none>" } style "ruler" = "default" { font_name = "helvetica 8" }

The style ruler inherits from default. This way you can build on existing styles. The syntax for fonts and colors is described below. As this example shows, it is possible to specify several values for foreground and background depending on the widgets state. The possible states are: NORMAL ACTIVE This is the default state for widgets. This is the state for a widget that is ready to do something. It is also for the trough of a scroll bar, i.e. bg[ACTIVE] = "red" sets the scroll bar trough to red. Buttons that have been pressed but not released yet (armed) are in this state. This is the state for a widget that can be manipulated, when the mouse pointer is over itfor example when the mouse is over the thumb in the scroll bar or over a menu item. When the mouse is over a button that is not pressed, the button is in this state. This is the state for data that has been selected by the user. It can be selected text or items selected in a list. This state is not used in Emacs. This is the state for widgets that are visible, but they can not be manipulated in the usual wayfor example, buttons that cant be pressed, and disabled menu items. To display disabled menu items in yellow, use fg[INSENSITIVE] = "yellow". Here are the things that can go in a style declaration: bg[state ] = color This species the background color for the widget. Note that editable text doesnt use bg; it uses base instead. base[state ] = color This species the background color for editable text. In Emacs, this color is used for the background of the text elds in the le dialog.

PRELIGHT

SELECTED

INSENSITIVE

Appendix D: X Options and Resources

528

bg_pixmap[state ] = "pixmap " This species an image background (instead of a background color). pixmap should be the image le name. GTK can use a number of image le formats, including XPM, XBM, GIF, JPEG and PNG. If you want a widget to use the same image as its parent, use <parent>. If you dont want any image, use <none>. <none> is the way to cancel a background image inherited from a parent style. You cant specify the le by its absolute le name. GTK looks for the pixmap le in directories specied in pixmap_path. pixmap_path is a colon-separated list of directories within double quotes, specied at the top level in a gtkrc le (i.e. not inside a style denition; see example above):
pixmap_path "/usr/share/pixmaps:/usr/include/X11/pixmaps"

fg[state ] = color This species the foreground color for widgets to use. It is the color of text in menus and buttons, and the color for the arrows in the scroll bar. For editable text, use text. text[state ] = color This is the color for editable text. In Emacs, this color is used for the text elds in the le dialog. font_name = "font " This species the font for text in the widget. font is a GTK-style (or Pango) font name, like Sans Italic 10. See Section 18.8 [Fonts], page 171. The names are case insensitive. There are three ways to specify a color: a color name, an RGB triplet, or a GTK-style RGB triplet. See Section 11.9 [Colors], page 76, for a description of color names and RGB triplets. Color names should be enclosed with double quotes, e.g. "red". RGB triplets should be written without double quotes, e.g. #ff0000. GTK-style RGB triplets have the form { r, g, b }, where r, g and b are either integers in the range 0-65535 or oats in the range 0.0-1.0.

Appendix E: Emacs 23 Antinews

529

Appendix E Emacs 23 Antinews

For those users who live backwards in time, here is information about downgrading to Emacs version 23.4. We hope you will enjoy the greater simplicity that results from the absence of many Emacs 24.2 features. Support for displaying and editing bidirectional text has been removed. Text is now always displayed on the screen in a single consistent directionleft to rightregardless of the underlying script. Similarly, C-f and C-b always move the text cursor to the right and left respectively. Also, RIGHT and LEFT are now equivalent to C-f and C-b, as you might expect, rather than moving forward or backward based on the underlying paragraph direction. Users of right-to-left languages, like Arabic and Hebrew, may adapt by reading and/or editing text in left-to-right order. The Emacs Lisp package manager has been removed. Instead of using a user interface (M-x list-packages), additional Lisp packages must now be installed by hand, which is the most exible and Lispy method anyway. Typically, this just involves editing your init le to add the package installation directory to the load path and dening some autoloads; see each packages commentary section and/or README le for details. The option delete-active-region has been deleted. When the region is active, typing DEL or DELETE no longer deletes the text in the region; it deletes a single character instead. We have reworked how Emacs handles the clipboard and the X primary selection. Commands for killing and yanking, like C-w and C-y, use the primary selection and not the clipboard, so you can use these commands without interfering with cutting or pasting in other programs. The Cut/Copy/Paste menu items are bound to separate clipboard commands, not to the same commands as C-w/M-w/C-y. Selecting text by dragging with the mouse now puts the text in the kill ring, in addition to the primary selection. But note that selecting an active region with C-SPC does not alter the kill ring nor the primary selection, even though the text highlighting is visually identical. In Isearch, C-y and M-y are no longer bound to isearch-yank-kill and isearch-yank-pop respectively. Instead, C-y yanks the rest of the current line into the search string (isearch-yank-line), whereas M-y does isearchyank-kill. The mismatch with the usual meanings of C-y and M-y is unintended. Various completion features have been simplied. The option completioncategory-overrides has been removed, so Emacs uses a single consistent scheme to generate completions, instead of using a separate scheme for (say) buer name completion. Several major modes, such as Shell mode, now implement their own inline completion commands instead of using completionat-point.

Appendix E: Emacs 23 Antinews

530

We have removed several options for controlling how windows are used, such as display-buffer-base-action, display-buffer-alist, windowcombination-limit, and window-combination-resize. The command M-x customize-themes has been removed. Emacs no longer comes with pre-dened themes (you can write your own). Emacs no longer adapts various aspects of its display to GTK+ settings, opting instead for a uniform toolkit-independent look. GTK+ scroll bars are placed on the left, the same position as non-GTK+ X scroll bars. Emacs no longer refers to GTK+ to set the default region face, nor for drawing tooltips. Setting the option delete-by-moving-to-trash to a non-nil now causes all le deletions to use the system trash, even temporary les created by Lisp programs; furthermore, the M-x delete-file and M-x delete-directory commands no longer accept prex arguments to force true deletion. On GNU/Linux and Unix, the default method for sending mail (as specied by send-mail-function) is to use the sendmail program. Emacs no longer asks for a delivery method the rst time you try to send mail, trusting instead that the system is congured for mail delivery, as it ought to be. Several VC features have been removed, including the C-x v + and C-x v m commands for pulling and merging on distributed version control systems, and the ability to view inline log entries in the log buers made by C-x v L. To keep up with decreasing computer memory capacity and disk space, many other functions and les have been eliminated in Emacs 23.4.

Appendix F: Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep

531

Appendix F Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep

This section describes the peculiarities of using Emacs built with the GNUstep libraries on GNU/Linux or other operating systems, or on Mac OS X with native window system support. On Mac OS X, Emacs can be built either without window system support, with X11, or with the Cocoa interface; this section only applies to the Cocoa build. This does not support versions of Mac OS X earlier than 10.4. For various historical and technical reasons, Emacs uses the term Nextstep internally, instead of Cocoa or Mac OS X; for instance, most of the commands and variables described in this section begin with ns-, which is short for Nextstep. NeXTstep was an application interface released by NeXT Inc during the 1980s, of which Cocoa is a direct descendant. Apart from Cocoa, there is another NeXTstepstyle system: GNUstep, which is free software. As of this writing, Emacs GNUstep support is alpha status (see Section F.4 [GNUstep Support], page 534), but we hope to improve it in the future.

F.1 Basic Emacs usage under Mac OS and GNUstep

By default, the ALT and OPTION keys are the same as META. The Mac CMD key is the same as SUPER, and Emacs provides a set of key bindings using this modier key that mimic other Mac / GNUstep applications (see Section F.3 [Mac / GNUstep Events], page 532). You can change these bindings in the usual way (see Section 33.3 [Key Bindings], page 452). The variable ns-right-alternate-modifier controls the behavior of the right ALT and OPTION keys. These keys behave like the left-hand keys if the value is left (the default). A value of control, meta, alt, super, or hyper makes them behave like the corresponding modier keys; a value of none tells Emacs to ignore them. S-Mouse-1 adjusts the region to the click position, just like Mouse-3 (mousesave-then-kill); it does not pop up a menu for changing the default face, as S-Mouse-1 normally does (see Section 11.11 [Text Scale], page 79). This change makes Emacs behave more like other Mac / GNUstep applications. When you open or save les using the menus, or using the Cmd-o and Cmd-S bindings, Emacs uses graphical le dialogs to read le names. However, if you use the regular Emacs key sequences, such as C-x C-f, Emacs uses the minibuer to read le names. On GNUstep, in an X-windows environment you need to use Cmd-c instead of one of the C-w or M-w commands to transfer text to the X primary selection; otherwise, Emacs will use the clipboard selection. Likewise, Cmd-y (instead of C-y) yanks from the X primary selection instead of the kill-ring or clipboard. F.1.1 Grabbing environment variables Many programs which may run under Emacs, like latex or man, depend on the settings of environment variables. If Emacs is launched from the shell, it will automatically inherit these environment variables and its subprocesses will inherit them

Appendix F: Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep

532

from it. But if Emacs is launched from the Finder it is not a descendant of any shell, so its environment variables havent been set, which often causes the subprocesses it launches to behave dierently than they would when launched from the shell. For the PATH and MANPATH variables, a system-wide method of setting PATH is recommended on Mac OS X 10.5 and later, using the /etc/paths les and the /etc/paths.d directory.

F.2 Mac / GNUstep Customization

Emacs can be customized in several ways in addition to the standard customization buers and the Options menu. F.2.1 Font and Color Panels The standard Mac / GNUstep font and color panels are accessible via Lisp commands. The Font Panel may be accessed with M-x ns-popup-font-panel. It will set the default font in the frame most recently used or clicked on. You can bring up a color panel with M-x ns-popup-color-panel and drag the color you want over the Emacs face you want to change. Normal dragging will alter the foreground color. Shift dragging will alter the background color. To discard the settings, create a new frame and close the altered one. Useful in this context is the listing of all faces obtained by M-x list-faces-display. F.2.2 Customization options specic to Mac OS / GNUstep The following customization options are specic to the Nextstep port. ns-auto-hide-menu-bar Non-nil means the menu-bar is hidden by default, but appears if you move the mouse pointer over it. (Requires Mac OS X 10.6 or later.)

F.3 Windowing System Events under Mac OS / GNUstep

Nextstep applications receive a number of special events which have no X equivalent. These are sent as specially dened keys, which do not correspond to any sequence of keystrokes. Under Emacs, these key events can be bound to functions just like ordinary keystrokes. Here is a list of these events. NS-OPEN-FILE This event occurs when another Nextstep application requests that Emacs open a le. A typical reason for this would be a user doubleclicking a le in the Finder application. By default, Emacs responds to this event by opening a new frame and visiting the le in that frame (ns-find-file). As an exception, if the selected buer is the *scratch* buer, Emacs visits the le in the selected frame. You can change how Emacs responds to a ns-open-file event by changing the variable ns-pop-up-frames. Its default value, fresh,

Appendix F: Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep

533

is what we have just described. A value of t means to always visit the le in a new frame. A value of nil means to always visit the le in an existing frame. NS-OPEN-TEMP-FILE This event occurs when another application requests that Emacs open a temporary le. By default, this is handled by just generating a ns-open-file event, the results of which are described above. NS-OPEN-FILE-LINE Some applications, such as ProjectBuilder and gdb, request not only a particular le, but also a particular line or sequence of lines in the le. Emacs handles this by visiting that le and highlighting the requested line (ns-open-file-select-line). NS-DRAG-FILE This event occurs when a user drags les from another application into an Emacs frame. The default behavior is to insert the contents of all the dragged les into the current buer (ns-insert-files). The list of dragged les is stored in the variable ns-input-file. NS-DRAG-COLOR This event occurs when a user drags a color from the color well (or some other source) into an Emacs frame. The default behavior is to alter the foreground color of the area the color was dragged onto (ns-setforeground-at-mouse). If this event is issued with a SHIFT modier, Emacs changes the background color instead (ns-set-backgroundat-mouse). The name of the dragged color is stored in the variable ns-input-color. NS-CHANGE-FONT This event occurs when the user selects a font in a Nextstep font panel (which can be opened with Cmd-t). The default behavior is to adjust the font of the selected frame (ns-respond-to-changefont). The name and size of the selected font are stored in the variables ns-input-font and ns-input-fontsize, respectively. NS-POWER-OFF This event occurs when the user logs out and Emacs is still running, or when Quit Emacs is chosen from the application menu. The default behavior is to save all le-visiting buers. Emacs also allows users to make use of Nextstep services, via a set of commands whose names begin with ns-service- and end with the name of the service. Type M-x ns-service-TAB to see a list of these commands. These functions either operate on marked text (replacing it with the result) or take a string argument and return the result as a string. You can also use the Lisp function ns-perform-service to pass arbitrary strings to arbitrary services and receive the results back. Note that you may need to restart Emacs to access newly-available services.

Appendix F: Emacs and Mac OS / GNUstep

534

F.4 GNUstep Support

Emacs can be built and run under GNUstep, but there are still issues to be addressed. Interested developers should contact [email protected].

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

535

Appendix G Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MSDOS

This section describes peculiarities of using Emacs on Microsoft Windows. Some of these peculiarities are also relevant to Microsofts older MS-DOS operating system (also known as MS-DOG). However, Emacs features that are relevant only to MS-DOS are described in a separate manual (see Section MS-DOS in Specialized Emacs Features ). The behavior of Emacs on MS-Windows is reasonably similar to what is documented in the rest of the manual, including support for long le names, multiple frames, scroll bars, mouse menus, and subprocesses. However, a few special considerations apply, and they are described here.

G.1 How to Start Emacs on MS-Windows

There are several ways of starting Emacs on MS-Windows: 1. From the desktop shortcut icon: either double-click the left mouse button on the icon, or click once, then press RET. The desktop shortcut should specify as its Target (in the Properties of the shortcut) the full absolute le name of runemacs.exe, not of emacs.exe. This is because runemacs.exe hides the console window that would have been created if the target of the shortcut were emacs.exe (which is a console program, as far as Windows is concerned). If you use this method, Emacs starts in the directory specied by the shortcut. To control where that is, right-click on the shortcut, select Properties, and in the Shortcut tab modify the Start in eld to your liking. 2. From the Command Prompt window, by typing emacs RET at the prompt. The Command Prompt window where you did that will not be available for invoking other commands until Emacs exits. In this case, Emacs will start in the current directory of the Windows shell. 3. From the Command Prompt window, by typing runemacs RET at the prompt. The Command Prompt window where you did that will be immediately available for invoking other commands. In this case, Emacs will start in the current directory of the Windows shell. 4. Via emacsclient.exe or emacsclientw.exe, which allow you to invoke Emacs from other programs, and to reuse a running Emacs process for serving editing jobs required by other programs. See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412. The dierence between emacsclient.exe and emacsclientw.exe is that the former is a console program, while the latter is a Windows GUI program. Both programs wait for Emacs to signal that the editing job is nished, before they exit and return control to the program that invoked them. Which one of them to use in each case depends on the expectations of the program that needs editing services. If that program is itself a console (textmode) program, you should use emacsclient.exe, so that any of its messages and prompts appear in the same command window as those of the invoking program. By contrast, if the invoking program is a GUI program, you will be

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

536

better o using emacsclientw.exe, because emacsclient.exe will pop up a command window if it is invoked from a GUI program. A notable situation where you would want emacsclientw.exe is when you right-click on a le in the Windows Explorer and select Open With from the pop-up menu. Use the --alternate-editor= or -a options if Emacs might not be running (or not running as a server) when emacsclient is invokedthat will always give you an editor. When invoked via emacsclient, Emacs will start in the current directory of the program that invoked emacsclient. Note that, due to limitations of MS-Windows, Emacs cannot have both GUI and text-mode frames in the same session. It also cannot open text-mode frames on more than a single Command Prompt window, because each Windows program can have only one console at any given time. For these reasons, if you invoke emacsclient with the -c option, and the Emacs server runs in a text-mode session, Emacs will always create a new text-mode frame in the same Command Prompt window where it was started; a GUI frame will be created only if the server runs in a GUI session. Similarly, if you invoke emacsclient with the -t option, Emacs will create a GUI frame if the server runs in a GUI session, or a text-mode frame when the session runs in text mode in a Command Prompt window. See Section 31.4.2 [emacsclient Options], page 414.

G.2 Text Files and Binary Files

GNU Emacs uses newline characters to separate text lines. This is the convention used on GNU, Unix, and other Posix-compliant systems. By contrast, MS-DOS and MS-Windows normally use carriage-return linefeed, a two-character sequence, to separate text lines. (Linefeed is the same character as newline.) Therefore, convenient editing of typical les with Emacs requires conversion of these end-of-line (EOL) sequences. And that is what Emacs normally does: it converts carriage-return linefeed into newline when reading les, and converts newline into carriage-return linefeed when writing les. The same mechanism that handles conversion of international character codes does this conversion also (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188). One consequence of this special format-conversion of most les is that character positions as reported by Emacs (see Section 4.9 [Position Info], page 23) do not agree with the le size information known to the operating system. In addition, if Emacs recognizes from a les contents that it uses newline rather than carriage-return linefeed as its line separator, it does not perform EOL conversion when reading or writing that le. Thus, you can read and edit les from GNU and Unix systems on MS-DOS with no special eort, and they will retain their Unix-style end-of-line convention after you edit them. The mode line indicates whether end-of-line translation was used for the current buer. If MS-DOS end-of-line translation is in use for the buer, the MS-Windows build of Emacs displays a backslash \ after the coding system mnemonic near the beginning of the mode line (see Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8). If no EOL

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

537

translation was performed, the string (Unix) is displayed instead of the backslash, to alert you that the les EOL format is not the usual carriage-return linefeed. To visit a le and specify whether it uses DOS-style or Unix-style end-of-line, specify a coding system (see Section 19.10 [Text Coding], page 193). For example, C-x RET c unix RET C-x C-f foobar.txt visits the le foobar.txt without converting the EOLs; if some line ends with a carriage-return linefeed pair, Emacs will display ^M at the end of that line. Similarly, you can direct Emacs to save a buer in a specied EOL format with the C-x RET f command. For example, to save a buer with Unix EOL format, type C-x RET f unix RET C-x C-s. If you visit a le with DOS EOL conversion, then save it with Unix EOL format, that eectively converts the le to Unix EOL style, like the dos2unix program. When you use NFS, Samba, or some other similar method to access le systems that reside on computers using GNU or Unix systems, Emacs should not perform end-of-line translation on any les in these le systemsnot even when you create a new le. To request this, designate these le systems as untranslated le systems by calling the function add-untranslated-filesystem. It takes one argument: the le system name, including a drive letter and optionally a directory. For example, (add-untranslated-filesystem "Z:") designates drive Z as an untranslated le system, and (add-untranslated-filesystem "Z:\\foo") designates directory \foo on drive Z as an untranslated le system. Most often you would use add-untranslated-filesystem in your .emacs le, or in site-start.el so that all the users at your site get the benet of it. To countermand the eect of add-untranslated-filesystem, use the function remove-untranslated-filesystem. This function takes one argument, which should be a string just like the one that was used previously with add-untranslated-filesystem. Designating a le system as untranslated does not aect character set conversion, only end-of-line conversion. Essentially, it directs Emacs to create new les with the Unix-style convention of using newline at the end of a line. See Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188. Some kinds of les should not be converted at all, because their contents are not really text. Therefore, Emacs on MS-Windows distinguishes certain les as binary les. (This distinction is not part of MS-Windows; it is made by Emacs only.) Binary les include executable programs, compressed archives, etc. Emacs uses the le name to decide whether to treat a le as binary: the variable file-namebuffer-file-type-alist denes the le-name patterns that indicate binary les. If a le name matches one of the patterns for binary les (those whose associations are of the type (pattern . t), Emacs reads and writes that le using the noconversion coding system (see Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188) which turns o all coding-system conversions, not only the EOL conversion. file-namebuffer-file-type-alist also includes le-name patterns for les which are known to be Windows-style text les with carriage-return linefeed EOL format, such as CONFIG.SYS; Emacs always writes those les with Windows-style EOLs.

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

538

If a le that belongs to an untranslated le system matches one of the le-name patterns in file-name-buffer-file-type-alist, the EOL conversion is determined by file-name-buffer-file-type-alist.

G.3 File Names on MS-Windows

MS-Windows and MS-DOS normally use a backslash, \, to separate name units within a le name, instead of the slash used on other systems. Emacs on MSDOS/MS-Windows permits use of either slash or backslash, and also knows about drive letters in le names. On MS-DOS/MS-Windows, le names are case-insensitive, so Emacs by default ignores letter-case in le names during completion. The variable w32-get-true-file-attributes controls whether Emacs should issue additional system calls to determine more accurately le attributes in primitives like file-attributes and directory-files-and-attributes. These additional calls are needed to report correct le ownership, link counts and le types for special les such as pipes. Without these system calls, le ownership will be attributed to the current user, link counts will be always reported as 1, and special les will be reported as regular les. If the value of this variable is local (the default), Emacs will issue these additional system calls only for les on local xed drives. Any other non-nil value means do this even for removable and remote volumes, where this could potentially slow down Dired and other related features. The value of nil means never issue those system calls. Non-nil values are more useful on NTFS volumes, which support hard links and le security, than on FAT, FAT32, and XFAT volumes.

G.4 Emulation of ls on MS-Windows

Dired normally uses the external program ls to produce the directory listing displayed in Dired buers (see Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329). However, MS-Windows and MS-DOS systems dont come with such a program, although several ports of gnu ls are available. Therefore, Emacs on those systems emulates ls in Lisp, by using the ls-lisp.el package. While ls-lisp.el provides a reasonably full emulation of ls, there are some options and features peculiar to that emulation; for more details, see the documentation of the variables whose names begin with ls-lisp.

G.5 HOME and Startup Directories on MS-Windows

The Windows equivalent of HOME is the user-specic application data directory. The actual location depends on the Windows version; typical values are C:\Documents and Settings\username \Application Data (for Windows 2000/XP/2K3), C:\Users\username \AppData\Roaming (for Windows Vista/7/2008), and either C:\WINDOWS\Application Data or C:\WINDOWS\Profiles\username \Application Data (Windows 9X/ME). If this

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

539

directory does not exist or cannot be accessed, Emacs falls back to C:\ as the default value of HOME. You can override this default value of HOME by explicitly setting the environment variable HOME to point to any directory on your system. HOME can be set either from the command shell prompt or from Properties dialog of My Computer. HOME can also be set in the system registry, see Section C.4.3 [MS-Windows Registry], page 514. For compatibility with older versions of Emacs1 , if there is a le named .emacs in C:\, the root directory of drive C:, and HOME is set neither in the environment nor in the Registry, Emacs will treat C:\ as the default HOME location, and will not look in the application data directory, even if it exists. Note that only .emacs is looked for in C:\; the older name _emacs (see below) is not. This use of C:\.emacs to dene HOME is deprecated. Whatever the nal place is, Emacs sets the internal value of the HOME environment variable to point to it, and it will use that location for other les and directories it normally looks for or creates in your home directory. You can always nd out what Emacs thinks is your home directorys location by typing C-x d ~/ RET. This should present the list of les in the home directory, and show its full name on the rst line. Likewise, to visit your init le, type C-x C-f ~/.emacs RET (assuming the les name is .emacs). The home directory is where your init le is stored. It can have any name mentioned in Section 33.4 [Init File], page 461. Because MS-DOS does not allow le names with leading dots, and older Windows systems made it hard to create les with such names, the Windows port of Emacs supports an init le name _emacs, if such a le exists in the home directory and .emacs does not. This name is considered obsolete.

G.6 Keyboard Usage on MS-Windows

This section describes the Windows-specic features related to keyboard input in Emacs. Many key combinations (known as keyboard shortcuts) that have conventional uses in MS-Windows programs conict with traditional Emacs key bindings. (These Emacs key bindings were established years before Microsoft was founded.) Examples of conicts include C-c, C-x, C-z, C-a, and W-SPC. You can redene some of them with meanings more like the MS-Windows meanings by enabling CUA Mode (see Section 9.6 [CUA Bindings], page 64). The F10 key on Windows activates the menu bar in a way that makes it possible to use the menus without a mouse. In this mode, the arrow keys traverse the menus, RET selects a highlighted menu item, and ESC closes the menu. See Info le emacs, node Windows Keyboard, for information about additional Windows-specic variables in this category. The variable w32-apps-modifier controls the eect of the APPS key (usually located between the right ALT and the right CTRL keys). Its value can be one of
1

Older versions of Emacs didnt check the application data directory.

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

540

the symbols hyper, super, meta, alt, control, or shift for the respective modier, or nil to appear as the key apps. The default is nil. The variable w32-lwindow-modifier determines the eect of the left Windows key (usually labeled with START and the Windows logo). If its value is nil (the default), the key will produce the symbol lwindow. Setting it to one of the symbols hyper, super, meta, alt, control, or shift will produce the respective modier. A similar variable w32-rwindow-modifier controls the eect of the right Windows key, and w32-scroll-lock-modifier does the same for the SCRLOCK key. If these variables are set to nil, the right Windows key produces the symbol rwindow and SCRLOCK produces the symbol scroll. Emacs compiled as a native Windows application normally turns o the Windows feature that tapping the ALT key invokes the Windows menu. The reason is that the ALT serves as META in Emacs. When using Emacs, users often press the META key temporarily and then change their minds; if this has the eect of bringing up the Windows menu, it alters the meaning of subsequent commands. Many users nd this frustrating. You can re-enable Windowss default handling of tapping the ALT key by setting w32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value.

G.7 Mouse Usage on MS-Windows

This section describes the Windows-specic variables related to the mouse. The variable w32-mouse-button-tolerance species the time interval, in milliseconds, for faking middle mouse button press on 2-button mice. If both mouse buttons are depressed within this time interval, Emacs generates a middle mouse button click event instead of a double click on one of the buttons. If the variable w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system is non-nil, Emacs passes the fourth and fth mouse buttons to Windows. The variable w32-swap-mouse-buttons controls which of the 3 mouse buttons generates the mouse-2 events. When it is nil (the default), the middle button generates mouse-2 and the right button generates mouse-3 events. If this variable is non-nil, the roles of these two buttons are reversed.

G.8 Subprocesses on Windows 9X/ME and Windows NT/2K/XP

Emacs compiled as a native Windows application (as opposed to the DOS version) includes full support for asynchronous subprocesses. In the Windows version, synchronous and asynchronous subprocesses work ne on both Windows 9X/ME and Windows NT/2K/XP as long as you run only 32-bit Windows applications. However, when you run a DOS application in a subprocess, you may encounter problems or be unable to run the application at all; and if you run two DOS applications at the same time in two subprocesses, you may have to reboot your system. Since the standard command interpreter (and most command line utilities) on Windows 9X are DOS applications, these problems are signicant when using that system. But theres nothing we can do about them; only Microsoft can x them.

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

541

If you run just one DOS application subprocess, the subprocess should work as expected as long as it is well-behaved and does not perform direct screen access or other unusual actions. If you have a CPU monitor application, your machine will appear to be 100% busy even when the DOS application is idle, but this is only an artifact of the way CPU monitors measure processor load. You must terminate the DOS application before you start any other DOS application in a dierent subprocess. Emacs is unable to interrupt or terminate a DOS subprocess. The only way you can terminate such a subprocess is by giving it a command that tells its program to exit. If you attempt to run two DOS applications at the same time in separate subprocesses, the second one that is started will be suspended until the rst one nishes, even if either or both of them are asynchronous. If you can go to the rst subprocess, and tell it to exit, the second subprocess should continue normally. However, if the second subprocess is synchronous, Emacs itself will be hung until the rst subprocess nishes. If it will not nish without user input, then you have no choice but to reboot if you are running on Windows 9X. If you are running on Windows NT/2K/XP, you can use a process viewer application to kill the appropriate instance of NTVDM instead (this will terminate both DOS subprocesses). If you have to reboot Windows 9X in this situation, do not use the Shutdown command on the Start menu; that usually hangs the system. Instead, type CTL-ALT-DEL and then choose Shutdown. That usually works, although it may take a few minutes to do its job. The variable w32-quote-process-args controls how Emacs quotes the process arguments. Non-nil means quote with the " character. If the value is a character, Emacs uses that character to escape any quote characters that appear; otherwise it chooses a suitable escape character based on the type of the program.

G.9 Printing and MS-Windows

Printing commands, such as lpr-buffer (see Section 31.5 [Printing], page 417) and ps-print-buffer (see Section 31.5.1 [PostScript], page 418) work in MS-DOS and MS-Windows by sending the output to one of the printer ports, if a Posix-style lpr program is unavailable. The same Emacs variables control printing on all systems, but in some cases they have dierent default values on MS-DOS and MS-Windows. Emacs on MS Windows attempts to determine your default printer automatically (using the function default-printer-name). But in some rare cases this can fail, or you may wish to use a dierent printer from within Emacs. The rest of this section explains how to tell Emacs which printer to use. If you want to use your local printer, then set the Lisp variable lpr-command to "" (its default value on Windows) and printer-name to the name of the printer portfor example, "PRN", the usual local printer port, or "LPT2", or "COM1" for a serial printer. You can also set printer-name to a le name, in which case printed output is actually appended to that le. If you set printer-name to "NUL", printed output is silently discarded (sent to the system null device).

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

542

You can also use a printer shared by another machine by setting printer-name to the UNC share name for that printerfor example, "//joes_pc/hp4si". (It doesnt matter whether you use forward slashes or backslashes here.) To nd out the names of shared printers, run the command net view from the command prompt to obtain a list of servers, and net view server-name to see the names of printers (and directories) shared by that server. Alternatively, click the Network Neighborhood icon on your desktop, and look for machines that share their printers via the network. If the printer doesnt appear in the output of net view, or if setting printername to the UNC share name doesnt produce a hardcopy on that printer, you can use the net use command to connect a local print port such as "LPT2" to the networked printer. For example, typing net use LPT2: \\joes_pc\hp4si2 causes Windows to capture the LPT2 port and redirect the printed material to the printer connected to the machine joes_pc. After this command, setting printer-name to "LPT2" should produce the hardcopy on the networked printer. With some varieties of Windows network software, you can instruct Windows to capture a specic printer port such as "LPT2", and redirect it to a networked printer via the Control Panel->Printers applet instead of net use. If you set printer-name to a le name, its best to use an absolute le name. Emacs changes the working directory according to the default directory of the current buer, so if the le name in printer-name is relative, you will end up with several such les, each one in the directory of the buer from which the printing was done. If the value of printer-name is correct, but printing does not produce the hardcopy on your printer, it is possible that your printer does not support printing plain text (some cheap printers omit this functionality). In that case, try the PostScript print commands, described below. The commands print-buffer and print-region call the pr program, or use special switches to the lpr program, to produce headers on each printed page. MS-DOS and MS-Windows dont normally have these programs, so by default, the variable lpr-headers-switches is set so that the requests to print page headers are silently ignored. Thus, print-buffer and print-region produce the same output as lpr-buffer and lpr-region, respectively. If you do have a suitable pr program (for example, from GNU Coreutils), set lpr-headers-switches to nil; Emacs will then call pr to produce the page headers, and print the resulting output as specied by printer-name. Finally, if you do have an lpr work-alike, you can set the variable lpr-command to "lpr". Then Emacs will use lpr for printing, as on other systems. (If the name of the program isnt lpr, set lpr-command to the appropriate value.) The variable lpr-switches has its standard meaning when lpr-command is not "". If the variable printer-name has a string value, it is used as the value for the -P option to lpr, as on Unix.
2

Note that the net use command requires the UNC share name to be typed with the Windows-style backslashes, while the value of printer-name can be set with either forward- or backslashes.

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

543

A parallel set of variables, ps-lpr-command, ps-lpr-switches, and ps-printer-name (see Section 31.5.2 [PostScript Variables], page 419), denes how PostScript les should be printed. These variables are used in the same way as the corresponding variables described above for non-PostScript printing. Thus, the value of ps-printer-name is used as the name of the device (or le) to which PostScript output is sent, just as printer-name is used for non-PostScript printing. (There are two distinct sets of variables in case you have two printers attached to two dierent ports, and only one of them is a PostScript printer.) The default value of the variable ps-lpr-command is "", which causes PostScript output to be sent to the printer port specied by ps-printer-name; but ps-lprcommand can also be set to the name of a program which will accept PostScript les. Thus, if you have a non-PostScript printer, you can set this variable to the name of a PostScript interpreter program (such as Ghostscript). Any switches that need to be passed to the interpreter program are specied using ps-lpr-switches. (If the value of ps-printer-name is a string, it will be added to the list of switches as the value for the -P option. This is probably only useful if you are using lpr, so when using an interpreter typically you would set ps-printer-name to something other than a string so it is ignored.) For example, to use Ghostscript for printing on the systems default printer, put this in your .emacs le: (setq ps-printer-name t) (setq ps-lpr-command "D:/gs6.01/bin/gswin32c.exe") (setq ps-lpr-switches ("-q" "-dNOPAUSE" "-dBATCH" "-sDEVICE=mswinpr2" "-sPAPERSIZE=a4")) (This assumes that Ghostscript is installed in the D:/gs6.01 directory.)

G.10 Specifying Fonts on MS-Windows

Starting with Emacs 23, fonts are specied by their name, size and optional properties. The format for specifying fonts comes from the fontcong library used in modern Free desktops: [Family[-PointSize]][:Option1=Value1[:Option2=Value2[...]]] The old XLFD based format is also supported for backwards compatibility. Emacs 23 and later supports a number of font backends. Currently, the gdi and uniscribe backends are supported on Windows. The gdi font backend is available on all versions of Windows, and supports all fonts that are natively supported by Windows. The uniscribe font backend is available on Windows 2000 and later, and supports TrueType and OpenType fonts. Some languages requiring complex layout can only be properly supported by the Uniscribe backend. By default, both backends are enabled if supported, with uniscribe taking priority over gdi. To override that and use the GDI backend even if Uniscribe is available, invoke Emacs with the -xrm Emacs.fontBackend:gdi command-line argument, or add a Emacs.fontBackend resource with the value gdi in the Registry under either the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\GNU\Emacs or

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS

544

the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\GNU\Emacs key (see Section D.1 [Resources], page 521). Optional properties common to all font backends on MS-Windows are: weight Species the weight of the font. Special values light, medium, demibold, bold, and black can be specied without weight= (e.g., Courier New-12:bold). Otherwise, the weight should be a numeric value between 100 and 900, or one of the named weights in fontweight-table. If unspecied, a regular font is assumed. Species whether the font is italic. Special values roman, italic and oblique can be specied without slant= (e.g., Courier New-12:italic). Otherwise, the slant should be a numeric value, or one of the named slants in font-slant-table. On Windows, any slant above 150 is treated as italics, and anything below as roman. Species the font family, but normally this will be specied at the start of the font name. Species the font size in pixels. This can be used instead of the point size specied after the family name. Species additional style information for the font. On MS-Windows, the values mono, sans, serif, script and decorative are recognized. These are most useful as a fallback with the font family left unspecied. Species the character set registry that the font is expected to cover. Most TrueType and OpenType fonts will be Unicode fonts that cover several national character sets, but you can narrow down the selection of fonts to those that support a particular character set by using a specic registry from w32-charset-info-alist here. Species how the font is spaced. The p spacing species a proportional font, and m or c specify a monospaced font. Not used on Windows, but for informational purposes and to prevent problems with code that expects it to be set, is set internally to raster for bitmapped fonts, outline for scalable fonts, or unknown if the type cannot be determined as one of those.

slant

family pixelsize adstyle

registry

spacing foundry

Options specic to GDI fonts: script Species a Unicode subrange the font should support. The following scripts are recognized on Windows: latin, greek, coptic, cyrillic, armenian, hebrew, arabic, syriac, nko, thaana, devanagari, bengali, gurmukhi, gujarati, oriya, tamil, telugu, kannada, malayam, sinhala, thai, lao, tibetan, myanmar, georgian, hangul, ethiopic, cherokee, canadian-aboriginal, ogham, runic, khmer, mongolian, symbol, braille, han, ideographic-description, cjk-misc, kana, bopomofo, kanbun, yi, byzantine-musical-symbol, musical-symbol, and mathematical.

Appendix G: Emacs and Microsoft Windows/MS-DOS antialias

545

Species the antialiasing method. The value none means no antialiasing, standard means use standard antialiasing, subpixel means use subpixel antialiasing (known as Cleartype on Windows), and natural means use subpixel antialiasing with adjusted spacing between letters. If unspecied, the font will use the system default antialiasing.

G.11 Miscellaneous Windows-specic features

This section describes miscellaneous Windows-specic features. The variable w32-use-visible-system-caret is a ag that determines whether to make the system caret visible. The default when no screen reader software is in use is nil, which means Emacs draws its own cursor to indicate the position of point. A non-nil value means Emacs will indicate point location with the system caret; this facilitates use of screen reader software, and is the default when such software is detected when running Emacs. When this variable is non-nil, other variables aecting the cursor display have no eect. See Info le emacs, node Windows Misc, for information about additional Windows-specic variables in this category.

The GNU Manifesto

546

The GNU Manifesto

The GNU Manifesto which appears below was written by Richard Stallman at the beginning of the GNU project, to ask for participation and support. For the rst few years, it was updated in minor ways to account for developments, but now it seems best to leave it unchanged as most people have seen it. Since that time, we have learned about certain common misunderstandings that dierent wording could help avoid. Footnotes added in 1993 help clarify these points. For up-to-date information about available GNU software, please see our web site, http://www.gnu.org. For software tasks and other ways to contribute, see http://www.gnu.org/help.

Whats GNU? Gnus Not Unix!

GNU, which stands for Gnus Not Unix, is the name for the complete Unixcompatible software system which I am writing so that I can give it away free to everyone who can use it.1 Several other volunteers are helping me. Contributions of time, money, programs and equipment are greatly needed. So far we have an Emacs text editor with Lisp for writing editor commands, a source level debugger, a yacc-compatible parser generator, a linker, and around 35 utilities. A shell (command interpreter) is nearly completed. A new portable optimizing C compiler has compiled itself and may be released this year. An initial kernel exists but many more features are needed to emulate Unix. When the kernel and compiler are nished, it will be possible to distribute a GNU system suitable for program development. We will use TEX as our text formatter, but an nro is being worked on. We will use the free, portable X window system as well. After this we will add a portable Common Lisp, an Empire game, a spreadsheet, and hundreds of other things, plus on-line documentation. We hope to supply, eventually, everything useful that normally comes with a Unix system, and more. GNU will be able to run Unix programs, but will not be identical to Unix. We will make all improvements that are convenient, based on our experience with other operating systems. In particular, we plan to have longer le names, le version numbers, a crashproof le system, le name completion perhaps, terminal-independent
1

The wording here was careless. The intention was that nobody would have to pay for permission to use the GNU system. But the words dont make this clear, and people often interpret them as saying that copies of GNU should always be distributed at little or no charge. That was never the intent; later on, the manifesto mentions the possibility of companies providing the service of distribution for a prot. Subsequently I have learned to distinguish carefully between free in the sense of freedom and free in the sense of price. Free software is software that users have the freedom to distribute and change. Some users may obtain copies at no charge, while others pay to obtain copiesand if the funds help support improving the software, so much the better. The important thing is that everyone who has a copy has the freedom to cooperate with others in using it.

The GNU Manifesto

547

display support, and perhaps eventually a Lisp-based window system through which several Lisp programs and ordinary Unix programs can share a screen. Both C and Lisp will be available as system programming languages. We will try to support UUCP, MIT Chaosnet, and Internet protocols for communication. GNU is aimed initially at machines in the 68000/16000 class with virtual memory, because they are the easiest machines to make it run on. The extra eort to make it run on smaller machines will be left to someone who wants to use it on them. To avoid horrible confusion, please pronounce the G in the word GNU when it is the name of this project.

Why I Must Write GNU

I consider that the golden rule requires that if I like a program I must share it with other people who like it. Software sellers want to divide the users and conquer them, making each user agree not to share with others. I refuse to break solidarity with other users in this way. I cannot in good conscience sign a nondisclosure agreement or a software license agreement. For years I worked within the Articial Intelligence Lab to resist such tendencies and other inhospitalities, but eventually they had gone too far: I could not remain in an institution where such things are done for me against my will. So that I can continue to use computers without dishonor, I have decided to put together a sucient body of free software so that I will be able to get along without any software that is not free. I have resigned from the AI lab to deny MIT any legal excuse to prevent me from giving GNU away.

Why GNU Will Be Compatible with Unix

Unix is not my ideal system, but it is not too bad. The essential features of Unix seem to be good ones, and I think I can ll in what Unix lacks without spoiling them. And a system compatible with Unix would be convenient for many other people to adopt.

How GNU Will Be Available

GNU is not in the public domain. Everyone will be permitted to modify and redistribute GNU, but no distributor will be allowed to restrict its further redistribution. That is to say, proprietary modications will not be allowed. I want to make sure that all versions of GNU remain free.

Why Many Other Programmers Want to Help

I have found many other programmers who are excited about GNU and want to help. Many programmers are unhappy about the commercialization of system software. It may enable them to make more money, but it requires them to feel in

The GNU Manifesto

548

conict with other programmers in general rather than feel as comrades. The fundamental act of friendship among programmers is the sharing of programs; marketing arrangements now typically used essentially forbid programmers to treat others as friends. The purchaser of software must choose between friendship and obeying the law. Naturally, many decide that friendship is more important. But those who believe in law often do not feel at ease with either choice. They become cynical and think that programming is just a way of making money. By working on and using GNU rather than proprietary programs, we can be hospitable to everyone and obey the law. In addition, GNU serves as an example to inspire and a banner to rally others to join us in sharing. This can give us a feeling of harmony which is impossible if we use software that is not free. For about half the programmers I talk to, this is an important happiness that money cannot replace.

How You Can Contribute

I am asking computer manufacturers for donations of machines and money. Im asking individuals for donations of programs and work. One consequence you can expect if you donate machines is that GNU will run on them at an early date. The machines should be complete, ready to use systems, approved for use in a residential area, and not in need of sophisticated cooling or power. I have found very many programmers eager to contribute part-time work for GNU. For most projects, such part-time distributed work would be very hard to coordinate; the independently-written parts would not work together. But for the particular task of replacing Unix, this problem is absent. A complete Unix system contains hundreds of utility programs, each of which is documented separately. Most interface specications are xed by Unix compatibility. If each contributor can write a compatible replacement for a single Unix utility, and make it work properly in place of the original on a Unix system, then these utilities will work right when put together. Even allowing for Murphy to create a few unexpected problems, assembling these components will be a feasible task. (The kernel will require closer communication and will be worked on by a small, tight group.) If I get donations of money, I may be able to hire a few people full or part time. The salary wont be high by programmers standards, but Im looking for people for whom building community spirit is as important as making money. I view this as a way of enabling dedicated people to devote their full energies to working on GNU by sparing them the need to make a living in another way.

Why All Computer Users Will Benet

Once GNU is written, everyone will be able to obtain good system software free, just like air.2
2

This is another place I failed to distinguish carefully between the two dierent meanings of free. The statement as it stands is not falseyou can get copies of GNU software at no charge, from your friends or over the net. But it does suggest the wrong idea.

The GNU Manifesto

549

This means much more than just saving everyone the price of a Unix license. It means that much wasteful duplication of system programming eort will be avoided. This eort can go instead into advancing the state of the art. Complete system sources will be available to everyone. As a result, a user who needs changes in the system will always be free to make them himself, or hire any available programmer or company to make them for him. Users will no longer be at the mercy of one programmer or company which owns the sources and is in sole position to make changes. Schools will be able to provide a much more educational environment by encouraging all students to study and improve the system code. Harvards computer lab used to have the policy that no program could be installed on the system if its sources were not on public display, and upheld it by actually refusing to install certain programs. I was very much inspired by this. Finally, the overhead of considering who owns the system software and what one is or is not entitled to do with it will be lifted. Arrangements to make people pay for using a program, including licensing of copies, always incur a tremendous cost to society through the cumbersome mechanisms necessary to gure out how much (that is, which programs) a person must pay for. And only a police state can force everyone to obey them. Consider a space station where air must be manufactured at great cost: charging each breather per liter of air may be fair, but wearing the metered gas mask all day and all night is intolerable even if everyone can aord to pay the air bill. And the TV cameras everywhere to see if you ever take the mask o are outrageous. Its better to support the air plant with a head tax and chuck the masks. Copying all or parts of a program is as natural to a programmer as breathing, and as productive. It ought to be as free.

Some Easily Rebutted Objections to GNUs Goals

Nobody will use it if it is free, because that means they cant rely on any support. You have to charge for the program to pay for providing the support. If people would rather pay for GNU plus service than get GNU free without service, a company to provide just service to people who have obtained GNU free ought to be protable.3 We must distinguish between support in the form of real programming work and mere handholding. The former is something one cannot rely on from a software vendor. If your problem is not shared by enough people, the vendor will tell you to get lost. If your business needs to be able to rely on support, the only way is to have all the necessary sources and tools. Then you can hire any available person to x your problem; you are not at the mercy of any individual. With Unix, the price of sources puts this out of consideration for most businesses. With GNU this will
3

Several such companies now exist.

The GNU Manifesto

550

be easy. It is still possible for there to be no available competent person, but this problem cannot be blamed on distribution arrangements. GNU does not eliminate all the worlds problems, only some of them. Meanwhile, the users who know nothing about computers need handholding: doing things for them which they could easily do themselves but dont know how. Such services could be provided by companies that sell just hand-holding and repair service. If it is true that users would rather spend money and get a product with service, they will also be willing to buy the service having got the product free. The service companies will compete in quality and price; users will not be tied to any particular one. Meanwhile, those of us who dont need the service should be able to use the program without paying for the service. You cannot reach many people without advertising, and you must charge for the program to support that. Its no use advertising a program people can get free. There are various forms of free or very cheap publicity that can be used to inform numbers of computer users about something like GNU. But it may be true that one can reach more microcomputer users with advertising. If this is really so, a business which advertises the service of copying and mailing GNU for a fee ought to be successful enough to pay for its advertising and more. This way, only the users who benet from the advertising pay for it. On the other hand, if many people get GNU from their friends, and such companies dont succeed, this will show that advertising was not really necessary to spread GNU. Why is it that free market advocates dont want to let the free market decide this?4 My company needs a proprietary operating system to get a competitive edge. GNU will remove operating system software from the realm of competition. You will not be able to get an edge in this area, but neither will your competitors be able to get an edge over you. You and they will compete in other areas, while beneting mutually in this one. If your business is selling an operating system, you will not like GNU, but thats tough on you. If your business is something else, GNU can save you from being pushed into the expensive business of selling operating systems. I would like to see GNU development supported by gifts from many manufacturers and users, reducing the cost to each.5 Dont programmers deserve a reward for their creativity? If anything deserves a reward, it is social contribution. Creativity can be a social contribution, but only in so far as society is free to use the results. If programmers
4

The Free Software Foundation raises most of its funds from a distribution service, although it is a charity rather than a company. If no one chooses to obtain copies by ordering from the FSF, it will be unable to do its work. But this does not mean that proprietary restrictions are justied to force every user to pay. If a small fraction of all the users order copies from the FSF, that is sucient to keep the FSF aoat. So we ask users to choose to support us in this way. Have you done your part? A group of computer companies recently pooled funds to support maintenance of the GNU C Compiler.

The GNU Manifesto

551

deserve to be rewarded for creating innovative programs, by the same token they deserve to be punished if they restrict the use of these programs. Shouldnt a programmer be able to ask for a reward for his creativity? There is nothing wrong with wanting pay for work, or seeking to maximize ones income, as long as one does not use means that are destructive. But the means customary in the eld of software today are based on destruction. Extracting money from users of a program by restricting their use of it is destructive because the restrictions reduce the amount and the ways that the program can be used. This reduces the amount of wealth that humanity derives from the program. When there is a deliberate choice to restrict, the harmful consequences are deliberate destruction. The reason a good citizen does not use such destructive means to become wealthier is that, if everyone did so, we would all become poorer from the mutual destructiveness. This is Kantian ethics; or, the Golden Rule. Since I do not like the consequences that result if everyone hoards information, I am required to consider it wrong for one to do so. Specically, the desire to be rewarded for ones creativity does not justify depriving the world in general of all or part of that creativity. Wont programmers starve? I could answer that nobody is forced to be a programmer. Most of us cannot manage to get any money for standing on the street and making faces. But we are not, as a result, condemned to spend our lives standing on the street making faces, and starving. We do something else. But that is the wrong answer because it accepts the questioners implicit assumption: that without ownership of software, programmers cannot possibly be paid a cent. Supposedly it is all or nothing. The real reason programmers will not starve is that it will still be possible for them to get paid for programming; just not paid as much as now. Restricting copying is not the only basis for business in software. It is the most common basis because it brings in the most money. If it were prohibited, or rejected by the customer, software business would move to other bases of organization which are now used less often. There are always numerous ways to organize any kind of business. Probably programming will not be as lucrative on the new basis as it is now. But that is not an argument against the change. It is not considered an injustice that sales clerks make the salaries that they now do. If programmers made the same, that would not be an injustice either. (In practice they would still make considerably more than that.) Dont people have a right to control how their creativity is used? Control over the use of ones ideas really constitutes control over other peoples lives; and it is usually used to make their lives more dicult.

The GNU Manifesto

552

People who have studied the issue of intellectual property rights6 carefully (such as lawyers) say that there is no intrinsic right to intellectual property. The kinds of supposed intellectual property rights that the government recognizes were created by specic acts of legislation for specic purposes. For example, the patent system was established to encourage inventors to disclose the details of their inventions. Its purpose was to help society rather than to help inventors. At the time, the life span of 17 years for a patent was short compared with the rate of advance of the state of the art. Since patents are an issue only among manufacturers, for whom the cost and eort of a license agreement are small compared with setting up production, the patents often do not do much harm. They do not obstruct most individuals who use patented products. The idea of copyright did not exist in ancient times, when authors frequently copied other authors at length in works of non-ction. This practice was useful, and is the only way many authors works have survived even in part. The copyright system was created expressly for the purpose of encouraging authorship. In the domain for which it was inventedbooks, which could be copied economically only on a printing pressit did little harm, and did not obstruct most of the individuals who read the books. All intellectual property rights are just licenses granted by society because it was thought, rightly or wrongly, that society as a whole would benet by granting them. But in any particular situation, we have to ask: are we really better o granting such license? What kind of act are we licensing a person to do? The case of programs today is very dierent from that of books a hundred years ago. The fact that the easiest way to copy a program is from one neighbor to another, the fact that a program has both source code and object code which are distinct, and the fact that a program is used rather than read and enjoyed, combine to create a situation in which a person who enforces a copyright is harming society as a whole both materially and spiritually; in which a person should not do so regardless of whether the law enables him to. Competition makes things get done better. The paradigm of competition is a race: by rewarding the winner, we encourage everyone to run faster. When capitalism really works this way, it does a good job; but its defenders are wrong in assuming it always works this way. If the runners forget why the reward is oered and become intent on winning, no matter how, they may nd other strategiessuch as, attacking other runners. If the runners get into a st ght, they will all nish late.
6

In the 80s I had not yet realized how confusing it was to speak of the issue of intellectual property. That term is obviously biased; more subtle is the fact that it lumps together various disparate laws which raise very dierent issues. Nowadays I urge people to reject the term intellectual property entirely, lest it lead others to suppose that those laws form one coherent issue. The way to be clear is to discuss patents, copyrights, and trademarks separately. See http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/not-ipr.xhtml for more explanation of how this term spreads confusion and bias.

The GNU Manifesto

553

Proprietary and secret software is the moral equivalent of runners in a st ght. Sad to say, the only referee weve got does not seem to object to ghts; he just regulates them (For every ten yards you run, you can re one shot). He really ought to break them up, and penalize runners for even trying to ght. Wont everyone stop programming without a monetary incentive? Actually, many people will program with absolutely no monetary incentive. Programming has an irresistible fascination for some people, usually the people who are best at it. There is no shortage of professional musicians who keep at it even though they have no hope of making a living that way. But really this question, though commonly asked, is not appropriate to the situation. Pay for programmers will not disappear, only become less. So the right question is, will anyone program with a reduced monetary incentive? My experience shows that they will. For more than ten years, many of the worlds best programmers worked at the Articial Intelligence Lab for far less money than they could have had anywhere else. They got many kinds of non-monetary rewards: fame and appreciation, for example. And creativity is also fun, a reward in itself. Then most of them left when oered a chance to do the same interesting work for a lot of money. What the facts show is that people will program for reasons other than riches; but if given a chance to make a lot of money as well, they will come to expect and demand it. Low-paying organizations do poorly in competition with high-paying ones, but they do not have to do badly if the high-paying ones are banned. We need the programmers desperately. If they demand that we stop helping our neighbors, we have to obey. Youre never so desperate that you have to obey this sort of demand. Remember: millions for defense, but not a cent for tribute! Programmers need to make a living somehow. In the short run, this is true. However, there are plenty of ways that programmers could make a living without selling the right to use a program. This way is customary now because it brings programmers and businessmen the most money, not because it is the only way to make a living. It is easy to nd other ways if you want to nd them. Here are a number of examples. A manufacturer introducing a new computer will pay for the porting of operating systems onto the new hardware. The sale of teaching, hand-holding and maintenance services could also employ programmers.

The GNU Manifesto

554

People with new ideas could distribute programs as freeware7 , asking for donations from satised users, or selling hand-holding services. I have met people who are already working this way successfully. Users with related needs can form users groups, and pay dues. A group would contract with programming companies to write programs that the groups members would like to use. All sorts of development can be funded with a Software Tax: Suppose everyone who buys a computer has to pay x percent of the price as a software tax. The government gives this to an agency like the NSF to spend on software development. But if the computer buyer makes a donation to software development himself, he can take a credit against the tax. He can donate to the project of his own choosingoften, chosen because he hopes to use the results when it is done. He can take a credit for any amount of donation up to the total tax he had to pay. The total tax rate could be decided by a vote of the payers of the tax, weighted according to the amount they will be taxed on. The consequences: The computer-using community supports software development. This community decides what level of support is needed. Users who care which projects their share is spent on can choose this for themselves. In the long run, making programs free is a step toward the post-scarcity world, where nobody will have to work very hard just to make a living. People will be free to devote themselves to activities that are fun, such as programming, after spending the necessary ten hours a week on required tasks such as legislation, family counseling, robot repair and asteroid prospecting. There will be no need to be able to make a living from programming. We have already greatly reduced the amount of work that the whole society must do for its actual productivity, but only a little of this has translated itself into leisure for workers because much nonproductive activity is required to accompany productive activity. The main causes of this are bureaucracy and isometric struggles against competition. Free software will greatly reduce these drains in the area of software production. We must do this, in order for technical gains in productivity to translate into less work for us.

Subsequently we have discovered the need to distinguish between free software and freeware. The term freeware means software you are free to redistribute, but usually you are not free to study and change the source code, so most of it is not free software. See http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/words-to-avoid.html for more explanation.

Glossary

555

Glossary
Abbrev An abbrev is a text string that expands into a dierent text string when present in the buer. For example, you might dene a few letters as an abbrev for a long phrase that you want to insert frequently. See Chapter 26 [Abbrevs], page 322. Aborting means getting out of a recursive edit (q.v.). The commands C-] and M-x top-level are used for this. See Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468. Alt is the name of a modier bit that a keyboard input character may have. To make a character Alt, type it while holding down the ALT key. Such characters are given names that start with Alt- (usually written A- for short). (Note that many terminals have a key labeled ALT that is really a META key.) See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. See [Glossary - Numeric Argument], page 571. An ASCII character is either an ASCII control character or an ASCII printing character. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11.
ASCII control character An ASCII control character is the Control version of an upper-case

Aborting

Alt

Argument

ASCII character

letter, or the Control version of one of the characters @[\]^_?.

ASCII printing character ASCII letters, digits, space, and the following punctuation characters:

!@#$%^&*()_-+=|\~{}[]:;"<>,.?/. Auto Fill Mode Auto Fill mode is a minor mode (q.v.) in which text that you insert is automatically broken into lines of a given maximum width. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. Auto Saving Auto saving is the practice of periodically saving the contents of an Emacs buer in a specially-named le, so that the information will be preserved if the buer is lost due to a system error or user error. See Section 15.5 [Auto Save], page 136. Autoloading Emacs can automatically load Lisp libraries when a Lisp program requests a function from those libraries. This is called autoloading. See Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287. Backtrace A backtrace is a trace of a series of function calls showing how a program arrived at a certain point. It is used mainly for nding and correcting bugs (q.v.). Emacs can display a backtrace when it signals an error or when you type C-g (see [Glossary - Quitting], page 573). See Section 34.3.4 [Checklist], page 475.

Glossary Backup File

556

A backup le records the contents that a le had before the current editing session. Emacs makes backup les automatically to help you track down or cancel changes you later regret making. See Section 15.3.2 [Backup], page 130. Balancing Parentheses Emacs can balance parentheses (or other matching delimiters) either manually or automatically. You do manual balancing with the commands to move over parenthetical groupings (see Section 23.4.2 [Moving by Parens], page 257). Automatic balancing works by blinking or highlighting the delimiter that matches the one you just inserted, or inserting the matching delimiter for you (see Section 23.4.3 [Matching Parens], page 258). Balanced Expressions A balanced expression is a syntactically recognizable expression, such as a symbol, number, string constant, block, or parenthesized expression in C. See Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256. Balloon Help See [Glossary - Tooltips], page 577. Base Buer A base buer is a buer whose text is shared by an indirect buer (q.v.). Bidirectional Text Some human languages, such as English, are written from left to right. Others, such as Arabic, are written from right to left. Emacs supports both of these forms, as well as any mixture of themthis is bidirectional text. See Section 19.20 [Bidirectional Editing], page 202. Bind Binding To bind a key sequence means to give it a binding (q.v.). Section 33.3.5 [Rebinding], page 454. See

A key sequence gets its meaning in Emacs by having a binding, which is a command (q.v.), a Lisp function that is run when you type that sequence. See Section 2.3 [Commands], page 12. Customization often involves rebinding a character to a dierent command function. The bindings of all key sequences are recorded in the keymaps (q.v.). See Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452. Blank lines are lines that contain only whitespace. Emacs has several commands for operating on the blank lines in the buer. See Section 4.7 [Blank Lines], page 22.

Blank Lines

Bookmark

Bookmarks are akin to registers (q.v.) in that they record positions in buers to which you can return later. Unlike registers, bookmarks persist between Emacs sessions. See Section 10.7 [Bookmarks], page 68.

Glossary Border

557 A border is a thin space along the edge of the frame, used just for spacing, not for displaying anything. An Emacs frame has an ordinary external border, outside of everything including the menu bar, plus an internal border that surrounds the text windows, their scroll bars and fringes, and separates them from the menu bar and tool bar. You can customize both borders with options and resources (see Section C.9 [Borders X], page 518). Borders are not the same as fringes (q.v.). The buer is the basic editing unit; one buer corresponds to one text being edited. You normally have several buers, but at any time you are editing only one, the current buer, though several can be visible when you are using multiple windows or frames (q.v.). Most buers are visiting (q.v.) some le. See Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150.

Buer

Buer Selection History Emacs keeps a buer selection history that records how recently each Emacs buer has been selected. This is used for choosing a buer to select. See Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150. Bug A bug is an incorrect or unreasonable behavior of a program, or inaccurate or confusing documentation. Emacs developers treat bug reports, both in Emacs code and its documentation, very seriously and ask you to report any bugs you nd. See Section 34.3 [Bugs], page 473.

Button Down Event A button down event is the kind of input event (q.v.) generated right away when you press down on a mouse button. See Section 33.3.10 [Mouse Buttons], page 459. By Default See [Glossary - Default], page 560. Byte Compilation See [Glossary - Compilation], page 558. CC-MC- in the name of a character is an abbreviation for Control. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. C-M- in the name of a character is an abbreviation for Control-Meta. If your terminal lacks a real META key, you type a Control-Meta character by typing ESC and then typing the corresponding Control character. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11.

Case Conversion Case conversion means changing text from upper case to lower case or vice versa. See Section 22.6 [Case], page 223. Character Characters form the contents of an Emacs buer. Also, key sequences (q.v.) are usually made up of characters (though they may include other input events as well). See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11.

Character Set Emacs supports a number of character sets, each of which represents a particular alphabet or script. See Chapter 19 [International], page 180.

Glossary Character Terminal See [Glossary - Text Terminal], page 577. Click Event

558

A click event is the kind of input event (q.v.) generated when you press a mouse button and release it without moving the mouse. See Section 33.3.10 [Mouse Buttons], page 459. Client Clipboard See [Glossary - Server], page 575. A clipboard is a buer provided by the window system for transferring text between applications. On the X Window System, the clipboard is provided in addition to the primary selection (q.v.); on MS-Windows and Mac, the clipboard is used instead of the primary selection. See Section 9.3.1 [Clipboard], page 59.

Coding System A coding system is an encoding for representing text characters in a le or in a stream of information. Emacs has the ability to convert text to or from a variety of coding systems when reading or writing it. See Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188. Command A command is a Lisp function specially dened to be able to serve as a key binding in Emacs. When you type a key sequence (q.v.), its binding (q.v.) is looked up in the relevant keymaps (q.v.) to nd the command to run. See Section 2.3 [Commands], page 12.

Command History See [Glossary - Minibuer History], page 570. Command Name A command name is the name of a Lisp symbol that is a command (see Section 2.3 [Commands], page 12). You can invoke any command by its name using M-x (see Chapter 6 [Running Commands by Name], page 37). Comment A comment is text in a program which is intended only for humans reading the program, and which is specially marked so that it will be ignored when the program is loaded or compiled. Emacs oers special commands for creating, aligning and killing comments. See Section 23.5 [Comments], page 258.

Common Lisp Common Lisp is a dialect of Lisp (q.v.) much larger and more powerful than Emacs Lisp. Emacs provides a subset of Common Lisp in the CL package. See Section Overview in Common Lisp Extensions . Compilation Compilation is the process of creating an executable program from source code. Emacs has commands for compiling les of Emacs Lisp code (see Section Byte Compilation in the Emacs Lisp Reference

Glossary

559 Manual ) and programs in C and other languages (see Section 24.1 [Compilation], page 271).

Complete Key A complete key is a key sequence that fully species one action to be performed by Emacs. For example, X and C-f and C-x m are complete keys. Complete keys derive their meanings from being bound (q.v.) to commands (q.v.). Thus, X is conventionally bound to a command to insert X in the buer; C-x m is conventionally bound to a command to begin composing a mail message. See Section 2.2 [Keys], page 11. Completion Completion is what Emacs does when it automatically expands an abbreviation for a name into the entire name. Completion is done for minibuer (q.v.) arguments when the set of possible valid inputs is known; for example, on command names, buer names, and le names. Completion usually occurs when TAB, SPC or RET is typed. See Section 5.3 [Completion], page 29. Continuation Line When a line of text is longer than the width of the window, it normally (but see [Glossary - Truncation], page 578) takes up more than one screen line when displayed. We say that the text line is continued, and all screen lines used for it after the rst are called continuation lines. See Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23. A related Emacs feature is lling (q.v.). Control Character A control character is a character that you type by holding down the CTRL key. Some control characters also have their own keys, so that you can type them without using CTRL. For example, RET, TAB, ESC and DEL are all control characters. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. Copyleft A copyleft is a notice giving the public legal permission to redistribute and modify a program or other work of art, but requiring modied versions to carry similar permission. Copyright is normally used to keep users divided and helpless; with copyleft we turn that around to empower users and encourage them to cooperate. The particular form of copyleft used by the GNU project is called the GNU General Public License. See Appendix A [Copying], page 484. CTRL The CTRL or control key is what you hold down in order to enter a control character (q.v.). See [Glossary - C-], page 557.

Current Buer The current buer in Emacs is the Emacs buer on which most editing commands operate. You can select any Emacs buer as the current one. See Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150.

Glossary Current Line

560

The current line is the line that point is on (see Section 1.1 [Point], page 6). Current Paragraph The current paragraph is the paragraph that point is in. If point is between two paragraphs, the current paragraph is the one that follows point. See Section 22.3 [Paragraphs], page 216. Current Defun The current defun is the defun (q.v.) that point is in. If point is between defuns, the current defun is the one that follows point. See Section 23.2 [Defuns], page 250. Cursor The cursor is the rectangle on the screen which indicates the position (called point; q.v.) at which insertion and deletion takes place. The cursor is on or under the character that follows point. Often people speak of the cursor when, strictly speaking, they mean point. See Section 1.1 [Point], page 6.

Customization Customization is making minor changes in the way Emacs works, to reect your preferences or needs. It is often done by setting variables (see Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443) or faces (see Section 33.1.5 [Face Customization], page 439), or by rebinding key sequences (see Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452). Cut and Paste See [Glossary - Killing], page 568, and [Glossary - Yanking], page 579. Daemon A daemon is a standard term for a system-level process that runs in the background. Daemons are often started when the system rst starts up. When Emacs runs in daemon-mode, it runs in the background and does not open a display. You can then connect to it with the emacsclient program. See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412.

Default Argument The default for an argument is the value that will be assumed if you do not specify one. When the minibuer is used to read an argument, the default argument is used if you just type RET. See Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27. Default A default is the value that is used for a certain purpose when you do not explicitly specify a value to use.

Default Directory When you specify a le name that does not start with / or ~, it is interpreted relative to the current buers default directory. (On MS systems, le names that start with a drive letter x : are treated as absolute, not relative.) See Section 5.1 [Minibuer File], page 27.

Glossary Defun

561 A defun is a major denition at the top level in a program. The name defun comes from Lisp, where most such denitions use the construct defun. See Section 23.2 [Defuns], page 250. DEL is a character that runs the command to delete one character of text before the cursor. It is typically either the DELETE key or the BACKSPACE key, whichever one is easy to type. See Section 4.3 [Erasing], page 20. Deletion means erasing text without copying it into the kill ring (q.v.). The alternative is killing (q.v.). See Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54.

DEL

Deletion

Deletion of Files Deleting a le means erasing it from the le system. (Note that some systems use the concept of a trash can, or recycle bin, to allow you to undelete les.) See Section 15.10 [Miscellaneous File Operations], page 143. Deletion of Messages Deleting a message (in Rmail, and other mail clients) means agging it to be eliminated from your mail le. Until you expunge (q.v.) the Rmail le, you can still undelete the messages you have deleted. See Section 30.4 [Rmail Deletion], page 378. Deletion of Windows Deleting a window means eliminating it from the screen. Other windows expand to use up the space. The text that was in the window is not lost, and you can create a new window with the same dimensions as the old if you wish. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159. Directory File directories are named collections in the le system, within which you can place individual les or subdirectories. They are sometimes referred to as folders. See Section 15.7 [Directories], page 139.

Directory Local Variable A directory local variable is a local variable (q.v.) that applies to all the les within a certain directory. See Section 33.2.5 [Directory Variables], page 450. Dired Dired is the Emacs facility that displays the contents of a le directory and allows you to edit the directory, performing operations on the les in the directory. See Chapter 27 [Dired], page 329.

Disabled Command A disabled command is one that you may not run without special conrmation. The usual reason for disabling a command is that it is confusing for beginning users. See Section 33.3.11 [Disabling], page 460. Down Event Short for button down event (q.v.).

Glossary

562

Drag Event A drag event is the kind of input event (q.v.) generated when you press a mouse button, move the mouse, and then release the button. See Section 33.3.10 [Mouse Buttons], page 459. Dribble File A dribble le is a le into which Emacs writes all the characters that you type on the keyboard. Dribble les can be used to make a record for debugging Emacs bugs. Emacs does not make a dribble le unless you tell it to. See Section 34.3 [Bugs], page 473. Echo Area The echo area is the bottom line of the screen, used for echoing the arguments to commands, for asking questions, and showing brief messages (including error messages). The messages are stored in the buer *Messages* so you can review them later. See Section 1.2 [Echo Area], page 7. Echoing is acknowledging the receipt of input events by displaying them (in the echo area). Emacs never echoes single-character key sequences; longer key sequences echo only if you pause while typing them. We say that a character is electric if it is normally self-inserting (q.v.), but the current major mode (q.v.) redenes it to do something else as well. For example, some programming language major modes dene particular delimiter characters to reindent the line, or insert one or more newlines in addition to self-insertion. End of line is a character or a sequence of characters that indicate the end of a text line. On GNU and Unix systems, this is a newline (q.v.), but other systems have other conventions. See Section 19.6 [Coding Systems], page 188. Emacs can recognize several end-of-line conventions in les and convert between them. Environment Variable An environment variable is one of a collection of variables stored by the operating system, each one having a name and a value. Emacs can access environment variables set by its parent shell, and it can set variables in the environment it passes to programs it invokes. See Section C.4 [Environment], page 509. EOL Error See [Glossary - End Of Line], page 562. An error occurs when an Emacs command cannot execute in the current circumstances. When an error occurs, execution of the command stops (unless the command has been programmed to do otherwise) and Emacs reports the error by displaying an error message (q.v.).

Echoing

Electric

End Of Line

Error Message An error message is output displayed by Emacs when you ask it to do something impossible (such as, killing text forward when point is at

Glossary

563 the end of the buer), or when a command malfunctions in some way. Such messages appear in the echo area, accompanied by a beep.

ESC

ESC is a character used as a prex for typing Meta characters on keyboards lacking a META key. Unlike the META key (which, like the SHIFT key, is held down while another character is typed), you press the ESC key as you would press a letter key, and it applies to the next character you type. See [Glossary - Balanced Expression], page 556. Expunging an Rmail, Gnus newsgroup, or Dired buer is an operation that truly discards the messages or les you have previously agged for deletion. A face is a style of displaying characters. It species attributes such as font family and size, foreground and background colors, underline and strike-through, background stipple, etc. Emacs provides features to associate specic faces with portions of buer text, in order to display that text as specied by the face attributes. See Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75.

Expression Expunging

Face

File Local Variable A le local variable is a local variable (q.v.) specied in a given le. See Section 33.2.4 [File Variables], page 447, and [Glossary - Directory Local Variable], page 561. File Locking Emacs uses le locking to notice when two dierent users start to edit one le at the same time. See Section 15.3.4 [Interlocking], page 133. File Name A le name is a name that refers to a le. File names may be relative or absolute; the meaning of a relative le name depends on the current directory, but an absolute le name refers to the same le regardless of which directory is current. On GNU and Unix systems, an absolute le name starts with a slash (the root directory) or with ~/ or ~user / (a home directory). On MS-Windows/MS-DOS, an absolute le name can also start with a drive letter and a colon, e.g. d :. Some people use the term pathname for le names, but we do not; we use the word path only in the term search path (q.v.). File-Name Component A le-name component names a le directly within a particular directory. On GNU and Unix systems, a le name is a sequence of le-name components, separated by slashes. For example, foo/bar is a le name containing two components, foo and bar; it refers to the le named bar in the directory named foo in the current directory. MS-DOS/MS-Windows le names can also use backslashes to separate components, as in foo\bar.

Glossary Fill Prex

564 The ll prex is a string that should be expected at the beginning of each line when lling is done. It is not regarded as part of the text to be lled. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. Filling text means adjusting the position of line-breaks to shift text between consecutive lines, so that all the lines are approximately the same length. See Section 22.5 [Filling], page 218. Some other editors call this feature line wrapping. Font Lock is a mode that highlights parts of buer text in dierent faces, according to the syntax. Some other editors refer to this as syntax highlighting. For example, all comments (q.v.) might be colored red. See Section 11.12 [Font Lock], page 80. A fontset is a named collection of fonts. A fontset specication lists character sets and which font to use to display each of them. Fontsets make it easy to change several fonts at once by specifying the name of a fontset, rather than changing each font separately. See Section 19.14 [Fontsets], page 197.

Filling

Font Lock

Fontset

Formfeed Character See [Glossary - Page], page 572. Frame A frame is a rectangular cluster of Emacs windows. Emacs starts out with one frame, but you can create more. You can subdivide each frame into Emacs windows (q.v.). When you are using a window system (q.v.), more than one frame can be visible at the same time. See Chapter 18 [Frames], page 165. Some other editors use the term window for this, but in Emacs a window means something else.

Free Software Free software is software that gives you the freedom to share, study and modify it. Emacs is free software, part of the GNU project (q.v.), and distributed under a copyleft (q.v.) license called the GNU General Public License. See Appendix A [Copying], page 484. Free Software Foundation The Free Software Foundation (FSF) is a charitable foundation dedicated to promoting the development of free software (q.v.). For more information, see the FSF website. Fringe On a graphical display (q.v.), theres a narrow portion of the frame (q.v.) between the text area and the windows border. These fringes are used to display symbols that provide information about the buer text (see Section 11.14 [Fringes], page 83). Emacs displays the fringe using a special face (q.v.) called fringe. See Section 11.8 [Faces], page 75. See [Glossary - Free Software Foundation], page 564. FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is one standard method for retrieving remote les (q.v.).

FSF FTP

Glossary

565

Function Key A function key is a key on the keyboard that sends input but does not correspond to any character. See Section 33.3.8 [Function Keys], page 457. Global Global means independent of the current environment; in eect throughout Emacs. It is the opposite of local (q.v.). Particular examples of the use of global appear below.

Global Abbrev A global denition of an abbrev (q.v.) is eective in all major modes that do not have local (q.v.) denitions for the same abbrev. See Chapter 26 [Abbrevs], page 322. Global Keymap The global keymap (q.v.) contains key bindings that are in eect everywhere, except when overridden by local key bindings in a major modes local keymap (q.v.). See Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452. Global Mark Ring The global mark ring records the series of buers you have recently set a mark (q.v.) in. In many cases you can use this to backtrack through buers you have been editing, or in which you have found tags (see [Glossary - Tags Table], page 577). See Section 8.5 [Global Mark Ring], page 51. Global Substitution Global substitution means replacing each occurrence of one string by another string throughout a large amount of text. See Section 12.9 [Replace], page 103. Global Variable The global value of a variable (q.v.) takes eect in all buers that do not have their own local (q.v.) values for the variable. See Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443. GNU GNU is a recursive acronym for GNUs Not Unix, and it refers to a Unix-compatible operating system which is free software (q.v.). See [Manifesto], page 546. GNU is normally used with Linux as the kernel since Linux works better than the GNU kernel. For more information, see the GNU website.

Graphic Character Graphic characters are those assigned pictorial images rather than just names. All the non-Meta (q.v.) characters except for the Control (q.v.) characters are graphic characters. These include letters, digits, punctuation, and spaces; they do not include RET or ESC. In Emacs, typing a graphic character inserts that character (in ordinary editing modes). See Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17.

Glossary

566

Graphical Display A graphical display is one that can display images and multiple fonts. Usually it also has a window system (q.v.). Highlighting Highlighting text means displaying it with a dierent foreground and/or background color to make it stand out from the rest of the text in the buer. Emacs uses highlighting in several ways. It highlights the region whenever it is active (see Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47). Incremental search also highlights matches (see Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91). See [Glossary - Font Lock], page 564. Hardcopy Hardcopy means printed output. Emacs has various commands for printing the contents of Emacs buers. See Section 31.5 [Printing], page 417. HELP is the Emacs name for C-h or F1. You can type HELP at any time to ask what options you have, or to ask what a command does. See Chapter 7 [Help], page 38. Help echo is a short message displayed in the echo area (q.v.) when the mouse pointer is located on portions of display that require some explanations. Emacs displays help echo for menu items, parts of the mode line, tool-bar buttons, etc. On graphical displays, the messages can be displayed as tooltips (q.v.). See Section 18.17 [Tooltips], page 178.

HELP

Help Echo

Home Directory Your home directory contains your personal les. On a multi-user GNU or Unix system, each user has his or her own home directory. When you start a new login session, your home directory is the default directory in which to start. A standard shorthand for your home directory is ~. Similarly, ~user represents the home directory of some other user. Hook A hook is a list of functions to be called on specic occasions, such as saving a buer in a le, major mode activation, etc. By customizing the various hooks, you can modify Emacss behavior without changing any of its code. See Section 33.2.2 [Hooks], page 445. Hyper is the name of a modier bit that a keyboard input character may have. To make a character Hyper, type it while holding down the HYPER key. Such characters are given names that start with Hyper(usually written H- for short). See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. I means if and only if. This terminology comes from mathematics. Try to avoid using this term in documentation, since many are unfamiliar with it and mistake it for a typo. An inbox is a le in which mail is delivered by the operating system. Rmail transfers mail from inboxes to Rmail les in which the mail is

Hyper

Inbox

Glossary

567 then stored permanently or until explicitly deleted. See Section 30.5 [Rmail Inbox], page 379.

Incremental Search Emacs provides an incremental search facility, whereby Emacs begins searching for a string as soon as you type the rst character. As you type more characters, it renes the search. See Section 12.1 [Incremental Search], page 91. Indentation Indentation means blank space at the beginning of a line. Most programming languages have conventions for using indentation to illuminate the structure of the program, and Emacs has special commands to adjust indentation. See Chapter 21 [Indentation], page 210. Indirect Buer An indirect buer is a buer that shares the text of another buer, called its base buer (q.v.). See Section 16.6 [Indirect Buers], page 156. Info Input Event An input event represents, within Emacs, one action taken by the user on the terminal. Input events include typing characters, typing function keys, pressing or releasing mouse buttons, and switching between Emacs frames. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. Input Method An input method is a system for entering non-ASCII text characters by typing sequences of ASCII characters (q.v.). See Section 19.4 [Input Methods], page 185. Insertion Interlocking See [Glossary - File Locking], page 563. Isearch Justication Justication means adding extra spaces within lines of text in order to adjust the position of the text edges. See Section 22.5.2 [Fill Commands], page 219. Key Binding See [Glossary - Binding], page 556. Keyboard Macro Keyboard macros are a way of dening new Emacs commands from sequences of existing ones, with no need to write a Lisp program. You See [Glossary - Incremental Search], page 567. Insertion means adding text into the buer, either from the keyboard or from some other place in Emacs. Info is the hypertext format used by the GNU project for writing documentation.

Glossary

568 can use a macro to record a sequence of commands, then play them back as many times as you like. See Chapter 14 [Keyboard Macros], page 116.

Keyboard Shortcut A keyboard shortcut is a key sequence (q.v.) that invokes a command. What some programs call assigning a keyboard shortcut, Emacs calls binding a key sequence. See [Glossary - Binding], page 556. Key Sequence A key sequence (key, for short) is a sequence of input events (q.v.) that are meaningful as a single unit. If the key sequence is enough to specify one action, it is a complete key (q.v.); if it is not enough, it is a prex key (q.v.). See Section 2.2 [Keys], page 11. Keymap The keymap is the data structure that records the bindings (q.v.) of key sequences to the commands that they run. For example, the global keymap binds the character C-n to the command function next-line. See Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452.

Keyboard Translation Table The keyboard translation table is an array that translates the character codes that come from the terminal into the character codes that make up key sequences. Kill Ring The kill ring is where all text you have killed (see [Glossary - Killing], page 568) recently is saved. You can reinsert any of the killed text still in the ring; this is called yanking (q.v.). See Section 9.2 [Yanking], page 57. Killing means erasing text and saving it on the kill ring so it can be yanked (q.v.) later. Some other systems call this cutting. Most Emacs commands that erase text perform killing, as opposed to deletion (q.v.). See Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54. Killing a job (such as, an invocation of Emacs) means making it cease to exist. Any data within it, if not saved in a le, is lost. See Section 3.2 [Exiting], page 15. Language Environment Your choice of language environment species defaults for the input method (q.v.) and coding system (q.v.). See Section 19.3 [Language Environments], page 183. These defaults are relevant if you edit nonASCII text (see Chapter 19 [International], page 180). Line Wrapping See [Glossary - Filling], page 564. Lisp Lisp is a programming language. Most of Emacs is written in a dialect of Lisp, called Emacs Lisp, which is extended with special features that make it especially suitable for text editing tasks.

Killing

Killing a Job

Glossary List

569 A list is, approximately, a text string beginning with an open parenthesis and ending with the matching close parenthesis. In C mode and other non-Lisp modes, groupings surrounded by other kinds of matched delimiters appropriate to the language, such as braces, are also considered lists. Emacs has special commands for many operations on lists. See Section 23.4.2 [Moving by Parens], page 257. Local means in eect only in a particular context; the relevant kind of context is a particular function execution, a particular buer, or a particular major mode. It is the opposite of global (q.v.). Specic uses of local in Emacs terminology appear below.

Local

Local Abbrev A local abbrev denition is eective only if a particular major mode is selected. In that major mode, it overrides any global denition for the same abbrev. See Chapter 26 [Abbrevs], page 322. Local Keymap A local keymap is used in a particular major mode; the key bindings (q.v.) in the current local keymap override global bindings of the same key sequences. See Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452. Local Variable A local value of a variable (q.v.) applies to only one buer. Section 33.2.3 [Locals], page 446. MSee

M- in the name of a character is an abbreviation for META, one of the modier keys that can accompany any character. See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. M-C- in the name of a character is an abbreviation for Control-Meta; it means the same thing as C-M- (q.v.). M-x is the key sequence that is used to call an Emacs command by name. This is how you run commands that are not bound to key sequences. See Chapter 6 [Running Commands by Name], page 37. Mail means messages sent from one user to another through the computer system, to be read at the recipients convenience. Emacs has commands for composing and sending mail, and for reading and editing the mail you have received. See Chapter 29 [Sending Mail], page 367. See Chapter 30 [Rmail], page 376, for one way to read mail with Emacs.

M-CM-x

Mail

Mail Composition Method A mail composition method is a program runnable within Emacs for editing and sending a mail message. Emacs lets you select from several alternative mail composition methods. See Section 29.7 [Mail Methods], page 375. Major Mode The Emacs major modes are a mutually exclusive set of options, each of which congures Emacs for editing a certain sort of text. Ideally,

Glossary

570 each programming language has its own major mode. See Section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 204.

Margin Mark

The space between the usable part of a window (including the fringe) and the window edge. The mark points to a position in the text. It species one end of the region (q.v.), point being the other end. Many commands operate on all the text from point to the mark. Each buer has its own mark. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47. The mark ring is used to hold several recent previous locations of the mark, in case you want to move back to them. Each buer has its own mark ring; in addition, there is a single global mark ring (q.v.). See Section 8.4 [Mark Ring], page 51. The menu bar is a line at the top of an Emacs frame. It contains words you can click on with the mouse to bring up menus, or you can use a keyboard interface to navigate it. See Section 18.14 [Menu Bars], page 176. See [Glossary - Mail], page 569. Meta is the name of a modier bit which you can use in a command character. To enter a meta character, you hold down the META key while typing the character. We refer to such characters with names that start with Meta- (usually written M- for short). For example, M-< is typed by holding down META and at the same time typing < (which itself is done, on most terminals, by holding down SHIFT and typing ,). See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. On some terminals, the META key is actually labeled ALT or EDIT.

Mark Ring

Menu Bar

Message Meta

Meta Character A Meta character is one whose character code includes the Meta bit. Minibuer The minibuer is the window that appears when necessary inside the echo area (q.v.), used for reading arguments to commands. See Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27.

Minibuer History The minibuer history records the text you have specied in the past for minibuer arguments, so you can conveniently use the same text again. See Section 5.4 [Minibuer History], page 34. Minor Mode A minor mode is an optional feature of Emacs, which can be switched on or o independently of all other features. Each minor mode has a command to turn it on or o. Some minor modes are global (q.v.), and some are local (q.v.). See Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205.

Glossary

571

Minor Mode Keymap A minor mode keymap is a keymap that belongs to a minor mode and is active when that mode is enabled. Minor mode keymaps take precedence over the buers local keymap, just as the local keymap takes precedence over the global keymap. See Section 33.3.1 [Keymaps], page 452. Mode Line The mode line is the line at the bottom of each window (q.v.), giving status information on the buer displayed in that window. See Section 1.3 [Mode Line], page 8.

Modied Buer A buer (q.v.) is modied if its text has been changed since the last time the buer was saved (or since it was created, if it has never been saved). See Section 15.3 [Saving], page 128. Moving Text Moving text means erasing it from one place and inserting it in another. The usual way to move text is by killing (q.v.) it and then yanking (q.v.) it. See Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54. MULE MULE refers to the Emacs features for editing multilingual non-ASCII text using multibyte characters (q.v.). See Chapter 19 [International], page 180.

Multibyte Character A multibyte character is a character that takes up several bytes in a buer. Emacs uses multibyte characters to represent non-ASCII text, since the number of non-ASCII characters is much more than 256. See Section 19.1 [International Chars], page 180. Named Mark A named mark is a register (q.v.), in its role of recording a location in text so that you can move point to that location. See Chapter 10 [Registers], page 66. Narrowing Narrowing means creating a restriction (q.v.) that limits editing in the current buer to only a part of the text. Text outside that part is inaccessible for editing (or viewing) until the boundaries are widened again, but it is still there, and saving the le saves it all. See Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74. Control-J characters in the buer terminate lines of text and are therefore also called newlines. See [Glossary - End Of Line], page 562. nil is a value usually interpreted as a logical false. Its opposite is t, interpreted as true.

Newline nil

Numeric Argument A numeric argument is a number, specied before a command, to change the eect of the command. Often the numeric argument serves as a repeat count. See Section 4.10 [Arguments], page 25.

Glossary

572

Overwrite Mode Overwrite mode is a minor mode. When it is enabled, ordinary text characters replace the existing text after point rather than pushing it to one side. See Section 20.2 [Minor Modes], page 205. Package A package is a collection of Lisp code that you download and automatically install from within Emacs. Packages provide a convenient way to add new features. See Chapter 32 [Packages], page 430. A page is a unit of text, delimited by formfeed characters (ASCII control-L, code 014) at the beginning of a line. Some Emacs commands are provided for moving over and operating on pages. See Section 22.4 [Pages], page 217. Paragraphs are the medium-size unit of human-language text. There are special Emacs commands for moving over and operating on paragraphs. See Section 22.3 [Paragraphs], page 216. We say that certain Emacs commands parse words or expressions in the text being edited. Really, all they know how to do is nd the other end of a word or expression. Point is the place in the buer at which insertion and deletion occur. Point is considered to be between two characters, not at one character. The terminals cursor (q.v.) indicates the location of point. See Section 1.1 [Point], page 6.

Page

Paragraph

Parsing

Point

Prex Argument See [Glossary - Numeric Argument], page 571. Prex Key A prex key is a key sequence (q.v.) whose sole function is to introduce a set of longer key sequences. C-x is an example of prex key; any two-character sequence starting with C-x is therefore a legitimate key sequence. See Section 2.2 [Keys], page 11.

Primary Selection The primary selection is one particular X selection (q.v.); it is the selection that most X applications use for transferring text to and from other applications. The Emacs kill commands set the primary selection and the yank command uses the primary selection when appropriate. See Chapter 9 [Killing], page 54. Prompt A prompt is text used to ask you for input. Displaying a prompt is called prompting. Emacs prompts always appear in the echo area (q.v.). One kind of prompting happens when the minibuer is used to read an argument (see Chapter 5 [Minibuer], page 27); the echoing that happens when you pause in the middle of typing a multi-character key sequence is also a kind of prompting (see Section 1.2 [Echo Area], page 7).

Glossary

573

Query-Replace Query-replace is an interactive string replacement feature provided by Emacs. See Section 12.9.4 [Query Replace], page 106. Quitting Quitting means canceling a partially typed command or a running command, using C-g (or C-BREAK on MS-DOS). See Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468. Quoting means depriving a character of its usual special signicance. The most common kind of quoting in Emacs is with C-q. What constitutes special signicance depends on the context and on convention. For example, an ordinary character as an Emacs command inserts itself; so in this context, a special character is any character that does not normally insert itself (such as DEL, for example), and quoting it makes it insert itself as if it were not special. Not all contexts allow quoting. See Section 4.1 [Inserting Text], page 17.

Quoting

Quoting File Names Quoting a le name turns o the special signicance of constructs such as $, ~ and :. See Section 15.14 [Quoted File Names], page 146. Read-Only Buer A read-only buer is one whose text you are not allowed to change. Normally Emacs makes buers read-only when they contain text which has a special signicance to Emacs; for example, Dired buers. Visiting a le that is write-protected also makes a read-only buer. See Chapter 16 [Buers], page 150. Rectangle A rectangle consists of the text in a given range of columns on a given range of lines. Normally you specify a rectangle by putting point at one corner and putting the mark at the diagonally opposite corner. See Section 9.5 [Rectangles], page 63.

Recursive Editing Level A recursive editing level is a state in which part of the execution of a command involves asking you to edit some text. This text may or may not be the same as the text to which the command was applied. The mode line indicates recursive editing levels with square brackets ([ and ]). See Section 31.9 [Recursive Edit], page 424. Redisplay Redisplay is the process of correcting the image on the screen to correspond to changes that have been made in the text being edited. See Chapter 1 [Screen], page 6. See [Glossary - Regular Expression], page 574. The region is the text between point (q.v.) and the mark (q.v.). Many commands operate on the text of the region. See Chapter 8 [Mark], page 47.

Regexp Region

Glossary Register

574 Registers are named slots in which text, buer positions, or rectangles can be saved for later use. See Chapter 10 [Registers], page 66. A related Emacs feature is bookmarks (q.v.).

Regular Expression A regular expression is a pattern that can match various text strings; for example, a[0-9]+ matches a followed by one or more digits. See Section 12.5 [Regexps], page 97. Remote File A remote le is a le that is stored on a system other than your own. Emacs can access les on other computers provided that they are connected to the same network as your machine, and (obviously) that you have a supported method to gain access to those les. See Section 15.13 [Remote Files], page 145. Repeat Count See [Glossary - Numeric Argument], page 571. Replacement See [Glossary - Global Substitution], page 565. Restriction A buers restriction is the amount of text, at the beginning or the end of the buer, that is temporarily inaccessible. Giving a buer a nonzero amount of restriction is called narrowing (q.v.); removing a restriction is called widening (q.v.). See Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74. RET RET is a character that in Emacs runs the command to insert a newline into the text. It is also used to terminate most arguments read in the minibuer (q.v.). See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11. Reverting means returning to the original state. Emacs lets you revert a buer by re-reading its le from disk. See Section 15.4 [Reverting], page 135. Saving a buer means copying its text into the le that was visited (q.v.) in that buer. This is the way text in les actually gets changed by your Emacs editing. See Section 15.3 [Saving], page 128. A scroll window. window. systems. bar is a tall thin hollow box that appears at the side of a You can use mouse commands in the scroll bar to scroll the The scroll bar feature is supported only under windowing See Section 18.12 [Scroll Bars], page 176.

Reverting

Saving

Scroll Bar

Scrolling Searching

Scrolling means shifting the text in the Emacs window so as to see a dierent part of the buer. See Section 11.1 [Scrolling], page 70. Searching means moving point to the next occurrence of a specied string or the next match for a specied regular expression. See Chapter 12 [Search], page 91.

Glossary Search Path

575

A search path is a list of directory names, to be used for searching for les for certain purposes. For example, the variable load-path holds a search path for nding Lisp library les. See Section 24.8 [Lisp Libraries], page 287. Secondary Selection The secondary selection is one particular X selection (q.v.); some X applications can use it for transferring text to and from other applications. Emacs has special mouse commands for transferring text using the secondary selection. See Section 9.3.3 [Secondary Selection], page 61. Selected Frame The selected frame is the one your input currently operates on. See Chapter 18 [Frames], page 165. Selected Window The selected window is the one your input currently operates on. See Section 17.1 [Basic Window], page 159. Selecting a Buer Selecting a buer means making it the current (q.v.) buer. Section 16.1 [Select Buer], page 150. Selection See

Windowing systems allow an application program to specify selections whose values are text. A program can also read the selections that other programs have set up. This is the principal way of transferring text between window applications. Emacs has commands to work with the primary (q.v.) selection and the secondary (q.v.) selection, and also with the clipboard (q.v.).

Self-Documentation Self-documentation is the feature of Emacs that can tell you what any command does, or give you a list of all commands related to a topic you specify. You ask for self-documentation with the help character, C-h. See Chapter 7 [Help], page 38. Self-Inserting Character A character is self-inserting if typing that character inserts that character in the buer. Ordinary printing and whitespace characters are self-inserting in Emacs, except in certain special major modes. Sentences Server Emacs has commands for moving by or killing by sentences. See Section 22.2 [Sentences], page 215. Within Emacs, you can start a server process, which listens for connections from clients. This oers a faster alternative to starting several Emacs instances. See Section 31.4 [Emacs Server], page 412, and [Glossary - Daemon], page 560.

Glossary Sexp

576 A sexp (short for s-expression) is the basic syntactic unit of Lisp in its textual form: either a list, or Lisp atom. Sexps are also the balanced expressions (q.v.) of the Lisp language; this is why the commands for editing balanced expressions have sexp in their name. See Section 23.4.1 [Expressions], page 256.

Simultaneous Editing Simultaneous editing means two users modifying the same le at once. Simultaneous editing, if not detected, can cause one user to lose his or her work. Emacs detects all cases of simultaneous editing, and warns one of the users to investigate. See Section 15.3.4 [Simultaneous Editing], page 133. SPC Speedbar SPC is the space character, which you enter by pressing the space bar. The speedbar is a special tall frame that provides fast access to Emacs buers, functions within those buers, Info nodes, and other interesting parts of text within Emacs. See Section 18.9 [Speedbar], page 174.

Spell Checking Spell checking means checking correctness of the written form of each one of the words in a text. Emacs can use various external spellingchecker programs to check the spelling of parts of a buer via a convenient user interface. See Section 13.4 [Spelling], page 112. String A string is a kind of Lisp data object that contains a sequence of characters. Many Emacs variables are intended to have strings as values. The Lisp syntax for a string consists of the characters in the string with a " before and another " after. A " that is part of the string must be written as \" and a \ that is part of the string must be written as \\. All other characters, including newline, can be included just by writing them inside the string; however, backslash sequences as in C, such as \n for newline or \241 using an octal character code, are allowed as well.

String Substitution See [Glossary - Global Substitution], page 565. Syntax Highlighting See [Glossary - Font Lock], page 564. Syntax Table The syntax table tells Emacs which characters are part of a word, which characters balance each other like parentheses, etc. See Section Syntax Tables in The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual . Super Super is the name of a modier bit that a keyboard input character may have. To make a character Super, type it while holding down the SUPER key. Such characters are given names that start with Super(usually written s- for short). See Section 2.1 [User Input], page 11.

Glossary

577

Suspending Suspending Emacs means stopping it temporarily and returning control to its parent process, which is usually a shell. Unlike killing a job (q.v.), you can later resume the suspended Emacs job without losing your buers, unsaved edits, undo history, etc. See Section 3.2 [Exiting], page 15. TAB TAB is the tab character. In Emacs it is typically used for indentation or completion.

Tags Table A tags table is a le that serves as an index to the function denitions in one or more other les. See Section 25.3 [Tags], page 311. Termscript File A termscript le contains a record of all characters sent by Emacs to the terminal. It is used for tracking down bugs in Emacs redisplay. Emacs does not make a termscript le unless you tell it to. See Section 34.3 [Bugs], page 473. Text Text has two meanings (see Chapter 22 [Text], page 214): Data consisting of a sequence of characters, as opposed to binary numbers, executable programs, and the like. The basic contents of an Emacs buer (aside from the text properties, q.v.) are always text in this sense. Data consisting of written human language (as opposed to programs), or following the stylistic conventions of human language. Text Terminal A text terminal, or character terminal, is a display that is limited to displaying text in character units. Such a terminal cannot control individual pixels it displays. Emacs supports a subset of display features on text terminals. Text Properties Text properties are annotations recorded for particular characters in the buer. Images in the buer are recorded as text properties; they also specify formatting information. See Section 22.13.3 [Editing Format Info], page 239. Theme A theme is a set of customizations (q.v.) that give Emacs a particular appearance or behavior. For example, you might use a theme for your favorite set of faces (q.v.). The tool bar is a line (sometimes multiple lines) of icons at the top of an Emacs frame. Clicking on one of these icons executes a command. You can think of this as a graphical relative of the menu bar (q.v.). See Section 18.15 [Tool Bars], page 177. Tooltips are small windows displaying a help echo (q.v.) text, which explains parts of the display, lists useful options available via mouse clicks, etc. See Section 18.17 [Tooltips], page 178.

Tool Bar

Tooltips

Glossary Top Level

578 Top level is the normal state of Emacs, in which you are editing the text of the le you have visited. You are at top level whenever you are not in a recursive editing level (q.v.) or the minibuer (q.v.), and not in the middle of a command. You can get back to top level by aborting (q.v.) and quitting (q.v.). See Section 34.1 [Quitting], page 468.

Transposition Transposing two units of text means putting each one into the place formerly occupied by the other. There are Emacs commands to transpose two adjacent characters, words, balanced expressions (q.v.) or lines (see Section 13.2 [Transpose], page 111). Trash Can See [Glossary - Deletion of Files], page 561.

Truncation Truncating text lines in the display means leaving out any text on a line that does not t within the right margin of the window displaying it. See Section 4.8 [Continuation Lines], page 23, and [Glossary Continuation Line], page 559. TTY Undoing See [Glossary - Text Terminal], page 577. Undoing means making your previous editing go in reverse, bringing back the text that existed earlier in the editing session. See Section 13.1 [Undo], page 110. Unix is a class of multi-user computer operating systems with a long history. There are several implementations today. The GNU project (q.v.) aims to develop a complete Unix-like operating system that is free software (q.v.). A user option is a face (q.v.) or a variable (q.v.) that exists so that you can customize Emacs by setting it to a new value. See Section 33.1 [Easy Customization], page 434. Variable A variable is an object in Lisp that can store an arbitrary value. Emacs uses some variables for internal purposes, and has others (known as user options; q.v.) just so that you can set their values to control the behavior of Emacs. The variables used in Emacs that you are likely to be interested in are listed in the Variables Index in this manual (see [Variable Index], page 604). See Section 33.2 [Variables], page 443, for information on variables.

Unix

User Option

Version Control Version control systems keep track of multiple versions of a source le. They provide a more powerful alternative to keeping backup les (q.v.). See Section 25.1 [Version Control], page 292. Visiting Visiting a le means loading its contents into a buer (q.v.) where they can be edited. See Section 15.2 [Visiting], page 125.

Glossary

579

Whitespace Whitespace is any run of consecutive formatting characters (space, tab, newline, and backspace). Widening Widening is removing any restriction (q.v.) on the current buer; it is the opposite of narrowing (q.v.). See Section 11.5 [Narrowing], page 74. Emacs divides a frame (q.v.) into one or more windows, each of which can display the contents of one buer (q.v.) at any time. See Chapter 1 [Screen], page 6, for basic information on how Emacs uses the screen. See Chapter 17 [Windows], page 159, for commands to control the use of windows. Some other editors use the term window for what we call a frame (q.v.) in Emacs.

Window

Window System A window system is software that operates on a graphical display (q.v.), to subdivide the screen so that multiple applications can have their] own windows at the same time. All modern operating systems include a window system. Word Abbrev See [Glossary - Abbrev], page 555. Word Search Word search is searching for a sequence of words, considering the punctuation between them as insignicant. See Section 12.3 [Word Search], page 95. Yanking Yanking means reinserting text previously killed (q.v.). It can be used to undo a mistaken kill, or for copying or moving text. Some other systems call this pasting. See Section 9.2 [Yanking], page 57.

Key (Character) Index

580

Key (Character) Index

!
! (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

+
+ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 + (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

"
" (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

- (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

#
# (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

.
. (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

$
$ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

/ %
% % % % % % % % % % & C d g H l m R S u (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) (Dired) .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... .......................... 332 338 332 334 338 338 334 338 338 338 / (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

:
:d :e :s :v (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 336 336 336

<
< (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 < (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 < (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * ! (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . % (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . / (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . @ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-n (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-p (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEL (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . u (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 334 333 333 333 333 334 333 334 333 333 333 334 333

=
= (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

>
> (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 > (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 > (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

?
? (completion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Key (Character) Index

581
C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c @ C-r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 @ C-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 [ (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 [ (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 ] (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 { (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 } (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 8 (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-\ (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 C-\ (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C-a (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C-a (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 C-a (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 C-a (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 C-a (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-a (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 C-b (Help mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 C-b (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 C-b (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 C-b (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-b (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C-b (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 C-c (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 C-c (customization buer) . . . . . . . 438 C-c (Edit Abbrevs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 C-c (Edit Tab Stops) . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 C-c (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 C-c (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 C-c (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 C-c (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 C-d (C Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C-d (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 C-d (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 C-d (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 C-d (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 C-d (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-DEL (C Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C-DELETE (C Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C-e (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 C-e (LaTEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 C-e (Org mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 C-e (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 C-e (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C-f (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 C-f (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 C-f (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 C-f (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-f (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C-f (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 C-f C-b (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . 372 C-f C-c (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . 372 C-f C-f (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . 372

^
^ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

~
~ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

A
a A a A A A A (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . u (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . z (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 337 383 398 398 398 398

B
B (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 b (Rmail summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 b (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

C
C (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 c (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 C-/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 C-@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 C-] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 C-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 C-_ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 C-\ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 C-a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 C-a (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 C-b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 C-b (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 C-c , j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 C-c , J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 C-c , l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 C-c , SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 C-c . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 C-c . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 C-c / (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-c < (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 C-c > (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 C-c ? (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-c @ (Outline minor mode) . . . . . . . . . . 225 C-c @ C-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 C-c @ C-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 C-c @ C-M-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 C-c @ C-M-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Key (Character) Index

C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-c C-f C-f C-f C-f C-i C-i C-j C-k C-k C-k C-l C-l C-l C-l C-l C-l C-n C-n C-n C-n C-n C-n C-o C-o C-o C-p C-p C-p C-p C-p C-p C-q C-q C-q C-q C-r C-r C-r C-s C-s C-s C-s C-s C-s C-t C-t C-t C-t C-u C-u C-u C-u C-r (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . C-s (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . C-t (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . C-w (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Term mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Term mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LaTEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Term mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 372 372 372 279 227 411 227 411 234 267 349 278 227 407 234 266 279 226 378 236 408 233 227 405 266 279 226 378 408 234 254 373 227 411 279 405 234 269 278 371 230 227 405 279 230 227 236 266 279 226 404

582
C-c C-v (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-c C-v (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 C-c C-w (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 C-c C-w (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 C-c C-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 C-c C-x (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 C-c C-y (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 C-c C-z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 C-c C-z (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C-c DEL (C Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C-c DELETE (C Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C-c RET (Goto Address mode) . . . . . . . . 426 C-c RET (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 C-c TAB (SGML mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 C-c TAB (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 C-d (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 C-d (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 C-Down-Mouse-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 C-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 C-e (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 C-f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 C-f (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 C-g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 C-g (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 C-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 C-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 C-h a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 C-h b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 C-h c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 C-h C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 C-h C-\ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 C-h C-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 C-h C-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h C-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 C-h e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 C-h f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 C-h F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 C-h g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C-h h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 C-h i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 C-h I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 C-h k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 C-h K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Key (Character) Index

C-h l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 C-h L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 C-h m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 205 C-h p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 C-h P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 C-h S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 262 C-h t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 C-h v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 C-h w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 C-j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 C-j (and major modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 C-j (indenting source code) . . . . . . . . . . 253 C-j (Lisp Interaction mode) . . . . . . . . . . 290 C-j (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 C-k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 C-k (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 C-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 C-LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 C-M-% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 C-M-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 C-M-/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 C-M-@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 257 C-M-\ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 C-M-a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 C-M-b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 C-M-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 C-M-d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 C-M-d (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 C-M-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 C-M-f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 C-M-f (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 C-M-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 C-M-h (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 C-M-i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 C-M-i (customization buer) . . . . . . . . . 436 C-M-j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 C-M-k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 C-M-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 C-M-l (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 C-M-l (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 C-M-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 C-M-n (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 C-M-n (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 C-M-o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 C-M-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 C-M-p (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 C-M-p (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 C-M-q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 C-M-q (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 C-M-r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 C-M-r (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 C-M-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

583
C-M-s (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 C-M-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 C-M-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 C-M-t (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 C-M-u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 C-M-u (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 C-M-v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 C-M-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 C-M-w (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 C-M-x (Emacs Lisp mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 C-M-x (Lisp mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 C-M-x (Scheme mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 C-M-y (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 C-Mouse-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 C-Mouse-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 C-mouse-2 (mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 C-Mouse-2 (mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 C-Mouse-2 (scroll bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 C-Mouse-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 C-Mouse-3 (when menu bar is disabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 C-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 C-n (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 C-n (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 C-o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 C-o (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 C-o (Occur mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 C-o (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 C-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 C-p (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 C-p (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 C-q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 C-r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 C-RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 C-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 C-S-backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 C-S-Mouse-3 (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 C-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 C-SPC C-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 C-SPC C-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 C-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 C-t d (Image-Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 C-TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 C-u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 C-u C-/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 C-u C-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 C-u C-x C-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 C-u C-x v = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 C-u M-; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 C-u TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 C-v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 C-v (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Key (Character) Index

C-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 C-w (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 C-x # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 C-x $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 C-x ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 C-x ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 C-x + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 C-x ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 C-x < . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 C-x = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 181 C-x > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 C-x [ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 C-x [ (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 C-x [ (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 C-x ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 C-x ] (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 C-x ] (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 C-x ^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 C-x } . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 C-x 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 C-x 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 C-x 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 C-x 4 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 C-x 4 a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 C-x 4 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 C-x 4 b (Iswitchb mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 C-x 4 c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 C-x 4 C-o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 C-x 4 C-o (Iswitchb mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 158 C-x 4 d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 C-x 4 f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 C-x 4 f (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 C-x 4 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 C-x 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 C-x 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 C-x 5 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 C-x 5 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 C-x 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 C-x 5 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 C-x 5 b (Iswitchb mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 C-x 5 d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 C-x 5 f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 C-x 5 f (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 C-x 5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 C-x 5 o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 C-x 5 r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x

584
6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 6 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 6 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 6 d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 6 RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 6 s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 8 RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 a g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 a i g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 a i l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 a l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 b (Iswitchb mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 C-+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 C-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 C-= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 C-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 C-a (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 C-a C-j (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 C-a C-w (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 C-b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 C-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 C-c (customization buer) . . . . . . . 438 C-d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 C-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 C-f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 C-f (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 C-k b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 C-k C-a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 C-k C-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 C-k C-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 C-k C-f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 C-k C-i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 C-k C-k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 C-k C-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 C-k C-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 C-k e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 C-k l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 C-k n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 C-k r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 C-k RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 C-k SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 C-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 C-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 C-o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 C-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 C-q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 C-r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 C-r (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 C-s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 C-s (Custom Themes buer) . . . . . 441

Key (Character) Index

C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 C-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 C-u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 C-v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 C-v (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 C-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 C-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 C-z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 d (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ESC ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 n d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 n n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 n p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 n w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 r + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 r b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 r c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 r d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 r f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 r i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 r j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 r k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 r l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 r m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 r n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 r N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 r o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 r r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 r SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 r t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 r w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 RET c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 RET C-\ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 RET f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 RET F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 RET k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 RET p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

585
C-x RET r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 C-x RET t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 C-x RET x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 C-x RET X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 C-x RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 C-x s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 C-x SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 C-x TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 C-x TAB (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 C-x u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 C-x v + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 C-x v = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 C-x v ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 C-x v d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 C-x v D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 C-x v g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 C-x v i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 C-x v l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 C-x v u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 C-x v v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 C-x w b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 C-x w h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 C-x w i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 C-x w l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 C-x w r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 C-x z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 C-y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 C-y (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 C-z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 C-z (X windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

D
d (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 d (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 D (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 D (GDB Breakpoints buer) . . . . . . . . . . 283 D (GDB speedbar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 d (GDB threads buer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 d (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 DEL (and major modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 DEL (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 DEL (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 DEL (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 DEL (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . 399 DEL (programming modes) . . . . . . . . . . . 249 DEL (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 DEL (View mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 DOWN (minibuer history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Key (Character) Index

586
i w (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 i y (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

E
e (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 e (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 e (View mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ESC ESC ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

J
j (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 j (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

F
f (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 f (GDB threads buer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 f (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 F10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 F10 (MS-Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 F2 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F2 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F2 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F2 d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F2 RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F2 s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

K
k (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 k (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

L
l (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 L (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 l (GDB threads buer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 l (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 L (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 l (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

G
g G g g g g g g (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . char (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . d (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 336 381 356 348 348 357 348

M
m (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 M (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 m (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 M (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 m (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 M-! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 M-$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 M-$ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 M-% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 M-% (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 M-& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 M- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 M-* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 M-, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 M-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 M-- M-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 M-- M-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 M-- M-u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 M-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 M-/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 M-: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 M-; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 M-< . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-< (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 M-< (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 M-<down> (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

H
h (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 H (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 h (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 HOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

I
i i i i i i i (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 381 362 363 363 362 362

Key (Character) Index

M-<left> (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 M-<right> (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 M-<up> (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 M-= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 M-= (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 M-= (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 M-> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-> (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 M-> (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 M-? (Nro mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 M-? (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 M-@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 215 M-^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 M- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 M-{ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 M-{ (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 M-{ (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 M-} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 M-} (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 M-} (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 M-\ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 M-| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 M-~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 M-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 M-a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 M-a (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 M-a (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 M-b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 214 M-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 M-d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 M-DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 M-DEL (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 M-Drag-Mouse-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 M-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 M-e (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 M-e (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 M-e (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 M-f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 214 M-g g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-g M-g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-g M-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 M-g n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 M-h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 M-i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 M-j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 M-j b (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 M-j c (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 M-j l (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 M-j r (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 M-j u (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 M-k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 M-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

587
M-LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 M-m (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 M-Mouse-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 M-Mouse-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 M-Mouse-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 M-n (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 M-n (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 M-n (Man mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 M-n (minibuer history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 M-n (Nro mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 M-n (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 M-n (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 M-o b (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 M-o d (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 M-o i (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 M-o l (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 M-o M-s (Text mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 M-o o (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 M-o u (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 M-p (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 M-p (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 M-p (Man mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 M-p (minibuer history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 M-p (Nro mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 M-p (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 M-p (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 M-q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 M-q (C mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 M-r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-r (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 M-r (minibuer history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 M-r (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 M-RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M-S (Enriched mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 M-s (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . 399 M-s (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 M-s (minibuer history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 M-s (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 M-s a C-s (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 M-s a M-C-s (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 M-s C-e (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . 94 M-s f C-s (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 M-s f M-C-s (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 M-s o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 M-s w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 M-SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 M-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 M-TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 M-TAB (customization buer) . . . . . . . . . 436 M-TAB (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 M-TAB (Text mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Key (Character) Index

M-u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 M-v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 M-v (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 M-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 M-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 M-y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 M-y (Incremental search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 M-z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Mouse-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Mouse-1 (mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Mouse-1 (on buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Mouse-1 (scroll bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Mouse-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Mouse-2 (GDB Breakpoints buer) . . . 283 Mouse-2 (mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Mouse-2 (on buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Mouse-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Mouse-3 (mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Q q q q Q q q q

588
(Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 (Rmail summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 (Rmail summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 (VC Directory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 (View mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

R
R (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 r (GDB threads buer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 r (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 RET (completion in minibuer) . . . . . . . . 31 RET (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 RET (GDB Breakpoints buer) . . . . . . . 283 RET (GDB speedbar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 RET (Help mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 RET (Occur mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 RET (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

N
n (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 n (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 n (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 n (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

S
s (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 S (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 s (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 S (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 s (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 s (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 s (View mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 S-Mouse-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 S-Mouse-3 (FFAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 S-TAB (customization buer) . . . . . . . . . 435 S-TAB (Help mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 S-TAB (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 SPC (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 SPC (completion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 SPC (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 SPC (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 SPC (GDB Breakpoints buer) . . . . . . . 283 SPC (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 SPC (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . 399 SPC (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 SPC (View mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

O
o o O o o (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Occur mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 332 336 108 382

P
p (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 P (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 p (DocView mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 p (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 p (Gnus Summary mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 p (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 p d (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 PageDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 PageUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Q
q (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 q (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

T
t (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 350 t (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Key (Character) Index

T (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 t (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 TAB (and major modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 TAB (completion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30 TAB (customization buer) . . . . . . . . . . . 435 TAB (GUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 TAB (Help mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 TAB (indentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 TAB (Message mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 TAB (Org Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 TAB (programming modes) . . . . . . . . . . . 252 TAB (Shell mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 TAB (Text mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

589
UP (minibuer history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

V
v (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 v (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

W
w (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 w (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

X U
u (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 u (Dired deletion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 u (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 U (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 u (Gnus Group mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 u (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 x x X x (Calendar mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 330 337 379

Z
Z (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Command and Function Index

590

Command and Function Index

2
2C-associate-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-dissociate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-newline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-two-columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 247 247 247 247 247 auto-revert-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 auto-revert-tail-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 auto-save-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

B
back-to-indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 backward-button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 backward-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 backward-delete-char-untabify . . . . 249 backward-kill-sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 backward-kill-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 backward-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 backward-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 backward-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 backward-sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 backward-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 backward-text-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 backward-up-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 backward-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 214 balance-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 beginning-of-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 beginning-of-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 beginning-of-visual-line . . . . . . . . . . . 89 bibtex-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 binary-overwrite-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 blackbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 blink-cursor-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 bookmark-delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 bookmark-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 bookmark-insert-location . . . . . . . . . . . 69 bookmark-jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 bookmark-load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 bookmark-save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 bookmark-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 bookmark-write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 browse-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 426 browse-url-at-mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 browse-url-at-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 bs-show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 bubbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 buffer-menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 buffer-menu-other-window . . . . . . . . . . 154

5
5x5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

A
abbrev-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 abbrev-prefix-mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 abort-recursive-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 add-change-log-entry-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 add-change-log-entry-other-window, in Di mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 add-dir-local-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 add-file-local-variable . . . . . . . . . . . 448 add-file-local-variable-prop-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 add-global-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 add-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 add-mode-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 add-name-to-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 add-untranslated-filesystem . . . . . . 537 animate-birthday-present . . . . . . . . . . 428 append-next-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 append-to-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 append-to-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 append-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 apply-macro-to-region-lines . . . . . . 117 appt-activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 apropos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 apropos-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 apropos-documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 apropos-value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 apropos-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ask-user-about-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 async-shell-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 auto-compression-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 auto-fill-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

C
c-backslash-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 c-backward-conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 c-beginning-of-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Command and Function Index

c-beginning-of-statement . . . . . . . . . . c-context-line-break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-electric-backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-end-of-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-end-of-statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-fill-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-forward-conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-guess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-guess-install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-hungry-delete-backwards . . . . . . . . . c-hungry-delete-forward . . . . . . . . . . . c-indent-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, c-indent-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-indent-exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-macro-expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-mark-function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-set-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-show-syntactic-information . . . . . c-toggle-auto-newline . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-toggle-electric-state . . . . . . . . . . . c-toggle-hungry-state . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-up-conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-astro-goto-day-number . . . calendar-astro-print-day-number . . calendar-backward-day . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-backward-month . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-backward-week . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-bahai-goto-date . . . . . . . . . . calendar-bahai-print-date . . . . . . . . . calendar-beginning-of-month . . . . . . calendar-beginning-of-week . . . . . . . . calendar-beginning-of-year . . . . . . . . calendar-chinese-goto-date . . . . . . . . calendar-chinese-print-date . . . . . . calendar-coptic-goto-date . . . . . . . . . calendar-coptic-print-date . . . . . . . . calendar-count-days-region . . . . . . . . calendar-cursor-holidays . . . . . . . . . . calendar-end-of-month . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-end-of-week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-end-of-year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-ethiopic-goto-date . . . . . . calendar-ethiopic-print-date . . . . . calendar-forward-day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-forward-month . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-forward-week . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-forward-year . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-french-goto-date . . . . . . . . . calendar-french-print-date . . . . . . . . calendar-goto-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calendar-goto-day-of-year . . . . . . . . . 266 268 249 266 267 268 266 256 256 267 267 254 254 254 269 251 255 269 267 267 268 266 346 356 355 346 347 346 356 355 347 347 347 356 355 356 355 349 351 347 347 347 356 355 346 347 346 347 356 355 348 348

591
calendar-goto-today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 calendar-hebrew-goto-date . . . . . . . . . 356 calendar-hebrew-list-yahrzeits . . . 357 calendar-hebrew-print-date . . . . . . . . 355 calendar-islamic-goto-date . . . . . . . . 356 calendar-islamic-print-date . . . . . . 355 calendar-iso-goto-date . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 calendar-iso-goto-week . . . . . . . 348, 356 calendar-iso-print-date . . . . . . . . . . . 355 calendar-julian-goto-date . . . . . . . . . 356 calendar-julian-print-date . . . . . . . . 355 calendar-list-holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 calendar-lunar-phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 calendar-mark-holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 calendar-mayan-goto-long-count-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 calendar-mayan-next-calendar-rounddate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 calendar-mayan-next-haab-date . . . . 358 calendar-mayan-next-tzolkin-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 calendar-mayan-previous-haab-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 calendar-mayan-previous-tzolkin-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 calendar-mayan-print-date . . . . . . . . . 355 calendar-other-month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 calendar-persian-goto-date . . . . . . . . 356 calendar-persian-print-date . . . . . . 355 calendar-print-day-of-year . . . . . . . . 349 calendar-print-other-dates . . . . . . . . 355 calendar-redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 calendar-scroll-left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 calendar-scroll-left-three-months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 calendar-scroll-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 calendar-scroll-right-three-months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 calendar-set-date-style . . . . . . . . . . . 361 calendar-sunrise-sunset . . . . . . . . . . . 352 calendar-unmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 capitalize-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 cd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 center-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 change-log-merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 change-log-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 check-parens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 choose-completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 clean-buffer-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 clear-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 clipboard-kill-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 clipboard-kill-ring-save . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Command and Function Index

clipboard-yank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 clone-indirect-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 clone-indirect-buffer-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 column-number-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 comint-bol-or-process-mark . . . . . . . . 404 comint-continue-subjob . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comint-copy-old-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof . . . . . . 404 comint-delete-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comint-dynamic-list-filename... . . 404 comint-dynamic-list-input-ring . . . 407 comint-get-next-from-history . . . . . 407 comint-history-isearch-backwardregexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 comint-input-previous-argument . . . 407 comint-interrupt-subjob . . . . . . . . . . . 404 comint-kill-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 comint-magic-space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 comint-next-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 comint-next-prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 comint-previous-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 comint-previous-prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 comint-quit-subjob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comint-run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 comint-send-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 comint-show-maximum-output . . . . . . . . 405 comint-show-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comint-stop-subjob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comint-strip-ctrl-m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comint-truncate-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 comint-write-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 comment-dwim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 comment-indent-new-line . . . . . . . . . . . 260 comment-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 comment-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 comment-set-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 compare-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 compilation-next-error . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 compilation-next-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 compilation-previous-error . . . . . . . . 274 compilation-previous-file . . . . . . . . . 274 compile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 compile-goto-error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 completion-at-point . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 404 compose-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 compose-mail-other-frame . . . . . . . . . . 367 compose-mail-other-window . . . . . . . . . 367 copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals . . . 448 copy-dir-locals-to-file-locals-propline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 copy-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

592
copy-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 copy-file-locals-to-dir-locals . . . 451 copy-rectangle-to-register . . . . . . . . . 67 copy-to-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 copy-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 count-lines-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 count-text-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 count-words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 count-words-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 cpp-highlight-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 create-fontset-from-fontset-spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 crisp-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 cua-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Custom-save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Custom-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 customize-apropos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 customize-browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 customize-changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 customize-create-theme . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 customize-face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 customize-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 customize-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 customize-saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 customize-themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 customize-unsaved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 cwarn-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

D
dabbrev-completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 dabbrev-expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 dbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 debug_print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 decipher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 default-value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 define-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 define-global-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 define-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 define-mode-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 delete-backward-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 delete-blank-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 delete-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 delete-dir-local-variable . . . . . . . . . 451 delete-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 delete-file-local-variable . . . . . . . . 448 delete-file-local-variable-prop-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 delete-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 delete-horizontal-space . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 delete-indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Command and Function Index

delete-other-frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 delete-other-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 delete-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 delete-selection-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 delete-trailing-whitespace . . . . . . . . . 84 delete-whitespace-rectangle . . . . . . . . 64 delete-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 describe-bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 describe-categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 describe-character-set . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 describe-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 describe-copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 describe-distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 describe-function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 describe-gnu-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 describe-input-method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 describe-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 describe-key-briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 describe-language-environment . . . . 184 describe-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 205 describe-no-warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 describe-package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 430 describe-prefix-bindings . . . . . . . . . . . 45 describe-text-properties . . . . . . . . . . 239 describe-theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 describe-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 desktop-change-dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 diary-anniversary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 diary-block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 diary-cyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 diary-float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 diary-insert-anniversary-entry . . . 362 diary-insert-block-entry . . . . . . . . . . 363 diary-insert-cyclic-entry . . . . . . . . . 363 diary-insert-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 diary-insert-monthly-entry . . . . . . . . 362 diary-insert-weekly-entry . . . . . . . . . 362 diary-insert-yearly-entry . . . . . . . . . 362 diary-mail-entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 diary-mark-entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 diary-show-all-entries . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 diary-view-entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 diff-add-change-log-entries-otherwindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-apply-hunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-auto-refine-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 diff-backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

593
diff-buffer-with-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 diff-context->unified . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-ediff-patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-file-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-file-next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 diff-file-prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 diff-goto-source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-hunk-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-hunk-next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 diff-hunk-prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 diff-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 diff-refine-hunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-restrict-view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-reverse-direction . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-split-hunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 diff-unified->context . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 digit-argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 dir-locals-set-class-variables . . . 451 dir-locals-set-directory-class . . . 451 dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 dired-at-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 dired-backup-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 dired-change-marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 dired-clean-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 dired-compare-directories . . . . . . . . . 345 dired-copy-filename-as-kill . . . . . . 344 dired-create-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 dired-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 dired-display-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 dired-do-byte-compile . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-chgrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-chmod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-chown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-do-copy-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 dired-do-delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-do-flagged-delete . . . . . . . . . . . 330 dired-do-hardlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-do-hardlink-regexp . . . . . . . . . . 338 dired-do-isearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 dired-do-isearch-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . 344 dired-do-kill-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 dired-do-load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-do-query-replace-regexp . . . . 337 dired-do-redisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 dired-do-rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-do-rename-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 dired-do-search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 dired-do-shell-command . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 dired-do-symlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Command and Function Index

dired-do-symlink-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . 338 dired-do-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-downcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 dired-find-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 dired-find-file-other-window . . . . . 332 dired-flag-auto-save-files . . . . . . . . 331 dired-flag-backup-files . . . . . . . . . . . 331 dired-flag-file-deletion . . . . . . . . . . 330 dired-flag-files-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . 332 dired-flag-garbage-files . . . . . . . . . . 332 dired-goto-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 dired-hide-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-hide-subdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-isearch-filenames . . . . . . . . . . . 330 dired-isearch-filenames-regexp . . . 330 dired-mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-mark-directories . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-mark-executables . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-mark-files-containing-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 dired-mark-files-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . 334 dired-mark-subdir-files . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-mark-symlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-maybe-insert-subdir . . . . . . . . . 339 dired-mouse-find-file-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 dired-next-dirline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-next-marked-file . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-next-subdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-other-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 dired-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 329 dired-prev-dirline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-prev-marked-file . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 dired-prev-subdir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-sort-toggle-or-edit . . . . . . . . . 342 dired-toggle-marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 dired-tree-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-tree-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 dired-undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 dired-unmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-unmark-all-files . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-unmark-all-marks . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-unmark-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 dired-up-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 dired-upcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 dired-view-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 dirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 dirtrack-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 disable-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 disable-theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 display-battery-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 display-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 163

594
display-local-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 display-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 dissociated-press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 do-auto-save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 doc-view-clear-cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 doc-view-enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-first-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-goto-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-kill-proc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 doc-view-kill-proc-and-buffer . . . . 401 doc-view-last-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 doc-view-next-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-previous-page . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-reset-slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 doc-view-scroll-down-or-previouspage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-scroll-up-or-next-page . . 400 doc-view-search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-search-backward . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-set-slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-set-slice-using-mouse . . . 400 doc-view-show-tooltip . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-shrink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-toggle-display . . . . . . . . . . . 399 doctex-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 down-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 downcase-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 downcase-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 dunnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

E
edit-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 edit-kbd-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 edit-tab-stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 edt-emulation-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 edt-emulation-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 eldoc-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 electric-indent-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 electric-layout-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 electric-nroff-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 electric-pair-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 emacs-lisp-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 emacs-version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 enable-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 enable-theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 end-of-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 end-of-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 end-of-visual-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 enlarge-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Command and Function Index

enlarge-window-horizontally . . . . . . 162 enriched-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 epa-dired-do-decrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 epa-dired-do-encrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 epa-dired-do-sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 epa-dired-do-verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 eval-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 eval-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 eval-expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 eval-last-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 eval-print-last-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 eval-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 exchange-point-and-mark . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 execute-extended-command . . . . . . . . . . . 37 exit-calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 exit-recursive-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 expand-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 expand-region-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

595
find-file-other-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 find-file-other-window . . . . . . . 127, 161 find-file-read-only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 find-file-read-only-other-frame . . 170 find-grep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 find-grep-dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 find-name-dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 find-tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 find-tag-other-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 find-tag-other-window . . . . . . . . . 161, 318 find-tag-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 finder-by-keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 flush-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 flyspell-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 flyspell-prog-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 foldout-exit-fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 foldout-zoom-subtree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 follow-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 font-lock-add-keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 font-lock-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 font-lock-remove-keywords . . . . . . . . . . 81 format-decode-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 fortune-to-signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 forward-button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 forward-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 forward-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 forward-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 forward-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 forward-sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 forward-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 forward-text-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 forward-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 214 frame-configuration-to-register . . . 67 fringe-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

F
facemenu-remove-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-remove-face-props . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-set-background . . . . . . . . . . . 240 facemenu-set-bold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-set-bold-italic . . . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-set-default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-set-face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-set-foreground . . . . . . . . . . . 240 facemenu-set-italic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 facemenu-set-underline . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 ff-find-related-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ffap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 ffap-menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 ffap-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 ffap-next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 file-cache-add-directory . . . . . . . . . . 147 file-cache-minibuffer-complete . . . 147 file-name-shadow-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 filesets-add-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 filesets-init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 filesets-remove-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 fill-individual-paragraphs . . . . . . . . 221 fill-nonuniform-paragraphs . . . . . . . . 221 fill-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 fill-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 fill-region-as-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . 219 find-alternate-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 find-dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 find-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 find-file-at-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 find-file-literally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

G
gdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 gdb-delete-breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 gdb-display-disassembly-for-thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 gdb-display-locals-for-thread . . . . 283 gdb-display-registers-for-thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 gdb-display-stack-for-thread . . . . . 283 gdb-edit-value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 gdb-frames-select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 gdb-goto-breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 gdb-many-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 gdb-restore-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 gdb-select-thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 gdb-toggle-breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Command and Function Index

gdb-var-delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 getenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 global-auto-revert-mode . . . . . . . . . . . 135 global-cwarn-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 global-font-lock-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 global-hl-line-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 global-set-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 global-unset-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 global-visual-line-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 gnus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 gnus-group-exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 gnus-group-kill-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 gnus-group-list-all-groups . . . . . . . . 398 gnus-group-list-groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 gnus-group-next-unread-group . . . . . 398, 399 gnus-group-prev-unread-group . . . . . 398, 399 gnus-group-read-group . . . . . . . . . 398, 399 gnus-group-unsubscribe-current-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 gnus-summary-isearch-article . . . . . 399 gnus-summary-next-unread-article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 399 gnus-summary-prev-page . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 gnus-summary-prev-unread-article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 399 gnus-summary-search-article-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 gomoku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 goto-address-at-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 goto-address-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 goto-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 goto-followup-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 goto-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 151 goto-reply-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 gpm-mouse-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 grep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 grep-find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 gud-cont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-def . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 gud-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-gdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 gud-gdb-complete-command . . . . . . . . . . 280 gud-jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 gud-next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 gud-remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 gud-stepi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 gud-tbreak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gud-tooltip-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gud-until . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gud-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gud-watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

596
279 278 279 279 285

H
handwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 hanoi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 help-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 help-follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 help-for-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 help-go-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 help-with-tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 hi-lock-find-patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 hi-lock-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 hi-lock-write-interactive-patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 hide-body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 hide-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 hide-ifdef-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 hide-leaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 hide-other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 hide-sublevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 hide-subtree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 highlight-changes-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 highlight-lines-matching-regexp . . . 82 highlight-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 hl-line-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 how-many . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 hs-hide-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-hide-block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-hide-level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-minor-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-show-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-show-block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-show-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 html-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 htmlfontify-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

I
icalendar-export-file, icalendar-export-region . . . . . . . 365 icalendar-import-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . 365 icalendar-import-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 icomplete-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ielm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 image-dired-display-thumbs . . . . . . . . 343 image-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Command and Function Index

image-toggle-animation . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 image-toggle-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 imenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 imenu-add-menubar-index . . . . . . . . . . . 251 increase-left-margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 increment-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 indent-code-rigidly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 indent-for-tab-command . . . . . . . 210, 252 indent-line-function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 indent-pp-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 indent-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 indent-relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 indent-rigidly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Info-goto-emacs-command-node . . . . . . 41 Info-goto-emacs-key-command-node . . 40 info-lookup-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 info-lookup-symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 262 insert-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 insert-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 insert-file-literally . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 insert-kbd-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 insert-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 inverse-add-global-abbrev . . . . . . . . . 323 inverse-add-mode-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . 323 isearch-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 isearch-backward-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 isearch-del-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 isearch-forward-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 isearch-forward-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 isearch-toggle-input-method . . . . . . . . 93 isearch-toggle-specified-inputmethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 isearch-yank-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-yank-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-yank-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-yank-pop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-yank-word-or-char . . . . . . . . . . 94 iso-gtex2iso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 iso-iso2gtex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 iso-iso2tex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 iso-tex2iso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ispell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ispell-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ispell-change-dictionary . . . . . . . . . . 114 ispell-complete-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ispell-kill-ispell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ispell-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ispell-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ispell-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 iswitchb-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

597

J
jdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 jump-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 just-one-space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

K
kbd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kbd-macro-query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 keep-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 keyboard-escape-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 keyboard-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 kill-all-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 kill-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 kill-buffer-and-window . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 kill-compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 kill-emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 kill-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 kill-local-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 kill-matching-buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 kill-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 kill-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 kill-ring-save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 kill-sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 kill-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 kill-some-buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 kill-whole-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 kill-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 kmacro-add-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 kmacro-bind-to-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 kmacro-cycle-ring-next . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 kmacro-cycle-ring-previous . . . . . . . . 118 kmacro-edit-lossage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 kmacro-edit-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 kmacro-end-and-call-macro . . . . . . . . . 116 kmacro-end-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 kmacro-end-or-call-macro . . . . . . . . . . 116 kmacro-end-or-call-macro-repeat . . 118 kmacro-insert-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 kmacro-name-last-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 kmacro-set-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 kmacro-set-format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 kmacro-start-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 kmacro-start-macro-or-insert-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 kmacro-step-edit-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

L
landmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 latex-electric-env-pair-mode . . . . . 233

Command and Function Index

latex-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 left-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 left-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 lgrep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 line-number-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 linum-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 lisp-eval-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 lisp-interaction-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 list-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 list-bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 list-buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 list-character-sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 list-charset-chars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 list-coding-systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 list-colors-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 list-command-history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 list-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 list-faces-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 list-holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 list-input-methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 list-matching-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 list-packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 list-tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 load-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 load-library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 load-theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 local-set-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 local-unset-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 locate-with-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 log-edit-done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 log-edit-insert-changelog . . . . . . . . . 299 log-edit-show-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 log-edit-show-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 log-view-toggle-entry-display . . . . 303 lpr-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lpr-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lunar-phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

598
make-symbolic-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 make-variable-buffer-local . . . . . . . . 446 manual-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 mark-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 mark-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 mark-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 mark-sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 257 mark-whole-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 mark-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 215 menu-bar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 menu-bar-open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 message-goto-bcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 message-goto-cc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 message-goto-fcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 message-goto-subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 message-goto-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 message-insert-signature . . . . . . . . . . 374 message-send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 message-send-and-exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 message-tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 message-yank-original . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 message-yank-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 minibuffer-complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 minibuffer-complete-and-exit . . . . . . 31 minibuffer-complete-word . . . . . . . . . . . 30 minibuffer-inactive-mode . . . . . . . . . . . 29 mml-attach-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 mode, Glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 mode, Org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 mode, thumbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 morse-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 mouse-avoidance-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 mouse-buffer-menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 mouse-choose-completion . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mouse-save-then-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse-secondary-save-then-kill . . . . 61 mouse-set-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 mouse-set-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse-set-secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 mouse-start-secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 mouse-wheel-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 mouse-yank-at-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse-yank-primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse-yank-secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 move-beginning-of-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 move-end-of-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 move-to-window-line-top-bottom . . . . 19 mpuz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 msb-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 multi-occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 multi-occur-in-matching-buffers . . 107

M
mail-abbrev-insert-alias . . . . . . . . . . mail-add-attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mail-fill-yanked-message . . . . . . . . . . mail-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mail-text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-frame-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-frame-on-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-indirect-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-local-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 373 373 161 372 169 175 156 446

Command and Function Index

599
outline-previous-visible-heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 outline-up-heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 overwrite-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

N
narrow-to-defun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 narrow-to-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 narrow-to-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 nato-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 negative-argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 newline-and-indent . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 253 next-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 next-completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 next-error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 next-error-follow-minor-mode . . . . . 274 next-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 next-history-element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 next-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 next-logical-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 next-matching-history-element . . . . . 34 normal-erase-is-backspace-mode . . . 470 normal-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 not-modified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 nroff-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 number-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 nxml-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 236

P
package-initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 package-install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 package-install-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 paragraph-indent-minor-mode . . . . . . 224 paragraph-indent-text-mode . . . . . . . . 224 partial completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 pdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 perldb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 plain-tex-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 point-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 pong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 pop-global-mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 pop-tag-mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 pr-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 prefer-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 prepend-to-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 prepend-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 previous-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 previous-completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 previous-history-element . . . . . . . . . . . 34 previous-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 previous-logical-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 previous-matching-history-element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 print-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 print-buffer (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 print-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 print-region (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 ps-despool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ps-print-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ps-print-buffer (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . 542 ps-print-buffer-with-faces . . . . . . . . 418 ps-print-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ps-print-region-with-faces . . . . . . . . 418 ps-spool-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ps-spool-buffer (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . 542 ps-spool-buffer-with-faces . . . . . . . . 418 ps-spool-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ps-spool-region-with-faces . . . . . . . . 418 pwd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

O
occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 open-dribble-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 open-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 open-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 open-termscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Org mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 org-agenda-file-to-front . . . . . . . . . . 230 org-cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-deadline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 org-export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 org-metadown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-metaleft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-metaright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-metaup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 org-shifttab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 org-todo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 other-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 outline-backward-same-level . . . . . . 226 outline-forward-same-level . . . . . . . . 226 outline-minor-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 outline-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 outline-next-visible-heading . . . . . 226

Q
quail-set-keyboard-layout . . . . . . . . . 188 quail-show-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Command and Function Index

query-replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 query-replace-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 quietly-read-abbrev-file . . . . . . . . . . 326 quit-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 329 quoted-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 rmail-expunge-and-save . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-first-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-get-new-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-kill-label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-last-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-mime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-mime-next-item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-mime-previous-item . . . . . . . . . . rmail-mime-toggle-hidden . . . . . . . . . . rmail-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-next-labeled-message . . . . . . . . rmail-next-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-next-same-subject . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-next-undeleted-message . . . . . rmail-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-output-as-seen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-output-body-to-file . . . . . . . . . rmail-previous-labeled-message . . . rmail-previous-message . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-previous-same-subject . . . . . . rmail-previous-undeleted-message ................................. rmail-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-redecode-body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-resend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-retry-failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-show-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-correspondent . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-recipient . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-sort-by-subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-bury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-by-labels . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-by-recipients . . . . . . rmail-summary-by-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-by-senders . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-by-topic . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-summary-undelete-many . . . . . . rmail-summary-wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-toggle-header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmail-undelete-previous-message . . rot13-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

600
376 378 386 381 381 383 378 386 391 391 391 391 376 383 378 378 378 382 382 382 383 378 378 378 376 392 385 386 385 378 378 390 390 390 390 390 390 390 387 389 387 387 388 388 387 389 388 389 391 379 393

R
re-search-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 re-search-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 read-abbrev-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 recenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 recenter-top-bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 recentf-edit-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 recentf-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 recentf-save-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 recode-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 recode-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 recompile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 recover-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 recover-session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 remove-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 remove-untranslated-filesystem . . . 537 rename-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 rename-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 rename-uniquely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 repeat-complex-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 replace-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 replace-string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 report-emacs-bug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 reposition-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 reveal-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 revert-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 revert-buffer (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 revert-buffer-with-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 rgrep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 right-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 right-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 rmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 rmail-add-label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 rmail-beginning-of-message . . . . . . . . 377 rmail-bury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 rmail-continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 rmail-delete-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 rmail-delete-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 rmail-edit-current-message . . . . . . . . 393 rmail-end-of-message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 rmail-epa-decrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 rmail-expunge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Command and Function Index

run-lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 run-scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

601
set-next-selection-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 set-right-margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 set-selection-coding-system . . . . . . 194 set-selective-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 set-terminal-coding-system . . . . . . . . 196 set-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 set-visited-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 setenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 setq-default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 sgml-attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-close-tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-delete-tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-name-8bit-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-name-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-skip-tag-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-skip-tag-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-tag-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-tags-invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 sgml-validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 shadow-initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 shell-backward-command . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 shell-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 shell-command-on-region . . . . . . . . . . . 402 shell-forward-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 shell-pushd-dextract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 shell-pushd-dunique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 shell-pushd-tohome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 show-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 show-branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 show-children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 show-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 show-paren-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 show-subtree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 shrink-window-horizontally . . . . . . . . 162 shrink-window-if-larger-than-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 size-indication-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 slitex-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 smerge-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 snake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 solitaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 sort-columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 sort-fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 sort-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 sort-numeric-fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 sort-pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 sort-paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 split-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

S
save-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 save-buffers-kill-terminal . . . . . . . . . 15 save-some-buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 scheme-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 scroll-all-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 scroll-bar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 scroll-down-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 scroll-down-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 scroll-left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 scroll-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 scroll-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 scroll-up-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 scroll-up-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 sdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 search-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 search-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 select-frame-by-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 send-invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 serial-term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 server-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 server-eval-at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 server-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 set-buffer-file-coding-system . . . . 193 set-buffer-process-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 set-face-background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 set-face-foreground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 set-file-modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 set-file-name-coding-system . . . . . . 195 set-fill-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 set-fill-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 set-fontset-font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 set-frame-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 set-fringe-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 set-goal-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 set-input-method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 set-justification-center . . . . . . . . . . 241 set-justification-full . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 set-justification-left . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 set-justification-none . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 set-justification-right . . . . . . . . . . . 241 set-keyboard-coding-system . . . . . . . . 196 set-language-environment . . . . . . . . . . 183 set-left-margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 set-locale-environment . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 set-mark-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Command and Function Index

split-window-below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 split-window-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 spook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 standard-display-8bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 string-insert-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 string-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 substitute-key-definition . . . . . . . . . 464 subword-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 sunrise-sunset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 suspend-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 170 switch-to-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 switch-to-buffer-other-frame . . . . . 151 switch-to-buffer-other-window . . . . 151, 161 switch-to-completions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

602
term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 term-char-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 term-line-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 term-pager-toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 tetris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 tex-bibtex-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-close-latex-block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 tex-compile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-insert-braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 tex-insert-quote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 tex-kill-job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-latex-block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 tex-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 tex-print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-recenter-output-buffer . . . . . . . . 234 tex-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-terminate-paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . 232 tex-validate-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 tex-view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 text-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 text-scale-adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 text-scale-decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 text-scale-increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 text-scale-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 text-scale-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 thumbs-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 time-stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 timeclock-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-modeline-display . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-reread-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-when-to-leave . . . . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-workday-remaining . . . . . . 366 tmm-menubar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 toggle-debug-on-error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 toggle-enable-multibyte-characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 toggle-gdb-all-registers . . . . . . . . . . 284 toggle-input-method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 toggle-read-only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 toggle-scroll-bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 toggle-truncate-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 tool-bar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 tooltip-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 top-level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 tpu-edt-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 transient-mark-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 transpose-chars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 transpose-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

T
tab-to-tab-stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tabify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-backward-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-fixed-width-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . table-forward-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-generate-source . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-heighten-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-insert-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-insert-row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-insert-sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-narrow-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-query-dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-recognize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-recognize-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-recognize-region . . . . . . . . . . . . table-recognize-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-shorten-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-span-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-split-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-split-cell-horizontally . . . . table-split-cell-vertically . . . . . . table-unrecognize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table-unrecognize-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . table-unrecognize-region . . . . . . . . . . table-unrecognize-table . . . . . . . . . . . table-widen-cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tags-apropos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tags-loop-continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tags-query-replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tags-search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 212 244 245 242 244 246 244 243 245 245 246 244 244 246 243 243 243 243 245 244 244 244 244 244 243 243 243 243 244 320 319 319 319

Command and Function Index

transpose-sexps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 transpose-words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 tty-suppress-bold-inverse-defaultcolors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

603
view-lossage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 view-order-manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 View-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 view-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 vip-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 viper-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 visit-tags-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 visual-line-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

U
ucs-insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 uncomment-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 undigestify-rmail-message . . . . . . . . . 393 undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 undo-only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 unexpand-abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 unforward-rmail-message . . . . . . . . . . . 386 unhighlight-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 universal-argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 universal-coding-system-argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 unmorse-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 untabify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 up-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 upcase-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 upcase-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

W
wdired-change-to-wdired-mode . . . . . 343 wdired-finish-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 what-cursor-position . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 181 what-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 what-page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 where-is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 which-function-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 whitespace-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 widen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 widget-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 widget-complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 widget-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 windmove-default-keybindings . . . . . 164 windmove-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 window-configuration-to-register . . 67 winner-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 woman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 word-search-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 word-search-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 wordstar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 write-abbrev-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 write-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 write-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

V
vc-annotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 vc-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 vc-dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 vc-dir-mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 vc-dir-mark-all-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 vc-next-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 vc-print-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 vc-print-root-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 vc-pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 vc-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 vc-revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 vc-revision-other-window . . . . . . . . . . 301 vc-root-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 vi-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 view-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 view-echo-area-messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 view-emacs-debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 view-emacs-FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 view-emacs-news . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 view-emacs-problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 view-emacs-todo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 View-exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 view-external-packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 view-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 view-hello-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

X
xdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Y
yank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 yank-pop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 yank-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Z
zap-to-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 zrgrep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Variable Index

604

Variable Index
A
abbrev-all-caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 abbrev-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp . . 222 adaptive-fill-function . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 adaptive-fill-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 adaptive-fill-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 add-log-always-start-new-record . . 310 add-log-keep-changes-together . . . . 310 ange-ftp-default-user . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ange-ftp-gateway-host . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ange-ftp-generate-anonymous-password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ange-ftp-make-backup-files . . . . . . . . 146 ange-ftp-smart-gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 appt-audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-delete-window-function . . . . . . 364 appt-disp-window-function . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-display-diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-display-duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-display-format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-display-mode-line . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-message-warning-time . . . . . . . . . 364 appt-warning-time-regexp . . . . . . . . . . 364 apropos-do-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 apropos-documentation-sort-by-scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 apropos-sort-by-scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 auto-coding-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 auto-coding-functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 auto-coding-regexp-alist . . . . . . . . . . 191 auto-compression-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 auto-hscroll-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 auto-mode-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 auto-mode-case-fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 auto-revert-check-vc-info . . . . . . . . . 296 auto-revert-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 auto-save-default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 auto-save-file-name-transforms . . . 136 auto-save-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 auto-save-list-file-prefix . . . . . . . . 138 auto-save-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 auto-save-visited-file-name . . . . . . 137 backup-by-copying-when-mismatch . . 132 backup-by-copying-when-privilegedmismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 backup-directory-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 backup-enable-predicate . . . . . . . . . . . 130 battery-mode-line-format . . . . . . . . . . . 86 bdf-directory-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 bidi-display-reordering . . . . . . . . . . . 203 bidi-paragraph-direction . . . . . . . . . . 203 blink-cursor-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 blink-matching-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 blink-matching-paren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 blink-matching-paren-distance . . . . 258 bookmark-save-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 bookmark-search-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 browse-url-browser-function . . . . . . 426 browse-url-mailto-function . . . . . . . . 426 buffer-file-coding-system . . . . . . . . . 192 buffer-read-only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

C
c-default-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 c-hungry-delete-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 c-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 c-tab-always-indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 cal-html-css-default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 calendar-date-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 calendar-daylight-savings-ends . . . 365 calendar-daylight-savings-ends-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 calendar-daylight-savings-starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 calendar-daylight-time-offset . . . . 366 calendar-daylight-time-zone-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 calendar-latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 calendar-location-name . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 calendar-longitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 calendar-mark-diary-entries-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 calendar-mark-holidays-flag . . . . . . 351 calendar-remove-frame-by-deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 calendar-standard-time-zone-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 calendar-time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 calendar-view-diary-initially-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

B
backup-by-copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 backup-by-copying-when-linked . . . . 132

Variable Index
calendar-view-holidays-initiallyflag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 calendar-week-start-day . . . . . . . . . . . 347 case-fold-search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 case-replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 change-log-version-info-enabled . . 310 change-log-version-number-regexplist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 change-major-mode-with-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 clone-indirect-buffer-hook . . . . . . . . 157 coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 colon-double-space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 comint-completion-addsuffix . . . . . . 410 comint-completion-autolist . . . . . . . . 410 comint-completion-fignore . . . . . . . . . 404 comint-completion-recexact . . . . . . . . 410 comint-input-autoexpand . . . . . . . . . . . 409 comint-input-ignoredups . . . . . . . . . . . 410 comint-move-point-for-output . . . . . 409 comint-prompt-read-only . . . . . . . . . . . 410 comint-scroll-show-maximum-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 comint-use-prompt-regexp . . . . . . . . . . 406 command-history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 command-line-args . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 comment-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 comment-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 comment-indent-function . . . . . . . . . . . 261 comment-multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 comment-padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 comment-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 comment-start-skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 compare-ignore-case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 compare-ignore-whitespace . . . . . . . . . 140 compilation-auto-jump-to-first-error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 compilation-context-lines . . . . . . . . . 273 compilation-environment . . . . . . . . . . . 272 compilation-error-regexp-alist . . . 273 compilation-scroll-output . . . . . . . . . 271 compilation-skip-threshold . . . . . . . . 273 compile-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 completion-auto-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 completion-category-overrides . . . . . 33 completion-cycle-threshold . . . . . . . . . 33 completion-ignored-extensions . . . . . 33 completion-styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 confirm-kill-emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

605
confirm-nonexistent-file-or-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 crisp-override-meta-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 ctl-arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ctl-x-4-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 ctl-x-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 cua-enable-cua-keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 cua-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 current-input-method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 current-language-environment . . . . . 183 cursor-in-non-selected-windows . . . . 88 cursor-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 custom-buffer-done-kill . . . . . . . . . . . 438 custom-enabled-themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 custom-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 custom-safe-themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 custom-search-field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 custom-theme-directory . . . . . . . 441, 442 custom-theme-load-path . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

D
dabbrev-abbrev-char-regexp . . . . . . . . 327 dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 dabbrev-case-fold-search . . . . . . . . . . 327 dabbrev-case-replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 dabbrev-check-all-buffers . . . . . . . . . 326 dabbrev-ignored-buffer-regexps . . . 326 dabbrev-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 dbx-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 debug-on-event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 debug-on-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 default-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 default-input-method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 default-justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 delete-active-region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 delete-auto-save-files . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 delete-by-moving-to-trash . . . . 143, 331 delete-old-versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 desktop-clear-preserve-buffersregexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-globals-to-clear . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-restore-eager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop-save-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 diary-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 diary-mail-days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 diary-nonmarking-symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 360 diary-outlook-formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 diff-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 diff-update-on-the-fly . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Variable Index
directory-abbrev-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 directory-free-space-args . . . . . . . . . 140 directory-free-space-program . . . . . 140 dired-auto-revert-buffer . . . . . . . . . . 341 dired-chown-program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 dired-copy-preserve-time . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-dwim-target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-garbage-files-regexp . . . . . . . . 332 dired-isearch-filenames . . . . . . . . . . . 330 dired-kept-versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 dired-listing-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 dired-recursive-copies . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 dired-recursive-deletes . . . . . . . . . . . 331 dired-use-ls-dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 dirtrack-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 display-battery-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 display-buffer-reuse-frames . . . . . . 163 display-hourglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 display-time-24hr-format . . . . . . . . . . . 86 display-time-mail-directory . . . . . . . . 86 display-time-mail-face . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 display-time-mail-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 display-time-use-mail-icon . . . . . . . . . 86 dnd-open-file-other-window . . . . . . . . 176 doc-view-cache-directory . . . . . . . . . . 401 doc-view-continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 doc-view-resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 double-click-fuzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 double-click-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

606

F
ff-related-file-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 file-coding-system-alist . . . . . . . . . . 190 file-name-buffer-file-type-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 file-name-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . 195 fill-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 fill-nobreak-predicate . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 fill-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 find-file-existing-other-name . . . . 138 find-file-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 find-file-not-found-functions . . . . 127 find-file-run-dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 find-file-suppress-same-filewarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 find-file-visit-truename . . . . . . . . . . 138 find-file-wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 find-ls-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 find-tag-marker-ring-length . . . . . . 318 focus-follows-mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 foldout-mouse-modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . 229 font-lock-beginning-of-syntaxfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 font-lock-maximum-decoration . . . . . . 80 font-slant-table (MS-Windows) . . . . 544 font-weight-table (MS-Windows) . . 544

G
gdb-delete-out-of-scope . . . . . . . . . . . 285 gdb-gud-control-all-threads . . . . . . 286 gdb-many-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 gdb-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 gdb-non-stop-setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 gdb-show-changed-values . . . . . . . . . . . 285 gdb-show-threads-by-default . . . . . . 283 gdb-speedbar-auto-raise . . . . . . . . . . . 285 gdb-stopped-hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 gdb-switch-reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 gdb-switch-when-another-stopped . . 286 gdb-thread-buffer-addresses . . . . . . 283 gdb-thread-buffer-arguments . . . . . . 283 gdb-thread-buffer-locations . . . . . . 283 gdb-thread-buffer-verbose-names . . 283 gdb-use-colon-colon-notation . . . . . 285 global-cwarn-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 global-font-lock-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 global-mark-ring-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 grep-find-ignored-directories . . . . 276 grep-regexp-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 gud-gdb-command-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 gud-tooltip-echo-area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

E
echo-keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 emacs-lisp-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 enable-local-eval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 enable-local-variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 enable-multibyte-characters . . . . . . 183 enable-recursive-minibuffers . . . . . . 29 enriched-translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 eol-mnemonic-dos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 eol-mnemonic-mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 eol-mnemonic-undecided . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 eol-mnemonic-unix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 esc-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 eval-expression-debug-on-error . . . 289 eval-expression-print-length . . . . . 289 eval-expression-print-level . . . . . . 289 exec-path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 exit-language-environment-hook . . . 185 explicit-shell-file-name . . . . . . . . . . 403

Variable Index
gud-xdb-directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

607

K
kept-new-versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 kept-old-versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 keyboard-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 kill-buffer-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 kill-do-not-save-duplicates . . . . . . . . 57 kill-read-only-ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 kill-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 kill-ring-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 kill-whole-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 kmacro-ring-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

H
help-at-pt-display-when-idle . . . . . . 46 help-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 hi-lock-exclude-modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 hi-lock-file-patterns-policy . . . . . . 82 hide-ifdef-shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 highlight-nonselected-windows . . . . . 47 history-delete-duplicates . . . . . . . . . . 35 history-length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 hourglass-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-isearch-open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hs-special-modes-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hscroll-margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 hscroll-step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

L
large-file-warning-threshold . . . . . 126 latex-block-names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 latex-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 latex-run-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 latin1-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 line-move-visual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 line-number-display-limit . . . . . . . . . . 86 line-number-display-limit-width . . . 86 lisp-body-indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 lisp-indent-offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 lisp-interaction-mode-hook . . . . . . . . 249 lisp-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 list-colors-sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 list-directory-brief-switches . . . . 139 list-directory-verbose-switches . . 139 load-dangerous-libraries . . . . . . . . . . 288 load-path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 locale-charset-language-names . . . . 184 locale-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 locale-language-names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 locale-preferred-coding-systems . . 184 locate-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 lpr-add-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lpr-command (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 lpr-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lpr-headers-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lpr-headers-switches (MS-DOS) . . . 542 lpr-printer-switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lpr-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 lpr-switches (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

I
image-dired-external-viewer . . . . . . 343 imenu-auto-rescan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 imenu-sort-function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 indent-tabs-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 indicate-buffer-boundaries . . . . . . . . . 83 indicate-empty-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 inferior-lisp-program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 inhibit-eol-conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 inhibit-iso-escape-detection . . . . . 191 inhibit-startup-buffer-menu . . . . . . 505 inhibit-startup-screen . . . . . . . . . 14, 508 initial-environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 initial-scratch-message . . . . . . . . . . . 290 input-method-highlight-flag . . . . . . 186 input-method-verbose-flag . . . . . . . . . 186 insert-default-directory . . . . . . 28, 124 interpreter-mode-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 isearch-allow-scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-lazy-highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 isearch-mode-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 isearch-resume-in-command-history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ispell-complete-word-dict . . . . . . . . . 115 ispell-dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ispell-local-dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ispell-personal-dictionary . . . . . . . . 114

M
magic-fallback-mode-alist . . . . . . . . . magic-mode-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mail-citation-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mail-default-headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 208 373 369

J
jdb-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Variable Index
mail-dont-reply-to-names . . . . . . . . . . 385 mail-from-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 mail-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 mail-personal-alias-file . . . . . . . . . . 370 mail-setup-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 mail-signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 mail-signature-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 mail-user-agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 major-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 make-backup-file-name-function . . . 131 make-backup-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 make-pointer-invisible . . . . . . . . . 90, 178 Man-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 mark-even-if-inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mark-ring-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 max-mini-window-height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 menu-bar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 message-kill-buffer-on-exit . . . . . . 371 message-log-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 message-send-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 midnight-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 midnight-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 minibuffer-local-completion-map . . 454 minibuffer-local-filenamecompletion-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 minibuffer-local-filename-mustmatch-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 minibuffer-local-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 minibuffer-local-must-match-map . . 454 minibuffer-local-ns-map . . . . . . . . . . . 454 minibuffer-prompt-properties . . . . . . 78 mode-line-in-non-selected-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 mode-require-final-newline . . . . . . . . 132 mode-specific-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 mouse-1-click-in-non-selectedwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 mouse-autoselect-window . . . . . . . . . . . 161 mouse-avoidance-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 mouse-drag-copy-region . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse-highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 mouse-scroll-min-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse-wheel-follow-mouse . . . . . . . . . . 167 mouse-wheel-progressive-speed . . . . 167 mouse-wheel-scroll-amount . . . . . . . . . 167 mouse-yank-at-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

608
nobreak-char-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 normal-erase-is-backspace . . . . . . . . . 470 nroff-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ns-pop-up-frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 ns-standard-fontset-spec . . . . . . . . . . 198

O
open-paren-in-column-0-is-defunstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 org-agenda-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 org-publish-project-alist . . . . . . . . . 230 org-todo-keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 outline-level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 outline-minor-mode-prefix . . . . . . . . . 224 outline-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 outline-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 overflow-newline-into-fringe . . . . . . 83 overline-margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

P
package-archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 package-directory-list . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 package-enable-at-startup . . . . . . . . . 432 package-load-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 package-user-dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 page-delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 paragraph-separate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 paragraph-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 pdb-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 perldb-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 plain-tex-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 pop-up-frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 print-region-function (MS-DOS) . . 542 printer-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 printer-name, (MS-DOS/MS-Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 prog-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ps-font-family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-font-info-database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-font-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-landscape-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-lpr-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-lpr-command (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . . 542 ps-lpr-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-lpr-switches (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . 542 ps-multibyte-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-number-of-columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-page-dimensions-database . . . . . . 419 ps-paper-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 ps-print-color-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

N
next-error-highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 next-line-add-newlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 next-screen-context-lines . . . . . . . . . . 70

Variable Index
ps-print-header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ps-printer-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ps-printer-name (MS-DOS) . . . . . . . . . ps-use-face-background . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 419 542 419

609

S
safe-local-eval-forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 safe-local-variable-values . . . . . . . . 450 same-window-buffer-names . . . . . . . . . . 163 same-window-regexps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 save-abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 save-interprogram-paste-before-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 scheme-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 scroll-all-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 scroll-bar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 scroll-bar-width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 scroll-conservatively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 scroll-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 scroll-down-aggressively . . . . . . . . . . . 72 scroll-error-top-bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 scroll-margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 scroll-preserve-screen-position . . . 71 scroll-step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 scroll-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 scroll-up-aggressively . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 sdb-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 search-whitespace-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . 97 select-active-regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 selective-display-ellipses . . . . . . . . . 85 send-mail-function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 sendmail-coding-system . . . . . . . 193, 371 sentence-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 sentence-end-double-space . . . . . . . . . 216 sentence-end-without-period . . . . . . 216 server-host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 server-kill-new-buffers . . . . . . . . . . . 414 server-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 server-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 server-temp-file-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . 414 server-use-tcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 server-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 set-language-environment-hook . . . . 184 set-mark-command-repeat-pop . . . . . . . . 51 sgml-xml-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 shell-cd-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 shell-command-default-error-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 shell-command-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 shell-completion-execonly . . . . . . . . . 410 shell-completion-fignore . . . . . . . . . . 404 shell-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 shell-input-ring-file-name . . . . . . . . 408 shell-popd-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 shell-prompt-pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 shell-pushd-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 show-trailing-whitespace . . . . . . . . . . . 84

R
read-buffer-completion-ignore-case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 read-file-name-completion-ignorecase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 read-mail-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 read-quoted-char-radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 recenter-positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 recenter-redisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 recentf-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 require-final-newline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 resize-mini-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 revert-without-query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 rmail-automatic-folder-directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 rmail-decode-mime-charset . . . . . . . . . 191 rmail-delete-after-output . . . . . . . . . 382 rmail-delete-message-hook . . . . . . . . . 379 rmail-displayed-headers . . . . . . . . . . . 391 rmail-edit-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 rmail-enable-mime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 rmail-enable-mime-composing . . . . . . 386 rmail-file-coding-system . . . . . . . . . . 191 rmail-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 rmail-highlighted-headers . . . . . . . . . 391 rmail-ignored-headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 rmail-inbox-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 rmail-mail-new-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 rmail-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 rmail-movemail-flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 rmail-movemail-program . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 rmail-movemail-search-path . . . . . . . . 395 rmail-nonignored-headers . . . . . . . . . . 391 rmail-output-file-alist . . . . . . . . . . . 382 rmail-preserve-inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 rmail-primary-inbox-list . . . . . . . . . . 379 rmail-redisplay-summary . . . . . . . . . . . 389 rmail-remote-password . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 rmail-remote-password-required . . . 395 rmail-retry-ignored-headers . . . . . . 385 rmail-secondary-file-directory . . . 381 rmail-secondary-file-regexp . . . . . . 381 rmail-summary-line-count-flag . . . . 388 rmail-summary-window-size . . . . . . . . . 388

Variable Index
slitex-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 small-temporary-file-directory . . . 130 sort-fold-case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 sort-numeric-base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 split-height-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 split-width-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 split-window-keep-point . . . . . . . . . . . 160 standard-fontset-spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 standard-indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 suggest-key-bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

610

U
underline-minimum-offset . . . . . . . . . . . 90 undo-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 undo-outer-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 undo-strong-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 unibyte-display-via-languageenvironment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 uniquify-buffer-name-style . . . . . . . . 157 use-dialog-box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 use-file-dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 user-full-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 user-mail-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368, 463 user-mail-address, initialization . . . . 510

T
tab-always-indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 tab-stop-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 tab-width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 212 table-cell-horizontal-chars . . . . . . 242 table-cell-intersection-char . . . . . 242 table-cell-vertical-char . . . . . . . . . . 242 table-detect-cell-alignment . . . . . . 244 tags-apropos-additional-actions . . 320 tags-apropos-verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 tags-case-fold-search . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 tags-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 tags-table-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 tags-tag-face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 temporary-file-directory . . . . . . . . . . 130 term-file-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 term-setup-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 tex-bibtex-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-default-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 tex-directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-dvi-print-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-dvi-view-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-main-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-run-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tex-shell-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-start-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tex-start-options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 text-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 224 timeclock-ask-before-exiting . . . . . 366 timeclock-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 timeclock-modeline-display . . . . . . . . 366 tool-bar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 tool-bar-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 tooltip-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 track-eol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 truncate-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 truncate-partial-width-windows . . . . 89, 160

V
vc-diff-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 vc-directory-exclusion-list . . . . . . 305 vc-log-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 vc-log-show-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 vc-make-backup-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 vc-revert-show-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 version-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 visible-bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 visible-cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

W
w32-apps-modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 w32-charset-info-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 w32-get-true-file-attributes . . . . . 538 w32-lwindow-modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 w32-mouse-button-tolerance . . . . . . . . 540 w32-pass-alt-to-system . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-tosystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 w32-quote-process-args . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 w32-rwindow-modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 w32-scroll-lock-modifier . . . . . . . . . . 540 w32-standard-fontset-spec . . . . . . . . . 198 w32-swap-mouse-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 w32-use-visible-system-caret . . . . . 545 which-func-modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 whitespace-line-column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 whitespace-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 window-min-height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 window-min-width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 write-region-inhibit-fsync . . . . . . . . 132

X
x-gtk-file-dialog-help-text . . . . . . 177

Variable Index
x-gtk-show-hidden-files . . . . . . . . . . . 177 x-gtk-use-system-tooltips . . . . . . . . . 178 x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 x-select-enable-clipboard . . . . . . . . . . 60 x-select-enable-clipboard-manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 x-select-enable-primary . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

611
x-select-request-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 x-stretch-cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 x-underline-at-descent-line . . . . . . . . 90 xdb-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Y
yank-pop-change-selection . . . . . . . . . . 60

Concept Index

612

Concept Index
$
$ in le names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

8
8-bit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 8-bit input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

(
( in leftmost column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

A
abbrev le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Abbrev mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 abbrevs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 abnormal hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 aborting recursive edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 accented characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 accessible portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 accumulating scattered text . . . . . . . . . . . 61 action options (command line) . . . . . . . 505 active region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 adaptive lling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Adding to the kill ring in Dired. . . . . . . 344 addpm, MS-Windows installation program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 adjust buer face height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 aggressive scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 alignment for comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Alt key invokes menu (Windows) . . . . . 540 ALTERNATE_EDITOR environment variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ange-ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 animate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 animated images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 anonymous FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 appending kills in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 appointment notication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 apropos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 apropos search results, order by score . . 42 arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Arch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Archive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 arguments (command line) . . . . . . . . . . . 505 arguments to commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ASCII art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Asm mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 assembler mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 astronomical day numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 attached frame (of speedbar) . . . . . . . . . 174 attribute (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

*
*Messages* buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

//.-./.../. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

.
.dir-locals.el le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .emacs le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .mailrc le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .newsrc le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .timelog le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 461 370 397 366

/
// in le name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

?
? in display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

_emacs init le, MS-Windows . . . . . . . 539

~
~/.emacs le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~/.emacs.d/gtkrc le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~/.gtkrc-2.0 le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~/.Xdefaults le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~/.Xresources le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 523 523 521 521

7
7z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Concept Index
attributes of mode line, changing . . . . . . 86 Auto Compression mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Auto Fill mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Auto Save mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Auto-Revert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 auto-save for remote les . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 autoload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 autoload Lisp libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 avoiding mouse in the way of your typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 AWK mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

613
brace in column zero and fontication . . 80 braces, moving across . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 branch (version control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Brief emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Browse-URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 buer denitions index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 buer list, customizable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 buer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 158 buer size display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 buer size, maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 buer-local hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 bug tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 building programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 built-in package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 button down events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 buttons (customization buer) . . . . . . . 435 buttons at buer position . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 bypassing init and default.el le . . 508 byte code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 byte-compiling several les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 bzr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

B
back end (version control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 back reference, in regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 back reference, in regexp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 background color, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 background mode, on xterm . . . . . . . . . . 512 background syntax highlighting . . . . . . . . 81 BACKSPACE vs DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 backtrace for bug reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 backup le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 backup, and user-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 backups for remote les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Bah a calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 balanced expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 balloon help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 base buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 base direction of paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . 203 batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Bazaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 bidirectional editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 binary les, on MS-DOS/MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 binding keyboard macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 binding keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 blank lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 blank lines in programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 blinking cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 blinking cursor disable, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 body lines (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 225 bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 border color, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 borders (X Window System) . . . . . . . . . 518 boredom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

C
C editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 C mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 C++ class browser, tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 C++ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 C- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 C-c C-c (Log Edit mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 cache of le names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 calendar and HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 calendar and LaTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 calendar, rst day of week . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 call Lisp functions, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 camel case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 capitalizing words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 case conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 case in completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 case-sensitivity and completion . . . . . . . . 33 case-sensitivity and tags search . . . . . . . 319 categories of characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 cells, for text-based tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Celtic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 centralized version control . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Concept Index
change buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 change Emacs directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 change log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Change Log mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 changes, undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 changeset-based version control . . . . . . . 295 changing le group (in Dired) . . . . . . . . 336 changing le owner (in Dired) . . . . . . . . 336 changing le permissions (in Dired) . . 336 changing le time (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . 336 character set (keyboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 character set of character at point . . . . 181 character syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 characters (in text) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 characters in a certain charset . . . . . . . . 202 characters which belong to a specic language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 characters with no font glyphs . . . . . . . . . 87 characters, inserting by name or code-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 charsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 checking out les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 checking spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 checking syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Chinese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Chinese calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 choosing a major mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 choosing a minor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ciphers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 citing mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 class browser, C++ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 click events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 client frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 client-side fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 clipboard manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 coding systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 color emulation on black-and-white printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 color name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 color of window, from command line . . 515 color scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Column Number mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 columns (and rectangles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 columns (indentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 columns, splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Comint mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 comint-highlight-input face . . . . . . . . 403 comint-highlight-prompt face . . . . . . . 403 command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 command history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

614
command line arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 comments on customized settings . . . . . 438 Common Lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 compare les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 comparing 3 les (diff3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 comparing les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 compilation buer, keeping point at end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 compilation errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Compilation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 complete key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 completion (Lisp symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . 264 completion (symbol names) . . . . . . 264, 320 completion alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 completion list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 completion style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 compose character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 compressing les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . 336 compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Conf mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 conrming in the minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . 31 conicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 connecting to remote host . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 continuation line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 contributing to Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 control character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 control characters on display . . . . . . . . . . 87 converting text to upper or lower case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Coptic calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 copying les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 copying les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 copying text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 CORBA IDL mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 correcting spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 CPerl mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 crashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 create a text-based table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 creating les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 creating frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 CRiSP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 cryptanalysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 CSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 CUA key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 current buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 current function name in mode line . . . 252 cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Concept Index
cursor color, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 cursor face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 88 cursor in non-selected windows . . . . . . . . 88 cursor location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 cursor location, on MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . 536 cursor motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cursor, blinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 custom themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 custom themes, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 customizable variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 customization buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 customization groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 customization of menu face . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 customizing faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 customizing Lisp indentation . . . . . . . . . 254 customizing variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 cut and paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 cutting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 CVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 CWarn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Cyrillic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

615
DEL vs BACKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Delete Selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 deleting auto-save les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 deleting blank lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 deleting characters and lines . . . . . . . . . . . 20 deleting les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 deleting rows and column in text-based tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 deleting some backup les . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 deletion (of les) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 deletion (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Delphi mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 desktop shortcut, MS-Windows . . . . . . . 535 Devanagari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 device for Emacs terminal I/O . . . . . . . 507 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 diary le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Di Auto-Rene mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Di mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 digest message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 directional window selection . . . . . . . . . . 164 directories in buer names . . . . . . . . . . . 157 directory header lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 directory listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 directory name abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . 139 directory tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 directory where Emacs starts on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 directory-local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Dired and version control . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Dired sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Dired, and MS-Windows/MS-DOS . . . 538 Dirtrack mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 disable window system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 disabled command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 disabling remote les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 DISPLAY environment variable . . . . . . . . 514 display for Emacs frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 display name (X Window System) . . . . 514 display of buer size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 display of line number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 distributed version control . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 DNS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 doc-view-minor-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 DocTEX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 document viewer (DocView) . . . . . . . . . . 399 documentation string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 DocView mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

D
daemon, Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 day of year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 daylight saving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 DBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 dead character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 debbugs package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 debuggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 debugging Emacs, tricks and techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 decentralized version control . . . . . . . . . 295 decoding mail messages (Rmail) . . . . . . 392 decoding non-ASCII keyboard input on X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 decrease buer face height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 decrypting les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 default argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 default directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 124 default face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 default le name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 default-frame-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 default.el le, not loading . . . . . . . . . 508 default.el, the default init le . . . . . 461 dening keyboard macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 defuns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Concept Index
DOS applications, running from Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 DOS-style end-of-line display . . . . . . . . . 191 DOS-to-Unix conversion of les . . . . . . 537 double clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 double slash in le name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 down events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 downcase le names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 drag and drop, Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 drag events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 drastic changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 dribble le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 DSSSL mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Dutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 DVI le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

616
email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 emulating other editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 emulation of Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 encoding of characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 encrypted mails (reading in Rmail) . . . 392 encrypting les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 end-of-line convention, mode-line indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 end-of-line conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 end-of-line conversion on MS-DOS/MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . 536 Enriched mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 enriched text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 entering Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 environment variables for subshells . . . 403 environment variables in le names . . . 125 erasing characters and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 errors in init le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 ESC replacing META key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 escape sequences in les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 ESHELL environment variable . . . . . . . . . 403 etags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 etags program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Ethiopic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Ethiopic calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Euro sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 European character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 evaluate expression, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 exiting recursive edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 expanding subdirectories in Dired . . . . 339 expansion (of abbrevs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 expansion of C macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 expansion of environment variables . . . 125 expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 expunging (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

E
Ebrowse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 echo area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 echo area message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 echoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 EDE (Emacs Development Environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Edebug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 editable elds (customization buer) . . 435 editing binary les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 editing level, recursive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 EDITOR environment variable . . . . . . . . . 412 EDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Eldoc mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Electric Indent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Electric Pair mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Eliza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Emacs as a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Emacs Development Environment . . . . 320 EMACS environment variable . . . . . . . . . . 403 Emacs icon, a gnu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Emacs initialization le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Emacs Lisp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Emacs Lisp package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Emacs Lisp package archive . . . . . . . . . . 430 emacs-internal, coding system . . . . . . 190 EMACS_SERVER_FILE environment variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 emacsclient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 emacsclient invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 emacsclient options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 emacsclient, on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . 536 emacsclient.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 emacsclientw.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

F
face at point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 face colors, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 faces for highlighting query replace . . . 106 faces for highlighting search matches . . . 91 faces, customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 failed merges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Feedmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 FFAP minor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Concept Index
le le le le le le le le le le le le archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 comparison (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 database (locate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 name caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 names on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 538 names with non-ASCII characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 le names, quote special characters . . . 146 le ownership, and backup . . . . . . . . . . . 132 le permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 le selection dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 le selection dialog, how to disable . . . 177 le shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 le truenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 le version in change log entries . . . . . . 310 le, warning when size is large . . . . . . . . 126 le-based version control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 le-name completion, on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 les, visiting and saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 lesets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 lesets, VC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 ll prex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 lling text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 find and Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 nd Info manual by its le name . . . . . . 44 nder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 nding le at point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 nding les containing regexp matches (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 nding strings within text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 rewall, and accessing remote les . . . . 146 xing incorrectly decoded mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 agging les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 agging many les for deletion (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Flyspell mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 folding editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Follow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 font antialiasing (MS Windows) . . . . . . 544 font backend selection (MS-Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Font Lock mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

617
font name (X Window System) . . . . . . . 515 font of character at point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 font properties (MS Windows gdi backend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 font properties (MS Windows) . . . . . . . 544 font scripts (MS Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . 544 font specication (MS Windows) . . . . . 543 font Unicode subranges (MS Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 fontcong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 fonts and faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 fonts for PostScript printing . . . . . . . . . . 419 fonts for various scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 fontsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 fontsets, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 foreground color, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 formfeed character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 fortune cookies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 forwarding a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 frame size, specifying default . . . . . . . . . 175 frame title, command-line argument . . 519 frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 French Revolutionary calendar . . . . . . . 354 fringe face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 fringes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 fringes, and continuation lines . . . . . . . . . 23 fringes, and unused line indication . . . . . 84 fringes, for debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 fullheight, command-line argument . . . 517 fullscreen, command-line argument . . . 517 fullwidth, command-line argument . . . 517 function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 function, move to beginning or end . . . 251

G
gateway, and remote le access with ange-ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 GDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 GDB User Interface layout . . . . . . . . . . . 281 geometry of Emacs window . . . . . . . . . . . 517 geometry, command-line argument . . . 517 German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 getting help with keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Ghostscript, use for PostScript printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 git . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Glasses mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Concept Index
Global Auto-Revert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 global keymap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 global mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 global mark ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 global substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 glyphless characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 GNU Arch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Gnus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 GNUstep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Go Moku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Goto Address mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 graphic characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Gregorian calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 growing minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 GTK font pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 GTK styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 GTK widget classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 GTK widget names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 GTK+ resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 GUD interaction buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 GUD library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 GUD Tooltip mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 gzip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

618
highlight current line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 highlighting by matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 highlighting lines of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 highlighting matching parentheses . . . . 258 highlighting region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Hindi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 history of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 history of minibuer input . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 history reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 HOME directory on MS-Windows . . . . . . 538 home directory shorthand . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 horizontal scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 hourglass pointer display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 HTML mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 hungry deletion (C Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 hunk, di . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 hyperlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

I
iCalendar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Icomplete mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Icon mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 iconifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 icons (X Window System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 icons, toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 IDL mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ignored le names, in completion . . . . . . 33 image animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 image-dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 image-dired mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ImageMagick support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 images, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 IMAP mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 in-situ subdirectory (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . 339 inbox le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 incorrect fontication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 increase buer face height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 incremental search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 incremental search, input method interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 indentation for comments . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 indentation for programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 index of buer denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 indirect buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 indirect buers and outlines . . . . . . . . . . 228 inferior process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

H
handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 hard links (creation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 hard links (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 hard links (visiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 hard newline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 header (TEX mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 header line (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 headers (of mail message) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 heading lines (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . 225 Hebrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Hebrew calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 height of minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 help text, in GTK+ le chooser . . . . . . . 177 help, viewing web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 hex editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Hexl mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 hg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Hi Lock mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 hidden les, in GTK+ le chooser . . . . 177 Hide-ifdef mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Hideshow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 hiding subdirectories (Dired) . . . . . . . . . 340 Highlight Changes mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Concept Index
init le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 init le .emacs on MS-Windows . . . . . 539 init le, and non-ASCII characters . . . . 183 init le, not loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 initial options (command line) . . . . . . . . 505 initial-frame-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 input event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 input methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 input methods, X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 input with the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 insert le contents, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 insert Unicode character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 inserted subdirectory (Dired) . . . . . . . . . 339 inserting blank lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 inserting matching parentheses . . . . . . . 258 inserting rows and columns in text-based tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 INSIDE_EMACS environment variable . . 403 Integrated development environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 interactive highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 internal border width, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 international characters in .emacs . . . 466 international les from DOS/Windows systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 international scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Intlfonts for PostScript printing . . . . . . 419 Intlfonts package, installation . . . . . . . . 197 invisible lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 invocation (command line arguments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 invoking Emacs from Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 IPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 isearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Islamic calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ISO commercial calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ISO Latin character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 iso-ascii library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 iso-transl library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 ispell program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Iswitchb mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

619
Javascript mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 JDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Julian calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Julian day numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 just-in-time (JIT) font-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 justication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 justication in text-based tables . . . . . . 244

K
Kerberos POP authentication . . . . . . . . 396 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 key rebinding, permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 key rebinding, this session . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 key sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 keyboard input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 keyboard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 keyboard, MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 keymap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 keys stolen by window manager . . . . . . . 11 kill DOS application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 kill ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 killing buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 killing characters and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 killing Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 killing expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 killing rectangular areas of text . . . . . . . . 63 killing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

L
label (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 landmark game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 language environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Lao . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 LaTEX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Latin-1 TEX encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 lazy search highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 leaving Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 line endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 line number commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 line number display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 line spacing, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

J
Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Java class archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Java mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 145 145 266

Concept Index
line truncation, and fringes . . . . . . . . 23, 89 line wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 lines, highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 links (customization buer) . . . . . . . . . . 435 Linum mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Lisp character syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Lisp editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Lisp les byte-compiled by XEmacs . . 288 Lisp les, and multibyte operation . . . . 183 Lisp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Lisp object syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Lisp string syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Lisp symbol completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 lisp-indent-function property . . . . . 254 list commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 listing current buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 listing system fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 load init le of another user . . . . . . . . . . 509 load path for Emacs Lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 loading Lisp code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 loading Lisp libraries automatically . . . 464 loading Lisp libraries, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 loading several les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . 336 local keymap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 local variables in les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 local variables, for all les in a directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 locale, date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 locales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 location of point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 locking les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 locking-based version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 locus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Log Edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 log File, types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 logging keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 logical order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 looking for a subject in documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 lpr usage under MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 LRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 ls emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 lzh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

620
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Macintosh end-of-line conversion . . . . . 189 Macintosh key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 macro expansion in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 mail (on mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 mail aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 MAIL environment variable . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Mail mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 mail signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 mail-composition methods . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Mailclient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 MAILHOST environment variable . . . . . . . 395 mailrc le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 main border width, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 major modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 make . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Makele mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 man page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 man pages, and local le variables . . . . 448 manipulating paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 manipulating sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 manipulating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 manual pages, on MS-DOS/MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 manuals, on-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Marathi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 mark rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 mark ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 marking executable les (in Dired) . . . 333 marking many les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . 333 marking sections of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 marking subdirectories (in Dired) . . . . 333 marking symbolic links (in Dired) . . . . 333 matching parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 matching parenthesis and braces, moving to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 maximized, command-line argument . . 517 maximum buer size exceeded, error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Mayan calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Mayan calendar round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Mayan haab calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Mayan long count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Mayan tzolkin calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 memory full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 523 menu bar access using keyboard (MS-Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 menu bar appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

M
M- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 M4 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Concept Index
Menu Bar mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 menu face, no eect if customized . . . . . . 79 Mercurial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 merges, failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 merging changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 merging-based version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Message mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Message mode for sending mail . . . . . . . 375 message number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 messages saved from echo area . . . . . . . . . . 7 Meta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Meta commands and words . . . . . . . . . . 214 Metafont mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 MH mail interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Microsoft Oce le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Midnight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 MIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 MIME messages (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 27 minibuer conrmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 minibuer history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 minibuer history, searching . . . . . . . . . . . 95 minibuer keymaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 minibuffer-prompt face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 minimizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 minimizing a frame at startup . . . . . . . . 519 minor mode keymap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 minor modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 mistakes, correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 mode commands for minor modes . . . . 206 mode hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 249 mode line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mode line, 3D appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 mode line, mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 mode, Abbrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 mode, archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 mode, Auto Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 mode, Auto Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 mode, Auto Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 mode, Auto-Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 mode, AWK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 mode, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 mode, C++ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 mode, Column Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 mode, Comint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 mode, Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 mode, CORBA IDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 mode, CRiSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 mode, Delete Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mode, Di Auto-Rene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode, mode,

621
Dirtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 DocTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 DocView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Electric Indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Emacs Lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Enriched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Flyspell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Font Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Global Auto-Revert . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Goto Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 GUD Tooltip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Hexl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Hideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Iswitchb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 LaTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Log Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 major . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Mouse Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 nXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 236 Objective C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Occur Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Paragraph-Indent Text . . . . . . . . 224 Pike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Scroll Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Scroll-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Semantic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 SGML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 SliTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 TEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Transient Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Whitespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Winner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Concept Index
modes for programming languages . . . . 249 modication dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 modied (buer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 modier keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 456 Modula2 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 moon, phases of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Morse code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Motif key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 mouse avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 mouse button events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 mouse buttons (what they do) . . . . . . . . 165 mouse on mode line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 mouse pointer color, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 mouse support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 mouse wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Mouse Wheel minor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 mouse, and MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 mouse, dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 mouse, selecting text using . . . . . . . . . . . 165 move to beginning or end of function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 movemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 movemail program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 moving les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 moving inside the calendar . . . . . . . . . . . 346 moving point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 moving text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 moving the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 MS-DOS end-of-line conversion . . . . . . . 189 MS-Windows keyboard shortcuts . . . . . 539 MS-Windows, and primary selection . . . 61 MS-Windows, Emacs peculiarities . . . . 535 MSB mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 MULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 multibyte characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 multibyte operation, and Lisp les . . . . 183 multiple displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 multiple views of outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 multiple windows in Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . 159 multiple-le search and replace . . . . . . . 318 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Multithreaded debugging in GDB . . . . 286

622
net use, and printing on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 networked printers (MS-Windows) . . . . 542 newline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 newlines, hard and soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 newsreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Next Error Follow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 NFS and quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 nil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 no-conversion, coding system . . . . . . . 189 non-ASCII characters in .emacs . . . . . 466 non-ASCII keys, binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 non-breaking hyphen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 non-breaking space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 non-greedy regexp matching . . . . . . . . . . . 98 non-integral number of lines in a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 non-selected windows, mode line appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Non-stop debugging in GDB . . . . . . . . . 286 nonincremental search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 normal hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 nro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 NSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 numeric arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 nXML mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 236

O
Objective C mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Occur Edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Occur mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 octal escapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Octave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 on-line manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 open le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 open-parenthesis in leftmost column . . 250 OpenDocument le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 operating on les in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 operations on a marked region . . . . . . . . . 50 options (command line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Org agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Org exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 other editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 out of memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Outline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 outline with multiple views . . . . . . . . . . . 228 overlays at character position . . . . . . . . . 239 override character terminal color support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Overwrite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

N
narrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 narrowing, and line number display . . . . 86

Concept Index

623
Prog mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 program building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 446 Prolog mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 prompt, shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 PS le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 puzzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Python mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

P
Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Package archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 package directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 package le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 package menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 package requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 paging in Term mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 paragraph, base direction . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Paragraph-Indent Text mode . . . . . . . . . 224 paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 parentheses, displaying matches . . . . . . 258 parentheses, moving across . . . . . . . . . . . 257 parenthesis in column zero and fontication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 parenthetical groupings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 patches, editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 patches, sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 PC key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 PC selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 PDF le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 per-buer variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 per-directory local variables . . . . . . . . . . 450 Perl mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Perldb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Persian calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 phases of the moon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Pike mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 point location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 point location, on MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Pong game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 POP mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 position and size of Emacs frame . . . . . 517 PostScript le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 PostScript mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 prex arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 prex key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 preprocessor highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 pretty-printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 primary Rmail le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 primary selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 60 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 printing character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 printing les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Printing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Q
query replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 quitting (in search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 quitting Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 quoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 quoting le names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

R
rar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 raw-text, coding system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 RCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 read-only buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 read-only text, killing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 reading mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 rebinding keys, permanently . . . . . . . . . . 461 rebinding major mode keys . . . . . . . . . . . 455 rebinding mouse buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 rebinding non-ASCII keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 rectangle highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 recursive copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 recursive deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 recursive editing level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 recycle bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 redening keys, this session . . . . . . . . . . 454 redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 refreshing displayed les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 regexp search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 region highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 registered le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 registry, setting environment variables (MS-Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 registry, setting resources (MS-Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 regular expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 related les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Concept Index
reload les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 remember editing session . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 remote le access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 remote host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 remote host, debugging on . . . . . . . . . . . 277 remove indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 renaming les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 renaming les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 repeating a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 reply to a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 reporting bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 reread a le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 resizing minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 resolving conicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 resource les for GTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 restore session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 retrying a failed message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 reverse order in POP inboxes . . . . . . . . . 396 reverse video, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 revision ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 revision ID in version control . . . . . . . . . 298 RGB triplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 right-to-left text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 risky variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 RLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Rlogin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Rmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Rmail le sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 rot13 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Ruby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 runemacs.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 running a hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 running Lisp functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

624
saving text in a register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 saving window conguration in a register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SCCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Scheme mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 screen reader software, MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 script mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Scroll Bar mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Scroll-all mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 scroll-command property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 scrolling all windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 scrolling in the calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 scrolling windows together . . . . . . . . . . . 164 SDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 search and replace in multiple les . . . 318 search and replace in multiple les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 search for a regular expression . . . . . . . . . 96 search multiple les (in Dired) . . . . . . . 337 search ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 search-and-replace commands . . . . . . . . 103 searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 searching Dired buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 searching documentation eciently . . . . 38 searching in Rmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 searching multiple les via Dired . . . . . 344 secondary selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 sections of manual pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 select all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 selected buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 selected window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 selecting buers in other windows . . . . 161 selection, primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 selective display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 selective undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 self-documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Semantic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Semantic package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 sending mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 sending patches for GNU Emacs . . . . . . 481 Sendmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 server le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 server, using Emacs as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 server-side fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 set buer face height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 setting a mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 setting variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

S
saved echo area messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 saving a setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 saving le name in a register . . . . . . . . . . 68 saving les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 saving keyboard macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 saving number in a register . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 saving position in a register . . . . . . . . . . . 66 saving rectangle in a register . . . . . . . . . . 67 saving sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Concept Index
settings, how to save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 sexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 SGML mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 shadow les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 shell commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 shell commands, Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 SHELL environment variable . . . . . . . . . . 403 Shell mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 shell scripts, and local le variables . . . 448 Shell-script mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 shelves in version control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 shift-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 52 Show Paren mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 showing hidden subdirectories (Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 shy group, in regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 signing les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Simula mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 simulation of middle mouse button . . . 540 simultaneous editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 site init le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 site-start.el le, not loading . . . . . 508 site-start.el, the site startup le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 size of le, warning when visiting . . . . . 126 size of minibuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 slashes repeated in le name . . . . . . . . . . . 27 SliTEX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 slow display during scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Smerge mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Snake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 soft hyphen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 soft newline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 solitaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 sorting Dired buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 sorting Rmail le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 specic version control system . . . . . . . . 298 specify default font from the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 specify end-of-line conversion . . . . . . . . . 193 specifying fullscreen for Emacs frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 speedbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 spell-checking the active region . . . . . . . 113 spelling, checking and correcting . . . . . 112 splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 splitting columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

625
splitting table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 standard colors on a character terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 standard fontset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 start directory, MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . 535 start iconied, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 starting Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 starting Emacs on MS-Windows . . . . . . 535 startup (command line arguments) . . . 505 startup (init le) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 startup fontset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 startup message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 stashes in version control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 string substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 string syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 style (for indentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 subdirectories in Dired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 subprocesses on MS-Windows . . . . . . . . 540 subscribe groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 subshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 subtree (Outline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Subversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 summary (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 summing time intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 sunrise and sunset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 suspending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 suspicious constructions in C, C++ . . . . 269 SVN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 switch buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 switches (command line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 symbolic links (creation in Dired) . . . . 336 symbolic links (creation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 symbolic links (visiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 synchronizing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 syntax highlighting and coloring . . . . . . . 80 syntax of regexps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 system-wide packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

T
t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table for HTML and LaTeX . . . . . . . . . . table mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tags and tag tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 211 243 246 246 241 243 245 210 311

Concept Index
tags, C++ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 tags-based completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Tar mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Tcl mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 TERM environment variable . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Term mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 terminal emulators, mouse support . . . 179 terminal, serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 termscript le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Tetris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 TEX encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 TEX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 TEXEDIT environment variable . . . . . . . . 412 TEXINPUTS environment variable . . . . . . 234 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 text and binary les on MS-DOS/MS-Windows . . . . . . . . . . 536 text buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 text colors, from command line . . . . . . . 515 text cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Text mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 text properties at point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 text properties of characters . . . . . . . . . . 239 text terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text to table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 text-based tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 text-based tables, splitting cells . . . . . . 244 text/enriched MIME format . . . . . . . . . . 237 Thai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Tibetan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 time (on mode line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 time intervals, summing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 time stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 timeclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 TLS encryption (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 TODO item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 toggling marks (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Tool Bar mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Tool Bar position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Tool Bar style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 178 top level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 tower of Hanoi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 TPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 trailing whitespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Tramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Transient Mark mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 transposition of expressions . . . . . . . . . . 257 trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 triple clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

626
truenames of les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 89 Turkish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 turn multibyte support on or o . . . . . . 182 two directories (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 two-column editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 types of log le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 typos, xing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

U
unbalanced parentheses and quotes . . . 256 uncompression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 undecided, coding system . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 undeletion (Rmail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 undigestify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 undisplayable characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 undo limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 undoing window conguration changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Unibyte operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 unibyte operation, and Lisp les . . . . . . 183 Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Unicode characters, inserting . . . . . . . . . . 17 unique buer names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 unmarking les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 unsubscribe groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 untranslated le system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 unused lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 unzip archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 upcase le names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 updating Dired buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 URL, viewing in help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 URLs, activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 use-hard-newlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Usenet news . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 user name for remote le access . . . . . . 146 user option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 user options, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 UTF-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

V
variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . variables, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VC Directory buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VC lesets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VC mode line indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . verifying digital signatures on les (in Dired) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 436 304 296 296 336

Concept Index
version control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 version control log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 version control status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 VERSION_CONTROL environment variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 vertical scroll bars, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 VHDL mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 View mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 viewing web pages in help . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 views of an outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 visiting les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 visiting les, command-line argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Visual Line mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 visual order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

627
windows, synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Winner mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 word processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 word search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 word wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 89 words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 words, case conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 WordStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 work le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 working tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 WYSIWYG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

X
X cutting and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 X defaults le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 X input methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 X Logical Font Description . . . . . . . . . . . 172 X resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 X resources le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 X selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 XDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 XIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 XLFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 XML schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 xterm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

W
Watching expressions in GDB . . . . . . . . 285 wdired mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 web pages, viewing in help . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 weeks, which day they start on . . . . . . . 347 whitespace character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Whitespace mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 whitespace, trailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 wide block cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 widening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 widgets at buer position . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 width and height of Emacs frame . . . . . 517 width of the scroll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 wildcard characters in le names . . . . . 126 Windmove package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 window conguration changes, undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 window manager, keys stolen by . . . . . . . 11 windows in Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Windows system menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Y
yahrzeits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 yanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 yanking previous kills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Z
zip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Zmacs mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 zoo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145